JP2019048236A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.
A game machine includes processing execution means for executing processing and suggestion means for suggesting an amount related to processing to be executed by the processing execution means. In the first case, the processing execution means performs processing of an amount corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means, but in the second case, the amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means Execute the corresponding processing.
[Selected figure] Fig. 199

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure, control, presentation, etc. for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming and providing more healthy gaming ( For example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition to improving the interest of the game, various technical improvements have also been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as detecting and deterring illegal actions by the player and unauthorized modifications to the game machine.

JP, 2011-172988, A

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the interest of games and providing sound games.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following modes.

[Form]
Processing execution means for executing the processing;
Suggesting means for suggesting an amount related to the process to be performed by the process executing means;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
In the first case, despite performing the amount of processing corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggesting means,
In the second case, the game machine executes processing corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above aspect, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view explaining contents of various counters. It is explanatory drawing shown about the success / failure table memorize | stored in the success / failure table memory area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of suggestion production, specific end production, and specific start production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs in a waiting state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in a case where return conditions are satisfied before display of a demonstration animation is started after volume of background music becomes zero. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in case return conditions are satisfied while reducing the volume of background music. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the prior determination process. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. It is a flowchart which shows normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of change time. It is a flow chart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows condition judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows an ending time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of an end period end. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electronic switch opening and closing control processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for waiting. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly illustrating an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command corresponding | compatible process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting command corresponding | compatible process. It is a flow chart which shows pending command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. It is a flow chart which shows opening production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a standby state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a command corresponding | compatible process. It is a time chart which shows the processing which the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view showing a mode of a display of a symbol display device at the time of performing a suggestion effect in a preceding game time. It is a time chart which shows the processing which the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment performs. It is a time chart which shows the processing which the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of setting processing of an effect classification. It is an explanatory view showing object A which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object B which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object C which is an object image. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for object A. It is explanatory drawing which shows an arrangement | positioning * timing setting table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a notice effect production in which a plurality of objects are combined. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of an effect classification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the setting process of the effect classification in 6th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a display object table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AC. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for A. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for B. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AB. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for BC. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for ABC. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of an effect classification in a 6th embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a sequel effect to be executed as a reach effect. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in case an RTC production start condition is satisfied, while a symbol display device is displaying a background animation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in case an RTC production start condition is satisfied, while a symbol display device is displaying a demonstration animation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in case transition conditions are satisfied, while a symbol display device is displaying RTC effect animation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing when return conditions are satisfied, while a symbol display device is displaying RTC effect animation. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for RTC presentation performed in the sound-light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the standby state transfer process performed in the sound side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed in display side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the process which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize in 8th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining a storage area for holding effect in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter setting process for suspension production in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display level upper limit setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the upper limit value table in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation production setting process in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the holding production content determination process in 8th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining a table for holding production decision in an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view explaining a storage area for suspension effect in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows parameter setting processing for reservation production in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the holding production setting process in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the holding production content determination process in 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 1) performs. It is a storage area for pending effect in the tenth embodiment (another example 1). It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 2) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 3) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 4) performs. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface variably displayed in the symbol display apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for the jackpot lottery etc. in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the yes-no table for 1st starting opening in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the yes-no table for 2nd starting opening in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success or failure table for electric combination products open lottery used when performing the electric combination products open lottery in 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine in a 11th embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the result image in the symbol display apparatus of 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the other example of the processing which the pachinko machine in a 11th embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode of the demonstration image which the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment displays. It is an explanatory view explaining the relation between the RTC production animation and the demonstration animation in a 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entrance process for starting openings which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the ball-in process for through gates which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control processing which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for the 1st symbol display part which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the frequency | count count processing of a game which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding information shift process for 1st symbol display parts which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for the 1st symbol display part which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for the 1st symbol display part which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for high probability mode completion | finish which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for 2nd symbol display parts which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding information shift process for 2nd symbol display parts which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for 2nd symbol display parts which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for the 2nd symbol display part which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation stop process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer processing which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the opening time setting process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the number setting process of rounds which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning a prize opening opening-and-closing process which main side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball counter setting process which main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the opening limit time setting process for big winning opening which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize opening opening and closing processing which main side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows opening limit time setting processing for V winning a prize mouth which main side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the ending time setting process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of the end of the ending period which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic-support combination which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the electronic combination opening / closing process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball emission control processing which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a block diagram shown focusing on an electric composition of a sound emission control device and a display control device in a 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode switching process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows processing for exclusive use 1 game times production processing which sound sound side MPU in a 11th embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows processing for special edition 2 game times presentation which sound sound side MPU in a 11th embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for standby | waiting which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transition preparation process for 1 for 1 which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transition preparation process for 2 for 2 which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the demo transfer process for mains which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the sub demo shift process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the reset process which the sound light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for RTC presentation which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for result display which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process which display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process which display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for result display which the sound light side MPU in aspect 12 of 11th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the structure of the unit for right-handing with which the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment is provided. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the game ball which reached the unit for right-turning of a 12th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image displayed on a symbol display apparatus in high probability mode and high frequency support mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows transition of the remaining acquisition ball number in, when it wins a big hit in the big hit lottery in high probability mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the number display of remaining acquisition spheres which the sound-light side MPU 92 in a 12th embodiment performs. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a 13th embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 13th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in a 13th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main control apparatus with which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment is provided, and the structure of a test | inspection machine. FIG. 16 is an explanatory view schematically showing the contents of processing in the gaming history management chip and the inspection machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which main side MPU in 13th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side MPU in 13th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the structure of the input port provided in the main side MPU in 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the ball | bowl detection process which main side MPU in 13th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the ball-entering determination processing which main side MPU in 13th Embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view explaining signs that existence of a ball is detected. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU of a game history management chip | tip performs. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main control apparatus with which the pachinko machine of the aspect 6 of 13th Embodiment is equipped, and the structure of a test | inspection machine. FIG. 55 is an explanatory view schematically showing a content of processing in a gaming history management chip and an inspection machine of aspect 6 of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows in detail the structure of the main control apparatus with which the pachinko machine of the aspect 7 of 13th Embodiment is equipped, and the structure of a test | inspection machine. FIG. 55 is an explanatory view schematically showing an outline of processing in the gaming history management chip and the inspection machine of aspect 7 of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in aspect 11 of 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the outline | summary of the process in the main side MPU of the aspect 11 of 13th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in aspect 12 of 13th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine in a 14th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the various counters used for jackpot lottery etc. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success or failure table for 1st starting opening. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the success or failure table for the second starting opening. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the yes-no table for electric combination product opening lottery. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view for explaining a reserved game turn effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining result alerting | reporting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the prior determination process. It is a flowchart which shows jackpot / reach information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows change time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. It is a flowchart which shows normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of change time. It is a flow chart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of an end period end. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electronic switch opening and closing control processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly illustrating an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows pending | holding display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize. It is a flow chart which shows holding production setting processing. It is an explanatory view explaining a table for number display reservation number determination. It is a flowchart which shows a separate body production execution determination process. It is an explanatory view explaining a table for presentation classification determination. It is an explanatory view explaining composition of a storage area for effects. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st numerical information acquisition process. It is an explanatory view explaining composition of the table for the 1st numerical information. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a result alerting | reporting suggestion production setting process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the result alerting | reporting presentation effect pattern table for jackpots. It is explanatory drawing explaining the result alerting | reporting suggestion effect pattern table for reach. It is a flowchart which shows a normal production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the production | presentation which suggests the frequency | count of execution of result alerting | reporting suggestion production is performed in a game time. It is an explanatory view showing a situation of a display surface in case an amount of production time correlation shows time of a production performed in a game run. It is an explanatory view showing a situation of a display surface in case an amount of production time correlation shows time of a production performed in a game run. It is an explanatory view showing a situation of a display surface in case an amount of production time correlation shows time of a production performed in a game run. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode of the display surface at the time of displaying presentation time correlation amount by a gauge display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode of the display surface at the time of displaying presentation time correlation amount by a gauge display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mode of the display surface at the time of displaying presentation time correlation amount by a gauge display. It is explanatory drawing explaining the other form which suggests the presentation time correlation amount. It is explanatory drawing explaining the other form which suggests the presentation time correlation amount. It is explanatory drawing explaining the pending | holding display which suggests the information which shows the amount of presentation time correlation amount, and the information which shows the possibility of having won the big hit in the big hit lottery of the game times corresponding to a pending | holding display. It is an explanatory view explaining an example which suggests expectation level information using a production time correlation amount. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object D which can be used for advance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image (object D + image E) which combined the image E with the object D. FIG.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of gaming machine:
A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Outline of processing by gaming machine:
A4. Overview of processing in the standby state:
A5. Various processes executed in main controller:
A6. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment (an example of setting process of effect type):
F. Sixth embodiment (another example of setting process of effect type):
G. Seventh Embodiment (Configuration with RTC):
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M. Thirteenth embodiment:
N. Fourteenth embodiment:
O. Modification:
P. About the invention group extracted from each above-mentioned embodiment etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 further includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio light emission control device, a display control device, etc., are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable and a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so as not to be openable. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. An electric decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing at each game play, jackpot win, reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores gaming balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine not shown and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to the game ball emission mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower tray 21 stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 20. At the bottom of the lower tray 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the gaming ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the gaming ball is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

  In front of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a rendering operation button 24 as an operation receiving unit is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball launch by the game ball launch mechanism by pressing operation by the player, and rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided to detect the amount of movement operation based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. The game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanisms are provided on the back of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function to control the main control of the game and a function to monitor the power supply. The main control substrate is accommodated in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a symbol and an image for effect.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a emission control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control to pay out the winning balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shot control device 80 plays the game ball so as to launch a game ball whose strength corresponds to the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Control the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 54, slope connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and gently sloping so that the game balls flow downstream. The tank rails 55 having the above, the case rails 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rails 55, and the supply of gaming balls from the case rails 56 receive a predetermined number of gaming balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the dispensing device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. Between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b, a guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism are guided to the induction rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are implanted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various features such as a windmill are disposed. The nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As illustrated, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 32, ten gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as a winning ball.

  The first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 are both open upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction such that the first starting opening 33 is above the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 33, three gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with a motorized accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the motorized accessory 34a is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not win the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the motorized role thing 34a is in the open state, the gaming ball can win a prize in the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 34, four game balls are paid out as winning balls. In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not won prizes in various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the longitudinal direction. When the gaming ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the gaming ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric combination opening lottery) using the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric combination 34a shifts to the open condition in which the electric combination is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting opening 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. It is possible to win a prize at the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, even if a game ball is won in the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30, and an open / close door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main control unit 60, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state where the gaming ball can win. In the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 shifts as a result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 when the big hit is won, and the open / close door 36b is opened. In this mode, the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode in which winning of the variable winning device 36 to the big winning opening 36a is possible. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, also when the jackpot is won, it shifts to the open / close execution mode in which winning of the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as a winning ball.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first result display unit 37a and a second result display unit 37b. Each of the first result display unit 37 a and the second result display unit 37 b is configured of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. The first result display unit 37a performs variable display or display as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the segment display when a big hit lottery is triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 as a trigger. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment indicator to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The second result display unit 37b performs variable display or display as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the segment display when a big hit lottery is triggered by the winning of the second start port 34 as a trigger. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d formed of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having won the first starting opening 33 are held. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of first start ports 33 to be held according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. Further, in the present embodiment, a maximum of four gaming balls having won the second starting opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37 d displays the number of held second starting ports 34 according to the color and the combination of the LED lamps to be lighted.

  The drawing unit 38 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the motor-operated combination open lottery is triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, the drawing unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to turn on, blink, or display a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light-emitting display. When the motorized combination opening lottery ends, the drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special drawing unit 37 and the drawing unit 38 are not limited to being configured by a light emitting display by a segment display or an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT or a dot matrix display For example, it may be configured by various display devices capable of showing a lottery and a lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is constituted by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding to it. A round game is an open / close door until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. It is a game which continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game cycle is started.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The display control device 100 controls the display content of the symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  When the first result display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode to be shifted when a big hit is won. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a which is variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory view showing a symbol variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown to Fig.4 (a), the symbol display apparatus 41 is fluctuated and displayed the symbol which shows 1-8 of a number. In addition, you may employ | adopt the symbol in which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows 1-8 of a number as a symbol by which a variable display is carried out.

  FIG.4 (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG. As shown in the figure, on the display surface 41a, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has periodicity from the top to the bottom or from the bottom A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is made, and if the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, the predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the effective line L It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbols of each symbol row The aspect of the variable display of symbols, such as number, can adopt various aspects.

  Here, the gaming round is a unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 to the player It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information every game time. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result per one game cycle. After the segment display is variably displayed on any one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, it is determined in the symbol display device 41 every one game cycle. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game is also referred to as unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by the fluctuation time which is the time from when the fluctuation display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first suspension display area Ds1, the number of suspension based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of hold based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls reserved in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is up to four.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the present description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around the main control device 60, and includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by an element having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 as a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have some of the functions of the MPU 62. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of the stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operation power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected with multiple detection sensors. The main MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game balls flowing down the game area PA during the game have won the respective winning openings. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the winnings on the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and executes an electric combination opening lottery based on the winning on the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive 34b for opening and closing the electric combination 34a of the second start opening 34 , And the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36 c such that the open / close door 36 b is opened or closed. Further, when the electric combination is opened as a result of the electric combination release lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34 b such that the electric combination 34 a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Execute display control of.

  Further, on the transmission side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and an audio emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the result of the winning determination. When main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, MPU 62 of main control board 61 refers to command information storage area 63 f of ROM 63. Specifically, when a winning in the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of ten gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a winning in the first starting opening 33 is specified. In the case of winning, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a winning on the second starting opening 34 is specified, the payout of one gaming ball is dealt. A prize ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the winning balls. A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14, and controls driving of the speaker 46. And control the display control apparatus 100. In addition, when the rendering operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and the rendering operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game rendering reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100 and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, on the basis of various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. , The presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the notice effect performed in each game time, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time which is the time which the combination of the symbol is stop-displaying is constant. Therefore, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined by determining the change time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for the jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 45, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach lottery whether or not to generate a reach when changing out a symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, when determining the fluctuation time in the first result display unit 37 a and the second result display unit 37 b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric combination opening counter C4 is used for the electric combination opening lottery of whether or not the electric combination 34a of the second starting opening 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b is configured of a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the gaming ball wins sequentially to the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are chronologically stored in the holding information storage area 64b. Is stored in

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 33, and the gaming ball in the second starting opening 34 Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the player wins a prize. The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a yes / no table in the yes / no table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory view for explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as a lottery mode of the jackpot lottery. FIG. 7A shows a yes / no table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a yes / no table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, under the gaming state in which the win / fail table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for jackpot win is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, under the gaming state in which the success or failure table for the high probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for jackpot win is 20. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot winning in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot winning in the high probability mode. The number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 33, and the holding information when the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 34 It is stored in the second reserve area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, plural types of jackpots can be set by providing differences between the following three modes or modes.
(1) Aspect of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (3) of the electric role 34a of the second starting port 34 after the opening and closing execution mode ends Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening and closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning on the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so as to be relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the open / close door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one open is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings on the open / close door 36b is 10 It can be set to continue until it reaches one. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the open / close door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one open is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings on the open / close door 36b It can be set to continue until there are ten.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the case of the above-mentioned specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open / close door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the open time of the open / close door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, winning of the gaming ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the game ball may be set to be awarded.

  The number of times of opening and closing of the open / close door 36b, the open limit time for one open, and the open limit number for one open are winnings on the variable winning device 36 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode. The open mode of the open / close door 36b is optional as long as the occurrence frequency of is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a greater number of opening and closing times, a longer opening limit time for one opening, or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low frequency winning mode. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning on the variable winning device 36 may occur.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the (2) opening and closing execution mode ends, a probability change lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed using a high probability use failure table as a success or failure table A normal lottery mode for performing a jackpot lottery can be set using a low probability success or failure table. As described with reference to FIG. 7, in the case of performing the jackpot lottery using the high probability success or failure table, the jackpot is won in comparison to the case of performing the big hit lottery using the low probability success or failure table. The probability of doing is high.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the motorized role 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening and closing execution mode ends, the firing of the gaming ball continues in the same manner to the gaming area PA In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode so that the frequency at which the motorized part 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the winning combination in the electric combination opening lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode In the low frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized accessory 34a is in the open state may be set more frequently when the electronic winning combination is won, and one open time may be set longer. In the high frequency support mode, when the opening is elected and the open state of the motorized accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , May be set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum securing time for setting the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the winning of the second starting opening 34 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state which assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first start port 33 is higher than that of the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning to the second start port 34 is higher than the first start port 33. The probability of winning will increase. In the case of a high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the ball much because a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed when a winning on the second starting opening 34 occurs. Can.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time rather than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and, for example, The probability of winning the winning combination may be increased. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of types of securing time are secured in which the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after one electric combination opening lottery is performed, the low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set so that a short securing time may be easily selected or the average securing time may be shorter than the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured upon the execution of the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the average time of securing time is shortened and the probability of winning is increased, any one or any combination of conditions is applied to enhance the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode. Good.

  As described above, it is possible to set multiple types of jackpots for the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the plurality of jackpot types. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R as a jackpot type based on the first start aperture 33 Jackpot, 8R Normal Jackpot is set.

  The mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the hit / off lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, the opening / closing execution mode After the end of the support mode is a jackpot that becomes a frequent support mode.

  The mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the success or failure lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening and closing execution mode After the end of the support mode is a jackpot that becomes a frequent support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to 16R probability variation big hits, and "14 to 27" are 8R normal big hits “28 to 33” corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and “34 to 39” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is highest for the 16R probability variation jackpot, next highest for the 8R probability variation jackpot, then 16R normal jackpot, and finally 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start-up port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a jackpot type based on the second start-up port 34, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit Is set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "28 to 39" is the 8R probability variation jackpot It corresponds to That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, all the jackpots based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 become probability variation jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, and the second This is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34.

  As described above, the distribution mode of the jackpot types of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting the winning of the second starting opening 34 among the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 to occur. If the result is out in the success or failure lottery, there is no transition to the open / close execution mode, and no change in the success or failure lottery mode or the support mode occurs.

  As described above, the MPU 62 carries out a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type The MPU 62 further determines the stop display on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2. Determine the display mode. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 34 The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra or the second reserve area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, for reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 It is checked against the table to determine whether to generate a reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  The reach means that there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit may be established for some symbol rows among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed, and refers to the display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of the symbol corresponding to big hit means the combination of the same symbol in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4 (b), first, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation in which the said reach line is formed, it becomes reach by performing the change display of a symbol in symbol row Z2. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the symbol column Z2.

  Also, for reach, while reach line is formed, while performing fluctuation display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, There is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or non-displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether the advance display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is to be performed using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the fluctuation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b and the fluctuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, the details of the motor-operated product release counter C4 will be described. The motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249, for example, and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether to control the motorized jack 34a in the open state using the stored value of the motorized jack release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the motorized accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the motorized accessory 34a is controlled to be in the closed state.

  The combination of one set of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first starting port 33, and the second hold area Rb The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in corresponds to the hold information pertaining to the second start port 34, and these hold information is the special information in the present invention. Equivalent to.

A3. Outline of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the present description, the features of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of the case a1 and the case a2 as examples.

  FIG. 9A is a case a1 and wins a jackpot lottery in the first game round (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a "big hit"), and the jackpot in the second game round executed after the first game round The drawing shows the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is lost. In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the game round immediately before the first game round is out, and there is no other game round between the first game round and the second game round Give an explanation. In addition, other game times may be present between the first game times and the second game times. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game play between the first game play and the second game play will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. The advance notice effect is an effect executed immediately before or after the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, and is an effect for suggesting to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. The reach effect is an effect to be executed after the reach, and is an effect that suggests the expectation to the player to win the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game run. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The special gaming state is a state in which a player is given a privilege. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that suggests starting of the open / close execution mode as the opening effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes an open / close execution mode in which the open / close door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. During the execution period of the open / close execution mode, a predetermined effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect. As shown to Fig.9 (a), in this description, the period for performing an ending production is called an ending period.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect in the ending period. The suggestive effect is an effect that suggests reproducing the already performed effect. In the present embodiment, the suggestive effect is an effect of content that suggests reproducing the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect selected and executed from among a plurality of types in the first gaming round. Also, the special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect already executed in the special game state.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing an example of a suggested effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect described later. FIG. 10 (a) shows a suggested effect, FIG. 10 (b) shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10 (c) shows a specific start effect. The suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10A is an effect that suggests that the female character reproduces the effect performed in the first game round, that is, the advance effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, after the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggested effect in the ending period, as the special game state reproduction effect, the advance effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect performed in the first game cycle are performed. Reproduce and execute. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced, but the notice effect, the reach effect or the result performed in the first game time Only part of the notification effect may be reproduced. For example, when executing notice production, reach production and result announcement production as special gaming state reproduction production, reach production and result announcement production are preferentially reproduced and part or all of the notice production is omitted and executed. It is also good. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are usually executed frequently at normal times, the player can preferentially reproduce reach effects and result notice effects (big hit notices) that are only performed at the time of reach or jackpot. The special game state reproduction effect can be executed by focusing on the effect that strongly desires the reproduction, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the variable display and stop display of the symbol are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a at the time of executing the special game state reproduction effect are actually displayed in the first game round It is partly different from the contents of the symbol.

  After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end effect. FIG. 10B shows an example of the specific end effect. As illustrated, the specific end effect in the present embodiment is an effect of the content that the female character suggests that the special gaming state reproduction effect has ended.

  Description is returned to FIG. 9 (a). The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state with the end of the specific end effect. After that, the second game run is executed. The jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game time is out. The pachinko machine 10 executes, in the second gaming session, a normal advance notice effect (also referred to as a normal notice effect) for anticipating the result of the jackpot lottery and a result notice effect (off notice). Heretofore, the case a1 has been described.

  Next, case a2 will be described. FIG. 9B shows the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is also hit in the second game round as Case a2. .

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. Then, after executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game round. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that suggests starting of the open / close execution mode as the opening effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes an open / close execution mode in which the open / close door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect in the ending period.

  In the case a2, unlike the case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect in the ending period. The contents of the suggested effect are the same as the contents of the suggested effect performed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestion effect. That is, the ending period in the case a2 is shorter than the ending period in the case a1.

  The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestion effect. After that, the second game run is executed. In the case a2, a jackpot lottery is won also in the second gaming round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game repetition reproduction effect as an effect in the second game play. The game repetition effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect already executed in the game time. In the present embodiment, the effect executed in the first game play is reproduced as the game play effect. That is, the notice effect, reach effect and result notice effect (big hit notice) executed in the first gaming round are executed. In this case, the notification effect (big hit notification) as a result has a function as a part of the game repetition effect and also has a function as a result notification about the jackpot lottery of the second game play. Then, with the end of the game repetition effect, the second game time is ended.

  In addition, although it demonstrates using a flowchart later, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game time which won the big hit lottery is constant. That is, in the case of case a2, since both the first game time and the second game time are game times in which the big hit lottery is won, the fluctuation time of the first game time and the fluctuation of the second game time The time is the same. Therefore, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notice effect performed in the first gaming round can be executed as a game repetition reproduction effect in the second gaming round.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times for winning the big hit lottery is controlled to be constant, but the variation time of the game times for winning the big hit lottery is set by using random numbers. The variation times of the game times at the time of the jackpot may be different each time. In this case, when the second game time is longer than the first game time, when the second game time starts, the time difference between the variation times of the second game time and the first game time It is also possible to use (remaining time) to perform a suggested effect prepared in advance. By preparing a plurality of types of suggestive effects for each length of the surplus time, it is possible to execute the suggestive effects at the start of the second game cycle even if the surplus time is different each time. The suggestion effect performed using the surplus time will be executed after the suggestion effect performed in the special gaming state after the first game cycle. Therefore, the content of the suggestion effect to be executed using the surplus time is set so that the suggestion effect to be executed in the special gaming state and the suggestion effect to be executed using the surplus time have contents having continuity. It is also good. By doing this, even when the second game play is longer than the first game play, the game play effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the second game play.

  In addition, when the second game time is shorter than the first game time, only a part of the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are executed as the game effect. It may be For example, when executing advance notice effect, reach effect and result notice effect as game turn reproduction effect, reach effect and result notice effect are preferentially reproduced, and part or all of the notice effect is omitted to perform game turn reproduction effect May be performed. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are usually executed frequently at normal times, the player can preferentially reproduce reach effects and result notice effects (big hit notices) that are only performed at the time of reach or jackpot. It is possible to preferentially reproduce an effect that strongly desires to be reproduced.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, after the end of the second game, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect of the special game state thereafter, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time is a winning and the game repetition effect is executed in the second game time.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is an effect that suggests that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game session, and the special game state (opened and closed due to the jackpot in the second game session It is an effect that suggests that the execution mode is started. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the open / close execution mode and the ending effect. In this case, the effect and the ending effect (normal ending effect) performed in the opening and closing execution mode are effects performed at the time of a normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special game state is ended.

  The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above using two cases, case a1 and case a2. As described in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game round is out, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notice effect performed after the suggestion effect are performed in the first game round It is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces an effect, and the player also recognizes that it is an effect that reproduces an effect already performed. On the other hand, as in the case a2, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second gaming round is won, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notice effect executed after the suggestion effect are already executed on the effect It is executed as an effect that reproduces the effect, but is actually a game repetition effect that is executed due to having won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. If the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 has been previously appreciated, the player executes the game reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time, similar to case a1. It is difficult to predict that the game has been won in the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run, while recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the effect. In such a state, the player is notified that the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second gaming round has been won by the result notification staging after the preliminary announcement effect and the reach presentation are executed in the second gaming round, Is not the reproduction of the effect performed in the first game round, but the first game play, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect performed in the second game time for the first time at that time, and the second game Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery pertaining to the times. Thus, by executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game repetition reproduction effect in the case a2, not only the unexpectedness is given to the game, but also at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced. The player can be given a sense of expectation for the effect to be played. In addition, by making the second gaming round in the case a2 an expansion that the player does not expect, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the case of case a2, it is suggested to reproduce the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game round despite the jackpot lottery in the second game round being won. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is more difficult for the player to further predict that the jackpot lottery according to the second gaming round has been won. Therefore, unexpectedness can be further imparted to the game.

  In addition, as in case a2, when the notice effect, reach effect and result notification effect executed in the first game cycle are reproduced as it is and executed in the second game cycle, the result notification effect in the second game cycle is executed. Even if it is played, the player may not notice that he has won the jackpot lottery in the second game run, but after the end of the second game run, the specific start effect is executed in the special game state. When the specific start effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot lottery in the second gaming round has been won.

A4. Overview of processing in the standby state:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in a standby state will be described. The standby state is a state after the end of the game run, and means a state in which neither the special game state nor the next game run has been started.

  FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in a standby state. In FIG. 11, a state diagram showing whether or not the symbol displayed on the main display unit 45 is changing, the display mode of the symbol display device 41, and the output of the sound output from the sound emission control device 90 The content and the audio output level (volume) are shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the states of the standby state flag in the main control device 60 ON, OFF, the states of the transition condition satisfaction flag in the main control device 60 ON, OFF, and the cue determination flag in the audio light emission control device 90. ON and OFF states are shown. These flags will be described later.

  The numerals such as "01" described in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 indicate the temporal position of the moving image data, and "01" indicates the head position of the moving image data. The temporal position of the moving image data is the position of the moving image data corresponding to each time of the moving image displayed with the temporal length, and is the temporal position of the moving image when the moving image data is captured in the temporal length It is the position of the corresponding video data. As a temporal position of moving image data, for example, a time code recorded in the moving image data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the moving image data of the background moving image is displayed to the temporal position of “30”, it is returned to the temporal position of “01” again and displayed from the top.

  Numbers such as "01" described in the audio output content indicate the temporal position of the music data, and "01" indicates the beginning position of the music data. The temporal position of the music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of the music output with the temporal length, and is the temporal position of the music when the music data is captured in the temporal length It is the position of the corresponding music data. For example, a time code recorded in music data can be used as a temporal position of the music data. In the present embodiment, when the music data of the background music is output to the temporal position of “30”, the musical data of the background music is returned to the temporal position of “01” again and output from the head.

  The display control device 100 causes the background display to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the game session where the display corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery is performed, and the background display movie in the symbol display device 41 in the standby state after the game session is over. Continue to be displayed. The background moving image is a moving image displayed on the background side of the symbol in the symbol display device 41, and when an image or a moving image such as the above-described notice effect or reach effect is displayed, the background moving image is displayed on the background side Is displayed. The background moving image in the present embodiment is a moving image in which the character is dancing to the rhythm of background music described later.

  The sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output background music (BGM: Background Music) corresponding to the background moving image mentioned above during the game run, and also allows the background music from the speaker 46 to be in the standby state after the game run is over. Output continuously. In the present embodiment, the background music is music that is continuously output corresponding to the background moving image, and has the same time length as the background moving image. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, the background music of the temporal position "10" is output at the timing when the background moving image of the temporal position "10" is displayed, thereby displaying the background moving image and the rhythm of the background music. An effect corresponding to one on one is realized.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the game run is over, that is, when the variation of the symbol in the main display unit 45 is stopped, the main control device 60 turns on the standby state flag (time t1). Then, after the main control unit 60 stops the variation of the symbols in the main display unit 45 and enters the standby state, if 15 seconds have elapsed without any of the special gaming state and the next game run being started, That is, when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned on, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the transition condition satisfied flag is turned on and the standby state flag is turned off (time t2).

  The transition condition is such that the voice output mode is changed from a mode in which background music is output at a volume preset by the player to a mode in which the volume of background music is zero (silenced state), and The display mode is a condition for shifting from a mode of displaying a background moving image to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image. That is, when the transition condition is established, the output mode of sound shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is broken, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is broken . The demonstration moving image (demonstration moving image) is a moving image different from the background moving image, and is a moving image for conveying the attraction of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, in the demonstration video, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the gaming method of the pachinko machine 10 is described, and characters, stories and the like appearing on the pachinko machine 10 are described. In addition, a demonstration animation may be called an attract animation.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the transition condition is satisfied at time t2, the voice emission control device 90 outputs the background music at a volume preset by the player (time t2). Through the mode (from time t2 to time t3) in which the volume of the background music is reduced (faded out) with time while continuing the output of the background music), the volume of the background music is zero. It shifts to a certain mode (a mode after time t3). In the present embodiment, the audio emission control device 90 continues the output of the background music itself until 5 seconds have elapsed after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and the volume of the background music becomes zero. At the timing (time t4) when 5 seconds have elapsed, the output of the background music is stopped. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the volume preset by the gaming ball is the maximum volume.

  When the transition condition is satisfied, the display control device 100 causes the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to shift to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image after 5 seconds have elapsed since the volume of background music has become zero (time) t4). The audio light emission control device 90 turns on the quick start determination flag at the timing when the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t4). The cue determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not to start displaying and outputting the background moving image and the background music from the temporal start position “01” when a return condition described later is satisfied. is there. In the present embodiment, the cue determination flag shifts to a mode in which the audio output mode is broken in the continuity of background music, and a mode in which the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is broken in the background animation It will be turned on when you move to.

  When the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 after the transition condition is established, and the gaming cycle (the symbol variation display) is started, the main control device 60 returns the return condition. While determining that the condition is satisfied, the transition condition satisfied flag is set to OFF. The return condition returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode for displaying a background moving image, and also restores the audio output mode to a mode in which background music is output at a volume preset by the player. It is a condition.

  As shown in FIG. 11, if the return condition is satisfied after the background music volume has become zero and the display of the demonstration video has been started (time t5), the cue determination flag is set. Is ON, the display control device 100 and the sound emission control device 90 execute a cueing process of the background moving image and the background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporally leading position "01" of the background moving image. The voice emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of background music to the volume preset by the player, and also outputs from the temporally leading position "01" of the background music when outputting the background music To start. Therefore, both the background moving image and the background music are started to be displayed and output from the temporal start position.

  The sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and performs cueing processing for background music and background moving images (processing to start output of music or display of moving images from temporal start position “01”. When performing), the type of background music to be subjected to cueing processing is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control apparatus 100 selects a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to a plurality of types of background music. A cueing process may be performed by selecting a background moving image corresponding to the selected background music that can be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to view a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of processing in the case where the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demonstration moving image is started. As shown in FIG. 12, if the return condition is satisfied after the background music volume has become zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started (time t4), the cue determination flag Is OFF, the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 returns the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. Run. In this manner, the display mode and the audio output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is established.

  FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of background music is being reduced. As shown in FIG. 13, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of background music is being reduced (time t3), since the cue-up determination flag is OFF, the display control device 100 displays the background on the symbol display device 41. The voice emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player while continuing the mode of displaying the moving image. In this manner, the display mode and the audio output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is established.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the background music volume has become zero and the display of the demonstration video has been started (FIG. 11) The display control device 100 restores the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying a demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying a background moving image. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image. Further, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, from the predetermined temporal position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, the display of the background moving picture and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving picture starts is changed according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started fluctuates according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, the demonstration moving image is displayed when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demonstration moving image is started. When the display of the background moving image is started from the temporal position of the background moving image displayed at the timing immediately before transitioning to the mode to be displayed, or when returning to the mode of displaying the background moving image from the mode of displaying the demo moving image The configuration to determine the temporal position of the background moving image to start display on the basis of the elapsed time since the transition to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, and the transition from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demo moving image In the above, the playback of the background moving image is continued as internal processing, and when returning from the aspect displaying the demonstration moving image to the aspect displaying the background moving Configuration, and the like to display the background video that is playing Te.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the display control device 100 is set when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 11). The display starts from the temporal top position "01" of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts output from the temporal top position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the temporally intermediate position of the background moving image and the output is started from the temporally intermediate position of the background music. For example, if adopting a configuration in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the background moving image and the output is started from the position in the middle of the background music, the player can Since the background moving image and the background music are to be watched from a position on the way in time, there is a possibility that the user may feel discomfort or that the background moving image and the background music may not be full. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to make the player watch the background moving image and the background music from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. The player can be satisfied that the background moving image and the background music can all be watched from the temporal top position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the display control is performed when the return condition is satisfied after the background music volume has become zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 12). The apparatus 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without discomfort.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. Since the sound emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of background music to the volume preset by the player, the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization of the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the mode prior to using a natural flow without discomfort.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds have elapsed without any of the special gaming state and the next gaming cycle having been started after the gaming season has ended. It is possible to reduce the volume of background music with the passage of time while the player is not likely to play a game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game play is started in the standby state, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image. Since the output mode returns to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume set in advance by the player, the expectation that the game play has started can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

A5. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the process shown in the case a1 and the case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The process executed in main controller 60 will be described first, and then the process executed in audio light emission control device 90 and display control device 100 will be described.

  The main MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing in order to advance the game of each game play. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the motorized combination release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4, and when their respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, the winning opening process for the starting opening accompanying the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the winning process for the starting opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, a winning process for through is accompanied by the winning of the through gate 35. Details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Prize process for starting opening>
Next, winning processing for the starting opening will be described. The winning process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 14: S104) of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting opening. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start hole 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33. In step S201, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls Set Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to signal that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 33 to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as first start pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S201, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not won the first starting opening 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether the gaming ball has won the second starting opening 34 2 Determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34.

  In step S205, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the second starting opening 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four gaming balls Set Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the gaming ball has not won the second starting opening 34 (S205: NO), the winning processing for the main starting opening is ended.

  In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 as a signal. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S208, the start pending count RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start pending count RbN), which is a value stored in the pending count storage area of the second reserve area Rb, is read, and the second start pending count RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second starting reservation number RbN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the second starting opening 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether or not the start reservation pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). In step S209, when the start reservation number N is not less than the upper limit (S209: NO), the winning process for the starting opening is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S209, if the start pending count N is less than the upper limit (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, 1 is added to the start pending count N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S211. And 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserve number storage area (hereinafter, referred to as the total reserve number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding hold area, ie, step It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of holdings to which 1 is added in S210. Specifically, when the first start reservation number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) The value is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. Further, when the second start reservation number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is The first storage area among the free storage areas of the second storage area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 is added in step S210, is stored. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In step S213, an earlier determination process is performed. The first determination process is based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, the hit / not decision result (lottery result) of the big hit lottery, the type of big hit, reach occurrence It is a process which performs determination of the presence or absence etc. before the said pending | holding information becomes the object of the big hit lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the prior determination process will be described later. After executing step S213, the process proceeds to step S214.

  In step S214, a process of setting a hold command is performed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

  In the hold command, the hold information indicates the determination result by the prior determination processing based on the occurrence of the winning to the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the winning, the main control unit This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm before the target of the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the command output process of the normal process described later (FIG. 18: step S503).

  Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased in the number of hold. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make it change according to. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning on the second start opening 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of the hold in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make it change according to. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

  After executing step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S213) of the winning process for the starting opening.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the hold information, determination results such as the determination of the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, the determination of the type of the big hit, the determination of the presence or absence of reach, etc. It is a process to be executed before becoming a target of the lottery.

  In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning of the starting opening in the winning opening process for starting opening (FIG. 15) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed by the winning before the current winning is read out from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit occurs prior to the big winning lottery by the current winning. Thus, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time is determined.

  In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and the hit table storage area Referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

  On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current prize is executed as a game time (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304 and for high probability mode As a result of referring to the success or failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and is stored in the storage area by winning for the current starting opening. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 which has been the current distribution target is obtained based on the winning of the first start opening 33, the first start opening distribution table is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

  In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. In step S308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variation jackpot (S308: YES), the process proceeds to step S309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended.

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the big hit (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311 and is stored in the storage area by winning to the current starting opening. The value of the reached reach random number counter C3 is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the reach occurrence.

  If it is determined in step S313 that reach has been generated (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314 to store reach generation information in the first determination process result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S313 that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence (S313: NO), the first determination process is ended as it is.

<Through winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described. The winning combination processing for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14: S105).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the through winning process. In step S401, it is determined whether the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 or not. In step S401, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and whether or not the number of bonus items reserved SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) Determine if It should be noted that the number-of-items-reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings on the through gate 35 which has been suspended for performing the electric combination opening symbol. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of bonus items held SN is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not won in the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the through processing for this through is ended.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the number is less than the upper limit (less than 4) of the bonus item holding number SN (S402: YES), the process proceeds to step S403, and 1 is added to the bonus item holding number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, the value of the motorized product release counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the power storage area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through winning process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the value of the number of bonus holdings SN is not less than the upper limit (S402: NO), that is, if the value of the number of holdings of bonus items SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit, The through winning process is ended without storing the value of the motorized product release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is performed.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S501, start-up processing is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device accompanying power on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demonstration moving image upon power-on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, output data such as a start-up command set in step S502 or a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process previously executed is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 70. Also, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. After executing step S503, the process proceeds to step S504.

  In step S504, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, game number control processing for controlling the game in each game number is executed. In the game number control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a, and the second result display unit 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S506, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, a gaming state transition process is executed to shift the gaming state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S <b> 508, a process for supporting the electric-car combination for driving and controlling the motorized part 34 a provided in the second starting port 34 is performed. In the electric support process, it is determined whether or not the motor-operated part 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electronic mail support will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S509.

  In step S509, a standby process is performed to cause each control device on the sub side to start a demonstration moving image when a predetermined time has elapsed. Details of the standby process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S510.

  In step S510, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly, the start of the command output processing of step S503). That is, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has come. If it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S510: NO), the next normal processing execution timing is reached in steps S511 and S512. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S512, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S510: YES), the process returns to step S503, and each process from step S503 to step S508 is performed. Run.

  In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S503 to step 507 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly executing updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using such remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game number control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S506).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the special game state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the opening period flag, the open / close execution mode flag, and the ending period flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing described later, and is turned OFF when ending the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

  When it is determined in step S601 that any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the special gaming state is in progress, and the processing in step S602 and subsequent steps The game play control process ends without executing any of them. That is, when in the special game state, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has a winning. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the special game mode is not in progress (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is displaying variable. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is in the variable display mode. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variation display flag of the variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display in progress flag is turned on when the variable display is started for one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display is ended.

  If it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display mode (S602: NO), the process proceeds to the game start process of steps S603 to S605. In step S603, it is determined whether the total pending number CRN is "0". The case where the total reserve number CRN is "0" means that the reserve number for start is "0" for any of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step S603 that the total number of held pieces CRN is "0" (S603: YES), the game play control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, data setting processing for setting data stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S605, the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the change start process will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S606.

  In step S606, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by one. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

  In step S607, the standby state flag is set to OFF. The standby state flag is a flag which is turned on at the timing when the standby state is started, and turned off at the timing when the variable display of the main display unit 45 is started or 15 seconds after the standby state is started. is there. After executing step S607, the process proceeds to step S608.

  In step S608, it is determined whether the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON. The transition condition satisfaction flag is a flag that is turned on when 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the standby state and is turned off when variation display on the main display unit 45 is started. If it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON (S608: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S608: NO), the game play control process is ended.

  In step S609, a return condition satisfaction command is set. The return condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to recognize that the variable display of the main display unit 45 is started, that is, the return condition is met. After executing step S609, the process proceeds to step S610.

  In step S610, the transition condition satisfaction flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the game number control process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S602: YES), the processing for game play progression in steps S611 to S615 is executed.

  In step S611, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game number has elapsed. The fluctuation time is, as described above, a time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows are stopped, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter area 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in a fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 22) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  If it is determined in step S611 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S611: NO), the process proceeds to step S612, and processing for fluctuation display is performed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit according to the current game run. After executing step S612, the game number control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S611 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S611: YES), the process proceeds to step S613 to execute fluctuation end processing. In the end process of variation, the result display unit is displayed so that the form of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start process (FIG. 21) described later is displayed on the result display unit according to the current game round. Display control. After executing step S613, the process proceeds to step S614.

  In step S614, the standby state flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S615 to execute standby state time setting processing. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec) is set to the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter for measuring an elapsed time from the start of the standby state, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, 2 msec. After executing step S615, the game number control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 19: S604).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S701, it is determined whether the pending area that is the processing target for executing the data setting process is the first pending area Ra. Specifically, of the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6), the hold information stored first (the hold in the first area of the first hold area Ra) Information) is stored in the first hold area of the second hold area Rb (the first hold area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6). When it is stored in the hold area prior to the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6), the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) stores the first hold information among the hold information stored in time series. In the case where one of the hold information stored first among the hold information is stored in the hold area earlier, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S701, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the pending area to be processed is the first pending area Ra (step S701: YES), the data setting process for the first pending area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the pending area to be processed is not the first pending area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb (step S701: NO And the data setting process for the second reserve area in steps S708 to S713.

  In step S702, after decrementing the first start pending number RaN of the first pending area Ra by one, the process proceeds to step S703, and the total pending number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first reserve area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S705.

  In step S705, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reserve area Ra is performed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S705, the process proceeds to step S706.

  In step S706, when the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying which of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is the target of the start of the current variable display. Then, it progresses to step S707.

  In step S 707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the reserve area subject to the current data shift corresponds to the first reserve area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first starting port 33. A shift command including information on the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S 707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S 503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The voice light emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings to the display control device 100 based on the received shift command. Do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the pending area to be processed is not the first pending area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb (step S701: NO), It progresses to step S708.

  In step S 708, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reserve area Rb is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, the total pending number CRN is decremented by one, and in step S710 the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S711.

  In step S711, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reserve area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

  In step S712, when the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S713.

  In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the reserved area which is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including information on the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The voice emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of held pieces based on the received shift command. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of game number control process (FIG. 19: S605).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the change start process. In step S801, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, and in the present embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the open / close execution mode relating to winning of the probability variation jackpot. After that, it is usually turned off when the jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S801 that the mode is the high probability mode (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, the determination of success or failure is performed with reference to the success or failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the high probability mode for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B. Determine if Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the high probability mode is not set (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S803, the determination of success or failure is performed with reference to the success or failure table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 7A. Determine if Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of success or failure (big hit lottery) in step S802 or step S803 is a big hit. In step S804, when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit (S804: YES), in step S805 to step S812, in order to set the processing and stop result for setting the game result in the case of a big hit Execute the process of

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S806 to refer to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 8A). Then, a distribution determination is made. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is either the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot Determine if it is included in

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 8B). Perform the distribution judgment with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is either the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot Determine if it is included in After the process of step S806 or step S807 is performed. The process proceeds to step S808.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S808 that the game result is a probability variation jackpot (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

  In step S809, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the big variation is the state in which the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b displays any stop result in the current game round that will win the big variation hit It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation big hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

  In step S810, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON when the 16R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the 8R probability variation flag is turned ON when the 8R probability variation jackpot is hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  If it is determined in step S 808 that the type of jackpot distributed in step S 806 or step S 807 is not a probability variation jackpot (S 808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step S 811. move on.

  In step S811, a stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process fluctuates in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round where a normal jackpot is won. It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON when the 16R normal jackpot is hit, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON when the 8R normal jackpot is hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not jackpot winning (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813 to execute stop result setting processing for out of time. The stop result setting process for out of time ends the fluctuation display in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round where the disconnection result is obtained. Is a process for setting the Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for disconnection at the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S814, a setting process of the fluctuation time is performed. The setting process of the fluctuation time is to set fluctuation time which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b based on the presence or absence of the big hit and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Processing. Details of the setting process of the fluctuation time will be described later. After executing step S814, the process proceeds to step S815.

  In step S815, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 to set a first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, and the presence or absence of reach has occurred. And the information on the fluctuation time set in step S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S815: YES), the process proceeds to step S817 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence And the information on the fluctuation time set in step S814. After performing step S816 or step S817, the process proceeds to step S818.

  In step S 818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes information of 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information of outlier results as jackpot type information.

  The variation command and type command set in step S816 to step S818 are transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect in the game turn based on the received command for variation and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S818, the process proceeds to step S819.

  In step S819, variation display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game round among the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is identified as the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started, If the second result display unit flag is ON, it is determined that the result display unit corresponding to the current game is the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S819, the variation start process is ended.

<Setting process of fluctuation time>
Next, setting processing of the fluctuation time will be described. The setting process of the fluctuation time is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 21: S814) of the fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the fluctuation time. In step S901, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S902.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the current game run is a winning. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, with reference to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game round in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In step S902, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round is not winning (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905, and it is determined whether reach is generated in the current game round. Since the main process (S905) is executed when the big hit lottery relating to the current game round is not won in the above step S902, in step S905, reach occurs among the game rounds not winning the big hit lottery It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. In addition, in specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In step S906, the fluctuation generation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation generation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In step S905, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game run (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the reach non-generation change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d is referred Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN decreases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. The variation time may increase as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases, or may be set to be constant without depending on the respective hold numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach non-occurrence so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode A variation time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected may differ between the jackpot winning time and the outreach time. Good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the regular jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the outreach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete outlier may be individually set.

<Playing state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 18: S507).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S1001, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state, as described with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002 to determine whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON when shifting the gaming state to the open / close execution mode, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to step S1004, and timing of variation display of symbols in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is ended. It is determined whether the When it is determined in step S1004 that it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended (S1004: NO), the present gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1004 that it is the timing when the variable display has ended (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005, and the game result (the result of the jackpot lottery) of the current game round is switched to the open / close execution mode It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R positive change flag, the 8R positive change flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), this gaming state transition processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1005 that the game result (the result of the big hit lottery) of the current game run is determined to correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006 and the standby state flag Is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1007 to turn off the high probability mode flag. Then, it progresses to step S1008.

  In step S1008, an opening time setting process is performed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, an opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 for determining the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S1008, the process proceeds to step S1009.

  In step S1009, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the open / close execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S1009, the process advances to step S1010 to turn on the opening period flag. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1011, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S1011 that the opening period has ended (S1011: YES), the process proceeds to step S1012, and the opening period flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1013, start processing of round display for notifying of the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. And based on the confirmed address information, while specifying stop result data corresponding to the said address information out of the stop result data group memorize | stored in ROM63, while specifying the content of the round count from the specified stop result data Check. Thereafter, the contents of the confirmed round number are output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Thereby, the round display unit 39 displays the information on the round related to the output. After executing step S1013, the process proceeds to step S1014.

  In step S1014, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode this time is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (16R positive variation flag, 8R positive variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R positive variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 is confirmed. If it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R positive variation flag or the 16R normal flag (S1014: YES), the process proceeds to step S1015 and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the open / close door 36b is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM 64 is the 8R positive variation flag or the 8R normal flag (S1014: NO), the process proceeds to step S1016 and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64. Set "8" in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S1015 or step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017.

  In step S1017, the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1018 to execute the special winning opening / closing process. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the large winning is achieved by setting the variable winning driving portion 36c to a driving state, on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more. Open the mouth 36a. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or that the opening limit number is winning. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the big winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing step S1018, the process proceeds to step S1019.

  In step S1019, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1019: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1019: YES), the process proceeds to step S1020, and the open / close execution mode flag is set to OFF. After executing step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1021.

  In step S1021, a round display end process is performed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S1021, the process proceeds to step S1022.

  In step S1022, a condition determination process is performed. The condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case applies to the case a2 shown in FIG. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery in the next game turn, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period, and the effects performed in the current game turn in the fluctuation time of the next game turn (notice effect, reach effect and It is determined whether or not to execute processing for reproducing the result notification effect (big hit notification). The condition determination process will be described later. After executing step S1022, the process proceeds to step S1023.

  In step S1023, an ending time setting process is performed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024.

  In step S1024, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control apparatus 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S1024, the process proceeds to step S1025.

  In step S1025, the ending period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

  In step S1026, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1023), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in an ending time setting process (FIG. 25) described later. If it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S1026: YES), the process proceeds to step S1027.

  In step S1027, the ending period flag is set to OFF. After that, the process advances to step S1028 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game play after the ending of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1028, the process proceeds to step S1029.

  In step S1029, the standby state flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1030 to execute standby state time setting processing. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec) is set to the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. After executing step S1030, the present gaming state transition process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S1026: NO), the present gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Big winning opening opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening / closing process will be described. The special winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: 1017) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S1101, it is determined whether the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1102: YES), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1103: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104 and the variable winning drive portion opens the big winning opening 36a. The 36c is in the drive state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are the high-frequency winning mode, “15000” (ie, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency winning mode is set to the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" in the winning counter area PC. "" May be set. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

  In step S1106, an open command is set. Thereafter, the present special winning opening opening and closing process is ended. The release command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has been started. By the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503), it is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 can be displayed as the special winning opening 36a. Update to the contents corresponding to the opening of the. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are as follows: opening of the special winning opening 36a Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". Do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, it is determined from the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1108 that no winning has occurred (S1108: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that a winning has occurred (S1108: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109, where the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1110: NO), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1107: YES), or if it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the pay counter area PC is "0" In step S1110 (YES in step S1110), the process advances to step S1111 to execute a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable prize drive unit 36c is in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1113 to determine whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1113: YES), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1113: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process advances to step S1115 to set a closing command. After that, the special winning opening opening and closing process ends.

  The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has ended, and the normal processing In the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503), the sound emission control apparatus 90 is transmitted. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round is finished based on the received closing command, and the contents of the effects of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are Update to the contents corresponding to the end of release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round is finished based on the received closing command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are finished, the opening of the big winning opening 36a is finished Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

<Condition determination processing>
Next, the condition determination process will be described. The condition determination processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1022) of the gaming state transition processing.

  As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case is the case a2 shown in FIG. The conditions for enabling execution of the process of case a2 are to win the jackpot lottery in the first gaming round and win the jackpot lottery in the second gaming round. This condition determination processing is executed immediately before the end of the open / close execution mode after winning a jackpot lottery in the game round, and determines whether or not the jackpot lottery will be won in the next game round.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing condition determination processing. In step S 1201, it is determined whether the hold count CRN> 0. By executing this processing, when executing the special gaming state after the first gaming round, it is confirmed whether or not there is a gaming round immediately after the special gaming state. If there is no game play, there will be no game play corresponding to the second game play that can execute the game play reproduction effect immediately after the suggested effect, and execution of the process of case a2 becomes impossible .

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the hold count CRN> 0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1201 that the hold count CRN> 0 is not satisfied (S1201: NO), the present condition determination processing is ended as it is.

  At step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the next game play is read out. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning of the starting opening in the winning opening process for starting opening (FIG. 15) is read. Then, it progresses to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery relating to the next game time is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

  If it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204 to refer to the low probability mode success or failure table stored in the success or failure table storage area 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205 to refer to the high probability table for high probability mode stored in the hit / not table storage area 63a. . After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces, in the case of case a2 (FIG. 9), the game repetition reproduction effect executed in the second game time in the ending period of the special game state after the second game time. It is a flag used to prevent execution. When it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208, and the condition satisfaction flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, a condition satisfaction command is set. The condition satisfaction command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the condition satisfaction flag is ON. The condition satisfaction command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the external output process (FIG. 18: step S 503) of the normal process. Thereafter, the condition determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or if it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In step S1207 (YES in S1207), the present condition determination process ends.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 23: S1023).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether the condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1303, "3000" (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which is a timer for the ending time. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting an ending time in the special gaming state after the first gaming cycle in the case a2 of FIG. In the case a2, only the suggested effect is executed in the ending period, and the effect performed in the first game is not reproduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 6 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the suggested effect. After executing step S1303, the process advances to step S1304 to turn off the condition satisfaction flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, the effect duplication avoidance flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the ending time setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1306, "15000" (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting an ending time in the special gaming state after the first gaming cycle in the case a1 of FIG. In the case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed in the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 30 seconds is secured as an ending time required for the execution of the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In the present embodiment, the time required for the suggestion effect is constant at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is constant at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the process advances to step S1307 to set an effect overlap avoidance command. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 18: step S503). After executing step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, "4000" (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is a process of setting an ending time in the special gaming state after the second game round in the case a2 of FIG. In case a2, the normal ending effect is performed in the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 8 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the normal ending effect.

<Migration process at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1028) of the gaming state transition processing.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the probable variation big hit as the big hit type flag is set to ON in the RAM 64 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R positive variation flag or the 8R positive variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402 to execute flag deletion processing. Specifically, the 16R probability change flag, the 8R probability change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are turned OFF when they are ON, and they are maintained when they are not ON. . After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the high probability mode flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1404 to set the high frequency support mode flag to ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit is generated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the process proceeds to step S1407 to execute flag deletion processing. Specifically, the 16R probability change flag, the 8R probability change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are turned OFF when they are ON, and they are maintained when they are not ON. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1408.

  In step S1408, after setting the high frequency support mode flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S1409, and 100 is set in the number-of-plays counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, a high frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for telegraph support>
Next, a process for electronic mail support will be described. The processing for electronic part support is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S508) of the normal processing.

  FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the processing for electronic part support. In step S1501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-support flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the motorized accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is in the open state, and is turned off when the motorized part 34a in the second start port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether the support winning flag of the various flags storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the opening condition is won in the electric combination opening lottery whether to set the electric combination 34a to the opening condition, and is set to OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1503: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

  In step S1504, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the drawing unit 38 or not. If it is determined in step S1504 that the end timing of the variable display is reached (S1504: YES), the process advances to step S1505 to set the gap display, and then the electronic control support process ends. By setting the off-set display, the variation display of the symbols in the common drawing unit 38 is ended in the state where the off-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1504 that the end timing of the variable display is not reached (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus item holding number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is "0" (S1506: NO), the present support routine processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is larger than "0" (S1506: YES), the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected. If it is not the open / close execution mode in step S1507 (S1507: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step S1508 (S1508: YES), the process proceeds to step S1509, and an electric combination open lottery is performed. Specifically, in the case where the value stored in the holding position 64c is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination opening lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S1509 is a support winning. In step S1510, when it is determined that the result of the motorized character opening lottery is support winning (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2 which has been set. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the motorized jack 34a has been released. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the motorized combination open lottery is not the support winning (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

  In step S1512, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1512 that the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1512 that the success or failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S1512: NO), the electronic control support process ends.

  In step S1513, it is determined whether the game number counter area is "0". In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game cycle is over. If it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1513: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1513 that the game number counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S1514, and the high frequency support mode flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1515.

  In step S1515, a low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Do. After that, the electronic mail support process ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the external output process (step S503 in FIG. 18) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S1507 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S1507: YES), or if it is determined in step S1518 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516 and the electric combination open lottery I do. Specifically, in the case where the value stored in the holding position 64c is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination release lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1517.

  In step S1517, it is determined whether the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S1516 is support winning. If it is determined in step S1517 that no support win has been made (S1517: NO), the present support for electronic assembly is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1517 that support is won (S1517: YES), the process proceeds to step S1518, turns on the support win flag, and sets "1" in the second round counter area RC2. , Finish the processing for this boardroom support.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. If it is determined in step S 1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T 2 is not “0” (S 1519: NO), this is the process of displaying for the electric wave support as it is displaying fluctuation of the pattern in the drawing unit 38. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

  In step S1520, a hit display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the drawing unit 38 is ended in a state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1521 to set the in-support flag ON and the support winning flag OFF. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is ON (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1522 to execute electric combination open / close control processing for opening / closing control of the motorized combination 34a. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

<Electronic work opening and closing control process>
Next, the electronic combination open / close control process will be described. The electronic combination opening and closing control processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: S1522) of electronic combination support processing.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the electronic combination open / close control process. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the motorized jack 34a is open. Whether or not the motorized accessory 34a is in the open state is determined based on whether or not the motorized symbol drive unit 34b is in the driven state. If it is determined that the motor-operated combination 34a is open (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the motor-operated accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1602: NO), the present on-off control control process ends. That is, when the open continuation time of the motorized accessory 34a has not ended, the present opening and closing control processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1603, and a closing process is performed to control the motorized prize 34a in the closed state. "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the measuring means of the open continuation time of the motorized part 34a is "0", the motorized part 34a is closed and, in this case, the second timer counter area T2 is motorized. The second timer counter area T2 is set to "250", which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a. After executing step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604.

  In step S1604, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, the process proceeds to step S1605, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S1605: NO), the present electronic combination control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the in-support flag is turned off. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that the motorized jack 34a is not open (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the motorized accessory 34a. In step S1607, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1607: NO), the present electronic combination control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1607: YES), the process proceeds to step S1608 to execute an opening process for controlling the motorized part 34a in an open state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1609.

  In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S1609: NO), the process proceeds to step S1610 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is Do.

  If it is determined in step S1610 that the high-frequency support mode is in progress (S1610: YES), the process proceeds to step S1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S1609: YES), or if it is determined in step S1610 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612. "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

<Process for standby>
Next, the process for standby will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 18: S509).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the process for standby. In step S1701, it is determined whether the standby state flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is ON (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S1701: NO), this standby process is ended.

  In step S1702, it is determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, and if the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned ON. It is determined that If it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on, the process advances to step S1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on, the standby process is ended.

  In step S1703, the standby state flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S1704, and the transition condition satisfaction flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1705 to set a transition condition satisfaction command. The transition condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to recognize that 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the standby state, that is, that the transition condition is met. After executing step S1705, the process for standby is completed.

A6. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus 90 and the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. Note that part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control substrate 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables and the like. For example, in a part of the area of the ROM 93, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variation display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like are provided. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The main control unit 60 receives various commands. While the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, the display control device 100 is connected.

  The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is mounted. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control apparatus 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the various commands received, and implements control of the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is formed into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data etc. in a shared manner in each character ROM 106. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 106 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 103.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control unit 90 will be the sound side MPU 92 and the sound side, respectively. Also referred to as the ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control apparatus 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main side MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and readout of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802.

  In step S1802, command corresponding processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803.

  In step S1803, a standby state transition process is performed to reduce the audio output level (sound volume) in the standby state or to start a demonstration moving image. Details of the standby state transition process will be described later. After executing step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804.

  In step S1804, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step S1802. After executing step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805.

  In step S1805, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read out in the command corresponding process of step S1802. After executing step S1805, the present timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Processing for command>
Next, command corresponding processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 32: S1802).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the command corresponding process will be described.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether a start-up command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1901 that a start-up command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: YES), the process advances to step S1902 to execute start-up command handling processing. Details of the startup command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1901 that the start-up command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1903 without executing step S1902.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: YES), the process advances to step S1904 to execute hold command handling processing. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing step S1904.

  In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1907.

  In step S1906, an effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect, a reach effect, a stop symbol, a fluctuation display pattern, and the like to be executed in the current game run are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907.

  In step S1907, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1907 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1907: YES), the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute opening effect setting processing. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set, and the information corresponding to the contents of the effect is set The opening effect command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1909, an open / close execution mode effect setting process is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process, the content of the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode is set based on the information on the number of rounds included in the opening command and the information on the jackpot type. After executing step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910.

  If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has not been received (S1907: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910 without executing steps S1908 and S1909.

  In step S 1910, it is determined whether a condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1910: YES), the process proceeds to step S1911, and the sound light stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light RAM 94 Turn on the side condition satisfaction flag. After executing step S1911, the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfaction command is not received (S1910: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912 without executing step S1911.

  In step S1912, it is determined whether a rendering overlap avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command is received from the main side MPU 62 (S1912: YES), the process proceeds to step S1913 and the sound stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 The light side effect duplication flag is turned ON. After executing step S1913, the process proceeds to step S1914. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command is not received (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1914 without executing step S1913.

  In step S1914, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has been received (S1914: YES), the process advances to step S1915 to execute ending effect setting processing. The ending effect setting process is a process of setting the content of the ending effect in the ending period based on the information on the ending time included in the ending command received this time, and the information of ON / OFF of the sound light side condition satisfaction flag. is there. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1915, the process proceeds to step S1920.

  If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has not been received (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1916 without executing step S1915.

  In step S 1916, it is determined whether a transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1916 that a transition condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917 to turn on the volume reduction flag. The volume reduction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, and is turned ON at the timing to start the processing to reduce the output level (volume) of the audio, and at the timing when the output level (volume) of the audio becomes zero. It is a flag to be turned off. After executing step S1917, the process proceeds to step S1918. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that a transition condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: NO), the process proceeds to step S1918 without executing step S1917.

  In step S1918, it is determined whether a return condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1918 that a return condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: YES), the process proceeds to step S1919, and the return condition satisfaction flag is set to ON. The recovery condition satisfaction flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a, and is turned ON to start processing for restoring the audio output level (volume) and processing for ending the demonstration moving image. Volume) is returned, and it is a flag that is turned off when the demo animation ends. After executing step S1919, the process proceeds to step S1920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1918 that a return condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: NO), the process proceeds to step S1920 without executing step S1919.

  In step S1920, other setting processing is performed. In the other setting process, for example, the setting of the effect content corresponding to the high frequency support mode command, the low frequency support mode command, the open command and the close command is performed. Further, when the rendering operation button 24 is pressed, a rendering operation command for recognizing that the rendering operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display MPU 102. After executing step S1920, the command handling process is finished.

<Startup command handling process>
Next, startup command handling processing will be described. The startup command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the voice emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the command handling process (FIG. 33: S1902).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing startup command handling processing. As described above, the startup command handling process is a process that is executed when the startup command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the start command handling process will be described.

  In step S2001, a demonstration video start command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The demonstration video start command is a command for causing the display MPU 102 to start displaying a demonstration video. The display MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, a demonstration video display flag is turned ON. The demonstration moving image display flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is turned on when the display of the demonstration moving image is started, and is turned off when the display of the demonstration moving image is ended. It is a flag that is turned on. After executing step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the cue determination flag is turned on. As described above, when the return condition is satisfied and the output of the background music and the display of the background moving image are started, the cue-out determination flag starts the output and the display from the temporal beginning position of the background music and the background moving image It is a flag for determining whether it is or not. When the cueing determination flag is ON at the timing when the return condition is established, when the output of background music and the display of background animation are started, the output and display are started from the temporal beginning position of background music and background animation Do. After step S2003 is executed, the real setup command response process is ended.

<Hold command handling process>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine for the command handling process (FIG. 33: S1904).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process that is executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the pending command handling process will be described.

  In step S 2101, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information obtained based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the number of pending information obtained based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and these pending A process is performed to enable the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S2101 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start opening 33 is also referred to as the “first number of held pieces”, and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34 is It is also referred to as "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also referred to as "total pending number". After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

  In step S2102, a hold display control process is performed. Specifically, the number of pieces of suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 specified in step S 2101, and the number of the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34. The display mode (the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted) of the first hold display unit 37c and the second hold display unit 37d are controlled based on the above. After executing step S2102, the pending command handling process is ended.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the hold command handling process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been sent based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33 (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202 and sound light is emitted. Update processing of the first hold count counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first hold count counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of hold information acquired based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 in the sound-light MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold count counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command which is the current read target. After executing step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2204.

  When it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command which has been read this time is not transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33 (S2201: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening If it is determined that the data has been sent based on the winning on 34, the process proceeds to step S2203, and the process of updating the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. . The second hold number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning on the second start port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update processing of the second hold count counter area, the information of the second hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the command that is the current read target. After executing step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204.

  The reason why the processes in steps S2202 and S2203 are performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. I will not. Therefore, when the power is shut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 holds the hold information. While the sound emission control device 90 stores and holds the information, it is determined that the hold information is zero. In this case, assuming that voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold count counter area or the second hold count counter area every time it receives a hold command, main controller 60 actually stores the hold. There may be a disadvantage that the number of pending information being held and the number of pending information kept in the audio light emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the hold number, and voice emission control unit 90 transmits the hold command every time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of pending pieces included is set in the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In step S2204, the processing for updating the total hold number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total reserved number counter area, the sum of the number of pieces of suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the number of the suspending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 is heard. It is a counter area for specifying in side MPU92. In the updating process, the information of the total number of holding units counter area is the information of the sum of the information of the number of holding units measured in the first number of holding units counter area and the information of the number of holding units measured in the second number of holding units counter area Update to After executing step S2204, the update process at the time of the winning combination is ended.

<Effect setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 33: S1906).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect to be executed in the current game run . Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

  In step S2301, the fluctuation command received this time is read out, and from the command, information of presence / absence of big hit, type of big hit, presence / absence of reach occurrence, and change time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, it is determined whether the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2302 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2303.

  In step S2303, the effect type setting process is executed. The setting process of the effect type executed in step S2303 is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect in the game run. The process of setting the effect type will be described later. After executing step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2304.

  In step S2304, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the setting process of the stop symbol, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol on the effective line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination may be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbol and the combination of the same even symbol, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selectivity than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the combination of the same even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is an outlier, the presence or absence of reach is determined from the content of the fluctuation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not established on the effective line L, which corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L The information is determined as the information on the result of the current stop. On the other hand, if it is determined that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L when it is determined that it does not correspond to reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols on the effective line L Corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S2304, the process proceeds to step S2305.

  In step S2305, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game run is executed. In the processing, the information of the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the combination of the information of the fluctuation time and the information of the stop symbol specified in the above step S2304 Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2306.

  In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the current game run has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of the jackpot is determined based on the received variation command. If it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has been won (S2306: YES), the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2307, information of the effect type, the stop symbol and the variation display pattern set in the current game run is stored. Specifically, the setting content in the effect setting process of step S2303 is stored. The present process is performed to reproduce the effect in the game round in which the jackpot lottery is won. After executing step S2307, the process proceeds to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S2306: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2307.

  When it is determined in step S2302 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to the case a2 described in FIG. 9 is to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2308.

  In step S2308, information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process related to the previous game run is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  In step S2309, setting processing of the effect type is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the information of the fluctuation display pattern read in step S2308. That is, an effect of the same content as the effect performed in the previous game run is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2310.

  In step S2310, the stop symbol setting process is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the information on the fluctuation display pattern read in step S2308. That is, the stop symbol of the same content as the stop symbol displayed in the previous game run is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2311.

  In step S2311, the variation display pattern setting process is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern information read in step S2308. That is, the variable display pattern having the same content as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game run is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2312.

  In step S2312, information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern set in the current game run is set as the effect command. Thereafter, the process advances to step S2313 to transmit the effect command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received effect command. After step S2313 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2314. After the update process at the start of fluctuation is performed, the effect setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of the change will be described later.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The updating process at the start of the change is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2314) of the effect setting process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step S 2401, it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation command is a first fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S2401 that the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command (S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2402 and the first hold number counter stored in the sound side RAM 94 is used. Subtract one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2404.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2401 that the fluctuation command received this time is not the first fluctuation command (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403, and the second hold number stored in the sound light side RAM 94 Subtract 1 from the counter. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2404.

  In step S2404, the information on the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the change is ended.

<Opening effect setting process>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 33: S1908).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing opening effect setting processing. In step S2501, it is determined whether the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2501 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, a normal start effect is set as an opening effect. In the present embodiment, as described in the case a2 of FIG. 9, as the opening effect in the special game state, an opening effect to be executed only in special cases such as the specific start effect (see FIG. 10C) is prepared. doing. In step S 2502, the start effect (normal start effect) to be executed except for the special case such as the case a 2 is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2505.

  When it is determined in step S2501 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, the specific start effect is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2503, the process advances to step S2504 to turn off the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2505.

  In step S2505, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S2502 or step S2503. The display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received opening effect command. After executing step S2505, the present opening effect setting process ends.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 33: S1915).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S2601, it is determined whether the sound light side effect duplication flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2601 that the sound and light side effect duplication flag is not ON (S2601: NO), the process proceeds to step S2602.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2602 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2602: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2603. In other words, if it is determined that the effect corresponding to the ending period in the special gaming state after the first game round of case a1 of FIG. 9 is determined to be performed (suggestive effect, special game state reproduction effect and specific end effect), step S2603 move on.

  In step S2603, the information of the effect type, the stop symbol and the fluctuation display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 37) is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2604, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read in step S2603. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S2605, and the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect are set as the ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special gaming state after the first gaming cycle in case a1 of FIG. 9 is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2609.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2602 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2602: YES), the process proceeds to step S2606. That is, when it is determined that the effect (indication effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special gaming state after the first game round of case a2 of FIG. 9 is determined to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In step S2606, a suggestive effect is set as an ending effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2609.

  When it is determined in step S2601 that the sound and light side effect duplication flag is ON (S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2607. That is, when it is determined that the effect (normal ending effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special gaming state after the second game round of case a2 of FIG. 9 is determined to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2607.

  In step S2607, a normal ending effect is set as an ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special game state is ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2608.

  In step S2608, the sound-light-side effect duplication flag is set to OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S2609.

  In step S2609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect content set in step S2605, step S2606 or step S2607 is transmitted to the display MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. The display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command. After step S2609 is executed, the ending effect setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, as shown in steps S2603 to S2605 and S2609, the effect type, the stop pattern, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game cycle are shown. When the voice emission control device 90 stores the information and executes the special game state reproduction effect, part of the ending command is a command indicating the effect type, the stop pattern, and the fluctuation display pattern executed again in the first game cycle. By transmitting the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 as an image, an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives, as part of the ending command, a command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game run, the MPU 102 receives the command. The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern indicated by the command is read from the program ROM 103 and written in the work RAM 104. The pattern data table is necessary to display an image of one frame at the image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the present game turn presentation on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Processing is defined information group. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing in the current game circulation effect is defined.

  The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads an information group corresponding to each frame, and issues a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 to display an image of one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 according to a drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the symbol display device 41. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially instructs the VDP 105 to draw information on the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, whereby the effect type executed in the first game round, stop symbol The variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

  In the present embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above-mentioned processing, but in addition, in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, other processing as the special game state reproduction effect is executed. The processing of may be adopted. For example, instead of processing for storing information indicating the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game run in the voice emission control device 90 as in the present embodiment, display from the voice emission control device 90 The control device 100 transmits a command instructing to temporarily store a pattern data table corresponding to a combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first gaming round. The display control device 100 temporarily stores a pattern data table corresponding to a combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game time in accordance with the command.

  After that, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, the voice light emission control device 90 outputs a command to the display control device 100 to instruct drawing to the VDP 105 according to the temporarily stored data table for pattern. . The display control device 100 can execute the special game state reproduction effect by instructing the VDP 105 to draw in accordance with the temporarily stored pattern data table in accordance with the command. As described above, various processes can be adopted in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the processing for executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Waiting state transition process>
Next, the standby state transition process will be described. The standby state transition processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32: S1803).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the standby state transition process. In step S2701, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2701: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2702 that the demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S2702: NO), the process proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2702 that the demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S2702: YES), this standby state transition processing is ended.

  In step S2703, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON. The demonstration moving image start waiting flag is a flag for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is a period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image, and is turned on at the timing when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. It is a flag that is turned off at the timing when 5 seconds have elapsed without the return condition being met since the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S2703 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S2703: NO), the process proceeds to step S2704.

  In step S2704, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2704: YES), the process proceeds to step S2705. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2704: NO), this standby state transition processing is ended.

  In step S2705, processing is performed to reduce the output level (volume) of the sound. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the output level (sound volume) of the sound is set to 3000 levels, and processing for lowering the output level of the sound by one level is executed. In the present embodiment, since the standby state transition process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, the output level (volume of sound) of the audio becomes zero from the maximum value in about 6 seconds. After executing step S2705, the process proceeds to step S2706.

  In step S2706, it is determined whether the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S2706: YES), the process proceeds to step S2707, the volume reduction flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2708. Turn on the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S2706: NO), this standby state transition processing is ended.

  In step S2709, a demonstration video start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, “2500” (ie, 5.0 sec) is set in the demonstration moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94 b. The demo moving image start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the audio output level (volume) becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every 2 msec, that is, every time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Ru. After executing step S2709, the process for transitioning to the standby state is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON (S2703: YES), the process proceeds to step S2710.

  In step S 2710, it is determined whether the 5-second demonstration video start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, and if the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, the 5-second demo video start waiting period ends It is determined that If it is determined in step S 2710 that the demonstration moving image start waiting period has ended, the process proceeds to step S 2711. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 2710 that the demo moving image start waiting period has not ended, the present standby state transition processing is ended.

  In step S 2711, output stop processing of background music is executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step S2712 to transmit a demonstration video start command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2712, the process proceeds to step S2713.

  In step S2713, the demonstration video start waiting flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2714, and the demonstration video display flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2715, the cue determination flag is set to ON, and the standby state transition process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2701: YES), the process proceeds to step S2716, and it is determined whether the quick start determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2716 that the start determination flag is not ON (S2716: NO), the process proceeds to step S2717, and the voice output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. In the present embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the sound output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2717, the process proceeds to step S2718.

  In step S2718, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2718: YES), the process proceeds to step S2719, and the volume reduction flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2720. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2718: NO), the process proceeds to step S2720 without executing step S2719.

  In step S2720, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2720 that the demonstration video start wait is ON (S2720: YES), the process proceeds to step S2721 and the demonstration video start wait flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2722, and the return condition satisfaction flag is set to OFF. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S2720: NO), the process proceeds to step S2722 without executing step S2721, and the return condition satisfaction flag is turned OFF. After executing step S2722, the present standby state transition processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2716 that the quick start determination flag is ON (S2716: YES), the flow advances to step S2723 to transmit a demonstration moving image end command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the demo video end command executes processing for ending the display of the demo video. After step S2723 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2724 to turn off the demonstration moving image display flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2725.

  In step S2725, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporally leading position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2726.

  In step S2726, the voice output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. In the present embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the sound output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2726, the process proceeds to step S2727.

  In step S2727, background music output start processing is performed. Specifically, since the cue-up determination flag is ON, the output is started from the temporally leading position of the background music. Thereafter, the process advances to step S2728 to turn off the quick start determination flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2729, the return condition satisfaction flag is set to OFF, and the standby state transition process is ended.

<Various Processes Executed in Display Control Device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly performed from the main processing repeatedly executed until the power is shut off after the power is turned on and the processing when the command is received from the sound emission control device 90 There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio light emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S2801, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and processing of clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2802.

  In step S2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing thereafter executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing command interruption processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing performed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the VDP 105 draws the image and Execute the instructions on the display.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds for which drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the drawing processing or the display processing of the image is not finished, so the drawing of a new image is started or displayed while drawing the image. It is possible to suppress the development of the image accompanying the new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the middle is stored. The details of the process of each step of the V interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S3001, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 43), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a rendering command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the rendering mode specified by the rendering command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If a rendering operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the rendering operation Control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S3001), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. The command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt process is executed, and therefore, there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it quickly grasps the mode of the effects such as the notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and displays the effect image according to the mode The drawing of the image can be controlled to be displayed on the device 41. Details of the command handling process will be described later.

  In step S3002, display setting processing is performed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S3001) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the symbol display device 41 . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, task processing is performed. In task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S3002), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is selected. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle and the like are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3004.

  In step S3004, a drawing process is performed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 performs drawing processing of an image based on these pieces of information, and also causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing, together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3005 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

<Processing for command>
Next, command corresponding processing will be described. The command response process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 as a subroutine of the V interrupt process (FIG. 44: S3001).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. In step S3101, it is determined whether a rendering command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3101 that a rendering command is stored, the process advances to step S3102 to execute display start processing of a rendering corresponding to the rendering command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3101 that the rendering command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3103 without executing step S3102.

  In step S3103, it is determined whether an opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is stored, the process advances to step S3104 to execute display start processing of the opening effect corresponding to the opening effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode specified by the opening effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Further, after the opening effect is finished, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the open / close execution mode effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3104, the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing step S3104.

  In step S3105, it is determined whether an ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3105 that an ending effect command is stored, the process advances to step S3106 to execute display starting processing of ending effect corresponding to the ending effect command. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the effect mode specified by the ending effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3106, the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 without executing step S3106.

  In step S3107, it is determined whether a demo moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3107 that the demonstration video start command is stored, the process advances to step S3108 to execute display start processing of the demonstration video. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the demonstration moving image specified by the demonstration moving image start command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the present embodiment, the display of the demonstration video is repeated until the demonstration video end command described later is received. After executing step S3108, the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3107 that the demonstration moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3109 without executing step S3108.

  In step S3109, it is determined whether a demo moving image end command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3109 that the demo video end command is stored, the process advances to step S3110 to execute processing for ending the display of the demo video. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3111. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3109 that the demonstration moving image end command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3111 without executing step S3110.

  In step S3111, it is determined whether a background moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112 to execute processing for starting display of the background moving image. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporally leading position. After executing step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112.

  In step S3113, it is determined whether another command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, when the rendering operation command described above is stored, the processing in the case where the rendering operation command described above is stored is executed. Thereafter, this command handling process is ended.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game round is out, the notice effect performed after the suggestion effect, the reach effect The result notification effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect performed in the first game run, and the player also recognizes that it is an effect that reproduces the effect already performed. On the other hand, as in the case a2, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second gaming round is won, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notice effect executed after the suggestion effect are already executed on the effect It is executed as an effect that reproduces the effect, but is actually a game repetition effect that is executed due to having won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. If the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 has been previously appreciated, the player executes the game reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time, similar to case a1. It is difficult to predict that the game has been won in the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run, while recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the effect. In such a state, the player is notified that the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second gaming round has been won by the result notification staging after the preliminary announcement effect and the reach presentation are executed in the second gaming round, Is not the reproduction of the effect performed in the first game round, but the first game play, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect performed in the second game time for the first time at that time, and the second game Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery pertaining to the times. Thus, by executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game repetition reproduction effect in the case a2, not only the unexpectedness is given to the game, but also at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced. The player can be given a sense of expectation for the effect to be played. In addition, by making the second gaming round in the case a2 an expansion that the player does not expect, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the case of case a2, it is suggested to reproduce the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game round despite the jackpot lottery in the second game round being won. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is more difficult for the player to further predict that the jackpot lottery according to the second gaming round has been won. Therefore, unexpectedness can be further imparted to the game.

  In addition, when winning a big hit lottery concerning the 2nd game time in case a2, the reach production which is executed after the suggestion production is executed as a reproduction of the production which is already executed in the production, but it is actually Is executed due to having won the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game time. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting the player the expectation regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, and when it is executed as a reproduction of the effect already executed, Although the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect already executed, in practice, at least three cases are set which are executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game time can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the display control device is in the case where the recovery condition is satisfied after the volume of background music becomes zero and the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 11). 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying a demonstration moving image to the mode of displaying a background moving image. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image. Further, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and when outputting the background music, from the predetermined temporal position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, the display of the background moving picture and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving picture starts is changed according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the display control device 100 is set when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and the display of the demonstration moving image is started (FIG. 11). The display starts from the temporal top position "01" of the background moving image, and the sound emission control device 90 starts output from the temporal top position "01" of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the temporally intermediate position of the background moving image and the output is started from the temporally intermediate position of the background music. For example, if adopting a configuration in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the background moving image and the output is started from the position in the middle of the background music, the player can Since the background moving image and the background music are to be watched from a position on the way in time, there is a possibility that the user may feel discomfort or that the background moving image and the background music may not be full. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to make the player watch the background moving image and the background music from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. The player can be satisfied that the background moving image and the background music can all be watched from the temporal top position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the display control is performed when the return condition is satisfied after the background music volume has become zero and before the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 12). The apparatus 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without discomfort.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. Since the sound emission control device 90 executes processing to return the volume of background music to the volume preset by the player, the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization of the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music. It is possible to return to the mode prior to using a natural flow without discomfort.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds have elapsed without any of the special gaming state and the next gaming cycle having been started after the gaming season has ended. It is possible to reduce the volume of background music with the passage of time while the player is not likely to play a game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game play is started in the standby state, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the background music. Since the output mode returns to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume set in advance by the player, the expectation that the game play has started can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 46 is a time chart showing a process performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the case a2 shown in FIG. 9 (b) of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, and the jackpot lottery is won in the second gaming round, and the first gaming round The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the second game cycle is continuous with the second game cycle has been described.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as the case b1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, and the jackpot lottery is won in the second gaming round, and A process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game cycle (hereinafter also referred to as a preceding game cycle) between one game cycle and the second game cycle will be described. In addition, the jackpot lottery in the previous game time is out.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game run. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. In the special game state, an opening effect, an open / close execution mode and an ending effect are executed. In the present embodiment, in the special game state after the first game round, the opening effect suggests the beginning of the special game state (the normal opening effect), and the ending effect indicates the end of the special game state Ending effect (normal ending effect) is executed. That is, as in the case a2 of FIG. 9B, the suggestion effect is not executed as the ending effect of the special game state.

  When the special game state is ended, the preceding game cycle is executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is performed in the preceding game.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of the symbol display device 41 when executing the suggestion effect in the preceding game play. As shown in the drawing, when the suggestion effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. And in display field 41aS, change display and stop display of a symbol are performed. Specifically, of the unit game time, the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed in the fluctuation time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, a suggestive effect is performed. In this manner, by displaying the variable display and the stop display of the symbol on a small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggested effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the preceding game. In addition, it is possible not to display the fluctuation display and stop display of the symbol on the display surface 41a, and it is also possible to make the predetermined mark or character displayed in synchronization with the fluctuation display and the stop display of the symbol blink and light. . Even in this way, it is possible to execute the suggested effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the preceding game.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game run after executing the preceding game run. As described above, in the example shown in the case b1 of FIG. 46 (a), the jackpot lottery is won also in the second gaming round. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as an effect in the second game play, a game repetition play that reproduces the effect executed in the first game play. That is, the notice effect, reach effect and result notice effect (big hit notice) executed in the first gaming round are executed. In this case, the notification effect (big hit notification) as a result has a function as a part of the game repetition effect and also has a function as a result notification about the jackpot lottery of the second game play. Then, with the end of the game repetition effect, the second game time is ended.

  Since the jackpot lottery is won in the second game play, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the end of the second game play. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect of the special game state thereafter, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time is a winning and the game repetition effect is executed in the second game time.

  The second embodiment can be realized, for example, by the process described below.

  When the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the effects executed in the first gaming round (in the present embodiment, the advance notice in this embodiment) as in the processing executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 37: S2307) Store the effect, reach effect and result notification effect). In addition, the content to memorize | store may be another information, if it is information which can specify not only the presentation itself performed in the 1st game time but the presentation performed in the 1st game time. That is, the effects performed in the first game, such as information indicating the type (pattern) of effects performed in the first game, and address information of a memory in which effects performed in the first game are stored. The information may be any information that can be called again.

  After storing the effects executed in the first gaming round, the game determination (second gaming round) in which the jackpot lottery is won is specified by the destination determination processing, which is the gaming round executed after the first gaming round Then, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notice effect in the first game time stored are executed as a game reproduction effect in the second game time. At that time, for example, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game cycle are set to be the second by setting the variation time to be the same for any game cycle that has won the jackpot lottery. It is possible to execute within the fluctuation time in game time.

  In addition, when there is a preceding game time between the first game time and the second game time, this embodiment is realized by executing the suggestion effect according to the fluctuation time of each preceding game time. can do. In addition, when there are a plurality of preceding game times, a suggestion effect corresponding to each fluctuation time may be executed in each preceding game time, for example, a preceding game time to be executed immediately before the second game time. In the other preceding game times, a normal effect may be performed.

  Further, the number of preceding game times is not limited to one, and when a plurality of preceding game times exist continuously between the first game time and the second game time, the first game time and You may set the upper limit of the number of game times permitted as a preceding game time between the second game time.

  FIG. 46 (b) is a time chart explaining an example of processing in the case where a plurality of preceding game times exist continuously between the first game time and the second game time. As shown in the figure, for example, after winning the big hit lottery in the first game time, if there are five or less preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out (FIG. 46 (b )), In the second game turn to win the jackpot lottery after that, to execute the game play reproduction effect that reproduces the effect performed in the first game play, if there are six or more preceding game times (Not shown in the drawings), it is also possible not to execute the game repetition reproduction effect in the second game time of winning the jackpot lottery afterward. As the processing, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the effects executed in the first gaming round (this embodiment) as in the processing executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 46: S2307) In the above, the advance presentation effect, the reach effect and the result announcement effect) are stored in the sound side RAM 94.

  In addition, there is provided a preceding game time counter for counting the number of preceding game times between the first game time and the second game time, and when determining the effect of the second game time for winning the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. If the counter value is 5 or less, the effect executed in the first game cycle is read out from the sound light side RAM 94, and in the second game cycle, the game cycle to reproduce the effect executed in the first game cycle The reproduction effect is executed, and when the counter value is 6 or more, the normal jackpot effect is performed in the second game play. By doing this, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. In addition, as for the suggestion effect, it is executed in the previous game time. Specifically, by the first determination process, the preceding game play immediately before the second play game is specified, and it is decided to execute the suggestion effect in the preceding play game. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the preceding game is determined, the suggestion effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of the preceding game is selected and executed. By doing this, it is possible to execute the game repetition reproduction effect even in the case where a plurality of preceding game times exist continuously between the first game time and the second game time. it can. In the present description, among the preceding game times after the first game time winning the big hit lottery, when there are six or more preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out. After that, although it is assumed that the game repeat reproduction effect is not executed in the second game turn to win the big hit lottery, the number (threshold value) of preceding game times determined not to execute the game repeat effect is limited to six. It can be set to any number.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time, another game is possible. By performing the suggestion effect in the turn, the suggestion effect and the game reproduction effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In addition, even when a plurality of other game times (preceding game times) exist between the first game time and the second game time, a suggested effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of each preceding game time By executing this, it is possible to execute the game reproduction effect in the second game play without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

C. Third embodiment:
FIG. 48 is a time chart explaining the process performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as a special game state reproduction effect and a game repetition reproduction effect, it reproduces at least a part of the effects executed in the game run before the first game play (FIG. 48: first preceding game play) A case where at least a part of the effect performed in the first game is reproduced will be described. In the present description, the features of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases, case c1 and case c2, as examples.

  FIG. 48 (a) shows a case c1 in which the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery occurs in the second game round executed after the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 Shows the process to be performed. In addition, as shown in the drawing, before the first gaming round to win the jackpot lottery, there is a first preceding gaming round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game cycle and the first game cycle. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is an effect of giving notice that the jackpot lottery will be won in the first game play. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game run. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  In addition, the result notification effect in the first advance game time in the case of executing the continuous effect, if it is explained using the above-mentioned FIG. 47, in the display area 41aS of the display surface 41a, the variable display and the stop display of the symbol are executed . Specifically, of the unit game time, the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed in the fluctuation time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, continuous effect is performed in the display area 41aL. By doing this, it is possible to execute a series of continuous effects from the first preceding game cycle to the first game cycle without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), after executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect in the ending period. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the reproduction effect is performed on the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game cycle to the first game cycle and the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game cycle Do. In addition, when the variable display and stop display of the symbol are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a at the time of executing the special game state reproduction effect are actually displayed in the first game round It is partly different from the contents of the symbol.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the special game state reproduction effect, and then executes the specific end effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes a second gaming cycle. The jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game time is out. The pachinko machine 10 executes a normal advance notice effect and a result notice effect (off notice) in the second gaming session.

  Next, the case c2 shown in FIG. 48 (b) will be described. In the case c2, as in the case c1, before the first gaming round to win the jackpot lottery, there is a first preceding gaming round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out. Furthermore, in the case c2, before the second game cycle for winning the jackpot lottery, there is a second preceding game game where the lottery result for the jackpot lottery is out.

  Similar to the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game cycle and the first game cycle. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game run. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  After executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state.

  In the case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestive effect during the ending period. Then, the game repetition reproduction effect is executed over the second preceding game time and the second game time. In case c2, as the game repetition reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are executed.

  After the end of the second gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the open / close execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game cycle, the normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

  The third embodiment can be realized, for example, by the specific process described below.

  In the present embodiment, the effect executed in the four game cycles already executed is always stored in the RAM 96. Then, every time a winning to the first starting opening 33 occurs, the result of the jackpot lottery in the game run executed by the winning is grasped by the first determination processing.

  If it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game round is the jackpot as a result of the first judgment processing, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game round held one before the first game round If the result is off, continuous rendering is executed over the first preceding game time and the first game time.

  Then, when there are two or more held game times after the first game time until the first game time is ended, the result of the big hit lottery of the two game times is grasped by the first judgment process, If the result of the jackpot lottery of the two game times is out of a row, the case c1 is executed. That is, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game cycle.

  In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the first played game is out of the two game times, and the result of the jackpot of the first played game is the jackpot, the case c2 is executed. . That is, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period of the special gaming state to be executed after the first game cycle, and the game repetition effect is executed in the second preceding game cycle and the second game cycle.

  In case c2, if there is no second preceding game time, that is, if the jackpot lottery in the game time to be executed after the special gaming state after the first game time is a big hit, the second game time In the game, the continuous effects executed from the first preceding game play to the first game play may be executed as a game play effect. In this case, when the fluctuation time of the second game number is shorter than the time required to reproduce all of the continuous effects, only a part of the continuous effects may be reproduced.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, continuous effects are executed from the game play before the first game play to the first game play, and Also, as the special game state reproduction effect and the game repetition effect, the continuous effect can be reproduced. Further, by using the processes of the case c1 and the case c2 in combination, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention to the continuous effect.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
FIG. 49 is a time chart explaining the process performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out is executed as a game repetition effect in a second game round executed after the first game round. In the present description, the features of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of the case d1 and the case d2 as examples.

  FIG. 49 (a) shows, as case d1, the pachinko machine 10 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is won in the second game round executed after the first game round. It shows the process to be performed. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect in the first game play. The reach effect to be performed in this case is an effect that indicates to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 carries out an out-of-position notification in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a second gaming round. In the second gaming session, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect, a game repeat effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggested effect, an effect that suggests that the effect performed in the first game is reproduced, and also performs an advance effect and a reach performed in the first game period as a game reproduction effect. Perform the production. In addition, as a result notification effect, we make a big hit notice.

  After executing the second gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start presentation as an opening presentation. Also, as the ending effect, the normal ending effect is executed.

  Next, the case d2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 49 (b), the case d2 falls out of the jackpot lottery in the first game time and further falls out of the jackpot lottery in the second game time run after the first game time. The process which the pachinko machine 10 performs is shown. As illustrated, in the first game play, the notice effect and the reach effect are executed. The reach effect to be performed in this case is an effect that indicates to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 carries out an out-of-position notification in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a second gaming round. In the second gaming session, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect, a game repeat effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggested effect, an effect that suggests that the effect performed in the first game is reproduced, and also performs an advance effect and a reach performed in the first game period as a game reproduction effect. Perform the production. In addition, as a result notification effect, out-of-range notification is performed.

  The fourth embodiment can be realized, for example, by the specific process described below.

  By executing the first determination process each time a winning to the first starting opening 33 occurs, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the held game round is successful. And, when it is specified that the jackpot lottery in the game times held at least two or more ahead has been won, the game time in which the jackpot lottery has been elected (equivalent to the second game time of the case d1) While performing advance notice effect and reach effect in the game round (corresponding to the first game time) held one before, the notice effect and reach effect executed are stored. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed preview effect and the reach effect itself, and may be other information as long as it is information that can read the executed advance effect and the reach effect again. Good.

  After executing the reach effect in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 carries out the off notice as the result notice effect. After that, in the second gaming session, while performing the suggestion effect, the stored notice effect and the reach effect are executed as the game effect. In addition, the specific start effect executed in the special game state after the second game is realized by executing the same process as the opening effect setting process performed by the sound emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. Case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized by executing such processing.

  In addition, case d2 is executed ahead of the two reserved game times when there are two consecutive game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out by executing the first determination process. It can be realized by reproducing reach effects in the game times played, and in the game times to be performed later, the suggested effects and the notice effects and reach effects performed in the previous game times as the game reproduction effect. . In this case, in the second gaming round, the fluctuation time of the second gaming round is shorter than the time required to execute all of the advance presentation effect and the reach presentation in the first gaming round as a game replay reproduction effect. In the case, for example, part or all of the advance notice effect to be executed as the game repeat effect may be omitted according to the fluctuation time of the second game time.

  On the other hand, if, in the second gaming round, the fluctuation time of the second gaming round is longer than the time required to execute all of the advance presentation and reach presentation in the first gaming round as the gaming round reproduction staging In, for example, according to the fluctuation time of the 2nd game time, execution time of suggestion production may be made long production. Necessary for suggestive effects and game repercussion effects by preparing a plurality of types of suggestive effects corresponding to the time necessary for the effect, and selecting the optimal suggestive effects according to the fluctuation time of the second game cycle Time can be made the same as the fluctuation time of the second game time.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, by executing the processing of the case d1, although the jackpot lottery relating to the second gaming round has been elected, Since the effect executed in the first game round where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out is executed in the second game round as the game repetition reproduction effect, the jackpot lottery according to the second game round is won It is difficult to make a player expect. In addition, by executing the suggestion effect which suggests reproducing the effect in the first game round which went out to the jackpot lottery before the execution of the game repetition reproduction effect, in the second game round, the first game It is possible to further give the player the recognition that the effect performed in the game is only reproduced. Then, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second gaming round has been won for the first time only after notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second gaming round by the notification means. Can be given. That is, by making the second game play an expansion unanticipated by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run is won by executing the processing of the case d2, also when the lottery result for the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run is out, Since the game repetition reproduction effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery concerning the game circulation in which the game circulation reproduction effect is executed is not necessarily a jackpot. As a result, when the game repetition effect is executed, the player is given an emotional feeling of expectation and a sense of anticipation, and the player's attention to the game times in which the already executed effect is reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. Fifth embodiment (an example of setting process of effect type):
Next, as a fifth embodiment, an example of a process executed in the effect type setting process (FIG. 37: S2303) described in the first embodiment will be described. The setting process of the effect type is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game run in the sound emission control device 90 (sound side MPU 92). In the present description, the outline of the process of setting the effect type performed by the sound-light MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. Thereafter, the details of the process will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory view showing an outline of setting processing of effect type. When the sound light side MPU 92 starts setting processing of the effect type, the display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, the display pattern random number counter for object C to determine the contents of the notice effect The counter value is acquired at a predetermined timing from each random number counter of C13.

  Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a random number counter used to determine how to combine a plurality of object images constituting the notice effect in each game play. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time update is performed, and the value is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short intervals. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect in each game run is configured by combining three types of object images. The display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter C13 for object C are random numbers for determining the display mode of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, how to combine the three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the timing of display are determined, and are set as advance notice effects. Here, three types of object images constituting the notice effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory view showing an object A which is an object image constituting the advance notice effect. As illustrated, the object A shows the behavior of the character representing a person, and is composed of three images of an image A1, an image A2, and an image A3. 51 (a) shows an image A1, FIG. 51 (b) shows an image A2, and FIG. 51 (c) shows an image A3. The object A is an image which changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images A1, A2, and A3 in a predetermined order, that is, when displayed as an object image of a moving image, and One of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing an object B which is an object image constituting the notice effect. As illustrated, the object B shows how the weather changes, and is composed of three images of an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3. 52 (a) shows the image B1, FIG. 52 (b) shows the image B2, and FIG. 52 (c) shows the image B3. The object B is an image which changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images B1, B2, and B3 in a predetermined order, that is, when displayed as an object image of a moving image, There is a case where one of the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 is displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory view showing an object C which is an object image constituting the advance notice effect. As illustrated, the object C shows the behavior of the dog contained in the box, and is composed of three images of an image C1, an image C2, and an image C3. FIG. 53 (a) shows the image C1, FIG. 53 (b) shows the image C2, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the image C3. The object C is displayed as an image which changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images C1, C2, and C3 in a predetermined order, that is, when displayed as an object image of a moving image, and There is a case where one of the image C1, the image C2 and the image C3 is displayed as a still image by being displayed continuously for a predetermined period.

  As described above, in the effect type setting process in the present embodiment, the advance effect is set by combining the three types of object images (objects A to C) described with reference to FIGS.

  Description is returned to FIG. After acquiring the counter values from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table for object A, the display pattern table for object B, and the display pattern table for object C, and displays each display pattern random number counter. The collation with each counter value acquired from C11 to C13 is executed, and the display pattern is determined for each object.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for object A as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for the object A has a big hit if the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, and if the result of the big hit lottery is off and the reach effect is executed (“off (reach)), the big hit It is divided into three cases where the result of the lottery is out and the reach effect is not executed ("out (reach no)"), and the value of the display pattern random number counter of 0 to 99 for each case. In the present embodiment, as the display pattern of the object A, a pattern (not displayed) in which the object A is not displayed and a pattern in which only the image A1 is displayed (the display pattern of the object A (see FIG. 54). A1) a pattern (A1-A2) for sequentially displaying an image A1 and an image A2, a pattern for sequentially displaying an image A1, an image A2, and an image A3 (A1) 1-A2 over A3) and is set in advance.

  When setting the advance notice effect in the predetermined game play, the sound-light side MPU 92 checks which of the following cases corresponds to the game play: big hit, missed (reach present), or missed (reach no). Then, in the display pattern table, the corresponding part of the game time is referred to. For example, when the game play is a jackpot, the "jackpot" column of the display pattern table is referred to. And it collates with the value of the acquired display pattern random number counter C11, and determines a display pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, the method of allocating the value of the random number to each display pattern is different in each case of the jackpot, the presence (reach) and the absence (reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed in the case of a jackpot, displayed in the case of out (reach), and displayed in the case of out (reach). It is different from That is, the display probability of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is higher in the order of the jackpot, the out (reach), and the out (reach). Conversely, the displayed probability of the display pattern (A1) is higher in the order of out (reach nothing), out (reach existence), and the jackpot. Therefore, in the notice effect in the game session, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed has a higher probability of being a big win than the case where only the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) Is set so that the probability of being a big hit is higher in the case where the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed than in the case where is displayed. That is, the effect by the object A indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player by suggesting the probability of the jackpot of the game times, and also the degree of expectation of the jackpot to the player (hereinafter, the degree of expectation Functions as a step-up effect.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C is different in the method of distributing the value of the random number in each of the big hit, the out (reach) and the out (reach). The expectation of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object A, the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object B, and the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the step-up instruction of the object C are respectively different. For example, in the object B, the value of the display pattern random number in the display pattern for the object B is not displayed in the game round in the case of disengaging (reaching no) but is displayed in the disengaging (reaching) and jackpot cases. It may be distributed. Specifically, in the case of out of reach (no reach) in the display pattern for object B, this can be realized by setting “non-display” in all cases of the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99. By doing this, the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the object A when the object B is not displayed can be made different from the expectation of the jackpot when the object A and the object B are displayed. That is, in the display pattern table of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C, the method of distributing the value of the random number in each case of the big hit, the out (reach) and the out (reach no) is set differently. In addition to the step-up aspect of each object image, the jackpot expectation can be expressed also by the presence or absence of display of each object. By doing this, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C is divided into three cases of jackpot, out (reach) and out (reach) and each display pattern random number For example, the division of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is further classified into 16R probability variation jackpots, 8R probability variation jackpots, 16R normal jackpots, 8R normal jackpots, rendering by the object B is expected for a probability variation jackpot You may make it function as a step-up effect which shows a degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which a latent probability change state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is a high probability mode) exists, the effect by the object C is the expectation of the probability change state of the current game It may be made to function as a step-up effect showing. As described above, if the object A, the object B, and the object C have a function that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has different types (for example, jackpot expectations and The degree of pros and cons of the game may be shown.

  As shown in FIG. 50, after determining the display pattern for the object A, the object B, and the object C, the sound-light side MPU 92 arranges the objects in order to combine the objects and display them on the display surface 41a. Set the position and the display timing of each object. Specifically, the sound light side MPU 92 determines the arrangement position of each object and the display timing with reference to the arrangement / timing setting table set in advance.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory view of the arrangement / timing setting table. As illustrated, the arrangement / timing setting table starts displaying on the display surface 41a of each object, the display object determined to be displayed, the coordinates of the arrangement position on the display surface 41a of each object to be displayed, and The timing is set in association with each other. The display pattern determined in the process using the random number counter is, for example, a display pattern (A1-A2) for object A, a display pattern (not shown) for object B, and a display pattern (C1-C2- for object C). In the case of C3), since the objects to be displayed are the object A and the object C, reference is made to “A · C” in the left column of the arrangement / timing setting table. In this case, as shown in the middle column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the arrangement coordinates of the object A and the object C are such that the center coordinates of the object A are located at (Xa2, Ya2) of the display surface 41a for the object A. The object C is displayed in such a manner that the center coordinates of the object C are positioned at (Xc1, Yc1) of the display surface 41a. Furthermore, in this case, as shown in the right column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the display of object A starts 2 seconds after the game is started, and the display of object C is started after the game is started The display is set to start after one second of tc.

  Although the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object may be set to change with time. That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having relevance, and each object displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a is The arrangement of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table and the timing of the display start are set so as not to overlap each other.

  In the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative position between the objects is taken into consideration, and the display surface 41 a is in such a manner that the objects have relevance. As shown in FIG. 5, the arrangement of display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table (relative arrangement position between objects) and the timing of display start (relative timing between objects) are set. Furthermore, the timing of arrangement of display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table and the timing of display start are set so that objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap with each other.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the notice effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. The example of FIG. 56 shows the case where the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 change with time. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 56 (a), FIG. 56 (b) and FIG. 56 (c). FIG. 56 shows a notice effect that object A, object B and object C are combined, and display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed for object A, and display pattern (B1-B2) for object B. -B3) is displayed, and for the object C, the notice effect set so as to display the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is shown.

  In the notice effect shown in FIG. 56, a person who was walking on a sunny day finds a box and notices that the dog is in the box while the weather gradually gets worse, and raises a dog umbrella. It is expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative position between the objects is considered, and each object has relevance. Furthermore, the timing of the arrangement of the display object in the arrangement / timing setting table and the display start timing is set so as to be displayed on the display surface 41 a in a manner having a narrative. By doing this, it is possible to make the advance notice effect executed by displaying a plurality of types of object images in the same period into an effect that the player does not have a sense of incongruity, and by having a narrative character. It is possible to improve interest.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (c), the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a without an image frame indicating the area of the object image. Specifically, the object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character representing a person, and a process for displaying only a layer image showing a character representing a person Is running. By doing this, it is possible to make an effect in which a plurality of object images are displayed an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed so as not to display the image frame, but the image A1 displayed as the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) The image frame of part or all of the image A2 and the image A3 may not be displayed. The same process may be performed on other object images.

  The sound light side MPU 92 sets the arrangement position of each object and the display timing of each object in this manner, and sets the notice effect.

  Next, the process of setting the effect type described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing setting processing of effect type. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2303) of effect setting process.

  In step S3201, counter values are acquired from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3202, and it is checked whether the game times for which the advance notice effect is to be set are the jackpot, the miss (reach), or the miss (reach not). After executing step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3203, the display patterns of the objects A to C are referenced to determine the display pattern of each object. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3204.

  In step S3204, when the display pattern is set in each object, it is determined whether or not there is no object display in the notice effect of the game run. That is, it is determined whether the display pattern of all the objects A to C is "non-display".

  If it is determined in step S3204 that the object display is not absent (not displayed) in the notice effect in the game run (S3204: NO), the process proceeds to step S3205, and the arrangement / timing setting table is referred to and displayed. The coordinates of the arrangement position on the display surface 41a of each object and the timing to start the display on the display surface 41a are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3206.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3204 that the object display is absent (not displayed) in the notice effect of the game run (S3204: YES), the process proceeds to step S3206 without executing step S3205.

  In step S3206, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display object, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a, and the timing to start the display of each object are set as the advance notice effect in the game run. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3207.

  In step S3207, it is determined whether or not the game play is a jackpot or a miss (reach). In other words, it is determined whether or not reach effect is to be executed after the advance effect is executed in the game session.

  In step S3207, when it is determined that the game play is a big hit or out (reach) (S3207: YES), the process proceeds to step S3208, and reach effect setting processing is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3207 that the game play is not a jackpot or a miss (reach) (S3207: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 without executing step S3208.

  In step S3209, the advance notice effect and the reach effect set in step S3206 and step S3208 are set as an effect command. Thereafter, the process of setting the effect type is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the objects are displayed in the same period as the preview effect, they are displayed on the display surface 41 a in a mutually relevant manner, and therefore, the objects are the same. The effect performed by being displayed in the period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, each object is displayed in the same period as other objects, and not displayed in the same period (that is, when each object is displayed alone). The presentation can be performed, and the object can be used effectively.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 56, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed in a related manner in a narrative manner, so that the plurality of object images are in the same period The effect to be executed by being displayed on the screen can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by having a narrative effect produced by displaying a plurality of object images in the same period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C are different in how random numbers are distributed in the respective cases of jackpot, out (reach) and out (reach). The degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game indicated by the step-up effect by the object images of the object A, the object B and the object C and the expectation of the jackpot differ from one another. That is, even when each object is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game varies depending on whether or not other objects are also displayed in the same period, so the player's attention to the effect, the degree of interest, Expectations can be improved.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the setting of the display pattern table, for example, the division of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is performed by 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, 16R normal variation, 8R normal variation By dividing into jackpots, the effect by the object B can be functioned as a step-up effect that indicates the expected degree of probability variation jackpot. That is, the effect by each object can be functioned as an effect indicating the degree of advantage / unfavorability of different types of games. Therefore, each object can be used to indicate the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the object images are displayed in the same period, the relative positions of the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a at the predetermined arrangement positions. A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative position between the objects is taken into consideration, and the arrangement and timing are such that each object is related. The arrangement of display objects in the setting table and the timing of the start of display are set. Further, the timing of arrangement of display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table and timing of display start are set so that objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period can improve the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression. In addition, since each object image is displayed in the same period and not displayed in the same period (that is, each object is displayed alone), a plurality of effects are performed using each object image. Object image can be used effectively.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, for example, the object A includes the display pattern (A1), the display pattern (A1-A2), and the display pattern (A1-A2-A3). May be displayed in three different display modes. Relative positions with respect to other object images (object B and object C) are displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement in correspondence with each display mode. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be performed. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes (display patterns), the relative position between each object image is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined arrangement position, so that in each display mode, each object Images are not superimposed and displayed without any relevance. Therefore, various effects performed by displaying each object image in the same period can improve the quality of the effects without giving the player a complicated impression.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 55, the timing at which display of each object is started on the display surface 41a is set in advance by the arrangement / timing setting table. Therefore, when each object image is displayed in the same period, it is displayed at a relatively predetermined timing between the object images, and therefore, each object image is displayed at a non-relevant timing. I have not. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since each object image is an image (moving image in the present embodiment) that changes with time, various effects can be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that the object A will be a big hit in the big hit lottery when it is displayed as the advance effect, the probability that it will be a big hit in the big hit lottery when the object B is displayed as the advance effect, and the object C The probability of becoming a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when is displayed as a preliminary effect is different from each other. Furthermore, the probability of becoming a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object images are combined and displayed as the preview effect also differs from one another. By doing this, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

F. Sixth embodiment (another example of setting process of effect type):
Next, as a sixth embodiment, another example of effect type setting processing (FIG. 37: S2303) will be described. As described above, the setting process of the effect type is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game round in the sound emission control device 90 (sound side MPU 92). In the present description, the outline of the process of setting the effect type performed by the sound-light MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. Thereafter, the details of the process will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of an outline of setting processing of effect type in the sixth embodiment. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described fifth embodiment is the method of determining the type of object to be displayed as the preview effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of the objects to be displayed in the notice effect is determined by the display pattern random number and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a combination of a plurality of types of objects to be displayed in the notice effect is preset by the display object table, and the sound light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21 and displays By collating with the object table, the combination of objects to be displayed in the preview effect is determined.

  In the fifth embodiment, the arrangement position of the object to be displayed in the notice effect and the display start timing are determined by the arrangement / timing setting table. However, in the present embodiment, each of the combinations of objects to be displayed is determined. The arrangement position of each object and the timing of the start of display are set in advance corresponding to the display pattern of. The details will be described below.

  When the sound-light-side MPU 92 starts the process of setting the effect type, the sound-light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display object random number counter C21 at a predetermined timing. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time update is performed, and the value is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, executes the collation with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and displays the object to be displayed in the notice effect. Determine the combination.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a display object table. As illustrated, in the display object table, the counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and the combination of each object to be displayed as the advance notice effect are set in association with each other. For example, when the value of the acquired display object random number counter C21 is 75, the object A and the object C are set as object images to be displayed in the notice effect. The display object table in this embodiment is different in the method of allocating the value of the display object random number (the number of values to be allocated) to the combination of each object displayed as the advance notice effect. For example, when only the object A is displayed as a display object, the value of the display object random number is 0 to 19, and 20 values are assigned. When the object A and the object B are displayed, the values of the display object random numbers are 60 to 71, and 12 values are assigned. When the object A, the object B, and the object C are displayed, the values of the display object random numbers are 96 to 99, and four values are assigned. Thus, the frequency at which the combination of each object is displayed as the advance notice effect is different because the number of allocations of the values of the display object random number to the combination of each object is different.

  Description is returned to FIG. After determining the combination of the objects to be displayed in the advance presentation effect, the sound-light side MPU 92 acquires counter values at a predetermined timing from the display pattern random number counter C22. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time update is performed, and the value is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of display objects determined previously, and collates the acquired display pattern random number counter C22 with the counter value To determine the display pattern corresponding to the combination of display objects. FIG. 58 shows a case where it is determined by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table that the object A and the object C are to be displayed as a combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect. In this case, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory view showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for AC is divided into three cases of jackpot, out (reach) and out (reach). Then, for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 and the display pattern of the effect using the object A and the object C are set in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, as a display pattern using the object A and the object C, a pattern (not displayed) in which neither the object A nor the object C is displayed is combined with the image A1 of the object A and the image C1 of the object C A pattern (A1 / C1) to be displayed, a pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2) to display the image C1 of the object C and the image C2 while displaying the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A in order, an image of the object A A display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set which displays A1 and image A2 in order and displays image C1 of object C, image C2 and image C3 in order. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for each display pattern, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41 a and the timing of display start are set in advance, and the display pattern is determined. The placement position and the timing of the display start are determined.

  For example, when it is determined that the game A is a big hit and the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table display the object A and the object C as a combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect. In the case where the counter value acquired by the display pattern random number counter C22 is "62", the display pattern of the notice effect is determined as (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 61 (a), FIG. 61 (b), and 54 (c). As illustrated, in the notice effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are sequentially displayed on the display surface 41a, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are sequentially displayed. As described above, in the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3), the arrangement positions of the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A and the timing of the display start, the image C1 of the object C, the image C2 and the image C3 Since the arrangement position and the timing of the display start are set in advance, the mode of the advance presentation effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  Although the display pattern table for AC has been described in FIG. 60, a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. Further, for each display pattern table, a plurality of types of display patterns are set by combinations of images of the objects.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory view of a display pattern table for A; In the case of the display pattern table for A, the non-display, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2) and display pattern (A1) in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). Four display patterns of -A2-A3) (see FIG. 51) are allocated. As illustrated, the display pattern table for A is out (in the absence of reach), the display pattern (A1) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of out (with reach). In the above, the display pattern (A1-A2) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the most among the four display patterns. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so as to increase the frequency of display. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this manner, the player can display the image A2 on the display surface 41a later than when the image A1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for the winning of the jackpot lottery increases, and when the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image A2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image A1, the jackpot lottery Expectations for winning will increase.

  Next, the display pattern table for B will be described.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of a B display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for B, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3), the display pattern (B1-B2), the display pattern (B1-B2-B3), and the display pattern (B1-B2) in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). Four display patterns of display pattern (B1) (see FIG. 52) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for B is out (no reach), the display pattern (B1-B2-B3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and is out (reach). In the case of “Yes”, the display pattern (B1-B2) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (B1) is the most frequent among the four display patterns. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so as to increase the frequency of display. That is, by allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this manner, unlike the above-described advance presentation effect by the object A, the player subsequently displays the image B1 on the display surface 41a. The expectation for winning of the big hit lottery decreases when the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, and then the display surface 41a is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image B2 is displayed after the image B1 on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation for winning of the jackpot lottery decreases.

  Next, the C display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of a C display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for C, in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no), non-display, display pattern (C1), display pattern (C1-C2), display pattern (C1) Four display patterns of -C2-C3) (see FIG. 53) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the case of detachment (no reach), the display pattern (C1) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of detachment (reach), the above four displays Among the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the four display patterns is most frequently displayed. Thus, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 is assigned. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this manner, the player can display the image C2 on the display surface 41a later than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for the winning of the jackpot lottery increases, and the image when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a is later than the image C2 displayed on the display surface 41a after the image C1. Expectations for winning will increase.

  Next, the display pattern table for AB will be described.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory view of a display pattern table for AB. In the case of the display pattern table for AB, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) and the display pattern (A1) are non-display, respectively, in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). Four display patterns of -A2-A3 / B1) and display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for AB is out (no reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) among the four display patterns is most frequently displayed. In the case of out of reach (reach), the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display among the four display patterns is displayed. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so that the frequency at which the pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is displayed is high.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory drawing showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 66 (a), FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 66 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents that the person who was walking gets wet in the rain while the weather is sunny, cloudy, and changing to rain.

  When an image consisting of an image A1 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 66 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and in general, the impression is bad Since the player does not give the player, he does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of an image A2 and an image B2 shown in FIG. 66 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the person noticed that the weather changed from sunny to cloudy. Generally gives an impression that it can not be said to be good as compared with the image shown in FIG. 66 (a), and gives the player an advantage over the game situation as compared with the image in FIG. 66 (a). Give a sense that can not say. Then, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 66 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person getting wet in the rain is expressed in the image, which generally gives a bad impression, Give the player an adverse recognition regarding the situation of the game. That is, the advance notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) causes the player to change the recognition of the game situation to an adverse recognition as the display of the advance notice effect progresses.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 67 (a), FIG. 67 (b) and FIG. 67 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice effect, it is realized that the person walking is clear and holding an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

  When an image consisting of an image A1 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and in general, the impression is bad Since the player does not give the player, he does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of an image A2 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who noticed that the image is clear is represented in the image, and the image is also displayed As in the case of the image of FIG. 67 (a), generally no bad impression is given, so that the player is not given an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of an image A3 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the person expresses an anti-suntan person by putting an umbrella on the image, which is generally bad. It does not give an impression, but gives recognition that can not be said to be disadvantageous with respect to the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) gives the player the recognition that it is difficult to judge the situation as advantageous or disadvantageous with respect to the game situation even if the display of the advance notice effect proceeds.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 68 (a), FIG. 68 (b) and FIG. 68 (c). As shown in the figure, while the weather is sunny, cloudy, and changing as the weather changes, the person who was walking notices the change in the weather, opens an umbrella, and responds appropriately to the deterioration of the weather. Is expressed.

  When an image consisting of an image A1 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 68A is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and in general, a bad impression is given Since the player does not give the player, he does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of an image A2 and an image B2 shown in FIG. 68B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the person noticed that the weather changed from sunny to cloudy. In order to give the impression that it is generally not good as compared with the image shown in FIG. 68 (a), the player has an advantage over the game situation as compared with the image shown in FIG. 68 (a). Give recognition that can not be said. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 68C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image is expressed by a person who has been able to appropriately cope with the deterioration of the weather by putting an umbrella on it. In general, it gives a good impression and gives an advantageous perception of the gaming situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) gives the player a recognition in the image of FIG. 68 (a) that can not be said to be disadvantageous with respect to the game situation, and then In the image of FIG. 68 (b), the player is recognized as not advantageous for the game situation, and thereafter, in the image of FIG. 68 (c), the player is advantageous recognized as to the game situation. . By displaying such advance notice effects, it is possible to give tonation to the player's expectation for the game.

  As shown in FIG. 66, FIG. 67, and FIG. 68, the effects set by the display pattern table for AB are recognized to the player as advantageous or disadvantageous for the player as the advance effect proceeds. It is configured to give. In particular, when the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 66 is compared with the notice effect by (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 66 (a) and FIG. 68 (a) are the same image, and FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 68 (b) are the same image, and any notice effect is the same image up to the middle The player can be given a sense of urgency as to which of the advance notice effect of FIG. 66 and the advance notice effect of FIG. More specifically, the player can be given a sense of urgency in response to a change such as whether or not the person who noticed the change in weather finally holds an umbrella, and the player's attention to the notice effect It is possible to improve the interest of the game by improving it.

  Next, the display pattern table for BC will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory view of a display pattern table for BC. In the case of the display pattern table for BC, the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) and the display pattern (B2-B3) are non-display respectively in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). Four display patterns of / C1-C3) and display patterns (B1 / C1-C2-C3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for BC is out (no reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and is out In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) of the four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (of the four display patterns ( The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so that the frequency of displaying B1 / C1-C2-C3) is high.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set by the display pattern table for BC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 70 (a), FIG. 70 (b) and FIG. 70 (c). As illustrated, while the weather changes from cloudy to rainy, the appearance of the dog appearing in the box and the dog getting wet in the rain is expressed while the weather changes from cloudy to rainy.

  When an image composed of the image B2 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in a cloudy state, and in general As it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image consisting of an image B3 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 70 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the rain, The image also does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. However, when an image consisting of an image B3 and an image C3 shown in FIG. 70 (c) is subsequently displayed on the display surface 41a, a dog whose face appears large from the box gets wet in the image. In general, it gives a bad impression and gives the player an adverse recognition as to the gaming situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) gives the player an disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation when the image of FIG. 70 (c) is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set by the display pattern table for BC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71 (a), FIG. 71 (b), and FIG. 71 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect is expressed as the weather changes from cloudy to rain and a box is placed in such weather.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in cloudy weather, and in general, As it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image consisting of an image B3 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the rain, The image also does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. Then, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image does not change from the image of FIG. 71 (b) and the image is also a game Does not give the player an adverse understanding of the gaming situation. Thus, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1) does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the display pattern table for BC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b) and FIG. 72 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect represents that the dog makes a face out of the box on a sunny day.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 72 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed while it is sunny, and in general As it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of an image B1 and an image C2 shown in FIG. 72 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses the appearance of the dog taking a face out of the box while it is fine Compared to FIG. 72 (a), the player is given an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation. When the notice effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 has a higher probability of winning a big hit lottery, so FIG. Also in the notice effect by the object B and the object C shown, when the image advances from FIG. 72 (a) to FIG. 72 (b), the image by the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2 to the player On the other hand, it gives an advantageous recognition of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 72 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses the appearance of the dog having a large face out of the box while it is fine In general, a good impression is given to the player to give an advantageous recognition of the game situation. As described above, in the effect by the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3), the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 as well as the advance effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. Since an image that gives a bad impression is not displayed, it is possible to give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation as the advance notice proceeds.

  Here, among the effects set by the display pattern table for BC, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) shown in FIG. 70 and the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) shown in FIG. The comparison with the advance presentation by-C3) is described.

  The two preview effects are the same image up to the image on the way. Specifically, FIG. 70 (a) and FIG. 71 (a) are the same image, and FIG. 70 (b) and FIG. 71 (b) are the same image. Therefore, regardless of which of the two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player is the same. However, depending on the image to be displayed after that, the recognition of the game situation given to the player greatly differs between the two preview effects. The image in FIG. 70 (c) is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3 and the image of the dog getting wet in the rain is an image that generally gives a bad impression. Give an adverse perception about. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 71C is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and an image in which a box is placed in the rain is an image that does not give a bad impression. On the other hand, it does not give an disadvantageous recognition about the situation of the game. In other words, in the state where the image obtained by combining the image B2 and the image C1 is displayed, if the image C1 subsequently changes to the image C3, the image is as shown in FIG. 70 (c), so the player Against the game situation, while the image C1 is not changed after the image B2 and the image C1 are displayed in a state in which the image C1 is not changed. Since the image is as shown in FIG. 71 (c), the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 70 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 71 and displaying the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined, it is possible to play the game in that the image C1 changes to the image C3. While being able to attract the attention of the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension.

  In the notice effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64 described above, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed more than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Is displayed on the display surface 41a gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Specifically, an image in which a dog is showing a face out of a box generally gives a better impression than an image in which a box is placed. Give the player an advantageous recognition of the gaming situation. Further, when the notice effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 has a higher probability of winning a big hit lottery, so More about the game situation for the player when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3 than when the C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3 Give an advantageous recognition.

  However, when the image C1 and the image C3 are combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a when the image C1 is combined with the image B3 (FIG. 71 (c)). The player is more advantageously recognized as to the game situation than when displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image B1 (FIG. 70 (c)).

  That is, when the image B1 (image of rain) is not combined with each of the image C1 and the image C3, the image C3 (in the box) is displayed more than when the image C1 (image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. The image B3 (image of rain) is displayed on each of the image C1 and the image C3 despite the fact that the image of the dog is displayed on the display surface 41a gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. When the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the combination of the images C1 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Give the player an advantageous recognition of the gaming situation.

  Therefore, the way of combining the images can give the player various recognitions about the game situation. In the case of the present embodiment, when the predetermined image is combined with the effect image which is stepped up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the degree of expectation are high, the player having a completely different recognition of the game situation Can be given to Even if the player recognizes the image C1 (the image of the box) or the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) displayed on the display surface 41a, the presence or absence of the display of the image B3 (the image of rain) Recognize that the game situation is different. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a can be improved.

  Further, as described in the display pattern table for C in FIG. 64, in the case of the present embodiment, the image C3 (an image of a box) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (an image of rain). The image C1 (box image) is displayed even though the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the dog image in the box is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (rain image). If the image B3 (the image of rain) is displayed in combination, the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed in combination with the image B3 (the image of rain) to win the jackpot lottery Have a high probability of Therefore, when the image of the object C or a part thereof such as the image C1 (image of a box) or the image C3 (image of a dog in a box) is displayed, the image B3 (image of rain) is displayed. The degree of attention of the player can be improved.

  In general, the effect image having a higher probability of winning the jackpot lottery as the step-up is performed (e.g., as the effect image progresses from image P1 to image P2 to image P3) is an image from image P1 to image P2 than image P2 P3 is configured to be an image that gives the player a good impression. That is, in the image P1, the image P2 and the image P3, the order of the high and low probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the order of the impression given to the player are configured. With such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be improved as the effect image steps up (advances). To display [image P1 + image Q], [image P2 + image Q], and [image P3 + image Q] by combining other images (for example, image Q) with such a normal effect image. Even so, the image P3 + the image Q is better than the image P1 + the image Q, and the image P3 + the image Q is better than the image P 2 + the image Q! Configured That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the image Q is simply combined, the [image P2 + the image Q] is more to the player than the [image P3 + the image Q]. It is difficult to make an image that gives a good impression. In the present embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image to be displayed as the effect image to be stepped up and the content of the combined image. In this embodiment, by devising the contents of the image P1, the image P2, the image P3 and the image Q, although the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, the image Q is combined. In this case, it is possible to give the player a better impression of [Image P2 + Image Q] than [Image P3 + Image Q].

  By doing this, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player the following recognition. That is, in the effect image which is not combined with the image Q, the progress of the image P1 → the image P2 → the image P3 gives recognition that the game situation is more advantageous, and in the effect image combined with the image Q, It becomes possible to give recognition that the situation of a game is disadvantageous, so that it progresses with Q] → [image P2 + image Q] → [image P3 + image Q].

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory view of a display pattern table for ABC. In the case of the display pattern table for ABC, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3-C3 / C1-C2-C3) is non-display in each of three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no) 4) display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) and display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are allocated. There is. As illustrated, in the case of the display pattern table for ABC being out of reach (without reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) among the four display patterns is the most. When the frequency of display is high and the display is out (reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and the jackpot is large. In the case of a display pattern of 0 to 99, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed. The value of the random number counter C22 is assigned.

  Next, the display pattern table for AC will be described.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the display pattern table for ABC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 74 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice effect, a person who was walking while the weather was sunny, cloudy, changing with rain, and a dog whose face came out of the box was expressed as being wet in the rain There is.

  When an image composed of an image A1, an image B1 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 74 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a box are represented in the image while it is clear, and in general As it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of an image A2, an image B2 and an image C2 shown in FIG. 74 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy and the person changes in the weather. And the appearance of the dog making a slight face out of the box, and the image does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. However, when an image consisting of an image A2, an image B3 and an image C3 shown in FIG. 74 (c) is subsequently displayed on the display surface 41a, the person concerned with the change in the weather and the inside of the box It is expressed that the dog with a large face gets wet from the rain, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives a torment to the player's sense of expectation for the game, and at the end of the notice effect, Give an adverse recognition regarding the gaming situation.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the display pattern table for ABC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 75 (a), FIG. 75 (b) and FIG. 75 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect is expressed as a person who notices the change in the weather while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy and how the dog looks out of the box.

  When an image consisting of an image A1, an image B1 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 75 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who is walking and a box are placed in the image while it is sunny In general, the player does not give an adverse recognition of the game situation, because the player does not give a bad impression. After that, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 shown in FIG. 75 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices the change of the weather in the weather changing from sunny to cloudy A person and how a dog makes a few faces out of a box are expressed, and the image does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. Then, when an image composed of an image A2, an image B2 and an image C3 shown in FIG. 75 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog who makes a face out of a box are expressed in cloudy. The image does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. In this manner, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the display pattern table for ABC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 76 (a), FIG. 76 (b) and FIG. 76 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect is expressed that the person who was walking notices the change in the weather while the weather is sunny, cloudy, and changing with rain, and the dog who raised his face out of the box lifts the umbrella It is done.

  When an image composed of an image A1, an image B1 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 76 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who is walking and a box are placed in the image while it is sunny In general, the player does not give an adverse recognition of the game situation, because the player does not give a bad impression. After that, when an image composed of an image A2, an image B2 and an image C2 shown in FIG. 76 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices a change in the weather in the weather changing from sunny to cloudy. A person and how a dog makes a few faces out of a box are expressed, and the image does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. Then, when an image consisting of an image A3, an image B3 and an image C3 shown in FIG. 76 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the dog with a large face out of the box in the rain and the dog an umbrella A person to be pointed out is expressed, and the image generally gives a moving impression, and thus gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) provides the player with an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  Here, among the effects set by the display pattern table for ABC, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. The comparison with the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) will be described.

  The two preview effects are the same image up to the image on the way. Specifically, FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 76 (a) are the same image, and FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 76 (b) are the same image. Therefore, regardless of which of the two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player is the same. However, depending on the image to be displayed after that, the recognition of the game situation given to the player greatly differs between the two preview effects. The image in FIG. 74 (c) is an image in which the image A2, the image B3 and the image B3 are combined, and an image in which a person and a dog get wet is generally an image giving a bad impression. On the contrary, give an adverse recognition about the situation of the game. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 76C is an image in which the image A3, the image B3 and the image C3 are combined, and an image in which a person is raising an umbrella so that the dog does not get wet in the rain Is an image that gives a good impression, and thus gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In other words, in the state where the image in which the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 are combined is displayed, and the image A2 does not change after that, the image is as shown in FIG. 74 (c). In a state where an image in which the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 are combined is displayed, the image A2 is subsequently displayed as the image A3. If the image is changed to the image shown in FIG. 76 (c), the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation, as shown in FIG. 76 (c). Therefore, whether the image A2 is changed to the image A3 by displaying the image in which the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 are combined by executing the preview effect shown in FIG. 74 or the preview effect shown in FIG. While being able to attract a player's attention to the point, it can give a player a tense feeling.

  The notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 76 has the following characteristics.

  In the notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 described above, the appearance of the worsening of the weather is expressed as the effect image progresses with the image B1, the image B2, the image B3 and so on. As they do, they give the player an adverse recognition of the gaming situation. In addition, when the notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 63 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image B1 to the image B2 and the image B3 is set to a lower probability of winning a big hit lottery Therefore, as the image B1, the image B2, the image B3 and the effect image progress, the player is further given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. That is, the object B gives the player a disadvantageous recognition by advancing the images in the order of the image B1, the image B2 and the image B3.

  However, the object B is combined with the object A in which the images progress in the order of the image A1, the image A2 and the image A3, and the object C in which the images proceed in the order of the image C1, the image C2 and the image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2- By displaying as A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change to an effect image of content that impresses the player, and for the player, it is advantageous for the game situation. It can be changed to an image that gives recognition. As described above, each image configured as the object A, the object B, and the object C in the present embodiment is displayed as one object and in combination with other objects by devising the content of the image. In some cases, it is possible to greatly change the impression given by the image, and it is also possible to greatly change the recognition of the game situation given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect by the object A, the object B, and the object C, or the notice effect consisting of a combination thereof is used as an effect indicating whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. That is, although these advance notice effects are used as effects showing the expectation of the jackpot, the expectation of the probability change jackpot or the expectation of being in the probability change state may be used as the effect showing the player. Also in this case, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the game situation is advantageous or a disadvantage depending on how the images of the objects are combined.

  Next, the process of setting the effect type in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing processing for setting an effect type in the sixth embodiment. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2303) of effect setting process.

  In step S3301, the counter value is acquired from the display object random number counter C21. After that, proceeding to step S3302, the display object table is referenced, collation with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21 is executed, and a combination of objects to be displayed as the notice effect is determined. After executing step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

  In step S3303, the counter value is acquired from the display pattern random number counter C22. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3304, and it is checked whether the game times for which the advance notice effect is to be set are the jackpot, the disconnection (reach), or the disconnection (reach not). After executing step S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3305, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of the objects to be displayed as the advance presentation effect is referred to, the collation with the acquired counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is executed, and the display pattern is determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S3306, and the determined display pattern is set as the notice effect. After executing step S3306, the process proceeds to step S3307.

  In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the game play is a big hit. If it is determined in step S3307 that the game play is a big hit (S3307: YES), the process proceeds to step S3308.

  In step S3308, it is determined whether the display pattern of the advance notice effect set in step S3306 is a full display pattern. Here, in the full display pattern, the combination of the objects displayed as the preview effect is the object A, the object B, and the object C, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2- B3 / C1-C2-C3) refers to a display pattern. That is, it refers to the display pattern shown in FIG. If it is determined in step S3308 that the set display pattern of the preliminary rendering effect is the full display pattern (S3308: YES), the process proceeds to step S3309.

  In step S3309, as the setting process of reach effect, the reach effect to be executed after the advance effect of the full display pattern is set as a sequel effect that expresses the sequel of the effect expressed in the full display pattern.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing an example of a sequel effect to be executed as a reach effect. The sequel effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b) and FIG. 78 (c). As illustrated, the sequel effect is an effect showing a person walking with a dog under his umbrella in the rain. By executing such a sequel effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the probability of being a big hit is high, and to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  Description is returned to FIG. After setting the sequel effect as the reach effect in step S3309, the process proceeds to step S3310.

  If it is determined in step S3307 that the game play is not a big hit (S3307: NO), the process proceeds to step S3311.

  In step S3311, it is determined whether the game number is reach, that is, whether it is out (reach). If it is determined in step S3311 that the game time is reach (S3311: YES), or if it is determined that the display pattern of the notice effect set in step S3308 is not the full display pattern (S3308: NO), The process proceeds to step S3312.

  In step S3312, a normal reach effect is set as the setting process of the reach effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3310.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3311 that the game number is not reach (S3311: NO), the process proceeds to step S3310 without executing step S3312.

  In step S3310, the notice effect set in step S3306 and the reach effect set in step S3309 are set as the effect command. Thereafter, the process of setting the effect type is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the recognition of the advantages / disadvantages of the game situation given to the player depending on the combination of each object, so that various effects using each object are executed. It is possible to effectively use each object image. For example, even if the object A is displayed, the advantage of the game situation given to the player depending on the combination with other objects or whether or not the object A is displayed in the same period as the other objects Since the recognition about the disadvantage differs, it is possible to execute various effects using each object image, and it is possible to effectively use each object image. In addition, since the probability of winning a jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed is different for each of various display patterns formed of a combination of each object image, the player's attention to the effect configured by each display pattern, The degree of interest and expectation can be improved.

  Furthermore, when displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed according to the game situation (for example, big hit, off (reach), off (no reach)). By setting the placement position, it is possible to give the player various perceptions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game by adjusting the placement position. Furthermore, when displaying each object image in combination, according to the situation of the game, since the display pattern which changed the timing which starts the display of each object is set, by adjusting the timing of the display start of each object It is possible to give the player various recognitions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. Seventh embodiment:
FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first to sixth embodiments is that the audio light emission control device 90 is provided with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) for outputting date information and time information. is there. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 acquires date information and time information output from the RTC 96, and executes an RTC effect that is an effect based on the acquired date information and time information. In the present embodiment, the sound emission control apparatus 90 determines whether the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC presentation start condition, and when it is determined that the information matches, the RTC presentation is performed. Start processing for execution. The RTC effect of the present embodiment is configured of an RTC effect moving image of 300 seconds and an RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect moving image, and is executed at 00 minutes every hour.

  FIG. 80 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when an RTC presentation start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying a background moving image. The RTC in-progress flag shown in the drawing is a flag that is turned on when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied and the RTC effect starts, and is turned off when the RTC effect ends.

  The display control device 100 sets the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the background when the time becomes 00 minutes every hour while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image and the RTC presentation start condition is satisfied (time t1). The mode changes from displaying an animation to displaying an RTC effect animation. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode for displaying the background moving image to the mode for displaying the RTC effect moving image (at time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the background music. At the same time, the output is started from the temporally leading position “01” of the RTC effect music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the voice preset by the player.

  The display control device 100 displays the RTC effect moving image as the display mode of the symbol display device 41 when the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2). The mode is shifted to a mode of displaying a background moving image. Then, when transitioning to a mode in which the background moving image is displayed, the display control apparatus 100 causes the display to be started from the temporally leading position "01" of the background moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode for displaying a background moving image (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music, and is preset by the player. The output is started from the temporal top position "01" of the background music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the output sound.

  The audio light emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and performs background music cueing processing (processing for starting output or display from the temporal start position “01”). The type of background music to be subjected to cueing processing is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control apparatus 100 can display a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to a plurality of types of background music, and is selected. It is also possible to select a background moving image corresponding to the background music and execute cueing processing. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to view a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Also in FIG. 83 described later, even when the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute background music and background moving image cueing processing, similarly, a configuration for selecting background music and background moving image from a plurality of types is described. It can be adopted.

  FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when an RTC presentation start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying a demonstration moving image.

  When the time becomes 00 minutes while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demonstration moving image and the RTC presentation start condition is satisfied (time t1), the display control device 100 demonstrates the display mode of the symbol display device 41 From the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect animation. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image to a mode for displaying an RTC effect moving image (at time t1), the sound emission control device 90 temporally displays RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01", and the sound output level (volume) is returned to the output level preset by the player.

  The display control device 100 displays the RTC effect moving image as the display mode of the symbol display device 41 when the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2). The mode is shifted to a mode of displaying a demonstration video. Then, when transitioning to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image, the display control apparatus 100 causes the display to start from the temporally leading position “01” of the demonstration moving image. In addition, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image (time t2), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and outputs the sound output level ( Reduce the volume) to zero.

  FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As the transition condition, as described above, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted to a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image, and the output mode of sound is shifted to a mode (silence state) in which the volume is zero. It is a condition.

  When the time becomes 00 minutes while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image and the RTC presentation start condition is satisfied (time t1), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 as the background moving image. From the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect animation. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode for displaying the background moving image to the mode for displaying the RTC effect moving image (at time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the background music. At the same time, the output is started from the temporally leading position “01” of the RTC effect music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the voice preset by the player.

  In the display control device 100, while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image, the variation of the symbol in the main display unit 45 is stopped (time t2), and 15 seconds have elapsed after the variation of the symbol is stopped. If the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to a mode displaying the demonstration moving image when time t3 is established (time t3). The transition is made (time t4). Then, when transitioning to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image, the display control apparatus 100 causes the display to start from the temporally leading position “01” of the demonstration moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image (time t4), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and outputs the sound output level ( Reduce the volume) to zero.

  FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when return conditions are satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying an RTC effect moving image. As the return condition, as described above, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the background music is output with the sound output mode set in advance. It is a condition to return to the mode.

  When the time becomes 00 minutes while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demonstration moving image and the RTC presentation start condition is satisfied (time t1), the display control device 100 demonstrates the display mode of the symbol display device 41 From the mode of displaying to the mode of displaying the RTC effect animation. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image to a mode for displaying an RTC effect moving image (at time t1), the sound emission control device 90 temporally displays RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01", and the sound output level (volume) is returned to the output level preset by the player.

  In the display control device 100, when the variation of the symbol in the main display unit 45 is started while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image and the return condition is satisfied (time t2) After the display period (300 seconds in this embodiment) ends, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3). Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music, and is preset by the player. The output is started from the temporal top position "01" of the background music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the output sound.

  Next, an example of the process which the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment performs is demonstrated. In the following, processing different from the first embodiment described above will be described, and description of the same processing as the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 according to the seventh embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed in the sound and light side MPU according to the first embodiment is after executing the command handling process (step S1802) and executes the standby state transition process (step S1803). The processing for the RTC effect (step S1802a) is performed before the processing, and the other processing is the same as that in the first embodiment. In the process for the RTC effect, a process for executing the RTC effect is executed. The details of the process for the RTC effect will be described below.

  FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing a process for RTC effect executed in the sound light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. In step S3401, it is determined whether the RTC rendering in progress flag is ON. The RTC effect-in-progress flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC rendering in-progress flag is not ON (S3401: NO), the process proceeds to step S3402 and the time information output from the RTC 96 is read. Then, it progresses to step S3403.

  In step S3403, it is determined whether the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start execution of the RTC effect. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches with 00 minutes every hour. If it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information does not coincide with the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S3403: NO), the process for this RTC effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start execution of the RTC effect (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404.

  In step S3404, an RTC rendering time setting process is executed. Specifically, “150000” (ie, 5.0 min) is set to the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94 b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 every 2 msec, that is, each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After executing step S3404, the process proceeds to step S3405.

  In step S3405, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts processing for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3405, the process proceeds to step S3406.

  In step S3406, output start processing of RTC effect music is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal top position of the RTC effect music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped, and the output is started from the temporal top position of the RTC effect music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3407, and the RTC rendering in progress flag is set to ON. Then, it progresses to step S3408.

  In step S3408, it is determined whether any one of the volume reduction flag, the video animation start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON. The situation where one of the volume reduction flag, the video animation start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON means that the transition condition described above is satisfied and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. I mean. If it is determined in step S3408 that any one of the volume reduction flag, the video animation start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON (S3408: YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

  In step S3409, the reduced output level (volume) of the voice is restored to a value preset by the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3410, and the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect is set to ON. The demonstration moving picture start flag after the RTC effect is a flag for starting the demonstration moving image after the end of the RTC effect, and the transition condition is satisfied before the start of the RTC effect, or during the execution of the RTC effect. Is a flag that is turned on when After step S3410 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3411, and among the sound volume reduction flag, the video animation start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag, the flag that has been turned ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3408 that all of the volume reduction flag, the animation video start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image display flag are OFF (S3408: NO), the processing from step S3409 to step S3411 is executed. If not, the process proceeds to step S3412.

  In step S3412, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S3412: YES), the process advances to step S3413 to turn off the demonstration moving image start flag after RTC rendering, and advances to step S3414 to satisfy the return condition Turn off the flag. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S3412: NO), the processing for this RTC effect is ended without executing the processing in step S3413 and step S3414.

  If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC rendering in progress flag is ON (S3401: YES), that is, if the RTC rendering is being performed, the process proceeds to step S3415.

  In step S3415, it is determined whether it is time to finish the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S3403 is zero. If it is determined in step S3415 that it is time to finish the RTC effect (S3415: YES), the process proceeds to step S3416, and the process proceeds to a process when the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3415 that it is not the timing to end the RTC effect (S3415: NO), the process proceeds from step S3408 to step S3414. The reason for this is that the transition condition and the return condition may be satisfied even during the period when the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S3408 to step S3414.

  In step S3416, the RTC rendering in progress flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3417 to execute output stop processing of RTC effect music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3418.

  In step S3418, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect is ON. If it is determined in step S3418 that the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect is not ON (S3418: NO), the process advances to step S3419 to transmit a background moving image start command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporally leading position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3420 to execute background music output start processing. Specifically, the output is started from the temporally leading position of the background music. Thereafter, the processing for this RTC effect is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3418 that the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect is on (S3418: YES), the process advances to step S3421 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporally leading position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3422, and the demonstration moving image display flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3423.

  In step S3423, the output level (volume) of the audio is reduced to zero. In the present embodiment, the music to be output along with the demonstration video is not set. After executing step S3423, the process advances to step S3424 to turn on the quick start determination flag. By this process, it is possible to turn on the quick start determination flag while the demonstration video is being displayed. After executing step S3424, the process advances to step S3425 to turn off the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect. Thereafter, the processing for this RTC effect is ended.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the standby state transition process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 according to the seventh embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition process (FIG. 41) executed in the sound-light MPU 92 according to the first embodiment is that the process for determining whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON or not is performed before the process (step S2701). The point is to execute a process (step S2700) of determining whether or not the RTC in-progress flag is ON, and the other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  In step S2700, it is determined whether or not the RTC rendering in-progress flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RTC rendering in-progress flag is ON (S2700: YES), this standby state transition processing is directly ended. That is, it is configured not to shift to the standby state while the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2700 that the RTC rendering in-progress flag is not ON (S2700: NO), the process proceeds to step S2701 and it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. The following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed by the display MPU 102 according to the seventh embodiment. The difference from the command corresponding process (FIG. 45) executed in the display MPU 102 according to the first embodiment is after the process (step S3112) for starting the display of the background moving image and the other processes (step S3113) Before the execution of step S3112a and step S3112b described later, the other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  In step S3112a, it is determined whether an RTC effect moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3112a that an RTC effect moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112b to execute processing for starting display of an RTC effect moving image. Specifically, control of image drawing and display is started so that the RTC effect moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporally leading position. After executing step S3112 b, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112b. The following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the background moving image display mode is shifted to the RTC effect moving image display mode, and then the predetermined display of the RTC effect moving image is performed. When the period ends, the transition from the aspect of displaying the RTC effect animation to the aspect of displaying the background animation, and the transition of the background animation to the aspect, from the predetermined temporal position of the background animation Start the display. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started is changed when the background moving image is displayed. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts is changed when shifting to a mode of displaying the background moving image, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, A configuration to start display of the background moving image from the temporal position of the background moving image displayed at the timing immediately before transitioning to a mode to display a moving image, and transition to a mode to display a background moving image from a mode to display an RTC effect moving image When displaying the RTC moving image from the aspect of displaying the background moving image, the temporal position of the background moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the aspect of displaying the RTC effect moving image. After transitioning to an aspect, while continuing reproduction of a background animation as internal processing, it shifts to the aspect which displays a background animation from the aspect which displays RTC presentation animation. Configuration or the like for displaying a background video being played continuously as internal processing on the symbol display device 41 may be mentioned when.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the transition from the aspect of displaying the demonstration moving image to the aspect of displaying the RTC effect moving image is performed, and thereafter, the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image has ended. In this case, the transition from the aspect of displaying the RTC effect animation to the aspect of displaying the demonstration animation is made, and when transitioning to the aspect of displaying the demonstration animation, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the demonstration animation. . Therefore, control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demonstration moving image is started changes when transitioning to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demonstration video starts is changed when transitioning to a mode of displaying the demonstration video, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC presentation animation ends, Configuration to start the display of the demonstration video from the time position of the demonstration video displayed at the timing immediately before transitioning to the mode to display the animation, and transition to a mode to display the demonstration video from the mode to display the RTC effect animation In the configuration, the temporal position of the demonstration video starting display is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC presentation movie, and the RTC presentation movie is displayed from the mode of displaying the demonstration movie After transitioning to the mode, playback of the demo movie is continued as internal processing, and the mode is changed from displaying the RTC presentation movie to displaying the demo movie. Configuration and the like for displaying the demonstration video being played continuously as internal processing on the symbol display device 41 may be mentioned when.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, even when the transition condition is satisfied while displaying the RTC effect moving image, the RTC effect moving image is interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period. Instead, since the transition to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity given to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, even when the return condition is satisfied while displaying the RTC effect moving image, the RTC effect moving image is interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period. Instead, since the background moving image is displayed after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image is ended, the player can be prevented from feeling discomfort, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, in each pachinko machine 10, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends substantially simultaneously. While moving to a mode for displaying a background moving image, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying from a predetermined temporal position of the background moving image when displaying the background moving picture, and thus is displayed on each pachinko machine 10 Background animation can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the background moving image displayed on each pachinko machine 10 is synchronized. For this reason, the player who has visited the gaming hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed sees a spectacular situation in which the background moving image displayed on each pachinko machine 10 is synchronized. As a result, the player can be interested in the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when transitioning to a mode in which the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the temporal head position of the background moving image Since the display is started from the above, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player, as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the time of background animation when transitioning to the mode of displaying background animation. . For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the time of background animation when transitioning to the mode of displaying the background animation, the player can view the background animation from the position in time As you do, you may feel uncomfortable or feel that something is missing from the background video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to cause the player to view the background moving image from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and to make the background moving image It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that it is possible to appreciate everything from the temporal top position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when transitioning to a mode in which the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, from the predetermined temporal position Since the output of the background music is started, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music is started varies. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of background music starts changes, for example, in FIG. 80, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the mode shifts to a mode of outputting RTC effect music Start the output when starting the output of the background music from the configuration that starts the output of the background music from the time position of the background music that was output at the timing immediately before The configuration to determine the time position of the background music to be played based on the elapsed time after the transition to the aspect of outputting the RTC effect music, and even after the aspect of outputting the background music to the aspect of outputting the RTC effect music While continuing playback of background music as internal processing, when transitioning from a mode of outputting RTC effect music to a mode of outputting background music, the internal processing and Configuration and the like for outputting the background music being played continuously Te.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when transitioning to a mode in which the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the background moving image is displayed, the temporally leading position of the background music Since the output is started from the above, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from the position in the middle of the background music in time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which output is started from a temporally intermediate position of background music, the player will appreciate the background music from a temporally intermediate position, which may cause discomfort. There is a possibility that you may feel that something is missing from the background music. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to make the player appreciate the background music from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player and to make the background music It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that it is possible to appreciate everything from the temporal top position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are installed, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends substantially simultaneously in each pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82. Since the pachinko machine 10 starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the demo animation when displaying the demo animation, the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on each pachinko machine 10 while shifting to a mode of displaying the demo animation. Demo videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the demonstration video displayed on each pachinko machine 10 is synchronized. For this reason, a player who has visited a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed sees a spectacular situation where demo videos displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, the player can be interested in the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, when transitioning to a mode in which the display period of the RTC effect animation ends and the demo animation is displayed, the temporal head position of the demonstration animation Since the display is started from the point of view, when transitioning to a mode of displaying the demo video and displaying the demo video, the player feels uncomfortable as compared to the configuration in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the demo video. Can be reduced. For example, if a player transitions to a mode of displaying a demonstration video and displays the demonstration video, the player starts the demonstration video temporally by adopting a configuration in which the display is started from a position halfway through the demonstration video. Because you will be watching from the middle of the position, you may feel uncomfortable or feel the lack of material that you have not watched in the demo video. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the player can make the player watch the demonstration moving image from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player, and to reduce the demonstration moving image. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that it is possible to appreciate everything from the temporal top position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

H. Eighth embodiment:
An eighth embodiment will now be described. First, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described, and then details of the processing will be described. In addition, since the structure of the hardware with which the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is equipped is the same as that of the said 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

H1. Outline of processing by gaming machine:
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of an outline of a process performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 88 (a) shows the display surface 41a provided in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As illustrated, on the display surface 41a of the pachinko machine 10, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first suspension display area Ds1, suspension displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14 indicating the number of suspension based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 are displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, hold displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24 indicating the number of holdings based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 are displayed. Each hold display corresponds to the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired and stored based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. The maximum value of the number of pending displays is four of Dm11 to Dm14 in the first pending display area Ds1, and four of Dm21 to Dm24 in the second pending display area Ds2.

  In each of the pending displays displayed in the first pending display area Ds1, in the order of the pending displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display becomes a target of the jackpot lottery. Similarly, in each of the suspension displays displayed in the second suspension display area Ds2, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the suspension display is subjected to a jackpot lottery in the order of the suspension displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, Dm24.

  The display mode of each hold display indicates that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each hold display is likely to win the jackpot lottery, and the plurality of stages from high to low corresponding to the high and low of the possibility The display mode of is set. As the display mode of the hold display becomes higher (rank up) in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is highly likely to win the jackpot lottery.

  FIG. 88 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the display mode of the hold display set in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As illustrated, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is set to a plurality of display modes from upper to lower levels corresponding to the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery. The display mode of the hold display is divided into five levels of an actual display level Lvr5, an actual display level Lvr4, an actual display level Lvr3, an actual display level Lvr2, and an actual display level Lvr1 in order from the top. The display mode corresponding to the higher actual display level Lvr is set as the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is higher, and the display mode corresponding to the lower actual display level Lvr is set as the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is lower. .

  In the present embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is represented by a color. Specifically, the display mode is expressed such that the actual display level Lvr5 is yellow, the actual display level Lvr4 is red, the actual display level Lvr3 is green, the actual display level Lvr2 is blue, and the actual display level Lvr1 is white. In addition, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is not limited to the mode expressed by color, for example, the mode expressed by a pattern, the mode expressed by a character, etc. Various display modes can be adopted as long as the difference between the actual display levels Lvr is expressed.

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display. For example, an effect of changing the white hold display to blue or an effect of changing the blue hold display to red is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display is executed, the display mode changes the more the order in which the changing hold display becomes the target of the jackpot lottery is the target of the change in the display mode. An effect is performed such that the number of stages in which the actual display level Lvr has increased between before and after the change of the display mode in the hold display becomes large. More precisely, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order of the target of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays In the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, the stepwise width (in front of the display mode change) in a plurality of stages of the display mode (the actual display level Lvr1 to the actual display level Lvr5) The display mode of the hold display is changed such that the difference (the difference between the actual display level Lvr) between the change and the change is large.

  Specifically, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is displayed at a higher level than the difference between the levels before and after the change (the difference between the actual display level Lvr) when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 to the upper display mode. The difference between the levels before and after the change (the difference between the actual display level Lvr) in the case of changing the mode is larger, and the change in the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to the upper display mode before and after the change. The difference between the levels before and after the change (the difference between the actual display level Lvr) when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 to the upper display mode is larger than the difference between the stages (the difference between the actual display level Lvr). The display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to the upper display mode from the difference of the step before and after the change when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 to the upper display mode (difference of the actual display level Lvr) If Difference change before and a later stage changes as towards the (actual differential display level Lvr) increases, changing the display mode of the hold display.

  In the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, the display mode of the next higher stage is changed. That is, the difference between the levels before and after the change (the difference between the actual display level Lvr) when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 to the upper display mode is one. In the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the upper two stages. That is, the difference between the levels before and after the change (the difference between the actual display level Lvr) in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 to the upper display mode is two. In the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the upper three stages. That is, the difference between the levels before and after the change (the difference between the actual display levels Lvr) in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 to the upper display mode is three. In the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the upper four stages. That is, the difference between the levels before and after the change (the difference between the actual display levels Lvr) in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14 to the upper display mode is four.

  In the case of the hold display Dm11, for example, when the hold display Dm11 is white (the actual display level Lvr1), the display mode is changed to blue (the actual display level Lvr2) which is the display mode of one higher stage, and the hold display Dm11 Is green (actual display level Lvr3), the display mode is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4), which is a display mode of one higher stage. In the case of the hold display Dm12, for example, when the hold display Dm12 is white (the actual display level Lvr1), the display mode is changed to green (the actual display level Lvr3) which is the display mode of the second higher rank, and the hold display Dm12 Is green (actual display level Lvr3), the display mode is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is the display mode of the second higher stage. In the case of the hold display Dm13, for example, when the hold display Dm13 is white (the actual display level Lvr1), the display mode is changed to red (the actual display level Lvr4) which is the display mode of three higher ranks. Is blue (actual display level Lvr2), the display mode is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is a display mode of three higher levels. In the case of the hold display Dm14, for example, when the hold display Dm14 is white (actual display level Lvr1), the display mode is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is a display mode of four higher ranks.

  When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the same as the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display area Ds1. In the case of changing the display mode of the hold display after the order for the jackpot lottery changes the display mode of the hold display later, the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes suggestion effects that suggest that the display mode of the hold display changes before changing the display mode of the hold display. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a suggestion effect to be performed is selected from among a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to an object for changing the display mode among the displayed pending displays. Hereinafter, an effect consisting of an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display and an indication effect is also referred to as a hold effect.

  FIG. 89 and FIG. 90 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the suggestive effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  FIG. 89A shows a suggestion effect (pattern 1) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11. In the suggested effect (pattern 1), a gun W1 having a short range distance is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W1 and hits the hold display Dm11. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. In other words, when the gun W1 is displayed as the suggestion effect, the pending display to be changed in the display mode is the pending display Dm11.

  FIG. 89 (b) shows a suggestion effect (pattern 2) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm 11 or the hold display Dm 12. In the suggested effect (pattern 2), a gun W2 whose range is longer than the gun W1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W2 to hit the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm11 or hold display Dm12) hit by the bullet changes. In other words, when the gun W2 is displayed as the suggestion effect, the pending display to be changed in the display mode is the pending display Dm11 or the pending display Dm12.

  FIG. 90 (a) shows a suggested effect (pattern 3) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. In the suggested effect (pattern 3), a tank W3 provided with cannons whose range is longer than the gun W2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a shell is fired from the cannon of the tank W3 and hits the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12 or hold display Dm13) hit by the shell changes. In other words, when the tank W3 is displayed as the suggestion effect, the pending display to be changed in the display mode is the pending display Dm12 or the pending display Dm13.

  FIG. 90 (b) shows a suggestion effect (pattern 4) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display of any of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm14. In the suggested effect (pattern 4), the missile W4 whose range is longer than the cannon provided in the tank W3 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, the missile W4 is launched, and hits the pending display of either the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13 or the pending display Dm14. Thereafter, the display mode of the pending display (pending display Dm12, pending display Dm13 or pending display Dm14) that the missile W4 has hit changes. In other words, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestion effect, the pending display to be changed in the display mode is the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, or the pending display Dm14.

  That is, prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and Among them, according to an object whose display mode is to be changed, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from among a plurality of suggestion effects prepared.

  For example, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestion effect (see FIG. 90 (b)), the pending display that may change the display mode is the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, or the pending display Dm14. If the hold indication that the launched missile W4 hits is the hold indication Dm13 rather than the hold indication Dm12 and the hold indication Dm14 rather than the hold indication Dm13, the number of stages at which the actual display level Lvr rises before and after the change in the display mode is growing. Therefore, when the suggested effect is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes to which range the display mode of the pending display changes (for example, when the suggested effect pattern 4 is displayed, Dm12 to Dm14 Recognize that the display mode of any hold display in the range changes, and guess which display mode of the hold display changes in the hold display of the range, and gives the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency can do.

  Hereinafter, an example of a process for realizing the present embodiment will be described in detail.

H2. Processing details:
The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first embodiment is the processing contents of the update processing at the time of winning (the first embodiment: FIG. 36) and the effect setting processing (the first embodiment: FIG. 37). Therefore, in the present description, the update process and effect setting process at the time of winning in the present embodiment will be described, and the description of the other processes will be omitted.

<Update process when winning>
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of winning in the eighth embodiment. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the hold command handling process.

  In the update process at the time of winning, the difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 36) is that a parameter setting process for holding effect is added to the present embodiment as Step S3505. Steps S3501 to S3504 in the update process at the time of winning in the present embodiment and step S2201 to step S2204 (FIG. 36) in the update process at the time of winning in the first embodiment are the same process. Therefore, the description of the processes of steps S3501 to S3504 will be omitted.

  The parameter setting process for holding effect in step S3505 is a subroutine executed to set various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the execution of the suggestion effect and the holding display. Details of the parameter setting process for holding effect will be described later.

  Here, the storage area for holding effect used for the parameter setting process for holding effect will be described. The parameters set by the hold effect parameter setting process are stored in the hold effect memory area provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The storage effect storage area is a storage area provided in the sound light side RAM 94 provided in the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area for holding effect. The holding effect storage area includes a first holding effect storage area and a second holding effect storage area. FIG. 92 (a) shows the first holding effect storage area, and FIG. 92 (b) shows the second holding effect storage area.

  The first storage effect storage area is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary to change the display mode of the suspension displays Dm11 to Dm14 which are suspension displays of the first suspension display area Ds1. The second storage effect storage area is a storage area for storing various parameters required to change the display mode of the suspension displays Dm21 to Dm24 which are suspension display of the second suspension display area Ds2. Since the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area have the same configuration, the first holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (a) will be described and shown in FIG. 92 (b). The description of the second holding effect storage area is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the storage area for the first holding effect stores various parameters and flags for each of the holding game times (n) for the first starting opening. The illustrated holding game times (n = 1 to 4) for the first starting opening correspond to the holding display Dm11 to the holding display Dm14. That is, the hold game times are executed in the order of the hold game times (n = 1) of the first start opening to the hold game times (n = 4) of the first start opening.

  As illustrated, in the first holding effect storage area, an additional level Lva, a display level upper limit Lvm, an actual display level Lvr, and a holding changeable flag are provided for each of the holding game times (n) for the first starting opening. Remember.

  The additional level Lva is a parameter whose value is fixed for each storage area corresponding to each of the reserved game times (n = 1 to 4). That is, the additional level Lva of the first game play slot (n = 1) is fixed at 1 and the first game play slot (n = 2) additional level Lva is fixed at 2 The additional level Lva of the first start slot reserved game time (n = 3) is fixed at 3 and the additional level Lva of the first start slot reserved game time (n = 4) is fixed at 4 There is. When changing the display mode of the hold display, the additional level displays the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order for the jackpot lottery among the hold display being displayed. In the case of changing the display mode, it is possible to make the stepwise width (difference of the actual display level Lvr) in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display to be larger. This parameter is used for changing the display mode of the hold display, and is a value corresponding to the number of stages of the rising actual display level Lvr. Therefore, the value of the additional level Lva is larger as the pending display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order for the jackpot lottery is later. In other words, it is a level value that is potentially given to each held game.

  On the other hand, the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are linked with various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 in each held game number, and the area to be stored is adjacent every time the game number is executed. Shift to the storage area of the hold game times. For example, as shown in FIG. 92 (a) and FIG. 92 (b), the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr stored in the storage area of the hold game number (n = 4) of the first starting opening Each parameter of is shifted to the storage area for holding game times (n = 3) of the first starting port in the first holding effect storage area when the game times are executed once, and the game times are executed once more. Then, the game is shifted to the storage area of the hold game times (n = 2) of the first starting opening in the first hold effect storage area.

  The display level upper limit value Lvm is a parameter that defines an upper limit value of how much the actual display level Lvr can be changed to a higher level when changing the display mode of the hold display. For example, the pending display in which the display level upper limit Lvm is 5 can change the actual display level Lvr to 5. The pending display whose display level upper limit Lvm is 3 can change the actual display level Lvr to 3 but can not change the actual display level Lvr to an actual display level Lvr higher than 3 such as 4 or 5. Can not.

  The actual display level Lvr is a parameter indicating the level of the display mode of the current hold display, as described in FIG.

  Note that the values of the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are values stored corresponding to the hold game times when the game ball enters the start opening and the hold game times exist. Therefore, as shown in an example in FIG. 92 (b), for example, there is a reserved gaming time for the second starting opening (n = 3) and a reserved gaming time for the second starting opening (n = 4) at a certain time. If not, the values of the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to the hold game times are not stored.

  The hold changeable flag is used when executing processing for changing the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, the hold changeable flag is turned ON in the hold game times that satisfy the condition that the display mode of the hold display can be changed, and is turned OFF after the hold display for changing the display mode is determined. Ru. Hereinafter, the flowchart of the parameter setting process for holding effect performed using the memory area for holding effect will be described.

<Parameter setting process for hold effect>
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing parameter setting processing for holding effect. The parameter setting process for holding effect is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S3505) of the update process at the time of winning.

  In step S3601, a display level upper limit setting process is performed. The said process is a process performed in order to set the display level upper limit Lvm. Details of the display level upper limit setting process will be described later. After the display level upper limit setting process is performed in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602.

  In step S3602, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the held game number of times corresponding to the entry of the current game ball. The parameter setting process for holding effects is a process executed each time the game ball enters the starting opening, and in step S3602, the storage area for holding effect is stored every time the game ball enters the starting opening. 1 is set to the actual display level L vr of the storage area of the game on hold game corresponding to the ball entry in the memory area for 1 on hold effect or the memory area for 2nd on hold effect. In the present process, since 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the holding game number corresponding to the ball entry, the display mode is set to white corresponding to 1 of the actual display level Lvr. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the starting opening, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the storage area of the held game corresponding to the entering ball, for example, by the entering ball When the reach random number counter C3 acquired is scheduled to execute reach effect by the reach determination table, the actual display level Lvr is set to 2 or the jackpot random number counter C1 acquired by the entering ball If the value of is a value corresponding to the jackpot lottery, the actual display level Lvr is set to a value of 2 or more, and the actual display level Lvr based on the values of various counters acquired by entering the starting opening. You may decide After executing step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603.

  In step S3603, an addition level Lva is set. As described above, the additional level Lva has a fixed value corresponding to each pending game play. Therefore, when the holding game time corresponding to the current game ball entering is the holding game time (n = 1), 1 is set as the additional level Lva, and the holding game time (n = 2). In this case, 2 is set as the additional level Lva, and 3 is set as the additional level Lva if the holding game time (n = 3), and if the holding game time (n = 4), 4 is set as the additional level Lva.

  After step S3603 is executed, the parameter setting process for main hold effect is ended.

<Display level upper limit setting process>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing display level upper limit value setting processing. The display level upper limit value setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 93: S3601) of the parameter setting process for holding effect.

  In step S3701, the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm is acquired. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the sound light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. After executing step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702.

  In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the held game number of times corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time is a jackpot lottery. Specifically, based on the information on the determination result of the first determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound-light side MPU 92 from the main MPU 62 by the first determination process executed triggered by entering the starting opening this time. To judge.

  If it is determined in step S3702 that the on-hold game game corresponding to the entry of the current game ball is winning the big hit lottery (S3702: YES), the process proceeds to step S3703.

  In step S3703, the jackpot upper limit table is referred to. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot upper limit table, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm is extracted.

  FIG. 95 is an explanatory view of an upper limit value table. FIG. 95 (a) shows a jackpot upper limit table.

  The jackpot upper limit table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are associated with each other and recorded. The sound side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm with reference to the jackpot upper limit table.

  As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit table, 80 values of 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm = 5 as the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm, and as the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm Ten values of 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm = 4, and five values of 5 to 9 as the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm = 3, the upper limit Five values from 0 to 4 correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm = 2 as the values of the value setting counter Cm, and the values of the zero upper limit setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm = 1 Is set. That is, in the held game times in which the jackpot lottery is won, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm will be 5 is configured to be the highest.

  FIG. 95 (b) shows the reach upper limit value table. The reach upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step S3705 described later. Similarly to the jackpot upper limit table, the reach upper limit table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other. It is. In the holding game times in which the reach occurs, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 4 is the highest, and then the probability that it is 5 or 3 is high.

  FIG. 95 (c) shows the non-reach reach upper limit table. The reach non-occurrence upper limit table is an upper limit table used in step S3706 described later. Similarly to the jackpot upper limit table, each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are recorded in association with each other for the reach non-occurrence upper limit table as well. It is table data. In the non-reach occurrence reserved game times, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 1 is the highest, and then the probability that it is 2 is high.

  The description returns to FIG. After the jackpot upper limit table is referred to in step S3703, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3702 that the on-hold game turn corresponding to the current entry of the game ball has not won the big hit lottery (S3702: NO), the process proceeds to step S3704.

  In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the held game count corresponding to the current game ball entry corresponds to a game count that generates a reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current reserved game number corresponds to the reach occurrence. Specifically, based on the information on the determination result of the first determination process included in the hold command acquired by the sound-light side MPU 92 from the main MPU 62 by the first determination process executed with the current entry to the starting opening as a trigger. judge.

  If it is determined in step S3704 that the on-hold game cycle corresponding to the current game ball entry corresponds to the on-reach game cycle (S3704: YES), the process proceeds to step S3705.

  In step S3705, the reach upper limit table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the reach upper limit value table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3704 that the held game number corresponding to the current game ball entry does not correspond to the game number for generating reach (S3704: NO), the process proceeds to step S3706.

  In step S3706, the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the reach non-occurrence upper limit table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  In step S3707, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm extracted in any of step S3703, step S3705, or step S3706 is used as the current hold game in the first hold effect storage area or the second hold effect storage area. Set in the storage area of display level upper limit value Lvm that corresponds to the time. Thereafter, the display level upper limit value setting process is ended.

<Effect setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process in the eighth embodiment. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 33: S1906).

  In the effect setting process, the difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 37) is that, in the present embodiment, a hold effect setting process is added as step S3801. Steps S3802 to S3815 in the effect setting process of the present embodiment and steps S2301 to S2314 in the effect setting process (FIG. 37) of the first embodiment are the same process. Therefore, the description of the processes in steps S3802 to S3815 is omitted.

  The holding effect setting process in step S3801 is performed to determine the holding game times to be subjected to the holding effect (effect to change the display mode of the indication effect and the holding display) and to set the content of the holding effect. Is a subroutine to be Hereinafter, the details of the hold effect setting process will be described.

<Hold effect setting process>
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing hold presentation setting processing in the eighth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S3801) of the effect setting process.

  In step S3901, a hold effect execution lottery process is executed. The holding effect execution lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to execute the holding effect by lottery. Specifically, a value is acquired from the random number counter for lottery, and among the plurality of numbers stored in the table data for lottery set in advance, whether or not there is a number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number counter Determine if If there is a number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number among the plurality of numbers stored in the table data, it is decided to execute the hold effect, and if there is no number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number Decide not to execute the rendition. After executing step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902.

  In step S3902, it is determined based on the result of the hold effect execution lottery process whether or not the hold effect is to be executed. When it is determined in step S3902 that the hold effect is to be executed (S3902: YES), the process proceeds to step S3903. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3902 that the hold effect is not to be executed (S3902: NO), the main hold effect setting process is ended.

  In step S3903, the display level upper limit value Lvm of each held game number is read. Specifically, the display level upper limit values of the respective holding game times stored in the first holding effect storage area (see FIG. 92A) and the second holding effect memory area (see FIG. 92B). Load Lvm. After executing step S3903, the process proceeds to step S3904.

  In step S3904, the actual display level Lvr of each pending game play is read. Specifically, the actual display levels Lvr of the respective reserved game times stored in the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area are read. After executing step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3905.

  In step S3905, the addition level Lva is added to the actual display level Lvr of each holding game time, and the addition value in each holding game time is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3906.

  In step S3906, the holding game times of display level upper limit Lvm 実 actual display level Lvr + additional level Lva are extracted. Specifically, a comparison of the sum of the actual display level Lvr calculated in step S3905 and the additional level Lva, and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm is executed in each pending game time, and the additional value is the display level. The pending game times below the upper limit Lvm are extracted. That is, the actual display level Lvr does not reach the predetermined upper limit (display level upper limit Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is advanced by the level value (additional level Lva) determined for each of the reserved game times. Extract pending game times that have room to change. In addition, the actual display level Lvr does not reach the predetermined upper limit (display level upper limit Lvm) without being limited to the above extraction method, and the actual display level Lvr is a level value determined for each of the reserved game times. Other extraction methods may be used as long as it is possible to extract the held game times that have room to be changed to the upper level by (additional level Lva). After executing step S3906, the process proceeds to step S3907.

  In step S3907, the on-hold change enable flag of the on-hold game play is set to ON where the display level upper limit Lvm vm actual display level Lvr + additional level Lva. That is, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times that can change the display mode of the hold display is set to ON. After executing step S3907, the process proceeds to step S3908.

  In step S3908, a holding effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. Details of the hold effect content determination process will be described later. After executing step S3908, the process proceeds to step S3909.

  In step S3909, a hold effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information relating to the content of the hold effect determined in step S3908 is set as a command, and transmitted to the display MPU 102. Thereafter, the on-hold effect setting process is ended.

<Hold effect contents determination process>
FIG. 98 is a flowchart of the on-hold effect content determination process. The hold presentation content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 97: S3908) of the hold presentation setting process.

  In step S4001, it is determined whether or not there is a held game count for which the held change possible flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times among the hold game times of the first hold effect memory area and the second hold effect memory area Do.

  When it is determined in step S4001 that the hold changeable flag is not ON (S4001: NO), the main holding effect content determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4001 that the hold change possible flag is ON (S4001: YES), the process proceeds to step S4002.

  In step S4002, it is determined whether the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. If it is determined in step S4002 that the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4002: YES), the process proceeds to step S4003.

  In step S4003, of the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed first is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. That is, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold game times executed as early as possible is changed. After executing step S4003, the process proceeds to step S4005.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4002 that the hold changeable flag is not ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4002: NO), the process proceeds to step S4004.

  In step S4004, of the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the second holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed first is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4005.

  In step S4005, the value of the hold effect counter Ce is acquired. The hold effect counter Ce is used when the sound light side MPU 92 determines the contents of the hold effect. The hold effect counter Ce is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Thereafter, after step S4005 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4006.

  In step S4006, a table for holding effect determination corresponding to the holding game times for which the display mode of the holding display is to be changed is referred to.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory view for explaining the holding effect determination table. The holding effect determination table is set separately for each holding game number.

  In FIG. 99 (a), the game times determined to be changed for the hold display are for the first start slot reserved game times (n = 1) (see FIG. 92 (a)) or for the second start slot In the case of holding game times (n = 1) (refer to FIG. 92 (b)), that is, the holding effect determination used when changing the display mode of the holding display Dm11 or the holding display Dm21 shown in FIG. Table. In the case of n = 1, 80 values of 22 to 99 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce for which the pattern 1 (see FIG. 89A) of the suggested effect is selected. In addition, 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as values of the hold effect counter Ce for which the pattern 2 (see FIG. 89B) of the suggested effect is selected. That is, in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88 (a), the probability of the suggestion effect pattern 1 being executed is high.

  In FIG. 99 (b), the game times determined to be changed for the hold display are the hold game times for the first start opening (n = 2) or the hold game times for the second start opening (n = 2) It is a table for holding effect determination used in the case of changing the display mode of the holding display Dm12 or the holding display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88 (a). In the case of n = 2, pattern 2 (see FIG. 89B) of the suggested effect is selected, and 70 values of 30 to 99 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce. Pattern 3 (see FIG. 90A) of the suggested effect is selected, and 20 values of 10 to 29 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce. Further, pattern 4 (see FIG. 90 (b)) of the suggested effect is selected, and ten values of 0 to 9 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88 (a), the probability that the suggested effect pattern 2 is executed is the highest, and then the suggested effect pattern 3 is executed The probability is high.

  In FIG. 99 (c), the game times determined to be changed for the hold indication are for the hold game times (n = 3) for the first starting opening (see FIG. 92 (a)) or for the second starting opening In the case of holding game times (n = 3) (see FIG. 92 (b)), that is, holding effect determination used when changing the display mode of the holding display Dm13 or the holding display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88 (a) Table. In the case of n = 3, 80 values of 20 to 99 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce for which the pattern 3 (see FIG. 90A) of the suggested effect is selected. In addition, 20 values of 0 to 19 are set as values of the hold effect counter Ce for which the pattern 4 (see FIG. 90B) of the suggested effect is selected. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88 (a), the probability of the suggestion effect pattern 3 being executed is high.

  In (d) of FIG. 99, the game times determined as the targets for changing the hold display are the hold game times for the first start opening (n = 4) or the hold game times for the second start opening (n = 4) It is a table for holding effect determination used in the case of changing the display mode of the holding display Dm14 or the holding display Dm24 shown in FIG. In the case of n = 4, 0 to 99 (100), which are the values of all of the hold effect counter Ce, are set in the pattern 4 of the suggested effect (see FIG. 90B). That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88 (a), the suggestion effect pattern 4 is executed in all cases.

  By setting the holding effect determination table as described above, for example, when the gun W2 is displayed, that is, when the pattern 2 of the suggestion effect is displayed, the holding display Dm11 (Dm21) or Dm12 (Dm22) The display mode of is changed. When the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes, only one real display level Lvr rises to the upper level according to the value of the additional level Lva, but the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes. The actual display level Lvr rises to a level higher by two in accordance with the value of the additional level Lva.

  Further, for example, when the missile W4 is displayed, that is, when the pattern 4 of the suggestion effect is displayed, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 (Dm22), Dm13 (Dm23), or the hold display Dm14 (Dm24) is Change. When the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes, the actual display level Lvr rises to a level higher by two according to the value of the additional level Lva, and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 changes, the additional level Depending on the value of Lva, the actual display level Lvr rises to a level higher by three, and when the display mode of the pending display Dm14 changes, the actual display level Lvr is higher than the four according to the value of the additional level Lva. Go up to the level of

  Therefore, by performing the suggestion effect, the player is roughly inferred which display mode of the hold display changes. In addition, since the number of levels to which the actual display level Lvr rises is different according to the pending display to be changed in the display mode, the player can be given a sense of expectation.

  After executing step S4006, the process proceeds to step S4007.

  In step S4007, the content of the determined on-hold effect is set as the on-off effect command. For example, when it is determined to change the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the suggestion effect to be executed is the suggestion effect (pattern 3), and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed from white to blue. Is set as information that can be specified as a command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4008.

  In step S4008, all the hold changeable flags turned on in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4009.

  In step S4009, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the hold game times for which the display mode is to be changed is updated to Lvr L Lvr + Lva. That is, since the actual display level Lvr changes (rises) by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for the hold effect is the actual after the display mode changes. Update to the value of display level Lvr. Thereafter, the main effect setting process for holding presentation is ended.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, among the displayed hold display, the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order of becoming the target of the jackpot lottery In the case where the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of is changed, the hold display is made such that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Change the display mode of. When the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment performs such processing, the following effects can be obtained.

  In general, when the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display becomes the target of the jackpot lottery becomes shorter, the opportunity for changing the display mode decreases. In other words, in the displayed pending display, the pending display corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1 preceded by the target for the big hit lottery is the order in which the winning display is displayed among the displayed pending displays. Is relatively shorter in the remaining time to be displayed and less likely to change the display mode than the pending display corresponding to the subsequent jackpot random number counter C1. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially displays the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. Hope to change. However, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display may change, which corresponds to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order for the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is reduced.

  Therefore, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment holds the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order for the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. When changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is changed such that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Therefore, temporarily, even if the display mode of the hold display is relatively changed after the order for the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays is contrary to the player's wish, the hold display In the display mode of the display mode, the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before change and after the change becomes large, so that it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's sense of expectation and, rather, further higher expectation. It can give a feeling.

  That is, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment holds the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined. Determine the display mode of the display. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the pending game times corresponding to other pending displays by using the pending display of the object for which the display mode has been determined.

  More specifically, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment changes the display mode of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is changed. Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display of the target whose display mode is to be changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the information about the holding game round corresponding to another holding display to the player by using the holding display of the object whose display mode is to be changed.

  In addition, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display for which the display mode is to be determined. As another example, it is also possible to execute the following processing.

  For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display of the target for which the display mode is to be determined is the jackpot random number counter that is the target of the jackpot lottery earlier than the jackpot random number counter C1. When the display mode of the hold display for which the display mode is to be determined is determined as a specific display mode, or the like, in the case of being advantageous to the player over the value of C1, In addition, information about other pending displays can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player does not stop only guessing the return for one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, and is executed before and after the other etc. We make various guesses about the return of pending game times. Therefore, it is possible to create new playability by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency more than before, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  Moreover, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. As another example of the process of determining the display mode after the change of display, it is possible to execute the following process.

  For example, based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display of the pending game times executed earlier than the pending game times corresponding to the pending display of the subject to change the display mode, the pending display of the target to change the display mode The display mode after change of can be determined. As a result, the following game characteristics can be realized. For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 to be subjected to the determination by the determination means prior to the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display of the target for changing the display mode. It can be changed to the display mode (display mode which is advantageous to the player) at a higher level than the display mode. Thus, various new game characteristics can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes before changing the display mode of the hold display, the change of the display mode of the hold display On the other hand, it is possible to make the player pay attention and to give a sense of expectation. In other words, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestion effect and the change of the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggestion effect is used to change the display mode of the hold display. The player can be made to pay attention to it. That is, in addition to the effect of executing a suggested effect such as giving a sense of expectation or feeling of tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as giving a sense of expectation or feeling of tension for the subsequent game round, By changing the display mode of the hold display after the game, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of tension synergistically with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display, and the interest of the game is improved synergistically. be able to.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment selects a suggestion effect to be executed from among a plurality of kinds of suggestion effects prepared according to an object whose display mode is to be changed among the displayed pending displays, While being able to make a player pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to which hold display to be displayed for which the display mode is to be changed.

  In the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect is performed, stepwise widths in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before change and after change of the hold display to be changed (before the change of the display mode) According to the size of the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the value after change, a process of selecting a suggested effect to be performed may be adopted from among a plurality of suggested effects prepared. In this way, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for changes in the display mode of the hold display, it is possible for the effect to be executed as a suggested effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. The player can be given a sense of expectation also for the type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, the display mode is changed to the next higher stage, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, the second higher stage is changed. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 to change the display mode of the hold display Dm13, change the display mode of the upper three stages, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, display mode of the upper four stages Between the before and after the change of the pending display to be changed, the stepwise width in the multiple stages of the set display mode (the actual display between before and after the change of the display mode) Other aspects may be adopted as the magnitude of the level Lvr difference).

  For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, change it to the display mode of one higher stage, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, change it to the display mode of four higher stages, When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, change to the display mode of the upper six stages, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, change the display mode of the upper 10 stages, etc. When changing the display mode of, the display order of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 after the order for the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays changes the relative In addition, stepwise widths (a table of the actual display level Lvr1 to the actual display level Lvr5) of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display As the difference between the actual display level Lvr) increases between the front change aspects and after the change, if the mode changing the display mode of the hold display, may be employed other aspects. In the first holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (a) and the additional level values in the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (b), the order for the jackpot lottery is after that This can be realized by setting the order of the target of the jackpot lottery to a relatively large value as compared with the previous holding game times as the holding game times become. In this case, the upper limit of the values of the actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit Lvm which can be taken may be set to a value larger than the maximum value of the additional display level Lva which can be taken, such as 15 or 20. Further, the pattern of the display mode of the hold display may be set corresponding to each value of the possible actual display level Lvr.

  Furthermore, as the order for becoming the target of the jackpot lottery is a later holding game cycle, the order for becoming the target of the jackpot lottery has a plurality of additional level patterns having relatively large values compared to the previous holding game times. It may be That is, as in the present embodiment, the value of the additional level Lva corresponding to the pending display Dm11, the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, and the pending display Dm14 is (1, 2, 3, 4), or , 6, 10) or a pattern of (1, 5, 8, 10), etc., a plurality of additional level Lva patterns may be selected, and which pattern is applied may be determined by lottery.

  In addition, only when a specific condition is satisfied, the processing described in the above embodiment may be applied to change the display mode of the hold display. Further, the case of changing the display mode of the suspension display by applying the process described in the above embodiment and the case of changing the display mode of the suspension display without applying the process described in the above embodiment are determined by lottery. You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are determined based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1, but the value of the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the value of the variation type counter CS, etc. , And may be determined based on various parameters linked to each reserved game time. Further, among these various parameters, the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be determined based on a plurality of parameters. For example, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr is set based on the big hit random number counter C1 so that the probability of setting the value in the case of big hit to a higher value than in the case of out Based on the value of C2, the probability variation jackpot may be set higher than that of the normal jackpot. Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, the values of the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be set higher in the case of reach occurrence than in the case of no reach occurrence.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. First, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described, and then details of the processing will be described. In addition, since the structure of the hardware with which the pachinko machine 10 is equipped is the same as that of the said 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

I1. Outline of processing by gaming machine:
The feature of this embodiment is that, as in the above eighth embodiment, the hold effect (effect to change the display mode of the hold display and suggestion effect) is executed. A different point from the eighth embodiment is how to change the display mode of the hold display.

  In the eighth embodiment described above, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 after the order for the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays When changing the display mode of the display mode, the stepwise widths of the display mode at different stages between the before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display (the actual state between the before and after the change of the display mode) The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference between the display levels Lvr is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, a higher-order hold than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed earlier than the hold display of the object for which the display mode is changed. Change to display. More precisely, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 targeted for the jackpot lottery earlier than the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display for which the display mode is changed It changes to the display mode of the upper stage than the display mode of a display.

  In the case where the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is green and the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is white, for example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, a specific example is illustrated using FIG. The display mode is changed to a higher display mode than green, which is a display mode of the hold display Dm11 which is a hold display of the hold game times executed earlier than the hold display Dm12. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, the display mode is changed to the display mode of red or yellow which is a display mode higher than green.

  As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is blue, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is green, and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is white, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed The display mode is changed to blue, which is a display mode of the hold display Dm11 which is a hold display of the hold game times executed earlier than the hold display Dm13, and a display mode higher than green which is a display mode of the hold display Dm12. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the display mode is changed to the display mode of red or yellow which is a display mode higher than blue and green.

  When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, also changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display area Ds1. Similarly to the above, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode is changed to a higher-order hold display than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed earlier than the hold display of the object whose display mode is changed.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes, as in the eighth embodiment, the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes before changing the display mode of the suspension display. . In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a suggestion effect to be performed is selected from among a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to an object for changing the display mode among the displayed pending displays.

  FIG. 100 is an explanatory view for explaining a suggestion effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 100, a suggested effect (pattern 1), a suggested effect (pattern 2), and a suggested effect executed prior to changing each display mode of the pending display Dm11, the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, and the pending display Dm14. (Pattern 3) and suggestive effect (Pattern 4) are shown.

  This suggestive effect is an effect simulating a long jump. For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, a suggestion effect (pattern 1) is performed. The suggestive effect (pattern 1) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after running in and gets down onto the hold display Dm11. After the suggestion effect (pattern 1) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. As another example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is performed. The suggested effect (pattern 4) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after running in and gets down onto the hold display Dm14. After the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes.

  In addition, also when changing the display mode of pending | holding display Dm21-Dm24 currently displayed on 2nd pending | holding display area Ds2, the production | presentation similar to the suggestion production demonstrated above is performed, Then, pending | holding display Dm21, pending | holding display Dm22, The display mode of the hold display Dm23 or the hold display Dm24 changes.

  The suggested effect is an effect in which a hold display for changing the display mode is determined according to the flight distance of the jump after the character Ch runs. Therefore, for example, by prolonging the airtime after the character Ch jumps, it is possible to make the player speculate as to which on-hold display the player should land, as well as giving a sense of expectation and tension.

  Hereinafter, an example of a process for realizing the present embodiment will be described in detail.

I2. Processing details:
In this description, differences from the processing in the eighth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area for holding effect in the ninth embodiment. The storage area for holding effect in the ninth embodiment includes a storage area for first holding effect and a storage area for second holding effect, as in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 101 (a) shows the first holding effect storage area, and FIG. 101 (b) shows the second holding effect storage area.

  The difference between the present embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area of the present embodiment do not have a storage area for storing the additional level Lva. In this embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed to each holding game time, but in the process of a series of processing to change the display mode of the holding display, the holding game time of the holding display to change the display mode Are determined (see FIG. 104: step S4305). The remaining effects of the storage area for holding effect of the ninth embodiment are similar to those of the eighth embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Parameter setting process for hold effect>
FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing hold setting parameter setting processing in the ninth embodiment. The parameter setting process for holding effect is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S3505) of the update process at the time of winning.

  The difference between the parameter setting process for holding effect in the present embodiment and the parameter setting process for holding effect in the eighth embodiment is that the parameter setting process for holding effect in the embodiment is the addition performed in the eighth embodiment. This means that there is no process (FIG. 93: S3603) of setting the level Lva in the pending information storage area 64b. As described above, in the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed to each hold game time in the hold information storage area 64b, but is determined in the course of a series of processes for changing the display mode of the hold display. Be done. Therefore, in the parameter setting process for holding effect in the present embodiment, the process of setting the additional level Lva is not executed.

  The other processing is the same as the parameter setting processing for holding effect in the eighth embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Note that the processing content of the display level upper limit value setting processing, which is a subroutine executed in step S4101, is also the same, so the description is omitted.

<Hold effect setting process>
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing hold presentation setting processing in the ninth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S3801) of the effect setting process.

  Steps S4201 to S4204 in the hold effect setting process in the present embodiment and the processes in steps S3901 to S3904 in the hold effect setting process (FIG. 97) in the eighth embodiment are the same processes. Therefore, the process after step S4205 will be described.

  The processes of steps S4205 to S4209 are processes executed to extract a hold display that can change the display mode. That is, it is a process of extracting a hold display that can be changed to a higher-order hold display than the display manner of the hold display of the hold game times executed prior to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed.

  In step S4205, the actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit Lvm of the respective holding game times recorded in the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area are read, and any holding executed first The holding game times in which the display level upper limit Lvm of a value larger than the value of the actual display level Lvr of the game times is recorded are extracted.

  When the first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101 (a) is described as an example, the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) of the hold game times (n = 3) (hold display Dm13) is the hold game times (4). Since it is larger than the value of the actual display level Lvr of any of the held game times executed prior to n = 3), the condition in step S4205 is satisfied. Therefore, the hold game times (n = 3) are game times extracted in step S4205.

  On the other hand, the display level upper limit Lvm (= 1) of the hold game times (n = 2) (hold display Dm12) is of the hold game times (n = 1) executed prior to the hold game times (n = 2) Since the value is smaller than the actual display level Lvr (= 2), the condition in step S4205 is not satisfied. Therefore, the hold game times (n = 2) are game times not extracted in step S4205.

  It should be noted that there is no game play to be executed earlier than the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21 among the hold game times. That is, in the first hold effect storage area, there is no game play to be executed before the hold game play (n = 1). Further, in the second hold effect storage area, there is no game play to be executed prior to the hold game play (n = 1). Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether or not the condition of step S4205 is satisfied for the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm11 and the holding display Dm21. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm11 and the holding display Dm21, when the holding game number is present, it is automatically regarded as satisfying the condition in step S4205, Extract in the process. After executing step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4206.

  In step S4206, from among the hold game times extracted in step S4205, the hold game times whose display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is extracted. That is, the holding game times having room to change the display mode are extracted.

  Assuming that the first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101 (a) is described as an example, the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold game times (n = 3) (hold display Dm13) is the display level upper limit Lvm ( Less than 4). Therefore, in this case, the pending game times (n = 3) satisfy the condition in step S4206 and are extracted by the process.

  After executing step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207.

  In step S4207, the on-hold change possible flag of on-hold game times extracted in the process of step S4206 is set to ON. After executing step S4207, the process proceeds to step S4208.

  In step S4208, a holding effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. Details of the hold effect content determination process will be described later. After executing step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a hold effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information on the content of the hold effect determined in step S4208 is set as a command, and is transmitted to the display MPU 102. Thereafter, the on-hold effect setting process is ended.

<Hold effect contents determination process>
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the hold effect content determination process in the ninth embodiment. The on-hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 103: S4208) of on-off effect parameter setting process.

  In step S4301, it is determined whether there is a held game count for which the held change possible flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times among the hold game times of the first hold effect memory area and the second hold effect memory area Do.

  When it is determined in step S4301 that the hold changeable flag is not ON (S4301: NO), the main holding effect content determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4301 that the hold change possible flag is ON (S4301: YES), the process proceeds to step S4302.

  In step S4302, it is determined whether the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. If it is determined in step S4302 that the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area (S4302: YES), the process proceeds to step S4303.

  In step S4303, of the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed last is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. In the eighth embodiment, in step S4003 (FIG. 98), the hold game time to be executed first among the hold game times for which the hold changeable flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area is displayed on hold In the present embodiment, the display mode of the display for holding is changed to the hold game time to be executed last in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described in step S4205 of the holding effect setting process (FIG. 103), in the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm11 and the holding display Dm21, when the holding game times exist, It is automatically extracted in the processing, assuming that the condition in step S4205 is satisfied. Therefore, in the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm11 and the holding display Dm21, the holding change possible flag is highly likely to be ON, and in step S4303, as in the processing in the eighth embodiment, the first process is temporarily performed. Among the holding game times in which the holding changeable flag is ON in the holding effect storage area, when the holding game time to be executed first is determined to be the target for changing the display mode of the holding display, the holding display Dm11 with high probability. And the hold display Dm 21 becomes an object to change the display mode, and even if the display mode of the hold display is changed, it becomes difficult to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency. Therefore, in the present embodiment, of the holding game times in which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed last is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display Do. After executing step S4303, the process proceeds to step S4305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4302 that the on-hold changeable flag is not ON in any on-hold game occasion in the first on-hold effect storage area (S4302: NO), the process proceeds to step S4304.

  In step S4304, of the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the second holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed last is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. After executing step S4304, the process proceeds to step S4305.

  In step S4305, an additional display level Lva is determined. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display, it is determined how much higher the display mode is to be changed. More specifically, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode is determined between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display.

  Specifically, the difference value between the display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display which is the target of changing the display mode is calculated, and one value is determined from the difference values. Do. For example, when it is determined that the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm13 shown in the first holding effect recording area in FIG. 101 (a) are targets to change the display mode, the display level upper limit value Lvm (= The difference value (= 3) between 4) and the actual display level Lvr (= 1) is calculated. Then, one value is determined from among 1 to 3 which is a difference value, and the determined value is determined as the additional display level Lva. As a method of determining the value of one, it may be determined using a random number, or may always adopt the maximum value (3 in this specific example) of possible values. Thus, the additional display level Lva is determined. After executing step S4305, the process proceeds to step S4306.

  In step S4306, the content of the hold effect is determined. Specifically, the content of the suggestion effect according to the pending display of the target whose display mode is to be changed, and the display mode of the pending display after the change are determined. For example, when the target for changing the display mode is the hold display Dm11, the suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect (pattern 1) shown in FIG. Similarly, in the case where the target to change the display mode is the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14, respectively, a suggested effect (pattern 2), a suggested effect (pattern 3), or a suggested effect (pattern 3) Determined in pattern 4).

  Moreover, when determining the display mode of the hold display after change, the additional value of the actual display level Lvr and the additional display level Lva of the hold display for which the display mode is to be changed is calculated, and this value corresponds to the added value. The display mode is determined based on the correspondence between the actual display level Lvr shown in FIG. 88 (b) and the display mode of the hold display. For example, the additional display level Lva is determined to be 2 when the on-hold game time corresponding to the on-hold display Dm13 shown in the first on-hold effect recording area of FIG. In this case, since the addition value of the actual display level Lvr (= 1) and the additional display level Lva (= 2) is 3, the display mode of the actual display level Lvr and the suspension display shown in FIG. 88 (b) The display mode of the hold display after the change is determined to be green based on the correspondence with. After executing step S4306, the process proceeds to step S4307.

  In step S4307, the content of the determined on-hold effect is set as the on-off effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4308.

  In step S4308, all the hold changeable flags set to ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4309.

  In step S4309, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the hold game times for which the display mode is to be changed is updated to Lvr ← Lvr + Lva. That is, since the actual display level is changed by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for the hold effect is the actual display level Lvr after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of Thereafter, the main effect setting process for holding presentation is ended.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment targets the jackpot lottery earlier than the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display which is the target for changing the display mode when changing the display mode of the hold display. It changes to the display mode of a higher stage than the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which becomes. When the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment performs such processing, the following effects can be obtained.

  For example, when there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player further desires a change to a higher-order display mode with respect to the hold display, the display mode of the specific hold display You may want to change. However, contrary to the player's request, the suspension display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 targeted for the jackpot lottery after the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the suspension display that the player wishes to change the display mode The display mode of may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the predetermined holding display, the jackpot random number counter C1 to be the target of the jackpot lottery earlier than the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the predetermined holding display. The display mode is changed to a higher-order display mode than the display mode of the corresponding hold display. Therefore, temporarily, against the player's request, the display of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 to be the target of the jackpot lottery after the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode Even when the mode changes, the hold display in which the display mode has changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display in which the player desires the change in the display mode. Can be suppressed and, on the other hand, it can give a further feeling of expectation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment corresponds to another pending display different from the pending display for which the display mode is to be determined when determining the display mode of the pending display, as in the eighth embodiment. The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the pending game times corresponding to other pending displays by using the pending display of the object for which the display mode has been determined.

  More specifically, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment changes the display mode of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is changed. Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display of the target whose display mode is to be changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the pending game times corresponding to other pending displays by using the pending display of the object whose display mode is to be changed.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes, as in the eighth embodiment, the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes before changing the display mode of the suspension display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the display mode of the hold display and to give an expectation. In other words, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggestion effect and the change of the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggestion effect is used to change the display mode of the hold display. The player can be made to pay attention to it. That is, in addition to the effect of executing a suggested effect such as giving a sense of expectation or feeling of tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as giving a sense of expectation or feeling of tension for the subsequent game round, By changing the display mode of the hold display after the game, the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of tension synergistically with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display, and the interest of the game is improved synergistically. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, when the suggestion effect is performed, stepwise widths in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before change and after change of the hold display to be changed (before the change of the display mode) According to the size of the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the value after change, a process of selecting a suggested effect to be performed may be adopted from among a plurality of suggested effects prepared. In this way, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for changes in the display mode of the hold display, it is possible for the effect to be executed as a suggested effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. The player can be given a sense of expectation also for the type.

J. Tenth embodiment:
It is also possible to adopt a suggestive effect different from the eighth and ninth embodiments. Hereinafter, other suggested effects that can be adopted will be described.

<Another example 1 of suggestion effect>
FIG. 105 is an explanatory view showing an indication effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 1 of the indication effect. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), in the suggestion effect of the present another example, the player selects a hold display to be changed in the display mode. Specifically, at the same time when the game is started, a display is displayed on the display surface 41a to prompt the player to select a hold display for which the display mode is desired to be changed within the time limit. Do. The time limit is set to, for example, a time that allows the player to select the hold display within the fluctuation time of the currently running game, such as setting the time to one second shorter than the fluctuation time of the played game. Do.

  Every time the player operates the production operation button 24, the arrow YJ displayed above the hold display moves to the left by one, and after the arrow YJ moves to the end of the existing hold display, the production operation button 24 is operated If it is, the arrow YJ is moved to the top of the hold display Dm11 again.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (b), at the timing when the time limit period ends, the pending display located below the arrow YJ temporarily displays another object (the object X1 of "smoke" in FIG. 105 (b)) Prevents the player from seeing the hold display.

  After that, when it is possible to change the display mode, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the hold display is displayed in the display mode after the change.

  On the other hand, when the display mode can not be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  Hereinafter, the process for realizing the suggestion effect in another example 1 will be specifically described.

  FIG. 106 shows a storage area for holding effect in another example 1. Fig. 106 (a) shows a first holding effect storage area in another example 1, and Fig. 106 (b) shows a second holding effect storage area in another example 1. The storage area for holding effect in another example 1 includes a memory area for storing the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to each holding game number. The method of determining the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the value of the actual display level Lvr of each of the reserved game times is the same as in the eighth and ninth embodiments, and is determined in the parameter setting process for holding effect.

  In the suggestion effect, when the time limit has passed and the number of held game times selected by the player is determined, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in the selected held game times, and the display level upper value If Lvm> actual display level Lvr, the display mode of the pending display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm. For example, in FIG. 106, when the holding game number selected by the player is the holding display Dm13, since the holding display Dm13 is the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, the display mode of the holding display Dm13 is It changes to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4). That is, from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the pending display Dm13 before changing the display mode, the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed Change the aspect. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  Temporarily, when it is not the display level upper limit value Lvm> actual display level Lvr that the holding game time which the player selected is (for example, the hold display Dm11 in FIG. 106 (a)), the display mode of the selected hold display is Do not change.

  The suggestion effect in another example 1 can be applied to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment described above.

  First, the case where the suggestion effect in another example 1 is applied to the above eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment described above, the first hold effect among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in step S4003 or step S4004 (FIG. 98) when determining the hold display to change the display mode. Although the hold display corresponding to the hold game time to be executed first in the first storage area or the second hold effect storage area is determined to be the target for changing the display mode, the player performs the rendering operation instead of the processing. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the operation of the button 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player by the operation of the presentation operation button 24 is not ON. In this case, processing may be applied that does not change the pending display.

  Then, the suggestion effect of another example 1 is applied, and at the timing when the time limit time ends, the hold display located under the arrow is temporarily displayed on another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105B). By displaying, the player can not visually recognize the hold display.

  After that, when it is possible to change the display mode, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the hold display is displayed in the display mode after the change.

  On the other hand, when the display mode can not be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  In this way, while a new game characteristic of making the player select the hold display that wants to change the display mode is created, and whether the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed or not Can be given to the player. Furthermore, in the case where the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changeable, the case where the hold display selected by the player in the existing hold display is the target of the jackpot lottery is later The number of steps to rank up the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode in the pending display for which the display mode changes is increased, and the same effects as in the eighth embodiment are exhibited, and the game is played People can be given a sense of expectation.

  Next, the case where the suggestion effect in another example 1 is applied to the above ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment described above, the first hold effect among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in step S4303 or step S4304 (FIG. 104) when determining the hold display to change the display mode. Although the hold display corresponding to the hold game run to be performed last of the second memory area for storage or the second memory area for hold effect is determined to be the target for changing the display mode, instead of the processing, the player performs the production operation button When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the operation of 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player by the operation of the presentation operation button 24 is not ON A process may be applied that does not change the hold display.

  Then, the suggestion effect of another example 1 is applied, and at the timing when the time limit time ends, the hold display located under the arrow is temporarily displayed on another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105B). By displaying, the player can not visually recognize the hold display.

  After that, when it is possible to change the display mode, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the hold display is displayed in the display mode after the change.

  On the other hand, when the display mode can not be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  In this way, while a new game characteristic of making the player select the hold display that wants to change the display mode is created, and whether the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed or not Can be given to the player. Furthermore, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changeable, the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed earlier than the hold display of the target for which the display mode is changed is higher Since the display is changed to the hold display, an effect similar to that of the above-described ninth embodiment can be obtained, and an expectation can be given to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of another example 1 can create new game characteristics such as causing the player to select the hold display in the suggestion effect. In addition, as described above, the suggestion effects that cause the player in the alternative example 1 to select the hold display can be applied to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment described above. Specifically, whether the display mode of the hold display is to be changed is determined depending on whether the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is ON. Therefore, it is possible to create new playability such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player itself changes.

  In this case, when the on-hold changeable flag corresponding to the on-hold display selected by the player is not ON, the display mode of the on-hold display is not changed even though the suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, the player's recognition that the display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed can be reversed, and unexpectedness can be given to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect is executed, a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes after that can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As described in the eighth embodiment, also in the alternative example 1, when executing the suggestion effect, a plurality of display modes set between before and after the change of the hold display to be changed According to the size of the stepwise width (the difference between the actual display level Lvr before and after the change of the display mode) in the stage, select a suggested effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggested effects prepared Processing may be adopted. In this way, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for changes in the display mode of the hold display, it is possible for the effect to be executed as a suggested effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. The player can be given a sense of expectation also for the type.

<Another example 2 of suggestion effect>
FIG. 107 is an explanatory view showing an indication effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the indication effect. FIG. 107 (a) shows the state of the suggestive effect in this example. FIG. 107 (b) shows the hold display displayed on the display surface 41 a after the suggestion effect in the present another example is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the suggestion effect of this another example is a suggestion effect that the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode. However, in the suggested effect in the present example, the missile W5 explodes without hitting any of the pending displays despite being fired toward the pending display which is the target of changing the display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the display mode of the pending display displayed on the display surface 41a does not change after the suggestion effect is finished although the suggestion effect in this example is executed. . Specific processing will be described below.

  The second alternative example also uses the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. And the pending | holding display used as the object which changes a display mode is determined by lottery. It is determined whether or not the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in the determined reserved game times, and if the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, FIG. As in the suggestion effect (pattern 4) shown in b), the suggestion effect of changing the display mode of the hold display is executed, and thereafter, the display mode of the hold display is a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm Change to

  For example, in FIG. 106, when the pending display subject to change the display mode is the pending display Dm13, the pending display Dm13 is the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, so the diagram of the eighth embodiment The same indication effect as that of the indication effect (pattern 4) shown in 90 (b) is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4). That is, from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the pending display Dm13 before changing the display mode, the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed Change the aspect. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  On the other hand, if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr does not hold in the held game times corresponding to the held display for which the display mode is to be changed, the process shown in FIG. Perform a suggested rendition.

  By executing such a suggestion effect in another example 2 in combination with the suggestion effect performed in the eighth embodiment, after the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes. The recognition can be reversed, and unexpectedness can be given to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect is executed, a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes after that can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Another example 3 of suggestion effect>
FIG. 108 is an explanatory view showing an indication effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the indication effect. FIG. 108 (a) shows the state of the suggestive effect in this example. FIG. 108 (b) shows the hold display displayed on the display surface 41 a after the suggestion effect in the present another example is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the suggestion effect of this another example is the suggestion effect that the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display which is the target of changing the display mode. However, in the suggested effect in this example, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), despite the fact that the missile W5 is launched toward the hold display which is the target of changing the display mode and hits the hold display. The display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect is finished does not change.

  The suggestion effect can be realized by executing the same process as the above another example 2. Specifically, the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 106 are used. And the pending | holding display used as the object which changes a display mode is determined by lottery. It is determined whether or not the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in the determined holding game times, and in the case where the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, as shown in FIG. 90 (b) of the eighth embodiment. As indicated suggestion effect (pattern 4), the suggestion effect of changing the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm .

  For example, in FIG. 106, when the pending display subject to change the display mode is the pending display Dm13, the pending display Dm13 is the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, so the diagram of the eighth embodiment The same indication effect as that of the indication effect (pattern 4) shown in 90 (b) is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4). That is, from the display mode "white" corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the pending display Dm13 before changing the display mode, the display mode "red" corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed Change the aspect. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  On the other hand, if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr does not hold in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display for which the display mode is to be changed, the suggested effect in FIG. Run.

  By executing such a suggestion effect in another example 3 in combination with the suggestion effect performed in the eighth embodiment, the player can change the display mode of the hold display after the suggestion effect is performed. The recognition can be reversed, and unexpectedness can be given to the game. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect is executed, a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes after that can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Another example 4 of suggestion effect>
After the suggestion effect is performed, the display modes of two or more adjacent hold displays may be changed. For example, in the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 106, when the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in two or more adjacent holding game times, The display modes of the two or more adjacent pending displays are changed substantially simultaneously.

  In addition, prior to changing the display mode of two or more adjacent holding displays, for example, the following suggestion effects can be performed.

  FIG. 109 is an explanatory view showing an indication effect performed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 4 of the indication effect. FIG. 109 (a) shows the state of the suggestive effect in this example. FIG. 109 (b) shows the hold display displayed on the display surface 41 a after the suggestion effect in the present another example is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the suggestion effect of the present another example is the suggestion effect of the missile W5 being fired toward the hold display which is the target of changing the display mode. In the suggestion effect of this example, the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display which is the target of changing the display mode, and hits adjacent two hold displays. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the display mode of the two adjacent hold displays changes.

  By executing such a suggestive effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation such as how many display modes of the hold display change after the suggested effect is performed.

K. Eleventh embodiment:
K1. Structure of gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 110 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 further includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio light emission control device, a display control device, etc., are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable and a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so as not to be openable. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. An electric decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing at the time of the jackpot lottery, jackpot winning, reach occurrence, etc., performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores gaming balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine not shown and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to the game ball emission mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower tray 21 stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 20. At the bottom of the lower tray 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the gaming ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the gaming ball is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

  In front of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a rendering operation button 24 as an operation receiving unit is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25 (rotation operation), the game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided to detect the amount of rotational operation of the lens by changing the electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The gaming ball is fired from the gaming ball launch mechanism to the front of the gaming board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  In addition, on the left side in a front view of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a game ball emission button 26 for the player to operate is provided. When the game ball emission button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is emitted to the front of the game board with a predetermined emission intensity regardless of the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same shot intensity as when the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is fired by operating the gaming ball launch button 26, the gaming ball flows to the right of the gaming board in a front view and flows down the right side of the gaming board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can do so-called "right-hand strike". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and operates the game ball emission button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball emission button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 adopts the configuration disposed on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in a front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is disposed at another position It may be adopted. For example, as in the case of the weight button 25b, a configuration may be employed in which the game ball emission button 26 is disposed inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25. By doing this, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 with only the right hand.

  FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. Between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b, a guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism are guided to the induction rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are implanted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various features such as a windmill are disposed. The nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening 48. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general winning opening 32 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and a plurality of the game winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as a winning ball.

  The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance where game balls can enter. The first start opening 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as a winning ball, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed.

  The second start port 34 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, one game ball is paid out as a winning ball, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. In addition, the second starting port 34 is provided with a motorized jack 34a.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the longitudinal direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the motorized accessory 34a. Specifically, when the gaming ball passes through gate 35, main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric combination opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric combination 34a shifts to the open condition in which the electric combination is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting opening 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball having passed the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after the passage. It is possible to enter the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, even if the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the winning balls is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30, and an open / close door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state where the game ball can not enter the large winning opening 36a. When the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot or the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode is a mode in which the open / close process of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter changes from the closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter into After being switched to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as a winning ball.

  The V winning opening 48 is a ball entry port where game balls can enter, and is a ball entry port under which the high probability mode is operated. The V winning opening 48 is provided with an open / close door 48a. The open / close door 48a is switched from the closed state to the open state at a predetermined timing in the round game occurring in the open / close execution mode executed with the jackpot lottery after winning the jackpot by the jackpot lottery, and is closed after a predetermined time Return. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 while the open / close door 48a is in the open state, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the end of the round game. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes 120 game runs in the high probability mode gaming state, thereafter, the lottery mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Although illustration is omitted, a distribution piece is provided on the path through which the game balls from the open / close door 48a to the V winning opening 48 circulate. The game balls entered from the open / close door 48 a are distributed by the distribution pieces into a path for entering the V winning opening 48 and a path for not entering the V winning opening 48. When it is detected that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 except when the opening / closing door 48a is controlled as an internal control and the distribution piece is controlled in the direction of entering the V winning opening 48 In the above, it is determined that the prize is an incorrect prize, and it is informed that an illegal prize has occurred. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is output and the LED lamp is blinked.

  In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol variably displayed or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a is a display mode until the segment display unit causes the display corresponding to the lottery result to be displayed when a big hit lottery is performed with the game ball entering the first start opening 33 as a trigger. , To display the first symbol variation display or predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the gaming round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as the first starting opening gaming round.

  The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol variably displayed or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The second symbol display portion 37b is a display mode until the segment display unit causes a display corresponding to the lottery result to be displayed when a big hit lottery is performed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger. , The second symbol variation display or predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37 b causes the second symbol display unit 37 b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the gaming round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34 is also referred to as the second starting opening gaming round.

  Here, the time from the start of variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is shown Also called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first fluctuation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variation display of the second symbol to be displayed to the stop display is also referred to as a second variation time.

  The special view unit 37 further includes a first holding display unit 37c and a second holding display unit 37d formed of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

  The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of first start ports 33 to be held according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having entered the first starting opening 33 are held.

  The second hold display unit 37 d displays the number of held second starting ports 34 according to the color and the combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having entered the second starting opening 34 are held.

  The drawing unit 38 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the motor-operated combination open lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the drawing unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to turn on, blink, or display a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light-emitting display. When the motorized combination opening lottery ends, the drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is constituted by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding to it. The round game is opened or closed until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls enter the variable winning device 36. It is a game which continues the open state of the door 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special view unit 37, the common view unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may be constituted by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display control device 100 controls the display content of the symbol display device 41. In addition, the structure of the display apparatus with which the variable display unit 40 is equipped is not limited to the symbol display apparatus 41, For example, you may be comprised by various display apparatuses, such as a plasma display apparatus, an organic electroluminescent display apparatus, or CRT.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, the symbol display device 41 changes the display of the symbol or the predetermined display accordingly. I do. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device 41 changes the display of the symbol or the predetermined display accordingly. Display of. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to performing the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and when the big hit is won. It also displays effects during the open / close execution mode to be transitioned. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41a which is variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 112 (a) is an explanatory view showing a first liquid crystal symbol or a second liquid crystal symbol variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols indicating 1 to 8 in a variable manner as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, you may employ | adopt the symbol in which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows 1-8 of a number as a symbol by which a variable display is carried out.

  FIG. 112 (b) is an explanatory view showing a display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown, a main display area MA and a first sub-display area SA1 are displayed on the display surface 41a. There are cases where an image of a first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and a case where an image of a second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA. Similarly, similarly to the main display area MA, there are cases where an image of a first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and a case where an image of a second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. Specifically, when the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA, the second liquid crystal design is displayed in the first sub display area SA1, and the second liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA. When is displayed, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. That is, the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA and the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the first sub display region SA1 are switched and displayed in a predetermined case.

  In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, symbols of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. A variable display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), after variation display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L1 for each symbol row.

  Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is performed, and if the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, the predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the effective line L1 It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L1. The embodiments of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA are not limited to the above. For example, the manner of display of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row Can adopt various aspects.

  In the first sub-display area SA1, three symbol rows Z4, Z5, Z6 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6, symbols of numbers 1 to 8 are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. A variable display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), after variation display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L2 for each symbol row.

  Specifically, when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6 and the symbol row Z5, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol rows Z4 to Z6. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is performed, and if the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, the predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the effective line L2 It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L2. Note that the embodiments of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol in the first sub-display area SA1 are not limited to the above. For example, the display of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, such as the number of symbol rows in the first sub-display area SA1, the number of effective lines, the direction of fluctuation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row Aspects of can adopt various aspects.

  In the present embodiment, the same kind of design is adopted as the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design. Specifically, a symbol showing 1 to 8 of the numerals was adopted as a symbol for the first liquid crystal and a symbol for the second liquid crystal. Thus, by making the type of the symbol displayed as the symbol for the first liquid crystal and the symbol displayed as the symbol for the second liquid crystal the same, for example, the symbol for the first liquid crystal and the symbol for the second liquid crystal are displayed When the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 are replaced with each other, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display switching of the liquid crystal symbol. In addition, it is possible to distinguish, to the player, whether the liquid crystal symbol variably displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display region SA1 is the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. It can be difficult. By doing this, for example, from the state where the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA and the second liquid crystal design is displayed in the first sub display area SA1, the first display area MA is displayed. When switching to a state in which the symbol for liquid crystal is displayed and the symbol for first liquid crystal is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1, it is possible to perform natural display switching without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In addition, it is difficult to distinguish the liquid crystal symbol variably displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 with respect to the player, thereby displaying the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. Regardless of the type of symbol being displayed (the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol), the player may be concentrated on the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA, or the main display region MA or It is possible to add playability that allows the player to guess whether the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 is either the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol.

  In addition, different types of designs may be adopted between the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design. For example, eight symbols indicating 1 to 8 of the numbers may be adopted as the first liquid crystal symbol, and eight symbols indicating the alphabet A to H may be adopted as the second liquid crystal symbol. By doing this, it is possible for the player to see which liquid crystal symbol of the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in each of the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1. It can be made easy to identify. As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the game situation.

  Also, different types of symbols may be employed between the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1. For example, eight symbols showing 1 to 8 of numerals are adopted as liquid crystal symbols to be displayed in main display area MA, and eight alphabets A to H are shown as liquid crystal symbols to be displayed in first sub-display area SA1 You may adopt the symbol of. Furthermore, a display mode for displaying different types of symbols (symbols 1 to 8 and symbols A to H) between the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, and the main display area MA You may combine with the display mode which displays a different kind of pattern between 1st sub display area SA1. As described above, various display modes can be adopted as the display mode of the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), a liquid crystal display area NA is displayed on the display surface 41a. A symbol corresponding to the common drawing unit 38 is displayed in the liquid crystal common drawing display area NA. Specifically, a symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the electric combination opening lottery performed with the game ball passing through the through gate 35 is displayed. In the present embodiment, three numbers 1 to 8 are displayed vertically in the liquid crystal display area NA. The three vertically arranged numbers fluctuate with periodicity. After the variable display, it is displayed in a state in which the symbols of three figures are stopped vertically.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first suspension display area Ds1, the number of suspension based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of hold based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls reserved for the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is up to four.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), the display surface 41a blinks and lights in synchronization with the first symbol variation display and stop display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special drawing unit 37. The second synchronization display performing flickering display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the first synchronization display unit Sync1 for displaying and the second symbol display unit 37b of the special drawing unit 37 And a unit Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display unit 37a performs stop display, the first synchronization display unit 371 performs the first display. (1) The synchronization display section Sync 1 lights up. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display unit 37b performs stop display, the second synchronization display is performed. The unit Sync 2 lights up.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first sub display area SA1, the first synchronization display unit Sync1, and the second synchronization display unit Sync2. A configuration in which 41a does not display part or all of these displays may be adopted.

K2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the present description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around the main control device 60, and includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by an element having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 as a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have some of the functions of the MPU 62. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of the stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operation power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various entrances such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, the variable winning device 36, and the V winning opening 48 Various detection sensors provided on the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each entrance, and the gaming ball passes through the through gate. It is judged whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive 34b for opening and closing the electric combination 34a of the second start opening 34 An open / close door drive unit 48b for opening and closing the open / close door 48a and the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36 c such that the open / close door 36 b is opened or closed. Further, when the electric combination is opened as a result of the electric combination release lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric combination drive unit 44b such that the electric combination 34a is opened. In addition, when it becomes the specified lottery result in the drawing which is based on the entry of the game ball to 1st starting opening 33 and 2nd starting opening 34, V winning a prize opening 48 is opened with specified timing in round game The drive control of the open / close door drive unit 48b is executed such that the open / close door 48a to be closed is opened or closed. Furthermore, in each game session, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45 The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, on the transmission side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and an audio emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, MPU 62 of main control board 61 refers to command information storage area 63 f of ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is specified The master ball controller 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball to the player. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the winning balls.

  A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the emission control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on and the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, The game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, to the launch control device 80, a game ball launch button 26 is connected. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14, and controls driving of the speaker 46. And control the display control apparatus 100. In addition, when the rendering operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and the rendering operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game rendering reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100 and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, on the basis of various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence or absence of reach, the contents of reach effect, and the contents of effects to be executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. In the present embodiment, the stop time which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, a unit game play time, which is the time required for one game play, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 114 is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 45, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When distributing the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is to be generated when changing out a symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric combination opening counter C4 is used for the electric combination opening lottery of whether or not the electric combination 34a of the second starting opening 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. In the pending information storage area 64b, a first pending area Ra and a second pending area Rb are provided. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the first starting opening 44, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of entering the ball stores pending information It stores in time series in the 1st reservation area Ra of area 64b. Also, when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time of entering the ball are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored chronologically.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is updated to the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33. The game ball is stored, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

  The value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not Also, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c and checked against the success / failure table stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. It is determined whether or not to be a big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is set to the first value of the determination processing execution area 64c. The game ball moves to the execution area, checks it against the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and determines whether or not it becomes a big hit, and the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 In this case, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c, and the success / failure table stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 A process of collating and determining whether or not to win a jackpot is executed in parallel. In the following, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the game ball into the first start opening 33 as a trigger or not, and whether it is the jackpot triggered by the ball entry of the game ball to the second start opening 34 The simultaneous variation machine of the pachinko machine which can perform the variation display of the first symbol display section 37a and the variation display of the second symbol display section 37b in parallel while executing the determination processing of whether or not in parallel Also called.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 39 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the game ball entering when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the judgment processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Furthermore, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether the reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 Are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the game. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra is moved to the determination process execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 Is determined whether or not to occur. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the determination process execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 Is determined whether or not to occur. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  The reach means that there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit may be established for some symbol rows among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed, and refers to the display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of the symbol corresponding to big hit means the combination of the same symbol in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 112 (b), the symbol is first displayed in stop in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 to become a reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the symbol column Z2.

  As another specific example, in the first sub-display area SA1 of the display surface 41a of FIG. 112 (b), the symbol is first displayed stopped in the symbol row Z4, and then the same symbol as Z4 is displayed stopped in the symbol row Z6 A reach line is formed by being carried out, and it becomes a reach by performing the change display of a pattern in the pattern row Z5 in the situation where the said reach line is formed. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the symbol column Z5.

  Also, for reach, while reach line is formed, while performing fluctuation display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, There is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or non-displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether the advance display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is to be performed using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the fluctuation time of the symbols of the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, the details of the motor-operated product release counter C4 will be described. For example, the motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465, and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, after the value of the motorized product release counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 64d is moved to the motorized product execution area 64e at a predetermined timing, the motorized product release area is opened in the motorized product execution area 64e. A lottery is performed to determine whether to control the motorized jack 34a in the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 463, the motorized jack 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 464, 465, the motored jack 34a is maintained in the closed state.

  Note that at least one of the acquired value of the big hit random number counter C1, the value of the big hit type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the motorized combination release counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra and the second reserve area Rb, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 are also referred to as reserve information.

  Next, the success or failure table will be described. The success or failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the big hit lottery, and in the case of the big hit lottery in the low probability mode, the probability table for the low probability mode is referred to At the time of the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the success or failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 matches the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33. And the success / failure table to be compared with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34 as separate table data ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a hit table for the first start opening (for low probability mode), a hit or failure table for the first start opening (for high probability mode), a hit table for the second start opening (low) Four pass / fail tables for the probability mode) and the pass / fail table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode) are stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 115 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of a hit / fail table for the first starting opening. FIG. 115 (a) shows a yes / no table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening, and FIG. 115 (b) shows a yes / no table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 serving as the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting opening. There is. And the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the values of 0 to 1199. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the big hit in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening. It is done. And among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. Thus, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the big hit lottery is higher than that in the low probability mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the big hit random number counter C1 set as the big hit in the low probability mode hit / not table is the value of the big hit random number counter C1 set as the big hit in the high probability mode hit / not table. It is included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability that the high probability mode will be the jackpot is higher than the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the second starting opening. FIG. 116 (a) shows a pass / fail table (for low probability mode) for the second start port, and FIG. 116 (b) shows a pass / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second start port.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 serving as the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting opening. . In addition, 500 values of 5 to 504 are set as the value of the large per random number counter C1 to be the first small per, and 50 values of 505 to 554 are set as the value of the large per random number counter C1 to be the second small per And 50 values of 555 to 604 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 to be the third small hit. And values other than 605 values of 0-604 are out of the value of 0-1199.

  Here, "small hit" is a transition trigger to the open / close execution mode in which opening / closing of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but in both the lottery mode and the support mode to be described later, the transition result is not a transition trigger. is there. On the other hand, "disengagement" is not a transition opportunity of the open / close execution mode, and is a result of success or failure not becoming a transition opportunity also in the lottery mode and the support mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first small hit, the second small hit, and the third small hit are set as the small hits. In the first small hit, the opening of the variable winning device 36 with an opening period of 1.6 seconds occurs once as the opening / closing execution mode. In the second small hit, the opening of the variable winning device 36 having an opening period of 60 msec occurs six times as the opening / closing execution mode. In the third small hit, the opening of the variable winning device 36 having an opening period of 60 msec occurs eight times as the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 serving as the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting opening . In addition, 500 values of 16 to 515 are set as the value of the large per random number counter C1 to be the first small per unit, and 50 values of 516 to 565 are set as the value of the large per unit random number counter C1 to be the second small per unit 50 values of 566 to 615 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the third small hit. And values other than 616 values of 0 to 615 are out of the values of 0 to 1199.

  As described above, also in the success / failure table for the second start opening, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the big hit lottery as compared with the success / failure table for the first start opening as compared with the low probability mode. ing. Furthermore, in the pass / fail table for the second starting opening, in any of the pass / fail table for the low probability mode and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode, the small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to be) is set to 500 and the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening, the small jackpot with a probability of 500/1200 It is set to be

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, plural types of jackpots can be set by providing differences between the following three modes or modes.
(1) The number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (the number of rounds)
(2) A mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (3) A lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends (low probability mode or high probability mode)

  As a mode of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, generation of the ball (winning) of the game ball to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high and low. In the present embodiment, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the open / close door 36b in the open / close execution mode is continued until 30 seconds have elapsed or the number of game balls entering the open / close door 36b is ten. Is set as On the other hand, two types of low frequency winning mode are set. The first is a low frequency set so that one open of the open / close door 36b in the open / close execution mode is continued until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or the number of balls entered into the open / close door 36b reaches 10 It is a prize mode. The second is a low frequency set so that one open of the open / close door 36b in the open / close execution mode is continued until 0.06 seconds elapses or the number of balls entered to the open / close door 36b reaches 10 It is a prize mode.

  Note that the open limit time for one open of the open / close door 36b and the open limit number for one open are the occurrence of entering the variable winning device 36 from the start of the open / close execution mode to the end thereof. If the frequency is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the open mode of the open / close door 36b is optional. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a greater number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning on the variable winning device 36 may occur.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type is distributed using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 117 is an explanatory view of the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 117 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 117 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to in the case of a jackpot lottery based on the entry of gaming balls into the first starting opening 33, and the distribution table for the second starting opening is for the second starting opening 34 It is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball of.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), in the distribution table for the first starting opening, as a jackpot type based on the ball entry of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 33, 8R type 1 jackpot, and 8R first Two jackpots have been set.

  In the 8R type 1 jackpot, the open frequency of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is a high frequency win mode It is. Further, the 8R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot that the V winning opening 48 opens for 10 seconds in the fifth round of the round game. When the game ball enters the opened V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the open / close execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. However, the number of times played during the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times played for the first starting opening game and the second starting opening played during the high probability mode When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. It should be noted that in the game run executed in the high probability mode, when the game ball is won in the V winning opening 48 opened with the jackpot as a chance in the high probability mode executed in the high probability mode The number of game times is reset, and after the round game executed with the jackpot, counting of 120 game times is executed again from the game time in the high probability mode to be executed thereafter. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 120 times or more.

  In the 8R type 2 jackpot, the opening / closing frequency of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is eight times (eight rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is a high frequency win mode It is. Also, the 8R type 2 jackpot is a jackpot opened for 0.006 seconds by the V winning opening 48 in the fifth round of the round game. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, but the opening time of the V winning opening 48 is 0.006 seconds, The probability of the game ball winning in the V winning hole 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R type 2 jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the open / close execution mode is substantially the low probability mode.

  As described above, the opening time of the V winning opening 48 in the round game is long compared to the second type jackpot, and the gaming ball easily enters the V winning opening 48 as compared with the second type jackpot, so the open / close execution mode There is a high probability that the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end will be the high probability mode. On the other hand, since the opening time of the V winning opening 48 in the round game is short compared to the first type jackpot and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48, the second type big hit The probability of the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery of becoming the high probability mode is very low.

  In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 8R type 1 jackpot and "20 to 39" is the 8R second It is set to correspond to the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), the sorting table for the second starting opening is a 16R type 1 jackpot, 8R as a jackpot type based on the entry of gaming balls into the second starting opening 34. One kind of jackpot is set.

  The number of opening and closing times of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is high frequency winning mode It is. In addition, the 16R type 1 jackpot is a jackpot that the V winning opening 48 opens for 10 seconds in the 13th round of the round game. When the game ball enters the opened V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the open / close execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode. However, the number of times played during the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times played for the first starting opening game and the second starting opening played during the high probability mode When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. It should be noted that in the game run executed in the high probability mode, when the game ball is won in the V winning opening 48 opened with the jackpot as a chance in the high probability mode executed in the high probability mode The number of game times is reset, and after the round game executed with the jackpot, counting of 120 game times is executed again from the game time in the high probability mode to be executed thereafter. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 120 times or more.

  As described above, in the 8R type 1 jackpot, the number of times of opening and closing of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is eight times (eight rounds). Is the high frequency winning mode. In the 8R type 1 jackpot, the jackpot opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the fifth round of the round game, and the jackpot drawing after the open / close execution mode ends on condition that the gaming ball enters the V entrance 48 The lottery mode of is a jackpot that becomes a high probability mode. However, the number of times played during the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times played for the first starting opening game and the second starting opening played during the high probability mode When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

  In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" corresponds to the 16R type 1 jackpot and "20 to 39" is the 8R first It is set to correspond to the jackpot.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot becomes the case where the jackpot is reached based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, and 2) Different from the case where the game ball becomes a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 34, a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the motorized role 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening and closing execution mode ends, the firing of the gaming ball continues to the gaming area PA in the same manner. In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode so that the frequency at which the motorized part 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different in the probability of winning the winning combination in the electric combination opening lottery using the electric combination opening counter C4. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric-equipment opening in the electric combination opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high frequency support mode, one opening time of the motorized jack 34a is set to be longer when the electronic winning combination is released than in the low frequency support mode.

  Although not employed in the present embodiment, when the electronic part release is elected in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the motorized part 34a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is ended after the open state is completed. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum securing time for setting the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state which assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  FIG. 118 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of a to-do table (a to-do table for a to-be-operated combination open lottery) used when executing the to-be-operated combination opening lottery.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows a table (for high frequency support mode) of a motorized jackpot release lottery used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the table for electric-powered part opening lottery (for high frequency support mode) has 464 pieces of 0 to 463 as the value of the electric-part opening counter C4 that becomes the electric jack open winning. A value has been set. Two values 464 and 465 are set as the values of the motorized product release counter C4 to be disengaged. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high frequency support mode and the electric combination opening lottery is executed, the electronic combination opening is won with a probability of 232/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electronic combination release is elected in the high frequency support mode, the motorized jack 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  FIG. 118 (b) shows a table for winning the motorized product open lottery used for the low frequency support mode (for the low frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the table for motor-operated part opening lottery (not for low frequency support mode) contains 462 pieces of 0 to 461 as the value of the motor-operated part opening counter C4 that becomes the electric part open winning. A value has been set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as values of the motorized product release counter C4 to be disengaged. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low frequency support mode and the electric combination opening lottery is executed, the electronic combination opening winning is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electronic combination is elected in the low frequency support mode, the motorized jack 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

K3. The playability of the gaming machine:
Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. As described in FIG. 114, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether the jackpot of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 is a big hit or not, and to the second starting opening 34 It is a simultaneous change machine which performs in parallel the determination processing of whether or not to become a big hit triggered by the entry of the game ball of. Therefore, the game ball (the game cycle for the first start opening) triggered by the game ball launched by the player operating the operation handle 25 entering the first start hole 33, and the game ball 2) A game run (second start game run) triggered by entering the ball into the starting opening 34 is executed in parallel.

  Further, as described above, when the game ball passes through gate 35, the electric combination opening lottery is executed, and in the high frequency support mode, the electronic combination is elected with probability of 232/233, the low frequency support mode At the probability of 231/233, the electric jackpot is elected. Therefore, when the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the motorized jack 34a opens with high probability. That is, when the game ball is distributed to the right of the game board 30, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34 with high probability. Therefore, the player adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball using the operation handle 25, distributes the gaming ball to the left side of the gaming board 30 (see FIG. 111), and causes the first starting opening 33 to enter the gaming ball. At the same time, the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 (see FIG. 111), and the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 34, and the first starting slot game cycle and the second starting slot game cycle are arranged in parallel. It is possible to make it run.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation time of the second starting opening gaming time is very long compared to the fluctuation time of the first starting opening gaming time. It is set. Specifically, in the low frequency support mode, the fluctuation time of one game time of the first starting opening game times is in the range of 5 seconds to 2 minutes, and the fluctuation of one game time of the second starting opening game times. The time is set to 10 minutes.

  On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the variation time of the second starting opening game times is set to be shorter than the variation time of the first starting opening game times. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the variation time of one game cycle of the first starting slot game cycle is one minute, and the variation time of the second start slot game cycle of one game cycle is 0.5 It is a second.

  Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment distributes the gaming ball on the left side of the gaming board 30, makes the first starting hole 33 enter the gaming ball, and plays the game for the first starting opening. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, the game flow is made to distribute the game ball on the right side of the game board 30, enter the game ball into the second starting port 34, and execute the second starting slot game turn , Has a playability that is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, as shown in the hit / fail table for the second start-up port in FIG. 116 (b), in the jackpot lottery performed with the game ball entering the second start-up port as a trigger, with a probability of 1/2. Win a small hit (1st small hit, 2nd small hit, 3rd small hit). When the player wins the small hit, the open / close execution mode is executed, the open / close door 36b is opened, the gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a, and the winning ball is paid out to the player. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player distributes the game ball to the right of the game board 30 to add a winning ball based on entering the second start hole 34, as well as a small hit (first small hit, It may be possible to obtain a winning ball based on entering the big winning opening 36a opened by the second small hit, the third small hit).

  As described above, the flow of the standard game in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as follows.

  In the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball is entered into the first starting opening 33.

  If you win the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33, if the jackpot is the second type jackpot, after going through the round game, 100 times of game times run in high frequency support mode It is possible. In this case, the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, and the winning combination opening winning based on the passage of the game ball of the through gate 35 is generated to open the second starting opening 34 in the state where the electric part 34a is opened. The game ball is made to enter and a big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting opening is executed. Even if it does not become a big hit in the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, if the lottery result is a small hit, since the opening and closing door 36b is opened, There are cases where you can get a winning ball.

  If the player does not win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery during the 100 game runs in the high frequency support, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. The lottery mode is a low probability mode. When shifting to the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated again to the left side of the game board 30, and the game ball is made to enter the first starting opening 33.

  In the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 to enter the game ball into the first start opening 33, and the jackpot based on the ball entry into the first start opening 33 In the case where the lottery is won and the jackpot is the first type jackpot, and the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 48 during the round game, the high probability mode and high frequency after passing through the round game It is possible to execute 120 game times in the support mode. In this case, the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, and the winning combination opening winning based on the passage of the game ball of the through gate 35 is generated to open the second starting opening 34 in the state where the electric part 34a is opened. The game ball is made to enter and a big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting opening is executed. Even if it does not become a big hit in the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, if the lottery result is a small hit, since the opening and closing door 36b opens, enter the game ball in the big winning opening 36a There are cases where you can get a winning ball.

  If you do not win the jackpot lottery in the jackpot lottery during 120 games in the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, while transitioning from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, from the high probability mode to the low probability mode Migrate to When shifting to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated again to the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball is entered into the first starting opening 33.

  If the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during the 120 game rounds in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the jackpot is the type 1 jackpot, the game ball is in the V winning opening 48 during the round game When the ball is hit, after passing through the round game, it is possible to execute 120 game rounds again in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode.

Low probability mode and high frequency support after going through a round game if the big hit is won in the big hit lottery during the 120 game times in high probability mode and high frequency support mode and the jackpot is the second type jackpot It is possible to execute 100 game times in the mode.
In the above, the playability of this game machine was demonstrated.

K4. Processing overview:
<Result image>
FIG. 119 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing performed by the pachinko machine 10. In this time chart, the game times for the first starting opening, the game times for the second starting opening, the special 2 main display flag, the high probability mode flag, and the display mode in the symbol display device 41 are shown.

  The convex part of the waveform showing the execution of the first starting opening game round and the numerals (115 to 125) shown on the convex part of the waveform showing the execution of the second starting opening game round are the closest type 1 jackpots Indicates the number of game times executed since the high probability mode was started (hereinafter also referred to as “probable post-change game times execution frequency”). That is, the time chart of FIG. 119 shows a state in which 120 game times in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are finished (time Tm4), and the mode is shifted to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

  In the example shown in the time chart of FIG. 119, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the player causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 34 to execute the second starting port game run (see FIG. 119 times after the game change the number of times of game execution is 115-120 game times), with the transition to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, by making the game ball enter the first start hole 33, the game time for the first start hole Are executed (game times with 121 to 125 game execution times after the odd change of FIG. 119). As described in the game characteristics of the above-mentioned gaming machine, the fluctuation time of the second starting opening game times after the probability change is 115 seconds to 120 times is 0.5 seconds (example: time Tm1 to Tm2 = 0.5 seconds).

  The special main display flag is a flag used to execute switching of a liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA and a liquid crystal symbol displayed in the first sub display area SA1. The special main display flag is turned on with the start of the high frequency support mode and turned off with the start of the low frequency support mode. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball for the second starting opening is executed by causing the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34 in the low frequency support mode and the jackpot lottery is won (hereinafter, "special jackpot") The special main display flag is not turned ON when the high frequency support mode is started in response to the call).

  As can be seen from the correspondence between the special main display flag shown in FIG. 119 and the display mode of the symbol display device 41, when the special main display flag is ON, the game for the second starting opening in the main display area MA A second liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the turn is displayed, and a first liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the first starting opening game turn is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. On the other hand, when the second main display flag is OFF, the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting slot game turn is displayed in the main display area MA, and the second sub display area SA1 is displayed in the second sub display area SA1. A second liquid crystal symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the game game for the starting opening, is displayed.

  As described in the above-mentioned gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment distributes the gaming ball to the left side of the gaming board 30 to set the first gaming ball in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Enter the starting opening 33 and execute the first starting opening game cycle, and distribute the game ball to the right of the game board 30 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (including the low probability mode). A game flow in which the game ball is caused to enter the second starting opening 34 and the second starting opening game cycle is executed has a playability that is advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player causes the first starting opening game period and the second starting opening game period to be executed according to the game characteristics of the gaming machine, along the game characteristics. A liquid crystal symbol (first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol) corresponding to the game to be executed is displayed in the main display area MA. Although the second sub-display area SA2 is shown in the chart showing the display mode of the symbol display device shown in FIG. 119, the second sub-display area SA2 will be described later.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the two game times executed immediately after the start of the last game time (hereinafter also referred to as the final specified game time) executed before the high probability mode ends. The fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 119, immediately after the start of the last game cycle (the game cycle after the probability change is 120th second game game for starting opening) to be executed before the high probability mode ends. Fluctuation time (time Tm5 to Tm7) of 121 times of game times the number of times of game execution that is the game time to be executed is variation time (time Tm5 to Tm7) and fluctuation time of game times of 122 times of game frequency execution times (time Tm8 to Tm9) And set to 12 seconds.

  And, the pachinko machine 10, during execution of 2 game times where fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds, the main display area the result picture which is the picture which shows the information regarding the privilege which is granted to the player at the time of high probability mode Display on MA for 10 seconds.

  FIG. 120 is an explanatory view showing a display mode of the result image in the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 120 (a) shows the display mode of the symbol display device 41 until the number of times of game execution executed after the definite variation is 120th game end. FIG. 120 (b) is a period in which two game times executed immediately before the last game time (hereinafter referred to as the final specified game time) executed before the end of the high probability mode is executed. The display mode of the symbol display apparatus 41 in the period while the result image is displayed is shown. FIG. 120 (c) shows the display mode of the symbol display device 41 after the display of the result image is finished. As correspondence between the time chart of FIG. 120 and FIG. 119, FIG. 120 (a) corresponds to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 until time Tm4 (FIG. 119), and FIG. 120 (b) shows time from time Tm4 to time FIG. 120 (c) corresponds to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 after time Tm6, corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 up to Tm6.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 (display surface 41a), the symbol corresponding to the game opening for the second starting slot is performed up to 120 times the number of times of game execution after certain variation. The second liquid crystal symbol is displayed, and the first liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the first starting slot game turn is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

  Further, on the symbol display device 41, a guidance display GD1 is displayed. The guidance display GD1 is a guidance display showing that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the gaming ball on the right side of the gaming board 30. As described above, the symbol display device is because it is advantageous for the player to distribute the gaming ball on the right side of the gaming board 30 in the high-frequency support mode state until the number of times of game execution after the probability change is 120 times. A guidance display GD1 is displayed at 41. By displaying the guidance display GD1, it is possible to guide the player to a gaming method that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), two game times to be executed immediately after the final specified game time (in this embodiment, the 120th game time after the probability change is executed) are executed. Is displayed, the result image is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and in the first sub-display area SA1, the game opening for the second starting opening is displayed. The second liquid crystal symbol, which is the corresponding symbol, is displayed. As described in FIG. 119, the special display main display flag is turned OFF with the end of the final specific game play (the game run number of times after the probability change is 120th game play), so in the main display area MA, It is a process in principle that the first liquid crystal symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the game opening for 1 start opening, is displayed. However, since the result image is displayed in the main display area MA, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second sub display area SA2 is provided above the left end of the display surface 41a, and the second sub display area The first liquid crystal symbol is displayed on SA2. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the visibility of the first liquid crystal design when the result image is displayed.

  Further, on the symbol display device 41, a guidance display GD2 is displayed. The guidance display GD2 is a guidance display showing that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the gaming ball on the left side of the gaming board 30. As described above, after the 120th game cycle has ended after the probability change, the number of times of game execution has ended, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, since it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls on the left side of the game board 30, the guidance display GD2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. By displaying the guidance display GD2, it is possible to guide the player to a gaming method that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 120C, after the display of the result image is finished, the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and the first sub display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. The second liquid crystal symbol is displayed on the screen.

  Here, the result image will be described. As described above, the result image is an image showing information on the benefit given to the player in the high probability mode. For example, when the type 1 jackpot shifts to the high probability mode, the type 1 jackpot may be won again during the high probability mode, and the high probability mode may continue. The player is awarded to the player in the high probability mode, such as the number of times that the first type jackpot is won again during the high probability mode and the number of times the high probability mode is entered, and information on the prize balls paid out by winning the jackpot. Information on benefits is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a result image.

  Next, another example of the process performed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  FIG. 121 is a time chart illustrating another example of the process performed by the pachinko machine 10. The time chart shown in FIG. 121 shows that although the game run for the second starting hole for the 120th game execution count after the definite change has ended and the high probability mode has ended, the 121st game execution count for the odd after change It shows the case where the second starting opening game run is executed as the game run. Such a time chart is the case where the number of pending game runs for the second start-up remains at the time when the game run for the second start-up is finished after the 120th game run after the definite run change, or after a definite change In this case, the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 34 before and after the end of the 120th second starting opening game round.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variable machine in which the first starting opening game cycle and the second starting game cycle are executed in parallel, as shown in the time chart of FIG. During execution of the 121st game opening for the second starting opening, the game operation for the first starting opening for 122 times may be executed in parallel after the probability change for the first game.

  Even in such a case, as in the example described in FIG. 119, two times immediately after the start of the last game cycle (final specific game cycle) to be executed before the end of the high probability mode. The fluctuation time in the game times is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time. That is, the variation time of the 121st game slot for the second starting opening and the 122nd game cycle for the first starting slot for the fixed start gaming cycle are set to 12 seconds. Then, after the end of the final specific game play, the result display is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for 10 seconds.

  That is, as shown in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 in the time chart of FIG. 121, in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, the number of times of game execution after the probability change is 120 times (final specified game number) A second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the game opening for the second starting opening is displayed, and a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the game opening for the first starting opening is displayed on the first sub display area SA1. Is displayed.

  The main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 is a period in which two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time are executed and a result image is displayed. A result image is displayed, and in the first sub-display area SA1, a second liquid crystal symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the game opening for the second starting opening, is displayed.

  After the display of the result image is completed, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub display region SA1 of the symbol display device 41. .

  As described above, when the high probability mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment displays on the symbol display device 41 a result image indicating information on a benefit given to the player in the high probability mode. Since it takes several seconds for the player to visually recognize the information displayed as the result image and understand the displayed content, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment takes a predetermined time of 10 seconds for the result image. indicate.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has previously determined fluctuation time in two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time to display the result image on the symbol display device 41. Set the time to 12 seconds.

  In the case of the simultaneous variable machine, during the period in which one of the first starting opening game times or the second starting opening game times is executed, either the first starting opening game times or the second starting opening game times, or the other There is a case to carry out. Therefore, during the period when the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, for example, the first starting opening game round is ended and a new first starting opening game round is started, or the second starting opening game A round may be over and a new second starting opening game round may be started. Hereinafter, the timing of the start of the game play and the timing of the end of the game play are also referred to as "the game run's break".

  If "the game round break" occurs while the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player may be given a complicated impression. In addition, there is a possibility that the player can not concentrate on the result of the jackpot lottery in each game run.

  In the case where the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays a result image on the symbol display device 41, the variation time of a plurality of game times executed continuously or in parallel is the time for displaying the result image (this embodiment Then, since the time (12 seconds) is set to 10 seconds or more, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in the game times during the period in which the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, since the game cycle in which the fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time is set as two game cycles to be executed immediately after the start of the final specific game cycle, the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 It is possible to minimize the number of game times set as the fluctuation time greater than the time during which the result image is displayed, while suppressing the occurrence of the break of the game times in the period in which the game is being performed.

<Demo image>
FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of a demonstration image displayed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. The demonstration image is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the game play is not started for a predetermined period set in advance. In the present embodiment, a moving image (hereinafter also referred to as a demonstration moving image) is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a demonstration image. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment displays a demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41 when the first starting opening game play or the second starting opening game play is not started for a predetermined period or more.

  Specifically, when the first starting opening gaming round is not started for a predetermined period or more, a display area (a first liquid crystal symbol) corresponding to the first starting opening gaming round is displayed at that time A demo animation for the area is displayed in the main display area MA or the first sub-display area SA1). In addition, when the second starting opening game turn is not started for a predetermined period or more, a display area (main display area) displaying a symbol (second liquid crystal symbol) corresponding to the second starting opening game turn at that time. A demonstration video for the area is displayed on the MA or the first sub display area SA1).

  Normally, in a pachinko machine, a demo animation is displayed on the entire display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 when neither the first starting opening game round nor the second starting opening game round is started for a predetermined period or more. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the time for the demonstration animation to be displayed separately is set separately for the first starting opening game times and the second starting opening game times, and the main display A demonstration moving image is displayed on each of the area MA and the first sub display area SA1.

  In FIG. 122 (a), a demonstration moving image is displayed in the main display area MA, and a game time corresponding to the first sub display area SA1 in the first sub display area SA1 (first start opening game time or second start opening It is shown that the symbol (first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol) of the game game is displayed.

  When the special main display flag is OFF, the state as shown in FIG. 122 (a) is as follows. A first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting slot game rotation is displayed in the main display area MA, and a second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting opening game slot is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. If the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 33 and the first starting opening gaming cycle is not started for a predetermined period, the demonstration video set for the main display area MA in the main display area MA Is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (a). At this time, when the second starting opening gaming round is being executed, a second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting opening playing round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

  When the special main display flag is ON, the state as shown in FIG. 122 (a) is as follows. A second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting slot game turn is displayed in the main display area MA, and a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start slot game turn is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. In the case where the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34 and the second starting opening gaming cycle is not started for a predetermined period, the demonstration video set for the main display area MA in the main display area MA Is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (a). At this time, when the first starting opening gaming round is being executed, a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting opening playing round is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

  FIG. 122 (b) shows the symbol (first liquid crystal symbol or second symbol) of the game sequence (first game slot or second game slot) corresponding to the main display area MA in the main display area MA. It is shown that the liquid crystal design is displayed and the demonstration moving image is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1.

  When the special main display flag is OFF, the state as shown in FIG. 122 (b) is as follows. A first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting slot game turn is displayed in the main display area MA, and a second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second start slot game turn is displayed in the first sub display area SA1 In this case, when the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 34 and the game opening for the second starting opening is not started, the first sub display area SA1 is set for the first sub display area SA1. A demonstration video is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (b). At this time, when the first starting opening gaming round is being executed, a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting opening playing round is displayed in the main display area MA.

  When the special main display flag is ON, the state as shown in FIG. 122 (b) is as follows. A second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting slot game turn is displayed in the main display area MA, and a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start slot game turn is displayed in the first sub display area SA1 In the case where the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 33 and the first starting opening gaming cycle is not started, the demonstration set in the first sub display area SA1 for the first sub display area SA1 A moving image is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (b). At this time, when the second starting opening gaming round is being executed, a second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting opening playing round is displayed in the main display area MA.

  In FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b), a demonstration moving image is displayed in one of the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1, and a symbol corresponding to the display area is displayed in the other. Although the displayed example is shown, when each of the game times corresponding to both display areas is not started for a predetermined period or more, in both the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1, in the display area A corresponding demonstration video is displayed. That is, the demonstration video for the main display area MA shown in FIG. 122 (a) is displayed in the main display area MA, and the first sub display area SA1 shown in FIG. 122 (b) is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. A demo video for is displayed.

  In addition, when the game time corresponding to the display area where the demonstration video is displayed is started while the demonstration video is displayed, the display area is displayed from the display of the demonstration video to the design corresponding to the game time. Return to

  FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between a real-time clock (RTC) presentation moving image and a demonstration moving image.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows a case where an RTC effect moving image is displayed when a symbol corresponding to the display area is displayed in both the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. . In this case, on the symbol display device 41, the symbols corresponding to the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 are displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image corresponding to the RTC effect moving image.

  FIG. 123 (b) shows a case where an RTC moving image effect is started in a state where a demo moving image can be displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, even when the demo display can be displayed, the main display area MA is displayed with priority given to the RTC effect moving display when the RTC effect moving display is displayed. The display of the demonstration video is started after the end of the RTC production video. On the other hand, in the first sub-display area SA1, even if the RTC effect moving image is displayed, the demo moving image is displayed with priority.

  In the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), if the game play corresponding to the main display area MA is started, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), the main display area MA is displayed. A corresponding game pattern is displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image of the RTC effect moving image. In this case, when the game time corresponding to the first sub-display area SA1 is not started, the first sub-display area SA1 is maintained in the state where the demonstration moving image is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), if the game time corresponding to the first sub display area SA1 is temporarily started, as in the first sub display area SA1 shown in FIG. 123 (a), The symbol of the game play corresponding to the 1 sub display area SA1 is displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image of the RTC effect moving image. In this case, when the game turn corresponding to the main display area MA is not started, the main display area MA maintains the state in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed prior to the demonstration moving image, After the end, the demonstration video starts to be displayed.

K5. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, an example of the specific process performed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. The process executed in main controller 60 will be described first, and then the process executed in audio light emission control device 90 and display control device 100 will be described.

  The MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (in this embodiment, a 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S5101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (entering ball detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5102.

  In step S5102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5103.

  In step S5103, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the motorized combination release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4, and when their respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5104.

  In step S5104, the ball entrance processing for the starting port accompanying the ball entry of the gaming ball to the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is executed. Details of the ball entering process for the starting opening in step S5104 will be described later. After executing step S5104, the process proceeds to step S5105.

  In step S5105, the ball entering processing for through gate accompanying the ball entering (passing) of the gaming ball to through gate 35 is executed. The details of the through gate entering process in step S5105 will be described later. After executing step S5105, the present timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Ball-in process for start opening>
Next, the ball entering process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry processing for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 124: S5104).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a ball entering process for the starting opening. In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first start opening 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start opening 33. If it is determined in step S5201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202 and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5203.

  In step S5203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal indicating that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 33 to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5204.

  In step S5204, it is determined whether the first start reservation number RaN is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If it is determined in step S5204 that the first start reservation number RaN is not less than the upper limit (S5204: NO), the ball entry processing for the starting opening is ended.

  On the other hand, if the first start reservation number RaN is less than the upper limit value in step S5204 (S5204: YES), the process proceeds to step S5205, where 1 is added to the first start reservation number RaN of the first hold area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5206.

  In step S5206, each value of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 125) is used as the first storage area in the free storage area of the first reserved area, ie, step It stores in the storage area corresponding to the value of 1st start reservation number RaN which added 1 in S5205. After executing step S5206, the process proceeds to step S5207.

  In step S5207, a first determination process is performed. The first determination process is based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, the hit / not decision result (lottery result) of the big hit lottery, the type of big hit, reach occurrence It is a process which performs determination of the presence or absence etc. before the said pending | holding information becomes object of the big hit lottery (determination process) by the main control apparatus 60. FIG. After executing step S5207, the process proceeds to step S5208.

  In step S5208, a process of setting a first hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a first pending command.

  In the first hold command, the hold information is the main control of the determination result by the prior determination processing based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the hold information acquired based on the ball. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize before the target of the jackpot lottery by the device 60 is made. The first hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402) described later.

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the first hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33, the sound emission control device 90 in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the display in accordance with the increase in the number of held items is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold.

  If it is determined in step S5201 that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (S5201: NO), the process proceeds to step S5209 and whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 34 Is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S5209 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (S5209: YES), the process proceeds to step S5210, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5211. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5209 that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (S5209: NO), the ball entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

  In step S5211, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal indicating that the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 34 to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5212.

  In step S5212, it is determined whether the second start reservation number RbN is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). If it is determined in step S5212 that the second start reservation number RbN is not less than the upper limit (S5212: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

  On the other hand, if the second start reservation number RbN is less than the upper limit in step S5212 (S5212: YES), the process proceeds to step S5213, and 1 is added to the second start reservation number RbN of the second hold area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5214.

  In step S5214, each value of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 125) is used as the first storage area in the free storage area of the second reserved area, ie, step In the storage area corresponding to the value of the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 is added in S5213. After executing step S5214, the process proceeds to step S5215.

  In step S5215, an earlier determination process is performed. As described above, the first determination process is based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 as a result of winning judgment of the big hit lottery (lottery result). It is a process which performs determination of a type, the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach, etc. before the said pending | holding information becomes object of the big hit lottery (determination process) by the main control unit 60. After executing step S5215, the process proceeds to step S5216.

  In step S5216, a process of setting a second hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a second pending command.

  In the second hold command, the hold information is main control of the determination result by the prior determination processing based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 and the hold information acquired based on the ball. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize before the target of the jackpot lottery by the device 60 is made. The second hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process described later (FIG. 127: step S5402).

  When the sound emission control device 90 receives the second hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the sound emission control device 90 in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the display in accordance with the increase in the number of held items is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

  After step S5216 is executed, the ball entrance process for the starting opening is ended.

<In-ball processing for through gate>
Next, ball entry processing for through gates will be described. The ball entering processing for through gate is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 124: S5105) of timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing a ball entering process for through gate. In step S5301, it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered (passed) the through gate 35 or not. If it is determined in step S5301 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S5301: YES), the process proceeds to step S5302 and whether the number of bonus products reserved SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) It is determined whether or not. In addition, the number-of-items holding SN is a value indicating the number of ball entry into the through gate 35 which is held for performing the electric combination opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of bonus items held SN is four.

  If it is determined in step S5302 that the bonus product number SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S5302: YES), the process proceeds to step S5303 and 1 is added to the bonus product number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5304.

  In step S5304, the value of motorized product release counter C4 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 124) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of power storage area 64d of RAM 64. Thereafter, the ball entry process for through gates is finished.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5301 that the gaming ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S5301: NO), and when it is determined in step S5302 that the value of the bonus product number SN is not less than the upper limit. In (S5302: NO), the ball entry processing for the through gate is ended without storing the value of the motorized product release counter C4 in the power storage area 64d of the RAM 64.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is performed.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S5401, start-up processing is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device accompanying power on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step S5402.

  In step S5402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 70. In addition, when commands relating to effects such as a change command and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5404.

  In step S5404, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, game number control processing for controlling the game in each game number is executed. In the game number control process, a big hit lottery, setting of variation display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S5405, the process proceeds to step S5406.

  In step S5406, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5407.

  In step S5407, a support for electric utility support for driving and controlling the motorized accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric support process, it is determined whether or not the motor-operated part 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electronic mail support will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5408.

  In step S5408, a game ball launch control process is executed. The game ball launch control process is a process executed to launch a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player. Details of the game ball launch control process will be described later. After executing step S5408, the process proceeds to step S5409.

  In step S5409, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (the second round onwards, the start of the command output processing in step S5402). That is, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has come.

  If it is determined in step S5409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S5409: NO), the next normal processing execution timing is reached in steps S5410 and S5411. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S5410, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S5411, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S5409: YES), the process returns to step S5402, and each process from step S5402 to step S5408 is performed. Run.

  In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S5402 to step S5408 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly executing updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using such remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game number control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 127: S5405).

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step S5501, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on when the gaming state is shifted to the open / close execution mode, and is turned off when the open / close execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S5501: YES), the game play control process is ended without executing any of the processes in step S5502 and subsequent steps. That is, when in the opening / closing execution mode, the game round is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball is entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S5501: NO), the process proceeds to step S5502.

  In step S5502, it is determined whether the special condition variation flag is ON. The special flag for flag 1 is a flag for determining whether or not the symbol is changing in the first symbol display portion 37a. The first flag 33 is triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 as a trigger. The symbol of the symbol display section 37a is turned on when the variation starts, and is turned off when the symbol stops the variation. If it is determined in step S5502 that the special variation flag during change is not ON (S5502: NO), the process proceeds to step S5503.

  In step S5503, the variation start process for the first symbol display unit is executed. The variation start process for the first symbol display portion is a process for starting the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a. Details of the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display portion will be described later. After executing step S5503, the process proceeds to step S5504.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5502 that the special 1 for fluctuation flag is ON (S5502: YES), the process proceeds to step S5504 without executing the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display portion in step S5503. move on.

  In step S5504, it is determined whether the special change flag for 2 is ON. The second flag for the second flag is a flag for determining whether or not the symbol is in the second symbol display section 37b, and is triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34 as a trigger. It is a flag that is turned ON when the symbol of the symbol display portion 37b starts to change, and turned OFF when the symbol stops changing. If it is determined in step S5504 that the special-purpose second variation flag is not ON (S5504: NO), the process proceeds to step S5505.

  In step S5505, the variation start process for the second symbol display unit is executed. The variation start process for the second symbol display portion is a process for starting the variation of the symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b. Details of the change start process for the second symbol display portion will be described later. After executing step S5505, the process proceeds to step S5506.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5504 that the special 2 for fluctuation flag is ON (S5504: YES), the process proceeds to step S5506 without executing the fluctuation start process for the second symbol display portion in step S5505. move on.

  In step S5506, fluctuation stop processing is executed. The fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Details of the fluctuation stop process will be described later. After executing step S5506, the present game play control process ends.

<Variation start processing for the first symbol display portion>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display portion will be described. The variation start process for the first symbol display portion is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 128: S5503).

  FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing change start processing for the first symbol display portion. In step S5601, it is determined whether the value of the first start reservation number RaN is zero. If it is determined in step S5601 that the value of the first start reservation number RaN is not 0 (S5601: NO), the flow proceeds to step S5602. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5601 that the value of the first start reservation number RaN is 0 (S5601: YES), the variation start process for the first symbol display section is ended.

  In step S5602, the game number count process is executed. The number-of-games counting process is a process for counting the number of game times (variation of the symbol) executed after the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode is started. Details of the game number counting process will be described later. After executing step S5602, the process proceeds to step S5603.

  In step S5603, a hold information shift process for the first symbol display unit is executed. The hold information shift process for the first symbol display unit is a process of shifting the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra. The details of the suspension information shift process for the first symbol display unit will be described later. After executing step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5604.

  In step S5604, the determination process for the first symbol display unit is executed. In the determination process for the first symbol display portion, a jackpot lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, on the basis of the values of the big hit random number counter C1 or the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, the presence or absence of big hit or small hit is determined , The distribution judgment of distributing the jackpot type, and the reach judgment of judging the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Details of the determination process for the first symbol display portion will be described later. After executing step S5604, the process proceeds to step S5605.

  In step S5605, setting processing of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display portion is executed. In the setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display portion, the fluctuation time which is the time from the start of fluctuation of the symbols of the first symbol display portion to the stop is set. Details of the setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display unit will be described later. After executing step S5605, the process proceeds to step S5606.

  In step S5606, high probability mode end processing is executed. The high probability mode end process is a process for ending the high probability mode when a predetermined number of times (120 times in the present embodiment) of determination processing (big hit lottery) are executed after shifting to the high probability mode. Details of the high probability mode end processing will be described later. After executing step S5606, the process proceeds to step S5607.

  In step S5607, a special purpose variation command is set. The special 1 variable command includes information indicating that the game round started this time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33. , Information on the presence or absence of the jackpot, information on the type of jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the fluctuation time set in step S5604. The set special variation command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the command output process (step S5402) in the normal process (FIG. 127). The voice light emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game turn based on the received special purpose variable command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S5607, the process proceeds to step S5608.

  In step S5608, variation display of symbols in the first symbol display section 37a is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5609, and the special variation flag during flagging is turned on. After executing step S5609, the variation start process for the first symbol display section is ended.

<Count the number of games count>
Next, the number-of-games count process will be described. The game number counting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5602) of the variation start process for the first symbol display portion.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the game count counting process. In step S5701, it is determined whether the ST game count count flag is ON. The game count count flag for ST is a flag that is referred to in order to determine whether it is necessary to count the number of game times after the high probability mode has been started. If it is determined in step S5701 that the ST game count count flag is ON (S5701: YES), the flow advances to step S5702 to add 1 to the value of the ST game count counter PNC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5703. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5701 that the ST game count count flag is not ON (S5701: NO), the process proceeds to step S5705 without executing the processing of steps S5702 to S5704.

  In step S5703, it is determined whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 123 or not. If it is determined in step S5703 that the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is 123 (S5703: YES), the process proceeds to step S5704, and the ST game frequency count flag is turned OFF. The reason for this is that in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to count the number of game times after the high probability mode has been started 123 times or more. After executing step S5704, the process proceeds to step S5705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5703 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not 123 (S5703: NO), the process proceeds to step S5705 without executing step S5704.

  In step S5705, it is determined whether or not the number-of-power-on game counting flag is ON. When the high frequency support mode is started without transition to the high probability mode, it is necessary to count the number of game times after the high frequency support mode has been started. Is a flag that is referred to to determine whether or not. If it is determined in step S5705 that the power-sending game count count flag is ON (S5705: YES), the process proceeds to step S5706, where 1 is added to the value of the power-sending game frequency counter PNC2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5707. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5705 that the number-of-games count flag for power support is not ON (S5705: NO), the number-of-games count processing is ended without executing the processing of steps S5706 to S5708.

  In step S5707, it is determined whether the value of the power support game frequency counter PNC2 is 100 or not. If it is determined in step S5707 that the value of the power support game frequency counter PNC2 is 100 (S5707: YES), the process proceeds to step S5708, and the power support game frequency count flag is turned OFF. The reason is that, in the present embodiment, when the high frequency support mode is started without the transition to the high probability mode, the number of game times after the high frequency support mode is started is 100 times or more. It is because it is not necessary to count. After executing step S5708, the game number counting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5707 that the value of the power-sending game number counter PNC2 is not 100 (S5707: NO), the game number counting process is ended without executing step S5708.

<Holding information shift process for the first symbol display section>
Next, the hold information shift process for the first symbol display portion will be described. The suspension information shift process for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S 5603) of the variation start process for the first symbol display unit.

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process for the first symbol display portion. In step S5801, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first start holding number RaN of the first holding area Ra. Then, it progresses to step S5802.

  In step S5802, the data (pending information) stored in the first area of the first pending area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5803.

  In step S5803, processing is performed to shift data stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S5803, the on-hold information shift process for the first symbol display section is ended.

<Determination process for the first symbol display section>
Next, determination processing for the first symbol display portion will be described. The determination process for the first symbol display portion is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5604) of the variation start process for the first symbol display portion.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing determination processing for the first symbol display portion. In step S5901, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying with the MPU 62 whether or not the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, and in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 48 is played in the opening / closing execution mode relating to the jackpot winning. When the ball enters the ball, it is turned ON when the opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 in the opening / closing execution mode related to the jackpot, or the high probability mode It is turned OFF when execution of the 120 jackpot lottery ends without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the middle. When it is determined in step S5901 that the mode is the high probability mode (S5901: YES), the process proceeds to step S5902.

  In step S5902, the determination of whether or not the first starting opening is made is made with reference to the table (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is a value set as a jackpot in the success / failure table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening It is determined whether or not it matches. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5904. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5901 that the high probability mode is not set (S5901: NO), the process proceeds to step S5903.

  In step S5903, the determination of whether or not the first starting opening is made is made with reference to the table (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is a value set as a jackpot in the success / failure table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening It is determined whether or not it matches. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5904.

  In step S5904, it is determined whether the result of the pass / fail determination in step S5902 or step S5903 is a big hit. If it is determined in step S5904 that the result of the pass / fail determination is a big hit (S5904: YES), the process proceeds to step S5905.

  In step S5905, the special purpose hit flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The special-use hit flag is a flag that is turned ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed with the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 as a trigger is "big hit". After executing step S5905, the process proceeds to step S5906.

  In step S5906, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first start port. Specifically, it is determined whether the value range of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the jackpot type. After executing step S5906, the process proceeds to step S5907.

  In step S5907, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination in step S5906 (big hit type) is a first type jackpot. If it is determined in step S5907 that the jackpot type assigned is the first type jackpot (S5907: YES), the flow proceeds to step S5908.

  In step S5908, the special type 1 first-class jackpot flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, since the type of the first type jackpot set is only 8R type 1 jackpot, the special purpose 8R type 1 jackpot flag is set to ON. After executing step S5908, the process proceeds to step S5909.

  In step S5909, stop symbol setting processing for the first type jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the first type jackpot, the variation display is ended (stop display) in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a in the current game round of becoming the first type jackpot Execute the process to set Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the first type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S5909, the process proceeds to step S5910.

  In step S5910, when the special jackpot flag of the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, the special jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the determination process for the first symbol display portion is finished. In addition, as described later, the special jackpot flag is turned ON when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 during a period where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Is a flag that

  If it is determined in step S5907 that the distributed jackpot type is not the first type jackpot (S5907: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is the second type jackpot, the process proceeds to step S5911.

  In step S5911, the second special jackpot flag (big hit type flag) for special use corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step S5907 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, the type of the second type jackpot set is only the 8R second type jackpot, so the special purpose 8R second type jackpot flag is set to ON. After executing step S5911, the process proceeds to step S5912.

  In step S5912, stop symbol setting processing for the second type jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the second type jackpot, the variation display is ended (stop display) in the state where any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a in the current game round of being the second type jackpot Execute the process to set Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is acquired The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After step S5912 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5910 described above, and the special jackpot flag that is in the ON state is turned OFF in the process. Thereafter, the determination process for the first symbol display portion is finished.

  If it is determined in step S5904 that the result of the determination in step S5902 or step S5903 is not a big hit (S5904: NO), the process proceeds to step S5913 and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 The reach determination is performed with reference to the determination table to determine whether the reach occurs. Specifically, whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c matches the value set as reach occurrence in the referenced reach determination table Determine The process of step S5913 is executed when the result of the judgment of success (big hit lottery) in step S5904 is not a big hit. That is, in step S5913, it is determined whether the result of the success or failure determination is a game occurrence in which reach is generated among game occurrences in which the jackpot is not a big hit. After executing step S5913, the process proceeds to step S5914.

  In step S5914, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step S5913 is the occurrence of reach. If it is determined in step S5914 that reach has been generated (S5914: YES), the process proceeds to step S5915, and the special-purpose reach generation flag for the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. After executing step S5915, the process proceeds to step S5916. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5914 that reach is not generated (S5914: NO), the process proceeds to step S5916 without executing step S5915.

  In step S5916, stop symbol setting processing for removal is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengaging, in the present gaming round when disengaging, for setting which one of the stop results is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a to end the fluctuation display (stop display) Execute the process Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c by referring to the stop result table for removal in the stop result table storage area 63e The address information of the data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After step S5916 is executed, the determination process for the first symbol display portion is ended.

<Process of setting fluctuation time for the first symbol display section>
Next, the setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display portion will be described. The setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5605) of the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display unit.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the variation time for the first symbol display portion. In step S6001, it is determined whether the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is "121". If it is determined in step S6001 that the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is not "121", the process proceeds to step S6002 to determine whether the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is "122" . If it is determined in step S6002 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not "122", the process proceeds to step S6003.

  In step S6003, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6003 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S6003: NO), the process proceeds to step S6004.

  In step S6004, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6005.

  In step S6005, it is determined whether the result of the success or failure determination relating to the current game run is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the special purpose 8R type 1 jackpot flag or the special purpose 8R second type jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (S6005: YES ), Go to step S6006.

  In step S6006, with reference to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. After step S6006 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6010, where the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display portion is finished.

  If it is determined in step S6005 that the result of the success or failure judgment regarding the current game round is not a big hit (S6005: NO), the process proceeds to step S6007 and the result of reach judgment concerning the current game round is reach occurrence It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag is ON, and when it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (S6007: YES), the process proceeds to step S6008.

  In step S6008, the fluctuation generation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation generation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After step S6008 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6010, where the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display portion is finished.

  If it is determined in step S6007 that the result of the reach determination according to the current game round is not reach occurrence (S6007: NO), the process proceeds to step S6009 and reach non-occurrence stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d The fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for this. After step S6009 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6010, where the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display portion is finished.

  If it is determined in step S6003 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S6003: YES), the flow advances to step S6011 to determine whether the special jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6011 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6011: YES), the process proceeds to step S6004 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6011 that the special big hit flag is not ON (S6011: NO), the process proceeds to step S6012, and the value corresponding to 1 min in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM 64. Set Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display portion is finished.

  If it is determined in step S6001 that the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is "121" (S6001: YES), and the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is "122" in step S6002 If it is (S6002: YES), the process proceeds to step S6013, and a value corresponding to 12 sec is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time for the first symbol display portion is finished.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of first start reservation numbers RaN increases. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of first start reservation number RaN, and the variation time is set shorter as the number of first start reservation number RaN is smaller. May be

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected may differ between the jackpot winning time and the outreach time. Good. Further, the variation time table for the first type jackpot and the variation time table for the second type jackpot may be set individually.

<Process for high probability mode end>
Next, the high probability mode end processing will be described. The high probability mode end process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5606) of the variation start process for the first symbol display portion.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart of high probability mode end processing. In step S6101, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6101 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (S6101: NO), the high probability mode end processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6101 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S6101: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6102.

  In step S6102, it is determined whether the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is 120 or not. If it is determined in step S6102 that the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is not 120 (S6102: NO), the high probability mode end process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6102 that the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is 120 (S6102: YES), the process proceeds to step S6103 to turn off the high probability mode flag and proceeds to step S6104. Turn off the frequent support mode flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6105.

  In step S6105, it is determined whether the special jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6105 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6105: NO), the process proceeds to step S6106 to turn on the final specified game play flag. The final specific game play flag is a flag for specifying that it is a game play (120th game play) related to the last jackpot lottery in the high probability mode. After executing step S6106, the high probability mode end process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6105 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6105: YES), the process proceeds to step S6107, and the special jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the high probability mode end processing is ended.

<Variation start processing for the second symbol display section>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the second symbol display unit will be described. The variation start process for the second symbol display portion is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 128: S5505).

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing variation start processing for the second symbol display portion. In step S6201, it is determined whether the value of the second start reservation number RbN is zero. When it is determined in step S6201 that the value of the second start reservation number RaN is not 0 (S6201: NO), the process proceeds to step S6202. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6201 that the value of the second start reservation number RaN is 0 (S6201: YES), the variation start process for the second symbol display portion is ended.

  In step S6202, the game number counting process is executed. As described above, the game number counting process is a process for counting the number of game times (variation of symbols) executed after the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode is started. After executing step S6202, the process proceeds to step S6203.

  In step S6203, a hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit is executed. The hold information shift process for the second symbol display portion is a process of shifting the hold information stored in the second hold area Ra. The details of the hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit will be described later. After executing step S6203, the process proceeds to step S6204.

  In step S6204, the determination process for the second symbol display unit is executed. In the determination process for the second symbol display portion, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, on the basis of the values of the big hit random number counter C1 or the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, the presence or absence of big hit or small hit is determined , The distribution judgment of distributing the jackpot type, and the reach judgment of judging the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. The details of the determination process for the second symbol display portion will be described later. After executing step S6204, the process proceeds to step S6205.

  In step S6205, setting processing of the fluctuation time for the second symbol display unit is executed. In the setting process of the fluctuation time for the second symbol display portion, the fluctuation time which is the time from the start of the fluctuation of the symbols of the second symbol display portion to the stop is set. Details of setting processing of the fluctuation time for the second symbol display unit will be described later. After executing step S6205, the process proceeds to step S6206.

  In step S6206, high probability mode end processing is executed. In the high probability mode end process, as described above, the high probability mode is ended when a predetermined number of times (120 times in the present embodiment) of determination processes (big hit lottery) are executed after shifting to the high probability mode. It is a process. Details of the high probability mode end processing will be described later. After executing step S6206, the process proceeds to step S6207.

  In step S6207, the special purpose variation command is set. The special 2 variable command includes information indicating that the game round started this time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 33. , Information on the presence or absence of the jackpot, information on the type of jackpot, information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the fluctuation time set in step S6204. Note that the set special variation command for special purpose 2 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the command output process (step S5402) in the normal process (FIG. 127). The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect in the game turn based on the received special-use variation command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S6207, the process proceeds to step S6208.

  In step S6208, variation display of symbols in the second symbol display unit 37b is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6209 to turn on the special variation flag. After executing step S6209, the variation start process for the second symbol display unit is finished.

<Holding information shift process for the second symbol display portion>
Next, hold information shift processing for the second symbol display unit will be described. The hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: S6203) of the variation start process for the second symbol display unit.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process for the second symbol display portion. In step S6301, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second start reservation number RbN of the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step S6302.

  In step S6302, the data (pending information) stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6303.

  In step S6303, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reserve area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After step S6303 is executed, the on-hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit is ended.

<Determination process for the second symbol display part>
Next, determination processing for the second symbol display portion will be described. The determination process for the second symbol display portion is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: S6204) of the variation start process for the second symbol display portion.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing determination processing for the second symbol display portion. In step S6401, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6401 that the mode is the high probability mode (S6401: YES), the process proceeds to step S6402.

  In step S <b> 6402, the determination of whether or not the second starting opening is made is made with reference to the success or failure table (for the high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is a value set as a jackpot in the success / failure table (for high probability mode) for the second starting opening It is determined whether or not it matches. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6404. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S6401: NO), the process proceeds to step S6403.

  In step S6403, the determination of whether or not the second starting opening is made is made with reference to the success or failure table (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is a value set as a jackpot in the success / failure table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port It is determined whether or not it matches. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6404.

  In step S6404, it is determined whether the result of the pass / fail determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S6404 that the result of the pass / fail determination is a jackpot (S6404: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6405.

  In step S6405, the special purpose hit flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned ON. The special 2 hit flag is a flag that is turned ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 is "big hit" or "small hit" . After executing step S6405, the process proceeds to step S6406.

  In step S6406, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second start port. Specifically, it is determined whether the value range of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of the jackpot type. After executing step S6406, the process proceeds to step S6407.

  In step S6407, it is determined whether the result of the distribution determination in step S6406 (big hit type) is a first type jackpot. If it is determined in step S6407 that the jackpot type assigned is the first type jackpot (S6407: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6408.

  In step S6408, the special type 1 jackpot flag (big hit type flag) for special use corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step S6407 is turned ON. In this embodiment, the special 8R type 1 jackpot flag is turned ON when the distributed jackpot type is 8R type 1 jackpot, and the special jack 2 is used when the distributed jackpot type is 16R type 1 jackpot. For 16R type 1 jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step S6408, the process proceeds to step S6409.

  In step S6409, stop symbol setting processing for the first type jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the first type jackpot, the variation display is ended (stop display) in a state where any stop result is displayed on the second symbol display portion 37a in the current game round of becoming the first type jackpot Execute the process to set Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is acquired The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S6409, the process proceeds to step S6410.

  In step S6410, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6410 that the high frequency support mode is not set (S6410: NO), the process proceeds to step S6411 to turn on the special jackpot flag. That is, as described above, the special jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 during the period when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Is a flag that After step S6411 is executed, the determination process for the second symbol display portion is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6410 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode (S6410: YES), the determination process for the second symbol display unit is ended without executing step S6411.

  If it is determined in step S6407 that the distributed jackpot type is not the first type jackpot (S6407: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is the second type jackpot, the process proceeds to step S6412. In the present embodiment, since the second type jackpot is not set in the success or failure table for the second starting opening, the processing of step S6412 and step S6413 described below is not executed.

  In step S6412, the special type 2 jackpot flag (big hit type flag) for special use corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step S6407 is turned ON. After executing step S6412, the process proceeds to step S6413.

  In step S6413, stop symbol setting processing for the second type jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the second type jackpot, the variation display is ended (stop display) in a state where any stop result is displayed on the second symbol display portion 37a in the current game round of being the second type jackpot Execute the process to set Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is acquired The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S6413, the process advances to step S6410 described above to determine whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S6410 that the high frequency support mode is not set (S6410: NO), the process proceeds to step S6411 to turn on the special jackpot flag. After step S6411 is executed, the determination process for the second symbol display portion is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6410 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode (S6410: YES), the determination process for the second symbol display unit is ended without executing step S6411.

  If it is determined in step S6404 that the result of the qualification determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is not a big win (S6404: NO), the process proceeds to step S6414, and the result of the qualification determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is a small winning It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S6414 that the result of the pass / fail determination is a small hit (S6414: YES), the process proceeds to step S6415, and the special-purpose hit flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6416, and the small hitting flag corresponding to the result of the pass / fail determination is set to ON. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first small hit flag is turned ON when the result of the pass / fail determination is the first small hit, and the second small when the result of the pass / fail determination is the second small hit. The hit flag is set to ON, and the third small hit flag is set to ON if the result of the pass / fail determination is the third small hit. After executing step S6416, the process proceeds to step S6417.

  In step S6417, stop symbol setting processing for small hitting is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the small hit, in the current game turn to be a small hit, the second symbol display unit 37a is set to display (stop display) the variable display in which state the stop result is displayed. Execute processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the result of the determination of the pass / fail in step S6402 or step S6403 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After step S6417 is executed, the determination process for the second symbol display portion is ended.

  When it is determined in step S6414 that the result of the pass / fail determination is not a small hit (S6414: NO), the process proceeds to step S6418.

  In step S6418, stop symbol setting processing for removal is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for removal, in the current game round to be removed, it is for setting whether to stop the variation display in the state of displaying any stop result on the second symbol display portion 37a (stop display). Execute the process Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c by referring to the stop result table for removal in the stop result table storage area 63e The address information of the data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After step S6418 is executed, the determination process for the second symbol display portion is ended.

<Process of setting fluctuation time for second symbol display part>
Next, setting processing of the fluctuation time for the second symbol display unit will be described. The setting process of the fluctuation time for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: S6205) of the fluctuation start process for the second symbol display unit.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the variation time for the second symbol display portion. In step S6501, it is determined whether the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is "121". If it is determined in step S6501 that the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is not "121" (S6501: NO), the process proceeds to step S6502 and the value of the ST game frequency counter PNC1 is "122" It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S6502 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not "122" (S6502: NO), the process proceeds to step S6503.

  In step S6503, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6503 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (S6503: NO), the process proceeds to step S6504, and a value corresponding to 10 minutes in the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of RAM 64 Set Thereafter, the setting process of the variation time for the second symbol display unit is ended.

  If it is determined in step S6503 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S6503: YES), the process proceeds to step S6505, and it is determined whether the special jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6505: YES), the process proceeds to step S6504 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6505: NO), the process proceeds to step S6506.

  Here, when it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6505: YES), the reason for proceeding to step S6504 is as follows. The game ball is distributed on the right side of the game board 30 in the low frequency support mode, and the game ball is made to enter the second start port 34 to execute the second starting port game turn to win the big hit lottery special jackpot It becomes. In the low frequency support mode, it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls on the left side of the gaming board 30 in the low frequency support mode of the gaming machine, so the game is performed on the left side of the gaming board 30 in the low frequency support mode. It is desirable to induce the player to distribute the ball. Therefore, by circulating the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 in the low frequency support mode and entering the game ball into the second starting hole 34, the second starting hole game run is executed and the jackpot lottery wins. In the low frequency support mode, the game ball is distributed on the left side of the game board 30 and the first start hole 33 is made to enter the game ball by executing the game turn for the first start hole to win the jackpot lottery It is desirable to make settings that are advantageous. Therefore, by circulating the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 in the low frequency support mode and causing the game ball to enter the second start hole 34, the game run for the second start hole is executed and the jackpot lottery is won (special jackpot) In this case, the internal control shifts to the high-frequency support mode, but the second start is executed by distributing the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 and entering the game ball in the second start opening 34 By making the fluctuation time of the game time for mouth 10 minutes, the game action which distributes the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 in the low frequency support mode and makes the game ball enter the second start hole 34 is not advantageous It is like that. Also, by setting the effect and sound in the symbol display device 41 when there is a transition to the high frequency support mode triggered by a special jackpot, there is no change from the time in the low frequency support mode, the game ball is mistaken for the player. It may not be distributed to the right of the game board 30.

  In step S6506, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6507.

  In step S6507, it is determined whether the result of the success or failure determination relating to the current game run is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the special purpose 8R type 1 jackpot flag or the special purpose 16R type 1 jackpot flag is ON, and if any flag is ON (S6507: YES ), Go to step S6508.

  In step S6508, with reference to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. After step S6508 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6509, where the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the variation time for the second symbol display unit is ended.

  If it is determined in step S6507 that the result of the success or failure judgment regarding the current game round is not a big hit (S6507: NO), the process proceeds to step S6510, and the fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 Set the value corresponding to 0.5 sec. Thereafter, the setting process of the variation time for the second symbol display unit is ended.

  When it is determined in step S6501 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "121" (S6501: YES), and in step S6502, it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "122" If it is (S6502: YES), the process proceeds to step S6511, and a value corresponding to 12 sec is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the variation time for the second symbol display unit is ended.

<Variation stop processing>
Next, the fluctuation stop process will be described. The fluctuation stop process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 128: S5506).

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop process. In step S6601, it is determined whether the special condition changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is being variably displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a. If it is determined in step S6601 that the special-one variation flag is ON (S6601: YES), the process proceeds to step S6602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6601 that the special-one variation flag is not ON (S6601: NO), the process proceeds to step S6619 described later.

  In step S6602, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbols in the first symbol display unit 37a has ended. If it is determined in step S6602 that the variation time of the symbols in the first symbol display section 37a has ended (S6602: YES), the process proceeds to step S6603, and the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display section 37a is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6604. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6602 that the variation time of the symbols in the first symbol display section 37a is not finished (S6602: NO), the process proceeds to step S6620 described later.

  In step S6604, the special condition changing flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6605, where it is determined whether the special purpose hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is the jackpot. If it is determined in step S6605 that the special-purpose hit flag is not ON (S6605: NO), the process proceeds to step S6606.

  In step S6606, it is determined whether the final specified game number flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6606 that the final specified game count flag is ON (S6606: YES), the flow advances to step S6607 to set a final specified game count end command. The final specified game times end command is for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the last game times in the high probability mode (in the present embodiment, the 120th game times after shifting to the high probability mode) is ended. It is a command. The set final specified game number end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6607, the process proceeds to step S6608 to turn off the final specified game play flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6606 that the final specific game number flag is not ON (S6606: NO), the process proceeds to step S6609 without executing step S6607 and step S6608.

  In step S6609, it is determined whether the value of the first start reservation number RaN is zero. If it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start reservation number RaN is 0 (S6609: YES), the process proceeds to step S6610, and a special guest waiting command is set. The special customer wait command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display unit 37a has stopped and the value of the first start reservation number RaN has become 0. . The set special customer waiting command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). After executing step S6610, the process proceeds to step S6619 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start reservation number RaN is not 0 (S6609: NO), the process proceeds to step S6619 described later without executing step S6610.

  If it is determined in step S6605 that the special hit flag is ON (S6606: YES), the flow advances to step S6611 to turn off the special hit flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6612.

  In step S6612, it is determined whether the final specified game number flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6612 that the final specified game number flag is ON (S6612: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6613, and the final specified game number flag is set OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6614. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6612 that the final specific game play flag is not ON (S6612: NO), the process proceeds to step S6614 without executing step S6613.

  In step S6614, it is determined whether the special-purpose 2 in-change flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is being variably displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b. If it is determined in step S6614 that the special-purpose second variation flag is ON (S6614: YES), the process proceeds to step S6615. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6614 that the special change flag 2 is not ON (S6614: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 to turn ON the open / close execution mode flag and thereafter end this fluctuation stop process. .

  In step S6615, the variation of the symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b is released and stopped at the symbol for disconnection. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6616 to turn off the special variation flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6617.

  In step S6617, it is determined whether the special hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b is a jackpot or a small jackpot. If it is determined in step S6617 that the special hit flag is ON (S6617: YES), the process proceeds to step S6618 to turn off the special hit flag, and the special type 1 jackpot flag or Among the small hit flags, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6637, the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to ON, and then the variation stop process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6617 that the special hit flag is not ON (S6617: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 without executing step S6618, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. This fluctuation stop process is ended.

  As described above, if it is determined in step S6601 that the flag for special gear change is not ON (S6601: NO), it is determined in step S6602 that the variation time of the symbol in the first symbol display portion 37a has not ended. When it is determined (S6602: NO), when it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first start reservation number RaN is not 0 (S6609: NO), and in step S6610, a special customer wait command is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S6619 described below.

In step S6619, it is determined whether the special change flag for 2 is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is being variably displayed in the second symbol display portion 37b. If it is determined in step S6619 that the special change flag in progress is ON (S6619: YES), the process proceeds to step S6620. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6619 that the special change flag during variation 2 is not ON (S6619: NO), the variation stop process is ended.

  In step S6620, it is determined whether the variation time of the symbols in the second symbol display unit 37b has ended. If it is determined in step S6620 that the variation time of the symbols in the second symbol display unit 37b is over (S6620: YES), the process proceeds to step S6621 to stop the variation of the symbols in the second symbol display unit 37b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6622. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6620 that the variation time of the symbols in the second symbol display unit 37b has not ended (S6620: NO), the variation stop process is ended.

  In step S6622, the special change flag during flag change is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S 6623 to determine whether the special hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b is the jackpot. If it is determined in step S 6623 that the special-purpose hit flag is not ON (S 6623: NO), the process proceeds to step S 6624.

  In step S 6624, it is determined whether or not the final specified game play flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6624 that the final specified game number flag is ON (S6624: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6625, and a final specified game number end command is set. The final specified game times end command is for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the last game times in the high probability mode (in the present embodiment, the 120th game times after shifting to the high probability mode) is ended. It is a command. The set final specified game number end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6625, the process proceeds to step S6626 to turn off the final specified game play flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6627. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6624 that the final specific game play flag is not ON (S6624: NO), the process proceeds to step S6627 without executing step S6625 and step S6626.

  In step S6627, it is determined whether the value of the second start reservation number RbN is zero. If it is determined in step S6627 that the value of the second start reservation number RbN is 0 (S6627: YES), the process proceeds to step S6628 to set a special guest wait command. The special 2 customer wait command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the variation of the symbols in the second symbol display unit 37b has stopped and the value of the second start reservation number RbN has become 0. . The set special customer waiting command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). After executing step S6628, the variable stop process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6627 that the value of the second start reservation number RbN is not 0 (S6627: NO), the variation stop process is ended without executing step S6628.

  If it is determined in step S 6623 that the special hit flag is ON (S 6623: YES), the process proceeds to step S 6629 to turn off the special hit flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6630.

  In step S6630, it is determined whether the final specified game number flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6630 that the final specified game number flag is ON (S6630: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6631 and the final specified game number flag is set OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6632. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6630 that the final specific game play flag is not ON (S6630: NO), the process proceeds to step S6632 without executing step S6631.

  In step S6632, it is determined whether the special condition variation flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is being variably displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a. If it is determined in step S6632 that the special-one variation flag is ON (S6632: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6633. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 for fluctuation flag is not ON (S6632: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 to turn ON the open / close execution mode flag and thereafter end this fluctuation stop processing. .

  In step S6633, the variation of the symbol in the first symbol display portion 37a is released and stopped at the symbol for disconnection. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6634 to turn off the special variation flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6635.

  In step S6635, it is determined whether the special purpose hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is the jackpot. In step S6635, when it is determined that the special hit flag is ON (S6635: YES), the process proceeds to step S6636 to turn off the special hit flag, and the special first class jackpot flag or Among the special type 2 type 2 jackpot flags, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the fluctuation stop process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6635 that the special hit flag is not ON (S6635: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 without executing step S6636, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. This fluctuation stop process is ended.

  As described in the present process, in the fluctuation stop process of the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S6614 that the flag for special flag 2 is ON (S6614: YES), the second symbol display portion in step S6615 Stop the symbol fluctuation in 37b with the symbol for deviation. If it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 for fluctuation flag is ON (S6632: YES), the fluctuation of the symbol in the first symbol display portion 37a is canceled in step S6633 and stopped at the symbol. That is, when all of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b are in a variable display mode, one of the two symbol display units has a stop display prior to the other. If it is the case and the result of the jackpot lottery in the game turn corresponding to the one symbol display part is a big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation of the other symbol display part is removed and stopped at the symbol. Therefore, there is a case where the lottery result corresponding to the symbol display unit in which the variation of the symbol stops first may be prioritized. By doing so, the following problems can be solved.

  Usually, in the simultaneous change machine, when the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b both start changing, the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to one of the symbol display units is a big hit or When it is determined to be a small hit, the jackpot lottery corresponding to the other symbol display unit is not executed, and the other symbol display unit is automatically stopped and displayed with the symbol for detachment. However, when the process is performed, the following problems occur.

  When transitioning from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode and the player switches the game in which the game ball has been distributed to the right of the game board 30 to the game in which the game ball is distributed to the left of the game board 30, high Even after the transition to the low frequency support mode, the hold game times corresponding to the game slots for the second start opening that are left after the game ball enters the second start port 34 shortly before the end of the frequency support mode. To be executed. The player switches the game from circulating the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 to a game in which the game ball is circulated to the left side of the game board 30, enters the game ball in the first start port 33, and makes the first start port. The game for the game is executed, but temporarily, if the game for the second starting opening for the held game is played first and the big hit or the small hit is won in the big hit lottery, the processing of the above-mentioned common simultaneous variable machine If is executed, the jackpot lottery of the first starting opening game times is not executed. At this time, since the support mode has already been shifted to the low frequency support mode, the variation time of the second starting opening gaming cycle is 10 minutes. As a result, for 10 minutes until the second symbol display portion 37b stops with the symbol for the big hit or the small hit, the player causes the game ball to enter the first starting opening 33 and the game cycle for the first starting opening. Even if executed, the jackpot lottery itself will not be executed. That is, the player is substantially forced to interrupt the game for 10 minutes until the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped by the symbol for the big hit or the small hit, which is a great disadvantage for the player. Give.

  In that respect, as in the present embodiment, when adopting a process in which the lottery result corresponding to the symbol display portion in which the variation of the symbol stops earlier is prioritized, the game period for the second starting slot of the holding game period is executed. Even if the jackpot or jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation time of the second symbol display portion 37b is set to 10 minutes, then the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. When the ball is hit, a jackpot lottery as a game run for the first starting opening is executed. And when the result of the said big hit lottery is a big hit, and the change of the symbol of the 1st symbol display part 37a stops before the change of the symbol of the 2nd symbol display part 37b, the 1st start The lottery result of the game for mouth is prioritized, and the symbol of the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped at the symbol for the big hit, and at the same time, the symbol of the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped at the symbol for detachment. That is, the second symbol display unit 37b stops the symbol earlier than 10 minutes which is the initially set fluctuation time. Therefore, as in the case of adopting the processing of the normal simultaneous change machine, the game is interrupted while the second symbol display unit 37b is stopped with the jackpot symbol or the jackpot symbol (10 minutes), the game is interrupted Can avoid the problem of being forced to

  For this reason, in the fluctuation stop process in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S6614 that the special-purpose fluctuation flag is ON (S6614: YES), the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed in step S6615. If it is determined that the variation for the symbol is off and stopped at the symbol for the special symbol 1 in step S6632 (S6632: YES), the variation of the symbol in the first symbol display portion 37a is determined in step S6633. We adopt the process of stopping with the symbol for release.

<Playing state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for normal processing (FIG. 127: S5406).

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. In step S6701, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is a flag that is referred to to determine whether or not it is an ending period, and is turned on at the start of the ending period in the open / close execution mode and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S6701 that the ending period flag is not ON (S6701: NO), the process proceeds to step S6702, and it is determined whether the open / close processing period flag is ON. The open / close processing period flag is a flag that is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is an open / close processing period, and is turned on at the start of the open / close processing period and turned off at the end of the open / close processing period. The opening and closing processing period is a period for executing the opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36.

  If it is determined in step S6702 that the opening / closing processing period flag is not ON (S6702: NO), the process proceeds to step S6703, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is a flag that is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is the opening period, and is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for performing the opening effect in the open / close execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S6703 that the opening period flag is not ON (S6703: NO), the process proceeds to step S6704, and it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6704 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S6704: NO), this gaming state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6704 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S6704: YES), the process proceeds to step S6705.

  In step S6705, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting a time length of the opening period in the open / close execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as opening time). Specifically, "3000" (i.e., 6.0 sec) or "0" (i.e., 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To indicating the remaining time of the opening period. The timer counter area To is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area To is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, 2 msec. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S6705, the process proceeds to step S6706.

  In step S6706, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). The opening command includes information on the set opening time. The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed. After executing step S6706, the process advances to step S6707 to turn on the opening period flag. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S6703 that the opening period flag is ON (S6703: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6708.

  In step S6708, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter area To is "0". If it is determined in step S6708 that the opening period has not ended (S6708: NO), the present gaming state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6708 that the opening period has ended (S6708: YES), the process proceeds to step S6709 to turn off the opening period flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6710.

  In step S6710, start processing of round display for notifying of the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. And based on the confirmed address information, while specifying stop result data corresponding to the said address information out of the stop result data group memorize | stored in ROM63, while specifying the content of the round count from the specified stop result data Check. Thereafter, the contents of the confirmed round number are output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Thereby, the round display unit 39 displays the information on the round related to the output. After executing step S6710, the process proceeds to step S6711.

  In step S6711, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, a jackpot type flag (special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 16R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2 8R first) stored in the RAM 64 While confirming the 1 type big hit flag) and the small hit flag (the 1st small hit flag, the 2nd small hit flag, the 3rd small hit flag), the round number corresponding to the flag is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 The first round counter area RC1 is set. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the open / close door 36b is opened. Details of the round number setting process will be described later. After executing S6711, the process proceeds to step S6712.

  In step S6712, an open / close processing command is set. The set open / close process command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). The open / close processing command includes information on the number of rounds executed in the current open / close processing period. The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the number of rounds based on the received open / close processing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S6712, the process proceeds to step S6713.

  In step S6713, the open / close processing period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S6702 that the open / close processing period flag is ON (S6702: YES), the process proceeds to step S6714 to execute the special winning opening / closing process. Specifically, when the openable door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is closed, the variable winning drive portion 36c is driven under the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more. Thus, the open / close door 36b is opened. In addition, when the open / close door 36b is open, the variable winning is achieved on condition that the open limit time has elapsed from the opening of the open / close door 36b or the number of open limit game balls has entered. The drive state of the drive unit 36c is stopped, and the open / close door 36b is closed. Details of the special winning opening / closing process will be described later. After executing step S6714, the process proceeds to step S6715.

  In step S6715, V winning opening opening / closing processing is performed. Specifically, the process of opening the open / close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 once in a predetermined round is executed. Details of the V winning opening opening / closing process will be described later. After executing step S6715, the process proceeds to step S6716.

  In step S6716, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S6716: NO), this gaming state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S6716: YES), the process proceeds to step S6717, and the open / close processing period flag is set to OFF. After executing step S6717, the process proceeds to step S6718.

  In step S6718, round display end processing is executed. In the round display end processing, the round display unit 39 is controlled so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S6718, the process proceeds to step S6719.

  In step S6719, an ending time setting process is performed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) of the ending period in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, "3000" (i.e. 6.0 sec) or "0" (i.e. 0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te indicating the remaining time of the ending period. The timer counter area Te is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area Te is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, 2 msec. The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S6719, the process proceeds to step S6720.

  In step S6720, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). This ending command includes information on the set ending time. Based on the received ending command, the voice emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing processing period, determines the content of the effect corresponding to the ending time, and executes the effect of the determined content Control various devices. After executing step S6720, the process proceeds to step S6721.

  In step S6721, the ending period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S6701 that the ending period flag is ON (S6701: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6722.

  In step S6722, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S6719) is "0". If it is determined in step S6722 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is not "0" (S6722: NO), this gaming state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6722 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is "0" (S6722: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6723.

  In step S6723, the ending period flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S6724 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. Thereafter, the process advances to step S6725 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game play after the ending period has ended. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S6725, the present gaming state transition process is ended.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6705).

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step S6801, it is determined whether the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, a jackpot type flag (special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2 16R first) stored in the RAM 64 When one of the 1-type jackpot flags is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S6801 that the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S6801: YES), the process proceeds to step S6802 and “3000” (ie, 6.0 sec) in the timer counter area To. Set Thereafter, the opening time setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6801 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S6801: YES), that is, if the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit, The process advances to step S6803.

  In step S6803, "0" (ie, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. That is, transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the ball entering is small. If it is a win, in essence, the opening effect is not performed. After executing step S6803, the present opening time setting process is ended.

<Round number setting process>
Next, round number setting processing will be described. The round number setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6711).

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing round number setting processing. In step S6901, it is determined whether or not the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, a jackpot type flag (special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2 16R first) stored in the RAM 64 When one of the 1-type jackpot flags is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S6901 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is a big hit (S6901: YES), the process proceeds to step S6902 and the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is 16R type 1 Determine if it is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the special purpose 2R type 1 jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S6902 that the trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is 16R type 1 jackpot (S6902: YES), the process proceeds to step S6903, and "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. set. Thereafter, the round number setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6902 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not 16R type 1 jackpot (S6902: NO), that is, the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is 8R 1st If it is the seed hit or the 8R type 2 hit, the process proceeds to step S6904, and "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the round number setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S6901 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S6901: YES), that is, the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by entering the game ball into the second starting port 34 If it is determined that the game has been switched to and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the entry of the ball is a small winning, the process proceeds to step S6905.

  In step S6905, it is determined whether the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the first small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the first small hitting flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6905 that the trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the first small hit (S6905: YES), the process proceeds to step S6906 to set "1" in the first round counter area RC1. Do. Thereafter, the round number setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6905 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not the first small hit (S6905: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6907.

  In step S6907, it is determined whether the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is the second small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the second small hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6907 that the trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second small hit (S6907: YES), the process proceeds to step S6908 to set "6" in the first round counter area RC1. Do. Thereafter, the round number setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6907 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not the second small hit (S6907: NO), that is, the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is the third small hit If YES, the process advances to step S6909 to set "8" in the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the round number setting process is ended.

<Big winning opening opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening / closing process will be described. The special winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6714) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S7001, it is determined whether the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S7001 that the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is not open (S7001: NO), the process proceeds to step S7002 and the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". Determine if there is. When it is determined in step S7002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S7002: YES), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S7002: NO), the process proceeds to step S7003.

  In step S7003, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. The value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S7003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S7003: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S7003: YES), the process proceeds to step S7004, and the openable door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is opened. In order to do this, the variable prize drive unit 36c is driven. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7005.

  In step S7005, a ball entry counter setting process is executed. In the entry counter setting process, the entry counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 has a value allowing entry of the game ball during one opening (one round) of the special winning opening 36a. set. Details of the ball entry counter setting process will be described later. After executing step S7005, the process proceeds to step S7006.

  In step S7006, a special winning opening open limit time setting process is executed. In the special winning opening opening limit time setting process, an opening limit time which is the limit of one opening time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the open limit time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the open limit time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. As described above, the value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. The details of the special winning opening open limit time setting process will be described later. After executing step S7006, the process proceeds to step S7007.

  In step S7007, a special winning opening open command is set. Thereafter, the present special winning opening opening and closing process is ended. Note that the special winning opening open command causes the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a has been started. It is a command including information, and is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that opening of the open / close door 36b for one round has been started based on the received special winning opening open command, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are opened / closed. Update to the contents corresponding to the release of 36b being started. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the special winning opening open command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that opening of the open / close door 36b for one round has been started based on the received special winning opening open command, and the effect content in the symbol display device 41 is the opening of the open / close door 36b. Update to the contents corresponding to the start of.

  If it is determined in step S7001 that the open / close door 36b provided to the special winning opening 36a is open (step S7001: YES), the process proceeds to step S7008 and whether the special winning opening open limit time has elapsed Determine if Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the open limit time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S7008 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S7008: NO), the process proceeds to step S7009.

  In step S7009, it is determined from the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S7009 that the game ball has not entered the ball (S7009: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7009 that the game ball has entered the ball (S7009: YES), the process proceeds to step S7010 to subtract 1 from the value of the ball entry counter area PC. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7011.

  In step S7011, it is determined whether the value of the entering counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S7011 that the value of the entering counter area PC is not "0" (S7011: NO), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S7008 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S7008: YES), or if it is determined in step S7011 that the value of the entering counter area PC is "0" (S7011: YES), proceed to step S7012 and execute the special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a, the variable prize drive unit 36c is in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7013.

  In step S7013, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7014, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S7014 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S7014: YES), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7014 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S7014: NO), the process proceeds to step S7015.

  In step S7015, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed. The special winning opening closing time setting process is a process for setting the closing time of the special winning opening 36a, and specifically, a value corresponding to the closing time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit, “1000” (2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. If it is determined that the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a small hit, “30” (that is, 0.06 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After executing step S7015, the process proceeds to step S7016.

  In step S7016, a special winning opening closing command is set. Thereafter, the present special winning opening opening and closing process is ended. Note that the special winning opening closing command causes the sound emission control device 90 and the display control 100 to recognize that the opening and closing of the open / close door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is finished. And is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening and closing of the open / close door 36b for one round has been completed based on the received special winning opening close command, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are the open / close door 36b. Update to the contents corresponding to the end of the release of. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned special winning opening closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening and closing of the open / close door 36b for one round is completed based on the received special winning opening closing command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 is the opening of the open / close door 36b. Update to the content corresponding to the end.

<Entry counter setting process>
Next, the ball entry counter setting process will be described. The ball entry counter setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 143: S7005) of the special winning opening / closing process.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the entering ball counter setting process. In step S7101, "10" is set in the entering counter area PC. Thereafter, the entry counter setting process is ended.

<Opening limit time setting process for large winning opening>
Next, the opening limit time setting process for the special winning opening will be described. The special winning opening open limit time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 143: S7006) of the special winning opening / closing process.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an open limit time setting process for the special winning opening. In step S7201, it is determined whether the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, a jackpot type flag (special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2 16R first) stored in the RAM 64 When one of the 1-type jackpot flags is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7201 that the trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit (S7201: YES), the process proceeds to step S7202 and “15000” (ie, 30. Set 0 sec). Thereafter, the open limit time setting process for the special winning opening is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7201 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S7201: NO), the process proceeds to step S7203, and the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is the first It is determined whether or not it is a small hit. Specifically, when the first small hit flag is ON, it is determined that the trigger for transition to the current open / close execution mode is the first small hit.

  If it is determined in step S7203 that the trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the first small hit (S7203: YES), the process proceeds to step S7204, and the first timer counter area T1 is “800” (ie, , 1.6 sec) is set. Thereafter, the open limit time setting process for the special winning opening is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7203 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not the first small hit (S7203: NO), that is, the trigger for the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is the second small hit Alternatively, if it is the third small hit, the process proceeds to step S7205, and "30" (ie, 0.06 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Thereafter, the open limit time setting process for the special winning opening is ended.

<V winning opening opening and closing process>
Next, the V winning opening opening and closing process will be described. The V winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6715) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the V winning opening opening / closing process. In step S7301, it is determined whether the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, a jackpot type flag (special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2 16R first) stored in the RAM 64 When one of the 1-type jackpot flags is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7301 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S7301: NO), that is, if the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit, V Since the open / close door 48a provided in the winning opening 48 is not opened, the present V winning opening opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S7301: YES), the process proceeds to step S7302.

  In step S7302, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "3". If it is determined in step S7302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "3" (S7302: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7303.

  In step S7303, it is determined whether the open / close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is open. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the drive state of the open / close door drive unit 48b. If it is determined in step S7303 that the open / close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is not open (S7301: NO), the process proceeds to step S7304, and the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "4". Determine if there is. If it is determined in step S7304 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "4" (S7304: NO), the present V winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7304 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "4" (S7304: YES), the process proceeds to step S7305.

  In step S7305, it is determined whether the V winning a prize opening opened flag stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The V winning opening open flag is a flag for recognizing whether or not the open / close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 has already been opened in the opening / closing execution mode this time. In the present embodiment, the open / close door 48a is configured to be opened only once in the open / close execution mode. If it is determined in step S7305 that the V winning a prize opening open flag is not ON (S7305: NO), the process proceeds to step S7306 to drive the open / close door to open the open / close door 48a provided in the V pay opening 48 The unit 48b is driven. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7307. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7305 that the V winning a prize opening opened flag is ON (S7305: YES), the present V winning a prize opening opening / closing process is ended.

  In step S7307, V winning opening opening limit time setting processing is executed. In the V winning opening opening limit time setting process, an opening limit time which is the limit of one opening time of the open / close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the open limit time is set in the third timer counter area T3. In this case, the third timer counter area T3 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the open limit time of the open / close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48. The value set in the third timer counter area T3 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. Details of the V winning opening opening limit time setting process will be described later. After executing step S7307, the process proceeds to step S7308.

  In step S7308, a V winning opening opening command is set. Thereafter, the present V winning opening opening and closing process is ended. The V winning opening opening command causes the voice emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 has been started. It is a command including information, and is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that opening of the open / close door 48a has been started based on the received V winning opening opening command, and effects of various lamps 47 and speakers 46 can be obtained by opening the open / close door 48a. Update to the content corresponding to the start. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the V winning opening opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that opening of the open / close door 48a is started based on the received V winning opening opening command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are started when the open / close door 48a is opened. Update to the contents corresponding to

  If it is determined in step S7303 that the open / close door 48a provided to the V prize opening 48 is open (step S7303: YES), the process proceeds to step S7309 and the game ball enters the V prize opening 48 It is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V winning opening 48 whether or not it is not. If it is determined in step S7309 that the game ball has entered the ball (S7309: YES), the process proceeds to step S7310 and the V prize flag stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S7310 that the V prize flag is not ON (S7310: NO), the process proceeds to step S7311 to turn on the V prize flag and proceeds to step S7312 to set a V prize command. The V prize command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the game ball has entered the V prize opening 48, and which is normally processed The command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) transmits the sound emission control apparatus 90. The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the gaming ball has entered the V prize opening 48 based on the received V prize command, and effects contents of various lamps 47 and speakers 46 are played in the V prize opening 48. Update to the content corresponding to the ball entering the ball. After executing step S7312, the process proceeds to step S7313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7309 that entry of the game ball has not occurred (S7309: NO), and if it is determined in step S7310 that the V winning flag is ON (S7310: YES) The process proceeds to step S7313 without executing steps S7311 and S7312.

  In step S7313, it is determined whether the open limit time for V winning opening has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S7313 that the value of the third timer counter area T3 is not "0" (S7313: NO), the present V winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7313 that the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0" (S7313: YES), the process proceeds to step S7314.

  In step S7314, V winning hole closing processing is executed. Specifically, in order to close the V winning opening 48, the open / close door drive unit 48b is not driven. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S7315, where the V winning a prize opening open flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7316.

  In step S7316, a V winning opening closing command is set. Thereafter, the present V winning opening opening and closing process is ended. The V winning opening closing command causes the sound emission control device 90 and the display control 100 to recognize that the opening and closing of the open / close door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is completed. And is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening and closing of the open / close door 48a is finished based on the received V winning opening closing command, and effects of various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are finished, the opening of the open / close door 48a is ended Update to the content corresponding to what you did. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the V winning opening closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that the opening and closing of the open / close door 48a is finished based on the received V winning opening closing command, and the effect of the symbol display device 41 is that the opening and closing of the open / close door 48a is ended. Update to the corresponding content.

  If it is determined in step S7302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "3" (S7302: YES), the process proceeds to step S7317 to determine whether the V winning opening open flag is ON or not. Do. If it is determined in step S7317 that the V winning a prize opening opened flag is ON (S7317: YES), the process proceeds to step S7318, and the V winning a prize opening open completion flag is turned off. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7317 that the V winning a prize opening open flag is not ON (S7317: NO), the present V winning a prize opening opening / closing process is ended without executing step S7318.

<Opening limit time setting process for V winning opening>
Next, V winning opening opening limit time setting processing will be described. The V winning opening opening limit time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the V winning opening opening / closing process (FIG. 146: S7307).

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an open limit time setting process for the V winning opening. In step S7401, it is determined whether the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is the first type jackpot. Specifically, when any one of the special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, the special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, and the special 2 16R type 1 jackpot flag is ON, the current open / close execution mode It is determined that the trigger for the transition to the type 1 jackpot is.

  If it is determined in step S7401 that the trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the first type jackpot (S7401: YES), the process proceeds to step S7402 and "5000" is set in the third timer counter area T3 (that is, , 10.0 sec) is set. Thereafter, the V winning opening opening limit time setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7401 that the trigger for the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not the first type jackpot (S7401: NO), that is, the trigger for the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is the second type jackpot If YES, step S7403 follows and "3" (ie, 0.006 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3. For this reason, in the present embodiment, it is substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 when the trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second type jackpot. There is. After execution of step S7403, the present V winning opening open limit time setting process is ended.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 140: S6719).

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart of an ending time setting process. In step S7501, it is determined whether or not the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, a jackpot type flag (special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2 16R first) stored in the RAM 64 When one of the 1-type jackpot flags is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7501 that the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S7501: YES), the process proceeds to step S7502 and “3000” (ie, 6.0 sec) in the timer counter area Te. Set Thereafter, the ending time setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7501 that the trigger for the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big win (S7501: NO), that is, if the trigger for the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit, The process advances to step S7503.

  In step S7503, "0" (ie, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. That is, transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed with the ball entering is small. When it is a win, the end effect is not performed. After executing step S7503, the ending time setting process ends.

<Migration process at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6725) of the gaming state transition processing.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S7601, it is determined whether the trigger for transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, a jackpot type flag (special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 8R type 1 jackpot, special 2 16R first) stored in the RAM 64 When one of the 1-type jackpot flags is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the transition to the open / close execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7601 that the trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit (S7601: YES), the process proceeds to step S7602, and it is determined whether the V prize flag is ON. If it is determined in step S7602 that the V prize winning flag is ON (S7602: YES), the process proceeds to step S7603.

  In step S7603, the special 8R type 1 jackpot flag, the special 8R type 2 jackpot flag, the special 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, and the special 2 16R type 1 jackpot flag are ON. Turn off the flag. After executing step S7603, the process proceeds to step S7604.

  In step S7604, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, after the open / close execution mode is ended, the acceptance lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step S7604, the process proceeds to step S7605.

  In step S7605, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. The high probability mode command is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. After executing step S7605, the process proceeds to step S7606.

  In step S7606, the high frequency support mode flag is set to ON. As a result, after the open / close execution mode is ended, the mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7607.

  In step S7607, the ST game count count flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S7608, where "0" is set in the ST game number counter PNC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7609 to turn off the V winning flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7610.

  In step S7610, it is determined whether the special jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S7610 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S7610: NO), the flow advances to step S7611 to set a special display command of mode 2 as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 having received the special display command of main display 2 causes the variation display of the symbol based on the ball entry of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 34 to be displayed on the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 and the first start A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 so that the first sub-display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41 displays the variation display of the symbol based on the entry of the gaming ball into the mouth 33. After step S7611 is executed, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7610 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S7610: YES), the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended without executing step S7611.

  If it is determined in step S7602 that the V prize flag is not ON (S7602: NO), the process proceeds to step S7612 and the special 1 8R type 1 jackpot flag, the special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 Among the 8R type 1 jackpot flag for special use and the special type 2 16R first type jackpot flag for special use, the flag that is ON is turned off. After executing step S7612, the process proceeds to step S7613.

  In step S7613, when the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the open / close execution mode is ended, the acceptance lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode. After executing step S7613, the process proceeds to step S7614.

  In step S7614, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. The low probability mode command is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. After executing step S7614, the process proceeds to step S7615.

  In step S7615, when the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the high frequency support mode flag is set OFF. As a result, after the open / close execution mode is ended, the low frequency support mode is entered. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7616.

  In step S7616, the power-on game count count flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S7617, and "0" is set in the number-of-power-play game number counter PNC2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7610.

  If it is determined in step S7601 that the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S7601: NO), that is, if the trigger for transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit, the step Proceeding to S7618, the flag that is ON among the first small hitting flag, the second small hitting flag, and the third small hitting flag is turned OFF. After step S7618 is executed, the transition process at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for telegraph support>
Next, a process for electronic mail support will be described. The processing for electronic part support is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine for normal processing (FIG. 127: S5407).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart of the electronic-support-support process. In step S7701, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-support flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the opening and closing process of the motorized accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is started, and is turned off when the opening and closing process is ended. If it is determined in step S7701 that the in-support flag is not ON (S7701: NO), the flow proceeds to step S7702.

  In step S7702, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flags storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric combination open lottery of whether or not the electric combination 34a is in the open state. If it is determined in step S7702 that the support winning flag is not ON (S7702: NO), the flow proceeds to step S7703.

  In step S7703, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S7703 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S7703: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S7703: YES), the process proceeds to step S7704.

  In step S7704, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the drawing unit 38 or not. If it is determined in step S7704 that the end timing of the variable display is reached (S7704: YES), the process advances to step S7705 to set the out-of-page display, and then the electronic control support process ends. By setting the off-set display, the variation display of the symbols in the common drawing unit 38 is ended in the state where the off-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7704 that the end timing of the variable display is not reached (S7704: NO), the process proceeds to step S7706.

  In step S7706, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus item holding number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S7706 that the value of the number of bonus products held SN is “0” (S7706: NO), the present support routine processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7706 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is larger than "0" (S7706: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7707.

  In step S7707, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then, in step S7708, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the open / close execution mode at step S7707 (S7707: NO) and if it is the high frequency support mode at step S7708 (S7708: YES), the process proceeds to step S7709, and an electric combination open lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the holding position 64d is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 463, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. That is, in this embodiment, in the high-frequency support mode, the winning combination of the electric combination is opened with the probability of 232/233. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination opening lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7710.

  In step S7710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S7709 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S7710 that the result of the motorized character opening lottery is support win (S7710: YES), the process proceeds to step S7711 to turn on the support win flag and provide in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "1" is set to the second round counter area RC2 that has been set. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the motorized jack 34a has been released. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7712. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7710 that the result of the electric combination open lottery is not the support winning (S7710: NO), the process proceeds to step S7712 without executing the process of step S7711.

  In step S7712, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S7712 that the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S7712: YES), the process proceeds to step S7713. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7712 that the success or failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S7712: NO), the electronic control support process ends.

  In step S7713, it is determined whether the value of the power support game frequency counter PNC2 is "100". If it is determined in step S7713 that the value of the power-sending game number counter PNC2 is not "100" (S7713: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7713 that the value of the number-of-games counter PNC2 for electricity support is "0", then the process proceeds to step S7714 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag and the special jackpot flag is on. In some cases, the special jackpot flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7715.

  In step S7715, a low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Do. After that, the electronic mail support process ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S7715 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S7707 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S7707: YES), or if it is determined in step S7708 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S7708: NO), the process proceeds to step S7716, and the electric combination open lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the holding position 64d is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. That is, in this embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the winning combination of the electric combination is opened with a probability of 231/233. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination opening lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7717.

  In step S7717, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S7716 is support winning. If it is determined in step S7717 that support has not been won (S7717: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7717 that support is won (S7717: YES), the process proceeds to step S7718 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" in the second round counter area RC2. , Finish the processing for this boardroom support.

  If it is determined in step S7702 that the support winning flag is ON (S7702: YES), the process proceeds to step S7719 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. In step S7719, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7719: NO), since the variation display of the pattern in the common drawing unit 38 is being performed, the processing for the electric wave support is directly performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S7719: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7720.

  In step S7720, a hit display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the symbol in the common drawing unit 38 is ended in the state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process advances to step S7721 to set the in-support flag ON and the support winning flag OFF. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

  If it is determined in step S7701 that the in-support flag is ON (S7701: YES), the process proceeds to step S7722 to execute electronic combination open / close processing for opening / closing control of the motorized combination 34a. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

<Electronic work opening and closing process>
Next, electronic locker opening and closing processing will be described. The electronic combination opening and closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 150: S7722) of the electronic combination support process.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the electronic combination opening and closing process. In step S7801, it is determined whether the motorized jack 34a is open. Whether or not the motorized accessory 34a is open is determined based on whether or not the motorized accessory drive unit 44b is in the driven state. If it is determined that the motorized jack 34a is open (S7801: YES), the process proceeds to step S7802.

  In step S7802, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the motor-operated accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S7802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7802: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. That is, when the open continuation time of the motorized jack 34a has not ended, the present electric brake opening and closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S7802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S7802: YES), the process proceeds to step S7803, and a closing process is performed to control the motorized prize 34a in the closed state. "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the measuring means of the open continuation time of the motorized part 34a is "0", the motorized part 34a is closed and, in this case, the second timer counter area T2 is motorized. The second timer counter area T2 is set to "250", which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a. After executing step S7803, the process proceeds to step S7804.

  In step S7804, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S7805, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step S7805, when it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S7805: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S7805: YES), the process proceeds to step S7806, and the support flag is turned off. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S7801 that the motorized jack 34a is not open (S7801: NO), the process proceeds to step S7807 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the motorized accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S7807 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7807: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7807 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S7807: YES), the process proceeds to step S7808 to execute an opening process of controlling the motorized jack 34a in an open state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7809.

  In step S7809, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S7809: NO), the process proceeds to step S7810 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is Do.

  If it is determined in step S7810 that the high-frequency support mode is in progress (S7810: YES), the process advances to step S7811 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7809 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S7809: YES), or if it is determined in step S7810 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S7810: NO), the process proceeds to step S7812. “700” (ie, 1.4 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

<Game ball launch control processing>
Next, the game ball launch control process will be described. The game ball emission control processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 127: S5408).

  FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing a game ball emission control process. In step S7901, it is determined whether the touch sensor 25a is ON. That is, it is determined whether the player is touching the operation handle 25 or not. When it is determined in step S7901 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S7901: YES), the process proceeds to step S7902. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7901 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S7901: NO), the game ball emission control process is ended.

  In step S7902, it is determined whether the game ball launch button 26 is ON. If it is determined in step S7902 that the game ball release button 26 is not ON (S7902: NO), the process proceeds to step S7903.

  In step S7903, it is determined whether the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 25 is zero. If it is determined in step S7903 that the operation handle 25 is at the home position (S7903: YES), the game ball emission control process is ended. If it is determined in step S7903 that the operation handle 25 is not at the home position (S7903: NO), the process proceeds to step S7904.

  In step S7904, it is determined whether the weight button 25b is ON. If it is determined in step S7904 that the weight button is ON (S7904: YES), the game ball emission control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7904 that the weight button is not ON (S7904: NO), the flow proceeds to step S7905.

  In step S7905, a control signal is transmitted to the emission control device 80 so that the game ball is emitted with an emission intensity corresponding to the displacement amount (rotational operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches the game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing step S7905, the present game ball emission control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S7902 that the game ball emission button 26 is ON (S7902: YES), the process proceeds to step S7906. In step S7906, a control signal is sent to the launch control device 80 to launch the gaming ball at the launch intensity for the right strike. In the present embodiment, the control signal is transmitted to the emission control device 80 so that the game ball is emitted with the same emission intensity as when the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches the game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity corresponding to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. Thereafter, the game ball emission control process is ended.

K6. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus 90 and the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 153 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. Note that part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 and an RTC 96 are mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables and the like. For example, in a part of the area of the ROM 93, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variation display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like are provided. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) outputs date information and time information. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The MPU 92 acquires date information and time information output from the RTC 96, and executes an RTC effect that is an effect based on the acquired date information and time information. In the present embodiment, the sound emission control apparatus 90 determines whether the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC presentation start condition, and when it is determined that the information matches, the RTC presentation is performed. Start processing for execution. The RTC effect of the present embodiment is configured of an RTC effect moving image of 300 seconds and an RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect moving image, and is executed at 00 minutes every hour.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 60 and the rendering operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The main control unit 60 receives various commands. The speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and the display control device 100 is connected.

  The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is mounted. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control apparatus 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the various commands received, and implements control of the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is formed into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data etc. in a shared manner in each character ROM 106. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 106 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 103.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control unit 90 will be the sound side MPU 92 and the sound side, respectively. Also referred to as the ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

K7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control apparatus 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S8001, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main side MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and readout of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S8001, the process proceeds to step S8002.

  In step S8002, a display mode switching process is performed. In the display mode switching process, the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 33 is displayed on the main display area MA and the variation of the symbol based on the entering of the gaming sphere to the second starting opening 34 is The display mode (also referred to as a special display mode 1 below) displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 and the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34 are displayed in the main display area MA Execute processing to switch to a display mode (also referred to as a special main display mode below) that displays in the first sub-display area SA1 the variation of the symbol based on the game ball entering the first start opening 33 together with Do. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step S8002, the process proceeds to step S8003.

  In step S8003, a special-purpose game-time effect processing is executed. The special-purpose game-time effect processing is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game-time based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The details of the special-purpose game-time effect processing will be described later. After executing step S8003, the process proceeds to step S8004.

  In step S8004, a special-purpose game-time effect processing is executed. The special-purpose game-time effect processing is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the gaming round based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34. Details of the special-purpose game-time effect processing will be described later. After executing step S8004, the process proceeds to step S8005.

  In step S8005, a process for standby for causing the display control apparatus 100 to start displaying a demonstration moving image (main demonstration moving image) or a sub demonstration moving image is executed. Details of the standby process will be described later. After executing step S8005, the process proceeds to step S8006.

  In step S8006, an RTC rendering process is executed. In the process for the RTC effect, a process related to the RTC effect is executed. The details of the process for the RTC effect will be described below. After executing step S8006, the process proceeds to step S8007.

  In step S8007, a result display process is performed. In the result display process, a process for displaying a result screen is performed when 120 game rounds are finished without winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode. Details of the result display process will be described later. After executing step S8007, the process proceeds to step S8008.

  In step S8008, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the various lamps 47 is performed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the various processes of steps S8002 to S8007. After executing step S8008, the process proceeds to step S8009.

  In step S8009, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is performed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the various processes of steps S8002 to S8007. After executing step S8009, the present timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8002).

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process. In step S8101, it is determined whether a special main display command from the main MPU 62 has been received. If it is determined in step S8101 that the special main display command is received (S8101: YES), the process proceeds to step S8102 and the special main display stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 Turn on the flag. The special display main display flag displays the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34 in the main display area MA and the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 Is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the display mode (special main display mode 2) is to be displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. After executing step S8102, the process proceeds to step S8103.

  In step S 8103, the special display command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The special main display command is a command for instructing the display control apparatus 100 to switch from the special main display mode to the special main display mode. The display control device 100 that has received the special main display command executes processing for switching from the special main display mode to the special main display mode. After executing step S8103, the process proceeds to step S8104. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8101 that the special main display command has not been received (S8101: NO), the process proceeds to step S8104 without executing steps S8102 and S8103.

  In step S8104, it is determined whether a final specified game number end command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8104 that the final specific game times end command has been received (S8104: YES), the process proceeds to step S8105, and the special main display flag is set to OFF. After executing step S8105, the process proceeds to step S8106.

  In step S8106, the special display command A is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The special main display command A is a command for instructing the display control apparatus 100 to switch from the special main display mode to the special main display mode via display of the result image. The display control apparatus 100 having received the special main display command A executes processing for switching from the special main display mode to the special main display mode via display of the result image. After executing step S8106, the process proceeds to step S8107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8104 that the final specific game times end command has not been received (S8104: NO), the process proceeds to step S8107 without executing steps S8105 and S8106.

  In step S8107, it is determined whether a low frequency support command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8107 that the low frequency support command has been received (S8107: YES), the process proceeds to step S8108, and the special main display flag is turned off. After executing step S8108, the process proceeds to step S8109.

  In step S8109, the special display command B is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. In the display control device 100, the special control main display command B switches the special control display mode from the special display mode to the special display mode after the variation of the symbol in the 100th game round is finished after the high frequency support mode is started. It is a command to instruct. The display control device 100 that has received the special main display command B switches from the special main display mode to the special main display mode after the variation of the symbol in the 100th game round is over after the high frequency support mode is started. Execute processing for After executing step S8109, the present display mode switching process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8107 that the low frequency support command has not been received (S8107: NO), the present display mode switching process is ended without executing steps S8108 and S8109.

<Process for special edition 1 game play effect>
Next, the special-purpose game-time effect processing will be described. The processing for special-purpose game-time effect is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 154: S8003).

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing processing for special-purpose game-time effect. The processing for the special-purpose game turn effect is for setting the content of the effect in the game turn which is triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 when the special-purpose variable command is received. It is a process. Hereinafter, specific processing of the special-purpose game-time effect processing will be described.

  In step S8201, it is determined whether the special purpose variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8201 that the special variation command is not received (S8201: NO), the processing for the special special game for the special 1 is performed without executing the processing of steps S8202 to S8210 described below. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8201 that the special variation command is received (S8201: YES), the process proceeds to step S8202.

  In step S8202, the special command for variation received this time is read, and from the command, information on presence / absence of jackpot, type of jackpot, presence / absence of reach occurrence, and fluctuation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8203.

  In step S8203, it is determined whether the second main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8203 that the special display flag is not ON (S8203: NO), the process proceeds to step S8204, and processing for setting a presentation pattern for the main display area is performed. In the effect pattern setting process for the main display area, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect to be displayed in the main display area MA are set based on the information read in step S8202. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8206. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8203 that the special main display flag is ON (S8203: YES), the process advances to step S8205 to execute setting processing of effect patterns for the sub display area. In the setting process of the effect pattern for the sub display area, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect to be displayed in the first sub display area SA1 are set based on the information read in step S8202. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8206.

  In step S8206, setting processing of the liquid crystal symbol to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 2 jackpot, the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is established on the upper side is set as information of the symbol for liquid crystal this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R type 1 jackpot or 8R type 1 jackpot, the same odd symbol combination may be selected as the combination of the same symbols. The same even symbol combination may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbol and the combination of the same even symbol, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selectivity than the former. In addition, the combination of “7” symbols is selected only in the case of 16R type 1 jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 8R type 2 jackpot, the combination of the same even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is out, it is judged from the contents of the special purpose variation command that the presence or absence of reach has been generated. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbol is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol on the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of is established is determined as the information of the present stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach does not correspond, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and on the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbol is not established is set as the information of the liquid crystal symbol of this time. After executing step S8206, the process proceeds to step S8207.

  In step S8207, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game run is executed. In the processing, the information of the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the special command for fluctuation received this time, the information of the fluctuation time, and the information of the liquid crystal symbol specified in the step S8206. The variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S8207, the process proceeds to step S8208.

  In step S8208, information of the effect pattern, the symbol for stop liquid crystal, and the variation display pattern set in the current game run is set as the special-purpose game play effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8209, where the special game time effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the contents of the effect corresponding to the received special game turn effect command. After executing step S8209, the process proceeds to step S8210.

  In step S8210, a process of updating pending information is performed. In the hold information update process, the information on the first hold count counter area is updated so that the first hold count stored in the first hold count counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S8210, the processing for the special 1 game play effect is ended.

<Process for special edition 2 game times effect>
Next, the special-purpose game turn effect processing will be described. The special-purpose game-time effect processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 154: S8004).

  FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing processing for special-purpose game-time effect. The processing for the special 2 game turn effect is for setting the content of the effect in the game turn to be executed triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 when the special 2 change command is received. It is a process. Hereinafter, specific processing of the special-purpose game-time effect processing will be described.

  In step S8301, it is determined whether a special-purpose 2 fluctuation command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. In step S8301, when it is determined that the special variation command is not received (S8301: NO), the processing for the special bonus 2 game is performed without executing the processing of steps S8302 to S8310 described below. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8301 that the special variation command is received (S8301: YES), the process proceeds to step S8302.

  In step S8302, the special variation command received this time is read, and from the command, information on presence / absence of big hit, type of big hit, presence / absence of small hit, type of small hit, and variation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8303.

  In step S8303, it is determined whether the special main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8303 that the special display flag is ON (S8303: YES), the process advances to step S8304 to execute setting processing of an effect pattern for the main display area. In the effect pattern setting process for the main display area, the content of the notice effect to be displayed in the main display area MA is set based on the information read in step S8302. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8306. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8303 that the special main display flag is not ON (S8303: NO), the process proceeds to step S8305 to execute setting processing of an effect pattern for the sub display area. In the setting process of the effect pattern for the sub display area, the content of the notice effect to be displayed in the first sub display area SA1 is set based on the information read in step S8302. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8306.

  In step S8306, setting processing of the liquid crystal symbol to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 1 jackpot, 8R type 2 jackpot, the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is established on the upper side is set as information of the symbol for liquid crystal this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R type 1 jackpot or 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination may be selected as the combination of the same symbols, The same even symbol combination may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbol and the combination of the same even symbol, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selectivity than the former. In addition, the combination of “7” symbols is selected only in the case of 16R type 1 jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 8R type 2 jackpot, the combination of the same even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is out, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit from the contents of the special-purpose 2 variation command. If it is determined that the symbol corresponds to the small hit, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbol is not established on the activated line L (L1 or L2), and the predetermined result on the activated line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is established is determined as the information of the present stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not supported, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbol does not hold on the effective line L (L1 or L2) is used as the information of the current liquid crystal symbol. Set After executing step S8306, the process proceeds to step S8307.

  In step S8307, processing for determining a variation display pattern of the current game play is executed. In the processing, the information of the fluctuation time of the current game is identified from the contents of the special variation command received this time, the information of the fluctuation time, and the information of the liquid crystal symbol identified in the step S8306. The variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S8307, the process proceeds to step S8308.

  In step S8308, information of the effect pattern, the symbol for stop liquid crystal, and the variation display pattern set in the current game run is set as the special-purpose game play effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8309, where the special game turn effect command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received special game turn effect command. After executing step S8309, the process proceeds to step S8310.

  In step S8310, a process of updating pending information is performed. In the hold information update process, the information on the second hold count counter area is updated so that the second hold count stored in the second hold count counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S8310, the processing for the special 2 game play effect is ended.

<Process for standby>
Next, the process for standby will be described. The processing for standby is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 154: S8005).

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the process for standby. The standby process is a process for causing the display control device 100 to start displaying a demonstration moving image (main demonstration moving image) or a sub demonstration moving image when receiving a special customer waiting command or a special customer waiting command. The specific process of the standby process will be described below.

  In step S8401, the special purpose migration preparation process is executed. The special purpose transition preparation process is a process for executing preparation for starting a demonstration video (main demo animation) or a sub demo animation, when a special customer waiting command is received. Details of the special purpose transition preparation process will be described later. After executing step S8401, the process proceeds to step S8402.

  In step S8402, a transition preparation process for special purpose 2 is executed. The special-purpose transition preparation process is a process of executing preparation for starting a demonstration video (main demo video) or a sub-demo video when receiving a special-two customer wait command. Details of the special purpose transition preparation process will be described later. After executing step S8402, the process proceeds to step S8403.

  In step S8403, a main demo migration process is executed. The main demo migration process is a process for displaying a demo video (main demo video) in the main display area MA. Details of the main demo migration process will be described later. After executing step S8403, the process proceeds to step S8404.

  In step S8404, a sub demo migration process is executed. The sub demo transition process is a process for displaying a sub demo moving image in the first sub display area SA1. Details of the sub demo migration process will be described later. After executing step S8404, the process proceeds to step S8405.

  In step S8405, a return process is performed. The return process is a process for ending the demo moving image (main demo moving image) or the sub demo moving image and returning to the normal state when the special 1 fluctuation command or the special 2 fluctuation command is received. Details of the return process will be described later. After execution of step S8405, the process for standby is completed.

<Special purpose transition preparation process>
Next, the transition preparation process for special purpose 1 will be described. The transition preparation process for special purpose 1 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine for the process for standby (FIG. 158: S8401).

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart of the special purpose transition preparation process. In the special purpose transition preparation process, when a special purpose customer waiting command is received, the special purpose customer waiting flag is set to ON. When the special customer waiting flag is turned ON, if the special main display mode is in progress, the system shifts to the special standby state for 15 seconds. Then, when the special-purpose standby state for 15 seconds is ended, the volume reduction flag is turned ON, and the reduction processing of the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. Thereafter, when the volume becomes zero, the display of the demonstration video (main demonstration video) is started in the main display area MA in the main demo transition processing described later. On the other hand, when the special customer waiting flag is turned on, if the special main display mode is in progress, the sub demo start flag is turned on. Thereafter, in the sub demo transition processing described later, the display of the sub demo moving image in the first sub display area SA1 is started. Hereinafter, specific processing of the special purpose migration preparation processing will be described.

  In step S8501, it is determined whether a special customer waiting command from the main MPU 62 has been received. If it is determined in step S8501 that a special customer waiting command has been received (S8501: YES), the process proceeds to step S8502 and the special flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound side RAM 94 Turn on the customer waiting flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8503. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8501 that the special customer waiting command is not received (S8501: NO), the process proceeds to step S8503 without executing step S8502.

  In step S8503, it is determined whether the special mode 1 standby state flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 is ON. If it is determined in step S8503 that the special-purpose standby state flag is not ON (S8503: NO), the process proceeds to step S8504, and it is determined whether the special-purpose customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8504 that the special customer waiting flag is not ON (S8504: NO), the special transfer preparation process for special purpose 1 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8504 that the special customer waiting flag is ON (S8504: YES), the process proceeds to step S8505.

  In step S8505, it is determined whether the special main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8505 that the special main display flag is not ON (S8505: NO), the flow advances to step S8506 to turn on the special standby status flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8507 to execute the special mode 1 standby state time setting process. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 se) is set to the special-purpose standby state timer counter Tw1 stored in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. The special mode standby state timer counter Tw1 is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the special mode 1 standby state flag is turned on, and is decremented by 1 every 2 msec, that is, every time the timer interrupt process is activated. Ru. After executing step S8507, the process advances to step S8508 to turn off the special customer waiting flag. Thereafter, the transition preparation process for the special purpose 1 ends.

  If it is determined in step S8505 that the special main display flag is ON (S8505: YES), the flow advances to step S8509 to set the sub demo start flag ON. As a result, the sub demo moving image is started to be displayed in the first sub display area SA1 by executing the sub demo transition processing described later. After executing step S8509, the process advances to step S8510 to turn off the special customer waiting flag. Thereafter, the transition preparation process for the special purpose 1 ends.

  If it is determined in step S8503 that the special mode 1 standby state flag is ON (S8503: YES), the process advances to step S8511 to determine whether the special mode 1 standby state period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the standby state timer counter Tw1 for Special 1 is 0, and if the value of the standby state timer counter Tw1 for Special 1 is 0, the standby state for Special 1 for 15 seconds is determined. It is determined that the period has ended. If it is determined in step S8511 that the special mode 1 standby state period has not ended (S8511: NO), the special mode 1 transition preparation process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8511 that the special-purpose standby state period has ended (S8511: YES), the process proceeds to step S8512 and the volume reduction flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound side RAM 94 Turn on. As a result, the main demo transfer process described later is executed, whereby the process of reducing the volume of the sound output from the speaker 46 is started. After executing step S8512, the process advances to step S8513 to turn off the special mode 1 standby state flag. Thereafter, the transition preparation process for the special purpose 1 ends.

<Special purpose transition preparation process>
Next, the transition preparation process for special purpose 2 will be described. The transition preparation process for the special purpose 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine for the process for standby (FIG. 158: S8402).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart of the special purpose transition preparation process. In the special purpose transition preparation process, when the special purpose customer wait command is received, the special purpose customer wait flag is set to ON. When the special customer waiting flag is turned on, if the special main display mode is in progress, the system shifts to a special standby state for 15 seconds. Then, when the special second standby state for 15 seconds is ended, the volume reduction flag is turned ON, and the reduction processing of the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. Thereafter, when the volume becomes zero, the display of the demonstration video (main demonstration video) is started in the main display area MA in the main demo transition processing described later. On the other hand, when the special customer waiting flag is turned on, the sub demo start flag is turned on when the special display mode is being executed. Thereafter, in the sub demo transition processing described later, the display of the sub demo moving image in the first sub display area SA1 is started. Hereinafter, specific processing of the transition preparation processing for special purpose 2 will be described.

  In step S8601, it is determined whether a special guest waiting command for special guest 2 has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8601 that the special guest request waiting command is received (S8601: YES), the process proceeds to step S8602, and the special flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound side RAM 94 is used. Turn on the customer waiting flag. Then, it progresses to step S8603. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8601 that the special guest request waiting command has not been received (S8601: NO), the process proceeds to step S8603 without executing step S8602.

  In step S8603, it is determined whether the special mode 2 standby state flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 is ON. If it is determined in step S8603 that the special 2 waiting state flag is not ON (S8603: NO), the process proceeds to step S8604, and it is determined whether the special customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8604 that the special customer waiting flag is not ON (S8604: NO), the special transfer preparation process for special 2 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8604 that the special customer waiting flag is ON (S8604: YES), the process proceeds to step S8605.

  In step S8605, it is determined whether the special main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8605 that the special main display flag is ON (S8605: YES), the process proceeds to step S8606, and the special standby status flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8607 to execute the special mode 2 standby state time setting process. Specifically, “7500” (that is, 15.0 se) is set to the special-purpose standby state timer counter Tw2 stored in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94. The special wait state timer counter Tw2 is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the special wait state flag is turned on, and is decremented by one every 2 msec period each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Ru. After executing step S8607, the process advances to step S8608 to turn off the special customer waiting flag. Thereafter, the transition preparation process for this Special 2 ends.

  If it is determined in step S8605 that the special main display flag is not ON (S8605: NO), the flow advances to step S8609 to set the sub demo start flag ON. As a result, the sub demo moving image is started to be displayed in the first sub display area SA1 by executing the sub demo transition processing described later. After executing step S8609, the process advances to step S8610 to turn off the special customer wait flag. Thereafter, the transition preparation process for this Special 2 ends.

  If it is determined in step S8603 that the special 2 standby state flag is ON (S8603: YES), the flow advances to step S8611 to determine whether the special 2 standby state period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw2 for Special 2 is 0, and if the value of the standby state timer counter Tw2 for Special 2 is 0, the standby state for Special 2 for 15 seconds is determined. It is determined that the period has ended. If it is determined in step S8611 that the special-purpose standby state period has not ended (S8611: NO), the special-purpose transition preparation process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8611 that the special-purpose standby state period has ended (S8611: YES), the process proceeds to step S8612 and the volume reduction flag stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound side RAM 94 Turn on. As a result, the main demo transfer process described later is executed, whereby the process of reducing the volume of the sound output from the speaker 46 is started. After executing step S8612, the process advances to step S8613 to turn off the special 2 standby state flag. Thereafter, the transition preparation process for this Special 2 ends.

<Demo transition process for main>
Next, the main demo migration process will be described. The demo transition process for main is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine for standby process (FIG. 158: S8403). Hereinafter, the main demonstration moving image displayed in the main display area MA will be simply referred to as a demonstration moving image.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart of the main demo transition process. In step S8701, it is determined whether the RTC rendering in-progress flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8701 that the RTC rendering in progress flag is ON (S8701: YES), the main demo transition processing is ended. That is, while the RTC effect is being executed, the system is configured not to shift to a mode of displaying a demonstration moving image on the main display area MA. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8701 that the RTC rendering in-progress flag is not ON (S8701: NO), the process proceeds to step S8702, and it is determined whether the main return flag is ON. The main return flag is a flag that is turned on when the special purpose variable command or the special purpose variable command is received in the return processing described later. If it is determined in step S8702 that the main return flag is not ON (S8702: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8703.

  In step S8703, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8703 that the demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S8703: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8704. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8703 that the demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S8703: YES), the main demo transition processing is finished.

  In step S8704, it is determined whether the demonstration video start waiting flag is ON. The demonstration moving image start waiting flag is a flag for specifying in the sound emission control device 90 that it is a period of waiting for the start of the demonstration moving image, and is turned on at the timing when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. It is a flag that is turned off at the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the sound output level (volume) became zero. If it is determined in step S8704 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S8704: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8705.

  In step S8705, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8705 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S8705: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8706. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8705 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S8705: NO), the main demo transition processing is finished.

  In step S8706, processing is performed to reduce the output level (volume) of the sound. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the output level (sound volume) of the sound is set to 3000 levels, and processing for lowering the output level of the sound by one level is executed. In the present embodiment, since the main demo transition process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, the output level (sound volume) of the audio becomes zero from the maximum value in about 6 seconds. After executing step S8706, the process proceeds to step S8707.

  In step S8707, it is determined whether the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S8707 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S8707: YES), the process proceeds to step S8708, the volume reduction flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S8709 to wait for the demonstration video start Turn on the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8710. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8707 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S8707: NO), the main demo transition process is ended.

  In step S8710, a demonstration video start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, “2500” (ie, 5.0 sec) is set in the demonstration moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94 b. The demo moving image start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the audio output level (volume) becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every 2 msec, that is, every time the timer interrupt processing is activated. Ru. After executing step S8710, the main demo migration process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S8704 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON (S8704: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8711.

  In step S8711, it is determined whether the 5-second demonstration video start waiting period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, and if the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, the 5-second demo video start waiting period ends It is determined that If it is determined in step S8711 that the demonstration moving image start waiting period has ended, the process proceeds to step S8712. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8711 that the demonstration moving image start waiting period has not ended, the main demo transition process is ended.

  In step S8712, output stop processing of background music is executed. Thereafter, the process advances to step S8713 to transmit a demonstration video start command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S8713, the process proceeds to step S8714.

  In step S8714, the demonstration video start waiting flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S8715, and the demonstration video display flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8716, the cue determination flag is set to ON, and the main demo transition process is finished.

  If it is determined in step S8702 that the main return flag is ON (S8702: YES), the flow advances to step S8717 to determine whether the quick start determination flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8717 that the quick start determination flag is not ON (S8717: NO), the process proceeds to step S8718 to restore the sound output level (volume) to a value preset by the player. In the present embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the sound output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S8718, the process proceeds to step S8719.

  In step S8719, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8719 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S8719: YES), the process proceeds to step S8720, and the volume reduction flag is set to OFF. Then, it progresses to step S8721. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8719 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S8719: NO), the process proceeds to step S8721 without executing step S8720.

  In step S8721, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8721 that the demonstration video start wait is ON (S8721: YES), the process advances to step S8722 to turn off the demonstration video start wait flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8723 to turn off the main return flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8721 that the demonstration moving image start waiting flag is not ON (S8721: NO), the process proceeds to step S8723 without executing step S8722, and the main return flag is turned OFF. After executing step S8723, the main demo transition process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S8717 that the quick start determination flag is ON (S8717: YES), the process advances to step S8724 to transmit a demonstration moving image end command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the demo video end command executes processing for ending the display of the demo video. After executing step S8724, the process advances to step S8725 to turn off the demonstration moving image display flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8726.

  In step S8726, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporally leading position. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8727.

  In step S8727, the voice output level (volume) is returned to the value preset by the player. In the present embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the sound output level (volume) is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S8727, the process proceeds to step S8728.

  In step S8728, output start processing of background music is executed. Specifically, since the cue-up determination flag is ON, the output is started from the temporally leading position of the background music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8729 to turn off the quick start determination flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8730, the main return flag is set to OFF, and the main demo transition process is finished.

<Sub demo transition process>
Next, the sub demo migration process will be described. The sub demo transfer processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine for standby processing (FIG. 158: S8404).

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart of the sub demo transition process. In step S8801, it is determined whether the sub return flag is ON. The sub recovery flag is a flag that is turned ON when the special 1 variation command or the special 2 variation command is received in a recovery process described later. If it is determined in step S8801 that the sub return flag is not ON (S8801: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8802.

  In step S8802, it is determined whether the sub demo moving image display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8802 that the sub demo moving image display flag is not ON (S8802: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8802 that the sub demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S8802: YES), this sub demonstration transfer processing is ended.

  In step S8803, it is determined whether the sub demo start flag is ON. The sub demo start flag is a flag that is turned ON in the special purpose transition preparation process (FIG. 159) or the special purpose transition preparation process (FIG. 160) described above. If it is determined in step S8803 that the sub demo start flag is ON (S8803: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8803 that the sub demo start flag is not ON (S8803: NO), this sub demo transition processing is ended.

  In step S8804, a sub demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 receives the sub demo moving image start command, and starts processing for displaying the sub demo moving image on the first sub display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step S8804, the process proceeds to step S8805.

  In step S8805, the sub demo start flag is set to OFF, and the process proceeds to step S8806, and the sub demo moving image display flag is set to ON. Thereafter, this sub demo migration processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S8801 that the sub return flag is ON (S8801: YES), the flow advances to step S8807 to transmit a sub demo moving image end command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 receives the sub demo video end command, and executes processing for ending the display of the sub demo video. After executing step S8807, the process advances to step S8808 to turn off the sub demo moving image display flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8809, the sub recovery flag is set to ON, and the sub demo transfer processing is ended.

<Return processing>
Next, return processing will be described. The return processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine for standby processing (FIG. 158: S8405).

  FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing return processing. In step S8901, it is determined whether the special purpose variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S8901 that the special purpose variation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S8901: NO), the process proceeds to step S8911 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8901 that the special purpose variation command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S8901: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8902.

  In step S8902, it is determined whether the special main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8902 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8902: NO), the process proceeds to step S8903 and either the special customer waiting flag or the special 1 standby state flag is ON. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S8903 that either the special guest waiting flag or the special standby flag is ON (S8903: YES), the process proceeds to step S8904, and the special customer waiting flag or special 1 is selected. The flag which is ON among the standby state flags is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8903 that neither the special customer waiting flag nor the special standby flag is on (S8903: NO), the process proceeds to step S8905 without executing step S8904. .

  In step S8905, it is determined whether any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8905 that one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON (S8905: YES), the process proceeds to step S8906 to turn off the main return flag. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8905 that the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag are not all ON (S8905: NO), step S8911 is not performed, and step S8911 is performed. Go to

  If it is determined in step S8902 that the special main display flag is ON (S8902: YES), the process proceeds to step S8907, and whether or not any special customer wait flag or sub demo start flag is ON. Determine If it is determined in step S8907 that either the special customer waiting flag or the sub demonstration start flag is ON (S8907: YES), the process proceeds to step S8908, and the special customer waiting flag or the sub demonstration start flag is selected. , The flag which is ON is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8909. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8907 that neither the special customer waiting flag nor the sub demonstration start flag is ON (S8907: NO), the process proceeds to step S8909 without executing step S8908.

  In step S8909, it is determined whether the sub demo moving image display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8909 that the sub demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S8909: YES), the flow advances to step S8910 to set the sub recovery flag ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8911. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8909 that the sub demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S8909: NO), the process proceeds to step S8911 without executing step S8910.

In step S 8911, it is determined whether a special-purpose fluctuation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S 8911 that the special-purpose fluctuation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S 8911: NO), this return processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8911 that the special-purpose fluctuation command is received from the main MPU 62 (S8911: YES), the process proceeds to step S8912.

  In step S8912, it is determined whether the special main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S 8912 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S 8912: YES), the process proceeds to step S 8913 and either the special customer waiting flag or the special 2 standby state flag is ON. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S8913 that either the special guest waiting flag or the special standby flag is ON (S8913: YES), the process proceeds to step S8914, and the special customer waiting flag or special 2 is selected. The flag which is ON among the standby state flags is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8915. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8913 that neither the special guest waiting flag nor the special standby flag is on (S8913: NO), the process proceeds to step S8915 without executing step S8914. .

  In step S8915, it is determined whether any one of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8915 that any of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration video start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON (S8915: YES), the process proceeds to step S8916 to turn off the main return flag. . Thereafter, the present return processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8915 that none of the volume reduction flag, the demonstration moving image start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S8915: NO), the process returns to step S8916. End the process.

  If it is determined in step S 8912 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S 8912: NO), the process proceeds to step S 8917, and whether or not any special 2 customer waiting flag or sub demo start flag is ON Determine If it is determined in step S8917 that either the special customer waiting flag or the sub demonstration start flag is ON (S8917: YES), the process proceeds to step S8918, and the special customer waiting flag or the sub demonstration start flag is selected. , The flag which is ON is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8919. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8917 that neither the special customer waiting flag nor the sub demonstration start flag is ON (S8917: NO), the process proceeds to step S8919 without executing step S8918.

  In step S8919, it is determined whether the sub demo moving image display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8919 that the sub demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S8919: YES), the flow advances to step S8910 to set the sub recovery flag ON. Thereafter, the present return processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8919 that the sub demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S8919: NO), the present return processing is ended without executing step S8910.

<RTC production process>
Next, the process for the RTC effect will be described. The process for the RTC effect is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8006).

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart of an RTC rendering process. In step S 9001, it is determined whether the RTC rendering in-progress flag is ON. The RTC effect-in-progress flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S9001 that the RTC in-progress flag is not ON (S9001: NO), the process proceeds to step S9002, and the time information output from the RTC 96 is read. Then, it progresses to step S9003.

  In step S9003, it is determined whether the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start execution of the RTC effect. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information matches with 00 minutes every hour. If it is determined in step S9003 that the read time information does not coincide with the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S9003: NO), the process for this RTC effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9003 that the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start execution of the RTC effect (S9003: YES), the process proceeds to step S9004.

  In step S9004, an RTC rendering time setting process is executed. Specifically, “150000” (ie, 5.0 min) is set to the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94 b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring an elapsed time after the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 every 2 msec, that is, each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After executing step S9004, the process proceeds to step S9005.

  In step S9005, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the RTC effect moving image start command starts processing for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S9005, the process proceeds to step S9006.

  In step S9006, an output start process of RTC effect music is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal top position of the RTC effect music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped, and the output is started from the temporal top position of the RTC effect music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9007, and the RTC rendering in progress flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9008.

  In step S9008, it is determined whether or not one of the volume reduction flag, the video animation start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display in progress flag is ON. The situation in which any of the volume reduction flag, the video animation start waiting flag, and the demonstration movie display flag is ON means that the audio output level (volume) is reduced. If it is determined in step S9008 that one of the sound volume reduction flag, the video animation start wait flag, and the demonstration video display flag is ON (S9008: YES), the process proceeds to step S9009.

  In step S9009, the output level (volume) of the reduced sound is restored to a value preset by the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9010, and the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect is set to ON. The demonstration moving picture start flag after the RTC effect is a flag for starting the demonstration moving image after the end of the RTC effect. After step S9010 is executed, the process proceeds to step S9011, and among the sound volume reduction flag, the video animation start waiting flag, and the demonstration video display flag, the flag that has been turned ON is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9008 that all of the volume reduction flag, the video animation start waiting flag, and the demonstration moving image display flag are OFF (S9008: NO), the processing from step S9009 to step S9011 is executed. If not, the process proceeds to step S9012.

  In step S9012, it is determined whether the main return flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9012 that the main return flag is ON (S9012: YES), the flow advances to step S9013 to turn off the demonstration moving image start flag after RTC effect, and the flow advances to step S9014 and the main return flag Turn it off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9012 that the main return flag is not ON (S9012: NO), the processing for this RTC effect is ended without executing the processing in steps S9013 and S9014.

  If it is determined in step S9001 that the RTC rendering in progress flag is ON (S9001: YES), that is, if the RTC rendering is being performed, the process proceeds to step S9015.

  In step S9015, it is determined whether it is time to finish the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S9003 is zero. If it is determined in step S9015 that it is time to finish the RTC effect (S9015: YES), the process proceeds to step S9016, and the process proceeds to a process when the RTC effect ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9015 that it is not the timing to end the RTC effect (S9015: NO), the process proceeds from step S9008 to step S9014 described above. The reason for this is that the volume reduction flag and the main return flag may be turned on even during the period when the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S9008 to step S9014.

  In step S9016, the RTC rendering in progress flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9017 to execute output stop processing of RTC effect music. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9018.

  In step S9018, it is determined whether the demonstration moving image start flag after RTC effect is ON. If it is determined in step S9018 that the demo moving image start flag after the RTC effect is not ON (S9018: NO), the process advances to step S9019 to transmit a background moving image start command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts processing for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporally leading position. Thereafter, the process advances to step S9020 to execute background music output start processing. Specifically, the output is started from the temporally leading position of the background music. Thereafter, the processing for this RTC effect is ended.

  If it is determined in step S9018 that the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect is ON (S9018: YES), the process advances to step S9021 to transmit a demonstration moving image start command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received the demonstration moving image start command starts processing for displaying the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporally leading position. Thereafter, the process advances to step S9022 to turn off the demonstration moving image display flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9023.

  In step S9023, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. In the present embodiment, the music to be output along with the demonstration video is not set. After executing step S9023, the process advances to step S9024 to turn on the quick start determination flag. By this process, it is possible to turn on the quick start determination flag while the demonstration video is being displayed. After executing step S9024, the process advances to step S9025 to turn off the demonstration moving image start flag after the RTC effect. Thereafter, the processing for this RTC effect is ended.

<Result display process>
Next, the result display process will be described. The result display process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8007).

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing a result display process. In step S9101, a tabulation process for result display is executed. The result display tabulation process calculates the information necessary for displaying a result image based on a prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 60 or a command indicating the number of times a jackpot has been won during the high probability mode. Do. After executing step S9101, the process proceeds to step S9102.

  In step S9102, it is determined whether a final specified game number end command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S9102 that the final specified game times end command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S9102: YES), the process advances to step S9103 to transmit a result display start command to the display control apparatus 100. The display control device 100 that has received the result display start command executes a process for displaying the result image on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the present result display process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9102 that the final specified game times end command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S9102: NO), the present result display process is ended without executing step S9103.

<Various Processes Executed in Display Control Device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly performed from the main processing repeatedly executed until the power is shut off after the power is turned on and the processing when the command is received from the sound emission control device 90 There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio light emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S9201, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and processing of clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Then, it progresses to step S9202.

  In step S9202, interrupt permission setting is performed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing thereafter executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S9301, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing performed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the VDP 105 draws the image and Execute the instructions on the display.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds for which drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the drawing processing or the display processing of the image is not finished, so the drawing of a new image is started or displayed while drawing the image. It is possible to suppress the development of the image accompanying the new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the middle is stored. The details of the process of each step of the V interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S9401, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 167), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a rendering command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the rendering mode specified by the rendering command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If a rendering operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the rendering operation Control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S9401), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. The command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt process is executed, and therefore, there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the effects such as the notice effect set by the sound emission control device 90 and the liquid crystal design, etc. The drawing of an image can be controlled to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S9402, display setting processing is performed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S9401) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the symbol display device 41 . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9403.

  In step S9403, task processing is performed. In task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S9402), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle and the like are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9404.

  In step S9404, a drawing process is performed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S9403) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 performs drawing processing of an image based on these pieces of information, and also causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing, together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S9405 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

K8. effect:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special guest waiting command is the presence or absence of the holding game times of the first starting opening game times (whether or not the first start holding number RaN is 0) The special guest wait command is transmitted on the basis of the presence or absence of the holding game times of the second starting opening game times (whether or not the second start holding number RbN is 0). Then, the symbol display device 41 switches between the mode for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demonstration video based on the special guest waiting command, and based on the transmitted special wait customer command. The mode for displaying the second liquid crystal design and the mode for displaying the demonstration video are switched.

  Therefore, when the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed in different display areas of the symbol display device 41, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and the second display symbol is displayed. The switching is performed independently of the presence or absence of the holding game times for the second starting opening game (the second start holding number RbN is 0 or not), the presence or absence of the holding time for the first starting opening game times ( It can be performed based on whether or not the first start reservation number RaN is 0), and switching between the mode for displaying the second liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demonstration moving image can be made for the first starting opening game round Whether or not there is a hold game time for the second start opening game time (whether or not the second start hold number RbN is 0 or not) in a manner independent of the presence or absence of the hold game time (whether or not the first start hold number RaN is 0). Can be based on

  Therefore, the symbol display device 41 switches between the mode of displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image, the mode of displaying the second liquid crystal symbol and switching of the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image Switching between the mode for displaying the second liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demonstration video, which can be performed in an independent mode, is switched between the mode for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demonstration video Can be performed in an independent manner.

  As a result, a configuration having a correlation with the game time corresponding to the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 (second sub-display area SA2) about the transition of the display state of the main display area MA, or the first sub The transition of the display state of the display area SA1 (second sub-display area SA2) is displayed in each display area in comparison with the configuration having a correlation with the game time corresponding to the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA. It is possible to clearly show information to the player regarding the presence (presence or absence of a hold game turn) of a game turn (a game turn for the first start opening or a game turn for the second start opening) corresponding to the liquid crystal display symbol being played. it can. That is, when the game run is being executed, the player has executed any game run for the first start opening game run or the second start opening game run, and any game run is being executed. It can be easily grasped.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can shift the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 to different display states independently of each other. Thus, independent display control can be easily performed on the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state has transitioned, that is, when transitioning from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, or when transitioning from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode Since the display area for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed on a display area different from that before the transition of the gaming state, it is easily recognized to the player that the state of the gaming has transitioned. It can be done.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state is shifted, two liquid crystal symbols of the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting opening game turn and the second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting opening game rotation are displayed. Since the display area is switched between the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 (second sub-display area SA2), for example, the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are changed to roles in gaming. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, for example, by making the player guess that there has been an event, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variation machine, the player is expected to feel at the same time about the results of the two jackpots of the first starting opening game and the second starting opening game. Can be granted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the variation time in at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specific game time is set to 12 seconds, the final specific game time is started. It is possible to set in advance a control in consideration of fluctuation time of at least two game times to be executed immediately after the last. Specifically, in at least two game times executed immediately after starting the final specified game time, an effect of displaying on the symbol display device 41 a result image which is an effect in which the execution time is set to 10 seconds in advance. Can be performed.

  Further, in the case of the simultaneous variable machine such as the pachinko machine 10, the game period for the first starting opening or the second starting during the period for executing either the first starting opening game period or the second starting opening game period. Since one of the other game games for mouth may be executed, even if the variation time in at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time is set to 12 seconds, The time from the start of the game cycle started earlier to the end of the game cycle started later in the two game times may be shorter than the total time of two game cycles in which the fluctuation time is a predetermined time. is there. However, as the time from the start of the game cycle started earlier to the end of the game cycle started later in the two game times, secure at least one game cycle with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds. It is possible. That is, as the time from the start to the end of the two game times, it is possible to secure at least one game cycle having a fluctuation time of 12 seconds at least, and preset control in consideration of the secured time be able to. In the present embodiment, an effect of displaying a result image can be performed using the secured time.

  Furthermore, in the case of the simultaneous variable machine, any one of the first starting opening game times or the second starting opening game times, either the first starting opening game times or the second starting opening game times Or may run the other. Therefore, during the period when the predetermined effect is being executed, for example, the first starting slot game round is ended and a new first starting slot game round is started, or the second starting slot game round is ended. A new second starting opening game cycle may be started. As described above, the timing of the start of the game play and the timing of the end of the game play are also referred to as "the game break."

  Here, if “the game round break” occurs during the execution of a predetermined effect, there is a possibility that the player will be given a complicated impression with respect to the effect being executed. In addition, there is a possibility that the player can not concentrate on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in each game time.

  Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an effect for displaying a result image, the fluctuation time of a plurality of game times executed continuously or in parallel is used to execute an effect for displaying a result image. Since the time (12 seconds) longer than the required time (10 seconds) is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in the game times in the period in which the effect image displaying result image is being executed.

  In addition, by setting the variation time to 12 seconds and making the number of game times twice, while suppressing the occurrence of breaks in the game times during a period in which the effect image displaying result image is executed, the result image is displayed. It is possible to minimize the number of game times set to the fluctuation time (12 seconds) longer than the time (10 seconds) required to execute the effect to be displayed.

  Since the effect of displaying the result image is executed as the effect of notifying the information on the benefit given to the player, the player can easily grasp the provided benefit.

  Also, for the player, the information on the provided benefit is information of high interest. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can suppress the occurrence of a break in the game times while the effect of notifying the player of information of high interest is executed.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the result image after the end of the last game cycle in the high probability mode (the game cycle after the probability change has been executed the 120th game cycle). That is, after the display of the guidance display GD1 ends, the result image is displayed. Here, if it is assumed that the result image is displayed before the end of the last game cycle in the high probability mode, the result image is an image that allows the player to recognize that the high probability mode is ended. The person holds the recognition that it is better to change the direction of distributing the game ball from the right side to the left side of the game board 30. However, in this configuration, when the result image is displayed, the guidance display GD1 indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the gaming ball to the right of the gaming board 30 is displayed. Therefore, when the result image and the guidance display GD1 are simultaneously displayed, there is a possibility that the player is given a skeptical feeling. In that respect, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can prevent the player from having a skeptical feeling without the result image being displayed in the high probability mode.

K9. Another aspect of the eleventh embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot effect during display of the result image may be provided as a dedicated effect moving image (hereinafter also referred to as a result-only jackpot effect for results). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the state where the result image is displayed, the game session for the first starting opening corresponding to the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the second sub display area SA2, or The result image to be displayed in the main display area MA when a big hit is won in one of the jackpots for the second starting opening corresponding to the liquid crystal display symbol displayed in the first sub-display area SA1 Is hidden in a time shorter than the display time (10 seconds) of the result image set in advance, and the result dedicated jackpot effect is executed. After recognizing that the high probability mode has ended by displaying the result image, the player recognizes that the jackpot lottery has been won by the result-only jackpot effect. Therefore, unexpectedness can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the eleventh embodiment, although the variation time in two game times executed immediately after starting the final specified game time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time, the two game times In the case of a jackpot in any of the jackpot lottery, the fluctuation time may be set to a specific fluctuation time instead of 12 seconds. For example, it may be configured to display the result image and to change time required to execute the result-dedicated jackpot effect.

<Aspect 2>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, although the variation time in the two game times executed immediately after the start of the final specified game time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time, it is shown in FIG. As shown in the example, when the display of the result image for 10 seconds is completed in the first (first) game cycle of the two game cycles executed immediately after starting the final specific game cycle, the second time The variation time of the game time may not be set to 12 seconds. For example, it can be realized by preparing a flag indicating that display of a result image for 10 seconds is completed, and using the flag as an index to determine application or non-application of the setting of the fluctuation time of 12 seconds. By doing this, unnecessary time can be omitted as execution time of at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time.

<Aspect 3>
Other modes may be adopted as processing for setting the variation time in two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time. Specifically, using the variation pattern table, which is table data in which the game times up to the 122th and the variation time in each game time since the high probability mode was started, was started the final specified game time You may set the fluctuation time in two game times executed immediately after that. In the fluctuation pattern table, 12 seconds are recorded as fluctuation time corresponding to the 121st and 122nd game times (two game times executed immediately after the final specified game time is started), and the 121st time And a command indicating that the fluctuation time corresponding to the game times other than the 122nd game is set by the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation time table. By reading out such a variation pattern table at the start of the high probability mode, and reading out the value or command of the variation time recorded in the variation pattern table, shifting one by one each time the game proceeds. Setting of fluctuation time can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to omit the process of counting the number of times of execution of the game round up to the 122nd time after the high probability mode is started to set the fluctuation time. Therefore, by using the fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the fluctuation time of a specific game time to a specific value.

<Aspect 4>
In the eleventh embodiment, although the variation time in the two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specific game time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time, the game time set to 12 seconds The number is not limited to two and any other number can be applied. When the gaming machine is a simultaneous variation machine as in the eleventh embodiment, the first starting opening game is executed during a period in which either one of the first starting opening game round or the second starting opening game round is executed. Since it is possible to execute either the game time for the second or the second starting opening game time, it is a game time to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time, and the variation time is 12 seconds which is a predetermined time. It is preferable that the number of game times set to be two or more. By doing this, it is possible to execute an effect for which an execution time is set in advance, such as an effect for displaying a result image, within a period in which game times for which the fluctuation time is set in advance are executed. Control for setting an effect can be simplified.

<Aspect 5>
In the eleventh embodiment, the number of game times that can be performed in the high probability mode is set to 120 when shifting to the high probability mode in one type 1 jackpot, but it is not limited to 120 times , And any other number of times may be set.

<Aspect 6>
In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot (type 1 jackpot and type 2 jackpot) is won, the opening / closing control of the large winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 is set in advance to the large winning opening 36a and You may perform based on the program of the open pattern of the V winning opening 48. For example, the large winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 in the 8R type 1 jackpot and 8R type 2 jackpot can be controlled to open and close based on a program set as an open pattern as described below. In the example of the following opening pattern, processing in one () is executed in one round game.

・ [8R type 1 jackpot]: (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → ( V winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (large winning opening: 30 seconds open)
・ [8R type 2 jackpot]: (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (Large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → ( V winning opening: 0.006 seconds open → → (large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (large winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (large winning opening: 30 seconds open)

  In this manner, the opening pattern program in which the winning opening to be opened in each round game and the opening time of the winning opening are set for each round game is read out and executed in the opening / closing execution mode. Opening and closing control of the winning opening 36 a and the V winning opening 48 can be realized.

<Aspect 7>
Since the display of the result image gives the player the recognition that the high probability mode has ended or has ended, various effects can be performed using the result image. For example, when the first type jackpot is won in the high probability mode, a dummy result image is first displayed as one of the effects at the time of the jackpot, and then an execution is performed to notify that the jackpot lottery has been won. Do. Immediately after making the player recognize that the high probability mode has ended by displaying the result image, it is possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won, so that the player can be given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest.

<Aspect 8>
While the result image is displayed, the sound other than the notification sound used to notify that the jackpot lottery has been won may be reduced or may be in the mute state. When the player recognizes the notification sound and the sound for effect produced during the display of the result image, the player has an expectation that the player has won the jackpot lottery immediately. However, if the notification sound or the sound for effect is not a notification sound notifying that a big hit lottery has been won, the feeling of expectation is greatly depressed and the user's motivation for the game is lowered. For example, when a real-time clock (RTC) effect moving image is started and a large sound is output suddenly while a result image is displayed, the player recognizes the sound and simultaneously wins a big hit lottery. I feel a sense of expectation. Thereafter, when it is recognized that the sound is the sound of the RTC effect moving image, the player is greatly disappointed.

  Therefore, during the display of the result image, an unnecessary expectation is given to the player by reducing the sound other than the notification sound used to notify that the winning lottery has been won, or by muting it. Can be suppressed.

<Aspect 9>
As described above, when it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the right of the game board 30, it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the right of the game board 30. If it is advantageous for the player to display the guidance display GD1 indicating the guidance on the symbol display device 41 and distribute the gaming ball on the left side of the gaming board 30, the gaming ball on the left side of the gaming board 30 The symbol display device 41 displays a guidance display GD2 which is a guidance display indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the symbol. That is, it can be said that the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 guide the operation method of the operation handle 25 which is advantageous to the player. Specifically, the content of the guidance in the guidance display GD1 is a content indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball on the right side of the gaming board 30, and the content of the guidance in the guidance display GD2 is The content indicates that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball on the left side of the game board 30.

  Various effects can be performed using the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 having different contents of such guidance. For example, even after the high frequency support mode is finished, the gaming ball which has circulated the gaming ball on the right side of the gaming board 30 immediately before the high frequency support mode is finished enters the second starting opening 34, When the player wins a jackpot or a small jackpot by the jackpot lottery executed by the ball entry, it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball on the right side of the game board 30, and thus the guidance display Continue to display GD2. That is, the control of the display of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 is controlled based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game run.

  The player feels hopeful by recognizing that the guidance display GD2 is continuously displayed despite recognizing that the high frequency support mode has ended. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the player's feeling can be further enhanced since the result is as expected for the player. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit), it is a result contrary to the player's expectation, the player's sense of excitement is descend. As described above, by continuing the display of the guidance display GD2 when it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 even after the high frequency support mode is finished, The player can be made to guess whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a jackpot, and the player can be given a sense of tension. As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 can be used as a suggestion effect that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, as a display mode of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2, a display mode that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery may be adopted. For example, as a display mode of the guidance display GD2, a blue guidance display GD2 and a red guidance display GD2 are used. And, immediately before the high frequency support mode ends, the game ball circulated to the right of the game board 30 enters the second starting opening 34, and the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the ball is a small hit In this case, the frequency (probability) of displaying the blue guidance display GD2 is increased as a display mode of the guidance display GD2 to be displayed continuously after the high frequency support mode is ended. On the other hand, when the game ball circulated to the right of the game board 30 immediately before the high frequency support mode ends is entered into the second starting opening 34, and the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the ball is a jackpot In order to increase the frequency (probability) of displaying the red guidance display GD2 as the display mode of the guidance display GD2 to be displayed continuously after the high-frequency support mode is ended. Thus, by adopting the display mode that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery as the display mode of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 can be used as a suggestion effect that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery It can be used.

  The player not only recognizes the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 as the display for guiding the operation method and the game method of the operation handle 25, but also pays attention to the display continuation period and display mode of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2. It will be. As a result, by using the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2, a sense of expectation and a sense of tension can be given to the player, and new game characteristics can be created. As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 are suggested by the control of the contents of the guidance display, such as whether the guidance display GD1 is displayed or the guidance display GD2 is displayed, and the display form of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2. It becomes possible to use as the effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, as control of the display mode of guidance indication GD1 and guidance indication GD2, various shapes, such as color and shape of guidance indication GD1 and guidance indication GD2, can be controlled.

<Aspect 10>
In the above embodiment, the main display area MA and the first sub-display area SA1 independently perform switching between the display of the liquid crystal design and the display of the demonstration moving image, but other modes are adopted. You may For example, in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1, the transition from the liquid crystal design to the demonstration video is independently performed, and both the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 are demo video In the state where is displayed, when one display area is returned to the display of the liquid crystal design from the display of the demonstration video, the other display area is also restored to the display of the liquid crystal display from the demonstration video display May be adopted.

<Aspect 11>
The behavior in the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the behavior in the opening / closing execution mode, which is executed upon being triggered.

  Specifically, the player is made difficult to distinguish the jackpot effect executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot effect performed when the jackpot is won. Furthermore, the open pattern of the variable winning device 36 of the open / close execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit and the open / close execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a small hit Make the difference difficult for the player to distinguish. For example, the mode of opening the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the first type jackpot is won in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is set to be an aspect of opening the 1.6 seconds twice. Thus, it is difficult to distinguish the first small hit, which is one time of opening of the variable winning device 36 for 1.6 seconds. Furthermore, by shortening the period (opening period) of the opening effect in the opening and closing execution mode (opening period) and the period of the ending effect (ending period) in the opening and closing execution mode to be executed triggered by the first type jackpot The behavior in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big hit lottery became a big hit and the opening / closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big hit lottery became a small hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the behavior.

  By doing this, for example, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the player distributes the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 and enters the game ball into the second starting opening 34. In the state where the game game for the starting mouth is being executed continuously, because the lottery result of the big hit lottery becomes a small hit at a high ratio, even if the lottery result of the big hit lottery is the first type jackpot was won It can be made difficult for the player to recognize things. In the case of winning the first type jackpot, the number of times of execution of game times that can be executed in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode becomes 120 times again, so the game times that can be executed in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode The number is substantially increased. However, the fact that the number of executable times in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode has increased is informed to the player immediately after the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are started and the 120th game round is over. Do. In this case, it is possible to cause the player to be recognized as if the number of times of playable games can be performed in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is increased, and the player can be given unexpectedness.

<Aspect 12>
In the eleventh embodiment, although the result image is configured to end the display 10 seconds after the start of the display, the sound emission control device 90 ends the display of the result image from the main control device 60. When a command (hereinafter, also referred to as a result display end command) is received, the display of the result image may be ended.

  For example, the display of the result image is started after the end of the last specified game cycle (the number of times the game cycle has been executed 120th game cycle) which is the last game cycle to be executed before the high probability mode ends. At the end of the 121st game cycle, the main control device 60 transmits a result display end command to the sound emission control device 90, and the result display is displayed based on the result display end command received by the sound emission control device 90. May be configured to end.

  However, in such a configuration, if the player ends the game at the same time as the end of the last specific game cycle, which is the last game cycle to be executed before the high probability mode ends, However, since the 121st game run is not started and ended, the result image is kept being displayed continuously. In other words, the main control device 60 starts the sound emission control device 90 only when a new player starts playing a game with the gaming machine, and after the probability change, the 121st number of times of game execution is started and the game period ends. The result display end command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90, and the display of the result image is ended based on the result display end command received. Therefore, when a new player starts playing a game with the gaming machine, the symbol display device 41 displays a result image indicating the game result of the previous player, and starts the game. The state of 41 is not preferable.

  Therefore, even when the result display end command is not received, the voice emission control device 90 is configured to end the display of the result image, for example, when transitioning to a state where the demonstration moving image is started. Specifically, when it is determined that the demonstration moving image in progress start flag in the eleventh embodiment is turned on, the display of the result image is ended even when the result display end command is not received. Specific processing will be described below.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a result display process performed by the sound light side MPU in aspect 12 of the eleventh embodiment. The result display process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 154: S8007).

  In step S9501, a result display tabulation process is executed. The result display tabulation process calculates the information necessary for displaying a result image based on a prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 60 or a command indicating the number of times a jackpot has been won during the high probability mode. Do. After executing step S9501, the process proceeds to step S9502.

  In step S9502, it is determined whether a final specified game number end command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S9502 that the final specific game number end command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S9502: YES), the process advances to step S9503 to transmit a result display start command to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the result display start command executes a process for displaying the result image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S9503, the process proceeds to step S9504. In step S9504, the result display flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S9505.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9502 that the final specific game times end command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S9502: NO), the process proceeds to step S9505 without executing step S9503 and step S9504.

  In step S9505, it is determined whether the result display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9505 that the result display flag is ON (S9505: YES), the process proceeds to step S9506. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9505 that the result display flag is not ON (S9505: NO), this result display processing ends.

  In step S9506, it is determined whether a result display end command has been received from main controller 60 or not. In the present aspect, as described above, the result display end command is a command transmitted by the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 when the number of times of game execution after the probability change is 121 ends.

  If it is determined in step S9506 that a result display end command has been received (S9506: YES), the process advances to step S9507 to transmit a result display end command to the display control apparatus 100. That is, a result display end command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 when the number of times of game execution after the probability change is 121 ends. The display control device 100 having received the result display end command ends the display of the result image. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9508.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9506 that a result display end command has not been received (S9506: NO), the process proceeds to step S9509, and it is determined whether the demonstration moving image display flag is ON. The demonstration moving image display flag is a flag which is turned on when the demonstration moving image is started and turned off when the demonstration moving image is ended. When the demonstration moving image display flag is turned on, there is a high possibility that the player of the pachinko machine 10 has stopped the game and left the seat.

  If it is determined in step S9509 that the demonstration moving image display flag is ON (S9509: YES), the process advances to step S9507 to transmit a result display end command to the display control apparatus 100. That is, even when the result display end command is not received, the result display end command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100, and the display of the result image is ended. More specifically, the display of the result image is started after the end of the final specified game cycle (the game cycle after the probability change is the 120th game cycle), which is the last game cycle to be executed before the high probability mode ends. After that, even if the result display end command is not received, the display of the result image is ended if the 121st game times after the probability change is not started and ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9508.

  In step S9508, the result display flag is set to OFF, and then the result display processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S 9509 that the demonstration moving image display flag is not ON (S 9509: NO), the present result display process is ended without executing steps S 9507 and S 9508.

  By executing such processing, for example, when the player leaves the seat simultaneously with the end of the high probability mode, the sound emission control device 90 does not receive a result display end command from the main control device 60. However, the display of the result image can be ended. Therefore, even when the execution of the game is interrupted, it is possible to avoid the event that the display of the result image is maintained. In this aspect, even when the game state is changed from the gaming state in which the game times are executed to the gaming state in which the game times are not executed, the result is triggered by the transition to the game state in which the game times are not executed. A process of ending the display of the image can be executed.

  As a result, even if a new player starts playing a game with the gaming machine and the 121st game cycle is executed after the probability change, the display of the result image on the symbol display device 41 is ended. The game can be executed in the same gaming state as at the normal game start.

L. Twelfth embodiment:
L1. Outline of the twelfth embodiment:
A twelfth embodiment will now be described. The differences between this embodiment and the eleventh embodiment will be described below. The present embodiment differs from the above-described eleventh embodiment in that a right-handed unit 200 described later is provided in the right area of the game area PA of the game board 30.

  In the following description, the configuration of the right-handed unit 200 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the behavior of the gaming ball having reached the right-handed unit 200, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 will be mainly described. . The description of the same configuration and processing as those of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 170 is an explanatory view schematically showing a configuration of a right-handed unit 200 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. In the present embodiment, in the right-handed unit 200, all of the game balls fired with a predetermined strength or more from the game ball firing mechanism 81 are provided with the through gate 35 provided at the upper end of the right-handed unit 200. It is configured to pass. The right-handling unit 200 includes a through gate 35 through which game balls can pass, a distribution mechanism 204 provided downstream of the through gate 35, and a path R1 provided on the left side downstream of the distribution mechanism 204. A path R2 provided centrally in the downstream of the dividing mechanism 204 and a path R3 provided on the right side downstream of the distributing mechanism 204 are provided. A variable ball entry device 36 is provided in the route R1, and an open / close ball entry device 34x including the second starting opening 34 is provided in the route R2. A general winning combination is provided in the route R3. A mouth 32 is provided.

  The sorting mechanism 204 has a function of sorting game balls reached through the through gate 35 into three routes R1 to R3 in order, and in the present embodiment, route R1 → route R2 → route R3 → route The game balls reached are distributed in the order of R1 → path R2 → path R3 → path R1.

  The variable ball entry device 36 is provided with an open / close door 36b as a special motorized symbol that opens and closes back and forth with the lower rotation shaft as a base point, and opens and closes the large winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 where game balls can enter. It is provided inside the door 36b.

  The opening / closing device 34x is provided with an opening / closing door 34a as an ordinary electric combination that opens and closes back and forth with the lower rotation shaft as a base point, and the second start opening 34 capable of entering the game ball inside the opening / closing door 34a Prepare for

  The route R1 is configured such that the gaming ball passed through the through gate 35 and distributed to the route R1 reaches the variable ball entry device 36 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35 If the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is in the open state at the timing when the gaming ball has arrived, the gaming ball must surely enter the big winning opening 36a provided inside the opening / closing door 36b. Is configured.

  The route R2 is configured such that the game ball passed through the through gate 35 and distributed to the route R2 reaches the open / close ball entering device 34x 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35 If the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing device 34x is in the open state at the timing when the game ball arrives, the game ball surely enters the second starting opening 34 provided inside the opening / closing door 34a. Is configured as.

  The route R3 is configured such that the game ball passed through the through gate 35 and distributed to the route R3 reaches the general winning opening 32 0.3 seconds after passing the through gate 35, The gaming ball is configured to enter the general winning opening 32 without fail.

  Next, the variation of the symbol (hereinafter also referred to as an ordinary symbol) in the motorized product open lottery and the drawing unit 38 in the present embodiment will be described. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the electric combination opening lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35.

  In the present embodiment, the sum of the variation time and the stop time of the normal symbol in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.5 seconds. Further, the probability of winning the electronic combination release in the electric combination release lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 232/233. That is, in the present embodiment, if the electric combination opening lottery is performed in the high frequency support mode, the electric combination opening is substantially won.

  The opening frequency of the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is set to one, and the open time is 1.8 seconds, when the electric winning combination is elected to open the electronic combination.

  In addition, when the winning combination is elected, the time until the open / close door 34a of the open / close device 34x starts opening after the stop time of the normal symbol elapses (so-called opening time) is set to 0 seconds ing. That is, when the winning combination is won, the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing device 34x starts opening immediately after the stop time of the normal symbol has passed. In addition, the maximum number (opening limit number) in which the game ball can enter the second starting opening 34 during one opening of the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is set to one. That is, the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is closed immediately after one game ball enters the second starting opening 34. In addition, the time (so-called ending time) from when the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is closed to when the next fluctuation of the symbol can be started is set to 0 seconds. That is, when the electric combination opening lottery is held, immediately after the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is closed, the next fluctuation of the normal symbol starts.

  Next, the jackpot lottery in the present embodiment and the variation of the symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) in the special drawing unit 37 will be described. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 as a trigger. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, all become 2R type 1 jackpots. In the 2R type 1 jackpot, the number of opening of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is two (two rounds), and the jackpot enables the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48 It is. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode ends becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, the sum of the variation time of the special symbol and the stop time in the high probability mode is set to 0.6 seconds. Further, the probability of winning a small hit when the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 during the high probability mode is executed is set at 74/75. In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot (2R type 1 jackpot) is set to 1/75 when a jackpot lottery based on the entry of gaming balls into the second starting hole 34 is executed during the high probability mode ing. That is, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is executed during the high probability mode, either small jack or jackpot (2R type 1 jackpot) is substantially made. I will be elected.

  Further, the number of times of opening / closing the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 when the player wins a small hit in the big hit lottery is set to one, and the open time is set to 1.0 second. In addition, the opening number of the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 in the case of winning the big hit (2R type 1 big hit) in the big hit lottery is two times, the first opening time is 0.2 seconds, the second opening time The interval between the first opening and the second opening is set to 0.2 seconds. In addition, only when the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is opened in response to the first class big hit, the distribution piece provided inside the variable ball entry device 36 operates, and the ball enters the variable ball entry device 36 The game ball that has been played will enter the V winning hole 48. On the other hand, when the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is opened in response to a small hit, the split pieces provided inside the variable ball entry device 36 do not operate, and the ball enters the variable ball inlet 36 The game ball that has been played will enter the big winning opening 36a.

  In the case of winning a small hit or a big hit, the time (so-called opening time) from when the stop time of the special symbol elapses to when the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 starts opening is set to 0 seconds It is done. That is, when the small hit or the big hit is won, the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 starts opening immediately after the stop time of the special symbol has passed. Also, the maximum number of game balls allowed to enter the large winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48 during one opening of the open / close door 36b of the variable insertion device 36 (the open limit number) is set to one. There is. That is, the open / close door 36b of the variable entry device 36 is closed immediately after one game ball enters the large winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48. In addition, the time (so-called ending time) from when the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is closed to when the next change of the special symbol can be started is set to 0 seconds. That is, when the big hit lottery is held, immediately after the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is closed, the next change of the special symbol starts.

  FIG. 171 is a time chart showing the behavior of the gaming ball having reached the right-handed unit 200. In FIG. 171, the point where the downward arrow indicating the game ball intersects with the horizontal axis indicating the through gate means that the game ball indicated by the arrow has reached the through gate or the like indicated by the horizontal axis. Also, the interval between the vertical dashed lines shown in FIG. 171 is 0.1 second.

  In the example shown in FIG. 171, the lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In addition, the gaming balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the gaming ball firing mechanism 81 at a certain firing intensity which can reach the right-handed unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30. ing. Therefore, the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 of the right-handed unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  When the first gaming ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35, the gaming ball PB1 is distributed to the route R1 by the distribution mechanism 204 and 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35, the variable ball entry device 36 To reach. In the example shown in FIG. 171, since the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is in the closed state, the game ball PB1 passes through the big winning opening 36a without passing the ball.

  The second game ball PB2 launched following the game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB1, and is distributed to the route R2 by the distribution mechanism 204 and the through gate 35 0.3 seconds after passing, it reaches the opening and closing ball entering device 34x. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 171, since the electronic combination is elected in the electronic combination open lottery triggered by the first gaming ball PB1 passing through the through gate 35, the open / close ball entering device 34x The opening / closing door 34a starts to open after the variation time and the stop time of the normal symbol end 0.5 seconds after the first gaming ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35. Therefore, at the timing when the second gaming ball PB2 reaches the opening / closing device 34x, the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing device 34x is in the open state, and the gaming ball PB2 is in the second starting opening 34. Enter the ball. In the present embodiment, since the number of open limit in one open of the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is set to one, when the game ball PB2 enters the second starting opening 34, the open / close ball entering The door 34a of the device 34x is in the closed state. Then, with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, one game ball is paid out as a winning ball. The electronic combination open lottery triggered by the second game ball PB2 passing through the through gate 35 is suspended.

  The third game ball PB3 launched following the game ball PB2 passes through the gate 35 after 0.6 seconds of the game ball PB2, and is distributed to the path R3 by the distribution mechanism 204, and the through gate 35 is 0.3 seconds after passing, the general winning hole 32 is entered. Then, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32, three game balls are paid out as winning balls. Note that the electronic combination open lottery triggered by the third game ball PB3 having passed through gate 35 is suspended.

  The fourth game ball PB4 launched following the game ball PB3 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB3, and is distributed to the route R1 by the distribution mechanism 204, and the through gate 35 is The variable ball entering device 36 is reached 0.3 seconds after passing. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 171, since the second game ball PB2 has won a small hit in the big hit lottery triggered by entering the second starting opening 34, the variable ball entering device 36 The opening and closing door 36b starts opening when the variation time and the stop time of the special symbol end 0.6 seconds after the second game ball PB2 enters the second starting opening 34. Therefore, at the timing when the fourth gaming ball PB4 reaches the variable ball entry device 36, the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is in the open state, and the gaming ball PB4 is in the special winning opening 36a. Hit the ball. In the present embodiment, since the number of open limit in one opening of the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 is set to one, when the game ball PB4 enters the big winning opening 36a, the variable ball entry device The 36 open / close door 36b is closed. Then, six game balls are paid out as winning balls, triggered by the entry of the game balls into the large winning opening 36a. The electronic combination open lottery triggered by the passage of the fourth gaming ball PB4 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

  The fifth game ball PB5 launched following the game ball PB4 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB4, and is distributed to the path R2 by the distribution mechanism 204, and the through gate 35 is 0.3 seconds after passing, it reaches the opening and closing ball entering device 34x. Here, the holding combination electronic lottery open lottery (the electronic combination open lottery triggered by the second game ball PB2 passing through the through gate 35), the second game ball PB2 is the second starting opening It starts immediately after the door 34a of the open / close device 34x enters the closed state after entering the ball 34, and in the example shown in FIG. The open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x starts to open 0.5 seconds after the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is closed. And since one open time of the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is set to 1.8 seconds, at the timing when the fifth gaming ball PB5 reaches the open / close ball entering device 34x The open / close door 34a of the ball entry device 34x is in the open state, and the game ball PB5 enters the second starting opening 34. When the game ball PB5 enters the second starting opening 34, the open / close door 34a of the open / close ball entering device 34x is closed. Then, with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger, one game ball is paid out as a winning ball. Note that the electronic combination open lottery triggered by the fifth game ball PB5 having passed through gate 35 is suspended.

  The sixth game ball PB6 launched following the game ball PB5 passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB5, and is distributed to the route R3 by the distribution mechanism 204, and the through gate 35 is 0.3 seconds after passing, the general winning hole 32 is entered. Then, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32, three game balls are paid out as winning balls. Note that the electronic combination open lottery triggered by the sixth game ball PB6 having passed through gate 35 is suspended.

  The behavior of the seventh game ball PB7 launched following the game ball PB6 is the same as that of the game ball PB4 described above, and enters the large winning opening 36a. The eighth and subsequent game balls are repetitions of the ball entry pattern from the game ball PB5 to the game ball PB7 described above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 171, when the jackpot is won (2R type 1 jackpot), the game ball enters the ball during the second opening of the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36. The distribution piece provided inside operates to enter the V winning hole 48.

  According to the right-handed unit 200 configured as described above, all of the game balls fired toward the right-handed unit 200 are in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. However, in order, the second starting opening 34, the general winning opening 32, the large winning opening 36a will be entered. Then, one game ball is paid out as a winning ball based on the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 34, and three game balls are based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32. The game balls are paid out as prize balls, and six game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the game balls into the big winning opening 36a or the V winning port 48. That is, during the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, when the gaming ball is continuously fired toward the right-handed unit 200 with a predetermined firing intensity, the second start is performed. A total of ten game balls will be paid out as prize balls each time a jackpot lottery (game times) based on the entry of the game balls into the mouth 34 is executed once.

  Further, as described in the eleventh embodiment, also in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot lottery (game times) executed in the high probability mode is a prescribed number of times (in this embodiment, without being won by a jackpot) When reaching 120 times), the high probability mode ends. Then, with the end of the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode is also ended. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game ball is paid out as a prize ball to the player by the end of the high probability mode based on the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode is ended. Calculate the remaining number. Then, in the high probability mode, instead of displaying the remaining number of jackpots (game times) which can be executed until the high probability mode is ended, the player is awarded balls until the high probability mode is ended. Display the number of remaining game balls scheduled to be paid out. Hereinafter, the number of remaining game balls scheduled to be paid out to the player as a winning ball before the high probability mode ends is also referred to as the “remaining acquired ball number”.

  FIG. 172 is an explanatory view showing an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the present embodiment, immediately after the high probability mode is started, the remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP suggesting the remaining acquired ball number to the player on the upper left portion of the display surface 41a. Display In the present embodiment, as described above, while the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34 of the right-handling unit 200 and one big hit lottery (game round) is executed, ten gaming balls are executed. Is paid out as a prize ball. Therefore, immediately after the high probability mode is started, the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends is 120 times, so in the 120 jackpot lottery (game times) If the player does not win the jackpot even once, the number of remaining game balls (the number of remaining balls) to be paid out as a prize ball to the player before the high probability mode ends is 1200. . Therefore, “1200” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP immediately after the high probability mode is started. Then, the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is decreased as the remaining number of jackpots (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends is decreased. In the present embodiment, each time the jackpot lottery (game time) is executed once, the number displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is decreased by “10”.

  FIG. 173 is an explanatory view showing a transition of the remaining number of balls acquired when a big hit is won in the big hit lottery in the high probability mode. In FIG. 173, the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) executable until the high probability mode ends, the actual number of remaining acquired balls, and the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP , And an addable remaining ball number that can be added later is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 173, after the high probability mode is started, the player wins a big hit (2R type 1 big hit) at the timing when "950" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, and the high probability mode The number of remaining jackpots (game times) that can be executed by the time the game ends is 120 times again. For this reason, although the actual remaining number of acquired balls is 1200 again, in the present embodiment, “950” is continuously displayed as it is on the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP. Therefore, the actual remaining acquired ball number (1200) is 250 more than the number (950) displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP. That is, it becomes possible to add to the number displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP by this 250 number. In the following, the number obtained by subtracting the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP from the actual remaining acquired ball number is also referred to as “the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added”. In the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is won while displaying the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, the effect that suggests that the player has won the jackpot is not executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the remaining number of jackpots (game times) that can be executed is 120 times again until the high probability mode ends.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 173, the player wins a jackpot (2R type 1 jackpot) at the timing when "170" is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, which can be performed by the time the high probability mode is ended. The remaining number of good jackpot lottery (game times) is 120 times again. For this reason, although the actual number of remaining acquired balls is 1200 again, in the present embodiment, “170” is continuously displayed as it is on the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP. Therefore, the actual remaining acquired ball number (1200) is 1030 more than the number (170) displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP. Therefore, the number of remaining acquisition balls that can be added is 1030.

  In the present embodiment, at the timing when “90” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, the remaining acquired ball number is increased by 500 when the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 500 or more. While displaying the remaining acquisition ball number increase suggestion image CPB that suggests that it is in the central part of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), 500 is displayed in the number (90) displayed in the remaining acquisition ball number suggestion image CP. Add the pieces. Therefore, “590” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 173, at the timing when “90” is first displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 1030, so the remaining acquired ball number is While displaying the remaining acquired sphere number increase suggestion image CPB suggesting 500 increases in the central part of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), the number displayed in the remaining acquired sphere number suggested image CP (90) ) Is added to 500). Therefore, “590” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172 (c)). Then, the number of remaining acquisition balls that can be added is 530.

  After that, at the timing when “90” is displayed again on the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, it is suggested that the remaining acquired ball number has increased by 500 since the number of remaining acquired balls is 530. While displaying the remaining acquired sphere number increase suggestion image CPB at the center of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), add 500 to the number (90) displayed in the remaining acquired sphere number suggested image CP . Therefore, “590” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP (FIG. 172 (c)). Then, the number of remaining winning balls that can be added is 30.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the timing when “0” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, when the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is one or more X, the remaining acquired ball number is While displaying the remaining acquired sphere number increase suggestion image CPB indicating that X has increased by X at the center of the display surface 41a, “X” is displayed on the remaining acquired sphere number suggested image CP. In the example shown in FIG. 173, at the timing when “0” is displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, the remaining acquired ball number is 30 so that the remaining acquired ball number is increased by 30 While displaying the remaining acquired sphere number increase suggestion image CPB that suggests that it has been performed in the central portion of the display surface 41a, “30” is displayed on the remaining acquired sphere number suggested image CP. At this point in time, the number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP will match the actual remaining acquired ball number.

L2. Processing to be performed in the voice emission control device:
<Process for displaying remaining ball number>
Next, an example of processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 to display the number of remaining acquired balls will be described.

  FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing processing for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls executed by the sound light side MPU 92. This remaining acquired ball number display process is executed in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the process for displaying the number of remaining acquired balls is repeatedly performed every 4 msec.

  In step S9601, it is determined whether or not the remaining acquired sphere number display flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 is ON. The remaining acquired sphere number display flag is a flag for determining whether or not the remaining acquired sphere number suggested image CP is being displayed on the symbol display device 41. If it is determined in step S9601 that the remaining acquired ball number display flag is not ON (S9601: NO), the process proceeds to step S9602 to determine whether a high probability mode command has been received.

  If it is determined in step S9602 that the high probability mode command has not been received (S9602: NO), the process for displaying the remaining number of acquired balls is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9602 that the high probability mode command has been received (S9602: YES), the process proceeds to step S9603, and 1200 is set in the counter indicating the actual remaining acquired ball number. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9604, and a command for displaying the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP in which “1200” is indicated as the remaining acquired ball number is transmitted to the display MPU 102. Having received this command, the display MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the remaining acquired sphere number suggested image CP. After executing step S9604, the process proceeds to step S9605, where the flag indicating the remaining number of acquired balls is displayed. After that, the processing for displaying the remaining number of acquired balls is ended.

  If it is determined in step S9601 that the remaining acquired ball number display flag is ON (S9601: YES), the process proceeds to step S9606, and a fluctuation command (special variation fluctuation command or special variation fluctuation command) is received. It is determined whether the If it is determined in step S9606 that a change command has been received (S 9606: YES), the process proceeds to step S 9607 to subtract 10 from the remaining acquired number of balls displayed in the remaining acquired number of spheres suggested image CP. The command is sent to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for subtracting 10 from the remaining acquired number of balls being displayed on the remaining acquired number of spheres suggestion image CP. After executing step S9607, the process advances to step S9608 to subtract 10 from the counter indicating the actual remaining number of balls obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S 9609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9606 that a change command has not been received (S9606: NO), the process proceeds to step S9609 without executing the processing of steps S9607 and S9608.

  In step S 9609, it is determined whether a V winning command has been received. If it is determined in step S 9609 that the V prize winning command has been received (S 9609: YES), the process proceeds to step S 9610, and from “1200”, the remaining acquired ball number displayed in the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP The value obtained by subtracting is set to a counter indicating the number of remaining acquisition balls that can be added. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9611, where 1200 is set in a counter indicating the actual remaining acquired ball number. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9612. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 9609 that the V winning command has not been received (S 9609: NO), the process proceeds to step S 9612 without executing the processing of step S 9610 and step S 9611.

  In step S9612, it is determined whether the remaining acquired number of balls being displayed on the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP is 90 or not. If it is determined in step S9612 that the remaining acquired ball number displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP is 90 (S9612: YES), the process proceeds to step S9613, and the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 500 or more It is determined whether the If it is determined in step S9613 that the number of remaining acquired spheres that can be added is 500 or more (S9613: YES), the process proceeds to step S9614, and a command for displaying acquired sphere number increase suggestion image CPB is displayed on the display MPU 102 Send to Having received this command, the display MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the acquisition ball number increase suggestion image CPB. After step S9614 is executed, the process proceeds to step S9615, and a command for adding 500 to the remaining acquired ball number being displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for adding 500 to the remaining acquired number of balls being displayed on the remaining acquired number of spheres suggestion image CP. After executing step S9615, the process proceeds to step S9616, where 500 is subtracted from the counter indicating the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9617. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9612 that the remaining acquired ball number displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP is not 90 (S9612: NO), and in step S9613, the remaining acquired ball number that can be added is 500. If it is determined that the above is not the case (S9613: NO), the process proceeds to step S9617 without executing the process of steps S9614 to S9616.

  In step S9617, it is determined whether or not the remaining acquired number of balls being displayed on the remaining acquired number-of-balls suggestion image CP is zero. If it is determined in step S9617 that the remaining acquired ball number displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP is 0 (S9617: YES), the process proceeds to step S9618, and is there an available remaining acquired ball number? It is determined whether or not. If it is determined in step S9618 that there is a remaining acquired sphere number that can be added (S9618: YES), the process proceeds to step S9619, and a command for displaying the acquired sphere number increase suggestion image CPB is transmitted to the display MPU 102 . Having received this command, the display MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the acquisition ball number increase suggestion image CPB. After step S9619 is executed, the process proceeds to step S9620, and a command for causing the value of the counter indicating the remaining obtainable ball number to be added to the remaining acquired ball number displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP is displayed It transmits to MPU102. The display MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for adding the value of the counter to the remaining acquired number of balls being displayed on the remaining acquired number of spheres suggestion image CP. After executing step S9620, the process proceeds to step S9621, where 0 is set in a counter indicating the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added. After that, the processing for displaying the remaining number of acquired balls is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9617 that the remaining acquired ball number displayed on the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP is not 0 (S9617: NO), the processing from step S9618 to step S9621 is not performed. The present remaining acquisition ball number display processing ends. If it is determined in step S9618 that there is no remaining obtainable acquisition ball number (S9618: NO), that is, if the value of the counter indicating the available addition acquisition ball number is 0, the processing proceeds to step S9622. The process advances, and a command for terminating the display of the remaining acquired number of spheres suggestion image CP is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for terminating the display of the remaining acquired sphere number suggestion image CP. After executing step S9622, the process proceeds to step S9623 to turn off the flag indicating the remaining number of acquired balls. After that, the processing for displaying the remaining number of acquired balls is ended.

L3. Effects of the twelfth embodiment:
As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP indicating the information corresponding to the remaining acquired ball number is displayed, the game ball which can be acquired before the high probability mode ends. The player can be made aware of the number of Also, for example, in comparison with the configuration that displays the remaining number of big wins that can be performed until the high probability mode ends, the player can see how much expectation can be made for the high probability mode. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the first kind jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 and the remaining acquired ball number increases, the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP Since the remaining acquired ball number indicated by is updated with the remaining acquired ball number that can be added as the upper limit, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of game balls that can be acquired before the high probability mode ends is increased. The player's expectation for the high probability mode can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the remaining number of acquired balls is increased, the remaining acquired number of balls increase suggestion image CPB is displayed, so that the number of game balls that can be acquired before the high probability mode ends is increased. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize the number of players, and to improve the player's expectation for the high probability mode.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the remaining number of acquired balls is different from the timing when it is determined that the remaining acquired number of balls has increased (in this embodiment, the timing when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 48). Since the remaining acquired number of balls shown by the suggested image CP is increased, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game, and at what timing the remaining acquired number of balls shown by the suggested image CP is increased. Can provide the player with a sense of expectation.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since 500 increments are taken as one unit to increase the number of remaining acquired spheres indicated by the remaining acquired sphere number suggestion image CPB, it is possible to improve expectation for one increase. . The unit of increase is not limited to 500, and may be set to any number such as 300 or 1000.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the number of remaining obtainable spheres that can be added is less than 500 which is one unit of increase, it is assumed that the number of remaining acquired spheres indicated by the remaining acquired sphere number suggested image CP is 0. Since the number of less than 500 is added to the remaining acquired number of balls indicated by the remaining acquired number of balls suggestion image CP at the timing when it becomes, the remaining acquired number of spheres indicated by the remaining acquired number of spheres suggested image CP becomes 0 Even if the player's feeling of expectation has decreased, an increase in the remaining number of balls obtained with less than 500 can give a great feeling of expectation.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even when the number of remaining acquired balls is increased, the predetermined period is continuously displayed without increasing the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP. The player can be expected to have an expectation that the actual remaining earned ball count may be greater than the remaining earned ball count indicated by the remaining earned ball count increase indication image CPB, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the high probability mode, when the gaming ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a certain firing intensity that can reach the right-handed unit 200, firing is performed. The number (3) of gaming balls entering the large winning opening 36a (V winning opening 48), the second starting opening 34, and the general winning opening 32 in the number (3) of the played gaming balls is fixed. Since the number of game balls actually paid out before the high probability mode ends, it is possible to match the remaining number of balls obtained.

L4. Another aspect of the twelfth embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the opening pattern of the open / close door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 when the player wins a small hit is the open pattern of the open / close door 36b of the variable inlet device 36 when the 2R type 1 jackpot is won Although the configuration is different, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 in the case of winning a small hit is the same as the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entry device 36 in the case of winning a 2R type 1 jackpot. It is good also as composition. According to such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice that the 2R type 1 jackpot has been won. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of well-being when the remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB is displayed.

<Aspect 2>
When the number of remaining obtainable balls reaches 500 or more, the timing to display the remaining obtained number of balls increasing suggestion image CPB that suggests that the remaining number of balls increased by 500 is determined by lottery It is also good. According to such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB is displayed, so the game in the case where the remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB is displayed People's sense of well-being can be further improved.

<Aspect 3>
In the case where the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP is displayed, for example, the player operates the operation handle 25 to change the firing interval and the firing intensity of the game ball, and the game ball is scheduled to enter the ball If the player does not enter the special winning opening 36a or the general winning opening 32, etc., an effect may be executed to indicate that the gaming ball has not entered as scheduled. For example, an image such as “Miss !!” may be displayed on the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41.

<Aspect 4>
A jackpot type other than the 2R type 1 jackpot may be set as a jackpot type distributed when a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery based on entering the second starting opening 34. For example, a configuration in which a 16R type 1 jackpot is set may be used. If this configuration is adopted, the number of gaming balls to be paid out during the opening / closing execution mode executed with the 16R type 1 jackpot as a trigger is further added to the above-mentioned addable remaining winning ball number. Good.

<Aspect 5>
The number of game balls actually paid out may be displayed in addition to the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP. Also, in addition to or in place of the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP, the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends is also displayed Good. In such a configuration, even if the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed until the high probability mode ends is increased, the predetermined period is the jackpot lottery (game times) being displayed. If the display is continued without increasing the number of remaining times, the remaining number of actual jackpots (game times) that can be executed before the high probability mode ends is displayed to the player. It can give an expectation that it may be more than the number of remaining times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

M. Thirteenth embodiment:
M1. Structure of gaming machine:
A thirteenth embodiment will now be described. Below, the difference between this embodiment and the said embodiment is demonstrated. The present embodiment differs from the above embodiments in that the main MPU 62 is provided with a game history management chip 300 described later. The description of the same configuration and processing as the above embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 175 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a thirteenth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 further includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio light emission control device, a display control device, etc., are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable and a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so as not to be openable. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. An electric decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing at each game play, jackpot win, reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores gaming balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine not shown and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to the game ball emission mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower tray 21 stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 20. At the bottom of the lower tray 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the gaming ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the gaming ball is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

  In front of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a rendering operation button 24 as an operation receiving unit is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball launch by the game ball launch mechanism by pressing operation by the player, and rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided to detect the amount of movement operation based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. The game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 176 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanisms are provided on the back of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function to control the main control of the game and a function to monitor the power supply. The main control substrate is accommodated in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material. The substrate box is configured to leave a trace of opening and closing. For example, a seal is attached to an openable / closable portion, and when the substrate box is opened, characters such as “open” are displayed.

  The second control unit 52 includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a symbol and an image for effect.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a emission control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control to pay out the winning balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shot control device 80 plays the game ball so as to launch a game ball whose strength corresponds to the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Control the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 54, slope connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and gently sloping so that the game balls flow downstream. The tank rails 55 having the above, the case rails 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rails 55, and the supply of gaming balls from the case rails 56 receive a predetermined number of gaming balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the dispensing device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. Between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b, a guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism are guided to the induction rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are implanted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various features such as a windmill are disposed. The nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general winning opening 32 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and a plurality of the game winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as a winning ball. In the present embodiment, three general winning openings 32 a, 32 b and 32 c are provided as the general winning opening 32. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a is also referred to as a first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b as a second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c as a third winning opening 32c.

  The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance where game balls can enter. The first start opening 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as a winning ball, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed.

  The second start port 34 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as winning balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. In addition, the second starting opening 34 is provided with a motorized jack 34a as a normal motorized jack.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the longitudinal direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the motorized accessory 34a. Specifically, when the gaming ball passes through gate 35, main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric combination opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric combination 34a shifts to the open condition in which the electric combination is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting opening 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball having passed the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after the passage. It is possible to enter the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, even if the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the winning balls is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30, and an open / close door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state where the game ball can not enter the large winning opening 36a. When the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot or the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode is a mode in which the open / close process of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter changes from the closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter into After being switched to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as a winning ball.

  In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  In the present embodiment, the game is entered into the first start opening 33, the second start opening 34, the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, the third winning opening 32c, the special winning opening 36a and the out opening 43. The ball is configured to join a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the game board 30, and the discharge passage is provided with a discharge passage detection sensor for detecting the game ball. As described later, in the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls fired on the game board 30 by detecting the game balls by the discharge path detection sensor.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol variably displayed or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a is a display mode until the segment display unit causes the display corresponding to the lottery result to be displayed when a big hit lottery is performed with the game ball entering the first start opening 33 as a trigger. , To display the first symbol variation display or predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the gaming round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as the first starting opening gaming round.

  The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol variably displayed or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The second symbol display portion 37b is a display mode until the segment display unit causes a display corresponding to the lottery result to be displayed when a big hit lottery is performed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger. , The second symbol variation display or predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37 b causes the second symbol display unit 37 b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the gaming round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34 is also referred to as the second starting opening gaming round.

  Here, the time from the start of variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is shown Also called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first fluctuation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variation display of the second symbol to be displayed to the stop display is also referred to as a second variation time.

  The special view unit 37 further includes a first holding display unit 37c and a second holding display unit 37d formed of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

  The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of first start ports 33 to be held according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having entered the first starting opening 33 are held.

  The second hold display unit 37 d displays the number of held second starting ports 34 according to the color and the combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having entered the second starting opening 34 are held.

  The drawing unit 38 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the motor-operated combination open lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the drawing unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to turn on, blink, or display a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light-emitting display. When the motorized combination opening lottery ends, the drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is constituted by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding to it. The round game is opened or closed until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls enter the variable winning device 36. It is a game which continues the open state of the door 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special view unit 37, the common view unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may be constituted by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display control device 100 controls the display content of the symbol display device 41. In addition, the structure of the display apparatus with which the variable display unit 40 is equipped is not limited to the symbol display apparatus 41, For example, you may be comprised by various display apparatuses, such as a plasma display apparatus, an organic electroluminescent display apparatus, or CRT.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, the symbol display device 41 changes the display of the symbol or the predetermined display accordingly. I do. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device 41 changes the display of the symbol or the predetermined display accordingly. Display of. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to performing the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and when the big hit is won. It also displays effects during the open / close execution mode to be transitioned. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 178 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a which is variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. 178 (a) is an explanatory view showing a symbol variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown in FIG. 178 (a), symbols indicating 1 to 8 of the numerals are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, you may employ | adopt the symbol in which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows 1-8 of a number as a symbol by which a variable display is carried out.

  FIG. 178 (b) is an explanatory view showing a display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, on the display surface 41a, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 178 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has periodicity from the top to the bottom or from the bottom A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 178 (b), after variation display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is made, and if the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, the predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the effective line L It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbols of each symbol row The aspect of the variable display of symbols, such as number, can adopt various aspects.

  Here, the gaming round is a unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 to the player It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information every game time. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result per one game cycle. After the segment display is variably displayed on any one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, it is determined in the symbol display device 41 every one game cycle. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game is also referred to as unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by the fluctuation time which is the time from when the fluctuation display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first suspension display area Ds1, the number of suspension based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of hold based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls reserved in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is up to four.

M2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the present description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 179 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around the main control device 60, and includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

  The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by an element having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 temporarily stores various data and the like when the CPU 62x executes the CPU 62x that executes various control programs, the ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, and the program stored in the ROM 63. And a I / O port 62a. The MPU 62 further includes a gaming history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65.

  The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information, which will be described later, based on the entry information of the game ball to the starting opening, the winning opening, and the gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "ball opening"). Do. The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting the gaming history information stored in the gaming history management chip 300 to an inspection machine described later. Details of the gaming history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described later.

  The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have some of the functions of the MPU 62.

  On the input side of the MPU 62, the payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of the stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operation power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, in the present embodiment, the power supply device 85 includes the capacitor 87, and continues power supply to each device for a predetermined period when a power failure occurs or when the power switch is turned off.

  Further, on the input side of the MPU 62, a ball entry detection sensor provided at each ball entry port is connected. Specifically, a large winning opening detection sensor 44a for detecting a gaming ball entering the special winning opening 36a, a first starting opening detection sensor 44b for detecting a gaming ball entering the first starting opening 33, and 2 2nd starting opening detection sensor 44c which detects the game ball which entered the start opening 34, 1st winning a prize opening detection sensor 44d which detects the game ball which entered the 1st winning a prize opening 32a, 2nd winning a prize opening 32b The second winning opening detection sensor 44e for detecting a game ball entering a ball, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f for detecting a game ball entering a third winning hole 32c, and the gaming ball passing through the through gate 35 A through gate detection sensor 44g for detecting and a discharge path detection sensor 44h for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the above-described discharge path are connected. The MPU 62 determines, based on the signals from these detection sensors, whether the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered the starting opening or winning opening, or the gaming ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage. It is judged whether or not it is. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric combination drive 34b for opening and closing the electric combination 34a of the second start port 34, and main display The unit 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36 c such that the open / close door 36 b is opened or closed. Further, when the electric combination is opened as a result of the electric combination release lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric combination drive unit 44b such that the electric combination 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game session, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45 The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, on the transmission side of the MPU 62, a payout control device 70 and an audio emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, MPU 62 of main control board 61 refers to command information storage area 63 f of ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is specified The master ball controller 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball to the player. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the winning balls.

  A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the emission control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on and the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, The game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. Specifically, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14, and the speaker 46. Drive control and control of the display control device 100. In addition, when the rendering operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and the rendering operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game rendering reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100 and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, on the basis of various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence or absence of reach, the contents of reach effect, and the contents of effects to be executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. In the present embodiment, the stop time which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, a unit game play time, which is the time required for one game play, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 180 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment and the configuration of the inspection device 320. Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the CPU 62x, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 will also be referred to as a main MPU 62, a main CPU 62x, a main ROM 63, and a main RAM 64, respectively.

  The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with an award ball number data storage area and an operation execution condition storage area.

In the prize ball number data storage area, the number of game balls (prize ball number data) to be paid out as a prize ball is stored when the game ball enters each ball entry part. In the present embodiment, the following winning ball number data is stored in the winning ball number data storage area.
The number of gaming balls to be paid out as a winning ball when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 (first starting mouth winning ball number P ₁ ): 3
The number of gaming balls to be paid out as a winning ball when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34 (second starting mouth winning ball number P ₂ ): 3
-The number of gaming balls to be paid out as a winning ball when the gaming ball enters the first winning opening 32a (first winning opening winning ball number P _N1 ): 10
-The number of gaming balls to be paid out as a winning ball when the gaming ball enters the second winning opening 32b (second winning opening winning ball number P _N2 ): 10
-The number of gaming balls to be paid out as a winning ball when the gaming ball enters the third winning opening 32c (third winning opening prize ball number P _N3 ): 10
・ Number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball when the game ball enters the large winning opening 36a (big prize opening ball number P _S ): 15

  The main side MPU 62 refers to the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 to play the game ball as a winning ball when the game ball enters each ball entry portion. Determine the number of

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the gaming history management chip 300 can grasp the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the calculation execution condition storage area, calculation execution conditions which are conditions for starting the calculation for the game history management chip 300 to calculate the game history information are stored. In the present embodiment, the fact that the number of gaming balls having passed through the discharge passage reaches 500 is stored as the operation execution condition. The operation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the gaming history management chip 300 can grasp the operation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The game history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various types of game history information based on the ball entry information of the game ball to each entrance and stores the calculated game history information. The game history management chip 300 has a buffer 302 for acquiring the ball entry information of the game ball from each CPU 62 x to the ball entry port, a register 304 for storing the number of game balls entered into each ball entry port, and the main ROM 63. A memory 306 for storing the number-of-balls of winning balls obtained from the game number memory 306, a memory 307 for storing operation executing conditions stored from the main ROM 63, and control of the entire game history management chip 300 The CPU 308 calculates game history information based on the number of game balls entering each ball entrance and the number of prize balls set for each ball slot, triggered by the establishment of operation execution conditions. And a calculation result storage memory 309 for storing the played game history information.

  The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection device 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the gaming history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection device 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

  The inspection machine 320 uses a CPU 321 for executing various control programs, a ROM 324 for recording various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 for temporarily storing various data, and a game history management chip 300. A display unit 328 for displaying the received game history information and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided.

  FIG. 181 is an explanatory view schematically showing the contents of processing in the gaming history management chip 300 and the inspection device 320.

  The buffer 302 is provided between the CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and the register 304, and acquires ball entry information at each ball entrance from the CPU 62x. Specifically, the buffer 302 is provided with a plurality of bits corresponding to each ball entry, and the CPU 62x turns on a bit corresponding to the ball entry determined that the game ball has entered. "). For example, when determining that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 33, the CPU 62x turns on a bit corresponding to the first starting opening 33 of the buffer 302 ("1").

  The buffer 302 is also provided with bits for grasping the game mode when the game ball enters each ball entry hole and the state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as a game state). In this embodiment, a bit for determining whether or not it is in the normal mode (a mode not in the high probability mode, in the high frequency support mode, nor in the open / close execution mode), and in the high probability mode Bit for determining whether or not the high frequency support mode is in use, a bit for determining whether or not the open / close execution mode is in use, and the first pending number is an upper limit A bit for determining whether or not the value is in the period, a bit for determining whether or not the second pending number is in the upper limit value, and the front door frame 14 is open. A bit for determining whether or not there is a bit, and a bit for determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error in which a trouble such as a failure has occurred are provided. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the normal mode is in progress at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33, the bit for determining whether the buffer 302 is in the normal mode is turned on (“1 ").

  The register 304 stores the number of gaming balls entered into each entrance. Specifically, when the register 304 is composed of a plurality of counters corresponding to the respective entrances and it is determined that there is entry information in the bit of the buffer 302 (that is, the bit is ON) 1) is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the bit determined to have the ball entry information. Note that, in the present embodiment, the register 304 is configured by a non-volatile register capable of retaining storage even when the supply of power is cut off.

In the present embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by means of counters corresponding to the respective ball entrances.
・ Number of gaming balls entered in the large winning opening 36a = large winnings entry number N _S
-The number of gaming balls entered in the first starting opening 33 = first starting opening number of balls N ₁
・ Number of game balls entered in the second start opening 34 = second start opening number of balls N ₂
-The number of game balls entered in the first winning opening 32a = the first winning opening entry number N _N1
・ Number of gaming balls entered in the second winning opening 32b = second winning opening entering number N _N2
・ Number of gaming balls entered in the third winning opening 32c = third winning opening entering number N _N3
-The number of game balls that have passed through gate 35 = the number of through gate gates N _G
-The number of gaming balls that have passed through the discharge passage = The number of discharge passage passes N _OUT
As described above, the discharge passage passing number N _OUT matches the number of game balls fired on the game board 30.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of gaming balls entered into each ball entry for each gaming state.
・ Number of gaming balls entered each entrance during normal mode ・ Number of gaming sphere entered each entrance during high probability mode ・ Each entry entered each entrance during high frequency support mode Number of gaming balls ・ Number of gaming balls entering each entrance during opening / closing execution mode ・ Game ball entering the first starting opening 33 during the normal mode and the first reserved number is the upper limit The number of game balls that entered the second starting hole 34 during the normal mode and when the second reserved number is at the upper limit value Number of balls · Number of game balls that entered each ball entrance during an error

  For example, it is determined that the bit corresponding to the first start port 33 of the buffer 302 includes the entry information (the bit is ON), and the information is the bit that determines whether or not the normal mode is in progress. If it is determined that there is a bit (bit is ON), the value of the first starting opening ball number counter, which is a counter for storing the number of balls of the gaming ball entering the first starting port 33, is 1 Is added, and 1 is added to the value of the first start opening ball number counter in the normal mode, which is a counter that stores the ball number of game balls that entered the first start hole 33 during the normal mode Ru.

  The winning ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the content of the winning balls number data stored in the winning balls number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the winning balls number data stored in the main ROM 63.

  The operation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing the operation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. The calculation execution condition is, as described above, a condition for starting the calculation for calculating the game history information. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the calculation for calculating the game history information is set to start every time the number of gaming balls having passed the discharge passage reaches 500. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the CPU 62x transmits the operation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300 and stores the operation execution condition storage memory 307. Therefore, the contents of the operation execution conditions stored in the operation execution condition storage memory 307 become the same as the contents of the operation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63. Note that the number of game balls that have passed or entered other than the discharge passage may be stored as a reference as the operation execution condition, and a number other than 500 may be stored as a reference.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied, and determines that the operation execution condition is satisfied, the memory 306 for storing number-of-balls data storage Various game history information is calculated on the basis of the number-of-balls-in-a-number data stored in and the number of game balls entering each ball entry stored in the register 304. In the present embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following values as the game history information each time the value of the discharge passage passing number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500.

-Feature ratio = Number of game balls paid out as winning balls by the function operation / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls = (N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S ) / (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S )
· Continuous role ratio = Number of gaming balls paid out as winning balls by continuous role operation / Total number of gaming balls paid out as winning balls = (N _S × P _S ) / (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S )
・ Dumping rate (total)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 = (N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S ) / N _OUT

The calculation basis of the above values is as follows.
· Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the prize work = paid out as prize balls by activating the electrically-driven handpiece 34a as a normal motorized hand and the variable winning device 36 as a special-purpose electrically-powered handpiece Number of gaming balls = Number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of the gaming balls into the second starting opening 34 and the large winning opening 36a = N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S
· Number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls by continuous role operation = Number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls by activation of the variable winning device 36 as a special motorized prize = to the large winning opening 36 a The number of game balls paid out as winning balls based on the entry of game balls = N _S × P _S
-The number of gaming balls paid out as the winning balls based on the entry of the gaming balls to the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3
-Total number of game balls paid out as award balls = based on the entry of the game balls to the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34 and the large winning opening 36a The number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls = N N ₁ × P _{N 1} + N N ₂ × P _{N 2} + N _{N 3} × P _{N 3} + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls entered to each ball entry unit counted for each game state.

・ Disbursement ratio (during normal mode)
The number of gaming balls paid out as a winning ball based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 during the normal mode / based on the entering of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 during the normal mode Number of game balls paid out as prize balls + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls to the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c in the normal mode Ball rate (during normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as winning balls in the normal mode / Number of game balls fired on the game board 30 in the normal mode, payout rate (during high frequency support mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls in high frequency support mode / Number of game balls fired on game board 30 in high frequency support mode · BY (during normal mode)
= The number of gaming balls paid out as winning balls based on the entry of gaming balls to the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c in the normal mode + normal mode and the first reserved number is the upper limit value The number of gaming balls paid out as winning balls based on the entry of gaming balls into the first starting opening 33 during the period + the second starting opening during the normal mode and when the second reserved number is the upper limit value Number of gaming balls paid out as winning balls based on entry of gaming balls to 34 / Number of gaming balls fired on gaming board 30 during normal mode · BY _MIN (during normal mode)
The number of gaming balls paid out as a winning ball based on the entry of the gaming balls into the first to third winning openings 32a to 32c in the normal mode / the gaming ball fired to the gaming board 30 in the normal mode Number of front door frame opening ball entry rate = Number of game balls that entered each ball entry slot while front door frame 14 is open / Number of game balls launched to game board 30 · Error ball slot rate The number of game balls entered into each entrance during an error / the number of game balls fired on the game board 30 The above-described game history information is an example, and a configuration for calculating game history information other than these is provided. It may be

  After calculating the various game history information, the CPU 308 stores the calculated various game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the value of each counter of the register 304 to “0”. In the following, various game history information calculated every time 500 game balls are fired to the game board 30 are collectively referred to as "short-term game history information group".

  The calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory for storing the game history information calculated by the CPU 308. In the present embodiment, the memory 309 is configured by a non-volatile memory capable of retaining the storage even if the power supply is cut off. It is done. Information regarding the order in which the short-term gaming history information group is written is also stored in the calculation result storage memory 309, and the CPU 308 calculates it when there is no free area for writing the calculated short-term gaming history information group. The short-term gaming history information group is stored in the area where the short-term gaming history information group having the oldest written order is stored. That is, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in first-out system), and the latest short-term game history information group is always stored It will be in the

  In the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term gaming history information groups calculated each time 500 gaming balls are fired to the gaming board 30. doing. For example, if game balls are fired continuously for 10 hours on one day, 60000 game balls will be fired on one day, so 120 short-term game history information groups are calculated on one day It is stored in the result storage memory 309. Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 can store short-term game history information groups for the last 10 days.

  When the inspection device 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection device 320 transmits, to the gaming history management chip 300, a transmission request command for requesting transmission of gaming history information. When receiving the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 transmits the gaming history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection device 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Thus, the inspection device 320 acquires the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 and causes the display unit 328 to display the acquired game history information.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whenever the number of gaming balls having passed the discharge passage reaches 500, ie, every 500 gaming balls are fired to the gaming board 30, the game such as the prize ratio etc. The history information is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. Then, the calculated game history information is displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection device 320.

M3. Details of the various processes performed in the gaming machine:
Next, each process executed by the MPU 62 (in the present embodiment, the CPU 62x) will be described. The processes of the MPU 62 are roughly classified into a main process activated upon power-on and a timer interrupt process activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 62. In step S9701, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device accompanying power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the initial setting process, a process of transmitting calculation data to the gaming history management chip 300 is executed. Specifically, the game data (the number-of-balls data and execution condition) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300. As described later, the gaming history management chip 300 which has received the calculation data stores the award ball number data and the computation execution condition in the prize ball number storage memory 306 and the computation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively. Sends a setting completion command to the main MPU 62 indicating that the command has been completed. After executing step S9701, the process advances to step S9702.

  In step S9702, it is determined whether a setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S9702 that a setting completion command has been received (S9702: YES), processing proceeds to step S9703 and interrupt permission setting is performed to allow generation of timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9702 that the setting completion command has not been received (S9702: NO), the process of step S9702 is executed again. That is, the process does not proceed to step S9703 until the setting completion command is received, and does not perform the setting of the interruption permission for permitting the generation of the timer interruption process.

  After executing step S9703, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S9704 to S9707. That is, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process as described later, a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. Although this remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S9704 to S9707 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processing of step S9704 to step S9707 is nonperiodic processing that is executed nonperiodically.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S9704, in order to inhibit the generation of timer interrupt processing, interrupt prohibition setting is performed. In the following step S9705, random number initial value updating processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S9706, a variation counter updating processing for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the present numerical value information is read out from the corresponding counter of the main side RAM 64, and the process of adding one to the read out numerical value information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". After that, in step S9707, interrupt permission setting is made to switch from a state where generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state where it is permitted. After the process of step S9707 is performed, the process returns to step S9704, and the processes of steps S9704 to S9707 are repeated.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62 (in the present embodiment, the CPU 62x) will be described.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU 62. The timer interrupt process is activated in a specific cycle (4 msec cycle in the present embodiment).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S9801, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the random number updating process for drawing, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric combination release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the motor combination release counter C4, and the read out numerical information is added by 1 Execute processing to overwrite the counter of the read source. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9802.

  In step S9802, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and the process proceeds to step S9803 to update the fluctuation type counter CS in the fluctuation type counter update process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9804.

  In step S9804, port output processing is performed. In the port output process, when setting of output information is performed in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing an output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special winning opening 36a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable prize drive unit 36c is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, when the information to switch the motorized part 34a of the second start port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the motorized part drive unit 34b is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is If it is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9805.

  In step S9805, a reading process is performed. In the reading process, reading of a signal other than the entering signal is executed, and the read information is stored for use in future processing. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9806.

  In step S9806, the signals received from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and the ball entry detection processing for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. The processing content of the ball entering detection process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9807.

  In step S9807, the ball entry detection information is output to the bit of the buffer 302 of the gaming history management chip 300. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the entrance determined that the game ball has entered the ball in the entrance detection process of step S9806 is turned ON (“1”), and the bit corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Set to ON ("1"). Then, it progresses to step S9808.

  In step S9808, a timer update process is performed to collectively update numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S 9809 to execute output setting processing of a winning ball command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S9810.

  In step S9810, the ball entry processing for the starting port accompanying the ball entry of the gaming ball to the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is executed. The contents of the ball entrance process for the starting opening are the same as those of the above-described embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted. After executing step S9810, the process proceeds to step S9811.

  In step S9811, a ball entering process for through gate accompanying the ball entering (passing) of the gaming ball to through gate 35 is executed. The contents of the ball entry processing for through gates are the same as in the above-described embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted. After executing step S9811, the process proceeds to step S9812.

  In step S9812, game number control processing for controlling the game in each game number is executed. In the game number control process, a jackpot lottery, display control of the first symbol display unit 37a, the second symbol display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The content of the game number control process is the same as that of the above-described embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted. After executing step S9812, the process proceeds to step S9813.

  In step S9813, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The contents of the gaming state transition process are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, and thus the detailed description will be omitted. After executing step S9813, the process proceeds to step S9814.

  In step S9814, a process for electronic combination support for controlling the motorized accessory 34a is executed. In the electric support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is to be in the open state, and when it is determined to be in the open state, the electric combination 34a is driven and controlled. The content of the electronic-support-support process is the same as that of the above-described embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted. After executing step S9814, the process proceeds to step S9815.

  In step S9815, a game ball launch control process is executed. The game ball launch control process is a process executed to launch a game ball to the game area PA when the operation handle 25 is operated by the player. The contents of the game ball emission control process are the same as those of the above-described embodiment, and thus the detailed description is omitted. After executing step S9815, the process proceeds to step S9816.

  In step S9816, the external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the process result of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time. After executing step S9816, the present timer interrupt processing ends.

  Next, the ball entry detection process executed in step S9806 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 183) will be described.

  In the ball entering detection process, a process of confirming the detection result of the ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h is executed, but at the time of the confirmation, the input port 62b of the input / output port 62a of the main MPU 62 is confirmed. Here, prior to the description of the ball entering detection process, the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. And, according to the voltage of each signal, the area where the information of “0” or “1” is stored is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, 0th bit D0-7th bit D7 are provided as the said area.

  Also, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 62b, in order to limit the targets to be input simultaneously to eight types, the group of signals to be input to the input port 62b is determined by the driver IC. Switching is performed through switching control. In the ball entering detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 62 b is set in each of the ball entering detection sensors 44 a to 44 h.

  In the situation where such setting is made, the 0th bit D0 stores the information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the 1st bit D1 is the ball entry signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 44b. Corresponding information is stored, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second starting opening detection sensor 44c, and the third bit D3 is a ball entry signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 44d Corresponding information is stored, the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second winning opening sensor 44e, and the fifth bit D5 is a ball entering signal from the third prize opening sensor 44f. Corresponding information is stored, the sixth bit D6 stores information corresponding to an incoming ball signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and a seventh bit D7 stores the information from the discharge path detection sensor 44h. Information corresponding to a sphere signals are stored.

  In this case, when the passage detection of the game ball is not detected, each of the ball detection sensors 44a to 44h outputs a HI level signal indicating that the ball is not detected as the ball insertion signal, and the passage of the game ball Is detected as an incoming ball signal, and a LOW level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output. However, an inversion circuit is provided on the main control board 151, and the state of the signal is inverted before each detection signal is input to the input port 62b. Then, in the input port 62b, when the LOW level signal is received through the inverting circuit, the information "0" (data 0 or no information) is stored in the corresponding bit, and the HI level signal is received through the inverting circuit. If there is, the information (data 1 or presence information) of “1” is stored in the corresponding bit.

  In other words, in the situation where passage of the game ball is not detected in the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the information of "0" corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and passage of the game ball is detected. In the above situation, "1" information corresponding to the information indicating detection in progress is stored in the corresponding bit.

  Each ball detection sensor 44a to 44h outputs a LOW level signal as a ball input signal while detecting passage of a game ball, and detects HI as a ball input signal while detecting passage of a game ball. It may be configured to output a level signal. In this case, the inverting circuit may be defective.

  FIG. 185 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a ball-entering detection process executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. FIG. 185 (a) is a flowchart showing the ball-in-hole detection processing executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. FIG. 185 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a ball entry determination area used in the ball entry detection process. In the ball entering detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 185A, first, at step S9901, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. 1. Execute processing to shift to the ball entry determination area WA1. The first entry judgment area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 185 (b-1), and stores all the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It has become possible data capacity. In this case, the storage source bit in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bit in the first entry judgment area WA1 are set in advance in one-to-one correspondence, for example, the 0th bit The information of D0 is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first entry judgment area WA1.

  In the following step S9902, weight processing for entering a ball is executed. In the weight processing, the main MPU 62 stands by without performing any processing until a predetermined wait time has elapsed. In the pachinko machine 10, 10 μsec is set as the wait time, however, without inhibiting the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, it is possible to sufficiently achieve the effects described later by setting the wait process. The specific weight time is arbitrary, but it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, and more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

  By the way, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the process of one step. Therefore, even if the process of step S9902 is not set, a forced wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between step S9901 and step S9903. In this regard, in step S9902, not only the minimum time required to execute the process but also an additional wait time is set between the process of step S9901 and the process of step S9903.

  In the following step S9903, processing is performed to shift the information currently stored in the zeroth to seventh bits D0 to D7 to the second entry determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 62. By the way, since the update of the information in the input port 62b is performed at an interval shorter than the time from the completion of step S9901 to the start of step S9903, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 are made in step S9903. The information transferred from may be different from the case of step S9901.

  Similarly to the first entering determination area WA1, the second entering determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 185 (b-2), and the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 are formed. It has a data capacity that can store all of the stored information. In this case, the bit of the storage source in the 0th to seventh bits D0 to D7 and the bit of the storage destination in the second entry judgment area WA2 are determined in advance in one-to-one correspondence, and are further stored. The relationship between the bits and the storage destination bits is the same as in the case of the first entry determination area WA1.

  Thereafter, in step S9904, after the ball entry determination process is executed, the present ball entry detection process is ended. The ball entry determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 186.

  FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the ball entering determination processing executed by the main MPU 62. As shown in FIG. In the ball entering determination process, first, in step S10001, 8 is set in the ball entering determination counter provided in the main RAM 64. In the subsequent step S10002, each piece of information of the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the current entry determination counter in the first entry determination area WA1 and the second entry determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit at the input port 62b.

  In the following step S10003, AND processing of each information grasped in step S10002 is executed, and the result of the AND processing is stored in a register, and in step S10004, the area after first operation WA3 and the area after second operation WA4 Among the above, the AND process result is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information of the result of the AND process is stored in the entering detection process in the previous timer interrupt process. The first post-operation area WA3 and the second post-operation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 185 (b-3) and FIG. 185 (b-4), and are of the first entry judgment area WA1. The data capacity is such that all pieces of information of the AND processing result of each bit and each bit of the second entry determination area WA2 can be stored. In this case, the order of the bits in the first entry determination area WA1 and the second entry determination area WA2 subjected to the AND process, the order of each bit in the first operation area WA3 and the second operation area WA4, and Is uniquely defined.

  Thereafter, in step S10005, in the side after the first operation area WA3 and the second operation after area WA4, information on the result of the AND processing is stored in the ball entry determination processing in the processing of the previous timer interrupt processing. Then, read out the information of the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the current entry judgment counter. Then, in step S10006, an inversion process is performed to invert the read information between "0" and "1".

  Thereafter, in step S10007, AND processing of the information of the AND processing result in step S10003 and the information of the inversion processing result in step S10006 is executed, and in the subsequent step S10008, the result of the AND processing is entry detection start information It is determined whether it is "1" corresponding to If it is determined in step S10008 that the AND processing result is “1”, the process proceeds to step S10009 and subsequent steps.

  In step S10009, it is determined whether the numerical value information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to one of the first starting port 43 and the second starting port 44. If it corresponds to one of the first starting opening 43 and the second starting opening 44, at step S10010, "1" is set to the starting opening ball flag provided in the main side RAM 64, and step S10011 Then, the numerical information of the three-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 64 is incremented by one.

  The start inlet entering flag specifies the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 43 or the second starting opening 44 with the main side MPU 62 and the gaming ball into the first starting opening 43 or the second start opening 44 It is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 62 that the processing corresponding to the entering of the ball and the processing other than the execution of the winning ball is to be executed. Incidentally, since the ball entry detection sensors 44b and 44c are provided in the first start port 43 and the second start port 44, respectively, the ball entry into the first start port 43 and the ball entry into the second start port 44 And may be grasped simultaneously within the range of one processing of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the starting ball entry flag is provided corresponding to the number of the starting openings 43 and 44, and specifically, two are provided. The three-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying, in the main MPU 62, the number of times the three-prize ball command to instruct execution of the three prize balls should be output.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10009, it is determined in step S10012 whether the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it corresponds to the variable winning device 36, in step S10013, "1" is set to the large winning a prize entrance flag provided in the main RAM 64, and in step S10014, it is provided in the main RAM 64 The numerical information of the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by one.

  The special winning entry flag is a process corresponding to the entry of the gaming ball into the variable winning device 36 while specifying the entry of the gaming ball into the variable winning device 36 by the main MPU 62, and is a prize ball It is a flag for specifying that the main side MPU 62 is in a state to execute processing other than the execution. Further, the 15-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the 15-prize ball command to instruct the execution of the 15 prize balls should be outputted by the main MPU 62.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10012, it is determined in step S10015 whether the numerical information of the current entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 35. If it corresponds to the through gate 35, "1" is set to the through passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 in step S10016.

  The through passage flag specifies that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 35 with the main side MPU 62, and the main side is that the processing corresponding to the game ball entering the through gate 35 is to be executed. It is a flag for specifying in MPU62.

  When a negative determination is made in step S10015, the numerical information of the current entry determination counter corresponds to any one of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b, and the third winning opening 32c in step S10017. It is determined whether it is information indicating a bit. In the case of corresponding to any one of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b and the third winning opening 32c, in step S10018, the general winning opening entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 is "1. Is set, and in step S10019, the numerical information of the three-prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 64 is incremented by one.

  The general winning a prize entry flag is a flag for specifying the entry of the game ball to the first winning a prize opening 32a, the second winning a prize opening 32b, or the third winning a prize opening 32c by the main MPU 62. By the way, since the ball entry detection sensors 44d, 44e and 44f are provided in each of the first winning opening 32a, the second winning opening 32b and the third winning opening 32c, entering the first winning opening 32a and the second winning opening 32a The entry into the winning opening 32b and the entry into the third winning opening may be simultaneously grasped within the range of one processing of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to cope with this, the general winning entry ball entry flag is provided corresponding to the number of the general winning openings 32a, 32b, 32c, and specifically, three are provided. The ten-prize ball counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 62 the number of times the three-prize ball command to instruct the execution of the ten prize balls should be output.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10017, this means that the current ball entry corresponds to the discharge passage, so in step SAD20, the discharge passage passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 is “1”. Set The discharge passage passing flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 62 that the gaming ball has passed the discharge passage.

  If a negative determination is made in step S10008, or after processing in any of step S10011, step S10014, step S10016, step S10019, or step S10020 is performed, the process proceeds to step S10021. In step S10021, the ball entry determination counter is decremented by 1, and thereafter it is determined in step S10022 whether or not the ball entry determination counter is "0".

  If the ball entry determination counter is not "0", the processing of step S10002 to step S10020 is executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter updated in step S10021. When the processing in steps S10002 to S10020 is executed for the numerical information set in step S10001, an affirmative determination is made in step S10022, and the present ball entry determination processing is ended.

  Next, the above-mentioned ball entry detection processing (FIG. 185) is executed, whereby the general winning opening 32, the variable winning device 36, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the discharge passage are A state in which the presence or absence of a ball is detected will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 187 is an explanatory view for explaining how the presence or absence of a ball is detected. First, with reference to FIG. 187 (A), the timing of monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as ball entry information) in the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h will be described. FIG. 187 (A) is a timing chart for illustrating the timing of monitoring each piece of ball entry information.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (A), in the configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 183) is activated in a cycle of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process of monitoring the ball entry information is the process of timer interrupt process. It is performed twice (steps S9901 and S9903). The process of monitoring each set of ball entry information is executed so that the timings go back and forth, but the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the forward side (step S9901) is T2 with respect to the timing at which the timer interrupt process is activated. It is executed at the timing when the time has passed.

  In this case, the timing at which the ball entry detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed prior to the processing such as the game times control process and the processing for the electric-power support that are more prone to fluctuating processing time. The processing executed prior to the detection processing is processing in which the processing time is relatively unlikely to change. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process of each process cycle, the period until the process of monitoring the incoming ball information on the front side is started is the same, substantially the same or the same as T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring one set of ball entry information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the ball entry information on the front side is periodically executed.

  Further, among the processing for monitoring each set of ball entry information, between the processing for monitoring the ball entry information on the front side (step S9901) and the processing for monitoring the ball entry information on the rear side (step S9903), Although the weight process (step S9902) for detecting the ball entering is executed, the weight process does not execute any process but only waits until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, of the processing for monitoring one set of ball entry information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt processing, the processing for monitoring the ball entry information on the rear side is periodically executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 187 (B), the contents of the calculation performed when the ball entry determination is performed will be described. FIG. 187 (B) is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of the calculation performed when the ball entry determination is performed. Although various calculations are actually performed in 1-bit units, the contents of the calculations will be described in 1-byte units in the following description. However, the configuration may be such that an operation in units of one byte as described below is actually performed.

  In the case of FIG. 187 (B), in the process of first monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the n-th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 187 (B1), “00100000” in the first ball entry determination area WA1. "Is set. In this case, the ball entry information of the third winning hole detection sensor 44f among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is information (hereinafter, also referred to as ball entry information) indicating that the game ball is detected. The ball entry information of the other sensors is information indicating that the game ball has not been detected (hereinafter, also referred to as information without ball entry).

  Further, in the process of monitoring the rear side ball entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process, “10100000” is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2 as shown in FIG. 187 (B2). In this case, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h and the third winning opening detection sensor 44f among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h is the ball entry information, and the other sensors are the ball entry information .

  When the information of the first entering determination area WA1 and the second entering determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result becomes “00100000” as shown in FIG. 187 (B3), Information is set in the first post-operation area WA3 as a monitoring result of the ball entry information in the timer interrupt process of the n-th process. When the result of monitoring the ball entry information is set in the area after first operation WA3 in the n-1th timer interrupt process, the result of monitoring the ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process is the second operation. It is set to the rear area WA4. Further, although the ball entering determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the ball entering information at the (n-1) -th time and the monitoring result of the ball entering information at the n-th time, the contents of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (B4), “10100110” is set in the first entry determination area WA1 in the processing for monitoring the entry information on the front side in the n + 1th timer interrupt processing. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, the second start port detection sensor 44c, and the first start port detection sensor 44b has the ball entry information The other sensors have no ball entry information.

  Further, in the process of monitoring the rear side ball entry information in the n + 1-th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 187 (B5), “1010 0010” is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, each of the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f, and the first start opening detection sensor 44b among the respective ball detection sensors 44a to 44h is the ball presence information, and the other sensors are There is no ball entry information.

  When the information of the first entering determination area WA1 and the second entering determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “10100010” as shown in FIG. 187 (B6), and the relevant processing is performed. Information is set in the second post-operation area WA4 as a monitoring result of the ball entry information in the timer interrupt process of the (n + 1) -th process cycle.

  Thereafter, in the entering judgment processing (FIG. 186) in the n + 1th timer interrupt processing, the monitoring result of the entering information in the nth timer interrupt processing is read out from the first post-operation area WA3 and read out first The reverse process is performed on the information of the monitoring result. Then, as shown in FIG. 187 (B7), “11011111” is obtained. Then, the monitoring result of the entering information in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process is AND-processed with the information of the result of the inversion process. As a result, as shown in FIG. 187 (B8), “10000010” is obtained. In this case, in the ball entry determination process, it is determined that the ball entry of the game ball is detected by the discharge path detection sensor 44h, and it is determined that the ball entry of the game ball is detected by the first starting opening detection sensor 44b. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 187 (B4), although the second start port detection sensor 44c is the information with presence of balls in the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the front side in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, Is caused by electrical noise. In this case, even if the switch from the non-entered information to the enterable information is confirmed, it is not immediately determined as the occurrence of enter, but the ball is entered if the enterable information is confirmed for a plurality of times. It is a structure which specifies with generation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187 (B5), in the process of monitoring the rear side ball entry information in the n + 1th timer interrupt process, the second starting port detection sensor 44c is the no ball entry information, which is electrically It is designed not to handle the occurrence of noise as entering a game ball.

  Also, the third winning opening detection sensor 44f enters in each of the process of monitoring one set of ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of ball entry information in the n + 1th timer interrupt process. Although it is the ball presence information, this indicates a state where the game ball whose occurrence of entering the ball has already been grasped is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of ball entry is specified on condition that the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the n-th timer interrupt process is “0”, a plurality of ball entry of one game ball is performed. I will not treat it as a ball entry.

  When the ball entering detection processing is executed as described above, the monitoring result of the detection result in each ball entering detection sensor 44 a to 44 h is executed and the ball entering corresponding to the provision of the game ball is generated. In addition, according to the entry place, addition processing to 3 prize sphere counters, 10 prize sphere counters and 15 prize sphere counters is executed. If any one of these counters is "1" or more, the setting of the award ball command is performed in the output setting process of the award ball command (step S9809) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 183), and the setting is performed. The received prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In this case, the output setting of the prize ball command is performed only once in one process of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, for example, even if the 15-prize ball counter is "2" or more, the 15-prize ball command is transmitted only once in one processing cycle. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined plurality (for example, two or three) of prize ball commands may be transmitted in one processing cycle.

  Also, it is conceivable that each of the three-prize ball counter, the ten-prize ball counter, and the fifteen-prize ball counter is “1” or more, but in this case, the output of the prize ball command having a large number of prize balls is have priority. That is, the output of the 15-prize ball command has priority over the output of the 10-prize ball command or the output of the 3-prize ball command, and the output of the 10-prize ball command has priority over the output of the 3-prize ball command .

  When the 15 prize ball command is set as the output target when the 15 prize ball counter is “1” or more, the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the 10-prize ball command is set as an output target when the 10-prize ball counter is “1” or more, the 10-prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the three-prize ball command is set as an output target when the three-prize ball counter is “1” or more, the three-prize ball counter is decremented by one.

  Next, processing executed by the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 executes the following main processing as the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300.

  In step S10101, it is determined whether or not calculation data including winning balls number data and calculation execution conditions is received. If it is determined in step S10101 that calculation data is received (S10101: YES), the process proceeds to step S10102. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10101 that no data for calculation is received (S10101: NO), the process of step S10101 is executed again. That is, until the operation data is received, the infinite loop is continued without proceeding to the process of the next step S10102.

  In step S10102, the received winning ball number data is stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10103 to store the received operation execution condition in the operation execution condition storage memory 307. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10104.

  In step S10104, a setting completion command indicating that storing of the winning ball number data in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 is completed, and storage of the computing execution condition in the computation execution condition storage memory 307 is completed. Is sent to the main CPU 62x. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10105.

In step S10105, it is determined whether the in-ball information received from the main CPU 62x is in the bits of the buffer 302 ("1" is stored in the bits). If it is determined in step S10105 that there is incoming information received from the main CPU 62x in the bit of the buffer 302 (S10105: YES), the process proceeds to step S10106 and the counter of the register corresponding to the bit of the buffer 302 is incremented by one. to add. Specifically, for example, when the bit corresponding to the first start opening ball entry information of the buffer 302 is “1” and the bit corresponding to the normal mode is “1”, with it adds 1 to counter corresponding to the mouth ball entrance number N _S, 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the winning opening ball entrance number in the normal mode. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10105 that there is no ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x in the buffer 302 (S10105: NO), the process proceeds to step S10107 without executing step S10106.

In step S10107, it is determined whether the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the register 304 is 500, that is, whether the number of gaming balls launched to the gaming board 30 has reached 500. judge. If it is determined in step S10107 that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied (S10107: YES), the process proceeds to step S10108.

  In step S10108, various game history information is obtained based on the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 and the entering number of gaming balls to each ball entry stored in the register 304. Execute arithmetic processing to calculate Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10109, and the calculated various game history information is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10110, and the number of game balls entering each ball entry stored in the register 304 is cleared to zero. Then, it progresses to step S10111.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10107 that the operation execution condition stored in operation execution condition storage memory 307 is not satisfied (S10107: NO), step S10111 is not executed from step S10108 to step S10111. Go to

  In step S10111, it is determined whether a transmission request command for gaming history information has been received from the inspection device 320. If it is determined that a transmission request command has been received (S10111: YES), the process proceeds to step S10112. The game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection device 320. The inspection device 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information. After step S10112 is executed, the process returns to step S10105, and the process from step S10105 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10111 that the transmission request command of the game history information has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10111: NO), the process returns to step S10105 without executing the process of step S10112. The process from S10105 is repeated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 can calculate gaming history information which is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the executed game. If the gaming machine is tampered with, the calculated gaming history information may be an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with or not by checking the game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 includes the operation result storage memory 309 which stores the calculated gaming history information in a non-volatile manner. Since the game history information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the game history information is unique to the pachinko machine 10 as well as different for each pachinko machine 10. That is, the game history information is information in which the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 are reflected. According to the present embodiment, game history information, which is information in which the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 are reflected, is stored in the memory 309 for storing the calculation result of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the casing of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Do. Therefore, for example, when the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 are inspected, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by acquiring game history information from the pachinko machine 10 itself. In the state where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the hall computer installed in the game hall can obtain information on the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is circulated from time to time, it may be placed in a state not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional pachinko machine 10 holds information on the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 Can not do it. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores game history information, which is information in which the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 are reflected, in the memory 309 for storing the calculation result of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the casing of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Since the information is stored, even when the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the hall computer, game history information can be acquired from the pachinko machine 10 main body. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment always has one to one pachinko machine 10 and gaming history information regardless of the state (the state installed in the game hall or the distribution state) the pachinko machine 10 is placed. It is possible to make the stringed state, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are both mounted on the main MPU 62, and they are configured to operate with the same power supply. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall and the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by the hall computer, a problem occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer. Even in the case where there is a problem in the processing of the hall computer, the gaming history information can be calculated as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Even if the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by different power supplies, if there is a problem with the power supply of the game history management chip 300, the game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 There is a problem that the game history information can not be calculated regardless of that. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by the same power supply, be sure to calculate the game history information if the game can be performed. Can. Thus, the reliability of the game history information can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the substrate box in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, in the case of making physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, a trace of opening the substrate box remains. Therefore, if the gaming history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is altered through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, it is grasped from the trace of the board box that the alteration is made It is possible to Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the game history information can be prevented. Since the pachinko machine 10 is circulated from place to place, various external contacts are made in the process of being distributed, but the memory 309 for storing the operation result is stored inside the substrate box in which traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is distributed in turn, it is possible to suppress unauthorized alteration of the game history information by someone. Further, since the game history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics regarding the game of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by preventing unauthorized alteration of the game history information reflecting the game-related characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the gaming history management chip 300 acquires the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 regarding the paid winning balls Can be calculated. Furthermore, even if different winning ball number data is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming history management chip 300 uses the winning ball number data set for each type of the pachinko machine 10 to make a correct game. Historical information can be calculated. If the gaming machine is tampered with, the calculated gaming history information may be an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been tampered with or not by confirming the correct game history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main CPU 62x transmits a signal including the number-of-balls data stored in the number-of-balls data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the gaming history management chip 300, so game history management is performed. A configuration in which the chip 300 can not access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, and a storage position of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the gaming history management chip 300. Even in the configuration in which (memory address) can not be grasped, the game history management chip 300 can acquire the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the main process of the main CPU 62x, the interrupt of the timer interrupt process is not permitted until the setting completion command is received, and the game ball emission control process included in the timer interrupt process is not executed. It is a structure. That is, since the gaming ball is not fired until storage of the winning ball number data in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 is completed, the gaming ball may leak from the calculation object of the gaming history information by the gaming history management chip 300 Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the game history information for each period until the 500 game balls are detected is calculated and stored by the discharge path detection sensor 44h, 500 pachinko machine 10 can play 500 game balls. Even if there is a variation in the time until the is detected, it is possible to calculate and store game history information that does not affect the variation in the time. That is, even in the case where there is a difference in elevation in the frequency at which the gaming balls are fired, it is possible to calculate and store highly accurate gaming history information that is not easily affected. Moreover, compared with the structure which memorize | stores the ball entering information to each ball entrance as it is, required storage capacity can be reduced.

  When the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, since the characteristics of the game are also different, the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, as the operation execution conditions, conditions different for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. According to the present embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the operation execution conditions stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, so that the operation set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 When the execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute an operation for calculating the game history information.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 executes the calculation for calculating the gaming history information, the number of ball entry into the ball entry stored in the register 304 Since the (counter value) is deleted, it is possible to store information on the number of game balls entered in the register 304 again. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the register 304 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320, the inspection machine 320 can display the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information displayed on the inspection machine 320.

M4. Another aspect of the thirteenth embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, it is set that the number of gaming balls detected by the ejection path detection sensor 44h reaches 500 as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, but the calculation is performed. As an execution condition, a time interval for executing an operation may be set. For example, one hour is set as a time interval for executing the calculation, and the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to calculate gaming history information each time one hour elapses. The inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the detailed game history information calculated every hour, and can appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been subjected to unauthorized modification or the like. Become. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 is different, since the characteristics of the game are also different, the optimum condition (time interval) for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information is also different. For this reason, as the operation execution conditions, conditions different for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. Therefore, even in this mode 1, since the game history management chip 300 acquires the operation execution conditions stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10 An operation can be executed when an operation execution condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 measures the elapsed time since the calculation is executed, and determines whether or not the player is playing a game, and determines that the game is not being played. The measurement of the elapsed time may be interrupted during the predetermined period. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) elapses when there is no entry information in a bit of the buffer 302, it is determined that a game is not being performed, and measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted. If the ball entry information is confirmed in the bit 302, it may be determined that the game has been resumed and the measurement of the elapsed time may be resumed. According to this configuration, it is possible to calculate the game history information only for the period in which the game is actually being played.

  The elapsed time may be measured using a timer counter, or may be provided with an RTC (Real-Time Clock) to use the RTC date and time information. Further, the game history information may be calculated every predetermined time.

<Aspect 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, it is set that the number of gaming balls detected by the ejection path detection sensor 44h reaches 500 as the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, but the calculation is performed. As the execution condition, it may be set that the occurrence of the interruption of the power supply is detected. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects the occurrence of power interruption, it outputs a signal indicating that the power interruption has occurred to the gaming history management chip 300. The CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 having received the signal determines that the power is shut off, and calculates gaming history information. Further, in this configuration, the register 304 is configured of a volatile memory, and the ball entry number information is erased. According to such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the gaming history information based on the number of gaming balls detected during the period from the start of the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 to the generation of the shutoff of the power. it can. That is, since the game history information is calculated every period from the start to the end of the operation of the game hall, the game history information is calculated every business day of the game hall. Therefore, since the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not the characteristic of the game history information has changed over the business day of the gaming hall, the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to unauthorized modification or the like. It is possible to judge appropriately whether or not As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, if the configuration is provided with a capacitor 87 that supplies power to the gaming history management chip 300 even after the power is shut off, the calculation of gaming history information by the CPU 308 and the memory 309 for storing calculation results of gaming history information. Can be reliably completed.

<Aspect 3>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the main CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. . According to this configuration, since the gaming history information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, the examiner of the pachinko machine 10 has a dedicated device (examination machine 320 etc.) for checking the gaming history information. The game history information of the pachinko machine 10 can be confirmed without using it. Preferably, the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309, but can not change data. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the game history information is destroyed or the contents are rewritten due to noise, a bug of the program, or the like.

<Aspect 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the main CPU 62x is configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and notifies that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The LED lamp may be provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, at a predetermined position of the main display unit 45). For example, even if a specific value (for example, a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, or a payout ratio (in the normal mode)) included in the game history information is not included in the predetermined range, the LED lamp is made to emit light Good. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine can easily discover the pachinko machine 10 in which the specific value included in the game history information is not included in the predetermined range. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been subjected to unauthorized modification or the like. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails in the vicinity of the first starting opening 33 and the general winning openings (first to third winning openings 32a to 32c) are tampered with, the above-mentioned payout ratio (during the normal mode) is the design of the pachinko machine It will deviate from the predetermined range (for example, 0.60-0.70) assumed from time to time. Therefore, when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is not included in the predetermined range (for example, 0.60 to 0.70), the first start hole 33 and the general winnings are realized by making the LED lamp emit light. It can be appropriately determined whether the nail in the vicinity of the mouth (first to third winning openings 32a to 32c) is not tampered with.

  Furthermore, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp according to the degree of deviation from a predetermined range of a specific value (for example, character item ratio, continuous character product ratio, payout ratio (during normal mode)) included in the game history information May be determined. For example, the first LED lamp emits blue when the character ratio is included in the predetermined range (0.70 or less), and the first LED lamp when the character ratio is 0.71 to 0.80. May emit light in purple, and the first LED lamp may emit light in red when the character ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. When the continuous character ratio is included in the predetermined range (0.60 or less), the second LED lamp emits blue light, and when the continuous character ratio is 0.61 to 0.70, the second LED lamp May emit light in purple, and the second LED lamp may emit light in red when the continuous character ratio is 0.71 to 1.00. When the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is included in the predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), the third LED lamp emits blue light, and the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is 0.71. In the case of ̃0.80, the third LED lamp may emit purple, and when the payout ratio (during normal mode) is 0.81 to 1.00, the third LED lamp may emit red. According to this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp how much the specific value included in the game history information deviates from the predetermined range. Preferably, the main CPU 62x can access the calculation result storage memory 309, but can not change data. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the game history information is destroyed or the contents are rewritten due to noise, a bug of the program, or the like.

<Aspect 5>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the calculation data (a prize ball number data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x). The game history management chip 300 is configured to be able to access the prize ball number data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 is applicable immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. A configuration in which the main ROM 63 is accessed to obtain calculation data (a prize ball number data and a calculation execution condition), and the obtained calculation data is stored in a prize ball number data storage memory 306 and a calculation execution condition storage memory 307 It may be According to such a configuration, the processing load of the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to calculate gaming history information such as the character ratio, but the number of ball entry for every 500 pieces stored in the register is stored as it is, and the inspection device 320 The game history information may be calculated. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the gaming history management chip 300 can be reduced. Hereinafter, the details of the sixth aspect will be described focusing on differences from the thirteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 189 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment and the configuration of the inspection device 320.

  The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with an award ball number data storage area and a storage execution condition storage area.

  Similarly to the thirteenth embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball (prize ball number data) is stored in the prize ball number data storage area in the same manner as the thirteenth embodiment. There is. Further, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Be done. As a result, the gaming history management chip 300 can grasp the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the storage execution condition storage area, storage execution conditions which are conditions for the game history management chip 300 to execute storage processing described later are stored. In the sixth aspect, the fact that the number of gaming balls having passed through the discharge passage reaches 500 is stored as a storage condition. The storage execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, the gaming history management chip 300 can grasp the storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The game history management chip 300 has a buffer 302 for acquiring the ball entry information of the game ball from each CPU 62 x to the ball entry port, a register 304 for storing the number of game balls entered into each ball entry port, and the main ROM 63. A memory 306 for storing the number-of-balls of prize data acquired from the memory of the ball number data 306, a memory 307a for storing the execution conditions for memory storing the storage execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, and control of the entire game history management chip 300 And a ball number storage memory 309a for sequentially storing the number of balls of the gaming ball to each ball entry stored in the register 304. The above-described storage processing is processing for storing the number of ball entry of gaming balls into each ball entry stored in the register 304 in the number-of-ball-in-place memory 309a.

  The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection device 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this mode 6, the ball number information stored in the ball number storage memory 309 a and the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection device 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Be done.

  The inspection machine 320 displays a CPU 321 for executing various control programs, a ROM 324 for recording various control programs, fixed value data, etc., a RAM 326 as a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display for displaying various information. And a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

  In this mode 6, when the inspection device 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 sends a transmission request command for requesting transmission of the ball number information and the number-of-balls data. Send to When the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, the CPU 308 for entering ball number information stored in the ball number storage memory 309a via the inspection terminal 65, and for winning ball number data storage The winning ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection device 320. Then, the inspection device 320 calculates game history information based on the received ball number information and the number-of-winning-balls data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

  FIG. 190 is an explanatory view schematically showing the contents of processing in the gaming history management chip 300 and the inspection device 320 of aspect 6 of the thirteenth embodiment.

  The contents of processing in the buffer 302 and the register 304 are the same as in the above-described thirteenth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The winning ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this mode 6, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the content of the winning balls number data stored in the winning balls number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the winning balls number data stored in the main ROM 63.

  The storage execution condition storage memory 307 a is a memory for storing storage execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the CPU 62x transmits the storage execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 to the gaming history management chip 300, and stores the storage execution conditions storage memory 307a. Therefore, the contents of the storage execution conditions stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307 a are the same as the contents of the storage execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63.

The CPU 308 determines whether or not the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage memory 307 a is satisfied, and determines that each input stored in the register 304 when the storage execution condition is determined to be satisfied. Information on the number of game balls entered into the ball mouth is stored in the number-of-balls storage memory 309a, and the value of each counter of the register 304 is reset to "0". In this mode 6, the CPU 308 relates to the number of game balls entering each ball entry stored in the register 304 every time the value of the discharge passage passage number N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500. Information is stored in the number-of-balls storage memory 309a. In the following, the information on the number of ball entry to the ball entrance counted during the time when the 500 game balls are fired to the game board 30 is also referred to as "short-term ball entry number information group".

  The ball number storage memory 309a is a memory for sequentially storing information (short-term ball number information group) related to the ball number stored in the register 304. In this embodiment, even if the supply of power is cut off, the memory is stored. And a non-volatile memory capable of holding Information regarding the order in which the short-term entering number information group is written is also stored in the entering number storage memory 309a, and the CPU 308 does not have an empty area for writing the short-term entering number information group. The short-term entering number information group is stored in the area where the short-term entering number information group having the oldest written order is stored. That is, the ball number storage memory 309a is configured (first-in first-out method) to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term ball number information group, and the latest short-term ball number information group is always It will be in the state of being memorized.

  In this mode 6, the memory 309a for storing the number of entering balls is a short-term entry, which is information on the number of entering game balls to each ball entrance counted while the 500 game balls are fired to the game board 30. It has a capacity capable of storing 1,200 sphere number information groups. For example, if game balls are fired continuously for 10 hours on one day, 60000 game balls will be fired on one day, so 120 short-term game arrival number information groups on one day It is stored in the hit ball number storage memory 309a. Therefore, the entering number storage memory 309 a can store the short term entering number information group for the last 10 days.

  As described above, when the inspection device 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection device 320 transmits a transmission request command to the gaming history management chip 300. When receiving the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 transmits the short-term ball entry number information group and the winning ball number data to the inspection device 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Then, the inspection device 320 calculates game history information such as the character ratio based on the short-term entering number information group and the number-of-balls data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

  Specifically, in the sixth aspect, the inspection device 320 may calculate one short-term game history information group for one short-term entering number information group, similarly to the CPU 308 of the thirteenth embodiment described above. It is possible, addition the number of ball entry of the game ball to each entrance which is remembered in each of plural short-term entry number information groups, add the game sphere information in the long term making use of the addition number which is added It is possible to calculate (long-term gaming history information group). That is, the inspection machine 320 according to the sixth aspect is not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entry in a short period when 500 game balls are fired, for example, 600000 (about It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of ball entry into each ball entrance during a long period when the game balls for 10 days are fired.

  In the sixth aspect, the following configuration may be adopted.

  The inspection device 320 may be configured to be able to display the received short-term entering number information group on the display unit 328. In addition, the inspection device 320 may be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and display the received counter value on the display unit 328.

  Also, instead of a configuration in which the gaming history management chip 300 transmits the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection device 320, the main CPU 62x is stored in the main ROM 63. The ball number data may be transmitted to the inspection device 320. According to such a configuration, the winning ball number data storage memory 306 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming history management chip 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, as a storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, a time interval for executing storage processing may be set. For example, one hour is set as a time interval for executing the storage process, and the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the storage process every one hour.

  In addition, as the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, it may be set that the occurrence of the interruption of the power supply is detected. Specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit 86 is configured to output a signal indicating that the power is interrupted to the gaming history management chip 300 when it detects the occurrence of the power interruption, and the game history management chip receives the signal. The CPU 308 of the CPU 300 may determine that the power is shut off and execute storage processing.

  In the sixth embodiment, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes an operation for calculating game history information, but the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes a part or all of the operation, and the operation The game history information, which is the result of the above, may be transmitted to the inspection device 320.

<Aspect 7>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate game history information such as the character ratio, but the ball entry information in the buffer is stored as it is, and the inspection device 320 is based on the ball entry information. The game history information may be calculated. According to such a configuration, the processing load of the gaming history management chip 300 can be reduced. The details of the seventh aspect will be described below focusing on the differences with the thirteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 191 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment and the configuration of the inspection device 320.

  In the seventh aspect, the main MPU 62 is provided with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information to the gaming history management chip 300. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update date information and time information even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  A main ball ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a winning ball number data storage area. In the seventh aspect, the operation start condition storage area is not provided.

  Similarly to the thirteenth embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball (prize ball number data) is stored in the prize ball number data storage area in the same manner as the thirteenth embodiment. There is. Further, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Be done. As a result, the gaming history management chip 300 can grasp the winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10.

  The game history management chip 300 has a buffer 302 for acquiring the ball entry information of the game ball to each entrance from the CPU 62 x, and a winning ball number data storage memory 306 for storing the prize ball number data acquired from the main side ROM 63. , CPU 308 responsible for overall control of the gaming history management chip 300, and a ball entry information storage memory 309b for sequentially storing ball entry information etc. of the game ball to each ball entry stored in the buffer 302 .

  The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection device 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this mode 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the ball entry information etc. stored in the ball entry memory for information storage 309b and the number of prize balls stored in the memory for number-of-balls data storage 306. Data is sent to the inspector 320.

  The inspection machine 320 displays a CPU 321 for executing various control programs, a ROM 324 for recording various control programs, fixed value data, etc., a RAM 326 as a memory for temporarily storing various data, and a display for displaying various information. And a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

  In this mode 7, when the inspection device 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 sends a transmission request command for requesting transmission of ball entry information etc. and award ball number data. Send to When the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, the CPU 308 for entering ball information and the like stored in the ball entry information memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65 The winning ball number data stored in the memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection device 320. Then, the inspection device 320 calculates game history information based on the received ball entry information and the like and the winning number data, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

  FIG. 192 is an explanatory view schematically showing an outline of processing in the gaming history management chip 300 and the inspection device 320 of the aspect 7 of the thirteenth embodiment.

  The contents of processing in the buffer 302 are the same as in the above-described thirteenth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The ball entry information storage memory 309b is a memory for sequentially storing the ball entry information stored in the buffer 302 and information regarding the gaming state when the game ball is entered, and in the present embodiment, the supply of power is cut off. Even non-volatile memory is capable of retaining storage. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the ball entering information and the information regarding the gaming state are stored, date and time information when the gaming balls entered each ball entrance is added and stored. In addition, information regarding the order in which the ball entry information and the like are written is also stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b, and the CPU 308 enters the ball when there is no vacant area for writing the ball entry information and the like. Information and the like are stored in an area in which the latest entry information and the like in the order of writing are stored. That is, the ball entry information storage memory 309b is configured (first in, first out method) to be overwritten in order from the oldest entry information etc., and always stores the latest entry information etc. It becomes a state.

  The winning ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing winning ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this mode 7, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the winning ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the gaming history management chip 300 and stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306. . Therefore, the content of the winning balls number data stored in the winning balls number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the winning balls number data stored in the main ROM 63. Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection device 320.

  As described above, when the inspection device 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the game history management chip 300 sends a transmission request command for requesting transmission of ball entry information etc. and award ball number data. Send to When the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b via the inspection terminal 65, the information on the gaming state, and the date and time information And the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection device 320. Then, the inspection device 320 calculates game history information based on the received information, and causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated game history information.

  Specifically, the inspection device 320 of this aspect 7 calculates gaming history information (short-term gaming history information group) based on the number of ball entering each ball entry in a short period when 500 gaming balls are fired. Not only that, for example, game history information (long-term game history information group) is calculated based on the number of ball entering each ball entry in a long period when 600000 (about 10 days of) game balls have been fired It is possible. That is, it is possible to calculate game history information in an arbitrary period.

  Furthermore, in this mode 7, since the date and time information (date information and time information) is added to the ball entry information etc., the inspection device 320 has the range of the date and time information added to the received ball entry information etc. It is also possible to calculate the game history information by designating the range of date and time for which the game history information is to be calculated. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can perform a detailed inspection based on the game history information specifying the date and time range.

  In the seventh embodiment, the following configuration may be adopted.

  The inspection device 320 may be configured to be able to display the received ball entry information and the like on the display unit 328. According to such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can grasp the date and time when the gaming ball is detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

  Also, instead of a configuration in which the gaming history management chip 300 transmits the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection device 320, the main CPU 62x is stored in the main ROM 63. The ball number data may be transmitted to the inspection device 320. According to such a configuration, the winning ball number data storage memory 306 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming history management chip 300 can be reduced.

  In the seventh embodiment, the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320 executes an operation for calculating game history information, but the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes a part or all of the operation, and the operation The game history information, which is the result of the above, may be transmitted to the inspection device 320.

<Aspect 8>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, the main ROM is stored with the operation execution conditions or the storage execution conditions, and the gaming history management chip 300 acquires these conditions from the main ROM 63. The gaming history management chip 300 may store these conditions in the non-volatile memory from the beginning. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that improper operation execution conditions or storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63 and the game history information or the number-of-balls information can not be stored appropriately. it can. For example, an extremely short period (for example, discharge passage passage number N _OUT = 5) is stored as an operation execution condition or a memory execution condition, and the operation result storage memory 309 or the ball number storage memory 309a is stored. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which only game history information or ball entry number information for an extremely short period (for example, about one hour) is stored.

<Aspect 9>
In the above-described thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, the function of storing the number of game balls entered into each ball entry, the function of calculating game history information such as the character ratio, etc., and the calculated game history information Although the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to store the functions to be stored, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the gaming history management chip 300) may be configured to include some of these functions. In addition, the gaming history management chip 300 may not be provided, and the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the gaming history management chip 300) may be configured to have all of these functions. According to such a configuration, since it is not necessary to separately provide the gaming history management chip 300, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, according to the configuration in which the gaming history management chip 300 is provided, the processing load of the main CPU 62x can be reduced.

<Aspect 10>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, the gaming history management chip 300 has a part or all of the functions of the functional units (for example, the inspection device 320 and the main CPU 62x) other than the gaming history management chip 300. Alternatively, some or all of the functions of the gaming history management chip 300 may be provided to functional units other than the gaming history management chip 300. For example, if the gaming history management chip 300 includes a part of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and manufacturing cost of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced, and the functions of the gaming history management chip 300 The processing load and manufacturing cost of the gaming history management chip 300 can be further reduced by configuring the inspection machine 320 to be partially provided.

<Aspect 11>
In the thirteenth embodiment, although the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate game history information such as a character ratio, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x calculates game history information. It is also good. Hereinafter, the details of the eleventh aspect will be described focusing on differences from the thirteenth embodiment.

  FIG. 193 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine 10 according to aspect 11 of a thirteenth embodiment. In this eleventh embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main RAM 64 is provided with a ball count storage area and an operation result storage area, as in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 179) and It is different.

  The main CPU 62x updates the number of ball entry of game balls to each ball entry stored in the number-of-balls storage area of the main RAM 64 based on the ball entry information of the game ball received from the input / output port 62a. Do. Then, when the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main side ROM 63 is satisfied, the award ball number data stored in the award ball number data storage area of the main side ROM 63 and the main side RAM 64 Calculations are executed based on the number of game balls in each ball entry stored in the number of ball storage area, and game history information is calculated, and the game history information is stored as the calculation result of the main RAM 64. Store in area. The details will be described below.

FIG. 194 is an explanatory view schematically showing an outline of processing in the main MPU 62 of aspect 11 of the thirteenth embodiment. The main CPU 62x determines whether the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied, and when it is determined that the operation execution condition is satisfied, the main CPU 62x Information on the number of game balls to be entered into each ball entry stored in the cache is stored in the number-of-pieces storage area of the main RAM 64. In this aspect 11, each time the value of the discharge passage passing number N _OUT stored in the cache of the main CPU 62 x reaches 500, the main CPU 62 x stores information on the number of game balls to be entered into each ball entrance. , And the pitch number storage area of the main RAM 64 is stored. In addition, as mentioned above, the information regarding the number of ball entry to the ball entry to each ball entry counted during the time when 500 game balls are fired to the game board 30 is also called "short-term ball entry number information group" .

  The entering number storage area of the main side RAM 64 is an area for sequentially storing information (short-term entering number information group) regarding the entering number. Information regarding the order in which the short-term entering number information group is written is also stored in the entering number storage area of the main side RAM 64, and the main side CPU 62x has no free area for writing the short-term entering number information group In this case, the short-term entering number information group that has become the new writing target is stored in the area where the short-term entering number information group having the oldest writing order is stored. That is, the entering number storage area of the main side RAM 64 is configured (first-in first-out method) to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term entering number information group, and always the latest short-term entering number information The group is stored.

  In this aspect 11, the number-of-balls storage area of the main side RAM 64 is information on the number of balls in the ball entry into the ball entrance counted during the time when 500 gaming balls are fired to the game board 30 It has a capacity capable of storing 1200 short-term hit count information groups. For example, if game balls are fired continuously for 10 hours on one day, 60000 game balls will be fired on one day, so 120 short-term game arrival number information groups on one day It is stored in the entering number storage area of the main RAM 64. Therefore, the entering number storage area of the main side RAM 64 can store the short term entering number information group for the last 10 days.

  Then, the main CPU 62x newly calculates one short-term game history information group for one newly stored short-term ball entry number information group each time the operation execution condition is satisfied. Furthermore, the main CPU 62x controls the game to each ball entry stored in each of the plurality of short-term ball count information groups including the newly stored short-term ball count information group each time the operation execution condition is satisfied. The number of balls entered is added, and game history information (long-term game history information group) in a long period is calculated using the added number of balls. That is, the main side CPU 62x of this aspect 11 is not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entered into each ball entry in a short period when 500 game balls have been fired, for example, 600000 (about It is possible to calculate a long-term game history information group based on the number of ball entry into each ball entrance during a long period when the game balls for 10 days are fired. Then, the calculated game history information is stored in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64.

  The calculation result storage area of the main side RAM 64 is configured of an area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information group and an area for storing the long-term game history information group. Information regarding the order in which the short-term gaming history information group is written is also stored in the area where the short-term gaming history information group is sequentially stored, and the main CPU 62x does not have a vacant area for writing the short-term gaming history information group The short-term game history information group newly calculated is stored in the area where the short-term game history information group having the oldest written order is stored. That is, the area for sequentially storing the short-term gaming history information group of the main side RAM 64 is configured (first-in first-out system) to be overwritten in order from the oldest short-term gaming history information group. The gaming history information group is stored. In the area storing the long-term gaming history information group, the long-term gaming history information group newly calculated is overwritten each time the operation execution condition is satisfied. That is, in the area storing the long-term gaming history information group, the latest long-term gaming history information group calculated based on the plurality of short-term entering number information group including the latest short-term entering number information group is stored become.

  When the inspection device 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the inspection device 320 transmits a transmission request command to the main CPU 62x. When the main CPU 62x receives the transmission request command from the inspection device 320, it transmits the gaming history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection device 320. Then, the inspection device 320 causes the display unit 328 to display the received game history information.

  Further, in this aspect 11, when a predetermined operation for displaying the gaming history information on the symbol display device 41 is executed, the gaming history information stored in the main side RAM 64 controls the voice emission through the input / output port 62x. It is output to the device 90 and displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Further, in this mode 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the number of short-term ball entry number information groups and the game history information stored in the main side RAM 64 are counted by the backup power supply supplied from the capacitor 87. It is configured to be held for days.

  According to such a configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes a process for advancing a game such as a big hit lottery process and a process for calculating and storing game history information. There is no need to provide a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing history information, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition, the main RAM 64 stores a short-term ball entry number information group, which is information on the number of ball entry to the ball entrance counted during the time when 500 game balls are fired to the game board 30, Are configured to store the ball entry information of the gaming ball as it is (for example, a configuration for storing in the form of the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information memory 309b of FIG. 192) and In comparison, it is possible to calculate the latest short-term gaming history information group and the long-term gaming history information group while significantly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64.

  The main CPU 62x is not limited to the configuration that calculates both the short-term gaming history information group and the long-term gaming history information group as the gaming history information, and may be configured to calculate only one of them.

<Aspect 12>
FIG. 195 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to aspect 12 of the thirteenth embodiment. The difference from the above-mentioned aspect 11 (FIG. 193) is that the main side MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64 x which is a non-volatile memory which is rewritable and can retain its storage even if the supply of power is cut off. It is a point that In this flash memory 64x, there is a ball count storage area for storing short-term ball count information group in mode 11 described above, and a short-term game history information group and long-term game history information group in mode 11 described above. And a calculation result storage area of

  The main CPU 62x of this aspect 12 is configured to store the short-term ball entry number information group and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x each time the operation execution condition is satisfied.

  According to such a configuration, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced as compared with the configuration including the gaming history management chip 300. Furthermore, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for a long period of time, the short-term ball count information group and the gaming history information are held, so the pachinko machine 10 is in any state (for example, pachinko machine for a long period of time) Even if it is placed in a distribution state where power is not supplied to 10), it is possible to always link the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information on a one-on-one basis, and manage the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 , Can be inspected.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to provide the main RAM 64 with an area for storing short-term ball entry number information group and gaming history information, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. can do.

<Aspect 13>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, the main control device 60 causes the inspection machine 320 to enter the gaming mode information and the gaming history information, which are modes capable of executing the gaming progress processing which is processing for proceeding with the game. It may be configured to be switchable from the inspection mode which is the mode to be output. The game progressing process is a process executed based on the detection of the game ball by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and the jackpot lottery process, the electronic combination open lottery process, the payout process of the winning balls, the main display unit The variable display processing of the symbols at 45, the opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a, and the like are included.

  And, in the inspection mode, even when the game ball passes through the area detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the game progress processing may not be executed.

  Specifically, for example, when the inspection mode is entered, the inspection mode flag for determining whether the inspection mode is in the main control device 60 is turned ON. Then, main controller 60 determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and if it is determined that the inspection mode flag is ON, it proceeds to the processing flow for executing the normal game progression processing. , Processing flow for inspection mode. As a result, even if the main control device 60 receives a signal indicating that the game ball has been detected from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, a process based on the reception of the signal (for example, a big hit random number A process of acquiring the value of the counter C1, a process of delivering a prize ball, a process of transmitting a command to the sound emission control apparatus 90, and the like are not executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute, in the inspection mode, a process that is undesirable to execute in parallel with the game progressing process, and a process that is prone to problems when executed in parallel with the game progressing process. . Further, according to such a configuration, since the game progressing process is not executed in the inspection mode, when developing a program of the process to be executed in the inspection mode, measures are taken when the game progressing process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to consider, it is possible to greatly improve the development efficiency of the program of the process to be executed in the inspection mode.

  The game history information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which processing for outputting game history information is performed in parallel with the game progress processing, while the inspector of pachinko machine 10 inspects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 by the game history information. The game progress processing is executed, and the content of the game history information changes as needed, which may make it difficult to conduct an inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 13, since the game history information is output in the inspection mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes the predetermined area, the game history information is output It is possible to suppress that the content of the game history information changes while being played. As a result, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can carry out the inspection smoothly.

  The mode of outputting the game history information in the inspection mode is not limited to the mode in which the game history information is output to the inspection device 320 and displayed, and may be another mode. For example, the game history information may be output to the symbol display device 41 and displayed.

  Further, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to the game history information but may be other information. For example, other information based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection sensors 44a to 44h may be used, such as the game ball entry information and the entry number information.

<Aspect 14>
Among the above-described thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, in the configuration in which main control device 60 can be switched between the game mode and the inspection mode and executed, the game mode is changed from the game mode to the inspection mode When the examiner executes a predetermined operation (hereinafter, also referred to as a “mode switching operation”) for shifting to the game, the game is executed at the timing when the game progressing process being executed is completed to the predetermined processing stage. The mode may be shifted to the inspection mode.

  Specifically, for example, when a mode switching operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is executed during execution of the game proceeding processing of the game mode, each game proceeding processing under execution ( Until the processing stage predetermined for each big hit lottery process, electronic combination open lottery process, payout process of winning balls, variation display process of symbols in the main display unit 45, opening and closing process of the open / close door 36b and the motorized product 34a, etc.) Complete the process Then, when the game progressing process is completed up to a predetermined processing stage, the processing after the processing stage is not executed and is in a standby state. Then, the game mode is shifted to the inspection mode at the timing at which all the game progressing processes being executed have been processed to the predetermined processing stage.

  According to such a configuration, the game mode is changed from the game mode to the inspection mode at a timing immediately after the mode switching operation is performed regardless of whether or not the game progressing process being executed has been completed to a predetermined processing stage. As compared with the configuration to be shifted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when shifting to the inspection mode.

  For example, it is assumed that the game mode is shifted from the game mode to the inspection mode at a timing immediately after the mode switching operation is executed regardless of whether or not the game progressing process being executed is completed to a predetermined processing stage. When adopted, when the mode switching operation is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing in the main display unit 45 as the game progress processing is executed in the game mode, the symbol of the main display unit 45 In the middle of the variable display, the mode is shifted to the inspection mode, which makes it difficult to control the stop timing of the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 14, for example, when the mode switching operation is executed during the period in which the symbol variation display process is being executed in the game mode, the symbol variation display process is performed. It will shift to inspection mode at the timing where processing is completed to the processing stage that it finishes and the symbol has stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the stop timing of the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

  It should be noted that when the inspection mode is shifted (returned) to the game mode, the game progress processing of the remaining processing stages scheduled to be executed before the transition to the inspection mode may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling that the expected game progression processing ends in an incomplete state.

  In addition, when the mode switching operation is executed during execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, transition from the game mode to the inspection mode is performed at the timing when all the processing of each of the game progress processing in progress is completed. It may be According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when restarting the game progression processing.

  In addition, when the mode switching operation is executed during execution of the game progress processing in the game mode, the main RAM 64 is information that enables the game execution processing to be interrupted and allows the interrupted game progress processing to be resumed. The game mode may be shifted to the inspection mode at the timing when the storage is completed and the storage is completed. According to such a configuration, since the pachinko machine 10 rapidly shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, it is possible to inspect many pachinko machines 10 in a short period of time.

  In addition, the mode switching operation for shifting from the game mode to the inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button. In addition, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is performed may be performed.

<Aspect 15>
Among the above-described thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, in the configuration in which the main control device 60 can execute by switching between the game mode and the inspection mode, 10 minutes after the transition to the inspection mode during the inspection mode When an automatic return condition of having passed is satisfied, a predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode (for example, an operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button) is not performed Even if it is, it is good also as composition which shifts to a game mode from inspection mode.

  According to such a configuration, when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode, the inspection mode is performed even if the predetermined operation for causing the inspection mode to shift to the game mode is not executed. Since it is configured to shift from the game mode to the game mode, it is possible to reliably suppress the return to the game mode without the execution of a predetermined operation. For example, even if the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 according to the gaming history information output in the inspection mode, the inspection mode is set even if the execution of the predetermined operation is forgotten When 10 minutes have passed since the transition, the game mode is restored, so that the player can not play a game with the pachinko machine 10 without the pachinko machine 10 returning to the game mode capable of executing the game progress processing. Can be suppressed.

  The automatic return condition is not limited to the condition that 10 minutes have elapsed since the transition to the inspection mode, and may be another mode. For example, the condition may be that 5 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode, or the condition that 10 minutes has elapsed since the inspection device 320 was removed from the inspection terminal 65.

  Further, the predetermined operation for shifting from the inspection mode to the game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button.

<Aspect 16>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, the main control device 60 is provided with a RAM clear button for initializing the main side RAM 64, and an operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the RAM clear button The information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized) when the “deletion operation” is executed.

  Furthermore, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to execute by switching between the game mode and the inspection mode. Then, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, for example, the state in the inspection mode or the state where the power is turned off after the transition to the inspection mode, while pressing the RAM clear button The information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be erased even when the erasing operation of pressing the power button is performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode but before the transition to the game mode, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64 is performed. However, since the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased, the erasing operation is erroneously executed to shift to the game mode in a state after shifting to the inspection mode and before shifting to the game mode. Even in the case of a drop, it is possible to suppress that the information is erased accidentally.

  For example, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the main RAM 64 is an operation to press the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the mode is shifted between the game mode and the inspection mode. In the configuration in which the operation for pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, the intention is to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button in order to shift from the inspection mode to the game mode. There is a possibility that the power button may be pressed while the RAM clear button is pressed. However, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, the erasing operation is performed such that the power button is pressed while the RAM clear button is pressed by mistake. Even in the case where the information has been lost, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

  More specifically, for example, when transitioning from the game mode to the inspection mode, the game progress processing being executed in the game mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress processing is returned to the inspection mode. When adopting a configuration to store information for resuming later in the main RAM 64, the intention is to press the power button while pressing the mode switching button to return from the inspection mode to the game mode, but the RAM clear button is mistakenly If the power button is pressed while pressing the button, the information for resuming the game progress processing is erased, and it is not possible to resume the game progress processing after returning to the inspection mode, and the player There is a risk of being disadvantaged. On the other hand, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, in the state after the transition to the inspection mode and before the transition to the game mode, the power button is pressed while erroneously pressing the RAM clear button to shift to the game mode Even if the user has pressed the key, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the main RAM 64 from being erroneously erased, so it is possible to suppress giving a disadvantage to the player. Can.

  The game history information may be stored in the main RAM 64. According to such a configuration, since it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated memory for storing the game history information, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition, when the deletion operation is executed, the gaming history stored in the main RAM 64 regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (the power on / off state and the state such as the game mode or the inspection mode). The information may not be erased, and only information (such as information stored for resuming the game progress processing) other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the game history information deviated from the predetermined defined range is intentionally erased.

  The erasing operation is not limited to the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the RAM clear button, but may be another mode. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
In the configuration in which main control device 60 can be switched between the game mode and the inspection mode and executed among the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, when main control device 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode In the inspection mode, while transmitting the game stop command which is a command indicating transition to the inspection mode and temporarily stopping the game progress processing to the voice light emission control device 90, It may be configured to be temporarily stopped. Specifically, for example, when transitioning to the inspection mode while executing the variable display of the symbol in the main display unit 45, the display in the main display unit 45 is extinguished, and the variation time of the symbol in the main display unit 45 is counted. Stop. Further, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, the game light emission control device 90 transmits a game resumption command, which is a command indicating that the game progress processing is resumed by shifting to the game mode. It may be configured to

  Then, the voice emission control device 90 temporarily suspends the effect being executed when the game stop command is received, and then temporarily suspends the effect when the game restart command is received. To resume. According to such a configuration, even when the main control device 60 shifts between the game mode and the inspection mode, the game progressing process (for example, the symbol on the main display unit 45) executed by the main control device 60 It becomes possible to synchronize the fluctuation display process) and the effect (for example, the fluctuation display process of the symbol in the symbol display device 41) controlled by the sound emission control device 90, and the player feels discomfort after transition to the game mode. Can be suppressed.

  The sound emission control device 90 may be configured not to stop the effect being executed even when the game stop command is received. Specifically, for example, when a game stop command is received during fluctuation display of a symbol in the symbol display device 41, the layer of fluctuation display of the symbol is maintained while control of fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is continued. And a layer of another image (for example, a black image) is displayed. However, since control of the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is continued, the variation display of the symbol is continued under the layer of the black image. Then, when the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 has elapsed, the variation display of the symbol is finished under the layer of the black image, but the symbol is in a small swing without stopping.

  Then, when a game resumption command is received from the main control device 60, the layer of the black image displayed above the layer of the symbol variation display is removed, and the symbol layer is displayed again. At this time, the main control device 60 shifts (returns) from the inspection mode to the game mode, and resumes the game progress processing (variable display of symbols in the main display section 45) which has been stopped.

  Then, main controller 60 resumes the fluctuation display of the symbols in main display unit 45 which has stopped counting the fluctuation time, and when the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, the fluctuation of the symbols in main display unit 45 When it is time to stop the game, a symbol stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the symbol stop command transmits the symbol stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 displays the symbol displayed in a mode of being slightly shaken in the symbol display device 41. Stop completely.

  According to such a configuration, when the main control device 60 is in the inspection mode, the display on the main display unit 45 is extinguished, and the display on the symbol display device 41 is a black image. Then, when the main control device 60 shifts from the inspection mode to the game mode, the fluctuation display of the symbols in the main display unit 45 which has stopped counting the fluctuation time is resumed, and the symbols in the symbol display device 41 are fluctuated. The display mode is a mode or a small swing. Then, the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is also stopped at the timing when the symbol in the main display unit 45 is stopped. That is, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation display of the symbol in the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. In addition, since the control of the effect being executed is not stopped even when the game stop command is received, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem caused by temporarily stopping the control of the effect being executed. As a defect, for example, when the control of the effect is resumed from the state where the control of the effect is temporarily stopped, a shift occurs in the timing of the plurality of effects when a plurality of effects are being executed, or the symbol display device Misalignment between the moving image displayed at 41 and the sound output from the speaker 46 may occur.

  When main controller 60 does not transmit the symbol stop command to sound emission controller 90 even when it is time to stop the variation of the symbol in main display unit 45, the symbol is selected. The fluctuation display of the symbols on the display device 41 continues to be a mode of small shaking, and thereafter, a fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 60 or a standby command transmitted when the suspension information is not stored. The symbol in the symbol display device 41 is stopped by receiving the symbol.

<Aspect 18>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, the gaming history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the predetermined time comes. Specifically, for example, the game mode may be switched to the inspection mode at 11: 10 pm, and game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to such a configuration, since the gaming history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at around 11:10 pm, which is after the closing of the game hall, the inspection of the pachinko machine 10 The person can inspect and confirm the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 immediately after the game hall is closed, without taking time and effort to shift each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

  The game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 in response to the reception of a predetermined signal from the hall computer. According to such a configuration, for example, while simultaneously shifting all the pachinko machines 10 installed in the game hall to the inspection mode, displaying the gaming history information of each pachinko machine 10 on each of the symbol display devices 41. Because the pachinko machine 10 examiner can inspect and check the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 quickly without spending time to shift each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode. It becomes.

<Aspect 19>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, the gaming history information may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 at all times. According to such a configuration, the player or the examiner can always check the game history information, and therefore, when a change such as the game history information deviates from the predetermined range or the like occurs immediately, the change is immediately made. It becomes possible to notice something unusual. As a result, the soundness of the game can be secured promptly.

<Aspect 20>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, a seven-segment display constituted by seven light emitting diodes is provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the game stored in the pachinko machine 10 in the seven-segment display. Information related to history information may be displayed. For example, when the main control device 60 shifts from the above-described game mode to the inspection mode, whether or not the character ratio, payout ratio (in normal mode), etc. stored in the pachinko machine 10 is within a predetermined range. It may be configured to display on the 7-segment display.

  More specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 shifts from the game mode to the inspection mode, after the “1” indicating that the display related to the character ratio is to be displayed on the 7-segment display, the character ratio Is within the predetermined range (specifically, when the character item ratio is 0.700 or less), "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, while the character ratio May be displayed on the 7-segment display when an error does not occur within the predetermined range. After the display related to the character ratio, “2” indicating that the continuous character ratio is displayed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and the continuous character ratio is within the predetermined range (specifically, Means that "O" meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display when the continuous character ratio is less than or equal to 0.600, while the continuous character ratio is not within the predetermined range. , "E" indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display. After performing the display on the continuous service ratio, “2” indicating that the display on the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is performed is displayed on the 7-segment display, and the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is within the predetermined range. (Specifically, when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is in the range of 0.60 to 0.70), “O” meaning OK is displayed on the 7-segment display, On the other hand, when the payout ratio (in the normal mode) is not within the predetermined range, “E” indicating an error may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to simply and quickly inspect the game history information such as the character ratio. Also, since the 7-segment display consumes less power, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is off, the game history information is inspected only with a small amount of power from a capacitor, battery, etc. provided inside the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to

<Aspect 21>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, the sound emission control device 90 may calculate the game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 transmits to the sound emission control device 90 a signal including the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 in the initial setting process. The sound emission control device 90 calculates gaming history information based on the acquired winning number data and the ball entry information of the gaming ball transmitted from the main control device 60, and the calculated gaming history information May be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  According to such a configuration, the voice emission control device 90 can not access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, or the voice emission control device 90 can be stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63. Even if the memory location (memory address) of the stored award ball number data can not be grasped, the award ball number stored in the award ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 of the voice emission control device 90 Number data can be acquired, and game history information can be calculated. Further, since the sound emission control device 90 calculates gaming history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load of the main control device 60 can be significantly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 capable of transitioning from the game mode to the inspection mode, but also to gaming machines capable of transitioning from the game mode to other modes. . For example, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a gaming state display mode capable of displaying the state of processing relating to a game, such as the state of the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, and the content of stored information stored. it can.

<Aspect 23>
The thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 but also to other types of gaming machines. For example, the present invention can be applied to a roll-type gaming machine such as a pachinko type slot machine. Specifically, for example, the number of game medals obtained by winning at the bonus time, the number of game medals obtained by the child role drawn during the normal section, and an advantageous section (AT, ART) different from the bonus For a configuration that calculates the ratio to the number of obtained gaming medals, displays the ratio on the liquid crystal display device, or outputs the ratio to the inspection machine, and displays the ratio on the display unit of the inspection machine It can apply.

<Aspect 24>
In the thirteenth embodiment and the other aspects described above, a part or all of the functions implemented by software (implemented by the CPU executing a program) may be implemented by hardware. For example, the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to include dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating gaming history information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing for calculating the game history information, and to generate an illegal operation such as the program for calculation being tampered with improperly and the correct game history information can not be calculated. It can be suppressed. The hardware may be configured by a digital circuit or may be configured by an analog circuit. If it is configured by an analog circuit, it is possible to further speed up arithmetic processing than a digital circuit.

<Aspect 25>
You may employ | adopt the structure which substituted suitably or combined 1 or several structure contained in said 13th Embodiment and said aspect 1 to aspect 24. FIG. For example, one or more configurations included in the above aspect 1 to 24 may be combined with one or more configurations included in the above thirteenth embodiment, and one or more included in the above aspect 2 to 24 A plurality of configurations may be combined with one or more configurations included in the above aspect 1, and one or more configurations included in the above aspects 3 to 24 and one or more included in the above aspect 2 The configurations may be combined, and one or more of the configurations included in the above-described aspects 4 to 24 may be combined with one or more configurations included in the above-described aspect 3, and the above-described aspects 5 to 24 May be combined with one or more configurations included in Aspect 4 above, and one or more configurations included in Aspect 6 to 24 above and Aspect 5 above One or more And one or more of the configurations included in the seventh to twenty-fourth aspects described above and one or more configurations included in the sixth aspect described above. 24 may be combined with one or more configurations included in Aspect 7 above, and one or more configurations included in Aspect 9 to 24 above and Aspect 8 above One or more configurations included may be combined, one or more configurations included in the above-described aspects 10 to 24 may be combined with one or more configurations included in the above-described aspect 9, And one or more configurations included in aspect 11 to aspect 24 and one or more configurations included in aspect 10 above, and one or more configurations included in aspect 12 to aspect 24 above. the above One or more configurations included in aspect 11 may be combined, and one or more configurations included in the above aspects 13 to 24 may be combined with one or more configurations included in the above aspect 12 Alternatively, one or more of the configurations included in the above aspect 14 to 24 may be combined with one or more of the configurations included in the above aspect 13, and one or more included in the above aspects 15 to 24. And one or more configurations included in the above aspect 14 and one or more configurations included in the above aspects 16 to 24 and one or more configurations included in the above aspect 15 And one or more of the configurations included in the above aspects 17 to 24 and one or more of the configurations included in the above aspect 16; One or more configurations included in aspect 24 may be combined with one or more configurations included in above aspect 17 and one or more configurations included in above aspect 19 to aspect 24 and above aspect 18 And one or more configurations included in the above aspect 20 to 24 and one or more configurations included in the above aspect 19 may be combined. One or more configurations included in the above aspect 21 to 24 and one or more configurations included in the above aspect 20 may be combined, and one or more configurations included in the above aspect 22 to 24 And one or more configurations included in the above-mentioned aspect 21. One or more configurations included in the above-mentioned aspects 23 to 24 and one or more configurations included in the above-mentioned aspect 22 May be combined, it may be combined one or more configurations and contained in one or more configurations and the embodiments 23 included in the embodiment 24. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by the replacement or combination of configurations. In addition, one or more configurations included in the thirteenth embodiment and aspects 1 to 24 described above may be combined with one or more configurations included in embodiments other than the thirteenth embodiment. Further, among the configurations included in the thirteenth embodiment and the aspects 1 to 24 described above, non-essential components can be appropriately omitted without departing from the scope of the present invention.

N. Fourteenth embodiment:
N1. Structure of gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. The components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 196 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourteenth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 further includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio light emission control device, a display control device, etc., are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable and a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so as not to be openable. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. An electric decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing at the time of the jackpot lottery, jackpot winning, reach occurrence, etc., performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores gaming balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine not shown and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to the game ball emission mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower tray 21 stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 20. At the bottom of the lower tray 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the gaming ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the gaming ball is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

  In front of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a rendering operation button 24 as an operation receiving unit is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25 (rotation operation), the game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operation handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided to detect the amount of rotational operation of the lens by changing the electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The gaming ball is fired from the gaming ball launch mechanism to the front of the gaming board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  In addition, on the left side in a front view of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a game ball emission button 26 for the player to operate is provided. When the game ball emission button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is emitted to the front of the game board with a predetermined emission intensity regardless of the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched to the front of the game board with the same shot intensity as when the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is fired by operating the gaming ball launch button 26, the gaming ball flows to the right of the gaming board in a front view and flows down the right side of the gaming board. That is, by operating the game ball launch button 26, the player can do so-called "right-hand strike". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and operates the game ball emission button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball emission button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 adopts the configuration disposed on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in a front view, but the game ball launch button 26 is disposed at another position It may be adopted. For example, as in the case of the weight button 25b, a configuration may be employed in which the game ball emission button 26 is disposed inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25. By doing this, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball launch button 26 with only the right hand.

  FIG. 197 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. Between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b, a guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism are guided to the induction rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are implanted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various features such as a windmill are disposed. The nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general winning opening 32 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and a plurality of the game winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the general winning opening 32, ten gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as a winning ball.

  The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance where game balls can enter. The first start opening 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as a winning ball, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed.

  The second start port 34 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, three game balls are paid out as winning balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. In addition, the second starting port 34 is provided with a motorized jack 34a.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the longitudinal direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the motorized accessory 34a. Specifically, when the gaming ball passes through gate 35, main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electric combination opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric combination 34a shifts to the open condition in which the electric combination is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting opening 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball having passed the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after the passage. It is possible to enter the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, even if the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the winning balls is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30, and an open / close door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state where the game ball can not enter the large winning opening 36a. When the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot or the jackpot is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode is a mode in which the open / close process of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter changes from the closed state in which the gaming ball can not enter into After being switched to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as a winning ball.

  In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display unit 37a and a second symbol display unit 37b. Each of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  The first symbol display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying a first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol variably displayed or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The first symbol display portion 37a is a display mode until the segment display unit causes the display corresponding to the lottery result to be displayed when a big hit lottery is performed with the game ball entering the first start opening 33 as a trigger. , To display the first symbol variation display or predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the gaming round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 is also referred to as the first starting opening gaming round.

  The second symbol display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol variably displayed or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. The second symbol display portion 37b is a display mode until the segment display unit causes a display corresponding to the lottery result to be displayed when a big hit lottery is performed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 as a trigger. , The second symbol variation display or predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is finished, the second symbol display unit 37 b causes the second symbol display unit 37 b to cause the segment display to stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the gaming round in which the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34 is also referred to as the second starting opening gaming round.

  Here, the time from the start of variation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display unit 37b to the stop display is shown Also called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also referred to as the first fluctuation time, and the second symbol display portion 37b The time from the start of the variation display of the second symbol to be displayed to the stop display is also referred to as a second variation time.

  The special view unit 37 further includes a first holding display unit 37c and a second holding display unit 37d formed of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b.

  The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of first start ports 33 to be held according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having entered the first starting opening 33 are held.

  The second hold display unit 37 d displays the number of held second starting ports 34 according to the color and the combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having entered the second starting opening 34 are held.

  The drawing unit 38 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the motor-operated combination open lottery is triggered by the passage of the through gate 35, the drawing unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to turn on, blink, or display a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light-emitting display. When the motorized combination opening lottery ends, the drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is constituted by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding to it. The round game is opened or closed until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls enter the variable winning device 36. It is a game which continues the open state of the door 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  The special view unit 37, the common view unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may be constituted by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result, such as a CRT or a dot matrix display.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display control device 100 controls the display content of the symbol display device 41. In addition, the structure of the display apparatus with which the variable display unit 40 is equipped is not limited to the symbol display apparatus 41, For example, you may be comprised by various display apparatuses, such as a plasma display apparatus, an organic electroluminescent display apparatus, or CRT.

  When the first symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 33, the symbol display device 41 changes the display of the symbol or the predetermined display accordingly. I do. Further, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device 41 changes the display of the symbol or the predetermined display accordingly. Display of. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to performing the variable display or predetermined display of the symbol triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and when the big hit is won. It also displays effects during the open / close execution mode to be transitioned. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 198 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41a which is variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. FIG. 198 (a) is an explanatory view showing a first liquid crystal symbol or a second liquid crystal symbol variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. Hereinafter, the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol may be collectively referred to as a liquid crystal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 198 (a), the symbol display device 41 displays the symbols indicating 1 to 8 in a variable manner as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, you may employ | adopt the symbol in which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows 1-8 of a number as a symbol by which a variable display is carried out.

  FIG. 198 (b) is an explanatory view showing a display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. As illustrated, the main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41 a. In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 198 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has periodicity from the top to the bottom or from the bottom A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 198 (b), after variation display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a stopped state on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is made, and if the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, the predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the effective line L It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbols of each symbol row The aspect of the variable display of symbols, such as number, can adopt various aspects.

  Here, the game time means from the start of the variable display of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b to the end of the variable display and the stop display, and until the stop display is ended, This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one big hit lottery every game time. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires the special information based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first symbol display portion 37a or the first per game cycle. After one of the two symbol display portions 37b variably displays the segment display, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device 41 After the symbol row is variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game is also referred to as unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by the fluctuation time which is the time from when the fluctuation display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), a liquid crystal display area NA is displayed on the display surface 41a. A symbol corresponding to the common drawing unit 38 is displayed in the liquid crystal common drawing display area NA. Specifically, a symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the electric combination opening lottery performed with the game ball passing through the through gate 35 is displayed. In the present embodiment, three numbers 1 to 8 are displayed vertically in the liquid crystal display area NA. The three vertically arranged numbers fluctuate with periodicity. After the variable display, it is displayed in a state in which the symbols of three figures are stopped vertically.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold game times based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 is displayed. The reserved game times are unexecuted game times, and the variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 Say the game times the display has not been started. The number of hold game times that can be held based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the first hold display area Ds1, a hold display corresponding to four hold game times, the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14 corresponding to the hold game times It is possible. When the holding game times are executed as the game times, the holding game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 are sequentially executed as the game times. In addition, the number of the hold game times that can be held based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the second hold display area Ds2 displays a hold display corresponding to four hold game times: a hold display Dm21 corresponding to the hold game time, a hold display Dm22, a hold display Dm23, and a hold display Dm24 It is possible. When the holding game times are executed as the game times, the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm 21 are sequentially executed as the game times. As illustrated, in the present embodiment, the hold display indicating the held game number is displayed as a character image imitating a ninja.

  As shown, a stage SG is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 or the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm21 are executed as game times, the character image displayed as the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 is the stage SG , And is displayed on the display surface 41a as an execution game times display Dp indicating a game time to be executed or a game time being executed (execution game times). When the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm11 or the holding display Dm21 become the execution gaming times, the holding game times displayed as the holding display Dm12 to the holding display Dm14, or as the holding display Dm22 to the holding display Dm24 The holding game times displayed are displayed as a holding display Dm11 to a holding display Dm13 and a holding display Dm21 to a holding display Dm23, respectively. Hereinafter, the hold display Dm and the execution game times display Dp are collectively referred to as a game times display.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), the display surface 41a blinks and lights in synchronization with the first symbol variation display and stop display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special drawing unit 37. The second synchronization display performing flickering display and lighting display synchronized with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the first synchronization display unit Sync1 for displaying and the second symbol display unit 37b of the special drawing unit 37 And a unit Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a performs variable display, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 performs blinking display, and when the first symbol display unit 37a performs stop display, the first synchronization display unit 371 performs the first display. (1) The synchronization display section Sync 1 lights up. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs variable display, the second synchronization display unit Sync2 performs blinking display, and when the second symbol display unit 37b performs stop display, the second synchronization display is performed. The unit Sync 2 lights up.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the liquid crystal flat panel display area NA, the first synchronization display unit Sync1, and the second synchronization display unit Sync2. A configuration may be employed in which the surface 41a does not display part or all of these displays.

N2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the present description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 199 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around the main control device 60, and includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by an element having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 as a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have some of the functions of the MPU 62. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, the payout control device 70 and the power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of the stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operation power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, it is provided in various entrances and through gates such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area PA has entered each entrance, and the gaming ball passes through the through gate. It is judged whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive 34b for opening and closing the electric combination 34a of the second start opening 34 An open / close door drive unit 48b for opening and closing the open / close door 48a and the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36 c such that the open / close door 36 b is opened or closed. Further, when the electric combination is opened as a result of the electric combination release lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric combination drive unit 44b such that the electric combination 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game session, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, round display in the main display portion 45 The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  Further, on the transmission side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and an audio emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the ball entry determination result. When main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, MPU 62 of main control board 61 refers to command information storage area 63 f of ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting hole 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 34 is specified The master ball controller 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the winning balls.

  A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied. Further, an operation handle 25 is connected to the emission control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on and the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, The game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, to the launch control device 80, a game ball launch button 26 is connected. When the game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14, and controls driving of the speaker 46. And control the display control apparatus 100. In addition, when the rendering operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and the rendering operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game rendering reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100 and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, on the basis of various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence or absence of reach, the contents of reach effect, and the contents of effects to be executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. In the present embodiment, the stop time which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, a unit game play time, which is the time required for one game play, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 200 is an explanatory view showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 45, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When distributing the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is to be generated when changing out a symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric combination opening counter C4 is used for the electric combination opening lottery of whether or not the electric combination 34a of the second starting opening 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. In the pending information storage area 64b, a first pending area Ra and a second pending area Rb are provided. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS at the time of entering the ball are pending information storage areas It stores in time series in the first reserved area Ra of 64b. In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, each value of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS at the time of the entered ball is the 1st in pending information storage area 64b. [2] are stored in chronological order in reserve area Rb.

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 1199 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is updated to the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33. The game ball is stored, and when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

  The value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the success or failure table stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not a jackpot will be made.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is such that the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 And move to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order acquired. Then, the big hit random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is checked with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / not table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 39 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the game ball entering when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. When the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the judgment processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Furthermore, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2. . In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether the reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 Are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the game. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra is moved to the determination process execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 Is determined whether or not to occur. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second reserve area Rb is moved to the determination process execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 Is determined whether or not to occur. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  The reach means that there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit may be established for some symbol rows among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed, and refers to the display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of the symbol corresponding to big hit means the combination of the same symbol in a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 198 (b), the symbol is first displayed in the symbol row Z1 in the stop state, and then the symbol same as Z1 is displayed in the symbol row Z3 in the stop state. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2 to become a reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the symbol column Z2.

  Also, for reach, while reach line is formed, while performing fluctuation display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, There is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or non-displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether the advance display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is to be performed using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the fluctuation time of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the fluctuation time of the symbols of the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, the details of the motor-operated product release counter C4 will be described. For example, the motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 465, and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, after the value of the motorized product release counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 64d is moved to the motorized product execution area 64e at a predetermined timing, the motorized product release area is opened in the motorized product execution area 64e. A lottery is performed to determine whether to control the motorized jack 34a in the open state using the value of the counter C4. For example, if C4 = 464, 465, the motorized accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 0-463, the motorized accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

  In addition, at least one of the acquired value of the big hit random number counter C1, the value of the big hit type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the motorized combination release counter C4 and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. It corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reserve area Ra and the second reserve area Rb, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation class counter CS is reserved Also called information.

  Next, the success or failure table will be described. The success or failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the big hit lottery, and in the case of the big hit lottery in the low probability mode, the probability table for the low probability mode is referred to At the time of the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the success or failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 matches the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 33. And the success / failure table to be compared with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34 as separate table data ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a hit table for the first start opening (for low probability mode), a hit or failure table for the first start opening (for high probability mode), a hit table for the second start opening (low) Four pass / fail tables for the probability mode) and the pass / fail table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode) are stored in the pass / fail table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 201 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of a hit / fail table for the first starting opening. FIG. 201 (a) shows a yes / no table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening, and FIG. 201 (b) shows a yes / no table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (a), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the first starting opening. There is. And the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the values of 0 to 1199. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 201 (b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1, which is the big hit, in the hit table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. It is done. And among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. Thus, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the big hit lottery is higher than that in the low probability mode.

  FIG. 202 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of a hit / fail table for the second starting opening. FIG. 202 (a) shows a pass / fail table (for low probability mode) for the second start port, and FIG. 202 (b) shows a pass / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second start port.

  As shown in FIG. 202 (a), five values of 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 serving as the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting opening. There is. And the values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of the values of 0 to 1199. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 202 (b), 16 values of 0 to 15 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1, which is the big hit, in the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode). It is done. And among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. Thus, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning a big hit in the big hit lottery is higher than that in the low probability mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the big hit random number counter C1 set as the big hit in the low probability mode hit / not table is the value of the big hit random number counter C1 set as the big hit in the high probability mode hit / not table. It is included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the probability that the high probability mode will be the jackpot is higher than the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary.

  In addition, although not adopted in the success or failure table in the present embodiment, "small hit" may be provided as a result of the big hit lottery.

  The "small hit" is a transition result to the opening / closing execution mode in which opening / closing of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but is a result of success or failure not to be the transition opportunity in both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "disengagement" is not a transition opportunity of the open / close execution mode, and is a result of success or failure not becoming a transition opportunity also in the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, plural types of jackpots can be set by providing differences between the following three modes or modes.
(1) The number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (the number of rounds)
(2) A mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (3) A lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends (low probability mode or high probability mode)

  As a mode of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, generation of the ball (winning) of the game ball to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches ten. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 1.6 seconds elapse or until the number of balls entered into the opening / closing door 36b becomes ten. Can.

  The open limit time for one open of the open / close door 36b and the open limit number for one open are the occurrence frequency of entering the variable winning device 36 between the start of the open / close execution mode and the end thereof. If the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the open mode of the open / close door 36b is optional. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may have a longer opening limit time for one opening or a greater number of opening limits for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning on the variable winning device 36 may occur.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning modes are not provided as the opening / closing execution mode, and the above-described high-frequency winning mode is performed during the opening / closing execution mode. That is, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches ten.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type is distributed using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 203 is an explanatory diagram of the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 203 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 203 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting opening is referred to in the case of a jackpot lottery based on the entry of gaming balls into the first starting opening 33, and the distribution table for the second starting opening is for the second starting opening 34 It is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball of.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first starting opening in FIG. 203 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R positive variation large hitting, 8R positive variation large hitting, 16R as a jackpot type based on the first starting opening 33. Jackpot, 8R Normal Jackpot is set.

  The mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the hit / off lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, the opening / closing execution mode After the end of the support mode is a jackpot that becomes a frequent support mode.

  The mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the success or failure lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening and closing execution mode After the end of the support mode is a jackpot that becomes a frequent support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to 16R probability variation big hits, and "14 to 27" are 8R normal big hits “28 to 33” corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and “34 to 39” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is highest for the 16R probability variation jackpot, next highest for the 8R probability variation jackpot, then 16R normal jackpot, and finally 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and attention to the game can be increased.

  As shown in the distribution table for the second start opening in FIG. 203 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R normal big hit is set as a jackpot type based on the second start port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to 16R probability variation big hits, and "28 to 39" are 8R normal big hits It corresponds to

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot becomes the case where the jackpot is reached based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, and 2) Different from the case where the game ball becomes a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 34, a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

  As described above, the MPU 62 carries out a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type The MPU 62 further determines the stop display on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2. Determine the display mode. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the motorized role 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening and closing execution mode ends, the firing of the gaming ball continues to the gaming area PA in the same manner. In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode so that the frequency at which the motorized part 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different in the probability of winning the winning combination in the electric combination opening lottery using the electric combination opening counter C4. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric-equipment opening in the electric combination opening lottery is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high frequency support mode, one opening time of the motorized jack 34a is set to be longer when the electronic winning combination is released than in the low frequency support mode.

  Although not employed in the present embodiment, when the electronic part release is elected in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the motorized part 34a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is ended after the open state is completed. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric-powered combination open lottery to the next electric combination open lottery is set relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. May be

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state which assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  FIG. 204 is an explanatory view showing the contents of a to-do table (to-be-operated table for lottery for open electric product) used when performing the electric-powered open item lottery.

  FIG. 204 (a) shows a table (for low frequency support mode) of a motorized jackpot release lottery used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 204 (a), in the electric combination opener's lottery table (for low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 as the value of the electric combination open counter C4 that becomes the electric combination open winning is A value has been set. As the values of the motorized product release counter C4 to be disengaged, 464 values of 2 to 465 are set. That is, when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low frequency support mode and the electric combination opening lottery is executed, the electronic combination opening winning is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electronic combination is elected in the low frequency support mode, the motorized jack 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

  FIG. 204 (b) shows a table for motor-operated combination open lottery used (high-frequency support mode) used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the electric combination open table for high or low support mode (for high frequency support mode), 462 pieces of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric combination open counter C4 that becomes the electric combination open winning A value has been set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as values of the motorized product release counter C4 to be disengaged. That is, when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high frequency support mode and the electric combination opening lottery is executed, the electronic combination opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electronic combination release is elected in the high frequency support mode, the motorized jack 34a opens once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  As described above, the high-frequency support mode is set by the table for the electric-powered open item opening lottery to have a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 than the low-frequency support mode. .

N3. Outline of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes, in a predetermined case, a suggestive effect that suggests an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be performed (hereinafter, also referred to as an effect time correlation amount). Specifically, the presentation time correlation amount is suggested by the display mode of the game play display such as the hold display Dm and the execution game play display Dp. In the present embodiment, a configuration is suggested in which the presentation time correlation amount is suggested by the display mode of the hold display Dm among the game times display. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggested effect indicates an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in one game run.

  Although details will be described later, in the case of a predetermined ninja character displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display area Ds2 as a hold display Dm indicating one holding game time in a normal state Change to the display of multiple ninja characters. Then, the number of ninja characters after change indicates predetermined numerical information as a presentation time correlation amount. In the present embodiment, an effect (a parting effect) in which a character of one ninja who is displayed as one holding game cycle is divided in a normal state is performed, and one ninja is triggered by the execution of the parting effect. Change the character of to the display of multiple ninja characters. That is, in the present embodiment, one ninja character is displayed as a character of a plurality of ninjas as a suggestive effect that suggests an effect time correlation amount that is an amount correlated with the time of the effect executed in one game time Adopt an alternate production effect that changes to When the separate effect is performed by the character of the ninja showing the hold indication Dm, the effect is also referred to as a hold game turn effect. In addition, although it demonstrates by the "other aspect" mentioned later, when performing a separate body production | presentation with the character of the ninja which shows the execution game times display Dp, the said production | presentation is also called an execution game circulation physical effect production. Hereinafter, the on-hold game circulation effect will be specifically described.

  FIG. 205 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the on-hold game circulation effect. In the present description, the hold display displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 will be described as an example.

  As shown in FIG. 205 (a), in the first hold display area Ds1, a hold display Dm11, a hold display Dm12 and a hold display Dm13 are displayed. That is, three game times triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 are held as three held game times.

  As shown in FIG. 205 (b), in a predetermined case, the character of the ninja showing the hold display Dm11 starts the alternation. After that, as shown in FIG. 205 (c), one ninja character showing the hold display Dm11 changes to a display of three ninja characters by dividing. The hold display Dm11 consisting of three ninja characters after the display change is also referred to as a numerical hold display Dm11a, a numerical hold display Dm11b, and a numerical hold display Dm11c. In the present embodiment, although the numerical suspension display Dm11a, the numerical suspension display Dm11b and the numerical suspension display Dm11c are displayed in different forms to the extent that the player can recognize the difference, each numerical display is the same. It may be displayed in the form of

  In the present embodiment, when the held reserved game times are subsequently executed as game times, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the game times is a jackpot, or although out of reach, a reach occurs. In any of the cases, when it is determined in the internal processing of the pachinko machine 10 to execute the on-hold game circulation effect, the on-hold game circulation effect is executed using the on-hold display indicating the on-hold game rotation .

  The pachinko machine 10 executes a predetermined effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a result notification suggestion effect effect) in the game time, when the held game time which executes the reserved game time alternative effect is executed as a game time.

  206 to 210 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the result notification suggestion effect. In the present description, when the holding game times for which the holding game turn-off effect has been executed is subsequently executed as the game times, it is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game times becomes reach occurrence (disengagement) The result notification suggestion effect will be described.

  In (a) of FIG. 206, the hold display Dm11 on which the hold game turn-to-place effect is executed is displayed as numerical hold displays Dm11a to Dm11c, and the display surface at the time when the game turn operation of the running game round is ended. It shows the situation of 41a. In the main display area MA, the result of the jackpot lottery of game times corresponding to the execution game times display Dp on the stage SG is displayed. As illustrated, the symbol displayed in the main display area MA is "3.4.1", and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is out of order.

  FIG. 206 (b) shows the appearance of the display surface 41a immediately after the start of a new game play. That is, the first held liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the hold display Dm11 displayed as the numerical hold display Dm11a to Dm11c in FIG. 206 (a) is executed as a game time and displayed in the main display area MA It shows that the variable display of is executed. As illustrated, the suspension display Dm11 displayed as the numerical suspension display Dm11a to Dm11c in FIG. 206 (a) moves to the stage SG, and the execution game times display Dp1, the execution game times display Dp2, and the execution game, respectively. It is displayed as the times display Dp3. At this time, the numerical suspension displays Dm11a to Dm11c indicating one game play are integrally moved to the stage SG, and displayed as execution game play displays Dp1 to Dp3.

  FIG. 207 (a) is a state in which the first liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA is in the reach state and in the state of pseudo stop display (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo-simulation”) (Also referred to as a stopped state). In the pseudo stop state, the liquid crystal symbol is not completely stopped but slightly fluctuates, and in the internal processing of the pachinko machine 10, the liquid crystal symbol is in a state of fluctuating display. The simulated stop state of the liquid crystal symbol is a display state for causing the player to recognize as if the liquid crystal symbol has shifted to the stop display in the effect. Further, in the pseudo stop state, the symbols displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a (or the second symbol display portion 37b) continue to fluctuate.

  As shown in FIG. 207 (a), in the main display area MA, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in a pseudo stopped state in the reach state of "7, 6, 7". By artificially stopping the liquid crystal symbol with a symbol indicating "disappearance" (including reach) of the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the relevant game round is missed for the player. It can be recognized as

  After the first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA shifts to the pseudo stop state in the reach state of “7 · 6 · 7”, the result notification suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 207 (b), the character of the ninja corresponding to the executed game times display Dp1 displayed on the stage SG is displayed in the first liquid crystal symbol column Z2 The effect is to move on the image of the number "6" and try to change the number "6" to the number "7". That is, an effect is performed that suggests to the player that the first liquid crystal symbol may change from "reach" to "big hit" as a lottery result of the big hit lottery. By performing such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  In FIG. 208 (a), the numeral "6" displayed in the symbol row Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol is also the numeral "7" by the effect using the execution game times display Dp1 shown in FIG. 207 (b). It shows how it did not change. That is, in the main display area MA, the symbol for the first liquid crystal is displayed while being pseudo-stopped in the reach state of “7 · 6 · 7”. By performing such an effect, it is possible to impart tonation to the player's sense of expectation.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 208 (b), the character of the ninja corresponding to the execution game times display Dp2 displayed on the stage SG is displayed on the first liquid crystal symbol row Z2 as a result notification suggestion effect The effect of trying to change the number "6" to the number "7" by moving on the image of the number "6" is executed. That is, an effect is performed that suggests to the player that the first liquid crystal symbol may change from "reach" to "big hit" as a lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  In FIG. 209 (a), the numeral "6" displayed in the symbol row Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol also by the effect using the execution game times display Dp2 shown in FIG. 208 (b) is the numeral "7". It shows how it did not change. That is, in the main display area MA, the symbol for the first liquid crystal is displayed while being pseudo-stopped in the reach state of “7 · 6 · 7”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), as a result notification suggestion effect, the character of the ninja corresponding to the execution game times display Dp3 displayed on the stage SG is displayed in the first liquid crystal symbol row Z2 The effect of trying to change the number "6" to the number "7" by moving on the image of the number "6" is executed. That is, an effect is performed that suggests to the player that the first liquid crystal symbol may change from "reach" to "big hit" as a lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  In FIG. 210 (a), the numeral "6" displayed in the symbol row Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol also by the effect using the execution game times display Dp3 shown in FIG. 209 (b) is the numeral "7". It shows how it did not change. At this time, the first liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA shifts from the pseudo stop state to the stop display state, with the symbol of “7 · 6 · 7”. That is, the first liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA is in a completely stopped state.

  The player recognizes that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game is out by recognizing that the first liquid crystal symbol has completely stopped with the symbol corresponding to "off" as a result of the jackpot lottery. recognize. Alternatively, after stopping with the symbol corresponding to "disengagement" as a result of the big hit lottery, the gaming round ends, and as shown in FIG. 210 (b), by recognizing that the next gaming round has started Recognize that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the previous game run is "off".

  As described above, the number of numerically reserved displays (in the above example, Dm11a, Dm11b, and Dm11c) displayed in response to the separate-body effect suggests the number of result notification suggestion effects to be executed in the game. The player recognizes the number of numerically held displays, thereby recognizing the number of executions of the result notification suggestion effect performed in the game period, and deduces the time in which the effect is performed in the game period. For example, it is estimated that the time for which the effect is performed is longer in the case of three being displayed than in the case where the number of numerical hold displays is displayed two, and four is more than the case where three are displayed. It is estimated that the time when the effect is displayed is longer when it is displayed. In other words, the number of numerical hold displays in the present embodiment suggests an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in the game time. As described above, the amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed is also referred to as the effect time correlation amount. The presentation time correlation amount in the present embodiment is the number of the result notification suggestion effects performed in one game cycle, and indicates the number of the result notification suggestion effects by the numerical hold display which is triggered by the separate effect. .

  Next, about the result alerting suggestion effect performed when the result of the big hit lottery in the said game turn will be a big hit, when the held game times for which the hold game turn-off effect is executed is executed as the game turn after that explain.

  The number of times suggested as a production time correlation amount when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game turn becomes a jackpot when the hold game turn at which the hold game turn-off effect is executed is subsequently executed as a game turn When the same number of result indication suggestion effects as the number of the intentional hold indication is executed in the game turn, the result indication suggestion effects of the number different from the number of the numerical hold indication suggested as the presentation time correlation amount are in the game turn It may be executed.

  FIGS. 211 and 212 show the case where the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, and the same number of result notification suggestion effects as the number of the numerical hold indication suggested as the presentation time correlation amount are executed in the game It is explanatory drawing explaining the result alerting | reporting suggestion effect of.

  FIG. 211 (a) shows the state of the display surface 41a after the notification indication effect is performed as a result of using the execution game times display Dp1 and the execution game times display Dp2. That is, the first liquid crystal design symbol in the main display area MA is maintained at "7, 6 and 7" by the result notification suggestion effect using the execution game number display Dp1, and the result notification suggestion effect using the execution game number display Dp2 Also in this case, the first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA is maintained at “7 · 6 · 7”. On stage SG, a character of a ninja corresponding to the executed game times display Dp3 is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the character of the ninja corresponding to the execution game times display Dp3 displayed on the stage SG is displayed in the first liquid crystal symbol row Z2 as a result notification suggestion effect The effect of trying to change the number "6" to the number "7" by moving on the image of the number "6" is executed. That is, an effect is performed that suggests to the player that the first liquid crystal symbol may change from "reach" to "big hit" as a lottery result of the big hit lottery.

  In FIG. 212 (a), the numeral “6” displayed in the symbol row Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol changes to the numeral “7” by the effect using the execution game times display Dp2 shown in FIG. 211 (b) Shows the situation. At this time, the first liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA shifts from the pseudo stop state of “7 · 6 · 7” to the stop display state of “7 · 7 · 7”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), the character of "big hit" is displayed on the display surface 41a, and the player is informed that the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the game is a big hit.

  In this way, by executing the on-hold game circulation separate effect production and the result notification suggestion effect, it is reported that the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit without executing the on-hold game circulation personality effect and the result notification suggestion effect. In comparison, it is possible to impart intonation a feeling of expectation and tension of the player, and also to provide the player with a sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment.

  In FIG. 213 to FIG. 215, the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and a number of result notification suggestion effects different from the number of the numerical hold display suggested as the presentation time correlation amount are executed in the game round It is explanatory drawing explaining the result alerting | reporting suggestion effect in a case.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (a), in the on-hold game circulation effect, the on-hold indication Dm11 is displayed as three numerical on-hold indications Dm11a to Dm11c, and on-hold game times corresponding to the on-hold indication Dm11 are executed as game times. At this time, the numerical suspension displays Dm11a to Dm11c move to the stage SG and are displayed as three executed game times displays Dp1 to Dp3.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), the character of the ninja corresponding to the execution game times display Dp1 displayed on the stage SG is displayed on the first liquid crystal symbol row Z2 as a result notification suggestion effect The effect of trying to change the number "6" to the number "7" by moving on the image of the number "6" is executed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 214 (a), the number "6" displayed in the symbol row Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol does not change to the number "7" even by the effect using the executed game times display Dp1.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 214 (b), the character of the ninja corresponding to the execution game times display Dp2 displayed on the stage SG is the number “6” displayed in the first liquid crystal symbol column Z2 The effect of trying to change the number "6" to the number "7" is performed.

  In FIG. 215 (a), the number “6” displayed in the symbol row Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol changes to the number “7” by the effect using the execution game times display Dp2 shown in FIG. 214 (b) Shows the situation. At this time, the first liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA shifts from the pseudo stop state of “7 · 6 · 7” to the stop display state of “7 · 7 · 7”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the character of "big hit" is displayed on the display surface 41a, and the player is informed that the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the game is a big hit. In addition, in the case of the result indication suggestion effect of the pattern, the ninja character corresponding to the executed game times display Dp3 ends the game run with the stage SG remaining.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, a number of result notification suggestion effects different in number from the number of numerically held displays suggested as the presentation time correlation amount are executed in the game round , And may report the result of the jackpot lottery.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is executed as a game run, a game run for which a jackpot lottery result is “big hit” or reach (disengagement) is held as a hold game time In the case where it is determined that the separate effect is to be executed, the on hold display corresponding to the on hold game is executed on the on hold display to display the numerical on hold display, and the on hold game is When the game is executed as a game run, a result notification suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, a feeling of expectation can be given to the result of the jackpot lottery for the player who recognizes that the on-hold game circulation individualization effect has been executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is reach occurrence (disengagement), the result notification suggestion effect of the same number of times as the number of the ninja characters shown as the numerical suspension display is executed in the game Therefore, when the player performs the on-hold game turn-off effect and recognizes the character of the ninja who splits on as the on-hold indication, the same number of informing suggestions on the same number of times as the number indicated on the on-off indication is indicated. Recognize that will be executed.

  However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, there may be a case in which informing repetition effects are executed in the game round in a different number of times from the number of ninja characters shown as the numerical hold display. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the notification suggestion effect is executed as a result of the number of times indicated by the number of numerically held display, the result indication suggestion of the number of times different from the suggested number of times By executing the effect, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. In addition, the player who recognizes the number of the numerically held display displayed in response to the held game turnover game effect estimates the time required to execute the notification suggestion effect as a result of the number of times corresponding to the number of the numerically held display. While watching the effect, expect the result of the jackpot lottery while roughly assuming the time until the end of the game play. For such a player, by ending the game play by executing the result notification suggestion effect a number of times less than the suggested number of times, it is felt as if the time of the game play initially set has been shortened. It can be given and can give unexpectedness.

  In addition, when the on-hold game cycle in which the on-off game turn-off effect is executed is executed as the on-game time, and the result informing suggestion effect is executed, a result informing effect on the player according to any on-off game cycle display Dp Can give a sense of urgency such as whether the jackpot will be notified.

  Furthermore, when the execution game times display Dp becomes one remaining display (for example, the state of FIG. 209 (a)), the result by the big hit lottery after the result notification suggestion effect by the execution game times display Dp is executed Since it becomes clear whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot or a jackpot, the player has a great sense of expectation and a sense of urgency in the result notification suggestion effect by the last executed game times display Dp. Specifically, it corresponds to whether the display of the main display area MA after the effect by the last executed game times display Dp is executed becomes the display corresponding to the jackpot (for example, the state of FIG. 212 (a)) In the case where the result of the jackpot lottery is notified when the display result of the jackpot is notified, such as when the result of the jackpot lottery is notified that the display of the display surface 41a is displayed as being displayed (for example, the state of FIG. 210 (a)) The player feels a greater pleasure than in the case where the on-hold game turnout is not executed, and in the case of a release, he is more discouraged than in the case where the on-hold game turnout is not performed. . Therefore, by executing the on-hold game circulation effect, the player is given a greater sense of expectation or tension about the result of the jackpot lottery as compared to the case where the on-hold game circulation effect is not performed. As well as being able to, it is possible to impart a greater feeling of indulgence and to improve the interest of the game.

N4. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, an example of the specific process performed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. The process executed in main controller 60 will be described first, and then the process executed in audio light emission control device 90 and display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S10201, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10202.

  In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10203.

  In step S10203, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the motorized combination release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4, and when their respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10204. The variation type counter CS updates its value in the normal processing (FIG. 222) described later.

  In step S10204, the winning opening process for the starting opening accompanying the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the winning process for the starting opening in step S10204 will be described later. After executing step S10204, the process proceeds to step S10205.

  In step S10205, a winning process for through is accompanied by a winning on through gate 35. Details of the through winning process in step S10205 will be described later. After executing step S10205, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Prize process for starting opening>
Next, winning processing for the starting opening will be described. The winning combination processing for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 216: S10204).

  FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting opening. In step S 10301, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start opening 33 whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start opening 33 (starting combination). If it is determined in step S10301 that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 33 (S10301: YES), the processing proceeds to step S10302, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Set Then, it progresses to step S10303.

  In step S10303, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 33 to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10304.

  In step S10304, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as first start pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10309.

  If it is determined in step S10301 that the gaming ball has not won the first starting hole 33 (S10301: NO), the process proceeds to step S10305 and whether or not the gaming ball has won the second starting opening 34 2 Determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S10305 that the gaming ball has won the second starting hole 34 (S10305: YES), the process proceeds to step S10306, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls. Set Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10307. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10305 that the gaming ball has not won the second starting opening 34 (S10305: NO), the winning processing for the main starting opening is ended.

  In step S10307, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 as a signal. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10308.

  In step S10308, the start pending count RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start pending count RbN), which is a value stored in the pending count storage area of the second reserve area Rb, is read, and the second start pending count RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second starting reservation number RbN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the second starting opening 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10309.

  In step S10309, it is determined whether or not the start reservation pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S10304 or step S10308 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). In step S10309, when the start reservation number N is not less than the upper limit (S10309: NO), the winning process for the starting opening is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S10309, when the start reservation number N is less than the upper limit (S10309: YES), the process proceeds to step S10310, and 1 is added to the start reservation number N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S10311. And 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserve number storage area (hereinafter, referred to as the total reserve number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Then, it progresses to step S10312.

  In step S10312, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3 updated in step S10203 (FIG. 216), and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 222) are The first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding suspension area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations obtained by adding 1 in step S10310. Specifically, when the first start reservation number RaN is set as the processing target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the big hit random number counter updated in step S10203 (FIG. 216) Each value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first storage area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start storage number RaN to which 1 is added in step S10310. If the second start reservation number RbN is set as the processing target, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter updated in step S10203 (FIG. 216) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second reserve area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start reserve number RbN to which 1 is added in step S10310. After executing step S10312, the process proceeds to step S10313.

  In step S10313, an earlier determination process is performed. The first determination process is based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS, a hit / fail decision result (lottery result) for the big hit lottery, It is the processing of executing the determination of the type, the presence or absence of reach, the fluctuation time of the game times, etc. before the hold information becomes the target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the prior determination process will be described later. After executing step S10313, the process proceeds to step S10314.

  In step S10314, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS Set) as a hold command.

  The suspension command suspends the determination result (destination determination information) by the prior determination processing based on the occurrence of winnings to the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the pending information acquired based on the winnings. This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm the information before the information is subjected to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the command output process (FIG. 222: step S10803) of the normal process described later.

  Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased in the number of hold. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make it change according to. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning on the second start opening 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of the hold in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make it change according to. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

  After executing step S10314, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 217: S10313) of a winning process for the starting opening.

  FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the destination determination process, based on the hold information, the hold information is mainly used to determine whether or not the jackpot is selected, the type of the jackpot, whether or not the reach has occurred, and whether the game time has changed. This processing is executed before the jackpot lottery target by the control device 60 is performed.

  In step S10401, a jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed. The said process is a process which performs the determination of the success or failure of a big hit lottery, the determination of the kind of big hit, and the presence or absence of generation | occurrence | production of reach. Details of the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing step S10401, the process proceeds to step S10402.

  In step S10402, fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. The said process is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation time of game time. Details of the fluctuation time information acquisition process will be described later.

  After executing step S10402, the present destination determination process ends.

<Big hit · reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing will be described. The jackpot / reach information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the prior determination processing (FIG. 218: S10401).

  FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing a jackpot / reach information acquisition process. In step S10501, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning of the starting opening in the winning opening process for starting opening (FIG. 217) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10502, and the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed by the winning before the current winning is read out from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit occurs prior to the big winning lottery by the current winning. Thus, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time is determined.

  In step S10502, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current prize is executed as a game time (S10502: YES), the process proceeds to step S10503 and a hit / fail table storage area Referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10505, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in step S10502, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time (S10502: NO), the process proceeds to step S10504 and for high probability mode As a result of referring to the success or failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10505, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S10505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S10505: YES), the process proceeds to step S10506, and is stored in the storage area by winning to the current starting opening. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10507, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 which has been the current distribution target is obtained based on the winning of the first start opening 33, the first start opening distribution table is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing step S10507, the process proceeds to step S10508.

  In step S10508, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. In step S10508, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probable variation jackpot (S10508: YES), the process proceeds to step S10509, and the probable variation jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10508 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S10508: NO), the process proceeds to step S10510, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S10505 that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the big hit (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10511 and is stored in the storage area by winning to the current starting opening The value of the reached reach random number counter C3 is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10512, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10513, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the reach occurrence.

  In step S10513, when it is determined that the reach has been generated (S10513: YES), the process proceeds to step S10514, and the reach generation information is stored in the first determination process result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10513 that the reach has not been generated (S10513: NO), the first determination process is ended.

<Variation time information acquisition process>
Next, fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the prior determination process (FIG. 218: S10402).

  FIG. 220 is a flowchart of the fluctuation time information acquisition process. In step S10601, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the storage area by winning on the starting opening in the starting opening winning processing (FIG. 217) is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10602.

  In step S10602, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the current game run has been won. Specifically, based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery determined by the jackpot / reach information acquisition process, the presence or absence of the jackpot is determined, and if it is the jackpot (S10602: YES), the process proceeds to step S10603.

  In step S10603, with reference to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. After executing step S10603, the process proceeds to step S10604.

  In step S10604, the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the destination determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the fluctuation time information acquisition process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S10602 that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S10602: NO), the process proceeds to step S10605, and it is determined whether reach occurs. When it is determined in step S10605 that the reach occurs (S10605: YES), the process proceeds to step S10606.

  In step S10606, the fluctuation generation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation generation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10604, and the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the fluctuation time information acquisition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S10605 that the reach does not occur in the current game run (step S10605: NO), the process proceeds to step S10607, and the reach non-occurrence variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10604, and the acquired fluctuation time information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then the fluctuation time information acquisition processing is ended.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN decreases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. The variation time may increase as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases, or may be set to be constant without depending on the respective hold numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach non-occurrence so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode A variation time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected may differ between the jackpot winning time and the outreach time. Good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the regular jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the outreach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete outlier may be individually set.

<Through winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described. The winning combination processing for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 216: step S10205).

  FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing through winning processing. In step S10701, it is determined whether the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 or not. In step S10701, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 (S10701: YES), the process proceeds to step S10702, and whether or not the number of holdings SN of bonus items is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) Determine if It should be noted that the number-of-items-reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings on the through gate 35 which has been suspended for performing the electric combination opening symbol. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of bonus items held SN is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10701 that the gaming ball has not won in the through gate 35 (S10701: NO), the winning processing for this through is ended.

  If it is determined in step S10702 that the bonus product number SN is less than the upper limit (less than 4) (S10702: YES), the process proceeds to step S10703 and 1 is added to the bonus product number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10704.

  In step S10704, the value of the motorized product release counter C4 updated in step S10203 (FIG. 216) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the power storage area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through winning process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10702 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is not less than the upper limit value (S10702: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of number of bonus items reserved number SN is the upper limit value The through winning processing is ended without storing the value of the bonus release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is performed.

  FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S10801, start-up processing is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device accompanying power on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step S10802.

  In step S10802, a start-up command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demonstration moving image upon power-on. Then, it progresses to step S10803.

  In step S10803, output data such as a start-up command set in step S10802 or a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process previously executed is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 70. Also, when commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. After executing step S10803, the process proceeds to step S10804.

  In step S10804, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10805.

  In step S10805, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S10806. In step S10806, a game number control process is executed to control the game in each game number. In the game number control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a, and the second result display unit 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S10806, the process proceeds to step S10807.

  In step S10807, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10808.

  In step S10808, a process for supporting the combination for driving and controlling the motorized part 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is performed. In the electric support process, it is determined whether or not the motor-operated part 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electronic mail support will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10809.

  In step S10809, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly, the start of the command output processing of step S10803). That is, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has come. If it is determined in step S10809 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S10809: NO), the next normal processing execution timing is reached in steps S10810 and S10811. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S10810, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S10811, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10809 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S10809: YES), the process returns to step S10803 and each process from step S10803 to step S10808 is performed. Run.

  In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S10803 to step S10808 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly executing updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using such remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game number control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 222: S10806).

  FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step S10901, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the opening period flag, the open / close execution mode flag, and the ending period flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing described later, and is turned OFF when ending the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

  When it is determined in step S10901 that any one of the opening period flag, the open / close execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S10901: YES), it is determined that the special gaming state is in progress. The game play control process ends without executing any of them. That is, when in the special game state, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has a winning. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the special game mode is not in progress (S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902.

  In step S10902, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is in the variable display mode. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variation display flag of the variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display in progress flag is turned on when the variable display is started for one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display is ended.

  If it is determined in step S10902 that the main display unit 45 is not displaying the variable display (S10902: NO), the process proceeds to the processing for starting the game play of step S10903 to step S10905. In step S10903, it is determined whether the total pending number CRN is "0". The case where the total reserve number CRN is "0" means that the reserve number for start is "0" for any of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step S10903 that the total number of held pieces CRN is "0" (S10903: YES), the game play control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10903 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S10903: NO), the process proceeds to step S10904.

  In step S10904, data setting processing for setting data stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10905. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S10905, the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the change start process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10906.

  In step S10906, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by one. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S10906, the game play control process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S10902 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S10902: YES), the processing for the game play progression in step S10907 to step S10909 is executed.

  In step S10907, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game number has elapsed. The fluctuation time is, as described above, a time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows are stopped, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S10907, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in a fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 226) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  If it is determined in step S10907 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S10907: NO), the process advances to step S10908 to execute fluctuation display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit according to the current game run. After executing step S10908, the game number control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S10907 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S10907: YES), the process advances to step S10909 to execute fluctuation end processing. In the end process of variation, the result display unit is displayed so that the form of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start process (FIG. 225) described later is displayed on the result display unit according to the current game round. Display control. After executing step S10909, the game play control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 223: S10904).

  FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S11001, it is determined whether the hold area that is the processing target for executing the data setting process is the first hold area Ra. Specifically, of the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 200), the hold information stored first (the hold in the first area of the first hold area Ra) Information) is stored first in the first holding area of the second holding area Rb among the holding information stored chronologically in the second holding area Rb (FIG. 200) When it is stored in the hold area prior to the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, the hold information among the hold information stored first in the first hold area Ra is the first among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb than the hold information first stored among the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra. If the stored hold information is stored earlier in the hold area, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S11001, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S11001 that the pending area to be processed is the first pending area Ra (step S11001: YES), the data setting process for the first pending area in steps S11002 to S11007 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11001 that the pending area to be processed is not the first pending area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb (step S11001: NO) And the data setting process for the second reserved area in steps S11008 to S11013.

  In step S11002, the first start reservation number RaN of the first suspension area Ra is decremented by one, and then the process proceeds to step S11003, where the total suspension number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11004. In step S11004, the data stored in the first area of the first reserve area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S11005.

  In step S11005, processing is performed to shift data stored in the storage area of the first hold area Ra. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S11005, the process proceeds to step S11006.

  In step S11006, when the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying which of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is the target of the start of the current variable display. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11007.

  In step S11007, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the reserve area subject to the current data shift corresponds to the first reserve area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first starting port 33. A shift command including information on the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S11007 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S10803 in the normal process (FIG. 222). The voice light emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings to the display control device 100 based on the received shift command. Do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  If it is determined in step S11001 that the pending area to be processed is not the first pending area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb (step S11001: NO), It progresses to step S11008.

  In step S11008, the second start reservation number RbN of the second storage area Rb is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step S11009. In step S11009, the total pending number CRN is decremented by one, and in step S11010, the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S11011.

  In step S11011, processing is performed to shift data stored in the storage area of the second reserve area Rb. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S11011, the process proceeds to step S11012.

  In step S11012, when the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step S11013.

  In step S11013, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the reserved area which is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including information on the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S11013 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10803 in the normal process (FIG. 222). The voice emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of held pieces based on the received shift command. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 223: S10905).

  FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the change start process. In step S11101, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, and in the present embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the open / close execution mode relating to winning of the probability variation jackpot. After that, it is usually turned off when the jackpot is won. When it is determined in step S11101 that the mode is the high probability mode (S11101: YES), the process proceeds to step S11102.

  In step S11102, the determination of success or failure is performed with reference to the success or failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the high probability mode for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 201 (b). Determine if Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11104. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11101 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S11101: NO), the process proceeds to step S11103.

  In step S <b> 11103, the determination of success or failure is performed with reference to the success or failure table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the low probability mode success or failure table shown in FIG. 201 (a). Determine if Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11104.

  In step S11104, it is determined whether the result of the pass / fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S11102 or step S11103 is a big hit. In step S11104, if the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit (S11104: YES), in step S11105 to step S11112 to set the processing and stop result for setting the game result in the case of a big hit Execute the process of

  In step S11105, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11105 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S11105: NO), the process proceeds to step S11106 to refer to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 203 (a)). Then, a distribution determination is made. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is either the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot Determine if it is included in

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11105 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S11105: YES), the process proceeds to step S11107, and the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 203 (b)) Perform the distribution judgment with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R normal jackpot. After the process of step S11106 or step S11107 is performed. The process proceeds to step S11108.

  In step S11108, it is determined whether the type of jackpot distributed in step S11106 or step S11107 is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S11108 that the game result is a probability change jackpot (S11108: YES), the process proceeds to step S11109.

  In step S11109, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the big variation is the state in which the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b displays any stop result in the current game round that will win the big variation hit It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation big hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S11106 or step S11107 The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S11109, the process proceeds to step S11110.

  In step S11110, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S11106 or step S11107 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON when the 16R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the 8R probability variation flag is turned ON when the 8R probability variation jackpot is hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11116.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11108 that the jackpot type allocated in step S11106 or step S11107 is not a probability variation jackpot (S11108: NO), that is, if the allocated jackpot type is normally jackpot, the step It progresses to S11111.

  In step S11111, a stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process fluctuates in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round where a normal jackpot is won. It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S11106 or step S11107 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S11111, the process proceeds to step S11112.

  In step S11112, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S11106 or step S11107 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON when the 16R normal jackpot is hit, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON when the 8R normal jackpot is hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11116.

  If it is determined in step S11104 that the result of the jackpot lottery in step S11102 or step S11103 is not a jackpot win (S11104: NO), the process proceeds to step S11113, and it is determined whether reach occurs in the game time. Specifically, in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as the reach occurrence. It is determined whether or not you

  When it is determined in step S11113 that the reach occurs in the game run (S11113: YES), the process proceeds to step S11114.

  In step S11114, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is the process for setting which stop result is displayed in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game round where the stop result for the reach is to be displayed. is there. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S11114, the process proceeds to step S11116.

  When it is determined in step S11113 that the reach does not occur in the game run (S11113: NO), the process proceeds to step S11115.

  In step S11115, stop result setting processing for removal is executed. The stop result setting process for out of time ends the fluctuation display in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round where the disconnection result is obtained. Is a process for setting the Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for disconnection at the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S11115, the process proceeds to step S11116.

  In step S11116, setting processing of fluctuation time is executed. The setting process of the fluctuation time is to set fluctuation time which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b based on the presence or absence of the big hit and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Processing. Details of the setting process of the fluctuation time will be described later. After executing step S11116, the process proceeds to step S11117.

  In step S11117, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11117 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S11117: NO), the process proceeds to step S11118 to set a first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, and the presence or absence of reach has occurred. And information of the fluctuation time set in step S11116.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11117 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S11117: YES), the process proceeds to step S11119 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence And information of the fluctuation time set in step S11116. After executing step S11118 or step S11119, the process proceeds to step S11120.

  In step S11120, a type command is set. The type command includes information on presence or absence of reach occurrence as a result of the presence or absence of the jackpot and the distribution determination. That is, as the type command, information of 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information of presence or absence of reach occurrence as the type information of jackpot, and outlier result Information is included.

  The fluctuation command and type command set in step S11118 to step S11120 are transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S10803 in the normal process (FIG. 222). The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect in the game turn based on the received command for variation and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S11120, the process proceeds to step S11121.

  In step S11121, the variation display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game round among the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is identified as the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started, If the second result display unit flag is ON, it is determined that the result display unit corresponding to the current game is the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S11121, the variation start process is ended.

<Setting process of fluctuation time>
Next, setting processing of the fluctuation time will be described. The setting process of the fluctuation time is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 225: S11116) of the fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the fluctuation time. In step S11201, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11202.

  In step S11202, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the current game run has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON (S11202: YES), the process proceeds to step S11203.

  In step S11203, with reference to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11204, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  If it is determined in step S11202 that the jackpot lottery relating to the current gaming round is not winning (S11202: NO), the process proceeds to step S11205, and it is determined whether reach is generated in the current gaming round. Since the main process (S11205) is executed when the big hit lottery relating to the current game round is not won in step S11202 above, in step S11205, reach occurs among the game rounds not winning the big hit lottery It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (S11205: YES), and the process proceeds to step S11206. In addition, in specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In step S11206, the fluctuation generation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation generation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11204, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In step S11205, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game run (S11205: NO), the process proceeds to step S11207 and refers to the reach non-occurrence change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11204, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN decreases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. The variation time may increase as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases, or may be set to be constant without depending on the respective hold numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach non-occurrence so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode A variation time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected may differ between the jackpot winning time and the outreach time. Good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the regular jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the outreach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete outlier may be individually set.

<Playing state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 222: S10807).

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. In step S11301, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the special game state.

  If it is determined in step S11301 that the ending period flag is not ON (S11301: NO), the process proceeds to step S11302 to determine whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON when shifting the gaming state to the open / close execution mode, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11302 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S11302: NO), the process proceeds to step S11303 to determine whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S11303 that the opening period flag is not ON (S11303: NO), the process proceeds to step S11304, and the timing at which the variation display of symbols in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is finished. It is determined whether the When it is determined in step S11304 that it is not the timing at which the fluctuation display ends (S11304: NO), the present gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S11304 that it is the timing when the variable display has ended (S11304: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305, and the game result (the result of the jackpot lottery) of the current game round is switched to the open / close execution mode It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R positive change flag, the 8R positive change flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S11305: NO), the present game state transition processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S11305 that the game result (the result of the big hit lottery) of the current game run is determined to correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (S11305: YES), the process proceeds to step S11306 and the high probability mode Turn off the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11307.

  In step S11307, an opening time setting process is performed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, an opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 for determining the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step S11307, the process proceeds to step S11308.

  In step S11308, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S10803 in the normal process (FIG. 222). The opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the open / close execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S11308, the process proceeds to step S11309, and the opening period flag is turned on. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11303 that the opening period flag is ON (S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11310.

  In step S11310, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S11310 that the opening period has ended (S11310: YES), the process proceeds to step S11311 to turn off the opening period flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11312.

  In step S11312, start processing of round display for notifying of the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. And based on the confirmed address information, while specifying stop result data corresponding to the said address information out of the stop result data group memorize | stored in ROM63, while specifying the content of the round count from the specified stop result data Check. Thereafter, the contents of the confirmed round number are output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Thereby, the round display unit 39 displays the information on the round related to the output. After executing step S11312, the process proceeds to step S11313.

  In step S11313, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode this time is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (16R positive change flag, 8R positive change flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 is confirmed. If it is determined in step S11313 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R positive variation flag or the 16R normal flag (S11313: YES), the process proceeds to step S11314 and provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the open / close door 36b is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11313 that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM 64 is the 8R positive variation flag or the 8R normal flag (S11313: NO), the process proceeds to step S11315 and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64. Set "8" in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S11314 or step S11315, the process proceeds to step S11316.

  In step S11316, the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11302 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S11302: YES), the process proceeds to step S11317 to execute the special winning opening / closing process. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the large winning is achieved by setting the variable winning driving portion 36c to a driving state, on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more. Open the mouth 36a. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or that the opening limit number is winning. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the big winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing step S11317, the process proceeds to step S11318.

  In step S11318, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11319: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11318: YES), the process proceeds to step S11319, and the open / close execution mode flag is set to OFF. After executing step S11319, the process proceeds to step S11320.

  In step S11320, round display end processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S11320, the process proceeds to step S11321.

  In step S11321, an ending time setting process is performed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time). In the present embodiment, an ending time of the same fixed length is set in each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 for determining the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step S11321, the process proceeds to step S11322.

  In step S11322, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S10703 in the normal process (FIG. 222). The sound emission control apparatus 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S11322, the process proceeds to step S11323.

  In step S11323, the ending period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11301 that the ending period flag is ON (S11301: YES), the process proceeds to step S11324.

  In step S11324, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S11323), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". If it is determined in step S11324 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S11324: YES), the process proceeds to step S11325.

  In step S11325, the ending period flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11326 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game play after the ending of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S11326, the present gaming state transition process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11324 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S11324: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Big winning opening opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening / closing process will be described. The special winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 227: 11217) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S11401, it is determined whether the big winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S11401 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S11401: NO), the process proceeds to step S11402 to determine whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S11402 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11402: YES), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11402 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11402: NO), the process proceeds to step S11403.

  In step S11403, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S11403 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S11403: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11403 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S11403: YES), the process proceeds to step S11404 and the variable winning drive portion opens the big winning opening 36a. The 36c is in the drive state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11405.

  In step S11405, setting processing for each round is performed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are the high-frequency winning mode, “15000” (ie, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency winning mode is set to the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" in the winning counter area PC. "" May be set. After executing step S11405, the process proceeds to step S11406.

  In step S11406, an open command is set. Thereafter, the present special winning opening opening and closing process is ended. The release command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has been started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the external output process (FIG. 222: step S10803). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 can be displayed as the special winning opening 36a. Update to the contents corresponding to the opening of the. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are as follows: opening of the special winning opening 36a Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S11401 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S11401: YES), the process proceeds to step S11407 to determine whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". Do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11407 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S11407: NO), the process proceeds to step S11408.

  In step S11408, it is determined from the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11408 that no winning has occurred (S11408: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11408 that a winning has occurred (S11408: YES), the process proceeds to step S11409, where the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11410.

  In step S11410, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S11410 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S11410: NO), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11407 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S11407: YES), or if it is determined in step S11410 that the value of the pay counter area PC is "0" (S11410: YES), proceed to step S11411 and execute the special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable prize drive unit 36c is in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11412.

  In step S11412, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11413, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S11413 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11413: YES), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11413 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11413: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S11414, the process advances to step S11415 to set a closing command. After that, the special winning opening opening and closing process ends.

  The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has ended, and the normal processing In the external output process (FIG. 222: step S10803), the sound emission control apparatus 90 is transmitted. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round is finished based on the received closing command, and the contents of the effects of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are Update to the contents corresponding to the end of release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round is finished based on the received closing command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are finished, the opening of the big winning opening 36a is finished Update to the content corresponding to what you did

<Migration process at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition processing (FIG. 227: S11326).

  FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S11501, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the probable variation big hit as the big hit type flag is set to ON in the RAM 64 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S11501 that the 16R positive variation flag or the 8R positive variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S11501: YES), the process proceeds to step S11502 to execute flag deletion processing. Specifically, the 16R probability change flag, the 8R probability change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are turned OFF when they are ON, and they are maintained when they are not ON. . After executing step S11502, the process proceeds to step S11503.

  In step S11503, the high probability mode flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S11504 to set the high frequency support mode flag to ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit is generated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11505.

  In step S11505, 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11506.

  In step S11506, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11510.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11501 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S11501: NO), the process proceeds to step S11507 to execute flag deletion processing. Specifically, the 16R probability change flag, the 8R probability change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are turned OFF when they are ON, and they are maintained when they are not ON. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11508.

  In step S11508, after setting the high frequency support mode flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S11509, and 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11510.

  In step S11510, a high frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for telegraph support>
Next, a process for electronic mail support will be described. The processing for electronic part support is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 222: S10808).

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart of the electronic-support-support process. In step S11601, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-support flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the motorized accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is in the open state, and is turned off when the motorized part 34a in the second start port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S11601 that the in-support flag is not ON (S11601: NO), the process proceeds to step S11602.

  In step S11602, it is determined whether the support winning flag of the various flags storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the opening condition is won in the electric combination opening lottery whether to set the electric combination 34a to the opening condition, and is set to OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. When it is determined in step S11602 that the support winning flag is not ON (S11602: NO), the process proceeds to step S11603.

  In step S11603, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S11603 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S11603: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11603: YES), the process proceeds to step S11604.

  In step S11604, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the drawing unit 38 or not. If it is determined in step S11604 that the end timing of the variable display is reached (S11604: YES), the process proceeds to step S11605, and after the outset display is set, the present electronic wave support support process is ended. By setting the off-set display, the variation display of the symbols in the common drawing unit 38 is ended in the state where the off-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11604 that the end timing of the variable display is not reached (S11604: NO), the process proceeds to step S11606.

  In step S11606, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus item holding number SN is larger than "0". In step S11606, when it is determined that the value of the number of holdings of the bonus item SN is "0" (S11606: NO), the processing for electronic bulletin board support is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11606 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is larger than "0" (S11606: YES), the process proceeds to step S11607.

  In step S11607, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then, in step S11608, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected. If it is not the open / close execution mode at step S11607 (S11607: NO) and if it is the high frequency support mode at step S11608 (S11608: YES), the process proceeds to step S11609 to perform the electric combination open lottery. Specifically, in the case where the value stored in the holding position 64c is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won (see FIG. 204 (b)). Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination opening lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11610.

  In step S11610, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S11609 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S11610 that the result of the motorized character opening lottery is the support winning (S11610: YES), the process proceeds to step S11611, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2 which has been set. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the motorized jack 34a has been released. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11612. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11610 that the result of the electric combination open lottery is not the support winning (S11610: NO), the process proceeds to step S11612 without executing the process of step S11611.

  In step S11612, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. When it is determined in step S11612 that the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S11612: YES), the process proceeds to step S11613. On the other hand, in step S11612, when it is determined that the success or failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S11612: NO), the processing for the electric wave support is ended as it is.

  In step S11613, it is determined whether the number-of-games counter area is "0". In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game cycle is over. If it is determined in step S11613 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S11613: NO), the present support for electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11613 that the game number counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S11614, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11615.

  In step S11615, a low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Do. After that, the electronic mail support process ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S11615 is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 222: step S10803) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S11607 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S11607: YES), or if it is determined in step S11618 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S11608: NO), the process proceeds to step S11616 and the electric combination open lottery I do. Specifically, in the case where the value stored in the holding position 64c is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination release lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11617.

  In step S11617, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S11616 is support winning. If it is determined in step S11617 that support has not been won (S11617: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11617 that support is won (S11617: YES), the process proceeds to step S11618 and turns on the support winning flag and sets "1" in the second round counter area RC2 , Finish the processing for this boardroom support.

  When it is determined in step S11602 that the support winning flag is ON (S11602: YES), the process proceeds to step S11619, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. In step S11619, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11619: NO), since the variation display of the pattern in the common drawing unit 38 is being performed, the processing for the electric wave support is directly performed. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11619 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11619: YES), the process proceeds to step S11620.

  In step S11620, a hit display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the drawing unit 38 is ended in a state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11621 to turn on the in-support flag and turn off the support winning flag. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

  If it is determined in step S11601 that the in-support flag is ON (S11601: YES), the process proceeds to step S11622 to execute electronic combination open / close control processing for opening / closing control of the motorized combination 34a. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

<Electronic work opening and closing control process>
Next, the electronic combination open / close control process will be described. The electronic combination opening and closing control processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 230: S11622) of electronic combination support processing.

  FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the electronic combination open / close control process. In step S11701, it is determined whether or not the motorized jack 34a is open. Whether or not the motorized accessory 34a is in the open state is determined based on whether or not the motorized symbol drive unit 34b is in the driven state. If it is determined that the motorized winning combination 34a is open (S11701: YES), the process proceeds to step S11702.

  In step S11702, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the motor-operated accessory 34a. In step S11702, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11702: NO), the present electronic combination control process is ended. That is, when the open continuation time of the motorized accessory 34a has not ended, the present opening and closing control processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11702 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11702: YES), the process proceeds to step S11703 to perform closing processing of controlling the electrically operated part 34a in the closed state. "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the measuring means of the open continuation time of the motorized part 34a is "0", the motorized part 34a is closed and, in this case, the second timer counter area T2 is motorized. The second timer counter area T2 is set to "250", which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a. After executing step S11703, the process proceeds to step S11704.

  In step S11704, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, the process proceeds to step S11705, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. In step S11705, when it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S11705: NO), the present electronic combination control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11705 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S11705: YES), the process proceeds to step S11706, and the support flag is turned off. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S11701 that the motorized jack 34a is not open (S11701: NO), the process proceeds to step S11707 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the motorized accessory 34a. In step S11707, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11707: NO), the present electronic combination opening / closing control processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11707: YES), the process proceeds to step S11708 to execute an opening process for controlling the motorized part 34a in an open state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11709.

  In step S11709, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S11709: NO), the process proceeds to step S11710 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is Do.

  If it is determined in step S11710 that the high-frequency support mode is in progress (S11710: YES), the process advances to step S11711 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11709 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S11709: YES), or if it is determined in step S11710 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S11710: NO), the process proceeds to step S11712. "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

N5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus 90 and the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 232 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. Note that part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control substrate 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables and the like. For example, in a part of the area of the ROM 93, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variation display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like are provided. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The main control unit 60 receives various commands. While the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, the display control device 100 is connected.

  The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is mounted. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control apparatus 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the various commands received, and implements control of the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is formed into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data etc. in a shared manner in each character ROM 106. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 106 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 103.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control unit 90 will be the sound side MPU 92 and the sound side, respectively. Also referred to as the ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

N6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control apparatus 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S11801, a command storage process is performed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main side MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and readout of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S11801, the process proceeds to step S11802.

  In step S11802, a hold display setting process is performed. In the hold display setting process, the first hold display area Ds1 or the second hold display is generated when a hold game count is generated triggered by the game ball entering the first start hole 33 and the second start hole 34. It is a process for setting the display mode of the hold display to be displayed in the area Ds2. Specifically, it is a process of controlling whether or not to execute the on-hold game circulation effect using the on-hold display, and controlling the number of numerical on-hold display etc. to be displayed when performing on-off holding effect. Details of the hold display setting process will be described later. After step S11802 is performed, step S11803 is performed.

  In step S11803, an effect setting process is performed. The effect setting process is a process for controlling an effect to be performed in the game run. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S11803, the process proceeds to step S11804.

  In step S11804, setting processing other than the hold display setting processing and the effect setting processing is executed. Specifically, a demonstration video setting process for setting a demonstration video to be displayed on the display surface 41a when game times have not been executed for a predetermined time or more, or at a time preset by an RTC (Real-Time Clock). An RTC effect setting process or the like for setting an RTC effect which is an effect to be executed is executed. After executing step S11804, the process proceeds to step S11805.

  In step S11805, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the various lamps 47 is performed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the various processes of steps S11802 to S11804. After executing step S11805, the process proceeds to step S11806.

  In step S11806, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the various processes of steps S11802 to S11804. After execution of step S11806, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Holding display setting process>
Next, the hold display setting process will be described. The hold display setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 233: S11801).

  FIG. 234 is a flowchart of the hold display setting process. In step S11901, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S11901 that the hold command has been received (S11901: YES), the process proceeds to step S11902. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S11901 that the hold command has not been received (S11901: NO), this hold display setting process ends.

  In step S11902, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information obtained based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the number of pending information obtained based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and these pending A process is performed to enable the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S11902 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start opening 33 is also referred to as the “first number of held pieces”, and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34 is It is also referred to as "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also referred to as "total pending number". After executing step S11902, the process proceeds to step S11903.

  In step S11903, a hold display control process is performed. Specifically, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 specified in step S11902, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 The display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled based on After executing step S11903, the process proceeds to step S11904.

  In step S11904, a hold presentation setting process is performed. Details of the hold effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S11904, the process for setting the hold display ends.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 234: S11802) of the hold display setting process.

  FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S12001, it is determined whether the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning on the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S12001 that the hold command that has been read this time is transmitted based on the winning on the first starting port 33 (S12001: YES), the process proceeds to step S12002, and the sound light is emitted. Update processing of the first hold count counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first hold count counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of hold information acquired based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 in the sound-light MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold count counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command which is the current read target. After executing step S12002, the process proceeds to step S12004.

  In step S12001, when it is determined that the hold command that has been read this time is not sent based on the winning on the first start opening 33 (S12001: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening If it is determined that the data has been sent based on the winning on 34, the process proceeds to step S12003, and the update process of the second hold number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. . The second hold number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning on the second start port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update processing of the second hold count counter area, the information of the second hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the command that is the current read target. After executing step S12003, the process proceeds to step S12004.

  The reason why the processes of step S12002 and step S12003 are performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. I will not. Therefore, when the power is shut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 holds the hold information. While the sound emission control device 90 stores and holds the information, it is determined that the hold information is zero. In this case, assuming that voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold count counter area or the second hold count counter area every time it receives a hold command, main controller 60 actually stores the hold. There may be a disadvantage that the number of pending information being held and the number of pending information kept in the audio light emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the hold number, and voice emission control unit 90 transmits the hold command every time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of pending pieces included is set in the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In step S12004, update processing of the total hold number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total reserved number counter area, the sum of the number of pieces of suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the number of the suspending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 is heard. It is a counter area for specifying in side MPU92. In the updating process, the information of the total number of holding units counter area is the information of the sum of the information of the number of holding units measured in the first number of holding units counter area and the information of the number of holding units measured in the second number of holding units counter area Update to After execution of step S12004, the update process at the time of the winning combination is ended.

<Hold effect setting process>
Next, the hold effect setting process will be described. The hold presentation setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of the hold display setting process (FIG. 234: S11904).

  FIG. 236 is a flowchart of the hold effect setting process. In step S12101, information on the presence or absence of the jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time is read out from the received hold command. That is, the information regarding the presence or absence of the jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time in the game time is read when the held game time corresponding to the hold command is executed as the game time. After executing step S12101, the process proceeds to step S12102.

  In step S12102, based on the information read from the hold command in step S12101, it is determined whether a big hit or reach occurs in the game time when the hold game time is executed as a game time. If it is determined in step S12102 that a jackpot or a reach has occurred (S12102: YES), the process proceeds to step S12103.

  In step S12103, an alternate-body rendering execution determination process is executed. The separate production effect execution determination process is a process of determining whether or not to execute the on-hold game circulation separate effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit or reach occurs in the game turn, the hold game turn play effect is executed when the game turn is held as the hold game turn, and is executed as the game turn At the same time, the result notification suggestion effect is executed, but instead of executing the hold game turn effect effect and the result notification indication effect in all cases where the jackpot or reach occurs in the game turn, the hold game turn effect effect and the result notification indication effect Set when to execute and when not to execute. By doing in this way, even if it is the holding game time (the holding display time when the holding display does not change to the numerical holding display) the holding game time is executed as the game time even if the holding game time is not executed Since a jackpot or reach may occur, the player can be made to pay attention to the game play. The details of the separate-body effect execution determination process will be described later. After executing step S12103, the process proceeds to step S12104.

  In step S12104, as a result of the processing in step S12103, it is determined whether or not to execute the on-hold game circulation effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the separate-body rendering execution flag is ON. The separate production effect execution flag is turned ON when it is determined that the on-hold game turn production effect is to be executed by the separate production execution determination process of step S12103. If it is determined in step S12104 that the on-hold game circulation effect is to be executed (S12104: YES), the process proceeds to step S12105.

  In step S12105, a first numerical value information (X) acquisition process is performed. The first numerical information is the result notification suggestion effect by the character of the ninja corresponding to the number of executed game times display Dp in the result notification suggestion effect executed in the game turn, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game turn It is numerical information that determines whether to notify. In the present embodiment, the first numerical value information (X) is 0 ≦ X ≦ 4. For example, in the example of the result notification suggestion effect described in FIG. 207 to FIG. 210, the player is given the jackpot lottery result in the effect of the ninja corresponding to the execution game number display Dp3 which is the third execution game number display. Since the notification is made, the first numerical value information (x) in the game turn is X = 3. Also, in the example of the result notification suggestion effect described in FIG. 213 to FIG. 215, the player is notified of the result of the jackpot lottery in the effect of the ninja corresponding to the execution game times display Dp2 which is the second execution game times display Therefore, the first numerical value information (X) in the game play is X = 2. In the case of X = 0, for example, although the on-hold display Dm11 is executed on the on-hold display Dm11 and three numerical on-hold displays Dm11 a to Dm11 c are displayed, the on-hold game times are played When it is executed as a round, it is a case where it becomes a symbol row of a big hit as it is, after the symbol for liquid crystal becomes a symbol row of a reach state. That is, even when a plurality of execution game times displays Dp are displayed on the stage SG at the time of execution of the game times, the notification of the jackpot is performed without the result notification suggestion effect being executed. As described above, when X = 0 is acquired as the value of the first numerical information (X), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is notified before the result notification suggestion effect is executed when the game number is executed. . After acquiring the first numerical value information (X) in step S12105, the process proceeds to step S12106.

  In step S12106, when the hold game times are executed as game times, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot lottery in the game times is a jackpot. Specifically, the determination is made based on the hold command read in step S12101. If it is determined in step S12106 that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game run is a jackpot (S12106: YES), the process proceeds to step S12107.

  In steps S12107 to S12109, processing for determining the number of numerically reserved displays (Y) is executed.

  The numerical holding display number (Y) is the number of the numerical holding display displayed corresponding to one holding display (one holding game time). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 205, after executing the on-hold game circulation effect, three numerical on-hold displays (Dm11a, Dm11b, Dm11c) are displayed corresponding to one on-hold display Dm11. In this case, the numerical hold display number (Y) in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 is Y = 3. That is, in the on-hold game circulation effect, the numerical on-hold display number (Y) corresponds to the number of ninja characters displayed after the on-hold game rotation effect.

  The relationship between the first numerical value information (X) and the numerical hold display number (Y) is X ≦ Y. For example, in the example described in the result notification suggestion effect in FIG. 206 to FIG. 210, the number of executed game times display Dp (or the number of numerically held displays) is 3 (Dp1, Dp2, Dp3), and in this case, Since the number of numerically displayed displays (Y) is Y = 3 and the notification of the result of the big hit lottery is also performed by the effect in the third execution game display (Dp3), the first numerical information (X) is X = 3 is there. Thus, X = Y. Further, in the example described in the result notification suggestion effect of FIG. 213 to FIG. 215, the number of executed game times display Dp (or the number of numerically held displays) is 3 (Dp1, Dp2, Dp3), and in this case, Although the number of numerically displayed items (Y) is Y = 3, the first numerical information (X) is X = 2 because notification of the result of the jackpot lottery is performed by the effect in the second execution game display (Dp2) It is. Therefore, X <Y. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first numerical value information (X) and the numerical hold display number (Y) satisfy X ≦ Y.

  In step S12107, the value of the hold display random number counter Cd prepared to determine the numerical hold display number (Y) is acquired. In the present embodiment, the hold display random number counter Cd has a value of 0 to 99. After executing step S12107, the process proceeds to step S12108.

  In step S12108, the numerical holding display number determination table corresponding to the value of the first numerical value information (X) acquired in step S12105 is read out. A table for determining the number of pending displays will be described later. After executing step S12108, the process proceeds to step S12109.

  In step S12109, the numerically pending display number (Y) corresponding to the value of the pending display random number counter Cd acquired in step S12107 is determined based on the numerically held display number determination table.

  FIG. 237 is an explanatory view for explaining a table of numerical holding display number determination. A table used when the value of the first numerical value information (X) is X = 0, a table used when X = 1, a table used when X = 2, in the order of FIGS. 237 (a) to (e) A table used in the case of = 3 and a table used in the case of X = 4 are shown. A table for determining the number of pending display numbers is stored in the sound side ROM 93.

  In the numerical holding display number determination table, the value of the holding display random number counter Cd and the value of the numerical holding display number (Y) are recorded correspondingly. The sound side MPU 92 determines the value of the numerical hold display number (Y) corresponding to the value of the hold display random number counter Cd based on the numerical hold display number determination table.

  The table corresponding to Y = 1 is not provided in the numerical holding display number determination table used in the case of X = 0 shown in FIG. 237 (a). In the case of X = 0 and Y = 1, the number of numerical suspension displays is 1 (Y = 1) in the suspension display of the display surface 41a, and the result notification suggestion effect is not executed in the game (X = 0) Correspond to the case. That is, substantially, the on-hold game circulation personal effects and the result notification suggestion effects are not executed. In other words, there is no separate production. In this holding effect setting process, when the holding game turning effect is not executed, the process proceeds to step S12112 in step S12104, so Y in the table for determining the number of numerically holding display determinations of X = 0. It is not necessary to provide a column of = 1. Therefore, the table corresponding to Y = 1 is not provided in the numerical holding display number determination table used when X = 0.

  In addition, for example, in the table of numerical holding display number determination table used in the case of X = 0 in FIG. 237 (a), when the value of the numerical holding display number is Y = 2, the holding game circulation effect is executed By this, the display mode is changed from one hold display to two numerical hold displays. In other words, one ninja character splits and the display mode is changed to two ninja characters. However, since X = 0, after the variable display of the liquid crystal symbol, the notification of the result notification is not performed and the notification of the jackpot is performed.

  The table for determining the number of pending displays used in the case of X = 2 is provided with a column where the value of Y is 2 or more, and the table for determining the number of pending displays used in the case of X = 3 is Y. A column with a value of 3 or more is provided, and the table for determining the number of pending displays to be used in the case of X = 4 is provided with a column with a value of Y of 4 or more (substantially only the column with Y = 4). It is done. This is because, as described above, the relationship between the first numerical value information (X) and the numerical holding display number (Y) is X ≦ Y.

  Description is returned to FIG. Thus, based on the numerical holding display number determination table read out corresponding to the first numerical value information (X) in step S12109, the numerical holding number (Y) is determined based on the value of the holding display random number counter Cd. Determine the value. After executing step S12109, the process proceeds to step S12110.

  In step S12110, the holding effect pattern corresponding to the value of the numerical holding display number (Y) and the start time of the holding effect are set in the hold effect command, and the hold effect command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The holding effect pattern corresponding to the value of the number periodic holding display number (Y) is a pattern of the holding game circulation body effect corresponding to the determined number periodic holding display number (Y). For example, the holding effect pattern in which the value of the number of periodic holding display numbers (Y) corresponds to Y = 2 is a holding effect that changes the display mode of one holding display to two numerical holding displays, and as a holding display It corresponds to the on-hold game circulation director which splits one ninja character into two ninja characters. As another example, the holding effect pattern in which the value of the number of periodic holding display numbers (Y) corresponds to Y = 4 is a holding effect that changes the display mode of one holding display to four numerical holding displays, It corresponds to a hold game turn-to-play production where one ninja character as a hold display is divided into four ninja characters.

  After the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 (or the second starting opening 34) and the holding display triggered by the ball is displayed on the display surface 41a, the holding display of the starting time of the holding effect is the holding display. It is the time until the alternate hold production for against is started. The start time of the hold effect is whether the hold display being processed is Dm 11 (Dm 21), the hold display is Dm 12 (Dm 22), the hold display is Dm 13 (Dm 23), or the hold display is Dm 14 It depends on whether it is (Dm24). That is, the start time of the holding effect differs depending on the time until the holding game number corresponding to the holding display is executed as the game number. The time until the hold game times corresponding to the hold display is executed as the game times is the shortest for the hold display Dm11 (Dm21) and the longest for Dm14 (Dm24). Therefore, the start time of the hold effect is also the shortest in the case where the hold display being processed is the hold display Dm11 (Dm21) and the longest in the case of Dm14 (Dm24). Since the fluctuation time when each reserved game time is executed as the game time is extracted by the first determination process, until each reserved game time is executed as the game time based on the extracted each fluctuation time The time can be calculated. The start time of the hold effect is set to a time shorter than the game start time based on the calculation result of the time until the hold game times corresponding to the hold display is executed as the game times (also referred to as game start time). After the step S12110 is performed as described above, the main hold presentation setting process ends. In the present embodiment, since the separate effect is started while the game times corresponding to the game times display (hold display and execution game times display) are held as the hold game times, the start time of the hold effect is The game start time is set to a time shorter than the start time, but as described later, when the hold game time corresponding to the game time display (hold display) is started after being executed as the game time, the start time of the separate effect is , Set the start time of the separate production effect to a time longer than the game start time.

  The display MPU 102 that has received the hold effect command set in step S12110 holds the hold game circulation effect of the hold effect pattern set in the hold effect command and the hold effect start time set in the hold effect command. To run.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12106 that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game run is not a jackpot (S12106: NO), the process proceeds to step S12111.

  In step 12111, the same value as the first numerical value information (X) acquired in step S12105 is set as the value of the numerical pending display number (Y). That is, Y = X is set. The case where the processing proceeds to step S12111 is that, when the hold game times corresponding to the hold display to be processed is executed as the game times, the lottery result by the jackpot lottery is out but reach occurs. is there. In this embodiment, the lottery result by the jackpot lottery is out of place but reach is generated, and when executing the on-hold game circulation effect, it is displayed on the stage SG when it is executed as the game time In the final result notification suggestion effect by the plurality of execution game times display Dp (a plurality of ninjas divided), it is informed that it is out. Temporarily, although being out in the big hit lottery, the result notification suggestion effect by the execution game times display Dp before the last execution game times display Dp of the plurality of execution game times display Dp (a plurality of ninjas divided) When out of the box is notified, the out of box is notified as a result of the jackpot lottery despite the presence of the execution game times display Dp which may indicate the result of the jackpot lottery, and the game round is ended. In this case, it is more likely that the player is more psychologically offensive than in the case of notifying that it is out in the final result notification suggestion effect by a plurality of execution game times display Dp (a plurality of ninjas divided). May be given. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the player's sense of discomfort when falling out in the big hit lottery, it is out in the final result notification suggestion effect by a plurality of execution game times display Dp (multiple ninjas divided) To inform Therefore, in step S12111, the same value (Y = X) as the first numerical value information (X) is set as the value of the numerical holding display number (Y). After step S12111 is executed, step S12110 is executed, and then the on-hold effect setting process is ended.

  In step S12102, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times does not generate a jackpot and reach does not occur when the held game times to be processed are executed as game times (S12102 : NO), it progresses to step S12112.

  In step S12112, a normal hold display is set as a hold effect command. That is, the setting for not performing the on-hold game turn-off effect with respect to the on-hold display that is the current process target is set as the on-off effect command. The display MPU 102 that has received the hold effect command set in step S12112 displays the first hold display area Ds1 (Ds2) as a normal hold display for the hold display that is the target of the hold effect command. Do. Thereafter, the on-hold effect setting process is ended.

<Separate body production execution determination processing>
Next, the separate-body effect execution determination process will be described. The separate effect execution execution determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 236: S12103) of the hold effect setting process.

  FIG. 238 is a flowchart of a separate-body rendering execution determination process. In step S12201, the value of the effect type determination random number counter Ck prepared to determine whether or not to execute the on-hold game turn-off effect is acquired. In the present embodiment, the effect type determination random number counter Ck has a value of 0 to 99. After executing step S12201, the process proceeds to step S12202.

  In step S12202, an effect type determination process is executed. Specifically, the value of the effect type determination random number counter Ck is collated with the effect type determination table corresponding to the lottery result of the big hit lottery to determine the effect type. More specifically, for the effect type determination corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery when the value of the effect type determination random number counter Ck and the on-hold game corresponding to the on-hold display to be processed is executed as a game operation The table is collated to determine the effect type.

  FIG. 239 is an explanatory view for explaining an effect type determination table. FIG. 239 (a) shows a jackpot effect type determination table, and FIG. 239 (b) shows a reach effect type judgment table. As illustrated, the effect type determination table is a table in which the value of the effect type determination random number counter Ck and the type of effect are recorded correspondingly. The normal effect (non-dividing effect) shown in the figure does not execute the on-hold game circulation effect on the on-hold display to be processed, and the on-hold game corresponding to the on-hold display is executed as a game time As a result, it is meant that the normal jackpot effect or the reach effect is performed without executing the indication notification effect.

  As can be seen from the jackpot effect type determination table of FIG. 239 (a), when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a jackpot, the separate effect is executed with a probability of 80%. Further, as can be seen from the reach type determination table for reach shown in FIG. 239 (b), when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is reach (disengagement), the separate effect is executed with a probability of 60% . In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot, there is a higher probability that the alternate-body effect is executed than in the case of the reach. By doing this, for example, the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot when the held game number of times is executed as the game number of times for the player who recognizes that the held separate body effect is performed It can be recognized as high and can give a big sense of expectation.

  Description is returned to FIG. After the effect type determination process is performed in step S12202, the process proceeds to step S12203.

  In step S12203, it is determined whether or not the effect determined in the effect type determination process is a separate effect effect. If it is determined in step S12203 that the effect determined in the effect type determination process is a separate effect (S12203: YES), the process proceeds to step S12204.

  In step S12204, a separate-body rendering execution flag is set to ON. The separate-body effect execution flag is stored in the effect memory area of the sound light side RAM 94.

  FIG. 240 is an explanatory view illustrating the configuration of the effect storage area. The effect memory area includes a first effect memory area and a second effect memory area. FIG. 240 (a) shows a first effect storage area, and FIG. 240 (b) shows a second effect storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 240 (a), the first effect memory area stores various parameters and flags for each of the reserved game times (n) for the first starting opening. The illustrated holding game times (n = 1 to 4) for the first starting opening correspond to the holding display Dm11 to the holding display Dm14. That is, the hold game times are executed in the order of the hold game times (n = 1) of the first start opening to the hold game times (n = 4) of the first start opening. Since the first effect memory area and the second effect memory area have the same configuration, the first effect memory area shown in FIG. 240 (a) will be described, and the second effect memory area shown in FIG. 240 (b) will be described. The description of the effect storage area is omitted.

  As illustrated, the storage area for the first effect stores the separate production effect execution flag and the first numerical value information (X) for each of the reserved game times (n) for the first starting opening. The separate production effect execution flag and the first numerical information (X) stored for each of the reserved game times (n) for the first starting opening are linked to each reserved game time itself, and each time the game times are executed The area to be stored is shifted to the storage area of the next reserved game number. For example, as shown in FIG. 240 (a), the separate effect execution flag and the first numerical value information (X) stored in the storage area of the hold game turn (n = 3) of the first start opening are the game turn If is executed once, it shifts to the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 2) of the first starting opening in the first effect memory area, and when the game time is executed once, for the first effect It shifts to the storage area of the hold game time (n = 1) of the first starting opening in the storage area.

  Description is returned to FIG. In step S12204, the separation effect execution flag of the storage area corresponding to the pending display to be processed in the first effect storage area (or the second effect storage area) is turned ON. After executing step S12204, the general production effect execution determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12203 that the effect determined in the effect type determination process is not the on-hold individualized effect effect (S12203: NO), the process does not execute step S12204, and the present personal effects execution determination process is ended.

<First numerical information acquisition process>
Next, the first numerical information acquisition process will be described. The first numerical value information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 236: S12105) of the hold effect setting process.

  FIG. 241 is a flowchart of the first numerical value information acquisition process. In step S12301, the value of the first numerical value information acquisition random number counter Cx prepared to acquire the first numerical value information (X) is acquired. In the present embodiment, the first numerical value information acquisition random number counter Cx has a value of 0 to 99. After executing step S12301, the process proceeds to step S12302.

  In step S12302, the first numerical value information table is read. The first numerical value information table is table data prepared for acquiring the first numerical value information.

  FIG. 242 is an explanatory diagram of the configuration of the first numerical value information table. As illustrated, the first numerical value information table is a table in which the value of the first numerical value information acquisition random number counter Cx and the first numerical value information (X) are recorded correspondingly. As illustrated, in the first numerical information table in the present embodiment, when the first numerical information acquisition random number counter Cx is 0 to 9, the first numerical information (X) is X = 1, and the first numerical information (X) When the random number counter Cx for numerical information acquisition is 10 to 29, the first numerical information (X) is X = 2, and when the random number counter Cx for first numerical information acquisition is 30 to 69, the first numerical information ( X) is X = 3, and when the first numerical information acquisition random number counter Cx is 70 to 99, the first numerical information (X) is set to be X = 4, and the first numerical information acquisition is performed. The probability that the first numerical value information (X) becomes X = 3 is set to be the highest with respect to the value of the random number counter Cx.

  Description is returned to FIG. After the first numerical value information table is read in step S12302, the process proceeds to step S12303.

  In step S12303, the first numerical value information (X) corresponding to the first numerical value information acquisition random number counter Cx is acquired from the first numerical value information table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12104.

  In step S12104, the acquired first numerical value information (X) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending display to be processed in the first effect storage area (or the second effect storage area) described with reference to FIG. 240. Do. After executing step S12304, the present first numerical value information acquisition process is ended.

<Effect setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 233: S11803).

  FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process. In step S12401, it is determined whether or not the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S12401 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S12401: YES), the process proceeds to step S12402. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12401 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S12401: NO), the effect setting process is ended.

  In step S12402, based on the received command for variation and type command, information of presence / absence of big hit, type of big hit, presence / absence of reach occurrence, and variation time is read out. Thereafter, after step S12402 is executed, the process proceeds to step S12403.

  In step S12403, it is determined whether the effect to be executed in the game session to be processed is the result notification suggestion effect. Specifically, the storage area for holding effect (FIG. 240) is read out, and whether or not the division effect execution flag of the storage area in the holding display Dm11 (or Dm21) of the holding game times corresponding to the game times to be processed is ON. It is determined whether or not. When the separate production effect execution flag is ON, the effect to be executed in the game round to be processed is a result notification suggestion effect, and when the separate production effect execution flag is OFF, it is executed in the game round to be processed The effect to be done is usually the effect. When it is determined in step S12403 that the effect to be executed in the game round to be processed is the result notification suggestion effect (S12403: YES), the process proceeds to step S12404.

  In step S12404, a result notification suggestion effect setting process is performed. The result notification suggestion effect setting process is a result notification to be executed in the game series to be processed based on the first numerical information (X) and the fluctuation time out of the plurality of effect patterns stored as the result notification suggestion effect. It is a process of selecting and setting an effect pattern of the suggested effect. Details of the result notification suggestion effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S12404, the process proceeds to step S12406.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12403 that the effect to be executed in the game session to be processed is not the result notification effect effect (S12403: NO), the process proceeds to step S12405.

  In step S12405, a normal effect setting process is performed. The normal effect setting process is executed in the game period to be processed based on the fluctuation time from among a plurality of effect patterns stored as a normal effect (non-result notification suggestion effect) among effects to be executed in the game period It is the processing which selects and sets the production pattern of the usual production which it does. Details of the normal effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S12405, the process proceeds to step S12406.

  In step S12406, a process of setting a stop symbol is executed. In the setting process of the stop symbol, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol on the effective line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination may be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbol and the combination of the same even symbol, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selectivity than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the combination of the same even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is an outlier, the presence or absence of reach is determined from the content of the fluctuation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not established on the effective line L, which corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L The information is determined as the information on the result of the current stop. On the other hand, if it is determined that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L when it is determined that it does not correspond to reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of reach symbols on the effective line L Corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S12406, the process proceeds to step S12407.

  In step S12407, setting processing of the variable display pattern is executed. In the processing, the information of the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the combination of the information of the fluctuation time and the information of the stop symbol specified in the above step S12406 Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S12407, the process proceeds to step S12408.

  In step S12408, the effect pattern set in the process of steps S12404 to S12407, the symbol for liquid crystal to be stopped, and the variation display pattern are set in the effect command, and the process proceeds to step S12409.

  In step S12409, the set rendering command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12410.

  In step S12410, the information on the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S12410, the process proceeds to step S12411.

  In step S12411, the effect storage area (FIG. 240) is updated. In the case where the game run to be processed is a game run triggered by entering the ball into the first starting opening 33, the division effect execution flag and the first of the storage areas corresponding to the hold display Dm11 of the first effect storage area Reset numerical information (X). In the case where the game run to be processed is a game run triggered by entering the ball into the second starting opening 34, the division effect execution flag and the first of the storage areas corresponding to the suspension display Dm21 of the second effect storage area Reset numerical information (X). Then, with respect to the effect memory area in which the memory area has been reset, the separate production effect execution flag and the first numerical information (X) stored for each pending game cycle (n) are shifted to the next reserved game cycle memory area (See FIG. 239). After executing step S12411, the effect setting process ends.

<Result notification indication effect setting process>
Next, result notification suggestion effect setting processing will be described. The result notification suggestion effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 243: S12404) of the effect setting process.

  FIG. 244 is a flowchart of the result notification suggestion effect setting process. In step S12501, first numerical value information (X) corresponding to the game play to be processed is read out from the effect storage area. Specifically, in the case where the game cycle to be processed is a game cycle triggered by entering the first start hole 33, the first numerical information (corresponding to the hold indication Dm11 of the first effect storage area ((1) In the case where the game cycle to be processed is a game cycle triggered by entering the second starting opening 34, the first numerical information (corresponding to the hold display Dm21 of the second effect storage area) (X) is read Read X). After executing step S12501, the process proceeds to step S12502.

  In step S12502, based on the information on presence or absence of the jackpot read from the variation command received in step S12402 (FIG. 243), it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is a jackpot . If it is determined in step S12502 that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (S12502: YES), the process proceeds to step S12503.

  In step S12503, effect pattern setting processing is performed. Specifically, based on the game time variation time to be processed and the first numerical information (X), the jackpot result notification suggestion effect pattern table stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a The effect pattern of the result notification suggestion effect to be executed in the game is selected and set.

  FIG. 245 is an explanatory view for explaining a result notification suggestion effect pattern table for the jackpot. As shown in the figure, in the result notification suggestion effect pattern table for the big hit, one game using the result notification suggestion effect corresponding to the value of the fluctuation time T and the value of the first numerical information (X) The presentation pattern of the times is recorded.

  Each effect pattern shown in the figure shows the flow of a series of effects in the game. For example, the effect pattern selected when the first numerical information (X) is X = 2 at the fluctuation time T = t4 is the pseudo continuous notice effect 1 ("pseudo run 1" in the figure), the pseudo continuous notice effect 2 (“pseudo series 2” in the figure), symbol variation display (“symbol variation” in the figure), normal reach effect, special reach effect after the result notification suggestion effect 1 (“R1” in the figure), result notification The suggested effect 2 (“R2” in the figure) is executed, and finally, the jackpot informing effect (“Wp” in the figure) for notifying the jackpot is executed. The pseudo continuous advance notice effect is a game as if the advance notice effect is continuously executed across the game times by performing the pseudo stop of the symbol and the start of fluctuation again in one game turn. It is an effect to make them recognize. The symbol variation display is a variation display of a normal symbol without pseudo continuous advance notice effect. The normal reach effect is an effect executed when the symbol is in the reach state. The super reach effect is performed after the normal reach effect, and indicates to the player that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than in the case where only the normal reach effect is executed. The special reach effect is executed after the normal reach effect, and when the normal reach effect alone is executed and when the super reach effect is executed in addition to the normal reach, the probability that the jackpot lottery is more likely to be won is higher It is an effect suggested to the person.

  As illustrated, in the present embodiment, one effect pattern corresponds to a combination of a value of the fluctuation time T and a value of the first numerical value information (X). In other words, for the same fluctuation time, the effect pattern of the result notification suggestion effect is 0 times, the result number of the result notification suggestion effect is 1 effect pattern, the result number of the result notification effect is 2 The effect pattern, the effect pattern of the result notification suggestion effect of three times, and the effect pattern of the result notification effect of four times are prepared. As a result of the presence of five types of effect patterns of 0 to 4 times the number of times the result notification suggestion effect is performed, the result time width required for the notification suggestion effect, but these five effect patterns in the same fluctuation time The reason why it is possible to execute is because the pseudo continuous advance notice effects 1 to 3 are appropriately executed according to the fluctuation time and the number of times of execution of the result notification suggestion effect. That is, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect functions as an adjustment effect for adjusting the width of the time which occurs due to the difference in the number of times of execution of the result notification suggestion effect. In addition, the width of the time which arises by the difference in the number of times of execution of result indication suggestion production may be adjusted with the fluctuation time of the design. By appropriately executing such an adjustment effect, it is possible to make one effect pattern correspond to a combination of the value of the fluctuation time T and the value of the first numerical value information (X). ing. The sound light side MPU 92 selects one effect pattern corresponding to the read value of the fluctuation time T and the value of the first numerical value information (X) from the result notification suggestion effect pattern table for the big hit, as an effect pattern Set

  Description is returned to FIG. In step S12503, after the effect pattern is set based on the result notification suggestion effect pattern table for the big hit, the result notification suggestion effect setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12502 that the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (S12502: NO), the process proceeds to step S12504.

  In step S12504, effect pattern setting processing is performed. Specifically, based on the variation time of the game times to be processed and the first numerical value information (X), the notification result indication pattern pattern for reach is stored in the effect pattern table storage area 93a. This is a process of selecting and setting a result notification suggestion effect pattern to be executed in the game.

  FIG. 246 is an explanatory view for explaining a result notification suggestion effect pattern table for reach. Similarly to the result notification suggestion effect pattern table for the big hit shown in FIG. 245, the result notification indication effect pattern table for reach is also the value of the fluctuation time T and the value of the first numerical information (X) as shown in the figure. And the effect pattern of the result notification suggestion effect is recorded. In the case of the result notification suggestion effect pattern table for the reach, the last of the effects recorded in each table is the off notification effect ("Lp" in the figure) for notifying the removal. The sound light side MPU 92 selects one effect pattern corresponding to the read value of the fluctuation time T and the value of the first numerical value information (X) from the result notification indication effect pattern table for reach, and sets it as an effect pattern Set

  Description is returned to FIG. In step S12504, after the effect pattern is set based on the result notification indication effect pattern table for reach, the result notification indication effect setting process ends.

<Normal effect setting process>
Next, the normal effect setting process will be described. The normal effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 243: S12405) of the effect setting process.

  FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing normal effect setting processing. In step S12601, based on the information on the presence or absence of the jackpot read from the variation command received in step S12402 (FIG. 243), it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is a jackpot . If it is determined in step S12601 that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (S12601: YES), the process proceeds to step S12602.

  In step S12602, an effect pattern setting process is performed. Specifically, based on the fluctuation time of the game turn to be processed, the effect pattern to be executed in the game turn is selected and set from the jackpot normal effect pattern table recorded in the effect pattern table recording area 93a. . The normal effect is, as described above, a jackpot effect or reach effect executed when the result notification suggestion effect is not performed as the effect in the game round. In the jackpot normal effect pattern table, one normal effect is recorded corresponding to the value of each variation time. The sound light side MPU 92 selects and sets an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time of the game cycle to be processed. After executing step S12602, the present normal effect setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S12601 that the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (S12601: NO), the process proceeds to step S12603.

  In step S12603, it is determined based on the information on presence / absence of reach occurrence read from the variation command received in step S12402 (FIG. 243) whether or not reach will occur in the game session to be processed. In step S12603, when it is determined that the reach occurs in the game times to be processed (S12603: YES), the process proceeds to step S12604.

  In step S12604, an effect pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, based on the variation time of the game turn to be processed, the effect pattern to be executed in the game turn is selected and set from the reach normal effect pattern table recorded in the effect pattern table recording area 93a. . In the reach normal effect pattern table, one normal effect is recorded corresponding to the value of each variation time. The sound light side MPU 92 selects and sets an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time of the game cycle to be processed. After executing step S12604, the present normal effect setting process ends.

In step S12603, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the game times to be processed (S12603: NO), the process proceeds to step S12605.

  In step S12605, an effect pattern setting process is executed. Specifically, based on the variation time of the game turn to be processed, the effect pattern to be executed in the game turn is selected and set from the out-of-the-box normal effect pattern table recorded in the effect pattern table recording area 93a. . One normal effect is recorded in the out-of-place normal effect pattern table, corresponding to the value of each variation time. The sound light side MPU 92 selects and sets an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time of the game cycle to be processed. After executing step S12605, the present normal effect setting process ends.

<Various Processes Executed in Display Control Device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various Processes Executed in Display Control Device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly performed from the main processing repeatedly executed until the power is shut off after the power is turned on and the processing when the command is received from the sound emission control device 90 There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio light emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S12701, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and processing of clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12702.

  In step S12702, interrupt permission setting is performed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing thereafter executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90.

  FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S12801, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing performed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the VDP 105 draws the image and Execute the instructions on the display.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds for which drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the drawing processing or the display processing of the image is not finished, so the drawing of a new image is started or displayed while drawing the image. It is possible to suppress the development of the image accompanying the new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the middle is stored. The details of the process of each step of the V interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S12901, a command handling process is performed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 249), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a rendering command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the rendering mode specified by the rendering command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If a rendering operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the rendering operation Control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S12901), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. The command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt process is executed, and therefore, there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it quickly grasps the mode of the effects such as the notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and displays the effect image according to the mode The drawing of the image can be controlled to be displayed on the device 41. Details of the command handling process will be described later.

  In step S12902, display setting processing is performed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S12901) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the symbol display device 41 . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12903.

  In step S12903, task processing is performed. In task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S12902), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is selected. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle and the like are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12904.

  In step S12904, a drawing process is performed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S12903), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 performs drawing processing of an image based on these pieces of information, and also causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing, together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S12905 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is executed as a game run, a game run for which a jackpot lottery result is “big hit” or reach (disengagement) is held as a hold game time In the case where it is determined that the separate effect is to be executed, the on hold display corresponding to the on hold game is executed on the on hold display to display the numerical on hold display, and the on hold game is When the game is executed as a game run, a result notification suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, a feeling of expectation can be given to the result of the jackpot lottery for the player who recognizes that the on-hold game circulation individualization effect has been executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is reach occurrence (disengagement), the result notification suggestion effect of the same number of times as the number of the ninja characters shown as the numerical suspension display is executed in the game Therefore, when the player performs the on-hold game turn-off effect and recognizes the character of the ninja who splits on as the on-hold indication, the same number of informing suggestions on the same number of times as the number indicated on the on-off indication is indicated. Recognize that will be executed.

  However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the result of the jackpot lottery may be notified after the execution of the notification suggestion effect in the game times different in number from the number of the ninja characters shown as the numerical suspension display. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the notification suggestion effect is executed as a result of the number of times indicated by the number of numerically held display, the result indication suggestion of the number of times different from the suggested number of times By executing the effect, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. In addition, the player who recognizes the number of the numerically held display displayed in response to the held game turnover game effect estimates the time required to execute the notification suggestion effect as a result of the number of times corresponding to the number of the numerically held display. While watching the effect, expect the result of the jackpot lottery while roughly assuming the time until the end of the game play. For such a player, by ending the game play by executing the result notification suggestion effect a number of times less than the suggested number of times, it is felt as if the time of the game play initially set has been shortened. It can be given and can give unexpectedness.

  In other words, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of giving the player a feeling as if the preset game time (variation time) has been shortened, without causing a breakdown between the fluctuation time and the execution time of the rendition. It can be carried out smoothly. In the processing of the present embodiment, the number of the result notification suggestion effects to be executed in the game is determined based on the first numerical value information (X), and the number of numerical hold display is based on the numerical hold display number (Y) Decide. That is, the number of result notification suggestion effects and the number of numerically reserved displays are determined based on different numerical information. Therefore, even if the number of numerically held displays indicated as the held display indicating the held game times is different from the number of results notification suggestion effects actually executed in the game times, the effect pattern in the game times is Since the determination is made based on the first numerical information (X) and the fluctuation time of the game times, the processing is smoothly performed without causing a breakdown between the time required for the effect and the fluctuation time of the game times be able to.

  Further, since the effect pattern associated with the first numerical information (X) and the variation time of the game is provided as the result notification suggestion effect pattern table for the big hit and the result notification suggestion effect pattern table for the reach, the hold display It is possible to simplify the processing necessary for setting the effect pattern in the game run, without considering the number of numerically held displays.

  In addition, when the on-hold game cycle in which the on-off game turn-off effect is executed is executed as the on-game time, and the result informing suggestion effect is executed, a result informing effect on the player according to any on-off game cycle display Dp Can give a sense of urgency such as whether the jackpot will be notified.

  Furthermore, when the execution game times display Dp becomes one remaining display (for example, the state of FIG. 209 (a)), the result by the big hit lottery after the result notification suggestion effect by the execution game times display Dp is executed Since it becomes clear whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot or a jackpot, the player has a great sense of expectation and a sense of urgency in the result notification suggestion effect by the last executed game times display Dp. Specifically, it corresponds to whether the display of the main display area MA after the effect by the last executed game times display Dp is executed becomes the display corresponding to the jackpot (for example, the state of FIG. 212 (a)) In the case where the result of the jackpot lottery is notified when the display result of the jackpot is notified, such as when the result of the jackpot lottery is notified that the display of the display surface 41a is displayed as being displayed (for example, the state of FIG. 210 (a)) The player feels a greater pleasure than in the case where the on-hold game turnout is not executed, and in the case of a release, he is more discouraged than in the case where the on-hold game turnout is not performed. . Therefore, by executing the on-hold game circulation effect, the player is given a greater sense of expectation or tension about the result of the jackpot lottery as compared to the case where the on-hold game circulation effect is not performed. As well as being able to, it is possible to impart a greater feeling of indulgence and to improve the interest of the game.

N7. Another aspect of the fourteenth embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the above-mentioned embodiment, although the separate production which suggests the number of times of execution of the result notification suggestion effect in the game time was executed as the hold game circulation separate effect at the timing when the game time is held as the hold game time, various timings It may be performed by For example, an alternate-body effect may be performed while the game run is being performed.

  FIG. 251 is an explanatory view showing a state in which an effect indicating the number of times of execution of the result notification suggestion effect is executed in the game. As shown in FIG. 251 (a), at the time when the game play is started, the number of character characters of the ninja displayed as the execution game play display Dp is one.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 251 (b), when the liquid crystal symbol is a symbol for reaching and only the symbol of the symbol row Z2 is changing, the ninja is suggested as an effect that suggests the number of times of execution of the result notification suggestion effect. Execute an effect (execution game turn-to-play effect) to split the

  After that, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is out, the lottery result (jacket) of the jackpot lottery after executing the result notification suggestion effect of three times using three execution game times display Dp1 to Dp3 To end the game play.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is a jackpot, it is possible to display the three execution game times display Dp1 to Dp3 and suggest the possibility of executing the three times result notification suggestion effect, After executing the result indication suggestion effect of once, twice or three times, the lottery result (big hit) of the big hit lottery is notified, and the game round is ended.

  As described above, even if the separate-body effect indicating the number of times of execution of the result notification suggestion effect in the game time is performed during the execution of the game time, the same effect as the above embodiment can be obtained. In addition, as in the above embodiment, when the separate game effect is suggested to indicate the number of times the result notification suggestion effect is executed in the game run during a period during which the game run is suspended as a hold game session (hereinafter also referred to as a suspension period) And, as in the present aspect, the case may be combined with the case of performing the separate-body effect indicating the number of times of execution of the result notification suggestion effect in the game time during the execution of the game time. Even if the separate production is not performed during the hold period, the separate production may be performed during the execution of the game run, so even when the separate production is not performed during the hold period, The player's sense of expectation can be maintained because there is the possibility of reaching or jackpot during execution.

<Aspect 2>
When the number of the result notification suggestion effects to be executed is smaller than the number of the numerically held display (alternate ninja) displayed by the separate effect production, the remaining execution game times display not used for the result notification suggestion effect Other effects may be performed using a ninja character corresponding to Dp.

  For example, when the number of displayed execution game times Dp (characters of a ninja) displayed during execution of the game play is three, the second result notification suggestion effect, lottery result of the jackpot lottery (lottery result: In the case of notifying the jackpot), an effect for notifying the details of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is executed by the remaining execution game times display Dp3. Specifically, it is informed that the player is made to recognize that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is usually the big win by the result notification suggestion effect by the running game times display Dp2, and thereafter, the ninja corresponding to the running game times display Dp3 By the effect by the player, the promotion effect may be executed to make the player recognize that the lottery result is normally promoted from jackpot to probability variation jackpot.

  In addition, as other promotion effects, it is notified that the player recognizes that the lottery result of the big hit lottery is the 8R probability variation big hit by the result notification suggestion effect by the execution game times display Dp2, and thereafter, the execution game times display Dp3 By the effect by the ninja corresponding to, the promotion effect may be executed to make the player recognize that the lottery result has been promoted from the 8R probability variation jackpot to the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  According to this aspect, it is possible to make the number of ninja characters shown as the numerically held display equal to the number of effects to be executed using the ninja character as the execution game times display Dp. Explaining from the aspect of processing, in the above embodiment, the number of times of the effect (in the above embodiment, the result notification suggestion effect) to be executed using the execution game display Dp (character of the divided ninja) in the game time is determined In some cases, the first numerical value information (X) for the purpose and the numerical holding number (Y) for determining the number of the numerical holding indication may be set to different values. The number of numerical information (X) and the number of numerical reservations (Y) can be the same.

  In this case, for example, even if the value of the first numerical information (X) is X = 3, an effect pattern for notifying the lottery result of the big hit lottery in the execution game times display Dp3, and the execution game times display Dp1 or execution The lottery result of the big hit lottery is notified in the game times display Dp2, and the promotion effect is executed using the remaining executed game times display Dp (Dp2 and Dp3), etc. The value of the first numerical information (X) and the fluctuation time are the same Even in this case, multiple types of effect patterns can be set. When a plurality of effect patterns are set in the effect pattern table corresponding to the case where the value of the first numerical information (X) and the fluctuation time are the same, the effect pattern table is set using random numbers etc. One effect pattern can be determined from among a plurality of effect patterns.

  In addition, as in the above embodiment, when the number of the result notification suggestion effects to be executed is smaller than the number of the numerically held display (divided ninjas) displayed by the separate effect, the final result notification indication effect A process of ending the game cycle as it is after the execution of the game may be combined with a process of executing another game using the character of the ninja corresponding to the remaining game game display Dp not used for the result notification suggestion effect . After being notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the promotion effect is executed, and the jackpot is promoted to a more advantageous type for the player among the types of jackpots, and the promotion effect is not executed and there is no promotion. As a result of the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency after being notified that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

<Aspect 3>
In the above embodiment, the number of result notification suggestion effects to be executed in the game round is adopted as the effect time correlation amount (the amount having a correlation with the time of the effect to be executed) suggested to the player, but is limited thereto Alternatively, another factor may be adopted as the presentation time correlation amount. For example, as the effect time correlation amount, the time of the effect to be executed in the game may be adopted.

  FIGS. 252 to 254 are explanatory diagrams showing the appearance of the display surface 41 a in the case where the effect time correlation amount indicates the time of effect to be executed in the game. As shown in FIG. 252A, in the first hold display area Ds1, an image showing the number of seconds is displayed in association with the character of the ninja showing the hold display Dm11. The image is a display (hereinafter, also referred to as effect time display TD) indicating the time required for the effect when the on-hold game time corresponding to the on-hold display Dm 11 is executed as the game time. In the example shown in FIG. 252 (a), the effect time display in which "60 seconds" is described is displayed.

  FIG. 252 (b) shows a state in which the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 in FIG. 252 (a) are executed as the game times. At this time, the effect time display is displayed corresponding to the character of the ninja showing the executed game times display Dp on the stage SG. The number of seconds indicated as the presentation time display TD starts counting down with the start of the game play. That is, the number of seconds shown as the effect time display TD indicates the remaining time for which the effect is to be executed in the game run. The example shown in FIG. 252 (b) shows the case where the effect time display TD is 30 seconds when the liquid crystal symbol has become the reach symbol.

  Then, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is reach (out), as shown in FIG. 253 (a), on the stage SG using 30 seconds which is the time corresponding to the presentation time display TD The character of the ninja corresponding to the execution game times display Dp displayed on the top moves on the image of the number "6" displayed in the symbol column Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol, and the number "6" Perform an attempt to change it to 7 ". That is, an effect is performed that suggests to the player that the first liquid crystal symbol may change from "reach" to "big hit" as a lottery result of the big hit lottery. After 30 seconds, as shown in FIG. 253 (b), the first liquid crystal design of the main display area MA is shifted from the pseudo stop state to the stop display state with the symbol of “7 · 6 · 7”. , End the game play. Moreover, 0 second is displayed on presentation time display TD.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is a jackpot, the time shorter than 30 seconds or 30 seconds corresponding to the presentation time display TD when the first liquid crystal symbol becomes a reach symbol The character of the ninja corresponding to the executed game times display Dp displayed on the stage SG is moved on the image of the number "6" displayed in the symbol row Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol, using the number In an attempt to change "6" to the number "7", finally, for the first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA from "7,7,7" from the pseudo stop state of "7,6,7" The state is shifted to the stop display state, and it is informed that the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot and the game round is ended.

  Despite the fact that "30 seconds" is displayed as the presentation time display TD when the first liquid crystal symbol becomes the reach symbol, a time shorter than 30 seconds from the point when the first liquid crystal symbol becomes the reach symbol When the first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA is shifted from the pseudo stop state of “7 · 6 · 7” to the stop display state of “7 · 7 · 7” (FIG. 254 (a)), By notifying that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery was a jackpot (FIG. 254 (b)), it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the time of the initially set game round has been shortened. It is possible and can give unexpectedness. In the example shown in FIG. 254, 10 seconds are left as the effect time display TD to notify that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot.

  Further, by adopting the time of the effect to be executed in the game times as the effect time correlation amount suggested to the player, the player is made to directly recognize the passage of time. As a result, when the game round is ended in a time shorter than the presentation time indicated as the presentation time correlation amount, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the time of the game round was shortened further. .

  This aspect can be realized by the following processing. When the variation time of the game time is T, the first numerical information (X) is X = T. In the present embodiment, the first numerical information (X) corresponds to the time from the start of the game run to the notification of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. Then, as in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is reach (out), the relationship between the first numerical information (X) and the number of displayed numbers for number holding (Y) = Y, and if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game is a jackpot, the relationship between the first numerical information (X) and the numerical hold display number (Y) as X ≦ Y, numerical hold display Determine the number (Y). After that, the value of the numerically pending display number (Y) is set as the effect time correlation amount to the value of the effect time display TD displayed corresponding to the withhold display Dm11. By this, the present aspect can be realized. In the example shown in this aspect, the case where Y is set to 60 is shown. That is, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is reach (off), X = Y = 60, and when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is the jackpot, X ≦ Y = 60. It is.

<Aspect 4>
In the above-mentioned mode 3, as a display method of the presentation time correlation amount, a numeral indicating the presentation time is directly displayed, but a gauge display which changes continuously may be adopted.

  FIG. 255 is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the display surface 41 a when the effect time correlation amount is displayed in a gauge display. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255 (a), the effect time correlation amount is displayed as a power gauge PG of a ninja character corresponding to the hold display. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the power gauge PG is not displayed in the vicinity of the hold display Dm, but is displayed in the upper center of the display surface 41a. That is, in this aspect, the relationship between the displayed power gauge PG and the pending display corresponding to the power gauge PG is not shown. By doing this, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of inferring which power gauge PG the displayed power gauge PG corresponds to. In the example shown in the figure, it is assumed that the displayed power gauge PG corresponds to the hold display Dm12. Therefore, when the hold game time corresponding to the hold display Dm11 in the state shown in FIG. 255 (a) is executed as the game time, the state of the power gauge PG does not change.

  FIG. 255 (b) shows a state in which the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm12 in FIG. 255 (a) are executed as the game times. As illustrated, the first liquid crystal symbol is a reach symbol. At this point, the quantity shown as the power gauge PG has not changed yet.

  Then, if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game turn is reach (out), as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the character of the ninja corresponding to the execution game display Dp displayed on the stage SG However, it moves on the image of the number "6" displayed in the symbol row Z2 of the first liquid crystal symbol, and performs an effect to try to change the number "6" to the number "7". From the time the effect is started, the amount indicated as a power gauge decreases with the passage of time. After that, when the amount shown on the power gauge becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 256 (b), the first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA is the "7 ・ 6 ・ 7" The state is shifted from the pseudo stop state to the stop display state, and the game play is ended.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game turn is a jackpot, the character of the ninja corresponding to the execution game turn display Dp is the number "6" displayed in the first liquid crystal symbol column Z2 Move at the top of the image, try to change the number "6" to the number "7", the amount shown as a power gauge becomes "0" or the amount shown as a power gauge is "0 It ends at the time before becoming "", and shifts the first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA from "7,6,7" pseudo stop state to "7,7,7" stop display state, The game round is informed that the result of the jackpot lottery was a jackpot.

  The first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA is stopped from "7,7,7" from the pseudo stop state of "7,6,7" before the amount shown as the power gauge becomes "0". When the display state is changed (FIG. 257 (a)) and it is informed that the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit (FIG. 257 (b)), the amount indicated as the power gauge becomes “0” The unexpectedness can be given to the player who has guessed that the result of the jackpot lottery will be notified at that time. Also, in this case, since the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot, the player's pleasure can be synergistically increased with the unexpectedness.

<Aspect 5>
Further, in the above embodiment, the presentation time correlation amount is suggested by the display of the numerical holding display (the divided ninja) triggered by the separate production, but another form may be adopted.

  FIG. 258 and FIG. 259 are explanatory diagrams for explaining another embodiment which suggests the presentation time correlation amount. For example, the presentation time correlation amount may be suggested by executing an effect in which a child turtle character appears on a turtle character showing a game display (hold display or an execution game display). In this case, the number of executions of the result notification suggestion effect in the game round is suggested as the effect time correlation amount.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 259, the game times display (hold display or execution game times display) is displayed as an image showing a meter, and the game time suggests the play time correlation amount when the play time correlation amount is suggested. An effect of increasing the amount indicated by the meter corresponding to the display is executed. The power gauge described above, the meter shown in this example, etc., as the presentation time correlation amount, the time required to execute a predetermined effect to be executed in a game, the total time of all effects to be executed in a game, etc. It is suitable when suggesting the physical quantity which increases and decreases continuously.

<Aspect 6>
The game times display (hold display and execution game times display) in the above embodiment suggested an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed (rendering time correlation amount), but in addition to the effect time correlation amount, the other Information may be suggested. For example, in addition to the presentation time correlation amount, information indicating the possibility of winning a jackpot in a jackpot lottery of game times corresponding to the game times display may be suggested.

  FIG. 260 shows a suspension display that suggests information indicating the presentation time correlation amount and information (hereinafter also referred to as expectation information) indicating the possibility of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery of game times corresponding to the suspension display. It is an explanatory view explaining.

  In each of FIGS. 260 (a) to 260 (d), numerical hold displays Dm11a to Dm11c, hold display Dm12 and hold display Dm13 are shown. The numerical holding displays Dm11a to Dm11c in the respective drawings in FIGS. 260 (a) to 260 (d) indicate the amount of presentation time correlation by the number of numerical holding displays. Specifically, the numerical suspension display Dm11a to Dm11c indicates the number of result notification suggestion effects executed in the game session by the number of the numerical suspension display of the presentation time correlation amount.

  Furthermore, the numerical holding displays Dm11a to Dm11c in each of FIGS. 260 (a) to 260 (d) are different in display mode, and are different from the numerical holding displays Dm11a to Dm11c shown in FIG. 260 (a). It is highly likely that the numerical hold display Dm11a to Dm11c shown in FIG. 260 (b) is a jackpot in the jackpot of the game round corresponding to the hold display, and the numerical hold display shown in FIG. 260 (b) It is more likely that the numerical suspension display Dm11a to Dm11c shown in FIG. 260 (c) is more likely to win a jackpot in the gaming round jackpot corresponding to the suspension display than the Dm 11a to Dm 11c, and FIG. 260 (c) A large number of game times in which the numerical hold display Dm11a to Dm11c shown in FIG. 260 (d) corresponds to the hold display, rather than the numerical hold display Dm11a to Dm11c shown in FIG. It is likely to win the jackpot in or lottery.

  According to this aspect, the game times display (in the present example, the held game times display) is at least a plurality of types of information, and information indicating the presentation time correlation amount and the jackpot in the game round jackpot corresponding to the hold display In addition to causing the player who has recognized the game times display to guess that a presentation corresponding to the suggested presentation time correlation amount will be executed, as it suggests information indicating the possibility of winning, Expectation to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time corresponding to the game time display can be given.

<Aspect 7>
As shown in each of FIGS. 260 (a) to 260 (d), in the above-mentioned aspect 6, when the expectation information is suggested using the numerical hold indication, all the numerical hold indicated. Although the display mode of the display (numerical reserve display Dm11a to Dm11c in FIG. 260) is changed to a display mode corresponding to the possibility of the jackpot, as an aspect that suggests the expectation information using the presentation time correlation amount Other aspects may be adopted. For example, the following aspects can be adopted.

  FIG. 261 is an explanatory diagram of an example of suggesting the expectation information using the presentation time correlation amount. As illustrated, in the present example, the expectation information is suggested using a part of the numerical hold display among the numerical hold displays Dm11a to Dm11c that are presentation time correlation amounts. That is, the indication of the expectation level information is suggested using the display showing the temporal part indicated by the presentation time correlation amount suggested by the game times display (the hold display and the execution game times display).

  In the example shown in FIG. 261, the game mode in which the display mode of the numerical hold display Dm11a of FIG. 261 (b) corresponds to the hold display than the display mode of the numerical hold display Dm11c of FIG. There is a high possibility that the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and the display mode of the numerical hold display Dm11b of FIG. 261 (c) is more suspended than the display mode of the numerical hold display Dm11a of FIG. 261 (b). It is highly likely that the player has won the jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the game times corresponding to the display, and it is more probable that the numerical suspension display Dm11a of FIG. The display mode is more likely to have been won by the jackpot in the game round jackpot corresponding to the hold display.

  Furthermore, in this example, among the numerical holding displays Dm11a to Dm11c displayed as the presentation time correlation amount, the timing for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery of the numerical holding display used for suggesting the expectation degree information is determined. The value is randomly determined from among the numerical reserve displays Dm11a to Dm11c regardless of the value of the first numerical value information (X) used for the above. Therefore, for example, in the case where the numerical suspension display indicating the degree of expectation information in the numerical suspension display is the numerical suspension display Dm11c as shown in FIG. Of the execution game times display Dp1, the execution game times display Dp2, and the execution game times display Dp3, the execution game times display Dp3 is a display mode that suggests the expectation information, but the result notification corresponding to the execution game times display Dp2 A jackpot may be notified as a lottery result of a jackpot lottery in the suggestion effect. That is, in this case, the first numerical value information (X) is X = 2. In this case, the result notification suggestion effect corresponding to the execution game times display Dp3 used for suggesting the expectation information is not executed, and the game times are ended.

  This aspect can be realized by the following processing. After acquiring the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the game corresponding to the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 by the first determination processing Determine the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the round.

  Then, in the holding effect setting process (FIG. 236), when it is decided to execute the separate production effect execution judging process (FIG. 236: S12103) and to execute the holding game turn separate effect, the first numerical information (X) and the number Determine the number of potential pending displays (Y).

  Thereafter, the display mode of the numerical hold display for suggesting the expectation information is determined. That is, the display mode shown in Dm11c in FIG. 261 (a), the display mode shown in Dm11a in FIG. 261 (b), the display mode shown in Dm11b in FIG. 261 (c), Dm11a in FIG. 261 (d) It is determined which display aspect of the displayed aspect is used. Specifically, the value of the random number for determining the display mode is acquired, and the display mode is determined by collating with the display mode determination table prepared for each lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The display mode determination table is table data to which random numbers for display mode determination are allocated corresponding to each display mode. For example, the display mode determination table for the jackpot is a display allocated to the display mode shown in the numerical hold display Dm11b in FIG. 261 (c) or the display mode shown in the numerical hold display Dm11a in FIG. 261 (d). The display mode determination in which the number of random numbers for mode determination is allocated to the display mode shown in the numerical hold display Dm11c in FIG. 261 (a) or the display mode shown in the numerical hold display Dm11a in FIG. 261 (b) More than the random number for As a result, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the display mode shown in the numerical hold display Dm11b in FIG. 261 (c) or the display mode shown in the numerical hold display Dm11a in FIG. 261 (d). The probability of being determined is high. In this way, the display mode of the numerical hold display for suggesting the expectation information is determined.

  Then, based on the number of displayed numbers of pending display (Y) previously determined, among the displayed number of pending displays, which display mode of the number of pending displays should be the display mode indicating the expectation information decide. As described above, the numerically pending display to be the display mode indicating the expectation information is randomly selected regardless of the first numerical information. For example, it is possible that the display mode of any numerical holding display may be won by the process using random numbers among the numerical holding displays displayed for the number of the numerical holding display (Y). It is determined whether to make a display mode that suggests information to be shown. In this manner, processing is performed to determine which display mode a part of the numerical hold display should be changed to indicate the degree of expectation information, and which display mode of the numerical hold display to change. This aspect can be realized by doing this.

  According to this aspect, one or more (one in this example) of the character images of the number of ninjas corresponding to the number of times of execution of the informing effect indicated by the numerical hold display as the displayed effect time correlation amount Of the image of the specific ninja) to indicate the degree of expectation, or when the number of times of execution of the result notification suggestion effect reaches the number of times of execution corresponding to the character image of the specific ninja or In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some notification or suggestion regarding the jackpot lottery may be made.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, among the numerical suspension displays (the numerical suspension displays Dm11a to Dm11c in the example of this embodiment) displayed as the presentation time correlation amount, the numerical suspension display used to suggest the expectation information is It randomly determines regardless of the value of the first numerical information (X) used to determine the timing of notifying the result of the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the number of executions of the result notification suggestion effect reaches the number of executions corresponding to the character image of a specific ninja indicating the expectation information, or when it reaches some notification or suggestion regarding the jackpot lottery In spite of giving the player a sense of expectation that there is no, as a result of the numerical hold display as the effect time correlation amount displayed as a result of notification indication effect is performed as a result of the execution frequency different from the execution frequency of the notification indication effect May be

  As a result, for the player who has visually recognized the numerical suspension display as the displayed presentation time correlation amount, the result is until the number of times of execution corresponding to the character image of the specific ninja suggesting the expectation information is reached in the game round. While giving a sense of urgency as to whether the notification suggestion effect is to be executed, and if the result notification suggestion effect is executed until the number of times of execution corresponding to the character image of the specific ninja that suggests the expectation information is reached, the jackpot Give a sense of expectation that some notice or suggestion about the lottery will be made. That is, the player can be made to make an estimation with respect to multi-step change in the game, and further, the player is given a sense of tension and anticipation as to whether or not the game is executed according to the estimated content. can do.

<Aspect 8>
In the fourteenth embodiment, a separate game effect (held game turn appearance performance effect) is executed for the held game time displayed as the held display Dm11, but the present invention is not limited to this, the held display Dm11 to Dm14, the held display Dm21 to With respect to any of the hold game times of Dm24, the hold game circulation effect may be executed. In addition, as described above, during the execution of the game play, a separate game effect (execution game cycle effect) may be executed on the execution game time display Dp.

  In the case of executing the execution game circulation separate effect, the first numerical information (X) in the holding effect setting process (FIG. 236) executed with the game ball entering the starting opening as a trigger as in the fourteenth embodiment. And the number setting display number (Y) is not limited, and effect setting processing (FIG. 243) executed immediately before the start of the game run which is triggered by the game ball entering the start opening. The aspect which determines 1st numerical information (X) and numerical pending display number (Y) in may be employ | adopted. Specifically, after determining the presence or absence of the jackpot and the presence of reach in step S12402 of the effect setting process (FIG. 243), in the case of jackpot or reach occurrence separate player effect (in this example, the execution game circulation personality effect) The separate-body effect execution determination process of determining whether to execute is performed, and when it is determined that the alternate-body effect is to be performed, the first numerical information (X) and the number of numerically held displays (Y) are determined. Thereafter, the result notification effect setting process (FIG. 243: S12403) is executed. The execution of the play game serialization effect can also be realized by executing such processing.

  In addition, after the start of the game, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the execution game rotation effect, to determine the effect pattern of the result notification suggestion effect. For example, during the execution of the game play, the effect to urge the player to operate the effect operation button 24 is executed, and the game is executed according to the effect performed by the player operating the effect operation button 24. Run. In this case, the remaining time until the end of the game run is calculated after the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player, and the number of result notification suggestion effects that can be performed is determined according to the remaining time. Specifically, table data in which the number of executable times of the result notification suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the result notification suggestion are associated is prepared for each value of the remaining time, and it is actually executed based on the table data. The number of executable times of the result notification suggestion effect corresponding to the remaining time in the game play and the effect pattern of the result notification suggestion effect are determined. Then, based on the number of executable times of the result notification indication effect determined (that is, the value corresponding to the first numerical information (X)), the number of execution game times display Dp to be displayed by the execution game rotation effect (the above 14th A value corresponding to the numerical reserve display number (Y) in the embodiment / hereinafter referred to as a numerical game count display number (Y)) is determined. Then, according to the determined number of times of display of the number of times of game display (Y), an execution game circulation effect is executed. On the other hand, although the player is instructed to operate the production operation button 24 while the game is being executed, the player has not operated the production operation button 24 according to the game execution. In the case where the player does not operate the rendering operation button 24, the rendering is executed according to the rendering pattern of the normal rendering prepared in advance. By executing such processing, after the start of the game run, in response to the player's operation of the presentation operation button 24, it is dynamically judged whether or not to execute the execution game circulation effect, and It is possible to realize the determination of the effect pattern of the result notification suggestion effect. As described above, during the execution of the game run, the flow of the effect in the game play by dynamically determining whether or not to execute the game circulation self-directed effect, and by determining the effect pattern of the result notification suggestion effect Because it dynamically changes, it is possible to always give the player a sense of tension and to increase the level of attention to the game.

  Furthermore, the processing in the fourteenth embodiment may be combined with the processing in this aspect. That is, by combining the holding game turn-to-play performance effect and the execution game turn-to-turn effect, the game ball enters the starting opening and the hold game turn is generated, and then the game turn is executed and ended. Since there is a possibility that a separate effect is always executed for the game session during a period, it is possible to always give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of tension.

<Aspect 9>
In the fourteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 245 and FIG. 246, each result notification suggestion effect 1 (“R1” in the figure) and result notification suggestion effect 2 (“figure in FIG. "R2"), the result notification suggestion effect 3 ("R3" in the figure), and the result notification suggestion effect 4 ("R4" in the figure) had the same time length of the effect, but the time of each effect It is also possible to adopt an aspect in which the length differs. For example, the result notification suggestion effect 2 has a longer time length than the result notification suggestion effect 1, and the result notification suggestion effect 3 has a longer time length than the result notification suggestion effect 2, and the result notification suggestion effect A mode may be adopted in which the time length of the result notification suggestion effect 4 is longer than that of 3. By doing this, as the number of executions of the result notification suggestion effect increases, the time length of one result notification suggestion effect becomes longer, so the player is notified each time the number of results notification suggestion effects is increased. It is possible to impart a sense of tension that is long in time, and to further provide a sense of expectation and a sense of tension with respect to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery notified after the execution of the result notification suggestion effect.

  Furthermore, the pseudo continuous continuous notice production 1 for the normal production of the same length as each temporal length of the result notification suggestion production 1, the result notification suggestion production 2, the result notification suggestion production 3, and the result notification suggestion production 4, the pseudo continuous notice production A mode may be adopted in which the second, the pseudo continuous notice effect 3, and the pseudo continuous notice effect 4 are provided. As described in the eighth aspect, in the case of the aspect of dynamically determining whether or not to execute the game circulation effect during the execution of the game, it is temporarily determined that the execution game circulation effect is not to be executed. In this case, instead of executing each result notification suggestion effects 1 to 4 in each result notification suggestion effect pattern table, by executing the pseudo continuous advance notice effects 1 to 4 for the normal effect, the execution game circulation separation effect is not executed. Since the effect pattern can be generated, the processing can be simplified.

<Aspect 10>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the relation between the first numerical value information (X) and the numerical holding display number (Y) is X ≦ Y, but even if the value of Y is smaller than the value of X Good. That is, the notification suggestion effect of the result more times than the number of the numerically held display is executed in the game time. For example, when three ninja characters of numerical hold display Dm11a, numerical hold display Dm11b, and numerical hold display Dm11c are displayed in response to execution of the hold game circulation separation effect, that is, in the game session, on stage SG When three ninja characters corresponding to the execution game times display Dp1, the execution game times display Dp2, and the execution game times display Dp3 are displayed, the result notification suggestion effect corresponding to each execution game times display Dp1 to 3 is executed After being done, a result notification suggestion effect is additionally performed. In this case, after the result notification suggestion effect corresponding to each execution game times display Dp1 to 3 is executed, a character of the ninja appears additionally from the side of the display surface 41a, and the additional result notification suggestion effect is executed.

  In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the value of Y is determined under the condition of X ≦ Y when determining the numerical reserve display number (Y) based on the first numerical value information (X). In the above, when determining the numerical reserve display number (Y) based on the first numerical information (X), the value of Y is determined under the condition of 1 ≦ Y. By doing this, not only the value of Y is determined to be a value greater than the value of X, but the value of Y is determined to be a value smaller than the value of X. By doing this, it is possible to realize the effect according to this aspect.

  Further, the process according to this aspect may be combined with the process in the above embodiment. In this case, even when the result indication suggestion effect is performed the same number of times as the number of displayed numerically held displays, the sense of tension or the sense of tension may be additionally played as a result indication suggestion effect Can be given to

<Aspect 11>
As the reach effect, an effect of a battle between two sides in a battle (hereinafter, also referred to as a battle effect) may be executed. In this case, the presentation time correlation amount is suggested by the number of characters belonging to each side. For example, in the case where there are three characters belonging to the camp A and three characters belonging to the camp B, the number of battle effects to be executed until the finalization is 3 to 5 times. Since the effect is executed as a reach effect, the player estimates that the combat effect takes a long time, and recognizes that the possibility of being settled with the minimum number of battles is low, although the effect is minimal. The determination may be made in three times, which is the number of battles, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery may be notified. By doing this, it is possible to reverse the player's guess and to give the player unexpectedness or surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

<Aspect 12>
The presentation time correlation amount described above is the number of times of the predetermined effect to be executed in the game time, the time required to execute the predetermined effect to be performed in the game time, the total time of all effects to be executed in one game time, etc. Various quantities (physical quantity: numerical value, time, number, number of times, length, weight, speed, strength of force) as long as it directly or indirectly represents an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be performed Volume, volume, energy content etc.) can be adopted.

<Aspect 13>
The presentation time correlation amount may be expressed in an aspect such as a shape, a pattern, or a color. For example, at the same time as the game play is started, an image indicating the effect time correlation amount is displayed on the symbol display device 41. At this time, the color of the image showing the presentation time correlation amount is set to be longer in the order of white, blue, green and red so that the execution time of the presentation in the game round becomes longer. That is, compared with the case where the color of the image showing the presentation time correlation amount is white, the execution time of the presentation in the game round is longer when the color of the image showing the presentation time correlation amount is blue indicates the presentation time correlation amount The execution time of the effect in the game turn is longer in the case where the color of the image showing the amount of presentation time correlation is green than in the case where the color of the image is blue, and the color of the image showing the amount of presentation time correlation is green than In the case where the color of the image indicating the presentation time correlation amount is red, the execution time of the presentation in the game round is set to be longer. When such a setting is made, only when a jackpot of a specific type is won in a jackpot lottery, an effect corresponding to an amount different from the effect time correlation amount shown as an image on the symbol display device 41 is executed.

  For example, only when the jackpot of a specific type is won in the jackpot lottery, the color of the image showing the presentation time correlation amount is white even though the color of the image showing the presentation time correlation amount is red in the game turn A mode is adopted in which the effect of a time corresponding to a certain case is executed and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is notified.

  Recognizing that the color of the image showing the amount of time correlation amount is red, the execution time of the effect in the game turn is relatively long, the effect while predicting that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery will be notified at the end of the effect For the player watching the game, the player's guess is overturned by performing the effect shorter than the time length suggested as the effect time correlation amount and ending the game round, and the player is surprised And can give surprises. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, as long as the player can visually recognize the difference in the aspect represented as the presentation time correlation amount, the aspect may be represented in another aspect instead of the shape, the pattern, or the color. For example, the presentation time correlation amount may be expressed by sound. Specifically, when the execution time of the effect to be executed in the game is adopted as the effect time correlation amount, a mode may be adopted in which the execution time of the effect is informed to the player by voice. In addition, when the number of times of execution of a predetermined effect (for example, result notification suggestion effect) to be executed in the game round is adopted as the effect time correlation amount, a mode of notifying the player of the execution frequency of the effect by voice is adopted. You may

  Moreover, you may provide the alerting | reporting means for exclusive use for suggesting the presentation time correlation amount. For example, a dedicated light emitter (for example, an LED lamp) may be provided to indicate the amount of presentation time correlation. Then, the effect time correlation amount may be indicated by the light emission mode of the light emitter. For example, the color of the light emitted by the light emitter may indicate the amount of time correlation of presentation. In this case, for example, the color of the light emitted from the light emitter indicating the presentation time correlation amount is set in the order of white, blue, green, and red so that the execution time of the presentation in the game round becomes longer. be able to. When such a setting is made, processing different from the above setting is executed only when a specific type of jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery. For example, only when the jackpot of a specific type is won in the jackpot lottery, the light emitter showing the presentation time correlation amount although the color of the light emitted by the light emitter showing the presentation time correlation amount is red in the game turn When the color of the light emitted is white, the effect of the time corresponding to is executed and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is notified. Also in this case, similarly to the above, it is recognized that the color of the light emitted from the light emitter indicating the presentation time correlation amount is red, and the execution time of the presentation in the game round is relatively long and the jackpot lottery is By performing an effect shorter than the temporal length suggested as the effect time correlation amount to the player watching the effect while inferring that the lottery result will be notified, and ending the game round It is possible to reverse the player's guess and give the player unexpectedness or surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the amount of presentation time correlation may be indicated by the blinking cycle of the light emitter. In this case, for example, it is possible to adopt an aspect in which the execution time of the effect in the game round is set longer as the flashing cycle of the light emitter indicating the effect time correlation amount is longer.

<Aspect 14>
In the fourteenth embodiment, the presentation time correlation amount is suggested using the display mode of the game play display (hold display, play game play display) which is a display showing one game play pending or in progress. However, another aspect may be adopted as an aspect that suggests the presentation time correlation amount. For example, in a state in which there are a plurality of reserved game times, any of the plurality of reserved game times has a reserved game time in which a "big hit" or a "specific out (small hit)" is won in the jackpot lottery. When the plurality of reserved game times are executed as game times, if there are, the continuous series of specified effects are executed over the plurality of game times. Then, in the specific effect, it is suggested that the jackpot lottery is won in the on-hold game occurrence which is finally executed among the plurality of on-hold occurrences on the effect. That is, the specific effect is the effect time correlation amount.

  Then, in spite of the fact that the stage time correlation amount is suggested in the staged representation in the specific stage, in a predetermined case, staged effects different in amount from the staged time correlation amount suggested are executed. For example, in the particular effect, the effect indicates that the jackpot lottery has been won in the hold game run to be executed last among the plurality of the hold game turns in effect, the last Win a jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the game play before the game play. That is, as processing of the pachinko machine 10, such a specific effect is executed when there is a held game time after the held game time for winning the jackpot lottery. By doing this, it is presumed that when the last hold game time among the plurality of hold game times is executed as the game time while recognizing the content suggested by the specific effect, the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery The guess of the player who is playing the game can be reversed, and the game can be given unexpectedness.

<Aspect 15>
The timing to display the presentation time correlation amount is not limited to the display before the start of the game times and the display simultaneously with the start of the game times, and starts the display based on the predetermined opportunity after the start of the game times May be For example, an image may be displayed that indicates that the reach has occurred in the game session and also indicates an amount of presentation time correlation. In this case, for example, a mode indicating the execution time of the effect to be executed between the reach occurrence and the end of the game turn, or the predetermined execution between the reach occurrence and the end of the game turn The aspect which suggests the execution frequency of production of can be employ | adopted.

<Aspect 16>
The target suggested by the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to the presentation time correlation amount, but may be a mode that suggests another amount if it is an amount related to the processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as an execution amount) . That is, the presentation time correlation amount described above is an aspect of the execution amount.

  In this case, for example, a mode may be adopted in which an execution amount is suggested, and in a predetermined case, processing of an amount different from the suggested execution amount is performed. As an example, a configuration may be adopted in which an amount related to processing to be performed in a fixed time is suggested to the player, and in a predetermined case, a different amount of processing from the suggested execution amount is performed in a fixed time. . Hereinafter, specific examples will be described.

  For example, it indicates the degree of expectation (hereinafter, also referred to as the expected degree) of winning the jackpot lottery to the player, and executes an effect (hereinafter, also referred to as step-up effect) in which the expected degree is promoted. In addition, the number of executions of the step-up effect is also suggested as the execution amount. For example, when "2" is displayed as the execution amount, it indicates that the step-up effect is executed twice, indicating that the expectation degree indicated to the player is promoted twice. There is. That is, since the number of times the expectation is promoted increases as the suggested execution amount increases, the player can be made to recognize that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases. In the pachinko machine 10 which executes such processing, in a predetermined case (for example, when a predetermined lottery is performed and the lottery result is a specific result), step-up of an amount (number of times) different from the suggested execution amount A presentation may be performed. As a more specific example, although "3" is displayed as the execution amount (the number of executions of the step-up effect), actually, the step-up effect is executed four times or twice. Execute the step-up effect the number of times different from the suggested execution amount. By doing this, it is possible to reverse the guess of the player who has recognized the suggested execution amount, and to impart unexpectedness to the game.

  Also, for example, in a gaming machine that has a limit on the number of times of games that can be continuously executed in the high probability mode, the remaining number of executions of game times that can be executed in the high probability mode (also called the remaining number of executions) You may employ the aspect which suggests. In this case, a mode may be adopted in which a number corresponding to the remaining number of times of execution is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as the execution amount. Then, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the high probability mode may be ended with the number of executions smaller than the remaining number of executions indicating the execution amount. The end of the high probability mode in this case may mean that the high probability mode flag is OFF. Therefore, while the game is being executed in the high probability mode, if the probability variation big jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the high probability mode flag is once turned OFF, and the high probability mode is ended. Thereafter, after the open / close execution mode (round game) is ended, the high probability mode flag is turned ON again, and the game play in the new high probability mode is started.

  In addition, a mode may be adopted in which the amount of execution suggests the total execution time of a series of continuous renditions executed over the remaining number of times of execution of game times that can be executed in the high probability mode. For example, when the remaining number of times of execution is 20 times and the execution time of one game cycle is 5 seconds, "100" as the total execution time of continuous effects executed over 20 game cycles. It may be displayed as (20 times × 5 seconds). Then, as time passes, the number shown as the execution amount (representation time correlation amount) changes to a smaller value. On the other hand, the high probability mode may be ended before the time corresponding to the number indicating the execution amount (representation time correlation amount) elapses, only when the jackpot of the specific type is won in the jackpot lottery.

  In addition, for example, as the execution amount, a mode may be adopted that indicates the number of times the motorized accessory 34a or the open / close door 36b is opened in a predetermined gaming state. Then, when the motorized jack 34a and the open / close door 36b are opened in response to the jackpot win of a specific type, the motorized jack 34a is different in the number of times of opening from the motorized jack 34a and the open / close door 36b suggested as the execution amount Alternatively, the open / close door 36b may be opened. By doing this, it is possible to reverse the guess of the player who has recognized the suggested execution amount, and to impart unexpectedness to the game.

<Aspect 17>
In a gaming machine that has a limit on the number of games that can be executed continuously in the high probability mode, the game apparatus may be configured to include a suggestion unit that suggests the number of games played continuously in the high probability mode. And, when not winning the jackpot in the game times in the high probability mode, despite performing the game times in the high probability mode the number of times corresponding to the number suggested by the suggestion means, the jackpot in the game times in the high probability mode If the player is elected, a configuration may be adopted in which the high probability mode game round is executed a number of times different from the number suggested by the suggestion means, and the high probability mode is ended.

  The end of the high probability mode in this case may mean that the high probability mode flag is OFF. Therefore, while the game is being executed in the high probability mode, if the probability variation big jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the high probability mode flag is once turned OFF, and the high probability mode is ended. Thereafter, after the open / close execution mode (round game) is ended, the high probability mode flag is turned ON again, and the game play in the new high probability mode is started.

<Aspect 18>
Adopts a configuration that includes suggestion means to suggest an amount that correlates to the length of time until the high probability mode flag is turned off (for example, the remaining number of times of continuous game play that can be performed continuously in high probability mode) You may Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the process of turning off the high probability mode flag is performed before the length of time until the high probability mode flag suggested by the suggestion means is turned off has elapsed.

O. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications are possible.

O1. Modification 1:
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the suggestion effect is performed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game repetition effect are performed, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. May be omitted. Even in the configuration in which the suggestion effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game round in the second game round despite the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to predict that the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run has been won. In addition, even if it is the configuration that omits the suggestion effect, by performing the game repetition effect due to having won the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game turn, to give surprise to the player, to the game Unexpectedness can be given.

O2. Modification 2:
In the case a2 of the first embodiment described above and the case c2 of the third embodiment, the suggestive effect is performed in the ending period, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game play, the suggested effect may be executed before the game play effect. That is, if it is the timing before reproducing the presentation already performed, the suggestion presentation can be performed at any timing. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the suggestion effect is executed prior to the execution of the special game state reproduction effect and the game repetition effect, so for example, the effect performed in the second game cycle has already been made. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of the executed effect.

O3. Modification 3:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the target of reproduction in the special game state reproduction effect and the game repetition reproduction effect is not limited to the effect executed in the big hit game round. For example, reach effects in out-of-round (reach) game times may be targets for reproduction in special game state reproduction effects and in game repeat effects, or out-of-reach (reach nothing) games It is good also as a target of reproduction of the notice production in times.

O4. Modification 4:
The first gaming times and the second gaming times defined in the first to fourth embodiments are not limited to two gaming times which are successively executed. For example, other game times may exist between the first game time and the second game time.

O5. Modification 5:
In the first to third embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the effect to be performed in the ending period of the special gaming state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game number of times executed after the special gaming state. did. For example, in the first embodiment, the effect to be performed in the ending period of the special gaming state to be executed after the first game is the suggestion effect and the special gaming state reproduction effect as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9) The configuration is such that it is determined based on the special information related to the second gaming round to be executed after the special gaming state, but it is not limited to such a configuration. The effect to be determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game times to be executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggested effect or the special game state reproduction effect, and adopts any other effect. Also good. For example, other effects such as normal reach effects (reach effects not targeted for special game state reproduction effects) or effects to be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to execute an effect in consideration of special information related to a predetermined number of game times to be executed after the special game state in the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect having relevance to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

O6. Modification 6:
The processes performed in the first to fourth embodiments may be used in combination. That is, the case a1 (FIG. 9A) and the case a2 (FIG. 9B), which are the processes to be executed in the first embodiment, and the processes to be executed in the second embodiment (FIGS. 46A and 46B) Case c1 (FIG. 48 (a)) and case c2 (FIG. 48 (b)), which are processes to be executed in the third embodiment, and case d1 (FIG. 49 (a) (and processes to be executed in the fourth embodiment). ) And case d2 (FIG. 49 (b)), a plurality of processes may be appropriately selected and used together. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect of the combined treatment. For example, with regard to effects such as a special game state reproduction effect and a game repetition effect, the attention degree and the expectation degree of the player can be improved with respect to an effect for reproducing an already executed effect.

O7. Modification 7:
In the first to sixth embodiments, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the case of winning the jackpot lottery is described as an example, but the predetermined condition is that the jackpot lottery is to be won. It is not limited. For example, as the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the case where the condition for executing the reach effect is satisfied based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 may be adopted. Thus, even if other conditions are set as the predetermined conditions, the same effects as the effects described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

O8. Modification 8:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, three types of images of the objects A to C are adopted as object images used for the preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, two types of object images may be adopted as object images used for the preview effect, or four types of object images may be adopted. As described above, even if an arbitrary number of object images are adopted, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained. Also, various contents can be adopted for the contents of each object.

O9. Modification 9:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, depending on the combination of the images of the objects displayed as the notice effect, the expectation of the jackpot is shown to the player as a game situation, but, for example, the expectation of the probability change jackpot A configuration may be adopted in which the player is shown various game situations as the game situation, such as the degree or the expectation of the current game state being a definite change state.

O10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in an example in FIG. 54, the display pattern tables of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C have three types of jackpot, reach (reach) and out (reach no). In the case where each display pattern random number is distributed, for example, the division of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is further classified into 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, The effect by the object B may be functioned as a step-up effect indicating the expectation of the probability variation jackpot. In addition, for example, in the gaming machine in which the latent probability change state exists, the effect by the object C may be functioned as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability change state of the current game time. As described above, if the object A, the object B, and the object C have a function that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has different types (for example, jackpot expectations and The degree of pros and cons of the game may be shown.

O11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, although the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object is set to change with time. It may be That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having relevance, and each object displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a is The arrangement of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table and the timing of the display start are set so as not to overlap each other.

O12. Modification 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed so as not to display the image frame. However, the display pattern (A1) is used. The image frame displayed as -A2-A3) may be configured not to display the image frame of a part or all of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3. Further, the same processing may be performed on other object images.

O13. Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to set the arrangement and the display start timing for each combination of object images displayed as the advance notice effect by the arrangement and timing setting table. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, even in the notice effect in which the object A and the object B are displayed, a notice effect in which (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3) are combined, or (A1-A2-A3) and (B1) in combination There are multiple types of preview effects such as the preview effect. The arrangement of each object image and the display start timing may be set for each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects. By doing this, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period can improve the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression.

O14. Modification 14:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative positions between the objects are considered, and the objects are related to each other. In order to be displayed on the display surface 41a in a mode having the above, the relative arrangement position between the objects and the timing of the display are set. Specifically, the aspect is set to be displayed in the aspect having narrative as the aspect having relevance, but is set so that the plurality of objects are displayed in the aspect having one idea as the aspect having relevance Various modes can be adopted as a mode in which a plurality of objects have relevance, such as a configuration in which a plurality of objects are displayed in a mode having a predetermined rule, or a configuration in which a plurality of objects are displayed.

O15. Modification 15:
Each display pattern set in the display pattern table described in the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment is not limited to the mode shown in the above embodiment, and adopts the display pattern of the other mode. Can. For example, a display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as the display pattern set in the display pattern table for BC. In this case, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing how a dog comes out of the box, and gives the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a display pattern showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to the deterioration of the weather It is possible to give the player the recognition that the situation is disadvantageous, and by combining the objects, it is possible to perform various effects, and objects can be used effectively.

O16. Modification 16:
In the sixth embodiment, the object A, the object B, the object C, or an image obtained by combining them is adopted as the image used for the preview effect, but another image may be adopted.

  FIG. 262 is an explanatory view showing an object D that can be used for the advance effect. The object D is composed of three images of an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and is an image that changes with time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. FIG. 262 (a) shows the image D1, FIG. 262 (b) shows the image D2, and FIG. 262 (c) shows the image D3. As illustrated, the object D expresses a love pattern of a male character and a female character. Specifically, a state in which a male character and a female character are staring each other at a certain distance is represented in the image D1. In the image D2, a state in which a male character and a female character are staring at a short distance is represented. In the image D3, a male character and a female character hold hands and express how they get along well. Further, in the image D 3, it is expressed that the female character is talking to the male character so as to keep the father of the female character secretly making friends.

  In the object D composed of such an image of the contents, a state is shown in which love of men and women is fulfilled as the image progresses in the order of the image D1, the image D2 and the image D3. The image D3 generally gives a better impression than the image D2. That is, the image D2 from the image D1 and the image D3 from the image D2 give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Further, the object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as a step-up effect image which is set such that the probability of winning a big hit lottery increases as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine in the modification 16 is provided with the display pattern table for D as the display pattern table, and in the three cases of jackpot, miss (reach) and miss (reach not), the non-display and display pattern, respectively. Four display patterns of (D1), display pattern (D1-D2), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3) are allocated. The display pattern table for D is the display pattern display pattern (D1) among the above four display patterns most frequently displayed in the case of detachment (no reach), and the above is the case in the case of detachment (reach). Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) of the four display patterns is most often displayed. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned to be high.

  The pachinko machine according to the present modification further performs preview effects in which the object E is combined with the image E as another image.

  FIG. 263 shows an image (object D + image E) in which the image E is combined with the object D. As illustrated, an image E, which is an image combined with the object D, represents the father of a female character. The object D + image E is composed of three images of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], and [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], [image D] It is an image which changes with time in order of D3 + image E]. 263 (a) shows [image D1 + image E], FIG. 263 (b) shows [image D2 + image E], and FIG. 263 (c) shows [image D3 + image E]. As shown in the figure, the object D + image E shows a manner in which the love pattern of the male character and the female character is seen by the father of the female character from behind the pillar. Specifically, in [Image D1 + Image E], it is expressed that a male character and a female character look at each other at a certain distance while watching the father of the female character from behind the pillar It is done. [Image D 2 + Image E] shows that a male character and a female character look at each other at a short distance, while a father of the female character looks from behind the pillar. [Image D3 + Image E] talk so that male characters and female characters connect their hands and female characters keep secret that they are getting along well with their male characters. It is expressed that the female character's father is looking from behind the pillar.

  The object D + image E composed of images of such contents is composed of the female character and the father as the image proceeds in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is speculated that the parent-child relationship will deteriorate. Therefore, as the images progress in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], a generally negative impression is given. In other words, [image D2 + image E] gives a better impression than [image D3 + image E] and [image D1 + image E] gives a generally better impression than [image D2 + image E]. That is, [image D2 + image E] from [image D3 + image E] and [image D1 + image E] from [image D2 + image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

  In addition, the object D + image E is displayed as an effect image which is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot lottery decreases as it progresses to [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine in the modification 16 includes the display pattern table for DE as the display pattern table, and in the three cases of the jackpot, the detachment (reach presence) and the detachment (reach nothing), the non-display and display pattern respectively Four display patterns of (D1 / E), display pattern (D1-D2 / E), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) are allocated. When the display pattern table for DE is out (reach nothing), the display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and it is out (reach existence) In the case where the display pattern (D1-D2 / E) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1 / E) is the most frequently displayed among the four display patterns in the case of the big hit. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so as to increase the frequency of occurrence.

  By doing this, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the sixth embodiment. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modification, the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E, as compared with the case where the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E. The image D3 is displayed in combination with the image E in the case where the image D1 is displayed in combination with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a despite the fact that the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. It is possible to give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation than when displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the game situation by devising how to combine the images and the contents of the images.

  In addition, the probability that the jackpot lottery is won is larger when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E than when the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E. Although the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E despite the fact that the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E, the big hit lottery is more The probability of being won is high. Therefore, when the predetermined image is combined with the effect image that is stepped up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the degree of expectation are higher, giving the player a completely different recognition of the game situation. it can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 or the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on the presence or absence of the display of the image E. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a can be improved. Although the above-mentioned effect has been described by taking the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, the above-described effect can be exerted also between the image D1 and the image D2 and between the image D2 and the image D3.

O17. Modification 17:
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music is zero when the volume of the background music is reduced with the passage of time while the output of the background music is continued while the output of the background music is continued. Although the configuration is such that transition is made to a certain aspect, instead of this, when the transition condition is satisfied, an aspect of reducing the volume of the background music over time while continuing the output of the background music. It may be configured to shift to a mode in which the volume of background music is zero without passing.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is shifted to the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image after 5 seconds since the volume of the background music becomes zero. However, instead of this, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 may be changed to a mode in which the demonstration moving image is displayed at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the output of the background music continues until the lapse of 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and the output of the background music is stopped after the lapse of 5 seconds. Instead of this, the output of the background music may be stopped when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

O18. Modification 18:
In the above embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and the display of the demonstration video is started (FIG. 11), the temporal top of the background animation Although the display is started from the position "01" and the output is started from the temporal top position "01" of the background music, the background moving picture and the background music are displayed and output from the temporal top position It is not limited to the configuration. For example, the display and output of the background moving image and the background music may be started from the predetermined most exciting time position (the so-called start position of rust). That is, the display is started from the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image, and the output is from the temporal position corresponding to the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image which is the predetermined temporal position of the background music. It may be configured to be started. Even with such a configuration, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music are easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts is changed according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

O19. Modification 19:
In the above embodiment, the volume of the background music is set to zero when the transition condition is satisfied, but the volume of the background music may not be completely set to zero. For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music may be set to a volume equal to or less than the volume that can not be recognized by the player. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition is established.

  In addition, the output mode of the sound before the transition condition is established is a mode in which the background music is output at the volume of the first volume, and the output mode of the audio transferred after the transition condition is established is the background music It may be configured to output at a volume of a second volume smaller than the volume of the volume. Even with such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the transition condition is established.

O20. Modification 20:
In the above embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the mode displaying the background moving image to the mode displaying the demonstration moving image, but before the transition condition is satisfied The display mode of the symbol display device 41 and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 which is shifted after the transition condition is satisfied are not limited to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. For example, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is established is a mode in which a predetermined moving image is displayed, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 which is shifted after the transition condition is established is It may be a mode in which an image different from a predetermined moving image is displayed or a mode in which the display of an image is stopped. For example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 which shifts after the transition condition is satisfied is a mode of displaying a moving image different from the predetermined moving image, a mode of stopping and displaying at least a part of the predetermined moving image, the predetermined The aspect which makes non-display the moving image of, the aspect which displays the still image different from the said predetermined moving image, or the aspect which makes non-display a moving image and a still image may be sufficient.

O21. Modification 21:
In the above embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting that the gaming ball has been ejected to the gaming board 30 is provided, and it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball is not detected for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by the detection sensor. It may be configured to In this way, the transition condition does not hold if the gaming ball is ejected to the gaming board 30, so the player's transition condition is satisfied despite the fact that the player is playing a situation that is uncomfortable for the player Can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the configuration may be such that it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor after the transition condition is satisfied. In this way, even after the transition condition is established, the return condition is satisfied if the gaming ball is ejected to the game board 30, so the return condition is in spite of the player having started the game. It is possible to reduce an unpleasant situation for the player that is not established for a long time (for example, one minute).

O22. Modification 22:
In the above embodiment, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected depending on whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode or the player's selection.

O23. Modification 23:
The time, the numerical value, and the like specifically set in the above embodiment are merely an example, and can be appropriately set to another time, a numerical value, and the like. For example, the time from when the variation of the symbol stops to when the transition condition is satisfied may be set to other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the volume of background music becomes zero to when the demonstration video is started is It may be set other than 5 seconds.

O24. Modification 24:
In the above embodiment, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image, the audio output mode is configured such that music is not output but the volume is zero. Alternatively, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image, the output mode of the sound is an output level in which demonstration music which is music corresponding to the demonstration moving image is preset by the player. You may be comprised so that it may become an aspect output by (volume).

  In such a configuration, when transitioning to a mode in which the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the demo moving image is displayed, the output may be started from a predetermined temporal position of the demo music. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the demonstration video and the output of the demo music, as compared with a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the demo music starts is changed. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, a predetermined temporal position of the demo music may be set as the temporal top position of the demo music. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with a configuration in which the output is started from the position in the middle of the time of the demo music.

O25. Modification 25:
In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 acquires time information, which is information about time, from the RTC 96, and the acquired time information matches the predetermined time set as the RTC presentation start condition. If it is determined that they match, it is configured to start the process for executing the RTC effect, but instead, after the audio light emission control device 90 executes the RTC effect once, The elapsed time since the last RTC effect was started is measured, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has passed since the previous RTC effect was started, and it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed In this case, a process for executing an RTC effect may be started.

O26. Modification 26:
In the seventh embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 outputs the RTC effect music at an output level (volume) preset by the player. Instead, the sound emission control device 90 The RTC effect music may be output at the maximum output level (volume) regardless of the output level (volume) preset by the user. According to such a configuration, the power and attention level of the RTC effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

O27. Modification 27:
Even when the output of the RTC effect music based on the maximum output level (volume) is ended and the background music is output after adopting the configuration of the modification 26, the maximum output level (volume) is maintained. Good. The effects of such a configuration will be described. The player who admires the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) is fascinated by the force of the effect executed at the maximum output level (volume), so the maximum even after the end of the RTC effect There is a demand that you want to continue the game at the output level (volume) of the. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue the game at the maximum output level (volume) even after the RTC effect is finished.

  In addition, when the output of the RTC effect music based on the maximum output level (volume) is ended and the background music is output after adopting the configuration of the modification 26, an output level preset by the player (volume It may be configured to return to. According to such a configuration, since the special feeling of the RTC effect being executed can be further emphasized, it is possible to further improve the expectation for the next RTC effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  In addition, when the output of the RTC effect music by the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output after adopting the configuration of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the player can output the audio output level (volume). A volume setting screen for setting may be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and background music may be output at the output level (volume) of the sound designated by the player. The effects of such a configuration will be described. Since the player who has watched the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) gets used to a large volume, a desired output level (volume) may change from before watching the RTC effect music. For this reason, there may be a demand that the output level (sound volume) of the audio is desired to be reset to the desired output level after the RTC effect is finished. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's demand for resetting the sound output level (volume) to a desired output level at the timing after the RTC effect is finished.

O28. Modification 28:
The method of determining the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display may be different from those in the eighth and ninth embodiments. Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one held display among the plurality of held displays is determined to be a jackpot lottery by the first determination process, a plurality of displayed The jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display in the displayed hold display is highly likely to win the jackpot lottery by making the display mode of the hold display a specific pattern display mode. , May be suggested to the player. For example, in the first hold display area Ds1, four hold displays of the hold display Dm11 to the hold display Dm14 are displayed, and the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display Dm14 is subjected to the big hit lottery When it is determined that the player wins, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to white, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is red, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is white, and the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is red. That is, the jackpot corresponding to one of the displayed pending displays is changed by changing the display mode of the plurality of displayed pending displays into a specific pattern such as “white, red, white, red”. It can be suggested to the player that the random number counter C1 is highly likely to win the jackpot lottery.

  In addition, when it is determined by the prior determination process that the jackpot random number counter C1 in the predetermined holding game times is won in the jackpot lottery, the holding display of the predetermined holding game times, and the predetermined holding game times are generated By determining the display pattern of the hold display of the hold game times to be generated subsequently to the specific display pattern, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display among the displayed hold displays is a jackpot lottery It may be suggested to the player that the probability of winning is high. In this case, the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 after the predetermined holding game number is generated, and the display mode of the holding display of the holding game number corresponding to the ball is displayed. A jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the object for which the display mode is to be determined (the hold display of the predetermined hold game times determined by the prior determination process when the jackpot lottery is won) This can be realized by determining the display mode of the hold display on the basis of.

O29. Modification 29:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which the motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when game balls enter a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot by generating rights and a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, and a ball.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiment may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

P. About the invention group extracted from each above-mentioned embodiment etc .:
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The feature group A is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.
[Feature A1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means (the MPU 62, the MPU 92 and the MPU 102 in the first to fourth embodiments)
In the case where the special information related to the second game run to be executed later than the first game run satisfies the predetermined condition,
At the second game time, reproduce at least a part of the effects performed in the first game time (the process of the case a 2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment) The process of c2, the process of case d1 in the fourth embodiment is executed)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature A1, at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round in the second gaming round despite the case where the special information related to the second gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the second gaming cycle satisfies the predetermined condition. Then, the game is made to recognize that the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition only after the notification means reports the result of the determination of the special information related to the second gaming time. Can be given a surprise. That is, by making the second game play an expansion unanticipated by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising:
The game machine further comprises special game state start means for starting a special game state in which the player is given a bonus after the game cycle pertaining to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The effect executing means is
In the first case where the special information relating to the first gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round after the start of the special gaming state executed after the first gaming round and before the start of the second gaming round (The process of case a1 in the first embodiment, the process of case c1 in the third embodiment are executed),
In the second case, the special information relating to the first gaming time fulfills the predetermined condition, and the special information relating to the second gaming time fulfills the predetermined condition,
At the second game time, reproduce at least a part of the effects performed in the first game time (the process of the case a 2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment) execute c2 processing)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature A2, when the special information relating to the second gaming round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of reproduction of the staging performed in the first gaming round has already been performed. It functions as a role to reproduce, and the player recognizes as such. On the other hand, when the special information relating to the second game play satisfies the predetermined condition, at least a part of reproduction of the effect performed in the first game play is reproduction of the effect already performed in the effect In practice, it is executed because the special information related to the second game time meets the predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game, when the notification means is notified that the special information related to the second game meets the predetermined condition, it is the second time that the second time. Reproduction performed in the game times does not merely reproduce at least a part of the effects performed in the first game times, but is caused by the special information related to the second game times satisfying the predetermined conditions The player recognizes that the game is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game and to give the player a sense of expectation for the reproduction of the effect already executed.

[Feature A3]
A game machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the first game, it is suggested that the effect already reproduced be reproduced prior to the reproduction (the first embodiment) A game machine characterized by performing the suggestion effect to be executed in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A3, since the suggested effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game cycle, the effect executed in the second game cycle is the first game It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game. After that, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition only after notifying the determination result of the special information related to the second gaming time by the notifying means. Further, unexpectedness can be given to the game.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to the feature A3,
The effect executing means is
If there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time,
In the other game time, execute the suggestion effect (in the second embodiment, perform the suggestion effect in the preceding game time)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature A4, even when there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time, by performing the suggestion effect in the other game times, suggestive effect And the reproduction can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature A5]
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game run prior to the first game play, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game play (Including the process of case c1 in the third embodiment and the process of case c2).
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature A5, even when continuous effects are executed over the first game period to the first game period before the first game period, the continuous effects can be reproduced. .

[Feature A6]
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player,
A game machine characterized in that the target that the effect executing means reproduces includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player an expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature A6, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the reach effect performed after the suggested effect is the effect of the effect performed in the first game time on the effect Although it is executed as at least a part of reproduction, it is actually executed due to the special information related to the second game meeting satisfying a predetermined condition. Therefore, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an intrinsic function of suggesting to the player an expectation of fulfilling a predetermined condition, and at least at least the effects executed in the first game cycle. In the case where it is executed as a partial reproduction and in the effect, it is performed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time, but in fact, the special information related to the game time is predetermined At least three cases can be set up, with the case being performed due to meeting the conditions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.
[Feature B1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
A game cycle (first to third embodiments) executed after a specific game cycle (a first game cycle in the first to third embodiments) in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by determining the timing to reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time based on the special information related to the second game time).

  According to the feature B1, since the timing to reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined based on the special information related to the game time to be executed after the specific game time, it is special to the reproduction While being able to give a meaning, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the reproduction, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
The effect executing means is
The determination means determines whether or not the special information relating to the game times to be executed after the specific game times that is the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition before the determination means (step S1022) As well as
Based on the result of the determination performed before the determination means, the timing to reproduce at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is determined (the processing of steps S2302 to S2312 is performed)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature B2, by performing determination of whether or not the special information relating to the game times to be executed after the specific game times satisfies the predetermined condition before the determination means, the effect of the effect executed in the specific game times An effect in the game times to be executed before the game times determined to reproduce at least a part can be determined in consideration of the game times to execute the reproduction. Therefore, it is possible to execute, for example, an effect having relevance to the reproduction as an effect in the game time to be executed before the game time determined to execute the reproduction.

[Feature B3]
A game machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein
The effect executing means is
Among the game times executed after the specific game times, the game times where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 of the first embodiment, second in the case c2 of the second embodiment and the third embodiment) It is determined to reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time in the game time).

  According to the feature B3, at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is reproduced in the game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is reproduced. It is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the game play to be played satisfies the predetermined condition. Only when the notification means notifies the result of the determination of the special information related to the gaming time, the player is given the unexpectedness by making the player recognize that the special information related to the gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition. be able to. That is, by making the game run unexplored development of the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B4]
A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein
The effect executing means is
Before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time, a suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect is executed.

  According to the feature B4, the suggestion effect suggesting to reproduce the effect already executed is executed. Therefore, the degree of attention and interest of the player with respect to the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game It can be improved. In addition, when reproduction of at least a part of the effects performed in the specific game times is executed in the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game times in which the reproduction is further executed by executing the suggested effect It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the above satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to the feature B4,
The effect executing means is
If there are other game times between the specific game times and a game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times,
In the other game time, execute the suggestion effect (in the second embodiment, perform the suggestion effect in the preceding game time)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature B5, even if there are other game times between the specific game times and the game times for reproducing at least a part of the effects executed in the specific game times, the suggestion is made in the other game times By performing the effect, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the effect performed in the suggested effect and the specific game play without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature B6]
A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein
In the case where the effect executing means reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game play,
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means is the effect executed in the specific game time, and includes reach effect which is an effect suggesting to the player the expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature B6, the reach effect, which has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game run, is actually executed based on the special information related to the game run according to the effect By making the player recognize the game, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game. In addition, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an intrinsic function of suggesting to the player an expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game cycle. In the case of being executed as a reproduction and in the effect, it is performed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time, but in fact, the special information related to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set with the case where it is executed due to the cause. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature C1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Special game state start means for starting a special game state for giving a bonus to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
When the special gaming state is executed, an effect to be executed in the special gaming state is determined based on the special information related to a predetermined number of gaming times executed after the special gaming state (first embodiment) In case a1 and case a2 in the second embodiment, and in the case c1 and case c2 in the third embodiment, effects in the special gaming state after the first game round by the success or failure of the jackpot lottery in the second game round / S1201 to S1209, S2601 to S2609)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C1, in the special game state, an effect taking into consideration special information related to a predetermined number of game times to be executed after the special game state can be executed. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect having relevance to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
The effect executing means is
When the special gaming state is executed, and the special information related to the predetermined gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is executed in the special gaming state. (In case a1 in the first embodiment and case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special gaming state after the first game cycle),
In the case where the special gaming state is executed, and the special information relating to the predetermined gaming time is the second satisfying the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined gaming time Execute (in case a2 in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, and in the case c2 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the second game time)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C2, when the special information relating to the predetermined game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the special effect relating to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition which is executed in the special gaming state In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed has a special meaning by executing the predetermined game play. Therefore, unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A game machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of an effect executed in a game run executed before the special game state.

  According to the feature C3, although the special information related to the predetermined gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition, at least the effects executed in the gaming time executed prior to the special gaming state in the predetermined gaming time Since a part is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the predetermined game play satisfies the predetermined condition. Only when the notification means determines that the result of the determination of the special information pertaining to the predetermined game play has been notified to the player is that the player is made to recognize that the special information pertaining to the predetermined game play satisfies the predetermined condition. It can be granted. That is, by making the predetermined number of times of the game unfolded by the player, surprise can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to the feature C3,
In the case where the game times to be executed before the special game state is defined as a first game time, and the predetermined game times to be executed after the special game state is defined as a second game time,
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes the effect executed by the effect executing means in the first game time when the special information relating to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduction (reproduction) The target effect is the first by winning the jackpot lottery relating to the first game time in the case a1 and the case a2 of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the case c1 and the case c2 of the third embodiment. Including the effects performed in the
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C4, when the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information relating to the first game time is executed in the first game time by satisfying the predetermined condition The effect is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, only when the notification means reports that the special information related to the second gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the staging performed in the first gaming round However, in reality, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information related to the second gaming cycle has been executed due to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, and to impart unexpectedness to the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for reproduction.

[Feature C5]
A game machine according to feature C3 or feature C4, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the target that the effect executing means reproduces includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player an expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature C5, when the special information related to the predetermined gaming time (the second gaming time) satisfies the predetermined condition, in the gaming time (the first gaming time) to be executed before the special gaming state The achieved reach effect is reproduced in the second game play. Therefore, in the second game play, the reach effect that has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the game play performed prior to the special game state in terms of the play is actually the second Unexpectedness can be given to the game by making the player recognize that the special information related to the game time has been executed due to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. Also, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an intrinsic function of suggesting to the player an expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and a game run executed before the special gaming state. When it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in, and in terms of the effect, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game run executed before the special gaming state, Can be set to at least three cases where it is executed due to the special information related to the game time fulfilling the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

[Feature C6]
A game machine according to any one of features C2 to C5, wherein
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine characterized by performing a suggested effect which suggests performing the predetermined effect before the predetermined effect is performed.

  According to the feature C6, the player's attention to the predetermined effect to be executed by executing the suggestion effect which suggests to execute the predetermined effect before the predetermined effect is performed, The degree of interest can be improved.

[Feature C7]
A gaming machine according to feature C6,
The effect executing means is
The special gaming state is executed, and the special information related to the predetermined number of game times fulfills the predetermined condition.
If there is another game play between the special game state and the predetermined game play,
While performing the said suggestion effect in the said other game times (In the second embodiment, while performing the suggestion effect in the preceding game time),
The predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined game time (in the second embodiment, the game repetition effect is performed in the second game time)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C7, even if there are other game times between the special game state and the predetermined game time, by performing the suggested effect in the other game times, the suggested effect and the predetermined The effect can be executed without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

[Feature C8]
A game machine according to any one of features C3 to C7, wherein
An object reproduced by the effect executing means is at least a part of effects executed in at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state.

  According to the feature C8, even when continuous rendition is executed over at least two consecutive game rounds executed before the special gaming state, the continuous rendition may be reproduced it can.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature D1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Special game state start means for starting a special game state for giving a bonus to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The special game state starting means is
Triggered by the fact that the special information pertaining to the second gaming cycle to be executed after the first gaming season meets the predetermined condition, the second special gaming state is started,
The effect executing means is
The effect to be executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information according to the first game time (in the first embodiment, the effect to be executed in the special game state is the first of the cases a1 By the relationship between the game time [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the first game time in the case a1 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] to be executed before the game time of , Determine the effect to be executed in the special gaming state after the first game time [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] [S2601, S2602, S2603-S2605] / the first game time of the case a2 The second game time [the feature group] by the relationship between [corresponding to the first game pattern in the feature group] and the second game pattern in case a2 [corresponding to the second game pattern in the feature group] 2 play Determining the effect to be executed in the special game state after Action] in time [S2601, S2607])
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D1, the second special is executed after the second game in consideration of the special information of the first game performed before the second game in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. An effect in the gaming state can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to give relevancy between the special information relating to the first gaming round and the effects in the second special gaming state, and various effects from the first gaming round to the second special gaming state Can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to the feature D1,
In the case where the second special gaming state is executed by the special information related to the second gaming time fulfilling the predetermined condition,
The effect executing means is
When the special information related to the first gaming occasion satisfies the predetermined condition (when the first gaming occasion and the second gaming occasion in the case a2 of the first embodiment have a relationship),
Of the effects performed in the first gaming cycle (first gaming cycle of case a2 of the first embodiment) in the second gaming cycle (second gaming cycle of the case a2 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least a part (perform the processing of S2308 and S2309),
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (a game time and a first game time to be executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment In the case of
In the second special gaming state (the special gaming state after the first gaming round of the case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second gaming round (the first gaming round of the case a1 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least a part of the executed effect (perform the process of S2605)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D2, at least a part of the effects executed in the first game round is reproduced in the second game round, even though the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. . Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the second game play satisfies the predetermined condition. It is surprising to the game that the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second gaming time is notified by the notification means. Can be given. That is, by making the second game play an expansion unanticipated by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the special information related to the first gaming round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effects executed in the second gaming round is reproduced in the second special gaming state, so the second It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to view again the effect performed when the special information relating to the game play of the game satisfies the predetermined condition.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to the feature D2,
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (in the first game time and the second game time in the case a2 of the first embodiment, In the case of a relationship), before performing the reproduction, execute a first suggested effect that suggests that the effect already performed is reproduced (execute the processing of S2606);
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effects executed in the second game time in the second special game state (a game time being executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment If it becomes a relationship between the game and the first game time), before performing the reproduction, execute the second suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the effect already performed (execute the processing of S2605 )
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D3, the first suggestion effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time, and at least a part of the effect performed in the second game time is reproduced Since the second suggestion effect is executed before the play, at least a partial reproduction of the effect performed in the first game time or at least a partial reproduction of the effect performed in the second game time, The degree of attention of the player can be improved.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3, wherein
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (in the first game time and the second game time in the case a2 of the first embodiment, When it comes to relationships),
In a first special gaming state where special information relating to a first gaming occasion is started by satisfying the predetermined condition, a first suggestion effect is suggested that suggests reproducing an effect already executed (S2606 Execute the process)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D4, by executing an effect suggesting the contents of the effect in the game times after the first special game state in the first special game state, the game time after the first special game state is ended The degree of attention, the degree of interest and the expectation of the player can be improved.

[Feature D5]
A game machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the target that the effect executing means reproduces includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player an expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature D5, the reach effect which has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is actually caused by the special information related to the second game cycle. By making the player recognize that the game has been executed, it is possible to impart a surprisingness to the game. In addition, when at least a part of the effect executed in the second game play is reproduced, reach effect in the second game play is executed in the second special game state, so the second play It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to appreciate the reach effect in the game play again. Furthermore, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player an expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and at least a part of reproduction of the effect already executed. When it is executed, although it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the already executed effect, actually, it is executed because the special information related to the game time meets a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature E1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An effect execution unit that executes an effect in each of the game times;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game time that is executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (In the case of the case d1 in the fourth embodiment),
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round in the second gaming round,
It has already been executed after the execution of the effect in the first gaming time and before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first gaming time in the second gaming time A game machine characterized by executing a suggested effect that suggests that the effect is reproduced.

  According to the feature E1, even though the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition, the first gaming time the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the second gaming time Since at least a part of the rendition performed at step S.7 is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. In addition, by executing the suggested effect before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game session, at least in the second game session, at least the effect executed in the first game session The player can be further given the recognition that only a part is reproduced. And, only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second gaming round is notified by the notification means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition, Can be given a surprise. That is, by making the second game play an expansion unanticipated by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
The effect executing means is
In addition to the case where the special information related to the first gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition,
When the special information related to the first gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (case d2 in the fourth embodiment) )Also,
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round in the second gaming round,
After the execution of the effect in the first game time and before the reproduction in the second game time, a suggestion effect is suggested that suggests that the effect already performed is reproduced. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E2, even when the special information relating to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the second game time may not Since at least a part of the effects performed in one game run is reproduced, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the special information related to the game run for which reproduction is performed does not necessarily satisfy the predetermined conditions. . As a result, when at least a part of the effects executed in the first game round is reproduced, the player is given a feeling of expectation and a sense of expectation to the player and the player of the game round in which the reproduction is executed. The degree of attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
A game machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further comprising:
The game machine further comprises special game state start means for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The effect executing means is
When the special information related to the first gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment) To
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round in the second gaming round,
The gaming machine, wherein the suggestion effect is executed after the start of a special gaming state to be executed after the first gaming round and before the reproduction in the second gaming round.

  According to the feature E3, when the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information relating to the first game time is executed in the first game time by satisfying the predetermined condition The effect is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, it is not until the notification means that the special information related to the second gaming time meets the predetermined condition is notified by the notification means, the effect is performed as a reproduction of the effect performed in the first gaming time However, in reality, by causing the player to recognize that the special information pertaining to the second gaming cycle has been executed due to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reproduction of the effect. Furthermore, when the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first gaming round is executed due to the special information related to the second gaming round fulfilling the predetermined condition, a bonus is given to the player Since the special gaming state of giving an is started, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for reproduction of the effect.

[Feature E4]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3;
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player,
A game machine characterized in that the target that the effect executing means reproduces includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player an expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature E4, when the special information related to the second gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition, the reach effect executed in the first gaming round is reproduced in the second gaming round. Therefore, the reach effect being executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game run is actually that the special information related to the second game run satisfies the predetermined condition. By making the player recognize that the game has been executed due to the game, it is possible to give a surprisingness to the game. In addition, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player an expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game cycle. In the case where it is executed as a reproduction of a part and in terms of effect, it is performed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the first game cycle, but in fact, the special information pertaining to the game cycle has a predetermined condition At least three cases can be set up, which are performed due to the fulfillment. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

[Feature E5]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein
The effect executing means is
If there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time,
A game machine characterized by executing the suggestion effect in the other game session.

  According to the feature E5, even when there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time, by performing the suggestion effect in the other game times, suggestive effect and The reproduction can be performed without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

[Feature E6]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein
The target to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game run prior to the first game play, and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game play A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature E6, even when continuous effects are executed over the first game period to the first game period before the first game period, the continuous effects can be reproduced .

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature group A, feature group B, feature group C, feature group D, and feature group E solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed in accordance with various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include, for example, reach effects executed with low probability and effects executed with low frequency such as effects executed only when the jackpot lottery is won. Such a low frequency of rendition may be desired to be reproduced for the purpose of appreciation after being performed once. Conventionally, in order to respond to such a demand of a player, a gaming machine has been known which executes an effect that reproduces an effect that has been executed once.

  Here, in the above-described gaming machine, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.
[Feature F1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image , And the like in the image display means (object A, object B, object C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a),
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, or may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit in a mode having relevance to the second image (in S3205 of the fifth embodiment) Configure and display each object to be displayed in a related manner by referring to the arrangement / timing table / Display in a manner in which each object is related in S3305 of the sixth embodiment Each object based on each display pattern table set to
A game machine characterized by

  There is a gaming machine which displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions under which a plurality of images are displayed may overlap, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting, without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without relation at all, or several images may be displayed superimposed on one another, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated effect.

  According to the feature F1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed in a mode having relevance to the second image. The effect performed by being displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the two images can improve the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression. In addition, since the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image, a plurality of different images may be generated using the first image. Aspect presentation can be performed, and the first image can be used effectively.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the aspect having the relevancy includes the aspect in which the first image and the second image have a narrative in relation to each other.

  According to the feature F2, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image and the second image are displayed in a related manner in a narrative manner Therefore, the effect to be performed by being displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) of the first image and the second image can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by having a narrative effect that is executed by being displayed in a period in which the first image and the second image overlap.

[Feature F3]
A game machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein
The degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is:
The first image and the second image when displayed in the overlapping period of the first image and the second image is different from the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested (fifth embodiment In the third embodiment / S3305 in the sixth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature F3, the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, and is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. As suggested, the first image can be used to perform a plurality of different aspects of rendering, and the first image can be used effectively. In addition, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) with other images, so the player's attention to the effect , The degree of interest and the sense of expectation can be improved.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3;
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the different types of the game (processing of S3203 in the fifth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature F4, an image can be used to indicate the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games.

[Feature F5]
A game machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the image display unit is provided with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature F5, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be made to be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time. A game machine.

  According to the feature F6, various effects can be performed by using an image that changes with time.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature G1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An expectation image storage means for storing an expectation image which is an image which changes over time;
An image display means for displaying the expectation image as the effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The expected degree image storage means is
With the first expectation image,
With the second expectation image
Remember
The control means
Displaying the first expectation image on the image display means;
Displaying the second expectation image on the image display means;
A first partial image obtained by extracting an image constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first expectation degree image, and at least a part of the time axis direction of the second expectation degree image Displaying, on the image display means, a third expectation image, which is the expectation image obtained by combining the second partial image from which the image to be extracted with the second partial image in a manner having relevance;
There is
A probability that the special information when the first expectation image is displayed by the control means satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a first probability.
A probability that the special information when the second expectation image is displayed by the control means satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a second probability.
In the case where the probability that the special information when the third expectation image is displayed by the control means satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a third probability.
The control means is configured such that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability.
The first expectation image, the second expectation image or the third expectation image is displayed on the image display means (displayed using the display pattern table in the fifth embodiment / sixth embodiment Display using display pattern table in
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature G1, in addition to the first expectation image and the second expectation image, the first partial image and the second partial image have relevance as the expectation image to be displayed on the image display means. Since the third expectation image combined in the aspect is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the first expectation image and the second expectation image. Since the third expectation image is an expectation image obtained by combining the first partial image and the second partial image in a manner having relevance, the third expectation image does not give the player a complicated impression, and It can improve the quality. Also, the first expectation image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image may be displayed as image display means so that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability. Thus, the player's attention to the expectation image can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The control means
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, the image of a different period is extracted with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, whereby the plurality of different display modes are performed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The third probability is different for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature G2, when extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, a plurality of different displays can be obtained by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image. As it is possible to display the third expectation image on the image display means in an aspect, various effects can be performed using the third expectation image. Also, since the third probability is different for each of a plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image, the player's attention to the third expectation image can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein
The control means
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, the image of a different period is extracted with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, whereby the plurality of different display modes are performed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display position of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is
The plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image are set in advance (the arrangement position of each object is set in advance for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are a plurality of different ones of the third expectation image. Since the display mode is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superimposed on the image display means as the third expectation image without any relation. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation image is used in a plurality of different display modes does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.
The control means
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, the image of a different period is extracted with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, whereby the plurality of different display modes are performed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from the plurality of the third expectation image. The display timing of each object is preset for each display pattern according to the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature G4, the timing of relative display of the first partial image and the second partial image to be displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is a plurality of different ones of the third expectation image Since the display mode is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not displayed on the image display means at timings unrelated to each other as the third expectation image. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation image is used in a plurality of different display modes does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature H1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image , On the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, or may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, an arrangement position at which a relative position with respect to the second image is predetermined (arrangement position in the fifth embodiment A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at an arrangement position determined in the timing table / arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

  There is a gaming machine which displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions under which a plurality of images are displayed may overlap, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting, without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without relation at all, or several images may be displayed superimposed on one another, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated effect.

  According to the feature H1, when the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the second image, an arrangement position at which the relative position with the second image is predetermined. Since the image is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are never superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) improves the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression. Can. In addition, since the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image, a plurality of different images may be generated using the first image. Aspect presentation can be performed, and the first image can be used effectively.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to the feature H1,
The control means
The first image is displayed on the image display means in a period overlapping with the second image in a plurality of different display modes.
An arrangement position (a display / pattern table according to the sixth embodiment) in which a relative position between the first image and the second image is predetermined according to each of the plurality of different display modes. It is displayed on the image display means at the set arrangement position).

  According to the feature H2, since the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the second image in a plurality of different display modes, various operations using the first image and the second image are performed. A presentation can be performed. Further, according to each of the different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means at an arrangement position where the relative position with respect to the second image is predetermined. , The first image and the second image are never superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the various effects performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) do not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect is improved. It can be done.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or the feature H2, wherein
When the control means displays the first image in a period overlapping with the second image, a timing relatively predetermined with the second image (in the fifth embodiment) It is displayed on the said image display means at the timing of the display determined in the arrangement | positioning * timing table / the display timing set in the display pattern table in 6th Embodiment. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature H3, when the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are not displayed at unrelated timings at all. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3;
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when not displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
The first image and the second image when displayed in the overlapping period of the first image and the second image is different from the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested (fifth embodiment Display pattern table in the second embodiment / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature H4, when the first image is displayed in the overlapping period with the second image, and when it is displayed in the period not overlapping the second image, the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game is different As suggested, the first image can be used to perform effects in a plurality of different aspects with different degrees of advantage / disadvantage of the game, and the first image can be used effectively. In addition, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) with other images, so the player's attention to the effect , The degree of interest and the sense of expectation can be improved. And, even when displaying an image combined with the second image, the relative position with the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, so A high effect can be provided to the player.

[Feature H5]
A game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein
The first image and the second image suggest the advantages and disadvantages of different types of the game (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature H5, in each of the effect consisting of the first image, the effect consisting of the second image, and the effect consisting of the first image and the second image, it suggests the degree of advantage and disadvantage of different types of games can do. Therefore, the combination of the plurality of images can indicate the degree of advantage and disadvantage of various types of games.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the image display unit is provided with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature H6, the effect formed of the first image and the second image can be made to be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature H7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time. A game machine.

  According to the feature H7, various effects can be performed by using an image that changes with time.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature I1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image , On the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, or may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the timing relatively predetermined with the second image (arrangement and timing table in the fifth embodiment) A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the determined display timing / the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

  There is a gaming machine which displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions under which a plurality of images are displayed may overlap, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting, without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without relation at all, or several images may be displayed superimposed on one another, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated effect. Note that the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game indicates the degree to which the state of the game times determined based on the special information is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the state of game play is advantageous to the player, such as the expectation for winning a jackpot lottery, the expectation for a probability change jackpot, the expectation for a game turn to be a probability change Indicates the degree to which there is a disadvantage.

  According to the feature I1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. The first image and the second image are never displayed at unrelated timings. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can. In addition, since the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping the second image (same period) or may be displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is used. It is possible to execute effects in a plurality of different modes, and to make effective use of the first image.

[Feature I2]
It is a game machine according to feature I1,
The control means is configured to arrange the first image relative to the second image at a predetermined arrangement position (arrangement position determined by arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature I2, when the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the second image, an arrangement position at which the relative position with the second image is predetermined. Since the image is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are never superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) improves the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression. Can.

[Feature I3]
A game machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, wherein
The degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is:
The first image and the second image when displayed in the overlapping period of the first image and the second image is different from the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested (fifth embodiment Display pattern table in the second embodiment / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature I3, the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, and is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. As suggested, the first image can be used to perform effects in a plurality of different aspects with different degrees of advantage / disadvantage of the game, and the first image can be used effectively. In addition, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) with other images, so the player's attention to the effect , The degree of interest and the sense of expectation can be improved. And, even when displaying an image combined with the second image, the relative position with the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, so A high effect can be provided to the player.

[Feature I4]
A game machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein
The first image and the second image suggest the advantages and disadvantages of different types of the game (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature I4, in each of the effect consisting of the first image, the effect consisting of the second image, and the effect consisting of the first image and the second image, it suggests the degree of advantage and disadvantage of different types of games can do. Therefore, the combination of the plurality of images can indicate the degree of advantage and disadvantage of various types of games.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the image display unit is provided with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature I5, the effect formed of the first image and the second image can be made to be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time. A game machine.

  According to the feature I6, various effects can be performed by using an image that changes with time.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.
[Feature J1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An image storage means for storing an image which makes it possible to give the player a recognition as to advantages and disadvantages with respect to the game situation;
Image display means for displaying the image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
The first image stored in the image storage means is displayed on the image display means for enabling the player to be given recognition of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation.
A combined image in which the first image is combined with a second image different from the first image, which is a recognition of the advantage / disadvantage of the game situation and is not combined with the second image. A combined image that enables the player to be given a recognition different from the recognition given to the player when the first image is displayed is displayed on the image display means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments) The display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing how a dog comes out of a box, and gives the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. The display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a table showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to the deterioration of the weather. A pattern, gives the recognition that the status of the game is disadvantageous to the player / modification 15)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature J1, when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, the recognition of giving the player the advantage and disadvantage of the game, and the first image as the second image Since it is possible to change the recognition given to the player about the advantage or disadvantage of the game when combined and displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute various effects using the first image, The image of can be used effectively. The game status is based on the game status, for example, whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, or whether the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high. I say the situation.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to the feature J1,
When the control means displays the first image in combination with the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is determined according to the situation of the game Setting (setting to the arrangement position determined in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / setting to the arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) and displaying on the image display means A game machine that features it.

  According to the feature J2, since the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are displayed. Can be used to give the player various perceptions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J3]
A game machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein
The relative timing of displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image when the first image is displayed in combination with the second image. Are set according to the game situation (set to the display timing determined in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set to the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means.

  According to the feature J3, the relative timing of displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image is set according to the situation of the game and displayed on the image display means. The image and the second image can be used to give the player various perceptions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3.
A game machine characterized in that at least one of the first image or the second image is an image which changes with time.

  According to the feature J4, various effects can be performed by using an image that is an image that changes with time.

<Feature K group>
The feature K groups are extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature K1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image and a third image;
An image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image rather than the case where the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is not combined with the third image by the control means and displayed on the image display means About the game situation for the player in the case where (the image in which the dog makes a face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image Despite giving an advantageous recognition,
The control means combines the first image (the box image of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to produce the image display means The second image (the image where the dog makes a face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed in the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). A game machine characterized by giving the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation than when displayed on the image display means in combination with the above.

  According to the feature K1, the case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image is better for the player than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Even though the first image is displayed in combination with the third image in spite of the advantageous recognition of the game situation, the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. Give the player an advantageous recognition of the gaming situation. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects depending on how to combine the images. Further, even when the player recognizes the first image or the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on the presence or absence of the display of the third image. Accordingly, the player's attention to the image displayed on the image display means can be improved.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The image storage means stores a first temporal change image (an object C temporally changing in order of an image C1, an image C2 and an image C3) which is an image that changes with time,
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-lapse image. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-lapse image, a portion from the first time-lapse image By extracting the image and combining it with the third image, more various effects can be performed.

[Feature K3]
A game machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, wherein
The control means
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image after the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image A gaming machine characterized by having

  According to the feature K3, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case in which the second image is not displayed and the case in which the second image is not displayed is thereafter displayed. Because of this, it is possible to perform versatile rendering using the first image and the second image.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to feature K3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (display pattern (C1 in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment) The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the advance notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the advance effect by the
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature K4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case where the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed after that (the first case) Therefore, in the case of displaying (in the second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Thus, in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, then the state is the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. The player can be given a sense of expectation for the transition, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, various effects can be performed by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics.

[Feature K5]
A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B temporally changing in order of an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3) which is an image that changes over time,
The third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-lapse image.

  According to the feature K5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-lapse image, various effects are produced using the second time-lapse image. Can be performed. For example, when the first image and the second image and the second time-lapse image are combined and displayed, the third image which is a part of the second time-lapse image is the first image or the second image. If displayed in the same period as the second image, it is possible to change the player's recognition of the game situation.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature L1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image and a third image;
An image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image rather than the case where the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is not combined with the third image by the control means and displayed on the image display means In the case where (the image in which the dog makes a face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, the special information is the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability of meeting
The control means combines the first image (the box image of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to produce the image display means The second image (the image where the dog makes a face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed in the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than the case where the special information is displayed on the image display means in combination with the above.

  According to the feature L1, the special information is more predetermined when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. When the first image is displayed in combination with the third image in spite of the high probability of satisfying the condition, the second image is displayed in combination with the third image, There is a high probability that the special information meets the predetermined condition. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the presence or absence of the display of the third image.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The image storage means stores a first temporal change image (an object C temporally changing in order of an image C1, an image C2 and an image C3) which is an image that changes with time,
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-lapse image. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature L2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-lapse image, the first time-lapse image is displayed In this case, the player's attention to the presence or absence of the display of the third image can be improved.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, wherein
The control means
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image after the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image A gaming machine characterized by having

  According to the feature L4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case in which the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is displayed and the case where the image is not displayed thereafter Because of this, it is possible to perform versatile rendering using the first image and the second image.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to the feature L3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (display pattern (C1 in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment) The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the advance notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the advance effect by the
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, then, when the second image is not displayed with the third image (the first case) Therefore, in the case of displaying (in the second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Thus, in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, then the state is the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. The player can be given a sense of expectation for the transition, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, various effects can be performed by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B temporally changing in order of an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3) which is an image that changes over time,
The third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-lapse image.

  According to the feature L5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-lapse image, various effects are produced using the second time-lapse image. Can be performed. For example, when the first image and the second image and the second time-lapse image are combined and displayed, the third image which is a part of the second time-lapse image is the first image or the second image. If displayed in the same period as the second image, it is possible to change the player's recognition of the game situation.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature F group, feature G group, feature H group, feature I group, feature J group, feature K group, and feature L group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed in accordance with various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine which displays an object image on an image display means and executes an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such object images are prepared, and each object image indicates the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game.

  Here, in the above-described gaming machine, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature M1]
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the special information acquired by the acquisition unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
Sound output means for outputting a moving image compatible sound (background music) which is a sound corresponding to the first moving image in a first output mode (a mode of outputting background music at a predetermined volume);
The image display means is shifted from the first display mode to the second display mode (mode for displaying a demonstration moving image), and the sound output means is switched from the first output mode to the second output mode (for background music Transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for transitioning to a mode in which the output is stopped, is satisfied;
Return condition determining means for determining whether or not a return condition which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode and returning the sound output means to the first output mode is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode,
When the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode
When the image display means returns to the first display mode and displays the first moving image as the first display mode, display is performed from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. To start
The sound output means returns to the first output mode, and starts outputting from the predetermined time position of the video compatible sound when outputting the video compatible sound in the first output mode A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature M1, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and the image display means has shifted to the second display mode, the image display means When displaying the first moving image by returning to the first display mode, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image, and the sound output unit is configured to output the first output mode. When outputting the moving picture compatible sound, the output is started from a predetermined temporal position of the moving picture compatible sound. Therefore, after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode, the image display means responds to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. As compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image starts is changed, the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image can be easily synchronized. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first moving image fluctuates according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, the image display means returns to the second display mode and then returns. When the condition is satisfied, the display of the first moving image is started from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed at the timing immediately before the transition to the second display mode, or the image display unit When returning from the 2nd display mode to the 1st display mode, the structure which determines the temporal position of the 1st moving image which starts a display based on the elapsed time after shifting to the 2nd display mode, an image Even after the display means has shifted from the first display mode to the second display mode, reproduction of the first moving image is continued as internal processing, and when returning from the second display mode to the first display mode Continue as internal processing Configured for displaying the first video is playing and the like.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to feature M1,
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode through a reduction mode in which the volume of the video compatible sound is reduced with the passage of time while continuing the output of the video compatible sound. And
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode after the timing when the sound output means shifts to the second output mode.
If the return condition is satisfied while the sound output means is in the reduction mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image,
A game machine characterized in that the sound output unit returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving picture compatible sound to the volume in the first output mode.

  According to the feature M2, when the return condition is satisfied during the period of the reduction mode, the image display means continues the first display mode, and the sound output means restores the volume of the moving picture compatible sound to perform the first process. Since the mode is restored to the output mode, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without any discomfort, while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving picture and the output of the moving picture compatible sound.

[Feature M3]
A game machine according to feature M1 or feature M2, wherein
If the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means outputs a second size smaller than the volume of the first size from the first output mode in which the motion image corresponding sound is outputted at the volume of the first size. Shift to the second output mode of outputting at the volume of
The image display means shifts to the second display mode after a predetermined time has elapsed after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode.
If the return condition is satisfied after the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode and before the image display means shifts to the second display mode
The image display means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image,
A game machine characterized in that the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving picture compatible sound to the volume of the first size.

  According to the feature M3, if the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit has shifted to the second output mode and before the image display unit shifts to the second display mode, the image display is performed. The means continues the first display mode for displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means restores the first output mode by returning the volume of the movie compatible sound to the volume of the first volume. Therefore, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied with a natural flow without any discomfort while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the moving image corresponding sound.

[Feature M4]
A game machine according to any one of features M1 to M3;
The predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal start position of the first moving image,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving picture compatible sound is a temporal start position of the moving picture compatible sound.

  According to the feature M4, the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode and after the image display unit shifts to the second display mode, and the first display mode and When returning to the first output mode, the display is started from the temporal top position of the first moving image, and the output is started from the temporal top position of the moving picture compatible sound. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the temporally intermediate position of the first moving image and the output is started from the temporally intermediate position of the moving image compatible sound, the sense of incongruity given to the player is reduced. Can. For example, assuming that the display is started from the position in the middle of time of the first moving image and the output is started from the position in the middle of time for the sound corresponding to moving images, the player satisfies the return condition. After that, the first moving picture and moving picture compatible sound will be viewed from a position on the way in time, so it may be uncomfortable or there may be a part of the first moving picture and moving picture compatible sound that is not being watched. There is a possibility of On the other hand, according to the feature M4, since the player can cause the player to view the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound from the temporally leading position, it is possible to reduce the uncomfortable feeling given to the player. At the same time, the player can be satisfied with the fact that the first moving picture and the sound corresponding to the moving picture can all be viewed from the top position in time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature M5]
A game machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, wherein
The second display mode is a mode in which a second moving image different from the first moving image is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the first moving image is stopped and displayed, the first moving image is not displayed A mode in which a still image different from the first moving image is displayed, or a mode in which a moving image and a still image are not displayed,
The first output mode is an aspect of outputting the moving picture compatible sound at a volume of a first magnitude,
The second output mode is an aspect in which the moving picture compatible sound is output at a second volume smaller than that of the first size, or a mode in which the output of the moving picture compatible sound is stopped. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature M5, it is possible to make the player recognize that the transition condition is satisfied and the image display means and the sound output means have been shifted to the second display mode and the second output mode, respectively.

[Feature M6]
The gaming machine according to feature M5,
A game machine characterized in that the volume of the second size is equal to or less than the volume of a size which can not be recognized by the player.

  According to the feature M6, when the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode, the volume of the moving image compatible sound becomes equal to or less than the volume of the size that the player can not recognize. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the means has been shifted to the second output mode.

[Feature M7]
A game machine according to any one of features M1 to M6, wherein
The game machine further comprises special game state start means for starting a special game state advantageous to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition,
After the game cycle for displaying the display corresponding to the result of the judgment by the judgment means is completed, the transition condition judgment means has ended a predetermined time without any of the special game state and the next game time being started In this case, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied.

  If, after the end of the game run, the predetermined time has passed without any of the special game state and the next game run being started, there is a high possibility that the player is not playing a game in the game machine. Therefore, according to the feature M7, the transition condition can be established in a state in which the player is not likely to play a game.

[Feature M8]
A game machine according to any one of features M1 to M7, wherein
It comprises detection means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board,
A game machine characterized in that the transition condition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied when the game ball is not detected for a predetermined time by the detection means.

  According to the feature M8, if the game ball is ejected to the game board, the transition condition is not satisfied, and therefore the player is in a situation where the transition condition is satisfied despite the fact that the player is playing The occurrence can be reduced.

[Feature M9]
A game machine according to any one of features M1 to M8,
The game machine characterized in that the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the acquisition means after the transition condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature M9, when the special information is obtained, the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode, so that the sense of expectation that the special information is obtained Can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature M10]
A game machine according to any one of features M1 to M9, wherein
It comprises detection means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board,
The game machine characterized in that the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the detection means after the transition condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature M10, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the gaming ball is ejected to the gaming board, so that the return condition is satisfied even though the player has started the game. It is possible to reduce an unpleasant situation for the player that does not hold for a long time (for example, one minute).

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature N1]
Image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
Sound output means for outputting, at a predetermined output level, a moving image compatible sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image as a first output mode;
Command receiving means for receiving a command;
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means is another display mode in which continuity with the predetermined moving image is broken (a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image), and the sound output means is discontinuous in continuity with the moving image compatible sound. Identification information storage means for storing identification information (heading determination flag) capable of identifying that it is a specific aspect, which is another output aspect (an aspect in which the output of background music is stopped);
A determination unit that determines whether or not the specific mode is based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit when the command reception unit receives a specific command (return condition satisfaction command) When,
Equipped with
When the command receiving unit receives the specific command, and the determination unit determines that the specific mode is the specific mode based on the identification information (when the mode is from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 11) Is
The image display means returns to the first display mode and starts display from a predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image (FIG. 11).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the moving picture compatible sound from a predetermined temporal position (FIG. 11).
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature N1, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display means starts to display And, since the temporal position at which the sound output means starts outputting the moving picture compatible sound is predetermined, it is possible to easily synchronize the predetermined moving picture and the moving picture compatible sound.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
The command receiving means receives the specific command, and the determination means determines that the specific mode is not based on the identification information, and the image display means has continuity with the predetermined moving image. In the case of the maintained display mode (in the case of the mode from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 11),
The image display means returns to the first display mode and continuously displays the predetermined moving image in a mode in which the continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and outputs the moving picture compatible sound corresponding to the predetermined moving picture with the continuity maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13).
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature N2, when the image display means is returned to the first display mode and the sound output means is returned to the first output mode from the display mode in which continuity with a predetermined moving image is maintained, the image display means Continuously displays a predetermined moving image in a state in which the continuity is maintained, and the sound output unit outputs a moving image compatible sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image in which the continuity is maintained. The image display means can be returned to the first display mode, and the sound output means can be returned to the first output mode.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2, wherein
The predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image is a temporal start position of the predetermined moving image,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving picture compatible sound is a temporal start position of the moving picture compatible sound.

  According to the feature N3, when returning the image display means to the first display mode and the sound output means to the first output mode from the specific mode, the time position of the predetermined moving image at which the image display means starts to display And since the temporal position at which the sound output means starts outputting the moving picture compatible sound is the temporal top position respectively, the display is started from the middle of the predetermined moving picture and the output is started from the middle of the moving picture compatible sound As compared with the case where the image display means and the sound output means perform the processing easier, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3.
The other display mode is an aspect in which the image display means is displaying an image different from the predetermined moving image, or an aspect in which the display of the image is stopped.

  According to the feature N4, when returning the image display means to the first display mode from the specific mode, another display mode as the specific mode before return to the first display mode is different from the predetermined moving image Since it is the aspect which is displaying the image or the aspect which stops the display of the image, even if it returns to the first display mode and starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image The sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced. The images include moving images and still images.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, wherein
The other output mode is a mode in which the sound output means is outputting another sound different from the moving picture-compatible sound, and the sound output means is capable of recognizing the moving picture or the other sound at an output level which the player can not recognize And a mode in which the sound output unit stops the output.

  According to the feature N5, when returning the sound output means from the specific aspect to the first output aspect, another output aspect as a specific aspect before return to the first output aspect is different from the moving picture compatible sound Since the aspect of outputting other sounds, the aspect of outputting animation-compatible or other sounds at an output level unrecognizable to the player, or the aspect of stopping the output, it is possible to the first output aspect Even when returning and starting output of a moving picture compatible sound corresponding to a predetermined moving picture whose display is started from a predetermined temporal position, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort to the player.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature O1]
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the special information acquired by the acquisition unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
An elapsed time determining unit that determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed;
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (a background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 80, a demo moving image in the example shown in FIG. 81) as a first display mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The image display means is
When it is determined by the elapsed time determination means that the predetermined time has elapsed, the display mode is shifted from the first display mode to a second display mode (a mode for displaying an RTC effect moving image) (FIGS. 80 and 81). ),
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the second display mode is shifted to the first display mode, and the first display mode is shifted to the first display mode. When displaying the 1 moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image (FIG. 80, FIG. 81)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature O1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the second display mode is shifted to the first display mode, and the first display mode is restored. When displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started changes when the first moving image is displayed by shifting to the first display mode. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started is changed when the first moving image is displayed after transitioning to the first display mode, for example, the second display mode is previously determined A configuration for starting display of the first moving image from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed at the timing immediately before shifting to the second display mode when the display period ends, When moving from the second display mode to the first display mode, the temporal position of the first moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the second display mode Even after the image display means has shifted from the first display mode to the second display mode, the reproduction of the first moving image is continued as internal processing, and the second display mode is shifted to the first display mode In the event of continuous processing as internal processing Configuration and the like to display a video.

  In addition, when a plurality of gaming machines having the feature O1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode is substantially finished in each gaming machine substantially simultaneously, and the display mode is shifted to the first display mode. Since the machine starts displaying from the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image when shifting to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the first displayed in each gaming machine You can synchronize the video of. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the first moving image displayed in each gaming machine is synchronized, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
A transition condition determination unit that determines whether a transition condition that is a condition for causing the image display unit to transition to a third display mode (a mode for displaying a demonstration moving image) is satisfied;
The image display means is
When the transition condition is satisfied in the first display mode (in the mode of displaying the background moving image), transition to the third display mode is triggered by the establishment of the transition condition (FIG. 11).
When the transition condition is satisfied in the second display mode (in the mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed), the predetermined display period of the second display mode is ended as a trigger. Shift to the third display mode (FIG. 82);
When changing to the said 3rd display mode and displaying a 3rd moving image (demo animation), a display is started from the predetermined temporal position of the said 3rd moving image. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature O2, even when the transition condition is satisfied in the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is not performed in advance. Since the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the defined display period, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when a plurality of gaming machines having the feature O2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends substantially simultaneously in each gaming machine, and the display mode is shifted to the third display mode, and each game is performed. Since the machine starts displaying from the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image when shifting to the third display mode and displaying the third moving image, the third displayed in each gaming machine You can synchronize the video of. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation synchronized with the third moving image displayed in each gaming machine, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to the feature O2,
It comprises return condition determination means for determining whether or not a return condition, which is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode (a mode for displaying a background moving image), is satisfied.
The image display means is
When the return condition is satisfied in the third display mode (in the mode of displaying a demonstration moving image), the display mode is returned to the first display mode upon the establishment of the return condition (FIG. 11).
When the return condition is satisfied in the second display mode (in the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image), the predetermined display period of the second display mode is ended as a trigger Return to the first display mode (FIG. 83);
When returning to said 1st display mode and displaying said 1st moving image, a display is started from said predetermined temporal position of said 1st moving image. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature O3, even when the return condition is satisfied in the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is not performed in advance. Since the display mode is returned to the first display mode triggered by the end of the defined display period, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O3, wherein
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporally leading position of the first moving image.

  According to the feature O4, when displaying or transitioning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the game is started compared to the configuration in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the first moving image in time The discomfort given to the person can be reduced. For example, if a player adopts a configuration in which the display is started from a position halfway in time of the first moving image when transitioning to or returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, the player Since the first moving image is to be watched from a position on the way in time, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or may not feel the lack of a portion of the first moving image not being watched. On the other hand, according to the feature O4, since the player can cause the player to view the first moving image from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player, and The player can be satisfied with the fact that he can watch all the videos from the temporal top position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature O5]
A game machine according to any one of the features O1 to O4, wherein
A sound output unit for outputting a moving picture compatible sound which is a sound corresponding to a moving image displayed by the image display unit;
The sound output means, when the image display means starts display from the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image, a first moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the first moving image (background A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined temporal position of music).

  According to the feature O5, the display of the first moving picture and the output of the first moving picture corresponding sound are easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving picture corresponding sound starts changes. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound starts changes, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, and the image display unit outputs the first moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the first position from the temporal position of the first moving picture corresponding sound which has been output at the timing immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode When transitioning to a configuration for starting output of the video compatible sound or transition to a mode for outputting the first video compatible sound, the image display means displays the second time position of the first video compatible sound to start output. The configuration is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the aspect, and the reproduction of the first moving image corresponding sound is continued as internal processing even after the image display means has shifted from the first display aspect to the second display aspect And the image display means is the second Configured for outputting a first video corresponding sound being played continuously as the internal processing and the like is at the transition or return from 示態 like in the first display mode.

[Feature O6]
The gaming machine according to feature O5,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound is a temporally leading position of the first moving image corresponding sound.

  According to the feature O6, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from the temporally intermediate position of the first moving image corresponding sound. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output is started from the temporally intermediate position of the first moving image corresponding sound, the player can view the first moving image corresponding sound from the temporally intermediate position. As a result, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or may not feel that there is a portion of the first moving image-compatible sound that is not being watched. On the other hand, according to the feature O6, since the player can make the player appreciate the first moving image corresponding sound from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. It is possible to give the player a satisfaction that the first moving image corresponding sound can be fully appreciated from the temporal top position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature O7]
A game machine according to any one of features O2 to O3;
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image is a temporal start position of the third moving image.

  According to the feature O7, in transition to the third display mode and displaying the third moving image, compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the position in the middle of the time of the third moving image, Uncomfortable feeling can be reduced. For example, assuming that the display is started from the position in the middle of the time of the third moving image when the third moving image is displayed by shifting to the third display mode, the player is required to set the third moving image. Since the video is to be watched from a position on the way in time, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or may not be satisfied that there is a portion of the third video that is not watched. On the other hand, according to the feature O7, since it is possible to make the player view the third moving image from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player, and The player can be satisfied with the fact that he can watch all the videos from the temporal top position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature O8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O4, wherein
A sound output unit for outputting a moving picture compatible sound which is a sound corresponding to a moving image displayed by the image display unit;
The sound output means, when the image display means starts display from the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image, a third moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the third moving image (demo A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined temporal position of music).

  According to the feature O8, the display of the third moving picture and the output of the third moving picture compatible sound can be easily synchronized as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving picture compatible sound starts is changed. be able to. As a result, the quality of the game presentation can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound starts changes, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode is ended, and the image display unit is the third moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the third position corresponding to the third moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode The image display means displays the second time position of the third moving picture compatible sound to start outputting when transitioning to a configuration to start outputting the moving picture corresponding sound or a mode to output the third moving picture corresponding sound The configuration is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the aspect, and the reproduction of the third moving image corresponding sound is continued as internal processing even after the image display means has shifted from the third display aspect to the second display aspect And the image display means is the second Configured for outputting the third video corresponding sound being played continuously as the internal processing and the like is at the transition from 示態 like the third display mode.

[Feature O9]
The gaming machine according to feature O8,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound is a temporally leading position of the third moving image corresponding sound.

  According to the feature O9, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player as compared with the configuration in which the output is started from the position in the middle of the third moving image corresponding sound in time. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output is started from the temporally intermediate position of the third moving image corresponding sound, the player can view the third moving image corresponding sound from the temporally intermediate position. As a result, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or may not be satisfied that there is a portion of the third moving image compatible sound that is not being watched. On the other hand, according to the feature O9, since it is possible to make the player appreciate the third moving image corresponding sound from the top position in time, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. It is possible to give the player a satisfaction that the third moving image corresponding sound can be fully appreciated from the top position in time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature M group, feature N group and feature O group solves the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, a gaming machine is known that displays a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and outputs music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker.

  Here, in the above-described gaming machine, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.

[Feature P1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit through which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information with an upper limit defined in advance as an upper limit;
A determination unit that determines whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display of pending displays (the pending displays Dm11 to Dm14 and the pending displays Dm21 to Dm24 in the eighth and ninth embodiments) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode Hold display means for changing the display mode of the hold display being displayed (the hold effect content determination process in the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment);
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
Before the hold display means changes the display mode of the hold display, the suggestion effect (FIG. 89, FIG. 90, FIG. 100, FIG. 105) is suggested to suggest that the display mode of the hold display is changed. A game machine characterized by

  Conventionally, it has been performed to show the player the number of played games by displaying a hold display. However, with regard to the pending display, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  According to the feature P1, prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed. Can give attention to people and give them a sense of expectation.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to the feature P1,
The effect execution means selects the suggested effect to be executed from among the plurality of suggested effects prepared according to an object for which the hold display means changes the display mode among the displayed hold images ((2) Hold Effect Content Determination Process in Eighth and Ninth Embodiments)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature P2, since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected according to the pending display to which the display mode is to be changed, the player can be made to pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect, and the display mode is changed to The player can be given a sense of anticipation as to which is the pending display.

[Feature P3]
A game machine according to feature P1 or feature P2, wherein
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the pending display suggests the possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the high and low of the possibility, and the pending As the display mode of the display becomes higher than the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the pending display is likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)).
The pending display means is
While determining the said display mode of the said pending | holding display based on the special information corresponding to the said pending | holding display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display changes as the display mode changes. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode becomes large between before and after the change in the display mode of the display mode (FIG. 92, FIG. 97, FIG. 98). , Figure 99)
A game machine characterized by

  When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination means, the opportunity for changing the display mode decreases. In other words, in the pending display corresponding to the special information that precedes the order determined by the determining means in the displayed pending display, the order determined by the determining means in the displayed pending display is later Relatively, the remaining time to be displayed is shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the pending display corresponding to the special information of. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information that precedes the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays. I hope to do it. However, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later may change in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature P3, when changing the display mode of the hold display, changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Therefore, even if the display mode of the hold display is relatively changed in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays contrary to the player's desire, the hold display In the display mode of the display mode, the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before change and after the change becomes large, so that it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's sense of expectation and, rather, further higher expectation. It can give a feeling.

[Feature P4]
A game machine according to feature P1 or feature P2, wherein
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the pending display suggests the possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the high and low of the possibility, and the pending As the display mode of the display becomes higher than the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the pending display is likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)).
The pending display means is
While determining the said display mode of the said pending | holding display based on the special information corresponding to the said pending | holding display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the determination by the determination means earlier than the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. Is also changed to the display mode of the upper stage (Figs. 101, 103, and 104).
A game machine characterized by

  There is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display, such as when the player desires to change the display mode to a higher rank with respect to the hold display. May be desired. However, contrary to the desire of the player, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display the player desires to change the display mode changes. There is a case. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature P4, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the determination by the determination means prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. The display mode of the upper stage is changed to the display mode of the upper stage. Therefore, temporarily, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode against the player's desire Even if it changes, the hold display in which the display mode has changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. Can be suppressed, and rather, it can give a further sense of expectation.

[Feature P5]
A game machine according to feature P3 or feature P4, wherein
The effect execution unit is
According to the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before change and after change of the hold display to be changed by the hold display means when executing the suggestion effect And select a suggested effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggested effects prepared (eighth to tenth embodiments)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature P5, according to the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode, between the before and after the change of the hold display to be changed Since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from among them, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the change of the display mode of the hold display, before the display mode of the hold display changes, Expectation can be given to the player also for the type of effect to be executed.

<Feature Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.

[Feature Q1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit through which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information with an upper limit defined in advance as an upper limit;
A determination unit that determines whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
Holding display means for displaying the number of holding displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode;
A gaming machine comprising
The pending display means is
When the display mode of the hold display is determined, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined (eighth embodiment) To 10th embodiment and modification 28)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature Q1, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the information about the game times corresponding to other hold displays (hereinafter, also referred to as hold game times) to the player using the hold display of the object for which the display mode is determined. For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the display mode is to be determined is more effective for the player than the special information to be determined by the determination means prior to the special information. In addition to the information on the hold display itself for which the display mode has been determined, such as determining the display mode of the hold display for which the display mode is to be determined to be a specific display mode when advantageous, Information can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player does not stop only guessing the return for one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, and is executed before and after the other etc. We make various guesses about the return of pending game times. Therefore, it is possible to create new playability by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency more than before, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q1,
The pending display means is
It is possible to change the display mode of the displayed hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, after the change of the hold display of the target for which the display mode is changed based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is changed. Determine the display mode (eighth to tenth embodiments)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature Q2, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold of the target for changing the display mode based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for which the display mode is changed. Since the display mode after the change of display is determined, it is possible to suggest to the player information about the holding game round corresponding to another hold display by using the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. For example, based on the special information corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed earlier than the hold game times corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the target to change the display mode, the change of the hold display of the target to change the display mode By determining the later display mode, the following game characteristics can be realized. As an example, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the determination by the determination means prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is changed. Can also be changed to the display mode of the upper stage (display mode advantageous to the player). Thus, according to the feature Q2, various new game characteristics can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the pending display suggests the possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the high and low of the possibility, and the pending As the display mode of the display becomes higher than the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the pending display is likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)).
The pending display means is
While determining the said display mode of the said pending | holding display based on the special information corresponding to the said pending | holding display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display changes as the display mode changes. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode becomes large between before and after the change in the display mode of the display mode (FIG. 92, FIG. 97, FIG. 98). , Figure 99)
A game machine characterized by

  When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination means, the opportunity for changing the display mode decreases. In other words, in the pending display corresponding to the special information that precedes the order determined by the determining means in the displayed pending display, the order determined by the determining means in the displayed pending display is later Relatively, the remaining time to be displayed is shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the pending display corresponding to the special information of. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information that precedes the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays. I hope to do it. However, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later may change in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature Q3, when changing the display mode of the hold display, changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Therefore, even if the display mode of the hold display is relatively changed in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays contrary to the player's desire, the hold display In the display mode of the display mode, the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before change and after the change becomes large, so that it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's sense of expectation and, rather, further higher expectation. It can give a feeling.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the pending display suggests the possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the high and low of the possibility, and the pending As the display mode of the display becomes higher than the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the pending display is likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)).
The pending display means is
While determining the said display mode of the said pending | holding display based on the special information corresponding to the said pending | holding display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the determination by the determination means earlier than the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. Is also changed to the display mode of the upper stage (Figs. 101, 103, and 104).
A game machine characterized by

  There is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display, such as when the player desires to change the display mode to a higher rank with respect to the hold display. May be desired. However, contrary to the desire of the player, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display the player desires to change the display mode changes. There is a case. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature Q4, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the determination by the determination means prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object for which the display mode is changed. The display mode of the upper stage is changed to the display mode of the upper stage. Therefore, temporarily, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode against the player's desire Even if it changes, the hold display in which the display mode has changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. Can be suppressed, and rather, it can give a further sense of expectation.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features Q2 to Q4,
Equipped with presentation execution means for performing presentation,
The effect executing means executes the suggestion effect which suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes before the hold display means changes the display mode of the hold display (FIGS. 89 and 90, Fig. 100, Fig. 105)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature Q5, prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed. Can give attention to people and give them a sense of expectation.

[Feature Q6]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q5,
The effect execution unit is
According to the size of the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before change and after change of the hold display to be changed by the hold display means when executing the suggestion effect And select a suggested effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggested effects prepared (eighth to tenth embodiments)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature Q6, according to the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between the change display and the change display of the pending display to be changed Since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected from among them, in addition to being able to give the player a sense of expectation for the change of the display mode of the hold display, before the display mode of the hold display changes, Expectation can be given to the player also for the type of effect to be executed.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.

[Feature R1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit through which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information with an upper limit defined in advance as an upper limit;
A determination unit that determines whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
Hold display means for displaying the number of pending displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode, and changing the display mode of the displayed pending display;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
Execute a presentation execution determination process that determines whether a presentation execution condition, which is a condition for executing a predetermined presentation, is satisfied.
The pending display means is
While determining whether or not the display mode change condition, which is a condition for changing the display mode of the hold display, is satisfied,
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the suspension display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed (eighth to tenth embodiments)
A game machine characterized by

  In the case of changing the display mode of the on-hold display independently of the execution of the predetermined effect despite the fulfillment of the effect execution condition and the display mode change condition, the predetermined effect is It can not be recognized that there is a correlation between the execution and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the player can not pay attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display. In other words, the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display each only provide different effects to the player, and the two do not function synergistically.

  According to the feature R1, when the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined effect is performed, so the change of the display mode of the hold display The player can be made to recognize that there is a correlation between them and the player can be made to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display by using the execution of the predetermined effect. That is, in addition to the effect of executing a predetermined effect such as giving a sense of expectation or feeling of tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as giving a feeling of expectation or feeling of tension for the subsequent game round, By changing the display mode of the hold display after the effect of, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display, and the interest of the game is improved synergistically. Can be

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to the feature R1,
The pending display means is
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the suspension display is not changed despite the predetermined effect being executed (10th embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature R2, when the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed although the predetermined effect is performed, so the predetermined effect is executed. After being played, it is possible to reverse the player's recognition that the display mode of the hold display changes, and it is possible to give a surprising degree to the game. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is executed, a sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes after that can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Features R3]
The gaming machine according to the feature R1 or the feature R2, wherein
It has a selection means (effect operation button 24) for the player to select a predetermined hold display,
The pending display means is
While executing a changeable determination process that determines whether it is possible to change the display mode of each displayed suspension display,
It is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeable determination process (tenth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature R3, it is possible to create new playability such as making the player select the hold display. Further, it is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined on-hold display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeable determination processing. A sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode changes can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Features R4]
The gaming machine according to the feature R1 to the feature R3, wherein
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the pending display suggests the possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the high and low of the possibility, and the pending As the display mode of the display becomes higher than the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the pending display is likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)).
The pending display means is
While determining the said display mode of the said pending | holding display based on the special information corresponding to the said pending | holding display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display changes as the display mode changes. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode becomes large between before and after the change in the display mode of the eighth embodiment (the eighth embodiment and the tenth embodiment) Form)
A game machine characterized by

  When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination means, the opportunity for changing the display mode decreases. In other words, in the pending display corresponding to the special information that precedes the order determined by the determining means in the displayed pending display, the order determined by the determining means in the displayed pending display is later Relatively, the remaining time to be displayed is shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the pending display corresponding to the special information of. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information that precedes the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays. I hope to do it. However, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later may change in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature R4, when changing the display mode of the hold display, changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information after the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Therefore, if the display mode of the hold display relatively changes in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays, contrary to the player's desire, or the player selects Even if the display mode of the hold display is changed), the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes large, While being able to suppress the fall of a feeling of expectation, it can give a still more feeling of expectation.

[Features R5]
The gaming machine according to the feature R1 to the feature R3, wherein
The display mode of the hold display is
The special information corresponding to the pending display suggests the possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and display modes of a plurality of stages from upper to lower are set corresponding to the high and low of the possibility, and the pending As the display mode of the display becomes higher than the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the pending display is likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)).
The pending display means is
While determining the said display mode of the said pending | holding display based on the special information corresponding to the said pending | holding display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the determination by the determination means earlier than the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object whose display mode is to be changed. Is also changed to the display mode of the upper stage (the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  There is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display, such as when the player desires to change the display mode to a higher rank with respect to the hold display. May be desired. However, contrary to the desire of the player, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display the player desires to change the display mode changes. There is a case. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is reduced.

  According to the feature R5, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the determination by the determination means prior to the special information corresponding to the hold display of the object for which the display mode is changed. The display mode of the upper stage is changed to the display mode of the upper stage. Therefore, temporarily, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the determination means after the special information corresponding to the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode against the player's desire Even if the display mode is changed (or the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changed), the hold display in which the display mode has changed is the display mode of the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. Since the display mode is changed to a higher display mode than the above, it is possible to suppress a drop in the player's sense of expectation, and to provide a further sense of expectation.

  The invention of the feature P group, the feature Q group, and the feature R group solves the following problems.

  Conventionally, it has been performed to show the player the number of played games by displaying a hold display.

  Here, further improvement of the technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A first ball entry portion (first start opening 33), in which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
A second ball entry portion (second start port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing through the game area;
Information acquisition to acquire special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part while acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry part Means,
First special information which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry part, and obtained by the game ball entering the second ball entry part Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information which is the special information, respectively;
A determination unit that determines whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination;
First command transmitting means (seventh embodiment) for transmitting a first command (a special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means S6610, S5402) in the
Second command transmitting means (seventh embodiment) for transmitting a second command (a special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on the presence / absence of storage of the second special information in the acquired information storage means S6628 and S5402) in
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
The first identification information (the first liquid crystal design in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information While displaying the second identification information (the second liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for representing
A display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed and a display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed, which is a display mode in which the first identification information is changed or stopped based on the transmitted first command. While switching with the first identification information non-display mode, which is the mode in which the demo image is displayed in the embodiment,
A second identification information display mode in which the second identification information is changed or stopped based on the transmitted second command, and a display mode in which the second identification information is not displayed (the eleventh example) A game machine characterized by switching between a second identification information non-display mode which is a mode in which a demo image in the embodiment is displayed).

  According to the feature S1, the first command is transmitted based on the presence or absence of the storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means, and the second command is the storage of the second special information in the acquired information storage means Sent based on the presence or absence of Then, the display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode based on the transmitted first command, and displays the second identification information based on the transmitted second command. The mode and the second identification information non-display mode are switched. Therefore, in the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in different display areas of the display means, switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode is acquired information It can be performed based on the presence or absence of the storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means in a mode independent of the presence or absence of the storage of the second special information in the storage means, and 2 Switching between the identification information non-display mode and the identification information non-display mode is performed based on the presence / absence of storage of the second special information in the acquisition information storage section in a mode independent of the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquisition information storage section be able to. In other words, the display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode in a mode independent of switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode. While switching can be performed between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode, switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode can be performed independently of each other. Can.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to the feature S1,
The display means is
If the state of the game shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, or from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) is displayed in a display area different from that before the transition of the gaming state (FIG. 120)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature S2, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information before the transition of the gaming state Since the display is made in different display areas, the player can easily recognize that the state of the game has shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S2,
The display means is
If the gaming state has shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state,
The second identification information (pattern for second liquid crystal) is displayed in the display area displaying the first identification information (pattern for first liquid crystal), and the second identification information (pattern for second liquid crystal) is displayed A game machine characterized by displaying the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) in the display area being displayed.

  According to the feature S3, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information is displayed, and (2) Since the first identification information is displayed in the display area displaying the identification information, the player is made to recognize that the state of the game has shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state Can. Further, by displaying the second identification information in the display area displaying the first identification information and displaying the first identification information in the display area displaying the second identification information, for example, the first identification For the information and the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as having the player guess that the role in the game has been changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature S4]
A game machine according to any one of features S1 to S3.
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) of the changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) of the changing display mode. It is possible (it is a simultaneous change machine in the 11th embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  The first identification information is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information. The second identification information is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the second special information. According to the feature S4, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode. On the other hand, an expectation can be simultaneously given to the determination result of the two special information of the first special information and the second special information.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A first ball entry portion (first start opening 33), in which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
A second ball entry portion (second start port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing through the game area;
Information acquisition to acquire special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part while acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry part Means,
First special information which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry part, and obtained by the game ball entering the second ball entry part Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information which is the special information, respectively;
A determination unit that determines whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display means (symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
The first identification information (the first liquid crystal design in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information While displaying the second identification information (the second liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for representing
If the state of the game shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, or from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information (the first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) and the second identification information (the second liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) is displayed different from before the game state is shifted Display in the area (Figure 120)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature T1, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information before the transition of the gaming state Since the display is made in different display areas, the player can easily recognize that the state of the game has shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
The display means is
When the state of the game shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode or from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode) Is
The second identification information (pattern for second liquid crystal) is displayed in the display area displaying the first identification information (pattern for first liquid crystal), and the second identification information (pattern for second liquid crystal) is displayed A game machine characterized by displaying the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) in the display area being displayed.

  According to the feature T2, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the second identification information is displayed in the display area in which the first identification information is displayed, and (2) Since the first identification information is displayed in the display area displaying the identification information, the player is made to recognize that the state of the game has shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state Can. Further, by displaying the second identification information in the display area displaying the first identification information and displaying the first identification information in the display area displaying the second identification information, for example, the first identification For the information and the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, such as having the player guess that the role in the game has been changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature T3]
A game machine according to feature T1 or feature T2, wherein
First command transmitting means (11th embodiment) for transmitting a first command (a special customer waiting command in the 11th embodiment) based on the presence or absence of the storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means S6610, S5402) in the form
Second command transmitting means (11th embodiment) for transmitting a second command (a special customer waiting command in the 11th embodiment) based on the presence or absence of the storage of the second special information in the acquired information storage means S6628, S5402) in the form
Equipped with
The display means is
A first identification information display mode, which is a display mode in which the first identification information (the first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) is fluctuated or stopped based on the transmitted first command, and While switching between the first identification information non-display mode which is a display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed (the mode in which the demo image is displayed in the eleventh embodiment),
A second identification information display mode, which is a display mode in which the second identification information (the second liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) is fluctuated or stopped based on the transmitted second command, and A game machine characterized by switching between a second identification information non-display mode which is a display mode in which the second identification information is not displayed (a mode in which a demo image is displayed in the eleventh embodiment).

  According to the feature T3, the first command is transmitted based on the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means, and the second command is storage of the second special information in the acquired information storage means Sent based on the presence or absence of Then, the display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode based on the transmitted first command, and displays the second identification information based on the transmitted second command. The mode and the second identification information non-display mode are switched. Therefore, in the display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information in different display areas of the display means, switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode is acquired information It can be performed based on the presence or absence of the storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means in a mode independent of the presence or absence of the storage of the second special information in the storage means, and 2 Switching between the identification information non-display mode and the identification information non-display mode is performed based on the presence / absence of storage of the second special information in the acquisition information storage section in a mode independent of the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquisition information storage section be able to. In other words, the display means switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode in a mode independent of switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode. While switching can be performed between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode, switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode can be performed independently of each other. Can.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3.
The display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode (simultaneous change in the eleventh embodiment) Machine)
A game machine characterized by

  The first identification information is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information. The second identification information is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the second special information. According to the feature T4, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode. On the other hand, an expectation can be simultaneously given to the determination result of the two special information of the first special information and the second special information.

<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Special information storage means for storing the first special information and the second special information;
According to the state of the game, the first identification information based on the first special information (the first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) and the second identification information based on the second special information (in the eleventh embodiment) A first display area (main display area or sub display area) for displaying one of the second liquid crystal design and a second display for displaying the other of the first identification information and the second identification information Display means having an area (main display area or sub display area);
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
The display state of the first display area is shifted to a different display state based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage means. (In the eleventh embodiment, the display state for displaying a liquid crystal symbol is shifted to the display state for displaying a demonstration moving image),
The display state of the second display area is shifted to a different display state based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means. Yes (in the eleventh embodiment, the display state for displaying a liquid crystal design is shifted to a display state for displaying a demonstration moving image)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature U1, the display means displays the display state of the first display area based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage means. The display state of the second display area is displayed differently based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means while shifting to a different display state. Since the transition to the state is made, the first display area and the second display area can be independently shifted to different display states. Therefore, for the transition of the display state of the first display area, there is a configuration having a correlation with the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area, and for the transition of the display state of the second display area The information regarding the presence or absence of the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in each display area is clearly shown to the player as compared with the configuration having a correlation with the special information corresponding to the displayed identification information. be able to.

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to the feature U1, which is
The display means is
The special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area (main display area) is not stored in the special information storage unit from the state in which the special information storage unit is stored. The display state of the first display area from the display state in which the identification information is displayed (the display state in which the liquid crystal display symbol is displayed) is displayed in the display state (demo video is displayed) Transition to a display state).

  According to the feature U2, the display means is in a state in which the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is not stored in the special information storage means from the state in which the special information storage means is stored. In response to the event, the display state of the first display area is shifted from the display state in which the identification information is displayed to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed, so that it corresponds to the identification information displayed in the first display area. The player can be clearly indicated that the special information has been stored in the special information storage means and has not been stored in the special information storage means.

[Feature U3]
The gaming machine according to the feature U1 or the feature U2, wherein
The display means is
The special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area (sub display area) is not stored in the special information storage unit from the state in which the special information storage unit is stored. The display state of the second display area is displayed from the display state in which the identification information is displayed (display state in which the liquid crystal design is displayed) and the display state in which the identification information is not displayed (demo video is displayed) Transition to a display state).

  According to the feature U3, the display means is in the state where the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is not stored in the special information storage means from the state where the special information storage means is stored. In response to the event, the display state of the second display area is shifted from the display state in which the identification information is displayed to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed, so that the display information corresponds to the identification information displayed in the second display area. The player can be clearly indicated that the special information has been stored in the special information storage means and has not been stored in the special information storage means.

[Feature U4]
A game machine according to any one of features U1 to U3.
The display means is
The second display area (the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol) displayed in the first display area (main display area) when the gaming state is shifted to the predetermined state The first display area (main display area) is the identification information (first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol) displayed in the second display area (sub display area) and displayed in the sub display area). Game machine characterized by displaying on.

  According to the feature U4, when the gaming state shifts to the predetermined state, the display means displays the identification information displayed in the first display area in the second display area and displays the identification information in the second display area. Since the identification information that has been displayed is displayed in the first display area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state has shifted. Furthermore, since the identification information displayed in the first display area is displayed in the second display area, and the identification information displayed in the second display area is displayed in the first display area, for example, the first identification information For the second identification information, the player can be made to guess that there is a change in the role in the game, and the player can be given a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4, wherein
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) of the changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) of the changing display mode. It is possible (it is a simultaneous change machine in the 11th embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature U5, since the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode, it is possible for the player to On the other hand, a sense of expectation can be given simultaneously to the two pieces of identification information of the first identification information and the second identification.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A gaming machine having display means,
The display means (the symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment) is
Having a first display area (main display area MA) and a second display area (first sub area SA1),
In the first gaming state (low frequency support mode), the display state of the first display area (main display area MA) is acquired by entering the first information (entering the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33) Changed based on the selected special information), and in the second gaming state (high frequency support mode), based on the second information (special information acquired by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34) A game machine characterized by changing.

  According to the feature V1, the display means has a first display area and a second display area, and the display state of the first display area is based on the first information in the first gaming state. Since the change is made based on the second information in the second gaming state, for example, the player changes when the display state of the first display area changes before and after a predetermined number of games On the other hand, it can be inferred that the gaming state has changed before and after a predetermined number of game runs, and the player can be given a sense of expectation and intonation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
Detecting means (a first starting opening 33 and a second starting opening 34) for detecting the gaming ball in the gaming area;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the first information and the second information are information acquired with the detection means detecting the game ball as a trigger.

  According to the feature V2, since the first information and the second information are information acquired triggered by the detection means detecting the gaming ball, the display state of the first display area is In addition to changing according to the change (change from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, or change from the second gaming state to the first gaming state), the game ball to the ball entry part It can be changed by the presence or absence of ball entering and the timing when the game ball enters the ball entering part.

[Feature V3]
A game machine according to feature V1 or feature V2, wherein
The display means is
In the first gaming state (low frequency support mode), the display state of the second display area (the first sub area SA1) is the second information (the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34) The special information acquired by entering the game ball to the first starting opening 33 in the second gaming state (high frequency support mode), changing based on the special information acquired by Information) to change the game machine.

  According to the feature V3, the display means changes the display state of the second display area based on the second information in the first gaming state, and based on the first information in the second gaming state Change the display state of the second display area, for example, when the change in the display state of the second display area changes before and after a predetermined number of games, the player changes to the gaming state before and after the predetermined number of games It is possible to make it possible to guess what happened, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and intonation. Further, since such a change in the display state is executed in the two display areas of the first display area and the second display area, the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit through which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit;
A determination unit that determines whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
The game cycle operation being ended after the game cycle operation to notify the result of the determination is regarded as one game cycle, and the game cycle operation is started after the game cycle operation is started Control means for controlling the execution of the game times and controlling the fluctuation time when the time until the end is a fluctuation time, and
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
It is the last specified game time to be executed before the end of the specified game state while executing the specified game time which is the game time to be executed in the specified game state (the game state in the high probability mode in the eleventh embodiment) A predetermined predetermined time (a change time in at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time (the 120th game time after the odds after the odds of changing the game times in the eleventh embodiment) In the eleventh embodiment, the setting is 12 seconds.

  According to the feature W1, since the variation time in at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time is set to a predetermined time, the latest specified time after the final specified game time is started The control which considered the fluctuation time of at least 2 times of game times performed to can be set up beforehand. For example, in at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time, it is possible to execute an effect in which an execution time is set in advance.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to the feature W1,
A first ball entry part (first start port 33) as the ball entry part;
A second ball entry part (second start port 34) as the ball entry part;
Equipped with
The information acquisition means acquires special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry part and special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part. Get information
In the determination means, the first special information which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry part, and the game ball enters the second ball entry part It is determined whether the second special information which is the special information acquired by performing the process satisfies a predetermined condition,
The control means
Control the fluctuation time in the first ball entry game cycle (the first starting slot game circuit in the eleventh embodiment), which is a game cycle based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit,
The variation time in the second ball game for the second ball game (the game cycle for the second starting opening in the eleventh embodiment), which is the game time based on the game ball having entered the second ball game part, is controlled,
Any one of the first ball game portion or the second ball portion game cycle is executed during the first ball portion game cycle or the second ball portion game cycle It is possible to perform parallel execution processing which is processing to execute the other (it is a simultaneous change machine in the eleventh embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature W2, in the gaming machine capable of performing parallel execution processing, variation time in at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time is a predetermined time determined in advance. Set In the case of a gaming machine that performs parallel execution processing, the first ball entry gaming cycle or the second ball entry during a period in which either the first ball entry gaming cycle or the second ball entry gaming cycle is executed. Since one of the club game times may be executed, the variation time in at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time may be set to a predetermined time. If the time from the start of the game cycle started earlier to the end of the game cycle started later in the two game times is shorter than the total time of two game times, the fluctuation time is a predetermined time There is. However, as the time from the start of the game cycle started earlier to the end of the game cycle started earlier in the two game times, at least the fluctuation time is secured for one game cycle at a predetermined time. It is possible. That is, as the time from the start to the end of the two game times, it is possible to preset control taking into consideration at least one game time having a predetermined fluctuation time.

[Feature W3]
The gaming machine according to feature W2,
The control means
In the case where the parallel execution process is being executed and the prescribed condition is satisfied (in the case where the result image is displayed for 10 seconds previously set in the eleventh embodiment),
Of at least one of the at least two game times executed immediately before starting the final specified game time, for at least one game time, the time of the predetermined length has elapsed since the game time was started Even before the end of the game, the game is ended (other aspects in the eleventh embodiment (aspect 2))
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature W3, when the parallel execution process is being executed, and the prescribed condition is satisfied, at least two game times to be executed immediately after the final specified game time is started. Among them, for at least one game time, since the game time is ended even before a predetermined length of time elapses after the game time is started, after the final specified game time is started Unnecessary time can be omitted as execution time of at least two game times to be executed most recently.

[Feature W4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3.
The determination means includes at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability satisfying the predetermined condition is relatively high or low as a determination mode.
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific gaming state is that the determination means is in the high probability mode.

  According to the feature W4, the variation of at least two game times executed immediately after starting the last specified game time which is the last specified game time executed before the end of the gaming state in which the determination means is the high probability mode The control in consideration of time can be set in advance. For example, in at least two game times to be executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time to be executed before the end of the high probability mode, it is possible to execute an effect in which an execution time is set in advance.

[Feature W5]
The gaming machine according to the feature W4,
The determination means limits the number of specific game times that are continuously executed in the specific gaming state that is the high probability mode to a prescribed number, and the specific game times that are continuously executed is the prescribed number A game machine characterized by comprising high probability mode game number of times restriction expedient which ends the aforementioned specified game state on the fact that it reached.

  According to the feature W5, the fluctuation time of at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the last specific game time out of the specific game times for which the number of times continuously executed is limited to the specified number is considered The control can be preset.

[Feature W6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W5, wherein
In the second ball entering portion, the gaming ball can not enter the ball or can not enter the ball in a non-accepting state (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is closed) and the gaming ball enters the ball than in the non-accepting state Switching means capable of switching to an easy receiving state (a state in which the motorized item 34a is opened),
As a control mode for controlling the switching means and controlling the switching means, a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) in which the receiving state is more likely to be received than the first mode Switching control means having
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the switching control means is in a state of the second mode (high frequency support mode) in the specific gaming state.

  According to the feature W6, the switching control means performs at least two game rounds immediately after starting the final specific game round which is the last specific game round to be executed before the end of the gaming state which is the second mode. The control in consideration of the fluctuation time can be set in advance. For example, in at least two game times to be executed immediately after the start of the last specific game time to be executed before the end of the second mode, it is possible to execute an effect in which an execution time is set in advance.

[Feature W7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6, wherein
Equipped with presentation execution means for performing presentation,
The effect executing means is given to the player at least at the first game run executed after the final specified game run (the 120th game run after the probability change in the eleventh embodiment) is started. Execute an effect to notify information on benefits (display the result image)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature W7, since at least the first game cycle to be executed after the final specified game cycle is started, an effect of notifying information on the benefit given to the player is executed, so the player can receive the provided bonus It becomes easy to grasp the Furthermore, in the gaming machine in which the variation time in at least two game times to be executed immediately after starting the final specified game time is set to a predetermined time set in advance, information on a benefit given to the player is notified Since the effect to be played is executed at least at the first game cycle to be executed after the final specific game cycle is started, the effect of notifying information on the benefit given to the player is executed as the effect for which the execution time is set in advance be able to.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A first ball entry portion (first start opening 33), in which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
A second ball entry portion (second start port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing through the game area;
Information acquisition to acquire special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry part while acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry part Means,
First special information which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entry part, and obtained by the game ball entering the second ball entry part Determining means for determining whether the second special information which is the special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
The game cycle operation being ended after the game cycle operation to notify the result of the determination is regarded as one game cycle, and the game cycle operation is started after the game cycle operation is started Control means for controlling the execution of the game times and controlling the fluctuation time when the time until the end is a fluctuation time, and
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
Control the fluctuation time in the first ball entry game cycle (the first starting slot game circuit in the eleventh embodiment), which is a game cycle based on the game ball entering the first ball entry unit,
The variation time in the second ball game for the second ball game (the game cycle for the second starting opening in the eleventh embodiment), which is the game time based on the game ball having entered the second ball game part, is controlled,
Any one of the first ball game portion or the second ball portion game cycle is executed during the first ball portion game cycle or the second ball portion game cycle It is possible to perform parallel execution processing which is processing to execute the other (simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment),
When the effect executing means executes a predetermined effect, a plurality of game times (the 121st and 122nd game times after the game game with a probability change in the eleventh embodiment) are executed continuously or in parallel. First, the fluctuation time is set to a time (12 seconds in the eleventh embodiment) or more (10 seconds in the eleventh embodiment) required for execution of the predetermined effect (effect of displaying the result image). A game machine characterized by executing a fluctuation time setting process.

  According to the feature X1, in the case of a gaming machine performing parallel execution processing, during the period in which either one of the first ball game portion or the second ball portion game cycle is executed, the game for the first ball portion There may be a case in which the other one of the game times for the second or the second ball game is executed. Therefore, for example, during the period when the predetermined effect is being executed by the effect execution means, the first ball entry game cycle is ended and a new first ball entry game cycle is started, or the second ball entry game is started. The club game round may end and a new second ball entry game round may be started. Hereinafter, the timing of the start of the game play and the timing of the end of the game play are also referred to as "the game run's break".

  Here, if “the game round break” occurs during the execution of a predetermined effect, there is a possibility that the player will be given a complicated impression with respect to the effect being executed. In addition, there is a possibility that the player can not concentrate on the determination result in the determination means in each game time.

  According to the feature X1, when the effect executing means executes a predetermined effect, the fluctuation time of the plurality of game times executed continuously or in parallel is a time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect. Since the setting is made, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in the game times during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
The control unit
In the case where the effect executing means executes a predetermined effect, two game times (consecutively after the variation in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times of game times being executed are performed continuously or in parallel as the first variation time setting process. The variation time of the 121st game and the 122nd game is set to a time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect.

  According to the feature X2, in the gaming machine capable of executing parallel execution processing, fluctuation of the time required for execution of the predetermined effect while suppressing occurrence of disconnection of the game times in a period in which the predetermined effect is being executed It is possible to minimize the number of game times set in time.

[Feature X 3]
A game machine according to feature X1 or feature X2, wherein
The control unit
The number of times of execution of game times set to a time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect is set in advance to a predetermined number of times (two times in the eleventh embodiment),
When the effect executing means has finished executing the predetermined effect (effect to display the result image), the number of times of execution of the game round set to the time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect is the predetermined execution If it is less than the number of times (less than two times in the eleventh embodiment),
A second variation time which is different from the first variation time setting process (a process of setting a variation time to 12 seconds) for game times started after the effect execution means finishes executing a predetermined effect A game machine characterized by executing setting processing.

  According to the feature X3, when the effect executing means has finished executing the predetermined effect, the number of times of execution of the game play set in the time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect is less than the predetermined number of executions The second variation time setting process, which is different from the first variation time setting process, is executed on the game times that are started after the effect executing means has finished executing the predetermined effect. It is possible to avoid unnecessary execution of the game times set to the time required for the execution of the game. As a result, after the effect executing means finishes executing the predetermined effect, the fluctuation time is set shorter than the time required to execute the predetermined effect, or a long fluctuation time or a short fluctuation time is randomly set to change the fluctuation time. It is also possible to give intonation, and various control methods can be adopted to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature X 4]
A game machine according to any one of features X1 to X3, wherein
The determination means includes at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability satisfying the predetermined condition is relatively high or low as a determination mode.
A game machine characterized in that the effect execution means executes the predetermined effect (effect of displaying a result image) triggered by the end of the high probability mode.

  According to the feature X4, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a break in the game times during execution of a predetermined effect which is executed with an end of the high probability mode.

[Feature X 5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X4,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect (effect of displaying a result image) for notifying information on a benefit given to a player.

  According to the feature X5, since the predetermined effect is an effect of notifying information on the benefit given to the player, the player can easily grasp the provided benefit. Also, for the player, the information on the provided benefit is information of high interest. According to the feature X5, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the game round breaking out during the execution of the effect of notifying the player of information of high interest.

<Feature Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
First detection means (first start opening 33) for detecting the gaming ball in the gaming area;
Second detection means (second starting opening 34) for detecting the gaming ball in the gaming area;
First information acquisition means for acquiring first special information based on detection of the game ball by the first detection means;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring second special information based on detection of the game ball by the second detection means;
Determining means for determining whether the first special information satisfies a first predetermined condition and determining whether the second special information satisfies a second predetermined condition;
Display means (symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
There are at least three displayable areas capable of displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the special information (the main display area MA in the eleventh embodiment, the first sub display area SA1, the second sub display Area SA2),
First identification information (first liquid crystal design), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, is displayed in a first displayable area of the at least three displayable areas. While displaying
Second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the second special information, the first displayable area of the at least three displayable areas Display in a second displayable area different from
Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (based on transition to the high frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in a displayable area different from the displayable area displayed before the predetermined change condition is established. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature Y1, the display means has at least three displayable areas capable of displaying the identification information and, based on the predetermined change condition, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information, The displayable area is displayed in a different displayable area from the displayable area that was displayed before the predetermined change condition was established. Therefore, for example, the displayable area for displaying the first identification information is changed when the game state is changed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize that the game state has changed. In addition, it is possible to display the first identification information and the second identification information by selecting any two displayable areas from among the three displayable areas. As an example, the displayable area for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information may be changed depending on the state of the game, or a display different from the identification information may be displayed on one displayable area of the three displayable areas (for example, Even when the effect image is displayed, the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed in the remaining two displayable areas.

[Feature Y2]
The gaming machine according to the feature Y1,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal symbol) of the changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal symbol) of the changing display mode. It is possible (it is a simultaneous change machine in the 11th embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature Y2, the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode. On the other hand, an expectation can be simultaneously given to the determination result of the two special information of the first special information and the second special information.

[Feature Y3]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2, wherein
The predetermined change condition is transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (transition from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, or transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode) A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature Y3, by changing the displayable area in which the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed, it is possible to make the player guess that there is a change in the state of the game. , Can improve the interest of the game. For example, by changing the displayable area in which the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed, the present invention can be applied to a suggested effect that is an effect that suggests something to the player. Thus, based on the transition of the gaming state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in a different displayable area from the displayable area displayed before the transition of the gaming state. The processing to be displayed can be used for various effects, and the range of expressions of effects executed by the gaming machine can be greatly expanded.

<Feature Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
Operation means operable by the player;
Firing means for firing game balls toward the game area in response to the operation of the operation means by the player;
A ball entry unit through which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Display means for displaying a guidance display (guidance display GD1 and guidance display GD2 in <aspect 9> of the eleventh embodiment) which is guidance regarding the operation of the operation means;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means is
The content of the guidance in the guidance display is controlled based on the result of the judgment (lottery result of the big hit lottery) by the judgment means (control to display the guidance display GD1 or display the guidance display GD2)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature Z1, since the display means controls the content of the guidance in the guidance display based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the content of the guidance in the guidance display reflects the result of the determination in the determination means Can be As a result, by controlling the content of the guidance in the guidance display, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect that suggests the result of the determination by the determination means.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine according to the feature Z1,
The display means is
A game machine characterized by controlling a display mode of the guidance display (a color of display of guidance display GD1 or guidance display GD2) based on a result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the feature Z2, since the display means controls the display mode of the guidance display based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the display mode of the guidance display should reflect the result of the determination by the determination means. Can. As a result, by controlling the display mode of the guidance display, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect that suggests the result of the determination by the determination means.

[Feature Z3]
A game machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2, wherein
The display means is
The color of the guidance display (guidance display GD1 and guidance display GD2) is controlled as the display mode of the guidance display based on the result of the determination by the determination means (control to make it blue or red)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature Z3, since the display means controls the color of the guidance display as the display mode of the guidance display based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the color of the guidance display reflects the result of the determination in the determination means It can be As a result, by controlling the color of the guidance display, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect that suggests the result of the determination by the determination means.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3.
The gaming machine, wherein the guidance display is a display for guiding an operation method of the operation means which is advantageous to a player.

  According to the feature Z4, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect which suggests the result of the determination by the determination means using the guidance display for guiding the operation method of the operation means which is advantageous to the player.

<Feature αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
In the first gaming state, when a predetermined command (result display end command in the eleventh embodiment <aspect 12>) is received, a specific process based on the predetermined command is executed (display of the result image A gaming machine provided with specific processing execution means (which ends)
The specific process execution means is
In the second gaming state (the state where the game times are not being executed) different from the first game state (the state where the game times are being executed), the predetermined command is not received. In spite of that, the game machine characterized by performing the specific processing.

  According to the feature αA1, when the specific process execution means receives the predetermined command in the first gaming state, the specific process execution means executes the specific process based on the predetermined command, and the gaming state is the first gaming state In the second gaming state different from the above, the specific processing is executed despite the fact that the predetermined command is not received, so in the second gaming state, the condition for setting the predetermined command as the transmission command is satisfied. If not, or if the possibility of being met is low, specific processing can be performed.

[Feature αA2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αA1,
The specific process execution means is
The predetermined command is received when the gaming state is shifted from the first gaming state (the state in which game times are being executed) to the second gaming state (the state in which game times are not being performed) A game machine characterized by performing the specific process regardless of the absence.

  According to the feature αA2, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the specific processing is executed despite the fact that the predetermined command has not been received, so the second In the gaming state, if the condition to set a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied, or if the possibility of being satisfied is low and, for example, a specific process is not executed in the first gaming state Even in this case, it is possible to execute specific processing along with the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

[Feature αA3]
It is a game machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit through which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry unit;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
A gaming machine comprising
The first gaming state is a state in which the special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit,
The second gaming state is a state in which the special information is not stored in the acquired information storage unit,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αA3, in the state where the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, when the predetermined command is received, the specific process based on the predetermined command is executed, and the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means In the state where no information is stored, a specific process is executed even though a predetermined command is not received, so in a state where special information is not stored in the acquired information storage means, the predetermined command is If the condition set as the transmission command is not satisfied, or if the possibility of being satisfied is low, specific processing can be performed. For example, when the game ball is not fired toward the game area, a specific process is executed even if the condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied or the possibility of being satisfied is low. be able to.

[Feature αA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αA1 to αA3, wherein
It has display means capable of displaying a specific image (result image),
When the specific process execution means receives the predetermined command, the specific process execution means executes a process of ending the display of the specific image displayed by the display means as the specific process. Machine.

  According to the feature αA4, when the display means is displaying a specific image, in the second gaming state, the condition to set a predetermined command as the transmission command is not satisfied or may be satisfied. Even when it is low, the display means can end the display of a specific image. Therefore, when it is not preferable that a specific image is displayed in the second gaming state, the display of the specific image can be ended even when the predetermined command is not received.

<Feature αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit (general winning opening 32 in the twelfth embodiment, a second start opening 34, a big winning opening 36a, a V winning opening 48) capable of entering game balls that circulate the gaming area;
Gaming state transition means for transitioning from a first gaming state (low probability mode) to a second gaming state (high probability mode) when a predetermined condition is established;
Payout means (payout device 71) that pays out the game balls based on the game balls entering the ball entering portion;
Information corresponding to the expected number of game balls to be paid out before the end of the second gaming state (high probability mode) is displayed information (remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP in the twelfth embodiment) Display means (symbol display device 41);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αB1, since the information corresponding to the expected number of payouts is displayed, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of game balls that can be acquired before the end of the second gaming state. In addition, for example, compared to the configuration that displays the remaining number of big wins that can be executed until the end of the second gaming state, you can have a sense of expectation for the second gaming state Because the player can be made to recognize clearly, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature αB2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αB1,
The display means, when the planned number of payouts increases, information corresponding to the planned number of payouts being displayed (remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 172 (b))), The information is changed to information corresponding to the expected number of payouts after increasing the number as the upper limit by the number of increase (the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 172 (c))) .

  According to the feature αB2, the information corresponding to the displayed scheduled number of payouts is changed to the information corresponding to the scheduled number of payouts after increasing the number as the upper limit by the increased number, so that the second gaming state is ended. It is possible to make the player recognize that the number of gaming balls that can be acquired is increased, and the player's expectation for the second gaming state can be improved.

[Feature αB3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αB2,
The display means displays increase suggestion information (remaining acquired ball number increase suggestion image CPB in the twelfth embodiment) indicating that the expected number of payouts has increased, when the expected number of payouts has increased. The information (the remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP (FIG. 172 (b) in the twelfth embodiment) corresponding to the expected number of payouts being displayed is increased after the increase suggested by the increase suggesting information is increased). A game machine characterized by changing it to information corresponding to the expected number of payouts (remaining acquired ball number suggested image CP (FIG. 172 (c)) in the twelfth embodiment).

  According to the feature αB3, since the increase suggestion information is displayed, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the increased number of game balls that can be acquired by the end of the second game state, the second It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the gaming state.

[Feature αB4]
It is a game machine according to the feature αB2 or the feature αB3.
The display means sets the scheduled number of payouts being displayed at a timing different from the timing when it is determined that the scheduled number of payouts has increased (the timing when the game ball wins the jackpot and enters the V winning opening). A gaming machine characterized by changing corresponding information into information corresponding to the number of the scheduled payouts after increase.

  According to the feature αB4, since the information corresponding to the number of scheduled payouts being displayed is changed at a timing different from the timing when it is determined that the scheduled number of payouts has increased, unexpectedness can be given to the game, It is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation, such as at what timing the information corresponding to the currently displayed payout number is changed.

[Feature αB5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αB2 to αB3.
The display means corresponds to the expected number of payouts after increasing the information corresponding to the expected number of payouts being displayed, with an increment of a predetermined number (500 in the twelfth embodiment) or more as one unit. A gaming machine characterized by changing to information.

  According to the feature αB5, the information corresponding to the planned number of payouts being displayed is changed to the information corresponding to the planned number of payouts after the increase with the predetermined number or more as one unit. Expectations can be improved.

[Feature αB6]
The gaming machine according to the feature αB4,
When the information corresponding to the scheduled number of payouts displayed is less than or equal to a second predetermined number (0 in the twelfth embodiment), the display means information corresponding to the scheduled number of payouts displayed The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is changed to information corresponding to the expected number of payouts after increasing the number less than the predetermined number (500).

  According to the feature αB6, when the information corresponding to the scheduled number of payouts displayed is less than or equal to the second predetermined number, the information corresponding to the scheduled number of payouts displayed is increased by the number less than the predetermined number. Since the information is changed to information corresponding to the later expected number of payouts, the information corresponding to the expected number of payouts being displayed is less than the second predetermined number and the predetermined number is less than the predetermined number for the player whose expectation has decreased Even if it is an increase in the planned number of withdrawals, it is possible to give a great sense of expectation.

[Feature αB7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB6, wherein
In the second gaming state, in the case where the gaming balls are continuously fired at a constant firing intensity and at a constant interval (every 0.6 seconds), the number of gaming balls fired (12th embodiment) The game machine is characterized in that the number (three in the twelfth embodiment) of game balls entering the ball entry portion occupied in 3) is constant.

  According to the feature αB7, in the case where the gaming balls are continuously fired at constant intervals and at a certain firing intensity, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entering part in the number of launched gaming balls is Since it is configured to be constant, it is possible to make the number of gaming balls actually paid out before the end of the second gaming state coincide with the expected number of payouts.

<Feature αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit through which game balls flowing through the game area can enter;
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
A determination unit that executes a determination process (big hit lottery) based on the special information;
In the first gaming state (low probability mode) when a predetermined condition (in the twelfth embodiment, winning a 2R type 1 jackpot in the jackpot lottery and entering a gaming ball into the V winning opening 48) is established In addition, while shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (high probability mode), the number of the determination processing executed after shifting to the second gaming state is a prescribed number of times (in the twelfth embodiment) Transition means for transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when reaching 120 times);
Display means for displaying information based on the remaining number of determinations that is the remaining number of the determination processes that can be performed until the prescribed number of times is reached (in the twelfth embodiment, the remaining acquired ball number suggestion image CP);
Increasing means for increasing the number of remaining determinations when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising
The display means continues the information based on the remaining determination number during display without changing it to the information based on the remaining determination number after increase even if the remaining determination number increases. A gaming machine characterized by having a display.

  According to the feature αC1, even if the remaining number of determinations increases, the information based on the remaining number of determinations during display is continuously displayed without being changed to the information based on the remaining number of determinations after the increase Since there are cases, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the actual number of remaining determinations may be greater than the number of remaining determinations displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature αC2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αC1,
The display means, when the remaining number of determinations has increased, information based on the remaining number of determinations being displayed at a timing different from the timing at which the predetermined condition is established in the second gaming state, It changes into the information based on the number of remaining judgments after increase. A game machine characterized by things.

  According to the feature αC2, the information based on the number of remaining determinations during display is changed to the information based on the number of remaining determinations after increase at a timing different from the timing at which the predetermined condition is established in the second gaming state As a result, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game and to provide the player with a new sense of expectation, such as at what timing the number of remaining judgments increases.

[Feature αC3]
A game machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
The display means, as information based on the remaining number of determinations, information corresponding to the expected number of payouts, which is the number of gaming balls scheduled to be paid out until the number of times of execution of the determination processing reaches the prescribed number. A game machine characterized by displaying a remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP) in a form.

  According to the feature αC3, the information corresponding to the expected number of game balls to be paid out before the number of times of execution of the determination process reaches the specified number of times is displayed, so the number of times of execution of the determination process reaches the specified number of times It is possible to make the player grasp the number of game balls that can be acquired before the second game state ends. Further, since it is possible to make the player clearly recognize how much expectation with respect to the second gaming state can be made, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature αC4]
A game machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3.
In the second gaming state, in the case where the gaming balls are continuously fired at a constant firing intensity and at a constant interval (every 0.6 seconds), the number of gaming balls fired (12th embodiment) The game machine is characterized in that the number (three in the twelfth embodiment) of game balls entering the ball entry portion occupied in 3) is constant.

  According to the feature αC4, in the case where the gaming balls are continuously fired at constant intervals and with a certain firing strength, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entering part in the number of the launched gaming balls is Since it is configured to be constant, it is possible to make the number of gaming balls actually paid out before the end of the second gaming state coincide with the expected number of payouts.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature S group to feature Z group and the above-mentioned feature αA group to feature αC group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure, control, and presentation for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming.

<Feature αD group>
The feature αD group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing predetermined processing;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
Information storage means (register 304, memory 309 for storing operation results) which stores the detection information which is stored inside the casing of the gaming machine main body and which is information obtained based on the detection by the detection means in a non-volatile manner )When,
Transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αD1, the process execution means includes the information storage means for non-volatilely storing the detection information which is the information acquired based on the detection by the detection means. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the executed game, the detection information is unique to the gaming machine as well as different for each gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information in which the characteristics of the gaming machine are reflected. According to the feature αD1, the detection information which is the information in which the characteristic of the gaming machine is reflected is stored in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored inside the case of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. In the state where the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machines are distributed one after another, they may be left unconnected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machines may hold information on the characteristics of the gaming machines. Can not. The gaming machine of feature αD1 stores the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored inside the casing of the gaming machine main body. Even in the unconnected state, detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, the gaming machine of the feature αD1 always associates the gaming machine with the detection information on a one-to-one basis, regardless of the state (the state installed in the gaming hall or the distribution state) of the gaming machine. The characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αD2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αD1,
It has control means (main side CPU 62x) to control the execution of the game,
A game machine characterized in that the processing execution means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

  According to the feature αD2, the processing execution means operates with the same power source as the control means. For example, when the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, the information on the characteristics of the gaming machine is If it is a situation where power is supplied to the gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer or a malfunction occurs in the processing of the hall computer when acquired. , Detection information can be obtained. If the control means and the processing execution means are operated by different power supplies, detection information is acquired even if a game is being executed by the gaming machine if there is a problem with the power supply of the processing execution means The problem that it can not do arises. On the other hand, according to the feature αD2, since the control means and the process execution means are operated by the same power source, detection information can be obtained whenever the game is executable. Therefore, the reliability of the detection information can be improved.

[Feature αD3]
It is a game machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
A game machine characterized in that the information storage means stores the detection information for each period until a predetermined number (500) of game balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h).

  According to the feature αD3, the detection information for each period until the predetermined number of gaming balls are detected by the predetermined detection means is stored, so that the time until the predetermined number of gaming balls are detected by each gaming machine varies. Even if there is a problem, it is possible to obtain detection information that does not affect the time variation. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which the gaming balls are fired, it is possible to obtain highly accurate detection information that is not easily affected.

[Feature αD4]
It is a game machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
A game machine characterized in that the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period (every hour) set in advance.

  According to the feature αD4, the information storage means stores detection information for each of the predetermined periods set in advance, so that statistical processing using the concept of time can be performed using the detection information.

[Feature αD5]
It is a game machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
A game machine characterized in that the information storage means stores the detection information for each period from when supply of power to the game machine is started to when the power is shut off.

  According to the feature αD5, the information storage means stores detection information for each period from the start of the supply of power to the game machine to the generation of the shutoff of the power source. When installed, it is possible to acquire detection information for each business day of the gaming hall.

[Feature αD6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD5, wherein
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The process execution means is
Prize ball number information for acquiring prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information on the number of game balls (the number of prize balls) paid out from the payout means as the prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means Acquisition means,
Operation execution means (CPU 308) for executing a predetermined operation based on the detection information and the winning ball number information;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the information storage means stores operation result information which is information related to an operation result (such as a prize ratio) by the operation execution means.

  According to the feature αD6, the process execution unit stores the operation result information. Since the calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and the winning ball number information, the information on the number of winning balls paid out by the gaming machine is reflected. Therefore, according to the feature αD6, it is possible to acquire the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the paid out prize balls. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the award balls paid out.

<Feature αE group>
The feature αE group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game;
Operation execution means (CPU 308) for executing arithmetic processing and acquiring third information based on the first information acquired based on the executed game and the second information set in advance;
Information storage means (operation result storage memory 309) for storing the third information in a nonvolatile manner;
A gaming machine comprising
A game machine characterized in that the operation execution means and the information storage means operate with the same power source as the control means.

  According to the feature αE1, the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, and the third information is information acquired based on the first information. Thus, the third information includes information on the played game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including the information on the executed game, the information on the game executed in the past using the third information stored in the information storage means It is possible to get Therefore, by using the third information, it becomes possible to manage the game-related characteristics of the gaming machine. And since the operation execution means and the information storage means operate with the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired if the gaming machine is supplied with power. If the calculation execution means and the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power supplies, the game is executed by the gaming machine if there is a problem with the power supply of the calculation execution means and the information storage means. There is a problem that the third information can not be acquired despite that. On the other hand, according to the feature αE2, since the operation execution means, the information storage means, and the control means are operated by the same power source, the third information is always acquired if the game can be performed be able to. Thus, the reliability of the third information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of the inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αE2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αE1,
A game machine characterized by comprising transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine.

  According to the feature αE2, since the transmission means for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the gaming machine is provided, the third information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to manage the game-related characteristics of the used gaming machine.

[Feature αE3]
It is a game machine according to feature αE1 or feature αE2,
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The first information is information acquired based on detection by the detection unit,
The second information is information relating to the number of game balls to be paid out from the payout means (the number of prize balls) as a prize ball set for each of the plurality of detection means,
A game machine characterized in that the third information is information on the number of prize balls paid out by the game machine in the executed game.

  According to the feature αE3, the third information is information on the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, the third information stored in the information storage means can be used to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the award balls actually paid out.

<Feature αF group>
The feature αF group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
Control means (main side CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of the game;
Information storage means (register 304, operation result storage memory 309) for non-volatilely storing the first information acquired based on the executed game;
A gaming machine comprising
A game machine characterized in that the information storage means is stored inside a housing (a substrate box to which a sealing seal is attached) in which a trace of opening and closing remains.

  According to the feature αF1, the information storage unit is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, in the case of physical contact with the information storage means, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is altered through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the trace of the housing Become. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the first information can be prevented. Since the gaming machine is circulated from time to time, various external contacts are made in the process of being distributed, but since the information storage means is stored inside the case where the trace of opening and closing remains, the gaming machine It is possible to suppress unauthorized alteration of the first information by someone even in a situation in which the Further, since the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics regarding the game of the gaming machine using the first information. Therefore, according to the feature αF1, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing the unauthorized alteration of the first information reflecting the game-related characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αF2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αF1,
A game machine characterized in that the information storage means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

  According to the feature αF2, the information storage means is operated by the same power source as the control means, so that the first information can be acquired if the gaming machine is supplied with power. If the information storage means and the control means are operated by different power supplies, and there is a problem with the power supply of the information storage means, the first information despite the fact that the game is being executed by the gaming machine There is a problem that can not be acquired. On the other hand, according to the feature αF2, since the information storage unit and the control unit are operated by the same power source, the first information can be acquired whenever the game is executable. Thus, the reliability of the first information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of the inspection of the gaming machine can be improved, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αF3]
A game machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
A game machine characterized by comprising transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine.

  According to the feature αF3, since the transmission means for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to the predetermined device connected to the gaming machine is provided, the first information is transmitted using the predetermined device. It becomes possible to control and inspect the characteristics of the used gaming machine with respect to the game.

<Feature αG group>
The feature αG group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on detection of the game ball by the detection means;
First prize ball number information storage for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information on the number (the number of prize balls) of game balls to be paid out as the prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means Means (main ROM 63),
Processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing predetermined processing;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
Prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the number-of-winning-ball-number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means;
A second prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquiring means;
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of gaming balls detected by the detection means;
The game is performed by executing an operation based on the information on the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means. Operation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as character ratio) which is information related to the history of
Game history information storage means (operation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the operation execution means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  It is general that the winning balls number information set in the gaming machine is set to a different value for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature αG1, since the processing execution means acquires the winning ball number information stored in the first winning ball number storage means, different winning ball number information is set for each type (model) of the gaming machine. Even in this case, the processing execution means can calculate the correct game history information by using the winning balls number information set for each type of gaming machine.

  If the gaming machine is tampered with, the calculated gaming history information may be an unnatural value different from the assumed value. Therefore, the examiner of the gaming machine can appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with or not by checking the gaming history information. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αG2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αG1,
It has a prize ball number information transmitting means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storing means to the processing execution means.
A game machine characterized in that the acquisition means acquires the winning balls number information by receiving the signal transmitted from the winning balls number information transmitting means.

  According to the feature αG2, since the signal including the winning number information stored in the first winning number information storing means is transmitted to the processing executing means, the processing executing means accesses the first winning number storing means Even if the processing execution unit can not grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage unit, the processing execution unit It is possible to obtain winning number information stored in the first winning number storing means.

[Feature αG3]
It is a game machine according to feature αG1 or feature αG2,
The game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine is characterized. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αG3, since the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, the examiner of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Features αG4]
A game machine according to any one of features αG1 to αG3 comprising
A game machine characterized by comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature αG4, since the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine does not use a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information, and the gaming history of the gaming machine Information can be confirmed.

[Feature αG5]
A gaming machine according to any one of the features αG1 to αG4,
The launching means is configured such that launching of the gaming ball can not be executed until the storage of the winning sphere number information in the second winning sphere number information storage means is completed in the processing execution means. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αG5, the game ball is not fired until the storage of the winning ball number information in the second winning ball number information storage means is completed, so the gaming ball leaks from the calculation object of the game history information by the operation execution means Can be suppressed.

<Feature αH group>
The feature αH group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing predetermined processing;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number information) storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information on the number (number of prize balls) of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball set in each of the plurality of detection means Memory 306 for storing ball number data
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of gaming balls detected by the detection means;
Every time the number of game balls (discharge passage passing number N _OUT ) detected by the predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) stored in the number information storage means reaches a prescribed value (500), Information on the history of the game by performing an operation based on the information on the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the award ball number information storage means Operation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating the game history information (such as character ratio) which is
Game history information storage means (operation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the operation execution means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature α H 1, since the game history information is calculated each time the number of gaming balls detected by the predetermined detection means reaches the prescribed value, the number of gaming balls detected by each gaming machine reaches the prescribed value Even if there is a variation in time, game history information that does not affect the variation in time can be calculated. That is, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which the game ball is detected, it is possible to calculate highly accurate game history information that is not easily affected. As a result, the examiner of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information with high accuracy, and can appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αH2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αH1,
The first operation execution condition storage unit (main ROM 63) stores information on the predetermined detection unit (discharge passage detection sensor 44h) and the prescribed value (500 pieces) as the operation execution condition which is the condition for executing the operation. Equipped with
The process execution means is
Operation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means;
Second operation execution condition storage means (operation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired operation execution conditions;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the operation execution unit executes the operation when the operation execution condition stored in the second operation execution condition storage unit is satisfied.

  When the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, since the characteristics of the game are also different, the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, as the operation execution conditions, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature αH2, the processing execution means acquires the calculation execution condition stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, so the calculation execution condition set for each type (model) of gaming machine is satisfied. In some cases, the operation can be performed.

[Feature αH3]
A gaming machine according to the feature αH1 or the feature αH2,
The process execution means is
A game machine characterized by comprising an erasing means for erasing information on the number of gaming balls stored in the number information storage means after the arithmetic execution means executes the arithmetic.

  According to the feature αH3, after the operation execution means executes the operation, the information regarding the number of gaming balls stored in the number information storage means is erased, so that the information regarding the number of gaming balls is stored again in the number information storage means It is possible to Therefore, the storage capacity required for the number information storage means can be reduced.

[Feature αH4]
It is a game machine according to any one of features αH1 to αH3.
The game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine is characterized. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αH4, since the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, the examiner of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature αH5]
A game machine according to any one of the features αH1 to αH4, wherein
A game machine characterized by comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature αH5, since the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine does not use a dedicated device for confirming the gaming history information, and the gaming history of the gaming machine Information can be confirmed.

<Feature αI group>
The feature αI group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αI1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing predetermined processing;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number information) storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information on the number (number of prize balls) of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball set in each of the plurality of detection means Memory 306 for storing ball number data
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of gaming balls detected by the detection means;
Each time a predetermined time (one hour) elapses, based on the information on the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the award ball number information storage means Operation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as an item ratio) which is information related to a game history by executing an operation
Game history information storage means (operation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the operation execution means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αI1, since the game history information is calculated each time a predetermined time elapses, the examiner of the gaming machine can check the game history information calculated by the statistical process using the concept of time, It becomes possible to appropriately determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αI2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αI1,
A first operation execution condition storage unit (main ROM 63) for storing information on a time interval for executing the operation as the operation execution condition which is a condition for executing the operation;
The process execution means is
Operation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the operation execution condition stored in the operation execution condition storage means;
Second operation execution condition storage means (operation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the acquired operation execution conditions;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the operation execution unit executes the operation when the operation execution condition stored in the second operation execution condition storage unit is satisfied.

  When the type (model) of the gaming machine is different, since the characteristics of the game are also different, the optimum conditions for executing the calculation for calculating the game history information are also different. For this reason, as the operation execution conditions, different conditions are stored for each type (model) of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature αI2, since the process execution means acquires the operation execution conditions stored in the first operation execution condition storage means, the operation execution conditions set for each type (model) of gaming machine are satisfied. In some cases, the operation can be performed.

[Feature αI3]
It is a game machine according to feature αI1 or feature αI2,
Measuring means for measuring an elapsed time after the calculation is performed;
Determining means for determining whether a player is playing a game;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the measurement means suspends measurement of the elapsed time during a period in which it is determined by the determination means that a game is not being performed.

  According to the feature αI3, since the measurement of the elapsed time after the calculation is executed is interrupted during the period when it is determined that the game is not performed, the game is performed only for the period during which the game is actually performed. Historical information can be calculated.

[Feature αI4]
It is a game machine according to any one of features αI1 to α1.
The game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine is characterized. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αI4, since the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, the examiner of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature αI5]
A game machine according to any one of features αI1 to α14, wherein
A game machine characterized by comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature αI5, since the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine does not use a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information, and the gaming history of the gaming machine Information can be confirmed.

<Feature αJ group>
The feature αJ group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αJ1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing predetermined processing;
Monitoring means (power failure monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of power interruption;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number information) storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information on the number (number of prize balls) of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball set in each of the plurality of detection means Memory 306 for storing ball number data
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of gaming balls detected by the detection means;
Information on the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the award ball number information storage means when the monitoring means detects the occurrence of the interruption of the power supply Operation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as an item ratio) which is information related to a game history by executing an operation based on
Game history information storage means (operation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the operation execution means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αJ1, since the game history information is calculated when the occurrence of the shutoff of the power is detected, the game history information is detected during the period from the start of the supply of the power to the gaming machine to the occurrence of the shutoff The game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls. That is, since the game history information is calculated every period from the start to the end of the operation of the game hall, the game history information is calculated every business day of the game hall. Therefore, since the examiner of the gaming machine can easily grasp whether or not the characteristic of the gaming history information has changed over the business day of the gaming hall, the gaming machine has not been tampered with etc. It becomes possible to determine whether As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αJ2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αJ1,
A game machine characterized by comprising supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the operation execution means even after the power is shut off.

  According to the feature αJ2, since the supply means for supplying the power to the operation execution means even after the power is shut off is provided, the calculation of the game history information by the operation execution means and the game history information storage means of the game history information Can be reliably completed.

[Feature αJ3]
It is a game machine according to feature αJ1 or feature αJ2,
The game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine is characterized. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αJ3, since the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, the examiner of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Features αJ4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αJ1 to αJ3.
A game machine characterized by comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature αJ4, since the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine does not use a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information, and the gaming history of the gaming machine Information can be confirmed.

<Feature αK group>
The feature αK group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αK1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Notification means for giving notification in a predetermined case;
Processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing predetermined processing;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number information) storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information on the number (number of prize balls) of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball set in each of the plurality of detection means Memory 306 for storing ball number data
Number information storage means (register 304) for storing information on the number of gaming balls detected by the detection means;
Game history information which is information related to a game history based on the information on the number of the game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the award ball number information storage means Calculating means (CPU 308) for calculating (characteristic ratio etc.);
Game history information storage means (operation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the notification means gives a notification when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature αK1, since the notification is made when the gaming history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose gaming history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. it can. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αK2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αK1,
The notification means is configured to notify when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is not included in a predetermined range. Machine.

  According to the feature αK2, since the notification is performed when the specific value included in the gaming history information is not included in the predetermined range, the tester of the gaming machine can determine the specific value included in the gaming history information in a predetermined range It is easy to find gaming machines that are no longer included in. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αK3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αK2,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means determines a mode of notification (the color of the LED lamp) in accordance with the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature αK3, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation from the predetermined range of the specific value, the tester of the gaming machine can determine which specific value is included in the gaming history information from the predetermined range It can be easily grasped if there is a difference.

[Features αK4]
A game machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK3 comprising
A game machine characterized in that the notification means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the notification.

  According to the feature αK4, since the display means for performing predetermined display as notification is provided, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature αK5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK4,
The game history information transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the game machine is characterized. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature αK5, since the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device can display the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, the examiner of the gaming machine can confirm the gaming history information displayed on the predetermined device.

[Feature αK6]
A game machine according to any one of features αK1 to αK5, wherein
A game machine characterized by comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information stored in the game history information storage means.

  According to the feature αK6, since the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the examiner of the gaming machine does not use a dedicated device for confirming the gaming history information, and the gaming history of the gaming machine Information can be confirmed.

<Feature αL group>
The feature α L group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αL1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing predetermined processing;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
Prize ball number information storage means (prize ball number information) storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data), which is information on the number (number of prize balls) of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball set in each of the plurality of detection means Memory 306 for storing ball number data
Entry information storage means (memory for entry information storage 309b) which sequentially stores entry information which is information indicating that the detection means has detected the game ball every time the detection means detects the game ball. When,
The predetermined ball (inspecting machine 320) connected to the gaming machine, the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means, and the prize balls stored in the prize ball number information storage means Transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting number information and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αL1, since the ball entry information and the number-of-balls information are transmitted to the predetermined device, the predetermined device is the information on the game history based on the ball-entry information and the number-of-balls information The game history information can be calculated in an arbitrary range. Therefore, the examiner of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated in an arbitrary range by a predetermined device, and it is appropriately determined whether the gaming machine is tampered with or not. It is possible to As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αL2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αL1,
Date and time information acquiring means (RTC 96) for acquiring date and time information which is information on date and time;
A game machine characterized in that, when storing the ball entry information, the ball entry information storage means adds the date and time information corresponding to the date and time when the game ball is detected by the detection means.

  According to the feature αL2, a predetermined device that has received the ball entry information to which the date and time information is added can calculate the game history information by specifying the date and time range. Therefore, the examiner of the gaming machine can conduct a detailed examination based on the gaming history information specifying the range of date and time. In addition, if the predetermined device displays the ball entry information to which the date and time information is added, the examiner of the gaming machine can grasp the date and time when the game ball is detected by each detection means. .

[Feature αL3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αL1 or the feature αL2,
A game machine characterized by comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the ball entry information stored in the ball entry information storage means.

  According to the feature αL3, since the ball entry information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the examiner of the game machine does not use a dedicated device for confirming the ball entry information, and enters the ball for the gaming machine. Information can be confirmed.

<Feature α M group>
The feature αM group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature α M1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
A prize ball number information storage means (mainly the prize ball number information) which is information on the number (the number of prize balls) of the game balls to be paid out as the prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means Side ROM 63),
Game progress processing (big hit lottery processing, electronic combination open lottery processing, winning balls payout processing, symbol of the main display unit 45) which is processing for advancing the game based on detection of the game ball by the detection means The variable display process, the open / close process of the open / close door 36b, the electric accessory 34a, etc. are executed, and the detection information of the game ball detected by the detection means and the prize ball stored in the prize ball number information storage means Process execution means (main side CPU 62x) that executes a process of calculating gaming history information (such as a prize ratio etc.) that is information related to a gaming history by executing computation based on number information and
Game history information storage means (main RAM 64, flash memory 64x) which is stored in the case of the game machine main body and stores the game history information calculated by the process execution means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αM1, game history information storage means for storing game history information is provided. Since the game history information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the game, the game history information is unique to the gaming machine as well as different for each gaming machine. That is, the gaming history information is information in which the characteristics of the gaming machine are reflected. According to the feature αM1, gaming history information, which is information in which the characteristics of the gaming machine are reflected, is stored in the gaming history information storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the gaming machine main body itself. In the state where the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machines are distributed one after another, they may be left unconnected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machines may obtain information about the characteristics of the gaming machines. Can not. The gaming machine is connected to the hall computer, since the gaming machine of feature αM1 stores gaming history information which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine in the gaming history information storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body. Even when not in the state, the gaming history information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature αM1, the gaming machine and the gaming history information can be linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the feature αM1, since a single processing execution means executes the game progression process and the process of calculating the game history information, it is necessary to provide another calculation chip or the like for executing the calculation process. Instead, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Feature α M2]
It is a game machine according to the feature αM1,
The process execution means is
A first mode (game mode) which is a mode in which the game progress processing can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 When the predetermined time is reached when 320 is connected, and when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer, a second mode (inspection mode) which is a mode to be executed,
Is feasible and
In the second mode, the gaming progress processing is not executed even when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area.

  According to the feature αM2, since it is possible to execute the second mode which does not execute the game progress processing even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is not preferable to execute in parallel with the game progress processing In the second mode, it is possible to execute processing, processing that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress processing, and the like. Further, according to the feature αM2, since the game progress processing is not executed in the second mode, when developing the program of the process to be executed in the second mode, the game progress processing is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to take measures, the development efficiency of the program of the process to be executed in the second mode can be greatly improved.

[Feature α M3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αM2,
The second mode is a mode in which the game history information is output.

  The game history information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress processing is executed. Therefore, temporarily adopting the configuration to execute the process of outputting the game history information in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress while the tester of the game machine is examining the characteristics of the game machine according to the game history information. Processing is executed and the content of the game history information changes as needed, which may make it difficult to conduct an inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature αM3, since the game history information is output in the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes the predetermined area, the game history information is output It is possible to suppress that the contents of the game history information changes while being played. As a result, the examiner of the gaming machine can carry out the examination smoothly.

[Feature α M4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM3 comprising
The process execution means is
A first mode (game mode) which is a mode in which the game progress processing can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 When the predetermined time is reached when 320 is connected, and when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer, a second mode (inspection mode) which is a mode to be executed,
Is feasible and
If the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress processing in the first mode (if the operation to press the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button When the operation to do is performed, and when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when the predetermined time comes, the timing at which the second condition is satisfied (the symbol variation display process ends) Transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when the game progress processing such as the completed timing has been completed to a predetermined processing stage, the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing in progress is completed) A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to:

  According to the feature αM4, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, transition from the first mode to the second mode is performed at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the second mode is compared with the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when transitioning to

  For example, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode at a timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied or not. When the first condition that a predetermined operation is performed is satisfied during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is executed in the second mode, the second of the symbol variation display is performed It shifts to the mode of, and control of the stop timing of the design and the fluctuation time of the design becomes difficult. On the other hand, according to the feature αM4, for example, the first condition that the predetermined operation is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is executed in the first mode is When it is satisfied, the second mode is to be transitioned at the timing when the second condition that the variation display processing of the symbol is not executed is satisfied, that is, the timing after the symbol in the variation display is stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the stop timing of the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

[Feature α M5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM4,
The process execution means is
A first mode (game mode) which is a mode in which the game progress processing can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 When the predetermined time is reached when 320 is connected, and when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer, a second mode (inspection mode) which is a mode to be executed,
Is feasible and
An operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode when the third condition is satisfied in the second mode (when 10 minutes have elapsed since the shift to the inspection mode) Even if the transition operation (operation of pressing the mode switching button, operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button) is not performed, the first mode is selected from the second mode. A game machine characterized by being configured to shift to a mode.

  According to the feature αM5, when the third condition is satisfied in the second mode, even if the transition operation for causing the second mode to shift to the first mode is not performed, Since the second mode is configured to shift to the first mode, it is possible to suppress not returning to the first mode without the execution of the shift operation. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the administrator of the gaming machine, the examiner or the like forgets to execute the transition operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a player can not play a game with the gaming machine.

[Feature α M6]
The gaming machine according to the feature αM5,
The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the third condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time (10 minutes have elapsed since the transition to the inspection mode).

  According to the feature αM6, when the predetermined time has elapsed from the predetermined time point in the second mode, the transition operation for causing the second mode to shift to the first mode is not performed. However, since the second mode is configured to shift to the first mode, it is possible to reliably suppress not returning to the first mode without the execution of the shift operation. For example, even if the administrator of the gaming machine, the examiner or the like forgets to execute the transition operation after the transition to the second mode, if the predetermined time elapses from the predetermined time, the first Since the mode is returned to the mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the gaming machine can not play a game on the gaming machine without returning to the first mode in which the gaming progress processing can be executed.

[Feature α M7]
A game machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM6, wherein
Game progress processing information storage means (main RAM 64) which is stored in the case of the gaming machine main body and stores information on the game progress processing;
The game is executed based on the execution of an erasing operation (an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button) which is an operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means. Erasing means for erasing information stored in the progressive process information storage means;
Equipped with
The process execution means is
A first mode (game mode) which is a mode in which the game progress processing can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 When the predetermined time is reached when 320 is connected, and when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer, a second mode (inspection mode) which is a mode to be executed,
Is feasible and
In the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode (the state in the inspection mode, the state in which the power is turned off as it is after the transition to the inspection mode), the erasing means is: A game machine characterized in that information stored in the game progress processing information storage unit is not erased even when the erase operation is executed.

  According to the feature αM7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage unit is executed Even in the case, the information stored in the game progress processing information storage unit is not deleted, so in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the transition to the first mode is made. Even in the case where the erasing operation is accidentally performed to shift the information, it is possible to suppress the information from being erased erroneously.

  For example, the erasing operation for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is an operation to press the power button while pressing the erasing button, and the first mode and the second mode In the configuration in which the operation to shift the mode between the operations is an operation to press the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is used to shift from the second mode to the first mode. Although the intention is to press the power button while pressing the key, there is a possibility that the power button may be pressed while pressing the erasing button by mistake. However, according to the feature αM7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erasure button by mistake is performed Even in the case where the information has been lost, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

  More specifically, for example, when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress processing executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress processing Is adopted to store information for resuming after the return to the second mode in the game progress processing information storage means, in order to return the mode from the second mode to the first mode If you intend to press the power button while pressing it, but you accidentally press the power button while pressing the delete button, the information for resuming the game progress processing is erased, and the second After returning to the mode, it is not possible to resume the game progress processing, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, according to the feature αM7, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the erasure button is pressed by mistake in an attempt to shift to the first mode Even if the power button has been pressed while doing this, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means from being erased accidentally, giving the player a disadvantage. Can be suppressed.

[Feature α M8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM7, wherein
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the game history information.

  According to the feature αM8, since the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine does not use a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information, and the gaming history of the gaming machine Information can be confirmed.

[Feature α M9]
A game machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM8, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the game history information storage means is constituted by a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) capable of holding a memory even when the supply of power is cut off.

  According to the feature αM9, since the game history information is held even if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the power is not supplied to the gaming machine). Even in this case, the gaming machine and the gaming history information can be always linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature α M10]
A game machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM9, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the game history information storage means is stored inside a case (a substrate box to which a seal seal is attached) in which a trace of opening and closing remains.

  According to the feature αM10, the game history information storage means is stored inside the case where the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when the game history information storage means is physically contacted, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means is altered through physical contact with the gaming history information storage means, grasping the alteration from the trace of the housing Becomes possible. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the game history information can be prevented. Since the gaming machines are circulated from time to time, various external contacts are made in the process of being distributed, but the game history information storage means is stored inside the case where the trace of opening and closing remains. Even in a situation where gaming machines are circulated a lot, it is possible to suppress unauthorized alteration of gaming history information by someone. Further, since the game history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics regarding the game of the gaming machine using the game history information. Therefore, according to the feature αM 10, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the gaming. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature α M11]
A game machine according to any one of features αM1 to αM10,
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for giving notification when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature αM11, since the notification is made when the gaming history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the tester of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose gaming history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. it can. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature α M12]
The gaming machine according to the feature αM11,
The notification means is configured to notify when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the game history information stored in the game history information storage means is not included in a predetermined range. Machine.

  According to the feature αM12, since the notification is made when the specific value included in the game history information is not included in the predetermined range, the examiner of the gaming machine has the specific value included in the game history information in a predetermined range It is easy to find gaming machines that are no longer included in. Then, by checking the game history information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature α M13]
The gaming machine according to the feature αM12,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means determines a mode of notification (the color of the LED lamp) in accordance with the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature αM13, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation from the predetermined range of the specific value, so that the tester of the gaming machine can determine which specific value is included in the game history information from the predetermined range It can be easily grasped if there is a difference.

[Feature α M14]
A game machine according to any one of features αM11 to αM13, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the notification means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the notification.

  According to the feature αM14, since the display means for performing predetermined display as notification is provided, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature αN group>
The feature αN group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αN1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Game progress processing (big hit lottery processing, electronic combination open lottery processing, winning balls payout processing, symbol of the main display unit 45) which is processing for advancing the game based on detection of the game ball by the detection means Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) for executing variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
A first mode (game mode) which is a mode in which the game progress processing can be executed;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 320 is used as the inspection device 320 And a second mode (inspection mode) which is a mode to be executed when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer when a predetermined time comes.
Is feasible and
In the second mode, the gaming progress processing is not executed even when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area.

  According to the feature αN1, since it is possible to execute the second mode which does not execute the game progress processing even when the game ball passes through the predetermined area, it is not preferable to execute in parallel with the game progress processing In the second mode, it is possible to execute processing, processing that is likely to cause problems when executed in parallel with the game progress processing, and the like. Further, according to the feature αN1, since the game proceeding process is not executed in the second mode, when developing the program of the process to be executed in the second mode, the game proceeding process is executed in parallel. Since it is not necessary to take measures, the development efficiency of the program of the process to be executed in the second mode can be greatly improved.

[Feature αN2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αN1,
Detection information which is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and which is information based on detection of the game ball by the detection means (game history information including ball entry information, ball entry number information, role ratio etc. Storage unit 309 for storing the operation results, a memory 309a for storing the number of balls, a memory 309b for storing the ball information, a main RAM 64, and a flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

  According to the feature αN2, the detection information can be stored, and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information differs from one gaming machine to another and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information in which the characteristics of the gaming machine are reflected. According to the feature αN2, the detection information, which is the information in which the characteristic of the gaming machine is reflected, is stored in the storage means stored in the case of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. In the state where the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machines are distributed one after another, they may be left unconnected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machines may obtain information about the characteristics of the gaming machines. Can not. The gaming machine of feature αN2 stores detection information which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer Even if it is present, detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature αN2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  The detection information is information whose content changes when the game ball is detected and the game progress processing is executed. Therefore, temporarily adopting the configuration to execute the process of outputting the detection information in parallel with the game progress process, the game progress process is performed while the examiner of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the game machine according to the detection information. As it is executed, the content of the detection information changes as needed, which may make it difficult to conduct an inspection smoothly. On the other hand, according to the feature αN2, since the detection information is output in the second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even when the gaming ball passes the predetermined area, the detection information is output. It can suppress that the content of the said detection information changes in the meantime. As a result, the examiner of the gaming machine can carry out the examination smoothly.

[Feature αN3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αN2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information outputted in the second mode.

  According to the feature αN3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature αN4]
A game machine according to feature αN2 or feature αN3;
The memory means is a non-volatile memory (memory for calculation result storage 309, number-of-balls storage memory 309a, number-of-balls information storage 309b, flash) capable of holding the memory even if the supply of power is cut off. A game machine characterized by comprising a memory 64x).

  According to the feature αN4, the detection information is held even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, so the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the power is not supplied to the gaming machine). Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can be always linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature αN5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αN2 to αN4, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a case (a substrate box to which a sealing seal is attached) in which a trace of opening and closing remains.

  According to the feature αN5, the storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when the storage means is in physical contact, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the trace of the housing. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Since the gaming machine is circulated from time to time, various external contacts are made in the process of being circulated, but the storage means is stored inside the case where the trace of opening and closing remains, so the gaming machine Even in a situation where it circulates, it is possible to suppress unauthorized alteration of detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics regarding the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature αN5, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the game-related characteristic of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αN6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αN2 to αN5, wherein
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for giving notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature αN6, since the notification is performed when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αN7]
The gaming machine according to the feature αN6,
A game machine characterized in that the notification means gives notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is not included in a predetermined range.

  According to the feature αN7, since the notification is performed when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the tester of the gaming machine includes the specific value included in the detection information in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find gaming machines that are no longer available. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αN8]
The gaming machine according to the feature αN7,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means determines a mode of notification (the color of the LED lamp) in accordance with the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature αN8, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation from the predetermined range of the specific value, the examiner of the gaming machine determines how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range It can be easily grasped if there is a gap.

[Feature αN9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αN6 to αN8, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the notification means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the notification.

  According to the feature αN9, since the display means for performing predetermined display as notification is provided, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature αO group>
The feature αO group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αO1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Game progress processing (big hit lottery processing, electronic combination open lottery processing, winning balls payout processing, symbol of the main display unit 45) which is processing for advancing the game based on detection of the game ball by the detection means Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) for executing variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
A first mode (game mode) which is a mode in which the game progress processing can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 When the predetermined time is reached when 320 is connected, and when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer, a second mode (inspection mode) which is a mode to be executed,
Is feasible and
If the first condition is satisfied during execution of the game progress processing in the first mode (if the operation to press the mode switching button is performed, the power button is pressed while pressing the mode switching button When the operation to do is performed, and when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when the predetermined time comes, the timing at which the second condition is satisfied (the symbol variation display process ends) Transition from the first mode to the second mode at the timing when the game progress processing such as the completed timing has been completed to a predetermined processing stage, the timing when all the processing of each game progress processing in progress is completed) A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to:

  According to the feature αO1, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, transition from the first mode to the second mode is performed at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the second condition is satisfied, the second mode is compared with the configuration in which the first mode is shifted to the second mode at the timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems when transitioning to

  For example, in a case where a configuration is adopted in which the mode is shifted from the first mode to the second mode at a timing immediately after the first condition is satisfied regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied or not. When the first condition that a predetermined operation is performed is satisfied during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is executed in the second mode, the second of the symbol variation display is performed It shifts to the mode of, and control of the stop timing of the design and the fluctuation time of the design becomes difficult. On the other hand, according to the feature αO1, for example, the first condition that the predetermined operation is performed during the period in which the symbol variation display processing as the game progress processing is being executed in the first mode is When it is satisfied, the second mode is to be transitioned at the timing when the second condition that the variation display processing of the symbol is not executed is satisfied, that is, the timing after the symbol in the variation display is stopped. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing problems such as difficulty in controlling the stop timing of the symbol and the fluctuation time of the symbol.

[Feature αO2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αO1,
Detection information which is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and which is information based on detection of the game ball by the detection means (game history information including ball entry information, ball entry number information, role ratio etc. Storage unit 309 for storing the operation results, a memory 309a for storing the number of balls, a memory 309b for storing the ball information, a main RAM 64, and a flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

  According to the feature αO2, it is possible to store the detection information and to output the detection information in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information differs from one gaming machine to another and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information in which the characteristics of the gaming machine are reflected. According to the feature αO2, the detection information, which is the information in which the characteristic of the gaming machine is reflected, is stored in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. In the state where the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machines are distributed one after another, they may be left unconnected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machines may obtain information about the characteristics of the gaming machines. Can not. Since the gaming machine of the feature αO2 stores the detection information which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body, the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer Even if it is present, detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature αO2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αO3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αO2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information outputted in the second mode.

  According to the feature αO3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Features αO4]
It is a game machine according to the feature αO2 or the feature αO3.
The memory means is a non-volatile memory (memory for calculation result storage 309, number-of-balls storage memory 309a, number-of-balls information storage 309b, flash) capable of holding the memory even if the supply of power is cut off. A game machine characterized by comprising a memory 64x).

  According to the feature αO4, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is held, so that the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state in which the power is not supplied to the gaming machine). Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can be always linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature αO5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αO2 to α0.
A game machine characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a case (a substrate box to which a sealing seal is attached) in which a trace of opening and closing remains.

  According to the feature αO5, the storage means is stored inside the case where the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when the storage means is in physical contact, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the trace of the housing. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Since the gaming machine is circulated from time to time, various external contacts are made in the process of being circulated, but the storage means is stored inside the case where the trace of opening and closing remains, so the gaming machine Even in a situation where it circulates, it is possible to suppress unauthorized alteration of detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics regarding the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature αO5, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the game. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αO6]
It is a game machine according to any one of features αO2 to features αO5,
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for giving notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature αO6, when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the tester of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αO7]
The gaming machine according to the feature αO6,
A game machine characterized in that the notification means gives notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is not included in a predetermined range.

  According to the feature αO7, since the notification is performed when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the tester of the gaming machine includes the specific value included in the detection information in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find gaming machines that are no longer available. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αO8]
The gaming machine according to the feature αO7,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means determines a mode of notification (the color of the LED lamp) in accordance with the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature αO8, the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation from the predetermined range of the specific value, so that the examiner of the gaming machine determines how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range It can be easily grasped if there is a gap.

[Features αO9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αO6 to αO8, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the notification means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the notification.

  According to the feature αO9, since the display means for performing predetermined display as notification is provided, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature αP group>
The feature αP group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αP1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Game progress processing (big hit lottery processing, electronic combination open lottery processing, winning balls payout processing, symbol of the main display unit 45) which is processing for advancing the game based on detection of the game ball by the detection means Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) for executing variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
A first mode (game mode) which is a mode in which the game progress processing can be executed;
When the first condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 65 When the predetermined time is reached when 320 is connected, and when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer, a second mode (inspection mode) which is a mode to be executed,
Is feasible and
When the second condition is satisfied in the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode), the predetermined mode for causing the second mode to shift to the first mode From the second mode to the first mode, even if the operation (operation of pressing the mode switching button, operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button) is not performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to shift.

  According to the feature αP1, when the second condition is satisfied in the second mode, even if a predetermined operation for shifting from the second mode to the first mode is not performed Since the second mode is configured to shift to the first mode, it is possible to suppress not returning to the first mode without the execution of a predetermined operation. For example, after the transition to the second mode, the administrator of the gaming machine, the examiner or the like forgets to execute the predetermined operation, and the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where a player can not play a game with the gaming machine.

[Feature αP2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αP1,
The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the second condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined time (10 minutes have elapsed since the transition to the inspection mode).

  According to the feature αP2, when the predetermined time has elapsed from the predetermined time point in the second mode, the predetermined operation for causing the second mode to shift to the first mode is not performed. Even if there is, since the second mode is configured to shift to the first mode, it is possible to reliably suppress not returning to the first mode without execution of a predetermined operation. For example, even if the administrator of the gaming machine, the examiner, etc. forget to execute the predetermined operation after the transition to the second mode, if the predetermined time elapses from the predetermined time, the first Since the game machine returns to the mode of 1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game machine can not play a game on the game machine without the game machine returning to the first mode in which the game progress processing can be executed.

[Feature αP3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αP1 or the feature αP2,
Detection information which is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and which is information based on detection of the game ball by the detection means (game history information including ball entry information, ball entry number information, role ratio etc. Storage unit 309 for storing the operation results, a memory 309a for storing the number of balls, a memory 309b for storing the ball information, a main RAM 64, and a flash memory 64x).
The second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

  According to the feature αP3, the detection information can be stored and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information differs from one gaming machine to another and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information in which the characteristics of the gaming machine are reflected. According to the feature αP3, the detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, is stored in the storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. In the state where the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machines are distributed one after another, they may be left unconnected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machines may obtain information about the characteristics of the gaming machines. Can not. The gaming machine of feature αP3 stores detection information which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine in the storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer Even if it is present, detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature αP3, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the feature αP3, after the tester of the gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine according to the detection information outputted in the second mode, the execution of the predetermined operation is forgotten, and the gaming machine plays the game It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player can not play a game on the gaming machine without returning to the first mode in which the progress processing can be executed.

[Feature αP4]
The gaming machine according to the feature αP3,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information outputted in the second mode.

  According to the feature αP4, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Feature αP5]
It is a game machine according to feature αP3 or feature αP4,
The memory means is a non-volatile memory (memory for calculation result storage 309, number-of-balls storage memory 309a, number-of-balls information storage 309b, flash) capable of holding the memory even if the supply of power is cut off. A game machine characterized by comprising a memory 64x).

  According to the feature αP5, even if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is held, so that the gaming machine is placed in any state (for example, a distribution state where the power is not supplied to the gaming machine). Also, the gaming machine and the detection information can be always linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature αP6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αP3 to αP5, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the storage means is stored inside a case (a substrate box to which a sealing seal is attached) in which a trace of opening and closing remains.

  According to the feature αP6, the storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when the storage means is in physical contact, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the trace of the housing. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Since the gaming machine is circulated from time to time, various external contacts are made in the process of being circulated, but the storage means is stored inside the case where the trace of opening and closing remains, so the gaming machine Even in a situation where it circulates, it is possible to suppress unauthorized alteration of detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics regarding the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature αP6, the gaming machine can be appropriately managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the game. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αP7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αP3 to αP6, wherein
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for giving notification when the detection information stored in the storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature αP7, since the notification is performed when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily find the gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αP8]
The gaming machine according to the feature αP7,
A game machine characterized in that the notification means gives notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the storage means is not included in a predetermined range.

  According to the feature αP8, since the notification is performed when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the tester of the gaming machine includes the specific value included in the detection information in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find gaming machines that are no longer available. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αP9]
The gaming machine according to the feature αP8,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means determines a mode of notification (the color of the LED lamp) in accordance with the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature αP9, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation from the predetermined range of the specific value, the examiner of the gaming machine determines how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range It can be easily grasped if there is a gap.

[Feature αP10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αP7 to αP9, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the notification means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the notification.

  According to the feature αP10, since the display means for performing predetermined display as notification is provided, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Feature αQ group>
The feature αQ group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature αQ1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entering detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls having passed through a predetermined area;
Game progress processing (big hit lottery processing, electronic combination open lottery processing, winning balls payout processing, symbol of the main display unit 45) which is processing for advancing the game based on detection of the game ball by the detection means Game progress processing execution means (main side CPU 62x) for executing variable display processing, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric accessory 34a
Storage means (main RAM 64) which is stored in the case of the gaming machine main body and stores information on the game progress processing;
An erasing unit that erases the information stored in the storage unit based on execution of a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the RAM clear button);
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means is
A first mode (game mode) which is a mode in which the game progress processing can be executed;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, the operation of pressing the power supply button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, the inspection terminal 320 is used as the inspection device 320 And a second mode (inspection mode) which is a mode to be executed when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer when a predetermined time comes.
Is feasible and
In the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode (the state in the inspection mode, the state in which the power is turned off as it is after the transition to the inspection mode), the erasing means is: A game machine characterized in that information stored in the storage means is not erased even when the predetermined operation is performed.

  According to the feature αQ1, in a state after transition to the second mode and before transition to the first mode, the predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage unit is performed. Even if there is, since the information stored in the storage means is not erased, it is erroneously designated to try to shift to the first mode in a state after shifting to the second mode and before shifting to the first mode Even when the operation of is performed, it is possible to suppress that the information is erased accidentally.

  For example, the predetermined operation for erasing the information stored in the storage means is an operation to press the power button while pressing the erasing button, and between the first mode and the second mode In the configuration in which the operation to shift the mode is the operation to press the power button while pressing the transition button, the transition button is pressed to shift from the second mode to the first mode. Although the intention is to press the power button, there is a possibility that the power button may be pressed while the button for erasing is mistakenly pressed. However, according to the feature αQ1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erase button by mistake is performed Even in the case where the information has been lost, it is possible to prevent the information from being erased by mistake.

  More specifically, for example, when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, the game progress processing executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped, and the stopped game progress processing In the case of adopting a configuration in which the storage means stores information for resuming after returning to the second mode, the power supply is pressed while pressing the transition button in an attempt to restore the second mode to the first mode. If the user intends to press the button but presses the power button while pressing the delete button by mistake, the information for resuming the game progress processing is erased, and the second mode is started. After the return, the game progress processing can not be resumed, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. On the other hand, according to the feature αQ1, in the state after the transition to the second mode and before the transition to the first mode, the erasure button is pressed by mistake in an attempt to shift to the first mode Even if the power button is pressed while doing this, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the storage means from being erased by mistake, so that the player will be disadvantaged. It can be suppressed.

[Feature αQ2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αQ1,
Detection information which is stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body and which is information based on detection of the game ball by the detection means (game history information including ball entry information, ball entry number information, role ratio etc. Detection information storage means for storing
The second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information (entering information, entering number information, game history information including an attribute ratio, and the like).

  According to the feature αQ2, the detection information can be stored, and the detection information can be output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information having a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information differs from one gaming machine to another and is information unique to the gaming machine. That is, the detection information is information in which the characteristics of the gaming machine are reflected. According to the feature αQ2, the detection information which is the information in which the characteristic of the gaming machine is reflected is stored in the detection information storage means stored in the case of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. In the state where the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since the gaming machines are distributed one after another, they may be left unconnected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional gaming machines may obtain information about the characteristics of the gaming machines. Can not. The gaming machine is connected to the hall computer since the gaming machine of feature αQ2 stores detection information which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine in the detection information sensing information storage means stored in the casing of the gaming machine main body. Even in the absence state, detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body. That is, according to the feature αQ2, the gaming machine and the detection information can be linked in a one-to-one manner, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature αQ3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αQ2,
A gaming machine comprising display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information outputted in the second mode.

  According to the feature αQ3, since the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, the tester of the gaming machine confirms the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for confirming the detection information. can do.

[Features αQ4]
It is a game machine according to feature αQ2 or feature αQ3,
A game machine characterized in that the detection information storage means is stored inside a housing (a substrate box to which a sealing seal is attached) in which a trace of opening and closing remains.

  According to the feature αQ4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the housing in which the trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, when the detection information storage means is physically contacted, a trace of opening the case remains. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is altered through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the trace of the housing Become. Therefore, unauthorized alteration of the detection information can be prevented. Since the gaming machines are distributed one after another, various external contacts are made in the process of being distributed, but since the detection information storage means is stored inside the case where the trace of opening and closing remains, the gaming machine Even in the situation where machines are distributed one after another, it is possible to suppress unauthorized alteration of detection information by someone. Further, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics regarding the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to the feature αQ4, the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the game. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Features αQ5]
It is a game machine according to any one of features αQ2 to α4.
A gaming machine comprising: notification means for giving notification when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

  According to the feature αQ5, notification is made when the detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, so that the tester of the gaming machine can easily find a game machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Features αQ6]
The gaming machine according to the feature αQ5,
A game machine characterized in that the notification means gives notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is not included in a predetermined range.

  According to the feature αQ6, since the notification is made when the specific value included in the detection information is not included in the predetermined range, the tester of the gaming machine includes the specific value included in the detection information in the predetermined range. It is possible to easily find gaming machines that are no longer available. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Features αQ7]
The gaming machine according to the feature αQ6,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means determines a mode of notification (the color of the LED lamp) in accordance with the degree of deviation of the specific value from the predetermined range.

  According to the feature αQ7, since the mode of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation from the predetermined range of the specific value, the examiner of the gaming machine determines how much the specific value included in the detection information is from the predetermined range It can be easily grasped if there is a gap.

[Features αQ8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αQ5 to αQ7,
A game machine characterized in that the notification means includes display means for performing a predetermined display as the notification.

  According to the feature αQ8, since the display means for performing the predetermined display as the notification is provided, the examiner of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

  In addition, invention of the said characteristic (alpha) D group-characteristic (alpha) Q group solves the following subjects.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure, control, and presentation for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  In addition to improving the interest of the game, various technical improvements have also been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as detecting and deterring illegal actions by the player and unauthorized modifications to the game machine.

  For example, if the player performs an illegal act (so-called a goto act) or the nail provided on the gaming board of the pachinko gaming machine is improperly bent and remodeled, each entry such as the general winning opening and the starting opening etc. The entering ratio of the game ball to the ball mouth may become different from what was initially assumed, and the performance and the playability assumed for the pachinko gaming machine may be lost. However, finding such fraud was very difficult.

  Such fraud may be performed by the player during business hours of the gaming hall. In addition, after the business hours of the game hall, an unauthorized remodeling may be performed by somebody. Furthermore, unauthorized modifications may be made to the gaming machine being transported prior to being installed in the gaming hall. Furthermore, unauthorized modification may be made to the gaming machine before being shipped to the gaming hall. In addition, there is a possibility that an unauthorized modification may be made before that.

  In view of such circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to detect illegal acts and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines and improve the soundness of gaming.

<Feature αR group>
The feature αR group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourteenth embodiment.

[Feature αR1]
Processing execution means for executing the processing;
Suggesting means for suggesting an amount related to the process to be performed by the process executing means;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
In the first case (in the case of reach (disengagement)), the processing (the result notification suggestion effect) of the amount corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means (the number of numerically reserved display in the fourteenth embodiment) is executed. In spite of the,
In the second case (in the case of a jackpot), execute processing (result notification suggestion effect) corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means (the number of numerically reserved displays in the fourteenth embodiment). A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αR1, in the first case, since the processing of the amount corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed, the player is supposed to execute the processing corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means recognize. However, in the second case, processing corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means is performed. Therefore, by performing processing corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested to the player playing the game while assuming that the processing corresponding to the amount suggested is performed, the player Can be given a surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αR2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αR1,
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
The ball entry means which can enter the game ball which circulates the game area,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the unit special information, when the special information acquired triggered by one entry of the game ball into the ball entry means is taken as unit special information;
A determination unit that determines whether the unit special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
When it is determined that one game cycle is to end the game cycle operation after the game cycle operation for notifying the determination result by the determination means is started, the game cycle operation is started Fluctuation time determination means for determining a fluctuation time which is a time from when the game operation is ended to
Equipped with
The process execution means includes an effect execution means for determining the effect to be performed in the game time based on the determined fluctuation time, and performing the determined effect.
The suggestion means suggest an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be performed,
The effect executing means is
In the first case (in the case of reach (disengagement)), even in the game round, the effect (the result notification suggestion effect) corresponding to the amount (the number of numerically reserved indications) suggested by the suggestion means is executed. Well,
In the second case (in the case of a jackpot), in the game play, to execute an effect (result notification suggestion effect) corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means (number of numerically held display) A game machine that features it.

  According to the feature αR2, in the first case, since the effect corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed in the game session, the player is executed an effect corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means Recognize. However, in the second case, in the game play, an effect corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed. Therefore, by performing an effect corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested to the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect corresponding to the amount suggested is performed, the game Can give surprises to For example, when the amount suggested by the suggestion means is a time (time length) for which the effect is executed, the effect is assumed while the effect of the suggested temporal length is executed Reverse the player's guess and give the player unexpectedness or surprise by ending the game play by executing an effect shorter than the suggested time length for the player watching the game. Can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αR3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αR2,
The suggestion means displays a game number display which is a display showing one game number held or being executed, and displays the game number display in a display mode which suggests an amount correlated with the time of the effect A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature αR3, the game times display is used to suggest an amount correlated with the time of presentation. Since the game times display is displayed while the game times corresponding to the game times display are on hold and in execution, it is executed as the game times from the time when the game times corresponding to the game times display are generated as the hold game times At any time up to the end time, the game times display can be used to make an indication of an amount correlated with the time of presentation, and the degree of temporal freedom to execute the indication can be expanded. For example, when suggesting a certain amount of correlation to the time of the effect performed in the game times for a specific game time, when the game times are held, it indicates that the game times are held. While being able to make a suggestion using a game times display, when the game times are being executed, a suggestion can be made using a game times display that indicates that the game times are being executed. Thus, according to the feature αR3, it is possible to expand the degree of freedom in time for performing the suggestion of the amount correlated with the time of presentation.

[Feature αR4]
A game machine according to the feature αR2 or the feature αR3, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in the one game cycle is the number of predetermined effects (result notification suggestion effect) to be executed in the one game cycle.

  According to the feature αR4, since the amount correlated with the time of the effect performed in one game time is the number of predetermined effects performed in one game time, for example, the specified number of times suggested For the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect will be executed, the predetermined effect of the number of times less than the suggested number is executed to end the game round, thereby reversing the player's inference Can give the player unexpectedness or surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by suggesting "the number of times" as an amount correlated with the time of the rendering executed in one game time, it enables the player to count as compared to the case of suggesting a continuous amount, It is possible to express an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in one game cycle in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

[Feature αR5]
The gaming machine according to the feature αR4,
The effect executing means is
In the first case (in the case of reach (disengagement)), the predetermined effect (result notification suggestion effect) of the number of times corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means (the number of numerically reserved indications) in the game round In spite of executing,
In the second case (in the case of a jackpot), the predetermined effect (effect notification effect) is performed a number of times less than the number corresponding to the amount (the number of numerically reserved displays) suggested by the suggestion means in the game round A gaming machine characterized by performing.

  According to the feature αR5, in the first case, since the predetermined effect of the number of times corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed in the game time, the player responded to the amount suggested by the suggestion means It recognizes that the predetermined | prescribed presentation of the frequency | count is performed. However, in the second case, the gaming machine of the feature αR5 executes a predetermined number of times less than the number of times corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means in the gaming session. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the predetermined effect is performed the number of times corresponding to the suggested amount, the predetermined number of times less than the number corresponding to the suggested amount By performing the effect, it is possible to give a feeling as if the time of the game setting initially set has been shortened, and it is possible to impart unexpectedness.

<Feature αS group>
The feature αS group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourteenth embodiment.

[Feature αS1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
The ball entry means which can enter the game ball which circulates the game area,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the unit special information, when the special information acquired triggered by one entry of the game ball into the ball entry means is taken as unit special information;
A determination unit that determines whether the unit special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
The game cycle operation is ended after the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means being started is regarded as one game cycle, and the time of the effect to be executed in one game cycle A first numerical value for determining first numerical information (first numerical information (X) in the fourteenth embodiment) which is a value corresponding to the presentation time correlation quantity when the correlated quantity is the presentation time correlation quantity. Information determination means,
Second numerical information determination means for determining second numerical information (numerically reserved display number (Y) in the fourteenth embodiment);
Suggesting means (numerical display) indicating the presentation time correlation amount;
Equipped with
The effect executing means is
An effect (result notification suggestion effect) corresponding to the effect time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical information is executed in one game cycle,
The second numerical value information determining means
The second numerical information indicating a value corresponding to the presentation time correlation amount different from the presentation time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical information is determined as the second numerical information
The suggestion means is
Suggesting the presentation time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the second numerical information (displaying numerical hold display in the fourteenth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αS1, the second numerical value information determining means is a second numerical value information indicating a value corresponding to the effect time correlation amount different in amount from the effect time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical value information And the suggestion means suggests a presentation time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the second numerical information. That is, the effect time correlation amount of the effect recognized by the player by the suggestion means is different from the effect time correlation amount of the effect actually executed by the effect execution means. As a result, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect corresponding to the suggested effect time correlation amount is executed in the game round, the effect is different in amount from the suggested effect time correlation amount By executing the effect corresponding to the time correlation amount in the game play, it is possible to reverse the player's guess and to give the player unexpectedness or surprise. For example, when the amount of time correlation shows the length of time of the effect to be executed in one game time, the effect is appreciated while inferring that the effect of temporal length suggested by the suggestion means is executed. It is possible to reverse the player's guess and give the player unexpectedness or surprise by ending the game play by executing an effect shorter than the suggested temporal length for the player who is playing the game. . As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αS2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αS1,
The second numerical value information determining means
In the first case (in the case of reach (disengagement)), the second one indicating a value corresponding to the presentation time correlation amount the same as the presentation time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical information Decide on the numerical information of
In the second case (in the case of a jackpot), the second numerical information indicating a value corresponding to the rendering time correlation amount different from the rendering time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical information It is determined to be a gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature αS2, in the first case, the second numerical information determination means indicates a second value corresponding to the same presentation time correlation amount as the presentation time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical information Determine the numerical information of That is, in the first case, the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means is the same as the effect time correlation amount of the effect actually executed by the effect execution means. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means is the same as the effect time correlation amount of the effect actually executed by the effect execution means. In the case where the player is given such recognition, in the second case, the player's guess can be made by executing an effect corresponding to an effect time correlation amount different from the suggested effect time correlation amount in the game round And give the player a greater surprise and surprise.

[Feature αS3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αS1 or the feature αS2, wherein
In the case where the time from the start of the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means to the end of the game operation is a variation time,
The effect executing means is
The effect to be executed in the one game time is determined based on the effect time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical information and the fluctuation time of the one game time (steps in the fourteenth embodiment) Execute the process of S12503)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αS3, the effect executing means determines the effect to be executed in one game time based on the effect time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical information and the fluctuation time of the one game time Therefore, the processing can be smoothly performed without causing a breakdown in which, for example, the execution time of the effect and the fluctuation time are different between the execution time of the effect actually executed in the game time and the fluctuation time of the game time. It can be done.

[Feature αS4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αS1 to αS3.
When the rendering time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the first numerical value information is X, and the rendering time correlation amount corresponding to the value indicated by the second numerical value information is Y,
The relationship between X and Y is X ≦ Y. A game machine characterized by:

  According to the feature αS4, X ≦ Y. That is, the effect time correlation amount of the effect actually executed by the effect execution means is equal to or less than the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed in the game round, the effect time less than the suggested effect time correlation amount By executing the effect corresponding to the correlation amount in the game, it is possible to reverse the player's guess and to give the player unexpectedness or surprise. Furthermore, it is possible to give a feeling as if the time of game play set initially was shortened.

[Feature αS5]
A game machine according to any one of features αS1 to αS4 comprising
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect time correlation amount is a number of times of a predetermined effect (result notification suggestion effect) executed in one game cycle.

  According to the feature αS5, since the effect time correlation amount is the number of predetermined effects performed in one game cycle, for example, while estimating that the predetermined effect of the number of times suggested by the suggestion means is performed For the player watching the effect, in the actual game play, the predetermined effect of the number of times less than the suggested number is executed to end the game play, thereby reversing the player's guess, the player Can give surprises and surprises. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Also, by suggesting the "number of times" as the presentation time correlation amount, it is possible to allow the player to count compared to the case where the continuous amount is suggested, and the presentation time correlation amount in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize. Can be expressed.

<Feature αT group>
The feature αT group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourteenth embodiment.

[Feature αT1]
Suggestion means (numerical suspension display in the fourteenth embodiment) suggesting an amount correlated with the length of time until the predetermined processing (notification of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery) in the game is performed,
Before the time length corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means elapses (as a result of the number of times corresponding to the number of numerically held displays the time length for which the notification suggestion effect is executed elapses Processing execution means for executing the predetermined processing (informing the lottery result of the jackpot lottery)
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature αT1, the player can increase the time length suggested by the suggestion means by suggesting an amount correlated with the length of time until the suggestion means executes the predetermined processing in the game. Based on the correlated amount, the length of time until predetermined processing in the game is executed is estimated. On the other hand, the process execution means executes the predetermined process before the time length corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means elapses. Therefore, for the player who is playing the game while assuming that the predetermined processing in the game is to be executed after the time corresponding to the amount correlated with the temporal length suggested by the suggestion means To reverse the player's guess and to give the player unexpectedness or surprise by executing the predetermined processing before the time length corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means elapses. Can.

[Feature αT2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αT1,
The time length corresponding to the difference between the time length corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means and the time length until the process execution means executes the predetermined process is defined as the remaining time In case,
The process execution means reports information related to the predetermined process performed in the remaining time (performs promotion effect of the 14th embodiment <aspect 2>)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αT2, since information relating to the executed predetermined process is notified to the remaining time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention to the game during the remaining time. Also, although the length of time corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means and the length of time until the processing execution means executes the predetermined processing are different, the remaining time which is the difference is related to the predetermined processing Since the information to be provided is complemented as the time for notifying, it is possible to set in advance the temporal length corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means in the processing in the gaming machine. That is, in order to set in advance the temporal length corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means, and to notify the information concerning the time length and the predetermined process until the process execution means actually executes the predetermined process By setting the total time with the temporal length of the time to be the same as the temporal length corresponding to the amount suggested by the preset suggestion means, there is no processing-related time-related failure. The process can be performed smoothly.

[Feature αT3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αT2,
A game machine characterized in that the information related to the predetermined processing notified is information concerning a benefit given to a player.

  According to the feature αT3, since the information related to the predetermined processing in the notified game is the information on the benefit given to the player, the remaining time can be used to improve the player's sense of expectation.

<Feature αU group>
The feature αU group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourteenth embodiment.

[Feature αU1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
The ball entry means which can enter the game ball which circulates the game area,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the unit special information, when the special information acquired triggered by one entry of the game ball into the ball entry means is taken as unit special information;
A determination unit that determines whether the unit special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
If it is assumed that one game cycle is to end the game cycle operation after the game cycle operation to notify the result of the determination by the determination means is started, one time being held or being executed Game times display means for displaying a game times display which is a display showing game times;
A gaming machine comprising
The game times display means is
The game number display corresponding to the one game number of times is displayed in a mode suggesting a plurality of types of information (numerical suspension display Dm11a to Dm11c in the fourteenth embodiment <aspect 6>: FIG. 260)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αU1, since the game times display means displays the game times display corresponding to one game time in a mode that suggests information of a plurality of types, for the player who recognizes the game times display Thus, various guesses can be made regarding the game times corresponding to the game times display. As a result, compared with the conventional game times display, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature αU2]
It is a game machine according to feature αU1,
Equipped with presentation execution means for performing presentation,
In the case where an amount correlated with the time of effect to be executed in one game time is used as the effect time correlation amount,
The game times display means is
Information on the possibility that at least the unit special information satisfies the predetermined condition (expected degree of winning a big hit lottery) as the plurality of types of information, and information indicating the presentation time correlation amount The game time display is displayed in the mode which suggests, The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature αU2, the game times display means suggests at least information on the possibility that the unit special information satisfies the predetermined condition and information indicating the presentation time correlation amount as the plurality of types of information. Since the game times display is displayed in the aspect, it is suggested that the player who recognizes the game times display can be given a sense of expectation for the determination result in the game times corresponding to the game times display. It can be inferred that an effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount will be performed, and can provide an expectation for an effect to be performed in the game round.

[Feature αU3]
The gaming machine according to the feature αU2,
The effect executing means is
In the one game time, the effect (result notification suggestion effect) corresponding to the effect time correlation amount different in amount from the effect time correlation amount (the number of the numerical reserve display) suggested by the game time display means A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature αU3, the effect executing means executes the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount different in amount from the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game number display means in one game turn. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game times display means is performed, the amount different from the suggested effect time correlation amount to the player watching the effect By executing the corresponding effect, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. For example, if the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game times display means is the time (time length) for which the effect is executed, the effect of the suggested time length is executed For the player watching the effect while guessing, by performing the effect shorter than the suggested temporal length and ending the game round, the player's guess is reversed and the player is surprised And can give surprises. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αU4]
It is a game machine according to feature αU3, wherein the effect time correlation amount is the number of times of a predetermined effect performed in the one game cycle.

  According to the feature αU4, since the effect time correlation amount is the number of predetermined effects to be executed in one game, for example, the effect is appreciated while inferring that the predetermined effect of the suggested number is executed The player's guess may be reversed by giving predetermined surprises or surprises to the player who is performing the predetermined number of times less than the suggested number of times and ending the game play. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Also, by suggesting the "number of times" as the presentation time correlation amount, it is possible to allow the player to count compared to the case where the continuous amount is suggested, and the presentation time correlation amount in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize. Can be expressed.

<Feature αV group>
The feature αV group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourteenth embodiment.

[Feature αV1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
The ball entry means which can enter the game ball which circulates the game area,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the unit special information, when the special information acquired triggered by one entry of the game ball into the ball entry means is taken as unit special information;
A determination unit that determines whether the unit special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
If it is assumed that one game cycle is to end the game cycle operation after the game cycle operation to notify the result of the determination by the determination means is started, one time being held or being executed Game times display means for displaying a game times display which is a display showing game times;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
In the case where an amount correlated with the time of effect to be executed in one game time is used as the effect time correlation amount,
The game times display means is
A game machine characterized by displaying the game times display in a display mode (numerically hold display in the fourteenth embodiment) indicating the effect time correlation amount.

  According to the feature αV1, since the game times display means displays the game times display in a display mode that suggests the effect time correlation amount, the effect time correlation suggested for the player who recognizes the game times display It can be inferred that the effect corresponding to the amount will be executed, and can give an expectation for the effect to be executed in the game round.

[Feature αV2]
It is a gaming machine described in the feature αV1,
The effect executing means is
In the one game time, the effect (result notification suggestion effect) corresponding to the effect time correlation amount different in amount from the effect time correlation amount (the number of numerical suspension display) suggested by the game time display means A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature αV2, the effect executing means executes the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount different in amount from the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game number display means in one game turn. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game times display means is performed, the amount different from the suggested effect time correlation amount to the player watching the effect By executing the corresponding effect, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. For example, if the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game times display means is the time (time length) for which the effect is executed, the effect of the suggested time length is executed For the player watching the effect while guessing, by performing the effect shorter than the suggested temporal length and ending the game round, the player's guess is reversed and the player is surprised And can give surprises. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αV3]
It is a game machine according to feature αV1 or feature αV2,
The effect executing means is
In the first case (in the case of reach (disengagement)), in the one game turn, the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount having the same amount as the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game effect display means is executed And
In the second case (in the case of a jackpot), in the one game round, the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount different in amount from the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game time display means is executed. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αV 3, in the first case, the player performs an effect corresponding to an effect time correlation amount the same as the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game time display means in one game turn, so that the player can It recognizes that an effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game number display means is executed. However, in the second case, in the game session, an effect corresponding to an effect time correlation amount different in amount from the effect time correlation amount suggested by the game effect display means is executed. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect corresponding to the suggested effect time correlation amount is executed, the effect time correlation amount different in amount from the suggested effect time correlation amount By executing the effect corresponding to, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. For example, when the presentation time correlation amount suggested by the game times display means is the time (the time length) for which the presentation is performed, the presentation of the suggested temporal length is performed For the player watching the effect while guessing, by performing the effect shorter than the suggested temporal length and ending the game round, the player's guess is reversed and the player is surprised And can give surprises. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αV4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αV1 to αV3.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the effect time correlation amount is a number of times of a predetermined effect (result notification suggestion effect) executed in the one game run.

  According to the feature αV4, since the effect time correlation amount is the number of predetermined effects performed in one game turn, it is estimated that the predetermined effect of the number of times suggested by the game number display means is executed, for example For the player watching the effect while executing the predetermined number of times less than the suggested number of times, by ending the game round, the player's guess is reversed, the player is surprised It can give surprises. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Also, by suggesting the "number of times" as the presentation time correlation amount, it is possible to allow the player to count compared to the case where the continuous amount is suggested, and the presentation time correlation amount in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize. Can be expressed.

<Feature αW group>
The feature αW group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourteenth embodiment.

[Feature α W1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
The ball entry means which can enter the game ball which circulates the game area,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the unit special information, when the special information acquired triggered by one entry of the game ball into the ball entry means is taken as unit special information;
A determination unit that determines whether the unit special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
An effect to be executed in one game cycle when it is assumed that the game cycle operation is ended after the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started. Suggesting means to indicate the presentation time correlation amount, which is an amount correlated with the time of
A gaming machine comprising
The suggestion means is
The unit special information satisfies the predetermined condition by using the display indicating the temporal part indicated by the displayed presentation time correlation amount while displaying the presentation time correlation amount to be suggested in a predetermined display mode. Suggest information related to the possibility (FIG. 261: suggest the expectation information using the numerical hold indication of some of the numerical hold indications Dm11a to Dm11c in the fourteenth embodiment <aspect 7>)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αW1, since the suggestion means suggests the presentation time correlation amount, the player is made to guess that the presentation corresponding to the suggested presentation time correlation amount is to be executed, and is executed in the game round Can give a sense of expectation for the In addition, since the suggestion means suggests information about the possibility that the unit special information satisfies the predetermined condition, using a part of the time indicated by the presentation time correlation amount, the presentation is executed in the game round, the presentation time correlation When reaching or reaching a time corresponding to the portion of the time indicated by the amount, it is possible to give the player an expectation that some notification or suggestion regarding the unit special information may be given. .

[Feature αW2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αW1,
The effect executing means is
In the first case, in the game session, although the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed,
In the second case, in the game session, an effect corresponding to an amount different from the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed.

  According to the feature αW2, in the first case, since the effect corresponding to the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggesting means is executed in the game round, the player responds to the amount suggested by the suggesting means Recognize that will be executed. However, in the second case, in the game session, an effect corresponding to an amount different from the effect time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect corresponding to the suggested effect time correlation amount is executed, the effect corresponding to an amount different from the suggested effect time correlation amount Execution can give the player unexpectedness. For example, in the case where the presentation time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means is the time for which the presentation is to be carried out (the length of time), it is presumed that the presentation of the suggested temporal length is carried out For the player who is watching the game while performing the game, the game is ended by executing the game shorter than the suggested time length, thereby reversing the player's guess, and the player is surprised or surprised Can be given. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αW3]
A game machine according to any one of the features αW1 and αW2, wherein
The effect time correlation amount is the number of times a predetermined effect is executed in one game cycle,
The suggestion means is
While suggesting the presentation time correlation amount by displaying a predetermined number of images corresponding to the number of times of execution of the predetermined presentation in the one game time, execution of the predetermined presentation indicated by the displayed presentation time correlation amount The information regarding the possibility that the unit special information satisfies the predetermined condition is suggested using one or a plurality of specific images in the predetermined images corresponding to the number of times (FIG. 261: 14 Suggesting the degree of expectation information by using some of the numerical holding displays in the numerical holding displays Dm11a to Dm11c in the 14th embodiment <Aspect 7>)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature αW3, the suggestion means visually recognizes the predetermined time image because it indicates the presentation time correlation amount by displaying a predetermined number of images corresponding to the number of times the predetermined effect is executed in one game cycle It is possible to make the player guess the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect in the game time, and to give an expectation for the effect to be performed in the game time. In addition, the suggestion means uses the one or more specific images in the number of predetermined images corresponding to the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect indicated by the displayed presentation time correlation amount, and the unit special information is predetermined. Since information on the possibility of meeting the condition is suggested, when the number of times of execution of a predetermined effect reaches or reaches the number of times of execution corresponding to the specific image, some notification or suggestion regarding unit special information is given. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that he or she will be Furthermore, when the gaming machine described in the feature αW3 includes the configuration of the feature αW2, in the second case described in the feature αW2, when the number of times of execution of the predetermined effect reaches the number of times of execution corresponding to the particular image Even if the player is given an expectation that some notification or suggestion regarding unit special information will be given when or reaches the predetermined time, the predetermined time indicated by the presentation time correlation amount suggested by the suggestion means A predetermined effect of the number of times of execution different from the number of times of effect execution of may be performed. As a result, for the player who has visually recognized the presentation time correlation amount displayed by the suggestion means, a sense of urgency such as whether or not a predetermined effect is executed until the number of times of execution corresponding to the specific image is reached When the predetermined effect is performed until the number of times of execution corresponding to the specific image is reached, an expectation is given that some notification or suggestion regarding unit special information may be given while being given. That is, by displaying such an effect time correlation amount, the player can be made to make an estimation with respect to multistage changes in the game, and further, whether the game is executed according to the contents thus estimated Can give the player a sense of tension and a sense of expectation.

[Feature αW4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αW1 to αW3
The suggestion means displays a game number display which is a display showing one game number held or being executed, and displays the game number display in a display mode that suggests the presentation time correlation amount. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature αW4, the game time display is used to suggest an effect time correlation amount. Since the game times display is displayed while the game times corresponding to the game times display are on hold and in execution, it is executed as the game times from the time when the game times corresponding to the game times display are generated as the hold game times The game time display can be used to indicate the presentation time correlation amount at any timing up to the end time, and the degree of freedom in time to execute the suggestion can be expanded. For example, when suggesting a correlation amount of effect time in the game times for a specific game time, if the game times are held, using the game times display indicating that the game times are held. While being able to make a suggestion, when the game time is being executed, a suggestion can be made using a game time indication indicating that the game time is being performed. Thus, according to the feature αW4, it is possible to widen the degree of temporal freedom for executing the suggestion.

<Feature αX group>
The feature αX group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourteenth embodiment.

[Feature αX1]
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
The ball entry means which can enter the game ball which circulates the game area,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the unit special information, when the special information acquired triggered by one entry of the game ball into the ball entry means is taken as unit special information;
A determination unit that determines whether the unit special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
When it is determined that one game cycle is to end the game cycle operation after the game cycle operation for notifying the determination result by the determination means is started, the game cycle operation is started Fluctuation time determination means for determining a fluctuation time which is a time from when the game operation is ended to
An effect executing means for determining the effect to be executed in the game time based on the determined fluctuation time, and executing the determined effect.
Suggesting means (numeric hold display in the fourteenth embodiment) indicating an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in one game time;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
In the first case (in the case of reach (disengagement)), even in the game round, the effect (the result notification suggestion effect) corresponding to the amount (the number of numerically reserved indications) suggested by the suggestion means is executed. Well,
In the second case (in the case of a jackpot), in the game play, to execute an effect (result notification suggestion effect) corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means (number of numerically held display) A game machine that features it.

  According to the feature αX1, in the first case, since the effect corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed in the game round, the player is executed an effect corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means Recognize. However, in the second case, in the game play, an effect corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed. Therefore, by performing an effect corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested to the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect corresponding to the amount suggested is performed, the game Can give surprises to For example, when the amount suggested by the suggestion means is a time (time length) for which the effect is executed, the effect is assumed while the effect of the suggested temporal length is executed Reverse the player's guess and give the player unexpectedness or surprise by ending the game play by executing an effect shorter than the suggested time length for the player watching the game. Can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αX2]
The gaming machine according to the feature αX1,
The suggestion means displays a game number display which is a display showing one game number held or being executed, and displays the game number display in a display mode which suggests an amount correlated with the time of the effect A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature αX2, the game times display is used to suggest an amount correlated with the time of presentation. Since the game times display is displayed while the game times corresponding to the game times display are on hold and in execution, it is executed as the game times from the time when the game times corresponding to the game times display are generated as the hold game times At any time up to the end time, the game times display can be used to make an indication of an amount correlated with the time of presentation, and the degree of temporal freedom to execute the indication can be expanded. For example, when suggesting a certain amount of correlation to the time of the effect performed in the game times for a specific game time, when the game times are held, it indicates that the game times are held. While being able to make a suggestion using a game times display, when the game times are being executed, a suggestion can be made using a game times display that indicates that the game times are being executed. Thus, according to the feature αX2, it is possible to broaden the degree of freedom in time for performing the suggestion of the amount correlated with the time of presentation.

[Feature αX3]
It is a game machine according to feature αX1 or feature αX2,
A game machine characterized in that the amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in the one game cycle is the number of predetermined effects (result notification suggestion effect) to be executed in the one game cycle.

  According to the feature αX3, since the amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in one game time is the number of predetermined effects to be executed in one game time, for example, the predetermined number of times suggested For the player watching the effect while assuming that the effect will be executed, the predetermined effect of the number of times less than the suggested number is executed to end the game round, thereby reversing the player's inference Can give the player unexpectedness or surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, by suggesting "the number of times" as an amount correlated with the time of the rendering executed in one game time, it enables the player to count as compared to the case of suggesting a continuous amount, It is possible to express an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in one game cycle in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

[Feature αX4]
The gaming machine according to the feature αX3
The effect executing means is
In the first case (in the case of reach (disengagement)), the predetermined effect (result notification suggestion effect) of the number of times corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means (the number of numerically reserved indications) in the game round In spite of executing,
In the second case (in the case of a jackpot), the predetermined effect (effect notification effect) is performed a number of times less than the number corresponding to the amount (the number of numerically reserved displays) suggested by the suggestion means in the game round A gaming machine characterized by performing.

  According to the feature αX4, in the first case, since the predetermined effect of the number of times corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed in the game time, the player responded to the amount suggested by the suggestion means It recognizes that the predetermined | prescribed presentation of the frequency | count is performed. However, in the second case, the gaming machine of the feature αX4 executes a predetermined number of times less than the number of times corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means in the gaming session. Therefore, for the player watching the effect while assuming that the predetermined effect is performed the number of times corresponding to the suggested amount, the predetermined number of times less than the number corresponding to the suggested amount By performing the effect, it is possible to give a feeling as if the time of the game setting initially set has been shortened, and it is possible to impart unexpectedness.

  In addition, invention of the said characteristic (alpha) R group-characteristic (alpha) X group solves the following subjects.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure, control, and presentation for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming.

  Note that a configuration may be adopted in which one or more configurations included in the feature A group to the feature Z group and the feature αA group to the feature αX group are combined as appropriate. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

Pachinko game machine: Launching means for launching game balls toward the game area based on the player's shooting operation, and starting ball entry provided in the game area and capable of entering the game balls flowing down the game area An information acquisition unit for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball storage unit;
A game machine comprising: acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the starting ball storage portion.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modifications, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in the respective forms described in the section of the summary of the invention, and the technical features in the modified examples are for solving some or all of the problems described above, or Replacements or combinations can be made as appropriate to achieve part or all of the effects. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in the present specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine main body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window portion 19: Glass unit 20: Upper plate 21: Lower plate 22: Discharge port 23: Lever 24: Directional operation button 25: Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... weight button 25c ... variable resistor 26 ... game ball launch button 30 ... game board 31 ... induction rail 31a ... inner rail section 31b ... outer rail section 32 ... General winning opening 33 ... 1st starting opening 34 ... 2nd starting opening 34a ... electric combination 34b ... electric combination driving part 35 ... through gate 36 ... variable winning Device 36a: large winning opening 36b: opening and closing door 36c: variable winning drive unit 37: special drawing unit 37a: first result display unit (first symbol display unit)
37b second result display unit (second symbol display unit)
37c ... 1st hold display section 37d ... 2nd hold display section 38 ... common drawing unit 39 ... round display section 40 ... variable display unit 41 ... symbol display device 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... display area 41aS ... display area 42 ... nail 43 ... out port 45 ... main display section 46 ... speaker 47 ... various lamps 48 ... V winning opening 48a: opening and closing door 48b: opening and closing door drive unit 51: first control unit 52: second control unit 53: third control unit 54: tank 55: tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main control unit 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main side MPU
62x ... Main CPU
63: Main side ROM
64: Main RAM
64x: Flash memory 63a: Success table storage area 63b: Distribution table storage area 63c: Reach determination table storage area 63d: Fluctuation time table storage area 63e: Stop result table storage Area 63f ... Command information storage area 64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Hold information storage area 64c ... Electric part holding area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 64f. .. First judgment processing result storage area 67a ... Various detection sensors 70 ... Dispensing control device 71 ... Dispensing device 80 ... Firing control device 81 ... Game ball firing mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... sound emission control device 91 ... sound emission control board 92 ... sound light side MPU
93: Sound and light side ROM
93a ... effect pattern table storage area 93b ... variation display pattern table storage area 94 ... sound light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 96 ... RTC
100: Display control device 101: Display control board 102: Display side MPU
103: Program ROM
104 ... work RAM
106: Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
300 ... game history management chip 302 ... buffer 304 ... register 306 ... memory for award ball number data storage 307 ... memory for execution condition storage 307 a ... memory for storage execution condition storage 308 ... CPU
309 ... A memory for storing operation results 309 a ... A memory for storing the number of balls 309 b ... A memory for storing information for balls 320 ... A tester 321 ... CPU
328: Display unit 329: Connection cable PA: Game area PC: Winning counter area AE: Execution area Ra: First holding area Rb: Second holding area Dm11 to Dm14 , Dm21 to Dm24 ... pending display Sync 1 ... first synchronization display section Sync 2 ... second synchronization display section MA ... main display area SA1 ... first sub display area SA2 ... second sub Display area Ds1 ... 1st hold display area Ds 2 ... 2nd hold display area

Claims (5)

Processing execution means for executing the processing;
Suggesting means for suggesting an amount related to the process to be performed by the process executing means;
A gaming machine comprising
The process execution means is
In the first case, despite performing the amount of processing corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggesting means,
In the second case, the game machine executes processing corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
Launch means for launching game balls toward the game area;
The ball entry means which can enter the game ball which circulates the game area,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry means;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the unit special information, when the special information acquired triggered by one entry of the game ball into the ball entry means is taken as unit special information;
A determination unit that determines whether the unit special information stored by the acquired information storage unit satisfies a predetermined condition;
When it is determined that one game cycle is to end the game cycle operation after the game cycle operation for notifying the determination result by the determination means is started, the game cycle operation is started Fluctuation time determination means for determining a fluctuation time which is a time from when the game operation is ended to
Equipped with
The process execution means includes an effect execution means for determining the effect to be performed in the game time based on the determined fluctuation time, and performing the determined effect.
The suggestion means suggest an amount correlated with the time of the effect to be performed,
The effect executing means is
In the first case, in the game session, although the effect corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed,
In the second case, in the game session, a game corresponding to an amount different from the amount suggested by the suggestion means is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein
The suggestion means displays a game number display which is a display showing one game number held or being executed, and displays the game number display in a display mode which suggests an amount correlated with the time of the effect A gaming machine characterized by A gaming machine according to claim 2 or claim 3, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the amount correlated with the time of the effect to be executed in the one game play is the number of predetermined effects to be executed in the one game play. It is a game machine according to claim 4, and
The effect executing means is
In the first case, in spite of performing the predetermined effect the number of times corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means in the game session,
In the second case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed a number of times less than the number corresponding to the amount suggested by the suggestion means in the game session.